3040592MM 2.0-1 Manual de Motor

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TWINNED TURBOSHAFT ENGINE

Model(s)
PT6T-3D/PT6T-3DE/PT6T-3DF
Manual Part No. 3040592

1 JUNE 1993
The contents of this manual have been examined and found acceptable to the Minister in meeting
the requirements of an Engine Maintenance Manual for the Pratt & Whitney Canada PT6T-3D/-3DE/-
3DF engines, as required by the Canadian Airworthiness Manual, Chapter 533.4 ‘‘Instructions for
Continued Airworthiness’’.
WARNING - PROPRIETARY RIGHTS & EXPORT CONTROLS NOTICE
This manual contains proprietary information of Pratt & Whitney Canada Corp. (″P&WC″), which P&WC provides in
confidence and solely for the purposes of supporting engine certification and providing applicable information regarding
the proper use, maintenance, inspection, repair, servicing and parts application of P&WC products and services, as
directed therein. Neither this manual nor any information in it may be disclosed to others, or used for any other
purpose, including, without limitation, to design, create, develop, reproduce, manufacture or derive any design, part,
product, material, process, modification, configuration change or repair, or obtain FAA or other government approval to
do so. Possession and use of this manual is also subject to the restrictions set out in P&WC’s Technical Data
Agreement (a copy of which may be obtained by contacting P&WC Technical Publications). The contents of this
manual may be subject to export control laws. Unauthorized export or re-export of the manual, or parts thereof, is
prohibited. By accepting and possessing this manual, you agree to be bound by the foregoing terms.
If a Government agency or department intends to disclose any information, written notice should be given to:
VP - Legal Services, Pratt & Whitney Canada Corp., 1000 Marie-Victorin (01BE5), Longueuil, Quebec J4G 1A1.
PRATT & WHITNEY CANADA

1000 Marie-Victorin, Longueuil, Quebec, Canada J4G 1A1
Jul 18/2016
© 1993 Pratt & Whitney Canada Corp.
PRINTED IN CANADA
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MANUAL PART NO. 3040592
Export Control Classification
(X) if Applicable
Contains no Technical Data ()
Not Subject to the EAR pursuant to 15 CFR 734.7(a)(1) or Not ()
Subject to the ITAR pursuant to 22 CFR 120.11 (NSR)
Jurisdiction and Location Regulations
Classification based on
EAR ITAR
Physical Location of the
Item. Outside US* NSR NSR
* Additionally, refer to the U.S. 9E991 NSR
classification under the local
EIPA (ECL) DPA (CG)
export regime where the
item is located, as provided Canada NSR No
in the grid.
Pratt & Whitney Canada Corp.
1000, Marie-Victorin
Longueuil, Québec, Canada J4G 1A1
Tél. 450-677-9411
July 19, 2016
REVISION TRANSMITTAL SHEET
TO: Holders of the Pratt & Whitney Canada Maintenance Manual for PT6T-3D/-3DE/-3DF
Engines, Manual Part No. 3040592.
SUBJECT: Revision No. 31, dated Jul 18/2016
Please insert the attached Revision No. 31 pages into your copy of the PT6T-3D/-3DE/-3DF
Maintenance Manual. Remove and destroy superseded pages.
Extreme care should be exercised in updating your copy of the manual. To ensure that you do not
inadvertently discard pages that should be retained, the manual should be updated in accordance with
the Lists of Effective Pages.
Pages supplied with the new date and revision bars but no visible change may contain coding
changes transparent to the user and should be inserted as part of the revision.
Please add Revision No. 31 to the Record of Revisions.
Any discrepancies, problems or suggestions regarding this revision should be forwarded in writing
using the Pratt & Whitney Canada Customer Feedback Sheet (RSVP), and directed to:

1000 Marie-Victorin
Longueuil, Québec
Canada J4G 1A1
Attention: Manager, Technical Publications (05MS1)

Email: customer.service@pwc.ca
Fax: (450) 468-7688
Customer Feedback Sheets are contained with new manuals and each subsequent revision. You
may also submit your feedback via our on-line RSVP form available at:
www.pwc.ca/en/3_0/3_0_6/3_0_6_5_7.asp.
Page 1
HIGHLIGHTS Jul 18/2016
PT6T-3D/-3DE/-3DF MAINTENANCE MANUAL

REVISION NO. 31 HIGHLIGHTS
CH/SE/SU Description of Change
Title Page The title page has been revised to update the export controls
classification table.
Service Bulletin List Service Bulletin list has been updated to revise SB5003R43
to SB5003R44.
Introduction Abbreviations and Symbols
The abbreviation list has been updated to add lbf.in.
Special Tools, Fixtures and Fixtures and Equipment
Equipment
The special equipment list has been updated to delete
Sonac Model S-2 electrosonic cleaning tank.
Consumable Materials The consumable materials list has been updated to add
solvent (PWC11-074).
70-00-00 Material Specifications
Maintenance Practices
The filter bypass valve assembly spring and pressure
regulating valve spring has been added for the AMS5688 in
the materiel specification table.
71-00-00 Pressure Test of Fuel Control Pneumatic System
Testing
The procedure for pressure test of fuel control pneumatic
system has been revised.
Maximum Ng and Manual-Automatic Interconnect Linkage
Adjustment
The graphic for the adjustment of the automatic fuel control
arm in the ‘‘Max. stop adjuster’’ and ‘‘Part power trim stop’’
positions has been revised.
72-00-00 Procedure
Fault Isolation
The fault isolation chart for power section torques unequal
has been revised.
The fault isolation chart for high RGB oil system pressure
has been revised.
72-00-00 General
Inspection
The engine flight hour definition and long-term storage
condition have been added in the engine general inspection
procedure.
Periodic Inspections
The table for engine periodic inspection has been revised to
add instruction to check the oil mist hole for blockage.
The periodic inspection for AFCU has been revised to delete
the 3 years inspection requirement.
Overspeed
Page 2

The special condition inspection requirement for power
turbine overspeed procedure has been revised.
Oil Systems - Unusual Conditions
The power section or RGB oil temperature has been revised
in the oil systems unusual conditions procedure.
Aircraft Flown Through Volcanic Ash or Smoke
The inspection requirements for aircrafts flown through
volcanic ash or smoke has been revised.
Compressor Turbine Disk Assembly
The 0.005 in. blade protrusion on either side of disk has
been revised to 0.010 in. in the compressor turbine disk
assembly inspection procedure.
72-00-00 Compressor Wash
Cleaning
The instruction for engine ground idle run has been revised
in the desalination wash, performance recovery wash and
compressor turbine wash.
73-10-01 Repair
The procedure for repair of the fuel heater thermal element
has been deleted.
73-10-05 Nozzle Functional Check
The functional test procedure to check the streakiness of the
fuel nozzle has been revised to add the rejection criteria for
fuel nozzles that show streaks more than a total of 10% of
total fuel spray.
73-10-07 Fixtures-and-equipment
The fixtures, equipment and supplier tools list has been
updated to delete Sonac Model S-2 electrosonic cleaning
tank.
P3 Filter Element, Electrosonic Cleaning
The electrosonic cleaning procedure of P3 filter element has
been revised to delete Sonac Model S-2 electrosonic
cleaning tank.
73-10-08 Adjustment/Test Pg Pneumatic Tubes
The procedure of Pg tube for Post-SB5458 condition has
been added in the adjustment/test Pg pneumatic tubes.
73-20-02 Depreservation of AFCU - Reconditioning after Storage
The procedure for depreservation of AFCU (recording after
storage) has been revised to delete the fuel control units
shipping address.
Page 3

79-20-02 Consumables
The consumable materials list has been updated to add
solvent (PWC11-074).
The consumable materials list has been updated to add
isopropyl alcohol (PWC11-014).
Fixtures-and-equipment
The fixtures, equipment and supplier tools list has been
updated to delete Sonac Model S-2 electrosonic cleaning
tank.
Cleaning of Filter Elements
The cleaning procedure of filter elements has been revised
to add isopropyl alcohol (PWC11-014) and petroleum solvent
(PWC11-027).
The cleaning procedure of filter elements has been revised
to add solvent (PWC11-074).
Page 4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RECORD OF REVISIONS
REV ISSUE DATE REV ISSUE DATE

BY BY
NO. DATE INSERTED NO. DATE INSERTED
1 Feb 01/94 P&WC 30 Nov 23/2015 P&WC
2 May 01/94 P&WC 31 Jul 18/2016 AUG 1, 2016 ATP/RLL
P&WC
3 Feb 01/95 P&WC
4 Nov 01/95 P&WC
5 Feb 06/96 P&WC
6 Aug 12/96 P&WC
7 Feb 28/97 P&WC
8 Nov 14/97 P&WC
9 Jul 24/98 P&WC
10 Feb 19/99 P&WC
11 Aug 20/99 P&WC
12 Feb 18/2000 P&WC
13 Mar 09/2001 P&WC
14 Sep 07/2001 P&WC
15 Mar 22/2002 P&WC
16 Sep 06/2002 P&WC
17 Dec 13/2002 P&WC
18 Oct 24/2003 P&WC
19 Jan 07/2005 P&WC
20 Jun 17/2005 P&WC
21 Oct 27/2006 P&WC
22 Feb 01/2008 P&WC
23 Sep 19/2008 P&WC
24 Jun 05/2009 P&WC
25 Jun 18/2010 P&WC
26 Nov 16/2012 P&WC
27 Dec 02/2013 P&WC
28 Jul 28/2014 P&WC
29 Jan 26/2015 P&WC
P&WC Proprietary Information. Subject to the restriction on the title page.

The export control classification with respect to this document is contained on the back of the title page.
RECORD OF REVISIONS Jun 01/93

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RECORD OF TEMPORARY REVISIONS
TR. PAGE ISSUE INSERTED DATE REMOVED

NO. CH/SE/SU NO. DATE BY REMOVED BY
RECORD OF TRs Jun 01/93

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
CHAPTER
SECTION PAGE DATE
Title Page Jul 18/2016
Record of Revisions Jun 01/93
Record of Temporary Jun 01/93

Revisions
LEP 1 Jul 18/2016

2 blank Jul 18/2016
List of Chapter/ 1 Nov 16/2012

Section/Subjects 2 Nov 16/2012
3 Nov 16/2012
4 blank Nov 16/2012
Temporary 1 Jan 26/2015

Revision Index 2 Jan 26/2015
3 Jan 26/2015
4 blank Jan 26/2015
Service Bulletin 1 Jul 18/2016

List 2 Jul 18/2016
3 Jul 18/2016
4 Jul 18/2016

Page 1/2
FRONT MATTER LEP Jul 18/2016
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LIST OF CHAPTER/SECTION/SUBJECTS
CHAPTER/SECTION/SUBJECT TITLE
INTRODUCTION Introduction
AIRWORTHINESS LIMITATIONS Airworthiness Limitations
70-00 Standard Practices
70-00-00 Standard Practices
71-00 Power Plant
71-00-00 Power Plant

72-00 Engine
72-00-00 Engine
72-00-01 Power Section
72-10 Reduction Gearbox
72-10-00 Reduction Gearbox
72-20 Air Inlet Section

72-20-00 Air Inlet Section
72-30 Compressor Section
72-30-00 Compressor Section

72-30-04 Gas Generator Case
72-30-05 Compressor Rotor
72-40 Combustion Section
72-40-00 Combustion Section

72-40-01 Combustion Chamber Liner
72-50 Turbine Section
72-50-00 Turbine Section

72-50-01 Compressor Turbine Vane Ring
72-50-02 Compressor Turbine Disk Assembly
72-50-03 Power Turbine Stator Assembly
72-50-04 Power Turbine Disk Assembly

Page 1
LIST OF CHAP/SECT/SUBJ Nov 16/2012
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
72-60 Accessory Gearbox
72-60-00 Accessory Gearbox

73-00 Engine Fuel and Control
73-00-00 Engine Fuel and Control
73-10 Engine Fuel and Control
73-10-01 Oil-to-Fuel Heater
73-10-02 Fuel Pump
73-10-03 Fuel Surge Accumulator
73-10-04 Flow Divider and Dump Valve
73-10-05 Fuel Manifold Adapters
73-10-06 Fuel Drain Valves
73-10-07 P3 Air Filter
73-10-08 P3/Pg Pneumatic Tubes
73-20 Fuel Distribution

73-20-01 Manual Fuel Control Unit (MFCU)
73-20-02 Automatic Fuel Control Unit (AFCU)
73-20-03 Pg Accumulator/Sealing Cap
73-20-04 Power Turbine (Nf) Governor
73-20-06 Torque Limiter
73-20-07 Py Accumulator
74-00 Ignition
74-00-00 Ignition
74-10 Ignition
74-10-00 Ignition Exciter
74-20 Ignition Distribution

74-20-00 Igniters and Ignition Cables
75-00 Air

Page 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
75-00-00 Air System
75-30 Air
75-30-00 Compressor Bleed Valve
77-00 Engine Indicating
77-00-00 Engine Indicating
77-20 Temperature
77-20-01 T5 Temperature Sensing System
79-00 Oil
79-00-00 Oil
79-20 Oil Distribution
79-20-02 Oil Filters
79-20-03 Oil Filter Bypass Valve
79-20-04 Check and Regulating Valve
79-20-05 Oil Pressure Adjustment Valve
79-20-06 Oil Scavenge and Pressure Tubes
79-30 Oil Indicating
79-30-01 Magnetic Chip Detectors

Page 3/4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TEMPORARY REVISION INDEX
T.R. No. Filed Adjacent to T.R. Status
70-1 70-00-00, page 224 Incorporated at Rev. No. 18

Standard Practices - Maintenance
Procedures
71-1 71-00-00, page 508
Power Plant - Adjustment/Test Incorporated at Rev. No. 26
72-1 72-00-00, page 118
Engine - Description and Operation Incorporated at Rev. No. 8
72-2 72-00-00, page 602
Engine- Inspection/Check Incorporated at Rev. No. 8
72-3 72-00-00, page 619
Engine - Inspection/Check Incorporated at Rev. No. 8
72-4 72-00-00, page 605
72-5 72-00-00, page 633
72-6 72-10-04, page 201
Oil Filters - Maintenance Practices Incorporated at Rev. No. 9
72-7 72-00-00, page 302
Engine - Servicing Incorporated at Rev. No. 9
72-8 72-00-00, page 303
72-9 72-00-00, page 605
72-10 72-00-00, page 605
72-11 72-00-00, page 157
Engine - Fault Isolation Incorporated at Rev. No. 12
72-12 72-10-11, page 201
Reduction Gearbox Oil Pressure Relief
Valve - Maintenance Practices Incorporated at Rev. No. 12
72-13 72-00-00, page 607
72-14 72-00-00, page 618
72-15 72-10-04, page 203
72-16 72-00-00, page 602
Engine - Inspection/Check Replaced by TR 72-20

Page 1
TR INDEX Jan 26/2015
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
72-17 72-00-05, page 214

Fuel Manifold Adapters, Flow Divider
and Dump Valve - Maintenance
Practices Incorporated at Rev. No. 13
72-18 72-00-14, page 203
Ignition System - Maintenance
72-19 72-00-16, page 201
Compressor Bleed Valve - Maintenance
Practice Incorporated at Rev. No. 13
72-20 72-00-00, page 602
72-21 72-00-15, page 201
Bleed Air Case - Maintenance
72-22 72-00-00, page 608
72-23 72-00-00, page 801
Engine - Approved Repairs Incorporated at Rev. No. 13
72-24 72-00-00, page 602
72-25 72-00-00, page 609
Engine - Inspection/Check Replaced by TR 72-27
72-26 72-00-00, page 644
72-27 72-00-00, page 609
72-28 72-00-00, page 358
72-29 72-00-00, page 602
72-30 72-00-00, page 602
Engine - Inspection/Check Superseded by TR 72-31
72-31 72-00-00, page 602
73-1 73-10-05, page 202
Fuel Manifold Adapters - Maintenance
73-2 73-20-02, page 201
Automatic Fuel Control Unit (AFCU) -
Maintenance Practices Incorporated at Rev. No. 18

Page 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
73-3 73-20-02, page 206

Automatic Fuel Control Unit (AFCU) -
Maintenance Practices Incorporated at Rev. No. 18
73-4 73-10-07, page 203
P3 Air Filter - Maintenance Practices Incorporated at Rev. No. 18
73-5 Will never be issued.
73-6 Will never be issued.
73-7 73-10-05, page 209
73-8 73-20-02, page 203
Fuel Pump - Maintenance Practices Incorporated at Rev. No. 21
73-9 73-10-05, page 210
Fuel Manifold Adapters- Maintenance
73-10 73-10-02, page 208
73-11 73-10-07, page 203
P3 Air Filter - Maintenance Practices Incorporated at Rev. No. 26
73-12 73-10-02, page 206
73-13 73-10-05, page 202
73-14 73-10-05, page 215
75-1 75-30-00, page 213
Compressor Bleed Valve - Maintenance
79-1 79-20-02, page 205
All succeeding Temporary Revisions must be retained in your printed manual until directed
otherwise by subsequent revision activity.

Page 3/4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SERVICE BULLETIN LIST
The 5000 series of Service Bulletins (SB’s) are used for various engine models, however, the
following list only identifies SB’s applicable to the PT6T-3D/-3DE/-3DF engine models. Bulletins
considered to have no effect on manual text have the words ‘‘No Effect’’ added; effective Bulletins
give the date incorporated in the manual.
The incorporation of Service Bulletins on each engine is recorded in the engine log book and
related documents.
NOTE: The noted Service Bulletins are being continually revised to reflect P&WC
recommendations for oil, fuels, engine planned maintenance, etc., and are concurrent
with incorporation of engine modifications.
P&WC ATA Effect/Date

SB No. SB No. Rev. No. Engine Model Applicability Incorporated
5001 72-5001 26 PT6T-3D/-3DE/-3DF No Effect (See

Note)
Note)
5003 72-5003 44 PT6T-3D/-3DE/-3DF No Effect
Note)
5300 72-5300 3 PT6T-3D No Effect
5304 72-304 Orig. PT6T-3D/-3DE No Effect
5306 72-306 Orig. PT6T-3D Feb 01/94
5307 72-307 1 PT6T-3D No Effect
5311 72-311 Orig. PT6T-3D No Effect
5312 72-312 Orig. PT6T-3D Feb 01/95
5314 72-314 Orig. PT6T-3D Feb 01/95
5318 72-318 Orig. PT6T-3D Feb 01/95
5321 72-321 Orig. PT6T-3D Feb 01/95
5326 72-326 1 PT6T-3D No Effect
5329 72-329 1 PT6T-3D No Effect
5330 72-330 5 PT6T-3D No Effect
5331 72-331 Orig. PT6T-3D Sep 19/97
5336 72-5336 1 PT6T-3D No Effect
5338 72-338 1 PT6T-3D No Effect
5339 72-339 Orig. PT6T-3D Feb 01/95
5341 72-341 Orig. PT6T-3D Feb 28/97

Page 1
SB LIST Jul 18/2016
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

5343 72-343 1 PT6T-3D No Effect

5346 72-5346 2 PT6T-3D No Effect
5350 72-350 1 PT6T-3D No Effect
5354 72-354 Orig. PT6T-3D Feb 28/97
5356 72-356 1 PT6T-3D Oct 24/2003
5358 72-358 Orig. PT6T-3D Feb 06/96
5365 72-365 1 PT6T-3D No Effect
5367 72-367 2 PT6T-3D Oct 24/2003
5369 72-369 1 PT6T-3D No Effect
5372 72-372 3 PT6T-3D/-3DE No Effect
5373 72-5373 3 PT6T-3D/-3DE No Effect
5377 72-5377 1 PT6T-3D/-3DE No Effect
5378 72-378 1 PT6T-3D No Effect
5379 72-379 2 PT6T-3D/-3DE/-3DF Sep 19/97
5380 72-380 Orig. PT6T-3D/-3DE/-3DF Sep 19/97
5381 72-381 3 PT6T-3DE No Effect
5382 72-5382 1 PT6T-3DF No Effect
5391 72-391 Orig. PT6T-3D/-3DE/-3DF No Effect
5398 72-398 Orig. PT6T-3D/-3DE/-3DF Sep 19/97

Page 2
SB LIST Jul 18/2016
MAINTENANCE MANUAL


5422 72-422 Orig. PT6T-3D/-3DF Oct 24/2003
5423 72-423 Orig. PT6T-3D/-3DE/-3DF Feb 18/2000
5441 72-5441 Orig. PT6T-3D/-3DF No Effect
5443 72-5443 Orig. PT6T-3D/-3DF Oct 24/2003
5458 72-5458 1 PT6T-3D/-3DE/-3DF Oct 24/2003

Page 3
SB LIST Jul 18/2016
MAINTENANCE MANUAL


5509 72-5509 Orig. PT6T-3D/-3DE/-3DF Nov 16/2012
5516 72-5516 Orig. PT6T-3D/-3DE/-3DF Dec 02/2013

Page 4
SB LIST Jul 18/2016
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
TITLE PAGE
REVISION HIGHLIGHTS
RECORD OF REVISIONS
RECORD OF TEMPORARY REVISIONS
LIST OF CHAPTER/SECTION/SUBJECTS
TEMPORARY REVISION INDEX
SERVICE BULLETIN LIST

Page 1/2
CONTENTS Jul 18/2016
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER CHAPTER
SECTION PAGE DATE SECTION PAGE DATE
LEP 1 Jul 18/2016 6 Jul 18/2016
2 blank Jul 18/2016 7 Jul 18/2016
8 Jul 18/2016
Contents 1 Jul 18/2016 9 Jul 18/2016
2 Jul 18/2016 10 Jul 18/2016
11 Jul 18/2016
Introduction 1 Jul 18/2016 12 Jul 18/2016
2 Jul 18/2016 13 Jul 18/2016
3 Jul 18/2016 14 Jul 18/2016
4 Jul 18/2016 15 Jul 18/2016
5 Jul 18/2016 16 Jul 18/2016
6 Jul 18/2016 17 Jul 18/2016
7 Jul 18/2016 18 Jul 18/2016
8 Jul 18/2016 19 Jul 18/2016
9 Jul 18/2016 20 Jul 18/2016
10 Jul 18/2016
Special Tools 1 Jul 18/2016

Fixtures and 2 Jul 18/2016
Equipment 3 Jul 18/2016
4 Jul 18/2016
5 Jul 18/2016
6 Jul 18/2016
7 Jul 18/2016
8 Jul 18/2016
9 Jul 18/2016
10 Jul 18/2016
11 Jul 18/2016
12 Jul 18/2016
13 Jul 18/2016
14 Jul 18/2016
15 Jul 18/2016
16 Jul 18/2016
17 Jul 18/2016
18 blank Jul 18/2016
Consumable 1 Jul 18/2016

Materials 2 Jul 18/2016
3 Jul 18/2016
4 Jul 18/2016
5 Jul 18/2016

Page 1/2
INTRODUCTION LEP Jul 18/2016
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
INTRODUCTION
1. General 1
2. Customer Service 1
3. Maintenance Concept 2
A. Line Maintenance 2
B. Heavy Maintenance 2
4. Supplementary Documentation 2
A. Parts Catalog (P/N 3040594) 2

B. Manual Revision Services and Service Bulletins 2
C. Special Tool Service Bulletins (P/N 3020575) 2
D. Suppliers and Supplier Services 3
E. Web Engine Condition Trend Monitoring (WebECTM) Manual 3
F. P&WC Consumable Materials List - all Models (CML) (P/N

3043340) 3
5. Safety 3
6. Use of Manual - Manual Content 3
A. Layout 3
B. Maintenance Practices - Page Blocks 4
C. Abbreviations and Symbols 5

D. Equipment Required 7
E. General (Standard) Procedures 7
F. Location of Procedures - Table of Contents 8
SPECIAL TOOLS/FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT
1. General 1
2. Special Tools 1
3. Fixtures and Equipment 16

Page 1
INTRODUCTION CONTENTS Jul 18/2016
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
CONSUMABLE MATERIALS
1. General 1
2. Consumable Materials 1

Page 2
INTRODUCTION CONTENTS Jul 18/2016
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
1. General
This maintenance manual contains the recommended procedures for maintaining

PT6T-3D/-3DE/-3DF engines manufactured by Pratt & Whitney Canada. Personnel involved
with engine maintenance should acquaint themselves with the contents of the following
introductory paragraphs for full comprehension of the information contained in this manual.
Any discrepancies, problems or suggestions regarding this publication should be forwarded in

writing, using the Pratt & Whitney Canada Customer Feedback Sheet (RSVP), to:

1000 Marie-Victorin
Longueuil, Quebec
Canada J4G 1A1
Attention: Manager, Publications Dept (05MS1)
FAX: (450) 647-2702
Website: www.pwc.ca
E-mail: customer.service@pwc.ca
NOTE: 1. An on-line RSVP form is available via the P&WC website at (http://www.pwc.ca).
NOTE: 2. Customer Feedback Sheets are enclosed with new manuals and each
subsequent revision. Additional forms may be obtained by contacting: Supervisor,
Publications Customer Services, at the above address.
2. Customer Service
Customer Service representatives maintain contact with operators and service activities and
are available for investigation of any specific difficulty or problem. Requests for assistance
and/or AOG support should be directed to:

1000 Marie-Victorin
Longueuil, Quebec
Canada J4G 1A1
Attention: Customer Service (01PM4)
Customer Help Desk (24-hour service):
US and Canada: 1-800-268-8000

International: (IAC)-8000-268-8000
Globally: 1-450-647-8000
FAX: 1-450-647-2888
Email: CFirst@pwc.ca
NOTE: IAC: International Access Code

Page 1
INTRODUCTION Jul 18/2016
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Maintenance Concept
The maintenance functions for the PT6T-3D series engines detailed in this manual fall into
two categories: Line Maintenance and Heavy Maintenance.
A. Line Maintenance
The scope of line maintenance consists essentially of the removal and installation of
external components and engine accessories. All procedures are to be considered line
maintenance in the absence of the words ‘‘(Heavy Maintenance Only)’’ appearing with
procedure title in Maintenance Practices.
B. Heavy Maintenance
Heavy maintenance details Hot Section Refurbishment, repair and removals considered
beyond the normal capabilities of the average line maintenance shop. The scope
includes the removal and installation of engine internal components and limited repair to
the hot section area. Instructions are given with the understanding that Standard
Practices, Chapter 70, has been read, entirely understood and is followed.
Repairs beyond the levels detailed in this manual are not recommended and must be
done by a qualified overhaul facility.
4. Supplementary Documentation
A. Parts Catalog (P/N 3040594)
Users of this manual should aquaint themselves with the contents of the
PT6T-3D/-3DE/-3DF Illustrated Parts Catalog, which lists and illustrates the components
of the engine.
B. Manual Revision Services and Service Bulletins
As the engine is still undergoing design and manufacturing improvements, certain parts
or details may change as refinements are introduced. This manual will be periodically
revised to incorporate the latest approved data. In the PDF version of this manual, the
portion of the text affected by the latest change is indicated by a black line in the left
margin of the page. Changes to illustrations are also indicated by a black line in the left
margin of the page. In the IETM version of this manual, the portion of the text affected
by the latest change is indicated by a grey zone. Changes to illustrations are also indicated
by a grey zone.
Service Bulletins will be issued as required to provide information or instructions for

modifying earlier production engines or parts to the latest configuration. Service Bulletin
references in this manual begin with P&WC SB No. 5001 (Ref. Service Bulletin List).
NOTE: Post Service Bulletin configurations may also apply to later engine models, refer
to Illustrated Parts Catalog and applicable conversion Service Bulletin.
C. Special Tool Service Bulletins (P/N 3020575)
This publication, which is a compilation of the special tool service bulletins, provides
instructions for the modification of special tools.

Page 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Suppliers and Supplier Services
The names of any companies provided in this publication as a possible source for
required services or supplies are furnished for information purposes only. Pratt & Whitney
Canada does not endorse the work performed or supplies procured from these
companies. Furthermore, Pratt & Whitney Canada does not accept responsibility, to any
degree, for the selection of such companies for such work performed or supplies
procured.
E. Web Engine Condition Trend Monitoring (WebECTM) Manual
The WebECTM gives the details of engine condition trend monitoring.
F. P&WC Consumable Materials List - all Models (CML) (P/N 3043340)
In addition to consumables used in this manual, the CML contains details of all
consumable materials used throughout applicable P&WC Engine Manuals.
5. Safety
This manual describes processes that may require the use of chemicals, solvents, paints or
other commercially available materials.
Before using any of the consumable materials, be aware of all handling, storage and
disposal precautions recommended by the manufacturer or supplier. Failure to comply with
manufacturer’s or supplier’s recommendations may result in injury or disease.
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) containing information about Trade Name, Safety
Hazards, Reactivity, Spill or Leak Procedures, Special Protection Information, Special
Precautions and Transportation and Labelling are available from the manufacturer. Read prior
to using consumable materials.
6. Use of Manual - Manual Content
A. Layout
This manual is written in accordance with the general directives contained in the Air
Transport Association of America Specification No. 100 (ATA -100). All information is
allocated to the major Chapter/System number 72 (first element). Further subdivision of
material is achieved by allocating section (second element) and unit (third element)
numbers as outlined below.
(1) Engine/Engine Sections
Information applicable to the engine as a whole is located in Chapter/Section/Unit

72-00-00. Information applicable to engine sections (engine major sub-assemblies) is
located as follows:
Chapter/Section/Unit Subject
72-10-00 Reduction Gearbox
* 72-20-00 Air Inlet Section

Page 3
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter/Section/Unit Subject
72-30-00 Compressor Section
* 72-40-00 Combustion Section
72-50-00 Turbine Section
72-60-00 Accessory Gearbox
* This section is retained in the manual for

reference only. Due to engine design,
combustor components are treated as parts
of the compressor (gas generator) section.
(2) Component Parts
Component parts are treated under engine section (second element) numbers by
allocating unit (third element) numbers as follows:
Chapter/Section/Unit Component Group

72-00-01 and subs Engine Externals
72-10-01 and subs Reduction Gearbox Components
72-30-01 and subs Gas Generator Components
72-50-01 and subs Power Turbine and Exhaust Components
72-60-01 and subs Accessory Gearbox Components
B. Maintenance Practices - Page Blocks
Page block numbering of maintenance practices is applicable only when the manual is
published as a PDF version and not as an online IETM version.
Each Chapter/Section/Unit in the manual contains the maintenance practices applicable

to one specific assembly or component part. Each maintenance practice is allocated
to a Page Block as follows:
Maintenance Practices Page Block

Description and Operation 1
Troubleshooting 101
* Maintenance Practices (Combined) 201
Servicing 301
Removal/Installation 401
Adjustment/Test 501
Inspection/Check 601
Cleaning 701
Approved Repairs 801
* Whenever two or more maintenance practices applicable to any one subject component
are brief, they are combined under the heading Maintenance Practices in Page Block 201.

Page 4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Abbreviations and Symbols
The following is a list of abbreviations and symbols used in Pratt & Whitney Canada
manuals and throughout this manual; where applicable:
AA Arithmetic Average
ACC Accessory
AFCU Automatic Fuel Control Unit
AGB Accessory Gearbox
ALT Alternator
AMS Aerospace Material Specification
Assy Assembly
ATA Air Transport Association
BRG Bearing
°C Degrees Celsius (Centigrade)
CCW Counterclockwise
CG Center of Gravity
CMM Component Maintenance Manual
CSU Constant Speed Unit
CT Compressor Turbine
CW Clockwise
Delta P Observed/P Standard Day
Dia Diameter
Dim Dimension
DIR Direction
EEC Electronic Engine Control
eshp Equivalent Shaft Horse Power
°F Degrees Fahrenheit
FLG Flange
FLGD Flanged
FOD Foreign Object Damage
Fwd Forward
GG Gas Generator
GSHFT Gearshaft
in. Hg Inches of Mercury
HD Headed
HDLS Headless
HMU Hydromechanical Unit
hr hour
HP High Pressure
HSG Housing
HYD Hydraulic
ID Inside Diameter

Page 5
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Imp Imperial
IPC Illustrated Parts Catalog
in. Inch
kg kilogram
LH Left-hand
lb. pound
lb.in./lbf.in. pound force inch
LP Low Pressure
Max. Maximum
MFCU Manual Fuel Control Unit
Min. Minimum
mm millimeter
NBLG Normal Backlash on Gear
Nf Power Turbine Speed (rpm)
Ng Gas Generator Speed (rpm)
Np Propeller Speed (rpm)
Ns Output Shaft Speed (rpm)
OD Outside Diameter
OEI One Engine Inoperative
Pam Ambient Air Pressure
psi Pounds per square inch
psig pounds per square inch gage
PT Power Turbine
P&WA Pratt &Whitney Aircraft
P&WC Pratt & Whitney Canada Corp.
PWC Special Tool Prefix Letters - Engine
Px Control Pressure (Bleed Valve)
Py Governor Servo Pressure
Po Bypass Pressure
P1 Unmetered Fuel Pressure
P2 Metered Fuel Pressure
P3 Compressor Discharge Air Pressure
LHV Lower Heating Value of Fuel
RDCN Reduction
Ref. Reference
RGB Reduction Gearbox
RH Right-hand
rpm revolutions per minute
RTNG Retaining
RTNR Retainer
SB Service Bulletin
SCAV Scavenge

Page 6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
sfc Specific Fuel Consumption (lbs/shp/hr)

SHLDRD Shouldered
shp Shaft Horse Power
SG Specific Gravity
SOI Specific Operating Instructions
STR Straight
SPOP Service Process Operation Procedure
Tam Ambient Air Temperature
TBO Time Between Overhaul
TIG Tungsten Inert Gas (Welding method)
TOL Tolerance
TSFR Transfer
T1 Engine Inlet Temperature
TSG Temperature of Specific Gravity (Fuel Sample)
T5 Inter-turbine Temperature
T5A T5, Untrimmed and Uncorrected
T5D T5, Calculated (derived from T7)
UOS Unless Otherwise Specified
WebECTM Web Engine Condition Trend Monitoring
Wf Fuel Flow (lb/hr)
Theta T observed/T standard day
Delta P observed/P standard day
D. Equipment Required
Complete lists of Special Tools, Equipment and Consumable Materials including supplier
addresses applicable to the overall engine are detailed in TOOLS/FIX/EQUIP or
CONSUMABLE MATERIALS section respectively.
To facilitate planning prior to carrying out a specific maintenance task on the engine,
each maintenance function (or combination of) detailed in this manual opens with lists of
tools, equipment and consumable material required.
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) containing information about Trade Name, Safety
Hazards, Health Hazards, Reactivity, Spill or Leak Procedures, Special Protection
Information, Special Precautions, and Transportation and Labelling are available from
the manufacturer of the products. Read the data sheets prior to using the consumable
materials.
E. General (Standard) Procedures
Prior to undertaking any maintenance function on an engine or engine component, the

operator must be fully acquainted with the P&WC approved general procedures applicable
to engine maintenance.

Page 7
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
F. Location of Procedures - Table of Contents
The Table of Contents included at the beginning of Chapter 72 lists the entire contents
of this maintenance manual in Chapter/Section/Unit sequence.
Table 1 following contains an alphabetical index of all components for which maintenance
practices are given in this manual along with the Chapter/Section/Units and Page
Blocks in which these maintenance practices are to be found.
TABLE 1, Alphabetical Index
PAGE BLOCK
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CHAP/SECT/ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
COMPONENT UNIT 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Power Plant 71-00-00 X
Accumulator, Fuel Surge 73-10-03 X
Accumulator, Air (Pg) 73-20-03 X
Accumulator, Air (Py) 73-20-07 X
Adapter, Fuel Manifold (and Nozzles) 73-10-05 X
Case, Bleed Valve 72-20-00 X
Case, Gas Generator 72-30-04 X
Compressor Rotor 72-30-05 X
Compensator, T5 Temperature 77-20-01 X
Detector, Chip Magnetic (AGB) 79-30-01 X
Detector, Chip Magnetic (RGB) 79-30-01 X
Disk Assembly, Compressor Turbine 72-50-02 X
Disk Assembly, Power Turbine 72-50-04 X
Duct Exit, Large 72-40-01 X
Duct Exit, Support Flange 72-50-01 X X X
Engine, Twinned Turboshaft 72-00-00 X X X X X X X X
Filter, Fuel Pump 73-10-02 X
Filter, Oil 79-20-02 X
Filter Air (P3) 73-10-07 X
Governor, Power Turbine (Nf) 73-20-04 X
Heater, Oil-to-fuel 73-10-01 X
Ignition 74-00-00 X
Ignition, Exciter 74-10-00 X
Igniters and Ignition Cables 74-20-00 X

Page 8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE 1, Alphabetical Index (Cont’d)
PAGE BLOCK
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CHAP/SECT/ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Inserts, Accessory Gearbox 72-60-00 X
‘‘Keensert’’
Inserts, Output Housing ‘‘Keensert’’ 72-10-00 X
Keywasher, No. 8 Bearing 72-10-00 X
Limiter, Torque Control 73-20-06
Liner Combustion Chamber 72-40-01 X
Pump, Fuel 73-10-02 X
Screen, Air Inlet 72-20-00 X
Seal, Accessory Drive (AGB) 72-60-00 X
Seal, Blower Drive 72-10-00 X
Seal, Carbon, Centrifugal Breather 72-60-00 X
Seal, Face-type, Output Shaft 72-10-00 X
Seal, Runner, Output Shaft 72-10-00 X
Section, Accessory Gearbox 72-60-00 X
Section, Air Inlet 72-20-00 X
Section, Combustion 72-40-00 X
Section, Gas Generator 72-30-00 X
Section, Power 72-00-01 X
Section, Power Turbine and Exhaust 72-50-00 X X
Section, Reduction Gearbox 72-10-00 X X
Shroud, Compressor Turbine 72-50-01 X X X
Stator Assy., Power Turbine 72-50-03 X X X
System, T5 Temperature Sensing 77-20-01 X
Torquemeter 72-10-00 X
Unit, Fuel Control, Automatic (AFCU) 73-20-02 X
Unit, Fuel Control, Manual (MFCU) 73-20-01 X
Vane Ring, Compressor Turbine 72-50-01 X X X
Valve, Check and Regulating 79-20-04 X
Valve, Compressor Bleed 75-30-00 X
Valve, Drain, Fuel 73-10-06 X

Page 9
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE 1, Alphabetical Index (Cont’d)
PAGE BLOCK
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CHAP/SECT/ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Valve, Fuel Flow Divider and Dump 73-10-04 X
Valve, Oil Filter Bypass 79-20-03 X
Valve, Oil Pressure Adjustment 79-20-05 X
Valve, Pressure Regulating 73-20-01 X
Valve, Relief, Oil Pressure (RGB) 72-10-00 X

Page 10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SPECIAL TOOLS/FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT
1. General
This section gives data about the special tools and the fixtures and equipment required to
maintain the engine.
2. Special Tools
Refer SIL GEN-022 for the list of tool suppliers and send a purchase order for the special
tools, listed in Table 1.
DELETED
NOTE: When ordering special tools, ensure that the prefix ’PWC’ is included as a
component of the tool part number, e.g. PWC30801, Sling.
TABLE 1, Special Tools
Maintenance Level
Part No. Name CH/SE/SU Line Heavy HSI
PWC30046-52 Puller, Fuel Pump Carrier/AGB 72-60-00 X
Carbon Seal Carrier
PWC30046-54 Puller, Starter Generator 72-60-00 X
Carrier
PWC30046-57 Knocker Puller, Seal 72-60-00 X
72-10-00 X
PWC30046-70 Puller, Torquemeter Piston 72-10-00 X
Cover
PWC30075 Drift, Oil Seal Carrier 72-60-00 X
72-10-00 X
PWC30114-08 Wrench, T5 Thermocouple 72-50-01 X
Probe Retaining Nut
PWC30114-10 Wrench 72-00-01 X
PWC30269 Mount Ring 72-50-00 X
72-50-03 X
PWC30271-100 Replaced by PWC31771-100. 72-30-04 X
PWC30331 Wrench 72-50-02 X X
PWC30335 Spreader 72-50-02 X X
72-50-03 X X
PWC30336 Protector Sleeve 72-50-02 X X
72-50-03 X X

Page 1
TOOLS/FIX/EQUIP Jul 18/2016
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE 1, Special Tools (Cont’d)
Maintenance Level
PWC30403 Puller 72-50-02 X X
72-50-03 X X
PWC30405 Fixture 73-10-05 X X
PWC30416 Puller 73-10-03 X X
PWC30425 Crimping Pliers 72-50-01 X X
PWC30458 Locking Tool 73-30-02 X X
72-50-03 X X
PWC30506 Test Rig 73-10-05 X X
PWC30530 Plug 73-10-05 X X
PWC30617 Bracket 72-00-00 X X X
72-00-01 X X X
72-10-00 X X X
72-10-00 X X X
PWC30631 Puller 72-10-00 X
PWC30633 Socket 72-10-00 X
PWC30646 Puller 72-10-00 X
PWC30675 Drift 72-60-00 X
PWC30712 Adapter 72-00-01 X X
72-50-00 X X
PWC30713 Mount Ring 72-00-01 X X
PWC30721 Assembly Stand 72-00-00 X X X
72-10-00 X X X
PWC30793 Fitting (Post-SB5312) 72-00-00 X
79-30-01 X
PWC30801 Sling 72-50-00 X X
PWC30804 Sling, Engine Assembly 72-00-00 X X X
(Obsolete - replaced by
PWC70079)
72-00-01 X X X

Page 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Maintenance Level
PWC30810 Pusher/Puller 72-10-00 X
Rev E.
PWC30811 Wrench 72-50-03 X
PWC30832 Sleeve 72-10-00 X X
PWC30835 Stand 72-00-01 X X
Obsolete, Replaced by
PWC70483
PWC30836 Bracket 72-00-01 X X
PWC30840 Ring 72-10-00 X
PWC30871 Puller 72-10-00 X
PWC30875 Puller 72-10-00 X
PWC31771-100 Flaring Tool 72-30-04 X
PWC32209 Adapter 72-50-01 X X
PWC32271 Wash Tube 72-00-00 X
PWC32380 Radius Gage 72-50-01 X X
PWC32366 Pusher 73-10-05 X
PWC32396 Jacking Screw 72-00-01 X
PWC32677-300 Wash Cart 72-00-00 X
PWC32810 Puller 72-60-00 X
PWC32811 Fixture 73-10-05 X X
PWC32820 Drift 72-10-00 X
PWC32823 Puller 72-50-01 X X
72-30-04 X X
PWC32828 Wrench 72-10-00 X
PWC32859 Socket 72-10-00 X
PWC34128 Grinding Wheel 72-50-01 X X
PWC34300 Assembly Stand 72-00-01 X X
72-50-00 X X
PWC34910-101 Borescope Assy 72-00-00 X
PWC34910-200 Guide Tube 72-00-00 X
PWC34913 Holding Fixture 72-00-00 X
PWC34941 Wrench 72-00-00 X

Page 3
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Maintenance Level
PWC37088-1 Drift, Seal 72-60-00 X
72-10-00 X
PWC37088-002 Drift 72-60-00 X
PWC37088-003 Drift 72-60-00 X
PWC37917 Dresser, Diamond 72-50-01 X X
PWC37918 Grinder 72-50-01 X X
PWC38147 Fitting (Pre-SB5312 or 72-00-00 X
Post-SB5354)
79-30-01 X
PWC50041 Bracket Assembly 75-30-00 X
PWC50054 Socket Nut 72-10-00 X
PWC50055 Adapter Nut 72-10-00 X
PWC50060 Injector, Oil 72-50-02 X X
72-50-03 X X
PWC50074 Pusher 73-10-05 X
PWC50064-100 Drill Jig Kit (Replacement 72-30-04 X
Center Drills are available as
P/N 50064-200.)
PWC50084 Locator 72-40-01 X X
PWC50237 Drift 72-60-00 X
PWC50495 Crimper 72-10-00 X
PWC50496 Unstaking Tool 72-10-00 X
PWC50497 Crimper 72-10-00 X
PWC50777 Retainer 72-10-00 X
PWC50778 Drift 72-10-00 X
PWC50779 Puller 72-10-00 X
PWC51063 Puller, Torquemeter Piston 72-10-00 X
Cover
PWC51139 Mount Ring 72-00-01 X X
PWC51261 Puller 72-10-00 X
PWC70249 Sling 72-10-00 X X
PWC70483 Stand Parking Support 72-00-01 X

Page 4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Maintenance Level
PWC70513 Bracket Assembly (Compressor 75-30-00 X
Bleed Valve)
PWC71482 Sling, Engine Assembly 72-00-00 X X X
(Replaces PWC70079)
72-00-01 X X X
PWC71559 Puller, Cover (Replaces 72-50-01 X
PWC32822)

Page 5
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PWC30046-52 PWC30046-70 PWC30114-10
TOOL
NOT
ILLUSTRATED
PWC30046-54 PWC30075 PWC30269
PWC30046-57 PWC30114-08 PWC30271-100
Special Tool Illustrations

Page 6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PWC30331 PWC30403 PWC30425
PWC30335 PWC30405 PWC30458
PWC30336 PWC30416 PWC30506

Page 7
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PWC30530 PWC30619 PWC30646
PWC30617 PWC30631 PWC30675
PWC30618 PWC30633 PWC30712

Page 8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PWC30713 PWC30801 PWC30811
PWC30721 PWC30804 PWC30832
PWC30793 PWC30810 PWC30835

Page 9
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PWC30836 PWC30875 PWC32271
PWC30840 PWC31771-100 PWC32380
PWC30871 PWC32209 PWC32366
PWC32209

Page 10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PWC32396 PWC32811 PWC32828
PWC32677-300 PWC32820 PWC32859
PWC
PWC32810 PWC32823 PWC34128

Page 11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PWC34300 PWC34913 PWC37088-002
PWC34910-101 PWC34941 PWC37088-003
PWC34910-200 PWC37088-1 PWC37917
TOOL
NOT
ILLUSTRATED

Page 12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PWC37918 PWC50054 PWC50074
PWC38147 PWC50055 PWC50064-100
PWC50041 PWC50060 PWC50084
TOOL
NOT
ILLUSTRATED

Page 13
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PWC50237 PWC50497 PWC50779
PWC50495 PWC50777 PWC51063
TOOL
NOT
ILLUSTRATED
PWC50496 PWC50778 PWC51139
TOOL
NOT
ILLUSTRATED

Page 14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PWC51261 PWC70513
TOOL
NOT
ILLUSTRATED
PWC70249 PWC71482
TOOL
NOT
ILLUSTRATED
PWC
PWC70483 PWC71559
TOOL TOOL
NOT NOT
ILLUSTRATED ILLUSTRATED

Page 15
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Fixtures and Equipment
Table 2 provides a list of Fixtures and equipment required to maintain the engine.
TABLE 2, Special Equipment

ITEM PART NO. NOMENCLATURE SUPPLIER
1 2312G-8 Test Set Barfield Instrument Corp.

4101 NW 29th St.
P.O. Box 537
Miami, FL 33142
USA
2 P and H Model AC/DC Arc Welding Local Purchase

DA-300-HF-GW Machine; 150-amp. minimum
capacity with close control in
15 to 75-amp. range (High
frequency control for ease of
arc starting is desirable)
3 Size O Ground Cable; length 25 feet Local Purchase
approx.
4 Size O Arc Cable, Metallic; length Local Purchase
25 feet approx.
Argon Hose; length 25 feet Local Purchase

approx.
5 Airco Style 8407 Argon Regulator Local Purchase

or equivalent
6 Airco Stock Flowmeter Block Assemblies Local Purchase

830-13277 or (2 required)
equivalent
7 Linde Model Shielded Arc Torch; with Local Purchase

HW-10 or provision for supply of inert
Airco Model gas (argon) and cooling
H35B water
or equivalent
8 Linde Model Shielded Arc Torch; with Local Purchase
HW-9 or provision for supply of inert
Airco Model gas (argon) and cooling
H20A water.
or equivalent
9 Model 12 or Ultrasonic Cleaner Esterline Aircraft Appliances & Equipment
equivalent Angus Ltd.
150 East Drive Bramalea, Ont.
Canada LGT 1C1

Page 16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE 2, Special Equipment (Cont’d)
ITEM PART NO. NOMENCLATURE SUPPLIER
NOTE: In the event of non-availability of ultrasonic cleaning equipment, operators

should ship fuel nozzles requiring cleaning and testing to an approved
overhaul facility, or to a maintenance base having suitable equipment.
10 Model Cleaning Tank, Kell Strom Tool Co.

KS5518 Electrosonic 214 Church St.
Weathersfield CT
06108 USA
www.kell-storm.com
11 TD1032L ‘‘Kee’’ Driving Tool Tridair Industries

(Keen sert) 3000 West Lomita Blvd.
Torrance, CA
90505, USA
or
Interfast Inc. 21
Constellation Court
Rexdale, Ontario
Canada M9W 1K4
12 - Shut-off Valve Fluid Local Purchase

Line
13 - Two Stainless Steel Local Purchase

Tanks;
5 gallon capacity and
capable of with-
standing 50 psi
working pressure
14 - Stainless Steel Local Purchase

Tubing 5/16 inch ID,
length as required
15 - Nitrogen or Clean Air Local Purchase
Pressure Supply
regulated to 50 psig
16 3243781 Slave Stop Allied-Signal Aerospace

(Pre-SB5331) Canada
200 Laurentien Blvd.
Montreal, Quebec
Canada H4M 2L5

Page 17/18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CONSUMABLE MATERIALS
1. General
This section gives data about the consumable materials listed in this manual.
2. Consumable Materials
Consumable materials required to maintain the engine are listed in Table 1.
TABLE 1, Consumable Materials
WARNING: READ MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS BEFORE USING THESE

PRODUCTS.
Item Nomenclature/Specification Supplier (Supplier Code)

PWC01-001 Fuel, engine Local Purchase
(Refer to SB5144) (A0001)
PWC03-001 Oil, engine Local Purchase
(Refer to SB5001) (A0001)
PWC03-002 Fluid, calibrating Castrol Canada Inc.
MIL-C-7024 2150 Rue Frances Hughes
Type II Chomedy, Ville de Laval, Quebec
Canada H7S 1N7
(A0015)
PWC04-001 Grease, Local Purchase
General Purpose (A0001)
MIL-G-23827
QPL-23827-18
NATO G-354
PWC04-004 Compound, Suflo Inc.
Extreme Pressure 1158 Erie Ave.
Plastilube No. 3 P.O. Box 285
North Tonawanda, NY
USA 14120-3507
(1V074)
PWC04-005 Compound, Fiske Brothers Refining Co.
Extreme Pressure 129 Lockwood Street
Lubriplate 130A Newark, NJ
USA 07105-4720
(73219)
PWC05-002 Marker, Michigan Chrome & Chemical Inc.
Pen or Pencil 8615 Grinnel Ave.
Micro Supreme Detroit MI
No. 142 USA 48213-1152
(01058)

Page 1
CONSUMABLE MATERIALS Jul 18/2016
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE 1, Consumable Materials (Cont’d)

PRODUCTS.
PWC05-005 Emulsifier Witco Canada
WCT Witconate 565 Coronation Dr.
P10-59B West Hill, ON
Canada M1E 2K3
(36382)
PWC05-007 Fluid, American Gas & Chemicals Co.
Leak Check Ltd.
Leak Tec 372 220 Pegasus Ave.
Northvale, NJ
USA 07647-1904
(03530)
PWC05-009 Crystalline, Local Purchase
Ammonium Bifluoride (A0001)
PWC05-011 10% Ammonium Nitrate Local Purchase
(A0001)
PWC05-013 Emery Cloth - 400 grit Local Purchase
(A0001)
PWC05-018 Marker, Sanford (A Newell Co.)
Pen or Pencil 2711 Washington Blvd.
Design Spectracolor Bellwood, IL
Silver 1428 USA 60104
(22980)
PWC05-18A Marker, Sanford (A Newell Co.)
Pen or Pencil 2711 Washington Blvd.
Verithin No. 753 Bellwood, IL
Silver USA 60104
(22980)
PWC05-021 Emery Cloth - 180 grit Local Purchase
(A0001)
PWC05-027 Marker, ink Dennison Mfg. Co.
Carter, Identification System Div.
No. 21451 (Black) One Clark Hill
Farmington, MA
USA 01701
(S0089)

Page 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PRODUCTS.
PWC05-029 Flux, Acid, M.W. Dunton Co.
Soldering (Paste and Liquid) 3 Bridal Ave.
Ref. Open West Warwick, RI 02893-2901
US. Fed. A-A-51145 USA
Tel: (401) 821-1832
www.dunton.org
(81397)
PWC05-031 Flux, resin Litton Industries
No. 1545 Kester Solder Division
515 E. Touhy Ave.
Des Plaines, IL
USA 60018-2675
(09185)
PWC05-037 Enamel, Aluminized Epoxy PRC-Desoto International
5430 San Fernando Road
Glendale
CA 91209
USA
or
PRC-Desoto International
823 Eastgate Drive
Mt. Laurel
NJ 08054
USA
or
5676 Timberlea Blvd
Mississauga
Ontario
Canada
L4W 4M6
PWC05-038 Hydrogen Peroxide Local Purchase
3 to 10% (A0001)
PWC05-046A Marker, ink Texrite Products Co.
Instant Dry, 10333 Shoemaker St.
Fast Drying, Detroit, MI
No. 44 400-1 Black, 48213
400-2 Red, USA
400-7 Purple (S0036)

Page 3
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PRODUCTS.
PWC05-46B Marker, ink Volger Mfg. Co.
Volgers (Black) 82 Fulton Street
Elizabeth, NJ
07206 USA
(88597)
PWC05-46C Marker, ink Dykem Co.
Dykem KX425 or 3624 West Lake Ave.
KXX122 Glenview, IL
USA 60025
(98148)
PWC05-048A Marker, ink Speedry Products Inc.
Felt Wick Pen Richmond Hill, New York
USA 11418
(A0013)
PWC05-056 Sodium Hydroxide - Solid Caustic Local Purchase
Soda (A0001)
(O-S-598)
PWC05-058 Solder, Tin-Alloy Litton Canada Ltd
Ref. 50/50 Mix (Kester Solder Division)
US. EIA J-STD-004 68 Prince Charles Road
EIA J-STD-005 P.O. Box 474
EIA J-STD-006 Brantford, Ontario
Canada N3T 5N9
Tel: (519) 753-3425
Fax: (519) 753-0641
www.kester.com
(10178 (s))
PWC05-061 Cloth, abrasive Local Purchase
A-A-1206, (A0001)
PWC05-064A Solution, Anodize Touch-up (Alodine) Henkel Corp.
Horsham Business Center
300 Welsh Road
Bldg. 2 , Suite 1
Horsham, PA
19044 USA
(84063)
PWC05-066 Tape, insulating 3M Company
3M No. 69 3M Center
(or equivalent) St. Paul, MN
USA 55144-1000
(26066)

Page 4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PRODUCTS.
PWC05-070 Tape, pressure sensitive 3M Company
3M No. 898 3M Center
Type II, St. Paul, MN
2 inch. USA 55144-1000
US. PPP-T-97D (26066)
or
(A0001)
PWC05-074 Acid, sulphuric Local Purchase
Concentrated (A0001)
PWC05-077 Oil, preservative Castrol Inc.
Grade 1010 Speciality Products Division
US. MIL-L-6081 Suite 230
16715 Van Karman Avenue
Irvine, CA
USA 92714
(2R128)
PWC05-089 Lockwire or Safetywire Local Purchase
Nickel Alloy (CRES) (A0001)
Inconel 600
Ref. MS 9226-03
US. AMS 5687
0.025 in. dia.
(PWC05-295 can be used as a
subsitute.
Use PWC05-089A as a subsitute for
external applications only.)
PWC05-089A Lockwire or Safetywire Local Purchase
Nickel Alloy (CRES) (A0001)
Inconel 600
Ref. Open
US. ASTM B166
0.025 in. dia.
PWC05-090 Lockwire Local Purchase
MS 9226-04 (A0001)
US. AMS 5687
0.032 in. dia.
PWC05-101 Cloth Abrasive Local Purchase
P-C-451 (A0001)

Page 5
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PRODUCTS.
PWC05-103 Marker, Pencil Dixon Ticonderoga Co.
Phano 71 (Red) Sandusky Div.
1706 Hayes Ave.
P.O. Box 2258
Sandusky, OH
44870-4732 USA
(70362)
PWC05-110 Lockwire Local Purchase
MS9226-01 (A0001)
US. AMS5687
0.016 in. dia.
PWC05-144 Abrasive Grinding Wheel Pangborn Co.
A54 IBFx5x202 A Kennecott Co.
10 Pangborn Blvd.
Box 380, Dept. 20
Hagerstown, MD
USA 21740-0380
(45586)
PWC05-145 Compound, lapping Loctite Corporation
Clover 2A 1001 Trout Brook Crossing
400 Grit Rock Hill, CT
USA 06067
(73165)
PWC05-147 Electrode, 2% Thoriated Tungsten Philips Elmet Corp.
1560 Lisbon Road
Lewiston, ME
04240 USA
(05838)
or
Local Purchase
(A0001)
PWC05-157 Turbine Engine Oil Local Purchase
PWA540 (Corrosion-preventative) (A0001)
PWC05-161 Solution, Touch-up, Chrome Pickle Local Purchase
Ref. Open (a solution of 1.5 pints (A0001)
nitric acid(PWC05-195) and 1.6 pints
of sodium dichromate (PWC05-055)
to a specific gravity of 1.42.
Add to 8 pints of water (PWC05-073).

Page 6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PRODUCTS.
PWC05-164 Welding, electrode Semco Insturments Inc.
Alumel/Chromel 25700 Rye St.
Type K Valencia, CA
20 gage 91355 USA
(A0066)
PWC05-177 Demineralizer Cartridge - Catalog Fisher Scientific Co.
No. 09-035-20 8505 Devonshire Road
P.O. Box 6083, Sta. A
Montreal, Quebec
Canada H4P 2L4
(95059)
PWC05-180 Filler Welding Local Purchase
AMS5798 (A0001)
Ni Base Alloy
PWC05-195A Acid, Nitric Commercial Grade Local Purchase
(A0001)
PWC05-196 Acid, hydrochloric Local Purchase
O-H-765 (A0001)
MIL-H-13528A
37 % Reagent Grade
20 Degrees Baume
PMC 1002
PWC05-197 Acid, chromic Local Purchase
Commercial Grade (A0001)
PWC05-201 Acid, Hydrofloric Local Purchase
70%, O-H-795 (Technical Grade) (A0001)
PWC05-202 Acid, Phosphoric - Concentrated Local Purchase
(A0001)
PWC05-203 Abrasive Grinding Wheel Saint Gobian/Norton Industrial
A-100-U9-BH Ceramic Corp.
(formally Norton Co.)
1 New Bond Street
P.O. Box 15008
Worchester, MA
USA 01606-0008
(44197)

Page 7
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PRODUCTS.
PWC05-205 Solder - No. 44 Kester Solder Co. of Canada Ltd.
1 Prince Charles Road
P.O. Box 474
Brantford, Ontario
Canada
N3T 5N9
(10178)
PWC05-206 Silicone/Resin - Class H-C-2 Varflex Corp.
(sleeve-chafing) 512 West Court Ave.
Rome NY
13442-0551 USA
(79074)
PWC05-207 Cloth Abrasive Local Purchase
180 grit Aluminum-oxide (A0001)
PWC05-295 Wire, Safety, Steel (A0001)
(CRES)
Ref. Open
AS 3214-02
PWC05-329 Temperature Recorder Wahl Instruments, Inc.
Single position, 56 in. diameter, 234 Weaverville Hwy.
self-adhesive. Asheville, N.C.
P/N 414-140F-060C. 28804-1228
USA
http://
www.instrumentationgroup.com
PWC06-002 Petrolatum Local Purchase
VV-P-236 (A0001)
PWC06-004 Compound, Anti-seize - Dow Corning Dow Corning Corp.
G-N 2200 West Salzburg Rd.
Metal Assembly Spray or Paste P.O. Box 994
Midland, MI
USA 48686-0994
(71984)
PWC06-004A Anti-seize - Dow Corning Z Moly Local Purchase
(powder) (A0001)

Page 8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PRODUCTS.
PWC06-005 Lubricant, fluorocarbon dry spray Miller-Stephenson Chemical Co.
Type 2 MS-122 Inc.
US. MIL-L-60326 George Washington Highway
P.O. Box 905
Danbury, CT
USA 06813
(18598)
PWC06-005A Lubricant, fluorocarbon dry spray Miller-Stephenson Chemical Co.
Zeplon US. MIL-L-60326 Inc.
George Washington Highway
P.O. Box 905
Danbury, CT
06813 USA
(18598)
PWC06-010 Special Lubricating Compound - Dow Local Purchase
Corning 77 (Paste) (A0001)
PWC06-032A Compound Antigalling Texacone Co.
Ease-off 990 (MIL-A-907) 4111 Forney Rd.
Mesquite, TX
75149 USA
(87889)
PWC07-015 Paint, Epoxy Enamel Local Purchase
Ref. Open (A0001)
US. MIL - PRF-22750
(QPL - 22750)
PWC07-023 SermeTel 249 (Coating) Sermatech International Inc.
Materials Division
155 South Limerick Road
Limerick PA
USA 19468-1603
(58913)
PWC07-024 SermeTel 273 (Catalyst) Sermatech International Inc.
Materials Division
Limerick, PA
USA 19468-1603
(58913)

Page 9
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PRODUCTS.
PWC07-034 Paint Aluminized Sermatech International Inc.
Sermetal 196 Materials Division
Limerick PA
USA 19468-1603
(58913)
PWC08-002 Adhesive, sealant Dow Corning Corp.
RTV 730 2200 West Salzburg Rd.
P.O. Box 994
Midland, MI
USA 48686-0094
(71984)
PWC08-003 Adhesive, Cement 3M Company
EC801 3M Center
St. Paul, MN
USA 55144-1000
(04963)
PWC08-003A Adhesive, Cement 3M Company
EC807 3M Center
St. Paul, MN
USA 55144-1000
(04963)
PWC08-009 Cement Saureisen Cements Co.
No. 29 (Binder) (Synthetic - No. 29 160 Gamma Drive
(Filler) Ceramic) Pittsburgh, PA
15238-2920 USA
(80703)
Corrosion Service Co. Ltd.
369 Rimrock Rd.
Downsview, Ontario
Canada M3J 3J2
(A0071)
PWC08-010 Cement, adhesive 3M Company
EC1357 3M Center
St. Paul, MN
USA 55144-1000
(76381)

Page 10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PRODUCTS.
PWC09-001 Adhesive, sealant Dow Corning Corp.
Silastic 732 RTV 2200 West Salzburg Rd.
P.O. Box 994
Midland, MI
USA 48686-0994
or
Dow Corning Canada Inc.
189 Hymus Blvd.
Suite No. 505
Pointe Claire, Que.
Canada H9R 1E9
(71984)
PWC09-001A RTV 102, 103, 108 and 109 General Electric Co.
Attn: Silicone Sales Dept.
Attn: Customer Support
260 Hudson River Road
Waterford, NY
USA 12188
(01139B)
PWC09-002 Compound, locking Loctite Corporation
Loctite Grade 290 1001 Trout Brook Crossing
US. MIL-S-22473 Rock Hill, CT
USA 06067-3910
(05972)
PWC09-002A Compound, locking Loctite Corporation
Loctite Grade 222 1001 Trout Brook Crossing
US. MIL-S-22473 Rock Hill, CT
USA 06067-3910
(05972)
PWC09-003 Compound, silicone Dow Corning Corp.
Dow Corning No. 4 2200 West Salzburg Rd.
US. MIL-S-8660 P.O. Box 994
Midland, MI
USA 48686-0994
or
Dow Corning Canada Inc.
189 Hymus Blvd.
Suite No. 505
Pointe Claire, Que.
Canada H9R 1E9
(71984)

Page 11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PRODUCTS.
PWC09-005A Universal Joining (Medium Grade) Marston Bentley Ltd.
Ref. Hylomar PL-32 9 Naylor Street
PWA 36000-3 Liverpool
England L3 6DS
(K3237)
or
Power in Motion
16A Montesano Road
Fairfield NJ
USA 07004
(S0101)
PWC09-015 Synthetic Rubber/-Bostik 2402 Resin Emhart Corp.
(Boscoprene) Bostik Division
Boston Street
Middleton, MA
01949 USA
(5W425)
PWC11-001 Cleaner, alkaline NCH Corp.
CLIX P.O. Box 152170
2727 Chemsearch Blvd.
Irving , TX
USA 75015
(20913)
or
National Chemsearch
245 Orenda Rd.
Bramalea ON
Canada L6T 1E7
(56444)
PWC11-001A Cleaner, alkaline Almon Quimico
Almon AL-333 Wyandotte Corp.
Rio de Janeiro
Brazil
(A253)

Page 12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PRODUCTS.
PWC11-001B Cleaner, alkaline Magnus Chemical Ltd.
Magnus 1214 (MAG-CHEM INC.)
190 Blvd. Industriel
Boucherville, Quebec
Canada J4B 2X3
(35502)
or
Ecolab Inc.
Ecolab Center
370 Wabasha St.
St. Paul, MN
USA 55102-1307
(85884)
PWC11-001C Cleaner, alkaline B&B Tritech Inc.
B&B 3100 875 West 20th St.
Hialeah, FL
USA 33010-2310
(21361)
PWC11-001D Cleaner, alkaline Ivar Rivenaes A/S
R-MC (Premix #4070) Damsgirds 35
N-5037 Solheimsvik,
Norway
(N1480)
or
ECT Incorporated
Bridgeport Business Park
401 East 4th Street
Building 20
Bridgeport, PA
USA 19405
(A0111)

Page 13
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PRODUCTS.
PWC11-001E Cleaner, alkaline Ivar Rivenaes A/S
R-MC (Concentrate #4072) Damsgirds 35
N-5037 Solheimsvik, Bergen
Norway
(N1480)
or
ECT Incorporated
Bridgeport Business Park
401 East 4th Street
Building 20
Bridgeport, PA
USA 19405
(A0111)
PWC11-001F Cleaner, alkaline Deane & Co.
Turco 4217 Div. of Groulx-Robertson Ltd.
(Concentrate) 190 Onieda Dr.
Pointe Claire, Quebec
Canada H9R 1A8
(36325)
or
Turco Products Inc.
Sub. of Elf Atochem North America
7300 Bolsa Avenue
Westminster, CA
USA 92684-3600
or
2700 Temple Avenue
Suite B
Long Beach, CA
USA 90806
(0BYN5)
PWC11-001G Cleaner, alkaline (36325)
Turco 5884 or
(0BYN5)

Page 14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PRODUCTS.
PWC11-001H Cleaner, alkaline Brent Canada Ltd.
Ardrox 624 363 Arvin Ave.
(Concentrate) Stoney Creek
Ontario Canada
L8E 2M8
(37127)
or
Brent Europe Ltd.
(Brent International PLC)
Denbigh Road
Bletchley, Milton Keynes
Buckinghamshire
England MK1 1PB
(K6858)
PWC11-001I Cleaner, alkaline Local Purchase
Carbitol (A0001)
PWC11-001J Cleaner, alkaline Local Purchase
Triethanolamine (A0001)
PWC11-002 1,1,1-Trichloroethane - O-T-620 Local Purchase
(A0001)
PWC11-003 Cleaner, alkaline Brent America Inc.
Ardrox 6345 16961 Knott Avenue
La Mirada, CA
USA 90638 -6015
(23373)
or
(37127)
or
(K6858)

Page 15
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PRODUCTS.
PWC11-003B Cleaner, alkaline Brent America Inc.
(Turboclean 2) La Mirada CA
90638 -6015
USA
(23373)
or
Brent Europe Ltd.
(Brent International PLC)
Denbigh Road
Bletchley, Milton Keynes
Buckinghamshire
England
MK1 1PB
(K6858)
PWC11-003C Cleaner, alkaline Brent America Inc.
(Turboclean 2RTU) La Mirada CA
(Ready to Use) 90638 -6015
USA
or
921 Sherwood Dr.
Lake Bluff, IL
USA 90044
(23373)
PWC11-003D Cleaner, alkaline Airworthy Ltd.
ZOK 27 Elsted Midhurst, West Sussex
England GU29 0JT
(U4628)
or
Zokman Products Inc.
1220 East Gump Road
Fort Wayne, IN
46845 USA
(1NCU0)
PWC11-005+ Cleaner, Solvent 05867
Ref. Envirosolv 655
PMC 8914
PWC11-009 Alcohol, ethyl Local Purchase
AMS 3002 (A0001)
MIL-A-6091
O-E-760 TYPE III
MIL-STD-1201

Page 16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PRODUCTS.
PWC11-010 Alcohol, methyl Local Purchase
AMS 3004 (A0001)
O-M-232 Grade A
PWC11-012 Acetone (A0001)
Commercial Grade
PWC11-013 No longer available.
Use alternatives PWC11-013A,
PWC11-049
or PWC11-061
PWC11-013A Compound, carbon removing 35502
H-D-P2888
PWC11-014 Alcohol, isopropyl Local Purchase
TT-I-735 Grade A (A0001)
PWC11-016 Perchlorethylene - O-T-236A Local Purchase
(A0001)
PWC11-019 Solution, Chromate Conversion Local Purchase
Magnesium Alloy (A0001)
Ref. Open
US AMS 2475
PWC11-021 Compound, Turco Products Inc.
cold carbon removing Sub. of Efl Atochem North America
Turco Super Carb 7300 Bolsa Avenue
Westminster, CA
USA 92684-3600
(0BYN5)
PWC11-021A Compound, cold carbon removing Penetone Corp.
Penetone, Formula 423 Sub. of West Chemical Products
Inc.
74 Hudson Ave.
Tenafly, NJ
07670-1017 USA
(56883)
PWC11-021B Compound, Wyandotte Paint Products Co.
cold carbon removing 650 Stephenson Highway
Wyandotte, P-1075 P.O. Box 1196
Troy, MI
48099 USA
(88375)

Page 17
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PRODUCTS.
PWC11-023 Solvent, cleaning Brent America Inc.
Ardox Leeder 1064K 16961 Knott Avenue
La Mirada, CA
USA 90638-6015
(23373)
PWC11-023+ Solvent, Cleaning A0052(s)
Ref. Ardrox Leeder 1064K 23373(s)
PMC 8904 37127(s)
A0121(m)
44389
PWC11-025 Solvent, cleaning PRC-Desoto International
Desoclean 45 (formally Courtaulds Aerospace,
Inc.)
Glendale CA
USA 91203
(0NYS9)
PWC11-025+ Solvent, Cleaning 83574(m)
Ref. Desoclean 45
PMC 9060
PWC11-027 Solvent, cleaning Local Purchase
AMS 3160 (A0001)
PWC11-032 Solvent, cleaning Magnus Chemical Ltd.
Magkleen 4 (MAG - CHEM INC.)
190 Blvd. Industriel
Boucherville, Quebec
Canada J4B 2X3
(35502)
PWC11-038 Solvent, Cleaning Henkel Surface Technologies
Deoxidine No. 624 32100 Stephenson Hwy.
Madison Heights, MI
48071 USA
(71410)
or
Local Purchase
(A0001)

Page 18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PRODUCTS.
PWC11-040 W.C.T. Emulsifier - (P&WC Developed) Witco Chemical
2 parts Witconate P10-59B (PWC05- Allied Kelite Division
005) 2701 Lake Street
4 parts Carbitrol (PWC11-001l) Melrose Park, IL
1 part Triethanolamine (PWC11-001J) USA 60160-3041
(6Z384)
or
Witco Corp.
1 American Lane
Greenwich, CT
USA 06831-2559
(85665)
or
(36382)
PWC11-049 Remover, Rust, Alkaline A0052(s), 23373(s), 37127(s),
Ref. Ardrox 185 A0121(m), 44389, 02CA7, D1940
SPMC52
PWC11-054 Cleaner, Aqueous MAG - CHEM
Mag-Chem DG Kleen 190 Blvd. Industriel
SPMC 113 Boucherville, Quebec
Canada J4B 2X3
Tel: (450) 655-1344
Tel: (800) 363-9929
Fax: (450) 655-5428
www.magchem.com
PWC11-061 Remover, Rust, Alkaline 02ER0 (m)
Ref. MAG-CHEM
HDL-202 (Liquid)
SPMC 129
PWC11-074 Solvent, Non-Aqueous A0001(s)
(Bulk or Aerosol) A0141
Ref. New ERA Degreasing Fluid A0142
PMC 79004
PWC12-003 Remover Paint, Water based Henkel Corp.
Ref. Turco 6776-Lo Horsham Business Center
PMC 71360 300 Welsh Road
Bldg. 2, Suite 1
Horsham, PA 19044
USA
Tel: (215) 830-1212
Fax: Not availablep
www.henkel.com

Page 19
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PRODUCTS.
PWC13-001 Primer, Epoxy PRC-Desoto International
Glendale
CA 91209
USA
or
823 Eastgate Drive
Mt. Laurel
NJ 08054
USA
or
5676 Timberlea Blvd
Mississauga
Ontario
Canada
L4W 4M6
PWC13-003 Primer, Zinc Chromate - AMS 3110 Local Purchase
(A0001)
PWC15-011 Inhibitor, Rust Local Purchase
(External Engine Cold Section) (A0001)
Ref. Corrosion-X Corrosion Technologies Corp.
US MIL.C.81309D 2638 National Drive
Garland, TX 75041-2344
USA
(0VJ14)
PWC15-014A Compound, anti-corrosion Local Purchase
MIL-C-16173 (A0001)
Grade 1
PWC18-002 Primer, Sealing and Retaining Local Purchase
Compound, (A0001)
MIL-S-22473
Grade 1

Page 20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
SECTION PAGE DATE
LEP 1 Dec 02/2013
2 blank Dec 02/2013
Contents 1 Dec 02/2013

2 blank Dec 02/2013
Record of AWL 1 Dec 02/2013

Revisions 2 blank Dec 02/2013
Airworthiness AWL Dec 02/2013

Limitations AWL blank Dec 02/2013
1 Dec 02/2013
2 blank Dec 02/2013

Page 1/2
AIRWORTHINESS LEP Dec 02/2013
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
RECORD OF AIRWORTHINESS LIMITATIONS REVISIONS
AIRWORTHINESS LIMITATIONS
1. General 1

Page 1/2
AIRWORTHINESS CONTENTS Dec 02/2013
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Record of Airworthiness Limitations Revisions
Location Description of Change Date of Approval

- The FAA approved maintenance 28 November 2013
requirement has been introduced.

Page 1/2
RECORD OF AWL REVISIONS Dec 02/2013
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AIRWORTHINESS LIMITATIONS
The Airworthiness Limitations section is FAA approved and specifies

maintenance required under Sections 43.16 and 91.403 of title 14 of the
Code of Federal Aviation Regulations unless an alternative program has
been FAA approved.

AIRWORTHINESS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
......................
1. General
The Airworthiness Limitations section specifies mandatory Rotor Component Service Life
Limits required for type certification. The Airworthiness Limitations section is approved by
Transport Canada and specifies maintenance required by any applicable airworthiness or
operational rule unless an alternative program has been approved by Transport Canada.
A. For Rotor Component Service Life Limits refer to the latest revision of Service Bulletin
5002.

Page 1/2
AIRWORTHINESS Dec 02/2013
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER CHAPTER
LEP 1 Jul 18/2016 70-00-00 601 Jan 07/2005
2 blank Jul 18/2016 Inspection 602 Jan 07/2005
Check
Contents 1 Jul 18/2016
2 Jul 18/2016 70-00-00 701 Mar 09/2001
3 Jul 18/2016 Cleaning/ 702 Mar 09/2001
4 blank Jul 18/2016 Painting
70-00-00 201 Jul 18/2016 70-00-00 801 Nov 16/2012

Maintenance 202 Jul 18/2016 Approved 802 Nov 16/2012
Practices 203 Jul 18/2016 Repairs 803 Nov 16/2012
204 Jul 18/2016 804 Nov 16/2012
205 Jul 18/2016 805 Nov 16/2012
206 Jul 18/2016 806 Nov 16/2012
207 Jul 18/2016 807 Nov 16/2012
208 Jul 18/2016 808 blank Nov 16/2012
209 Jul 18/2016
210 Jul 18/2016
211 Jul 18/2016
212 Jul 18/2016
213 Jul 18/2016
214 Jul 18/2016
215 Jul 18/2016
216 Jul 18/2016
217 Jul 18/2016
218 Jul 18/2016
219 Jul 18/2016
220 Jul 18/2016
221 Jul 18/2016
222 blank Jul 18/2016
70-00-00 401 Jun 18/2010

Removal/ 402 Jun 18/2010
Installation 403 Jun 18/2010
404 Jun 18/2010
405 Jun 18/2010
406 Jun 18/2010
407 Jun 18/2010
408 Jun 18/2010
409 Jun 18/2010
410 blank Jun 18/2010

Page 1/2
70-00 LEP Jul 18/2016
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
STANDARD PRACTICES - MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES 70-00-00
1. General 201
2. Removal/Installation Procedures 201

3. Standard Torques 202
4. Torque Indicating Devices 202
5. General Torque Recommendations 203
A. Torque for Lubricated Parts 203
B. Nuts, Bolts and Screws 203

C. Self-locking Nuts/Bolts 203
D. Lockwire and Cotterpin Requirements 205
E. Slotted, Steel Locknuts (Prevailing Torque Type) 205
F. Standard and Stepped Studs 205
G. Hose, Tubing and Threaded Couplings 205
6. Locking Devices 206

A. General 206
B. Lockwire (Safety Wire) 206
C. Keywashers (Tab and Cup Type) 206
7. Identification Nuts and Bolts 206
8. Stainless Steel Bolts with Reduced Pitch Diameters 208

9. Identification of Metal Particles 208
A. General 208
B. Test Procedure 211
C. Debris Analysis and Material Specifications 212
D. Chip and Flake Analysis 212
E. Material Specifications 213

F. Laboratories 219

Page 1
70-00 CONTENTS Jul 18/2016
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
STANDARD PRACTICES - MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES (Cont’d) 70-00-00
10. Marking of Parts 219
A. General 219
B. Permanent Marking Methods 219
C. Temporary Marking Method 220
11. Lubrication of Preformed Packings 221

A. General 221
STANDARD PRACTICES - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION 70-00-00
1. Hydraulic, Oil and Pneumatic Tubes, Adapters and Couplings 401
A. Removal of Straight Nipples, Straight Adapters, Bulkhead

Couplings and Tube Connector Nipples. 401
B. Removal of Elbow Connections 401
C. Installation of Straight Nipples, Straight Adapters, Bulkhead

Couplings and Tube Connector Nipples. 401
D. Installation of Elbow Connections 401
E. Removal/Installation of Hydraulic, Oil and Pneumatic Tubes 404

2. Lockwiring Procedures 404
A. Lockwire 404
B. Basic Rules for Lockwiring (Safety Wiring) 404
C. Hole Alignment 409
D. Twisting 409
E. Procedure 409
3. Retaining Rings (Spirolox, etc.) 409
STANDARD PRACTICES - INSPECTION 70-00-00
1. Standard Inspection Procedure 601
A. General 601
B. Inspection 601

Page 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
STANDARD PRACTICES - INSPECTION (Cont’d) 70-00-00
C. External Tubes 601
D. Use of Inspection Gages 602
STANDARD PRACTICES - CLEANING 70-00-00
1. General 701
2. Cleaning 701
A. Precautions 701
B. Cleaning Before Welding 702
STANDARD PRACTICES - REPAIR 70-00-00
1. General 801
2. Approved Repairs 801

A. Welding 801
B. Blend Repair 803
C. Replacement of Helical Coil Inserts 803
D. Replacement of Studs 804
E. Chrome Pickle Touch-up for Magnesium Components 804
F. Application of Anodic Surface Treatment (Aluminum alloys

only) 805

Page 3/4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STANDARD PRACTICES - MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
1. General
This section contains the Pratt & Whitney approved general procedures to be used during
the performance of maintenance practices on engines.
All personnel engaged in the performance of these specific maintenance practices, or any
other operation on an engine involving partial or complete use of the associated procedures,
must be fully acquainted with the directives contained in the following paragraphs.
2. Removal/Installation Procedures
CAUTION: DUST CAPS USED TO PROTECT OPEN LINES AGAINST CONTAMINATION

SHALL ALWAYS BE INSTALLED OVER TUBE ENDS AND NOT IN THE TUBE
ENDS. FLOW THROUGH THE LINES MAY BE BLOCKED OFF IF LINES
ARE INADVERTENTLY INSTALLED WITH DUST CAPS IN THE TUBE ENDS.
To ensure proper reinstallation, tag and mark all parts, clips and brackets as to their location.
During removal of tubes or engine parts, look for indications of scoring, burning or other
undesirable conditions. To facilitate reinstallation, record the location of each part during
removal. Tag unserviceable parts and units for investigation and possible repair.
Extreme care shall be taken to prevent dust, dirt, lockwire (safety wire), nuts, washers or
other foreign matter from entering the engine. It cannot be overemphasized that this precaution
applies whenever work is done on the engine either installed or removed from airframe.
Suitable plugs, caps and other coverings shall be used to protect all openings as they are
exposed.
If at any time items are dropped into the engine, the assembly process must stop until the
dropped articles are located and retrieved, even though this may require a considerable
amount of time and labor. Before assembling or installing any part, be sure it is thoroughly
clean.
Lockwire (safety wire), lockwashers, tablocks, tabwashers, keywashers, cupwashers or

cotterpins shall never be reused. All lockwire and cotterpins must fit snugly in holes drilled in
bolts and studs for locking purposes. Install a cotterpin so that the head fits into the
castellation of the nut and, unless specified otherwise, bend one end of the pin back over
the stud or bolt and the other end down flat against the nut. Only lockwire and cotterpins made
of corrosion resistant steel shall be used. Bushing plugs shall be lockwired to the assembly
boss or case. Do not lockwire the plug to the bushing.
Replace all gaskets, packings, and rubber parts at reassembly. Make sure that new
non-metallic parts to be installed (such as oil seals) show no signs of having deteriorated in
storage. Lubricate all preformed packings before installation using system fluid or as
otherwise stated.
In order to protect critical areas of engine parts (such as compressor and turbine disks)
against scratches and nicks, tool surfaces contacting these areas must be covered with a
protective material.
70-00-00
Page 201
STANDARD PRACTICES - MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES Jul 18/2016
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
When installing engine parts that require the use of a hammer to facilitate assembly or
installation, use only a plastic or rawhide hammer.
Whenever adhesive tape has been applied to any part, the tape must be removed and the
part thoroughly cleaned of all tape residue with petroleum solvent (PWC11-027) prior to being
subjected to high temperature during engine run. Test results indicate that all tapes are
capable of causing surface attach and/or reduction in tensile ductility as temperature increases.
Do not leave tape or tape residue on engine parts.
If any part has been coated with a corrosion preventive compound, all traces of this
compound and accumulated foreign matter must be removed.
3. Standard Torques
Torque limits given in the following power plant and engine chapters are to be interpreted as
follows:
v Torque values in pound-inches at room temperature.

v Angles of turn in degrees.
v Stretch values in inches.
Unless otherwise specified, thread lubricants shall be applied to parts which are to be
torqued. Thread lubricant shall be engine oil unless otherwise specified.
If part to be tightened is hot, allow part to cool to ambient temperature before final torquing.
Flange bolts shall be drawn up evenly. This can be achieved by having two mechanics
working simultaneously 180 degrees apart.
Torque applications should be done slowly and evenly for consistency and the best possible
accuracy.
Six-point crowfoot adapters are recommended for applying torque values above 110 lb. in.
(12.4 Nm) to tube fittings.
4. Torque Indicating Devices
A. Check torque indicating devices before using, and calibrate by means of weights and a
measured lever arm . Checking one torque wrench against another is not sufficient.
Some wrenches are quite sensitive to the way they are supported during a tightening
operation, and every effort must be made to adhere to the instructions furnished by the
respective manufacturers.
B. Occasionally, it is necessary to use a special extension, or adapter wrench, in conjunction

with a standard torque wrench (Ref. Fig. 201). In order to arrive at the required torque
limits, the following formula shall be used:
T - Desired torque on the part.
E - Effective length of special extension or adapter.
L - Effective length of torque wrench.
A - Distance through which force is applied to part.
70-00-00
Page 202
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
R - Reading on scale or dial of torque wrench.

LT LT
R= A = L+E
Example:
A torque of 1440 pound-inches is desired on a part, using special extension having a
length of three inches from center to center of its holes, and a torque wrench measuring
15 inches from center of handle or handle swivel pin to center of its square adapter.
Then:
LT 15 X 1440
R=L+E= 15 + 3 = 1200 lb.in.
C. With the axis of the extension or adapter and the torque wrench in a straight line,
tightening to a wrench reading of 1200 pound-inches will provide the desired torque of
1440 pound-inches on the part.
5. General Torque Recommendations
A. Torque for Lubricated Parts
(1) Oil Lubricated Parts. Torque limits detailed in relevant assembly instructions for oil
lubricated parts apply specifically to the use of engine oil, or equivalent, on the
parts.
CAUTION: ENSURE THAT ANTI-SEIZE AND ANTI-GALLING COMPOUNDS ARE

APPLIED IN A THIN EVEN COAT, AND THAT EXCESS COMPOUND IS
COMPLETELY REMOVED TO AVOID CONTAMINATION OF ADJACENT
PARTS, PASSAGES OR SURFACES WHERE THE COMPOUND MAY
CAUSE MALFUNCTIONING, OR EVEN FAILURE, OF ENGINE.
(2) Anti-seize Lubricated Parts. Anti-galling compound (PWC06-010) should be applied

to all loose-fit spline drives which are external to the engine and have no other
means of lubrication. For certain assembly procedures, molybdenum disulfide
(PWC06-004) or (PWC06-004A) in either spray form (Type Gn) or powdered form
(Type Z) mixed with engine oil (PWC03-001) or grease may be used. Particular
applications of molybdenum disulfide are indicated in the individual text portions of
this manual, as applicable.
B. Nuts, Bolts and Screws
(1) Bolts and nuts on flanges with metal tabular gaskets must be initially torqued to the
required torque and then retorqued until torque values given in relevant assembly
instruction remain constant.
C. Self-locking Nuts/Bolts
(1) Where self-locking bolts, nuts and helical coil inserts are used, the following
procedure applies:
(a) For bolts or helical inserts, record the torque necessary to turn bolt in the
helical insert or threads before seating the bolt.
70-00-00
Page 203
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
E L
C192A
Torque Wrench and Extension

Figure 201
70-00-00
Page 204
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) For nuts record the torque necessary to turn nut on bolt before seating the nut.
(c) Add this torque to the value detailed in the assembly instructions for the
application. Use this new value as the total applied torque.
NOTE: Self-locking nuts should be checked for effectivity of self-locking

feature before reinstallation. Reject suspect bolts or nuts as necessary.
Replace defective helical inserts as required.
D. Lockwire and Cotterpin Requirements
(1) When tightening a castellated nut, alignment of slot must be obtained without
exceeding the maximum torque. If this is not possible, replace nut with another
one. After tightening nut to recommended torque, nut must not be loosened to permit
insertion of lockwire or cotterpin.
(2) If slot in nut or lockwire hole in bolt or screw is not correctly aligned at the minimum
torque value given, the nut, screw or bolt should be further tightened to next
alignment position, but maximum torque value given must not be exceeded.
(3) Should alignment still be impossible without exceeding maximum torque, back off
nut, screw or bolt one-half turn and retorque.
E. Slotted, Steel Locknuts (Prevailing Torque Type)
(1) Effective locking of slotted, steel locknuts on bolts or studs requires full engagement
of all locknut threads. The chamfered section of the locknut ID does not exert force
on the bolt or stud; therefore, it is not necessary that the bolt or stud be flush
with, or protrude from, the outer face of the locknut.
F. Standard and Stepped Studs
(1) When the torque required to drive a stud to the correct protrusion does not reach
the minimum value given, or exceeds the maximum value given, a new stud must
be selected.
G. Hose, Tubing and Threaded Couplings
(1) If leakage occurs at a coupling, do not attempt to correct by overtorquing.

Disassemble fitting and check for nicks, burrs and/or foreign matter. Use new parts
to rectify.
70-00-00
Page 205
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6. Locking Devices
A. General
(1) Lockwire (safety wire), lockwashers, tablocks, tabwashers, keywashers, cupwashers

and cotterpins must never be reused. All lockwire and cotterpins must fit snugly in
drilled holes in bolts and studs for locking purposes. Bushings and plugs must
be safety wired to boss or casing. Do not safety wire bush to plug. Install cotterpin
so that head fits into slot of castellated nut and, unless otherwise specified,
bend one end of pin back over stud or bolt and other end flat against flat on nut.
NOTE: For additional information on installation of locking devices refer to 72-00-00,

STANDARD PRACTICES - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.
B. Lockwire (Safety Wire)
(1) Use the same type of lockwire as that employed during initial assembly. Except
where otherwise specified, the wire is heat and corrosion-resistant steel, 0.025
inch diameter (PWC05-089).
C. Keywashers (Tab and Cup Type) (Ref. Fig. 202)
CAUTION: THESE TYPES OF WASHERS MUST BE USED ONCE ONLY. USE NEW
KEYWASHER(S) AT EACH ASSEMBLY.
(1) The terms keywasher, tabwasher and cupwasher are interchangeable, as used in
this manual.
(2) When bending or setting the tabs on these washers, do not use sharp-pointed
tools. Use of such tools can lead to subsequent failure of the locking tabs which,
on becoming detached, can pass through the engine causing extensive damage.
7. Identification Nuts and Bolts
CAUTION: NEVER ASSEMBLE A ’C’ CODED PART IN A LOCATION WHICH REQURIES

AN ’H’ CODED PART AND VICE-VERSA. NEVER USE CADMIUM PLATED
PARTS IN THE HOT SECTION OF THE ENGINE.
A. A permanent material designation code has been adopted for use in these engines.
Correct engine assembly requires that particular attention be paid to material
requirements for nuts and bolts used in the engine hot section, where parts must be
resistant to high operating temperature. During assembly of the engine or its components,
the properly coded parts, if serviceable, must be reassembled in their original location.
70-00-00
Page 206
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C1189B
Examples of Typical Lockwashers
Figure 202
70-00-00
Page 207
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. The code system employs a letter ‘‘C’’ for corrosion-resistant steel for normal application
and ‘‘H’’ for heat resistant alloys in hot section application. The stamped or embossed
letter will be followed by a number of one or more digits, such as C1, C8, H3, and H12. Bolt
code identification will usually appear on the top of the head (Ref. Fig. 203) and nut
identification on one side of the hex . When the application is an AN or MS six-digit part
number, the code identification ‘‘C’’ or ‘‘H’’ will be preceded by the letter ‘‘E’’ as in
EC3 or EH10.
NOTE: All AN or MS six-digit part numbers, when manufactured of material in the

common temperature range (such as cadmium plated, low alloy steel parts),
are also coded ‘‘E’’ to indicate, in part, close material quality control.
C. The code makes it possible to avoid assembly of corrosion-resistant steel parts in

locations that require high heat resistant parts. During disassembly (removal), all similarly
coded parts must be segregated so that two or more physically similar parts with
different code numbers willnot be mixed, and also, at subsequent assembly (installation),
the properly coded parts will be used in their proper locations.
D. Parts from several engines should not be mixed at disassembly (removal) and cleaning,
because, at the time of engine manufacture, production requirements may necessitate
one or more material substitutions in a block of engines. Subsequent engine reassembly
with indiscriminate scrambling of hardware, may result in unnecessary confusion in
sorting these parts for proper reassembly.
CAUTION: IT IS IMPORTANT THAT ‘‘J’’ THREADED HARDWARE BE CAREFULLY

SEGREGATED AND MARKED AT DISASSEMBLY (REMOVAL) TO PREVENT
MIXING OF ‘‘J’’ THREADED PARTS WITH NON ‘‘J’’ THREADED PARTS.
E. Unified Controlled Radius Root ‘‘J’’ Threaded Bolts feature full root radius for external
threads with increased minor internal threaded diameter. ‘‘J’’ threads ensure greater
fatigue life, improved stress relaxation characteristics and show improvement in tensile
strength over previous designs. This thread form is used extensively throughout these
engines. Engine bolts having ‘‘J’’ threads appear just like items threaded with
conventional threads.
8. Stainless Steel Bolts with Reduced Pitch Diameters
At engine manufacture, it is the practice to provide bolts with reduced pitch diameter for use
in the hot section of engine. This will minimize the possibility of bolt and nut seizure and
is standard practice for locations where the parts are subjected to higher temperatures (Ref.
Fig. 204).
9. Identification of Metal Particles
A. General
(1) When particles of metal are found, they may be steel, tin, aluminum, magnesium,
silver, bronze, titanium, or cadmium. In some instances the type of metal may be
identified by the color and hardness of the pieces. However, when the particles
cannot be positively identified visually, a few simple tests will iidentify the metal
present.
70-00-00
Page 208
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C196
Hardware Code Identification
Figure 203
70-00-00
Page 209
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
120 °
0.109
0.079
REDUCED PITCH DIAMETER BOLT
STANDARD BOLT
C197B
Reduced Pitch Diameter Bolt Identification

Figure 204
70-00-00
Page 210
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WARNING: USE EXTREME CARE IN HANDLING ACIDS AND OTHER CHEMICALS.

(2) The following items are required to make these tests (Ref. CONSUMABLE
MATERIALS):
Aqueous solution, 2 ounces: containing 10% ammonium nitrate (PWC05-011).
Hydrochloric acid (PWC05-196): 2 ounces, each 50% by volume.
Nitric acid, concentrated (PWC05-195A).
Sodium hydroxide pellets (PWC05-056)
Ammonium biflouride crystals (PWC05-009)
Hydrofluoric acid 5 to 10 percent (PWC05-201) or sulfuric acid concentrated
(PWC05-074)
Hydrogen peroxide 3 to 10 percent (PWC05-038)
Phosphoric acid (PWC05-202)
Solder (PWC05-205): 50% tin/50% lead.
Source of open flame.
Permanent magnet.
Electric soldering iron.
Watch glass.
White porcelain spot plate.
B. Test Procedure
(1) The following tests are recommended for identifying the unknown metal particles.
For best results, proceed as follows:
(a) Steel - the particles of many steels can be isolated by means of the permanent
magnet. Magnetic steel or iron is attracted by the magnet.
WARNING: NEVER ATTEMPT TO BURN MORE THAN A FEW PARTICLES OF

METAL SUSPECTED TO BE MAGNESIUM POWDER. DUST IS
EXPLOSIVE.
(b) Magnesium - a simple test for these particles is burning. Magnesium will burn
with a bright white flash.
(c) Cadmium - place the remaining particles in the aqueous (water) solution of
ammonium nitrate. If all or any of the particles dissolve in this solution, they
are cadmium. After this test, rinse and dry any remaining particles.
(d) Tin - the tin particles can be distinguished by their low melting point. With a
clean soldering iron heated to 260°C (500°F) and tinned with 50-50 solder
(50 percent tin - 50 percent lead), a tin particle dropped on the iron will melt and
fuse with the solder.
(e) Aluminum - When a particle of aluminum is placed in hydrochloric acid, 50

percent by volume, it will fizz with rapid emission of gas bubbles and
gradually disintegrate and form a black residue (aluminum chloride). Silver and
bronze do not noticeably react with hydrochloric acid.
70-00-00
Page 211
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(f) Aluminum Paint - Use this procedure to determine whether or not the material
is aluminum silicone paint, aluminum chips, or silver particles:
1 Make a sodium hydroxide solution by adding one pellet of sodium

hydroxide to three cubic centimeters of water.
2 Place several drops of this solution in a watch glass and drop in the
suspected particles.
3 If the particles are aluminum silicone paint, there will be a mild reaction in
the form of gas bubbles and some visible gas as the particles change to
sodium aluminate.
4 If the particles are aluminum chips, the reaction will be much more active
with many more gas bubbles forming and more visible gas.
5 If the particles are silver, there will be no reaction.
(g) Silver - When a silver particle is placed in nitric acid, it reacts rather slowly,
producing a whitish fog in the acid.
(h) Bronze - When a bronze (or copper) particle is placed in nitric acid, a bright
green cloud is produced.
C. Debris Analysis and Material Specifications
(1) Debris analysis monitors wear of oil-wetted engine parts. This procedure improves
aircraft serviceability and dispatch reliability and reduces engine repair costs. This
is achieved by identifying potential engine problems at the earliest possible stage,
thus minimizing the possibility of in-flight shutdowns, away-from-base engine
changes and secondary damage.
(2) Rapid wear or surface fatigue (e.g. on gear teeth contact surfaces, bearing
raceways, rolling elements, housing bearing bores, etc.) or interference between
rotating and fixed components (e.g. oil pump pinions, associated housings and
labyrinth seals, etc.) produces debris. Magnetic debris over 100 microns in diameter
is usually captured by the chip detectors. Magnetic and non-magnetic debris over
10 microns in diameter is usually captured by the oil system filters.
(3) Analysis (form, appearance, dimensions, quantity and material) of the debris
captured by the filters and chip detectors is necessary to provide the information
needed to facilitate locating the source of the debris and determining any
preventive maintenance action required.
D. Chip and Flake Analysis
(1) The analysis should be done by a qualified laboratory (Ref. Para . F.).
(2) The operator must provide the laboratory with the following information:
(a) Engine model and serial number.
70-00-00
Page 212
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) Engine time since new (TSN) or time since overhaul or refurbishment (TSO or
TSR).
(c) Chip detector position (Reduction Gearbox or Accessory Gearbox).
(d) Reason for chip detector inspection (scheduled or unscheduled).
(3) Reports supplied by the laboratory to the operator containing the results of the
analysis must include:
(a) Information provided by the operator when submitting the material for analysis.
(b) Type(s) of material found.
(c) Shape and appearance of the material.
(d) If bearing material (Ref. Table 201) is found, the operator must be advised as
soon as possible by telephone and provided with a detailed written report.
E. Material Specifications
(1) To facilitate the identification of components which are the source of debris found in
the oil system, the material specifications are listed in Table 201 . The common
contaminants found in the oil system are listed in Tables 202 and 203.
TABLE 201, Material Specification (Engine Components)
Specification Material Part Nomenclature Engine Location

AMS2251 Steel, Low-Alloy Bearing Rollers and No. 3 Bearing
Outer Ring
No. 4 Bearing
No. 6 Bearing
AMS4117 Alum Alloy Scavenge Pump Spacer AGB
(6061-T6, -T651)
Scavenge Pump Cover AGB
Oil Pump Gearshaft Scavenge Pump AGB
AMS4120 Alum Alloy Lock Pin Main Pump AGB
(2024-T4/2024-T351)
Retaining Plug Oil Pressure Relief Valve AGB
AMS4150 Alum Alloy (6061-T6) Stator Air Seal Compressor Rotor
Oil Pump Gearshaft Scavenge Pump AGB
Retaining Plug Oil Pressure Relief Valve AGB
AMS4214 Alum Alloy Oil Pressure Pump Cover RGB
(355.0 - T71)
Oil Scavenge Pump AGB
70-00-00
Page 213
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE 201, Material Specification (Engine Components) (Cont’d)

Scavenge Pump Spacer AGB
Check Valve Housing AGB
AMS4215 Alum Alloy Oil Pressure Pump RGB
(C355.0-T6P)
AMS4439 Mag. Alloy Main Pressure Pump AGB
(ZE41A) Housing
AMS4615 Copper Alloy Bearing Cage Tachometer Drive Gearshaft
Fuel Control Drive Gearshaft
Starter-Generator Drive
Gearshaft
AMS4616 Silicon Bronze Bearing Cage Accessory Drive Gearshaft
(Cu-Si)
Intermediate Drive Idler Gear
Tachometer Drive Gearshaft
Gearshaft
Coupling Shaft Accessory
Gearbox
No. 2 Bearing
No. 3 Bearing
No. 7 Bearing
No. 10 Bearing (Pre-SB5402)
No. 11 Bearing
No. 12 Bearing
No. 13 Bearing
No. 14 Bearing
No. 15 Bearing
No. 16 Bearing
AMS4928 Titanium Alloy Seal Insert Compressor Rotor
(6-4)
AMS5613 Heat/Corrosion Stator Air Seal Compressor Rotor
Resistant Steel
(51410)
70-00-00
Page 214
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Rotor Air Seal No. 2 Bearing Compressor
Rotor
Air Seal Compressor Stub Shaft
Air Seal Power Turbine Rotor
Air Seal Power Turbine Stator
Flat Spacer Scavenge Pump AGB
AMS5666 Heat/Corrosion Air Seal No. 1 Bearing Compressor
Resistant Nickel Hub Assy
Alloy Inconel 625
AMS5688 Corrosion Resistant Helical Spring No.3 and 4 Bearing Housing
Steel (30302) Support
Filter Bypass Valve RGB
Assembly Spring
Pressure Regulating RGB
Valve Spring
AMS6250 Low Alloy Steel Bearing Outer Ring Fuel Control Drive Gearshaft
(3310)
Gearshaft
AMS6260 Low Alloy Steel Sprag Clutch RGB
(9310) (Pre-SB5421)
Bearing Outer Ring Tachometer Drive Gearshaft
Gearshaft
AMS6265 Low Alloy Steel Oil Pump Gear Oil Pump (RGB)
(9310)
Accessory Drive RGB
Gearshaft
Tacho-Gen Drive RGB
Gearshaft
Governor Drive RGB
Gearshaft
Intermediate Drive RGB
Scavenge Pump Gear Scavenge Pump AGB
Idler Gear RGB
Clutch Drive Shaft RGB
70-00-00
Page 215
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Sprag Clutch RGB
(Post-SB5421)
Clutch Drive Spur Gear RGB
Main Input Drive Shaft RGB
Helical Gear
Coupling Shaft
Output Drive Gearshaft RGB
Pressure Pump Coupling RGB
Main Pressure Pump AGB
Spur Gear
Fuel Control Drive AGB
Gearshaft
Tachometer Drive AGB
Gearshaft
Starter- Generator Drive AGB
Gearshaft
No. 1 Bearing Inner Compressor Rotor
Housing
No. 1 Bearing Outer Compressor Rotor
Housing
Coupling Shaft Power Turbine Shaft
Coupling Shaft Main Input Drive
(8615) (Pre-SB5421)
(8620) (Pre-SB5421)
AMS6322 Low Alloy Steel Check Valve Spring Seat No. 3 and 4 Bearing Housing
(8740) Support
Jet Pump Check Valve No. 3 and 4 Bearing Housing
Support
Valve No. 3 and 4 Bearing Housing
Support
Positioning Ring Power Turbine Shaft
AMS6323 Low Alloy Steel Check Valve Spring Seat No. 3 and 4 Bearing Housing
(8740) Support
70-00-00
Page 216
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Jet Pump Check Valve No. 3 and 4 Bearing Housing
Support
Positioning Ring Power Turbine Shaft
AMS6414 Low Alloy Steel Bearing Cage No. 1 Bearing
(4340)
No. 2 Bearing
No. 3 Bearing
No. 4 Bearing
No. 5 Bearing
No. 10 Bearing
(Post-SB5402)
No. 10.5 Bearing
No. 17 Bearing
Torquemeter Piston Torquemeter Assy
Torquemeter Cylinder Torquemeter Assy
Power Turbine Shaft Power Turbine Rotor
Balancing
AMS6415 Low Alloy Steel Bearing Cage No.1 Bearing
(4340)
No. 4 Bearing
No. 6 Bearing
No. 8 Bearing
No. 10.5 Bearing
No. 15 Bearing
Scavenge Pump Accessory Gearbox
Coupling
AMS6440 Low Alloy Steel Bearing Roller and Accessory Drive Gearshaft
(52100) Races
Intermediate Drive Idler Gear
Tachometer Drive Gearshaft
Gearshaft
AMS6444 Low Alloy Steel Bearing Rollers or Balls Tachometer Drive Gearshaft
(52100) and Races
70-00-00
Page 217
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

No. 1 Bearing
No. 2 Bearing
No. 4 Bearing
No. 7 Bearing
No. 8 Bearing
No. 10.5 Bearing
No. 11 Bearing
No. 12 Bearing
No. 12.5 Bearing
No. 13 Bearing
No. 14 Bearing
No. 15 Bearing
AMS6491 Low Alloy Steel Bearing Rollers and No. 5 Bearing
(M-50) Races
No. 10 Bearing
(Post-SB5402)
CPW615 Al Alloy (850.0-T5) Flanged Sleeve Bearing Main Pressure Pump
Accessory Gearbox
TABLE 202, Common Contaminants - Non-organic Material
Contaminant Main Cause of

Detected Elements Contaminants
Alumina Al203 Manufacturing
Calcium Oxide CaO Environment
Rust, Non-magnetic Fe2O3 Rust
Sand SiO2 Manufacturing/Environment
Silicon Carbide (Black, Shiny, Angular) SiC Manufacturing/Blasting
Zirconia ZrSiO4 Manufacturing
70-00-00
Page 218
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE 202, Common Contaminants - Non-organic Material (Cont’d)
Contaminant Main Cause of

Detected Elements Contaminants
Mo52 Common as a trace, could combine
with Fe (Iron) to indicate bearing alloy.
Usually found in new or
overhauled engines.
Calcium Chloride (Salt) CaCl2 Environment
Sodium Chloride (Salt) NaCl Environment
Calcium Sulphate (Salt) CaSO4 Environment
TABLE 203, Common Contaminants - Organic Material
Contaminant
Detected Source
Black Fluorocarbon Rubber, Red Silicon Preformed Packings, Seal Gaskets
Rubber, Blue Fluorosilicon Rubber
Chloroprene Nitrile Rubber Gaskets
Carbon Decomposed Oil, Carbon Seals
Fibers
Plastics
Paint Flakes
F. Laboratories
(1) Chip and flake analysis must be done by approved laboratories; refer to Service
Information Letter No. GEN-123 for the list of approved oil laboratories.
10. Marking of Parts
A. General
(1) Marking of engine parts, assemblies, or weldments shall be applied so as to ensure

maximum legibility and durability of mark but in a manner that will not affect
function or serviceability of part. Only applicable Pratt & Whitney Canada marking
methods shall be used.
B. Permanent Marking Methods
(1) Permanent methods of marking, in which marking is legible during the entire
service life of the part, are described as follows:
70-00-00
Page 219
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: ELECTRIC ARC SCRIBING, WHICH IS PROHIBITED ON TURBINE

ENGINES, MUST NOT BE CONFUSED WITH ELECTROLYTIC
ETCHING.
(a) Electrolytic Etch - Ordinarily, electrolytic etch markings may be applied to any
surface which, after assembly, does not move relative to a contacting surface.
Anodized parts, however, cannot be electrolytically etched. Characters are
produced by electrolysis, confined to the area of the character by a stencil, or
by an electrolytic marking pen. This technique is sometimes used as a
temporary method.
(b) Vibration Peening - This is a process whereby characters are produced by a

vibrating radius-tipped comical tool. This method is not permitted if the
hardness of the material at the time of marking is higher than Rockwell C45, or
equivalent.
C. Temporary Marking Method
CAUTION: LEAD AND/OR METALLIC PENCILS, OR ANY TEMPORARY MARKING

METHOD LEAVING A DETRIMENTAL DEPOSIT OF CARBON, ZINC,
COPPER, LEAD, OR SIMILAR RESIDUE WHICH MAY CAUSE A
REDUCTION IN FATIGUE STRENGTH AS A RESULT OF CARBURIZATION
OR INTERGRANULAR ATTACK WHEN THE PART IS SUBJECTED TO
INTENSE HEAT, SHALL NOT BE USED. IN THE EVENT THAT AN
UNAUTHORIZED MARKING MATERIAL IS USED, THE MARK MUST BE
THOROUGHLY REMOVED BY A PROCEDURE DICTATED BY THE
MARKING METHOD AND THE PART MATERIAL.
(1) Temporary methods of marking is one which ensures identification during ordinary
handling and storage of items prior to assembly.
NOTE: If a non-approved marking material is used, the mark must be completely

removed to preclude any possible reduction in fatigue strength. The
method of removal depends on the type of marker used and the particular
part marked.
(2) The following materials are approved for temporary marking of the cold areas of the
engine:
NOTE: The CML numbers shown in parentheses refer to the consumable material
item number in CONSUMABLE MATERIALS.
(a) Volgers Ink (Black) (PWC05-046B)
(b) Dykem Ink KX425 (Black) (PWC05-046C)
(c) Dykem Ink KXX122 (White) (PWC05-046C)
(d) Denison Carter’s No. 21451 (Black) (PWC05-027)
(3) The following materials are approved for temporary marking of the cold areas and
the hot section of the engine:
(a) Felt Wick Pin (PWC05-048A)
70-00-00
Page 220
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) Brush Pin (Instant Dry) Marker (PWC05-046A) 400-1 (Black) 400-2 (Red)
and 400-7 (Purple)
(c) Micro Supreme Dye, No. 142 (Purple) (PWC05-002)
(d) Phano Pencil, No. 71 (Red) (PWC05-103)
(e) Design Spectracolor Silver 1428(PWC05-018) or Verithin No. 753 Silver

(PWC05-018A)
(4) Marking Locations and Size
CAUTION: WHEN USING A MARKER, MARKS MUST NOT BE APPLIED TO

MATING SURFACES OF FINISHED MACHINED PARTS OR TO
CARBON SEAL PLATE SURFACES. HEAVY DEPOSITS OF MARKING
MATERIAL COULD ADVERSELY AFFECT CLEARANCES AND
RUNOUT.
(a) Except where otherwise specified, reidentification should be accomplished in
the same manner and adjacent to, or in a location similar to that of, the
original marking.
(b) All markings should be applied so as to ensure maximum legibility and

durability or the mark produced without affecting the function or serviceability of
the part. Permanent markings should not extend into any radius, chamfer,
sharp edge or fillet adjointing the surface designed to be marked.
(c) Unless otherwise specified, marking characters should be 0.060 to 0.160 inch
in height. In special cases, when the marking area is limited by size or
configuration, characters not less than 0.016 inch and not more than 0.025 inch
in height will be permitted.
11. Lubrication of Preformed Packings
A. General
CAUTION: APPLICATION OF LUBRICANT PLUS PROPER ASSEMBLY, WILL

PREVENT DAMAGE TO PACKINGS WHICH COULD CAUSE ENGINE
MALFUNCTION.
(1) Prior to installation, new pre-formed packings must be coated with a film of
lubricant to the following specifications (Ref. CONSUMABLE MATERIALS):
(a) Packings used in engine fuel system: Engine synthetic lubricating oil,
(PWC03-001).
(b) Packings used in engine oil system: Engine synthetic lubricating oil,
(PWC03-001).
(c) Packings used in engine pneumatic system and in water system assemblies:
Petrolatum, (PWC06-002).
70-00-00
Page 221/222
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STANDARD PRACTICES - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Hydraulic, Oil and Pneumatic Tubes, Adapters and Couplings
CAUTION: DO NOT SUBJECT HYDRAULIC, OIL OR PNEUMATIC LINES/TUBES TO

BENDING OR COMPRESSION STRESSES DURING REMOVAL OR
INSTALLATION.
A. Removal of Straight Nipples, Straight Adapters, Bulkhead Couplings and Tube

Connector Nipples.
(1) Remove fittings from engine line or accessory units.
(2) Remove preformed packing from fitting and discard packing.
B. Removal of Elbow Connections (Ref. Fig. 401)
NOTE: Before removal, note angular position of elbow on engine or unit.
(1) Remove elbow (1) from engine line or accessory unit.
(2) Remove preformed packing (4), packing retainers (back-up ring) (3) and locknut (2)
from elbow.
C. Installation of Straight Nipples, Straight Adapters, Bulkhead Couplings and Tube

Connector Nipples.
(1) Lubricate new preformed packing with light film of engine oil (Ref. SB5001) or fluid
used in line.
(2) Install preformed packing on fitting and screw fitting in boss or flange, as applicable.
(3) Tighten fitting in boss and torque to value detailed in relevant assembly instruction.
CAUTION: EXCESSIVE TIGHTENING WILL RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THREADS

OF MATING PARTS.
(4) Install locknut on flange-mounted fittings and torque locknut to recommended value
(Ref. Table 401).
D. Installation of Elbow Connections (Ref. Fig. 401)
(1) Lubricate new preformed packing (4), packing retainer (3) and thread of elbow (1)
with light film of fluid to be used in the line.
P&WC Proprietary Information. Subject to the restrictions on the title page.

70-00-00 Page 401
STANDARD PRACTICES - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION Jun 18/2010
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1
1
2
2
3
3
4 4
C3146A
Installation of Typical Elbow Fitting

Figure 401

70-00-00 Page 402
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 401
1. Elbow Fitting
2. Locknut
3. Packing Retainer
4. Preformed Packing
TABLE 401, Torque Values for Locknuts
THREAD SIZE TORQUE (lb.in.)

0.2500-28 14 to 16
0.3125-24 22 to 24
0.3750-24 28 to 32
0.4375-20 38 to 42
0.5000-20 58 to 62
0.5625-18 70 to 80
0.6250-18 95 to 105
0.7500-16 145 to 155
0.8125-16 165 to 185
(2) Assemble jam nut (2), packing retainer (3) and preformed packing (4) on elbow (1),
pressing packing retainer into counterbore of jam nut.
(3) Turn locknut (2) down elbow (1) until preformed packing (4) is seated in non-threaded
groove of fitting.
(4) Turn locknut (2) outward until preformed packing (4) is pushed firmly against first
lower thread of elbow (1).
(5) Install elbow (1) into boss, allowing locknut (2) to turn with elbow until preformed
packing (4) contacts boss mating face (this point will be recognized by increase in
torque).
(6) Hold locknut (2) stationary and turn elbow (1) into boss a further 1 1/2 turns.
NOTE: The elbow may be further turned inward of a maximum of one turn to
facilitate alignment. Should the locknut tighten on the elbow before the
elbow if fully installed in the boss, the nut may be allowed to turn with the
elbow.
(7) With elbow (1) correctly aligned, tighten locknut (2) and torque to recommended
torque (Ref. Table 401).
(8) Make sure that there is no protrusion of preformed packing (4) or packing retainer
(3).
(9) Lockwire locknut (2) if required.

70-00-00 Page 403
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
E. Removal/Installation of Hydraulic, Oil and Pneumatic Tubes
(1) Refer to applicable chapter for specific assembly instructions.
(2) If removal of tube assemblies with clamps is necessary, identify and record clamp
locations and attaching hardware before tube removal. This will ensure correct
location of clamps and attaching hardware during assembly.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE FORCE TO POSITION LINE ONTO COUPLING ADAPTERS.

(3) When installing hydraulic, oil or pneumatic tubes/lines, whether solid tubes or
flexible hoses, ensure lines engage onto respective coupling adapters without
tension or load. Brackets shall be re-positioned as required.
(4) Alignment must be obtained by adjusting the position of the adapters. Refer to
paragraphs C. and D. preceding, for instructions pertaining to the installation of
adapters.
(5) Refer to Table 402 for typical torque values for tube assembly coupling nuts unless
otherwise specified in the procedure.
TABLE 402, Torque Values for Tube Assembly Coupling Nuts
TUBE O.D. (in.) THREAD SIZE TORQUE LIMITS (lb. in.)

0.1875 0.375-24 70 to 80
0.250 0.4375 - 20 90 to 100
0.3125 0.500 - 20 135 to 150
0.375 0.5625 - 18 270 to 300
2. Lockwiring Procedures (Ref. Fig. 402 and 403)
A. Lockwire
(1) Use the same type of lockwire as that employed during initial assembly. Except
where otherwise specified, the wire is heat and corrosion resistant steel wire of
0.025 inch diameter (PWC05-089).
B. Basic Rules for Lockwiring (Safety Wiring)
(1) Lockwire must be tight after installation to prevent failure due to rubbing or
vibration.
(2) Lockwire must be installed in a manner that tends to tighten and keep a part locked
in place, thus counteracting the natural tendency of the part to loosen.
(3) Lockwire must never be overstressed. It will break under vibration if twisted too
tightly. The lockwire shall be pulled taut when being twisted but shall have
minimum tension, if any, when secured.
(4) Lockwire ends must be bent toward the engine or part to avoid sharp projecting
ends that may present a safety hazard or vibrate in the airstream.

70-00-00 Page 404
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INSERT THE UPPERMOST WIRE,

WHICH POINTS TOWARDS THE
SECOND BOLT, THROUGH THE
10:30 HOLE WHICH LIES BETWEEN THE
4:30
O’CLOCK O’CLOCK POSITION THE HOLES NINE AND TWELVE O’CLOCK
POSITIONS. GRASP THE END OF
THE WIRE WITH A PAIR OF
PLIERS AND PULL THE WIRE
TIGHT.
BRING THE FREE END OF THE
WIRE AROUND THE BOLT HEAD
IN A COUNTERCLOCKWISE
INSERT PROPER DIRECTION AND UNDER THE
GAGE WIRE END PROTRUDING FROM
THE BOLT HOLE. TWIST THE
WIRE IN A COUNTERCLOCK−
WISE DIRECTION.
GRASP UPPER END OF

THE WIRE AND BEND IT
GRASP THE WIRE BEYOND THE
AROUND THE HEAD OF
TWISTED PORTION AND TWIST
THE BOLT, THEN UNDER
THE WIRE ENDS COUNTER−
THE OTHER END OF THE
CLOCKWISE UNTIL TIGHT.
WIRE. BE SURE WIRE IS
TIGHT AROUND HEAD.
TWIST WIRE UNTIL DURING THE FINAL TWISTING

WIRE IS JUST SHORT MOTION OF THE PLIERS, BEND
OF HOLE IN THE SECOND THE WIRE DOWN AND UNDER
BOLT. THE HEAD OF THE BOLT.
KEEPING WIRE UNDER

TENSION, TWIST IN A
CLOCKWISE DIRECTION
UNTIL THE WIRE IS TIGHT. CUT OFF EXCESS WIRE WITH
WHEN TIGHTENED THE DIAGNOL CUTTERS.
WIRE SHALL HAVE
APPROXIMATELY 7 TO 10
TWISTS PER INCH.
C194D
Lockwiring Procedure
Figure 402

70-00-00 Page 405
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EXAMPLE 1 EXAMPLE 2 EXAMPLE 3 EXAMPLE 4

EXAMPLES 1,2,3 AND 4 APPLY TO ALL TYPES OF BOLTS, FILLISTER HEAD SCREWS, SQUARE HEAD PLUGS, AND OTHER SIMILAR
PARTS WHICH ARE WIRED SO THAT THE LOOSENING TENDENCY OF EITHER PART IS COUNTERACTED BY TIGHTENING OF THE OTHER PART.
THE DIRECTION OF TWIST, FROM THE SECOND TO THE THIRD UNIT, IS COUNTER−CLOCKWISE TO KEEP THE LOOP IN POSITION AGAINST
THE HEAD OF THE BOLT. THE WIRE ENTERING THE HOLE IN THE THIRD UNIT WILL BE THE LOWER WIRE AND BY MAKING A
COUNTER−CLOCKWISE TWIST AFTER IT LEAVES THE HOLE, THE LOOP WILL BE SECURED IN PLACE AROUND THE HEAD OF THAT BOLT.
EXAMPLE 5 EXAMPLE 6 EXAMPLE 7 EXAMPLE 8

EXAMPLES 5,6,7 AND 8 SHOW METHODS FOR WIRING VARIOUS STANDARD ITEMS. WIRE MAY BE WRAPPED OVER THE UNIT
RATHER THAN AROUND IT WHEN WIRING CASTELLATED NUTS OR ON OTHER ITEMS WHEN THERE IS A CLEARANCE PROBLEM.
EXAMPLE 9 EXAMPLE 10 EXAMPLE 11

EXAMPLE 9 SHOWS THE METHOD EXAMPLE 10 SHOWS HOLLOW EXAMPLE 11 SHOWS CORRECT
FOR WIRING BOLTS IN DIFFERENT HEAD PLUGS WIRED WITH THE APPLICATION OF SINGLE WIRE
PLANES. NOTE THAT WIRE SHOULD TAB BENT INSIDE THE HOLE TO CLOSELY SPACED MULTIPLE
ALWAYS BE APPLIED SO THAT TO AVOID SNAGS AND POSSIBLE GROUP.
TENSION IS IN THE TIGHTENING INJURY TO PERSONNEL WORKING
DIRECTION. ON THE ENGINE.
C195_1
Lockwiring Examples
Figure 403 (Sheet 1 of 3)

70-00-00 Page 406
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EXAMPLE 12 EXAMPLE 13
EXAMPLES 12 AND 13 SHOW METHODS FOR ATTACHING LEAD SEAL TO PROTECT CRITICAL ADJUSTMENTS.
EXAMPLE 14 EXAMPLE 15 EXAMPLE 16

EXAMPLE 14 SHOWS BOLT WIRED TO EXAMPLE 15 SHOWS CORRECT METHOD EXAMPLE 16 SHOWS CORRECT METHOD
A RIGHT ANGLE BRACKET WITH THE FOR WIRING ADJUSTABLE CONNECTING FOR WIRING THE COUPLING NUT ON
WIRE WRAPPED AROUND THE BRACKET. ROD. FLEXIBLE LINE TO THE STRAIGHT
CONNECTOR BRAZED ON RIGID TUBE.
EXAMPLE 17 EXAMPLE 18 EXAMPLE 19 EXAMPLE 20 EXAMPLE 21
FITTINGS INCORPORATING WIRE LUGS SHALL BE WIRED AS SHOWN SMALL SIZE COUPLING NUTS SHALL
IN EXAMPLES 17 AND 18. WHERE NO LOCKWIRE LUG IS PROVIDED, BE WIRED BY WRAPPING THE WIRE
WIRE SHOULD BE APPLIED AS SHOWN IN EXAMPLES 19 AND 20 AROUND THE NUT AND INSERTING
WITH CAUTION BEING EXERTED TO ENSURE THAT WIRE IS WRAPPED IT THROUGH THE HOLES AS SHOWN.
TIGHTLY AROUND THE FITTING.
C195_2
Lockwiring Examples
Figure 403 (Sheet 2)

70-00-00 Page 407
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
COUPLING NUTS ATTACHED TO STRAIGHT CONNECTORS SHALL BE WIRED
AS SHOWN WHEN HEX IS AN INTEGRAL PART OF THE CONNECTOR.
EXAMPLE 24
COUPLING NUTS ON A TEE SHALL
BE WIRED AS SHOWN ABOVE SO
THAT TENSION IS ALWAYS IN THE
TIGHTENING DIRECTION.
EXAMPLE 25
STRAIGHT CONNECTOR
(BULKHEAD TYPE)
EXAMPLE 26
EXAMPLES 26, 27 AND 28 SHOW THE VARIOUS STANDARD FITTINGS WITH CHECK NUT
WIRED SO THAT IT NEED NOT BE DISTURBED WHEN REMOVING THE COUPLING NUT.
C195_3
Lockwiring Examples

70-00-00 Page 408
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) Internal wiring must not cross over or obstruct a flow passage when an alternate
method can be used.
C. Hole Alignment
(1) Check units to be lockwired to ensure that they have been correctly torqued and
that wiring holes are properly positioned in relation to each other. When there are
two or more units, it is desirable that holes in the units be in the same relationship to
each other. It should be possible to align the wiring holes when the units are
torqued within specified limits.
(2) Never overtorque or loosen units to obtain proper alignment of the holes. However,
if it is impossible to obtain a proper alignment of the holes without either over or
under torquing, select another unit which will permit proper alignment within the
specified torque limits.
D. Twisting
To prevent mutilation of the twisted section of the wire when using pliers, grasp wire at
ends or at a point that will not be twisted. Lockwire must not be nicked, kinked, or
mutilated. Never twist ends off with pliers and, when cutting off ends, leave at least
three complete turns after loop, exercising extreme care to prevent wire ends from falling
into engine. The strength of the lockwire holes is marginal; never twist wire off with
pliers. Cut lockwire close to hole, exercising extreme care.
E. Procedure
Figure 402 illustrates a typical lockwiring procedure. Although there are numerous
lockwiring operations performed on these engines, practically all are derived from the
basic examples shown in Figure 403.
3. Retaining Rings (Spirolox, etc.)
Retaining rings must be installed using approved retaining ring pliers. Internal-type rings
must not be compressed beyond the point where ends of the ring meet. External-type rings
must be expanded only enough to allow installation without becoming bent. After
installation, ensure each retaining ring is completely seated in its groove, without looseness
or distortion.

70-00-00 Page 409/410
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STANDARD PRACTICES - INSPECTION
1. Standard Inspection Procedure
A. General
Damage to engine parts may result from improper clearance, lack of lubrication,
undesired movement of parts which are bolted or pressed together, overload, uneven
load distribution, heat shock extension of minor injuries such as scratches, tool marks,
grinding cracks, nicks, etc. Damage to parts may also result from presence of foreign
matter such as grit, chips, moisture, chemicals, etc., or from improper techniques during
assembly or disassembly.
NOTE: While it is frequently possible to repair a damaged part so that it may be safely
reinstalled, it is important that the cause of the damage be determined and
corrected if possible. Otherwise more serious consequences may result.
B. Inspection
(1) Inspect parts for alignment, distortion, foreign matter, looseness, out-of-roundness,
sharp edges, scratches, taper, warping and wear. Additionally, check the following:
(a) Holes in cases, manifolds, pipes and tubes for obstructions.
(b) Gear teeth and splines for contact patterns.
(c) Magnesium parts for corrosion.
(d) Mounting pads, parting and seating surfaces, for smoothness and flatness.
NOTE: Use pencil carbon paper whenever a smear-type indication of

surface smoothness is required.
(e) Plugs for tightness.
(f) Studs, dowels, and similar protruding parts for alignment and projection length.
(g) Protective surface coatings for completeness.
(h) Condition of threads.
C. External Tubes
(1) Inspect all external tubing, except where special instructions apply:
(a) Scratches - Minor scratches having no appreciable depth are acceptable.

Scratches to a depth of 0.005 inch should be blended out.
(b) Nicks - Individual nicks should not be more than 0.062 inch long, 0.010 inch
wide, and 0.003 inch deep. Nicks to a maximum depth of 0.005 inch should
be blended out to remove sharp edges.
70-00-00 Page 601

STANDARD PRACTICES - INSPECTION Jan 07/2005
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) Dents - Round bottom dents are acceptable provided the depth is not greater
than 10 percent of the normal outside diameter of the tube. No more than three
dents to the maximum depth are acceptable per 12-inch length of tube and
such dents must be separated by at least 0.250 inch. Dents are unacceptable
within 0.250 inch of ferrules or fittings.
(d) Chafing - Acceptable, providing three-quarter of wall thickness remains after

blending. Each blended area must not exceed one-half square inch.
(e) Pitting - Minor isolated pitting is permissible, provided pitting is not greater than
0.003 inch deep. Clusters of pitting should be blended out to a maximum depth
of 0.005 inch.
(f) Corrosion - Rust and stains are acceptable if removal by light polishing with
crocus cloth and oil.
(g) Inspect flexible hoses for cuts, crimping or buckling. No damage allowed.
(h) Inspect coupling nuts for cracks and thread damage.
D. Use of Inspection Gages
(1) When an inspection procedure requires a very accurate measurement, a micrometer

or a dial indicator must be used.
(2) If a micrometer or vernier is to be used, it must be checked for accuracy before

making measurement.
NOTE: Ensure that contact faces of the micrometer are clean and that the contact
faces of part to be measured are clean and free of dirt and burrs.
(3) When using depth micrometer, the anvil must be held tightly and squarely against
the contact surface.
(4) When using dial indicator, its support must be firmly anchored and any swivel
connections securely tightened .
(5) When using feeler gages, the gage final size must be a reasonably snug fit.
70-00-00 Page 602

STANDARD PRACTICES - INSPECTION Jan 07/2005
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STANDARD PRACTICES - CLEANING
1. General
The primary purpose of cleaning is to remove contaminants which might conceal minor
cracks and other defects which, if not detected, could eventually lead to failure of a component
or part. Engine components or parts should be cleaned only as necessary to perform
required inspection and repair. Overcleaning of components or parts is unnecessary and
should be avoided. The cleaning methods given in the following text are adequate for all
maintenance levels.
2. Cleaning
A. Precautions
WARNING: MANY OF THE SOLUTIONS AND THEIR COMPONENTS USED IN

CLEANING ARE HARMFUL TO SKIN AND CLOTHING, AND ADEQUATE
PROTECTION IS NECESSARY TO AVOID CONTACT WITH THEM.
CERTAIN SOLUTIONS ARE EXTREMELY CORROSIVE AND/OR TOXIC,
AND REQUIRE THE USE OF PROTECTIVE APRONS, GLOVES AND
GOGGLES. OTHER SOLUTIONS EMIT HARMFUL VAPORS AND
ADEQUATE VENTILATON MUST BE PROVIDED.
CAUTION: TAKE PARTICULAR CARE IN SELECTING CLEANING METHOD TO

ENSURE THAT ANODIZING AND OTHER PROTECTIVE COATINGS ARE
NOT REMOVED FROM PARENT METAL. DO NOT USE ALKALIS ON
ALUMINUM, MAGNESIUM, ALUMINIZED AND PAINTED PARTS.
(1) Wear rubber gloves, apron or coveralls and face shield or goggles, when working
with or near solvents.
(2) Use the least toxic of available cleaning materials which will satisfactorily accomplish
work.
NOTE: The choice of cleaning agents should be limited to consumables listed in

CONSUMABLE MATERIALS section. The toxicity of cleaning agents will,
however, depend on the type of contamination encountered on part to
be cleaned.
(3) Perform all cleaning operations in a well ventilated work area.
(4) Ensure that adequate and usable fire fighting and safety equipment is conveniently
located and available to all personnel.
(5) Do not smoke or expose a flame within 50 feet of cleaning area.
(6) Ensure that all degreasing agents are thoroughly removed from all parts after
cleaning.
(7) Except where specifically instructed, do not use steel brushes for any cleaning
operation. Use a stiff bristle fiber brush.
70-00-00 Page 701

STANDARD PRACTICES - CLEANING Mar 09/2001
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Cleaning Before Welding
(1) Surfaces to be welded must be free from protective coatings, dirt, grease, oil and
other contaminants, and as free as practicable from oxide formation.
(2) Wire brushes and abrasives may be used to remove protective coatings and
oxides, except that the final step in removing oxides from aluminum alloys preferably
should consist of chemical treatment immediately prior to welding.
(3) Wire brushes, when used for cleaning corrosion-resistant alloys, must have bristles
of austenitic, corrosion-resistant steel.
(4) No undesirable deposits or residue must remain on surface to be welded after

cleaning operation.
70-00-00 Page 702

STANDARD PRACTICES - CLEANING Mar 09/2001
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STANDARD PRACTICES - REPAIR
1. General
The primary purpose of repair is to enable a component or engine part to be reworked to a

condition which will provide safe operation. Approved repair schemes are detailed in the
relevant sections of this manual using the various consumables and/or special equipment listed
in TOOLS/FIX/EQUIP or CONSUMABLE MATERIALS sections.
2. Approved Repairs
A. Welding
WARNING: IF AN OXYGEN REGULATOR IS USED WITH ARGON GAS, DO NOT

REINSTALL REGULATOR ON AN OXYGEN CYLINDER. ARGON GAS IS
NOT FREE FROM OIL AND THE POSSIBILITY EXISTS OF AN
EXPLOSION CAUSED BY PRESENCE OF OIL IN THE REGULATOR.
(1) A tungsten inert gas fusion welding process must be used when repairing cracks in
engine parts. Argon or helium gas maybe used in inert gas welding; however, argon
is preferred by Pratt & Whitney Canada because its greater density reduces its
rate of diffusion with the atmosphere.
(2) Inert gas welding is a gas arc welding process which uses inert gas to protect the
weld area from the surrounding atmosphere. The heat necessary for welding is
provided by a very intense electric arc which is struck between a non-consumable
thoriated tungsten (tungsten and thorium alloy) electrode and the metal part.
On repairs where a filler material is required, a welding rod, of appropriate material,
is fed into the weld area and melted with the base metal in the same manner as
in conventional gas welding.
(3) Welding Equipment
(a) The following equipment is required for the inert gas welding process (Ref.
TOOLS/FIX/EQUIP):
v An AC/DC arc welder with high frequency controls (item 2).

v A Linde HW-10 torch or equivalent with circulating water equipment and
ceramic cups of suitable size (item 7 or 8).
v An argon gas regulator (item 5).
v Two flowmeters (item 6).
(4) Cleaning Before Welding
(a) Refer to 70-00-00, Standard Practices - Cleaning.
(5) Welding Procedure
70-00-00
Page 801
STANDARD PRACTICES - REPAIR Nov 16/2012
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: WELDING MUST BE CARRIED OUT ONLY BY CERTIFIED

PERSONNEL.
(a) Connect one argon gas flowmeter to torch and connect other flowmeter, if
necessary, behind crack as a backup when ready to weld.
(b) Connect torch to arc welder for straight polarity.
(c) Insert a 1/16 inch diameter electrode (PWC05-147) into torch, allowing
approximately 5/16 inch of electrode to protrude from ceramic cup. The ceramic
cup used must not be smaller than a No. 6 for the HW-10 torch, in order to
provide a sufficient amount of inert gas to the weld area where cleanliness of the
surface beads is important.
NOTE: A plain tungsten electrode may be used, but a needle point must be
maintained on the electrode for more positive starting of arc. Where
possible, the electrode must be kept clean of material pickup.
(d) If it is necessary to protect underside of weld from contamination, possible weld

porosity, or poor surface finish, attach argon gas line behind crack to be
welded. This may be accomplished by fabrication of small box-like fixtures
having edges shaped to fit contours of part to be welded and using a suitable
connection to secure gas line. Seal fixture to part in order to conserve gas
leakage to minimum.
NOTE: The amount of gas pressure to provide sufficient backup must be

determined. This pressure should not allow the gas to stir the weld
puddle.
(e) When high frequency controls are used, it is not necessary to strike an arc.
Hold torch vertically to work so that the shielding gas (argon) forms a
protective envelope around the weld. It is preferable to have area to be welded
in a horizontal position.
(f) When high frequency controls are not used, strike arc and hold electrode tip
approximately 1/8 to 1/4 inch above surface to be welded until a puddle is
formed. Add welding rod, as applicable, and proceed as in conventional gas
welding.
NOTE: Test welds, using corresponding material of same thickness and joint
design, should be made to determine correct gas pressure and arc
welder settings.
70-00-00
Page 802
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(g) A high percentage of steel parts used in the engine are fabricated from 12
percent chromium corrosion-resistant steels. These are characterized by
their susceptibility to air hardening and, in consequence, field repair of cracks
by fusion welding is a special problem. The high temperatures at which fusion
weld repairs are made and the subsequent air cooling of the part, or parts,
from these temperatures usually results in an increase in material hardness and
a loss in ductility. Parts on which fusion weld repairs have been made have a
tendency to crack because the steel structure becomes unstable, brittle and
highly stressed. The structure of the material can be improved by reheating
the parts and controlling the cooling rate.
(6) Cleaning After Welding
(a) Refer to 70-00-00, Standard Practices - Cleaning.
(7) Local Stress Relief
(a) Components which are not highly stressed may be repaired by fusion welding.
It is possible to partially restore the original properties of such welded parts
through use of local heat treatment. The localized heat may be applied by neutral
flame of an oxyacetylene torch. Extend the stress relief one inch minimum
beyond the welded area. After the desired heat has been applied to the part for
the correct length of time, reduce temperature of part gradually.
(8) Inspection of Welding
(a) Refer to 70-00-00, Standard Practices - Inspection.
B. Blend Repair
(1) Blend damaged area using carborundum stones.
CAUTION: DO NOT POLISH WITH POWER TOOLS.
(2) Polish blended area using abrasive cloth cloth (PWC05-061).
(3) Blend all repairs and finish smoothly.
(4) Lines, scratches, or sharp edges which may cause a concentration of stress are not
permitted.
(5) Touch-up surface finish on aluminum components (Ref. Subpara. E.).
C. Replacement of Helical Coil Inserts
CAUTION: BEFORE USING HELICAL COIL INSERTS IN ANY PART OF ENGINE,

REFER TO ILLUSTRATED PARTS CATALOG FOR APPROVED
LOCATIONS AND PART NUMBER OF INSERT.
(1) Remove unserviceable insert using an approved extraction tool.
70-00-00
Page 803
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Clean out hole and ensure swarf and other foreign matter is removed.
NOTE: Inserts must be coated externally with zinc chromate primer (PWC13-003)
prior to installation.
(3) Install new helical coil insert into threaded hole using installation tool. Outer thread
of insert must be between one and one-half threads below surface of hole or
counterbore, as applicable.
(4) Cut off driving tang at notch using approved tang removal tool and remove tang
from hole.
(5) Inspect repaired hole.
D. Replacement of Studs
(1) General
(a) When necessary, oversize studs are to be installed in place of those which are
broken, stretched, loose or have damaged external threads. Whenever a stud
which is already oversize requires replacement, install the next oversize
stud. Use correct stud drivers to install new studs and torque to appropriate
value (Ref. Tables 801 or 802, as applicable).
CAUTION: BEFORE INSTALLING NEW STUDS, REFER TO ILLUSTRATED

PARTS CATALOG FOR APPROVED LOCATIONS AND PART
NUMBERS.
(b) When threads of a stud hole are damaged beyond dimensions suitable for
fitting a maximum oversize stud, it may be possible to effect repairs by the
installation of a helical coil (Ref. Subpara. C.) or key-type insert. However as
consideration should be given to reduction of thickness of walls or parent metal
around insert and the required strength, specific problems should be referred
to P&WC Customer Support (Ref. INTRODUCTION).
(2) Replacement of a Damaged Stud
(a) Remove damaged stud using an approved method.
(b) Examine stud hole for condition. On worn stud holes use oversize studs.
(c) Install stud to correct protrusion height using an approved stud driver. Ensure
torque limits (Ref. Tables 801 or 802, as applicable) are not exceeded.
E. Chrome Pickle Touch-up for Magnesium Components
(1) Clean area to be treated with crocus cloth (PWC05-061) and/or cloth impregnated
with isopropyl alcohol (PWC11-014).
(2) On rough surfaces, remove corrosion using wire brush or abrasive paper.
(3) On finished surfaces, remove corrosion using swab or brush impregnated with hot
chromic acid solution (PWC05-197) at 85° to 93° C (185° to 200°F).
70-00-00
Page 804
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) Rinse with clean cold water.
(5) Rinse with clean hot water.
(6) Dry using clean, dry compressed air.
(7) Apply the chromic acid solution (PWC11-019) or chrome pickel solution (PWC05-161)
at a temperature of 17 to 29 ° C (55 to 85 °F) for 30 to 45 seconds to prepared
area to be treated using a clean cloth. Repeat swabbing at frequent intervals to
ensure treated area is maintained wet with solution during treatment.
(8) Thoroughly rinse touched up area by swabbing several times with clean cloth
moistened with water.
(9) Dry using clean, dry compressed air.
F. Application of Anodic Surface Treatment (Aluminum alloys only)
WARNING: ALODINE SOLUTION IS EXTREMELY DANGEROUS. IT CONTAINS AN

OXIDIZING INGREDIENT WHICH CAN CAUSE AN EXPLOSION IF IT
COMES IN CONTACT WITH COMBUSTIBLES MATERIALS SUCH AS
PAINTS AND SOLVENTS.
(1) The anodic anti-corrosion finish on exposed aluminum surfaces of components may
be repaired by a local application of chemical treatment solution. The treatment
must be used on areas where minor repairs have been carried out by blending and/or
polishing and on repaired threads. To apply treatment, proceed as follows:
(a) Prepare surface by cleaning with cleaning solution (PWC11-038). Keep surface
wetted with cleaning solution for one to five minutes.
(b) Rinse with clean water to remove all traces of cleaning solution.
(c) Apply chemical treatment solution (PWC05-064A) to prepared surface by

brush, swab, or spray method and allow three to five minutes setting time.
(d) Rinse with clean water to remove all traces of excess chemical treatment
solution and allow surface to air dry.
(e) Examine treated surface and ensure that repair area is completely covered.
Reapply treatment if necessary.
TABLE 801, Standard Stud Torque Limits (LB. IN.)
Stud Thread Size

(Drive End) Minimum Maximum Necked Down $ Maximum Plain #
0.112-40 4 - 8
0.138-32 8 - 14
0.164-32 10 30 30
70-00-00
Page 805
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE 801, Standard Stud Torque Limits (LB. IN.) (Cont’d)
Stud Thread Size

(Drive End) Minimum Maximum Necked Down $ Maximum Plain #
0.190-24 15 40 45
0.216-24 20 65 70
0.250-20 40 95 105
0.3125-18 85 210 230

0.375-16 160 375 425
0.4375-14 200 600 675
0.500-13 250 950 1050
NOTE: 1. Symbol $: These limits apply where the unthreaded diameter of the stud is less
than the minimum minor diameter of the coarse pitch thread (drive end).
NOTE: 2. Symbol #: These limits apply where the unthreaded diameter of the stud is equal
to or greater than the minimum minor diameter of the coarse pitch thread (drive
end).
TABLE 802, Stepped Stud Torque Limits (LB. IN.)

Stud Thread Size
(Nut End) Minimum Maximum Necked Down $ Maximum Plain #
0.138-40 8 - 18
0.164-36 10 30 30
0.190-32 15 45 50
0.216-28 20 65 75
0.250-28 40 115 125
0.3125-24 85 240 260
0.375-24 160 450 500

0.4375-20 200 700 800
0.500-20 250 1150 1300
NOTE: 1. Symbol $: These limits apply where the unthreaded diameter of the stud is less than
the minimum minor diameter of the fine pitch thread (nut end).
70-00-00
Page 806
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE 802, Stepped Stud Torque Limits (LB. IN.) (Cont’d)
Stud Thread Size

(Nut End) Minimum Maximum Necked Down $ Maximum Plain #
NOTE: 2. Symbol #: These limits apply where the unthreaded diameter of the stud is equal to
or greater than the minimum minor diameter of the fine pitch thread (nut end).
70-00-00
Page 807/808
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
SECTION PAGE DATE
LEP 1 Jul 18/2016
2 blank Jul 18/2016

2 blank Jul 18/2016
71-00-00 501 Jul 18/2016

Adjustment/ 502 Jul 18/2016
Test 503 Jul 18/2016
504 Jul 18/2016
505 Jul 18/2016
506 Jul 18/2016
507 Jul 18/2016
508 Jul 18/2016
509 Jul 18/2016
510 Jul 18/2016
511 Jul 18/2016
512 Jul 18/2016
513 Jul 18/2016
514 Jul 18/2016
515 Jul 18/2016
516 Jul 18/2016
517 Jul 18/2016
518 Jul 18/2016
519 Jul 18/2016
520 Jul 18/2016
521 Jul 18/2016
522 Jul 18/2016
523 Jul 18/2016
524 Jul 18/2016
525 Jul 18/2016
526 Jul 18/2016
527 Jul 18/2016
528 Jul 18/2016

Page 1/2
71-00 LEP Jul 18/2016
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
POWER PLANT - ADJUSTMENT/TEST 71-00-00
1. General 501
A. Use of Procedures 501

B. Symbols 501
C. Ground Safety Precautions 502
D. Environmental Conditions 504
E. Fuel 505
F. Instruments 505
2. Ground Operating Limits 505
3. Ground Testing Procedures 505
A. General 506
B. Equipment Required 508
C. Wet Motoring Run 508
D. Dry Motoring Run 509

E. Pressure Test of Fuel Control Pneumatic System 509
F. Tt5 Temperature Compensator Verification 512
G. Pre-start Checks 517
H. Starting 517
I. Maximum Ng and Manual-Automatic Interconnect Linkage

Adjustment 522
J. Power Turbine (Nf) Governors 526
K. Performance/Power Assurance Check 526
L. Acceleration 526
M. Deceleration (Pre-SB5398 engines only) 527

N. Shutdown 527
O. Bleed Valve Closing Point 528

Page 1/2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
POWER PLANT - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. General
A. Use of Procedures
This section contains information for PT6T-3D/-3DE/-3DF engine ground running for
checks and adjustment/test procedures to verify integrity of installed/replaced items and
to facilitate troubleshooting. These procedures are applicable solely to Pratt & Whitney
Canada (P&WC) supplied items and do not cover any airframe supplied parts.
For up-to-date technical accuracy for ground running, trim adjustments etc., the
procedures contained in the Power Plant Section of the airframe manufacturer’s Flight
Manual take precedence and must be referred to.
Before making any control adjustment/check, engine should be run for ten minutes
minimum, and all parameters stabilized.
B. Symbols
The P&WC symbols designated for the working variables used in the adjustment/test
procedures contained in this section, are defined as follows:
Pamb Ambient pressure

Pt2 Total pressure - compressor inlet
Tt2 Total temperature - compressor inlet
Tt5 Inter-turbine temperature
Wf Fuel flow
Ng Gas generator rpm
Nf Power turbine rpm
71-00-00
Page 501
POWER PLANT - ADJUSTMENT/TEST Jul 18/2016
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Ground Safety Precautions
WARNING: AT TAKEOFF POWER, THE EXHAUST STREAM MAY PICK UP AND

THROW LOOSE DIRT, GRAVEL AND OTHER DEBRIS OVER A
CONSIDERABLE DISTANCE. PRECAUTIONS MUST BE TAKEN DURING
ENGINE RUNNING TO AVOID INJURY TO PERSONNEL AND DAMAGE
TO PROPERTY. OCCASIONALLY, DURING POWER SECTION
STARTING, EXCESS FUEL ACCUMULATES IN EXHAUST DUCT WHICH
WHEN IGNITED CAUSES LONG FLAMES TO BE EMITTED FROM
THE EXHAUST. PERSONNEL MUST ENSURE THAT THE RUN UP AREA
IS CLEAR OF INFLAMMABLE MATERIALS AND GROUND EQUIPMENT.
WARNING: CARBON MONOXIDE CONTENT OF EXHAUST GASES IS RELATIVELY

LOW. HOWEVER OTHER GASES ARE PRESENT WHICH HAVE A
DISAGREEABLE ODOR AND AN IRRITATING EFFECT ON SKIN TISSUE.
EXPOSURE USUALLY RESULTS IN WATERING OF THE EYES
ACCOMPANIED BY A BURNING SENSATION. LESS NOTICEABLE, BUT
EQUALLY AS HAZARDOUS IS THE DANGER OF RESPIRATORY
IRRITATION. FOR BOTH OF THESE REASONS, EXPOSURE TO
EXHAUST GASES SHOULD BE AVOIDED, PARTICULARLY IN CONFINED
SPACES.
WARNING: AFTER POWER SECTION OPERATION, SUFFICIENT TIME MUST BE

ALLOWED FOR COOL DOWN BEFORE INSPECTING OR WORKING IN
THE EXHAUST CASE AREA.
WARNING: ALL JET FUELS AND LUBRICATING OILS HAVE AN INJURIOUS

EFFECT ON THE SKIN. PRECAUTIONS MUST BE TAKEN TO AVOID
CONTACT AS MUCH AS POSSIBLE.
CAUTION: POWER SECTION COMPRESSOR INLET CASES ARE DESIGNED FOR
RELATIVELY LOW INTAKE AIR VELOCITY. NEVERTHELESS THE
IMMEDIATE AREA OF THE INLETS MUST BE FREE FROM LOOSE
OBJECTS, SAND, GRIT, RAGS AND SPILLED FLUIDS WHICH COULD
PASS THROUGH THE INLET SCREENS AND CONTAMINATE OR
DAMAGE COMPRESSOR BLADES.
(1) The preceding WARNINGS and CAUTIONS shall be observed.
(2) The use of turbine-powered aircraft makes it necessary to improve existing ground
safety precautions. To prevent injury to personnel and damage to property, handling
and working procedures must be suitably modified depending on installations.
When handling or working on turbine-powered aircraft, not only must the areas with
rotating components be avoided, but allowances must also be made for the hot,
high velocity exhaust gases discharged from the exhaust nozzles (Ref. Fig. 501)
71-00-00
Page 502
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6−FT
43 160 30
EXHAUST DANGER AREA

AT TAKE−OFF RATING
TWO POWER SECTIONS
25
50 175
20
KNOTS 75 250 °F FEET
15
10
150
450
250 5
800
655 1100 0
C3042
Exhaust Danger Area - Typical
Figure 501
71-00-00
Page 503
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Environmental Conditions
(1) Ambient Conditions
CAUTION: WHEN STARTING AN ENGINE THAT HAS BEEN EXPOSED TO

LOW AMBIENT TEMPERATURES, FUEL AND OIL PRESSURES
MUST BE CAREFULLY OBSERVED. LACK OF, OR BELOW NORMAL
PRESSURE INDICATIONS ARE CAUSE FOR IMMEDIATE
SHUTDOWN.
Engine performance is greatly affected by surrounding atmospheric conditions, so it

is essential that accurate values of barometric pressure (not corrected to sea
level) and ambient temperature in the immediate area at the time of testing be
obtained. Furthermore, it is highly desirable that power section trimming and
performance checks be carried out with low wind velocity, and with the intake facing
the wind.
(2) Cold Weather
CAUTION: FUEL DRAINING FROM AFFECTED COMPONENTS AFTER

APPLYING HEAT FOR SEVERAL MINUTES DOES NOT
NECESSARILY MEAN THAT ALL ICE HAS MELTED. LUMPS MAY
STILL REMAIN AS A SERIOUS HAZARD. HEATING MUST BE
CONTINUED FOR A SHORT TIME AFTER FUEL BEGINS TO FLOW
AND DRAINED FUEL INSPECTED UNTIL IT IS EVIDENT THAT
ALL WATER HAS BEEN REMOVED.
As temperature drops, water becomes less soluble in fuel, with the result that water
and fuel separate, and water seeks the lowest point in the fuel system or
accessory. If temperature drops sufficiently, water freezes in the fuel and forms tiny
needle-shaped crystals which may impinge on strainers and restrict fuel flow. In
extreme cases fuel flow may be blocked entirely. This condition is evidenced by a
drop in fuel pressure to the power section. The remedy for this condition is to apply
heat to affected components.
In cold weather, it is most important that all fuel pumps and strainers be thoroughly
inspected prior to flight. As long a fuel flows freely from drains in tank and
strainers, it can be assumed that the system is free of ice. Any indication of restricted
flow is cause for heat application. Collect all drainage in a clear container, and
inspect for water globules in the fuel.
A similar condition may exist in lubrication systems, with water coming from
condensation in oil tanks or power section casings.
(3) Precipitation
Performance checks and engine adjustments should not be attempted in moderate

to heavy precipitation. Water, snow or ice entering engine inlets causes changes
in power output proportional to the amount entering the affected power section. Power
output changes are minor, but not insignificant. Freezing rain and slushy snow
have the same effect on power output, and may cling to inlet ducts and screens and
upset air flow to the affected power section.
71-00-00
Page 504
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
E. Fuel
It is recommended that testing be carried out with the same fuel as is used in service
(Ref. SB5144).
F. Instruments
Testing procedures described depend, for their effectiveness, on the accuracy of cockpit
instrumentation. Instruments should be calibrated frequently to ensure continued
accuracy within the following limits:
Ambient ±1°F
temperature
Ambient ±0.05‘‘ Hg
pressure
Ng and Nf ± 0.5%
rpm
Tt5 ± 5°C (9°F) (system accuracy)
temperature
Torquemeter ± 7 lb.ft. (system accuracy)
2. Ground Operating Limits
The ground operating limits for each power section are as shown in Table 501.
Limits quoted apply for Standard Day Conditions unless otherwise stated.
If during testing procedures, overtemperature, overspeed or overtorque conditions occur,

refer to Special Condition Inspection Procedures (Ref. 72-00-00, INSPECTION/CHECK) for
the applicable action to be taken.
NOTE: 1. Overtemperatures are usually preceded by an excessively rapid rise in fuel flow,
compressor speed and inter-turbine temperature. Most commonly they are caused
by excessive fuel in the combustion area prior to light-up. Several momentary
high overtemperatures affect power section life just as seriously as a single
prolonged lower overtemperature.
NOTE: 2. Serious damage to power sections occurs sooner at higher temperatures. When
an overtemperature has occurred, or is anticipated, carry out a normal power
section shutdown. Avoid an emergency shutdown, unless it appears that continued
operation will result in greater damage than is normally associated with an
overtemperature.
NOTE: 3. For approved oils and fuels refer to SB5001 and SB5144 respectively.
3. Ground Testing Procedures
NOTE: For complete operating parameters refer to airframe manufacturer’s Flight Manual
71-00-00
Page 505
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. General
The object of ground testing is to test an engine for mechanical soundness and to
ensure that applicable ground operating parameters are within limits.
To eliminate unnecessary ground running and thus conserve fuel, ground testing
procedures are divided into the thirteen checks detailed in Para. C. through N.. These
checks are not intended to be carried out as routine periodic checks on an engine but as
required in the following cases:
- After component repair or replacement, in accordance with the sequence shown in
Table 502.
- Whenever required as part of troubleshooting (Ref. 72-00-00, FAULT ISOLATION).
- As specified by the Aircraft Manufacturer.
- At the discretion of the operator.
TABLE 501, Ground Operating Limits - PT6T-3D/-3DE/-3DF Engines

Oil
Operating Max Gas Output Pressure Oil
Conditions Obs Generator Shaft (PSIG) Temperature
(6) (8) ITT °C Speed Speed (4) (°C) (7)
Ng Ns
RPM RPM P/S RGB P/S (3) RGB (3)
No Load 600 24500 6930 (1) 40 min. 40 min -54 to + 115 -54 to + 115
(64.2%) (5)
Starting 1090 (2) -54 Min. (3) -54 Min (3)
NOTE: 1. The output speed is limited to 6930 rpm (105%) at NO LOAD condition. Transient
overspeed (105%<Nf<=110%) is limited to 10 seconds.
NOTE: 2. This value is time-limited (Ref. 72-00-00, INSPECTION/CHECK).
NOTE: 3. Minimum oil temperature for starting is -40°C (-40°F) for 5 C/S (Type II) oil and -53.9°C
(-65°F) for 3 C/S (Type I) oil.
NOTE: 4. These pressure limits apply to normal operating temperatures. During extremely cold
starts, oil pressure may reach 300 psig.
NOTE: 5. This limit is the minimum oil pressure at 4400 rpm (Ns).
NOTE: 6. Engine inlet condition limits for engine operation:
Temperature: -54°C (-65°F) to 57.5°C (135°F)
Altitude: sea level to 20,000 ft.
NOTE: 7. For operating conditions with ambient temperatures above 43°C (110°F) the maximum
allowable oil temperature is 120°C (248°F).
NOTE: 8. Fuel viscosity limit for cold starting is 12 centistokes maximum.
71-00-00
Page 506
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE 502, Checks after Component Repair or Replacement
CHECKS REQUIRED
COMPONENT REPLACED (PARA. REF. NO.)
Power Section 3.C., D., E.*, F., G., H., I., J., K., L., N.
Reduction Gearbox 3.E.*, G., H., J.,, L., N.
T5 Temperature Compensator 3.F.
Automatic Fuel Control Unit (AFCU) 3.C., D., E.*, G., H., I., J., K., L., N.
Manual Fuel Control Unit (MFCU) 3.C., D., G., H., I., N. (Ref. NOTE 2)
Fuel Pump 3.C., D., G., H., I., J., K., L., N.
Power Turbine (NF) Governor 3.E.*, G., H., J., K., N.
Ignition Exciter 3.G., H., N.
Torque Limiter 3.E.*, G., H., K., N.
Flow Divider and Dump Valve 3.C., D., G., H., K., N.
Oil-to-Fuel Heater 3.G., H., K., N.
Compressor Bleed Valve 3. H., K., N.O.
NOTE: 1. Where marked with an asterisk (*) , Pneumatic system pressure test (Para. 3.E.)
should only be carried out if an air leak is suspected.
NOTE: 2. Checks 3. C. D. and H. on manual fuel control unit must be carried out in manual
mode.
TABLE 503, Ground Testing- Definition and Location
Paragraph Check Paragraph Check
3.C. Wet Motoring Run 3.I. Max. Ng. and Manual

Automatic Interconnect
Linkage Adjustment
3.D. Dry Motoring Run 3.J., Power Turbine
(Nf) Governors
3.E. Pneumatic System Pressure
Test
3.F. Tt5 Temperature Compensator 3.K. Performance/

Verification Power Assurance
3.G. Pre-start Checks 3.L. Acceleration Check

3.H. Starting 3.M. Deceleration Check
3.N. Shutdown 3.O. Bleed Valve Closing Point
71-00-00
Page 507
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Equipment Required (Ref. Table 504)
(1) The equipment required for ground testing as follows:
TABLE 504, Ground Testing - Equipment Required

ITEM NO. PART NO./SPECIFICATION NOMENCLATURE/
PROCEDURE
Special Tools
P/N 3243781 (Pre-SB5331) (Ref. TOOLS/FIX/EQUIP, Table) SLAVE STOP
(PWC70797) Adapter, P3 Leak Check
CONSUMABLE (Ref. CONSUMABLE MATERIALS)
MATERIALS
WARNING: READ MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS BEFORE USING THESE PRODUCTS
(PWC09-002A) MIL-S-22473 Loctite, Grade H or 222
(PWC05-007) Leak-Tec 372 Leak Checking Fluid
C. Wet Motoring Run
(1) Power Control Lever - FUEL CUT-OFF.
(2) Ignition Switch - OFF.
(3) Fuel Control Selector Switch - AUTOMATIC.
(4) Fuel Shut-Off Valve - OPEN.
(5) Fuel Boost Pump Switch - ON. Check fuel pressure.
(6) Starter Switch - ON.
WARNING: IF THERE ARE ANY INDICATIONS OF A FIRE AT THIS POINT, CLOSE

THE FUEL SHUT-OFF VALVE AND CONTINUE MOTORING RUN.
(7) When Ng reaches 12%, set Power Control Lever to IDLE.
(8) Maintain starter operation for the required duration (Approx. 15 seconds).
NOTE: Observe starter limits (Ref. Aircraft Flight Manual).
(9) Check for fuel leaks.
(11) Starter Switch - OFF.
(12) Check that dump valves and gas generator drain valves operate correctly by
observing overboard drain.
(13) Fuel Boost Pump Switch - OFF.
71-00-00
Page 508
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(14) Fuel Shut-off Valve - CLOSED.
(15) Allow the required cooling period for starter before attempting any further operation
(Ref. Aircraft Flight Manual).
D. Dry Motoring Run
NOTE: The following procedure is used as required to clear a power section of trapped
fuel and vapor or in the event of fire in a power section. During the motoring
run, the airflow through the power section purges the fuel vapor or fire from the
combustion, gas generator, turbine and exhaust sections.
(2) Ignition Switch - OFF.
(4) Fuel Shut-off Valve - OPEN.
(6) Starter Switch - ON.
WARNING: IF THERE ARE ANY INDICATIONS OF A FIRE AT THIS POINT, CLOSE

THE FUEL SHUT-OFF VALVE AND CONTINUE MOTORING RUN.
(7) Maintain starter operation for the desired duration.
NOTE: Observe starter limits (Ref. Aircraft Flight Manual).
(8) Starter Switch - OFF.
(9) Fuel Boost Pump Switch - OFF.
(11) Allow the required cooling period for starter before attempting any further starting
operating (Ref. Aircraft Flight Manual).
E. Pressure Test of Fuel Control Pneumatic System (Ref. Fig. 502)
(1) Do the pressure test of fuel control pneumatic system by one of the following
methods:
(a) Method A:
1 Disconnect the P3 tube coupling from elbow at front fireseal.
2 Blank off coupling on heated tube assembly.
3 Connect a 75 to 85 psig clean and dry air supply to the elbow (4) at the
fireseal.
71-00-00
Page 509
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LEAK CHECK POINTS
REGULATED AIR 7
PRESSURE 80 (± 5) PSI FRONT
FIRESEAL
6
4
C3602
Pressure Test of Fuel Control Pneumatic System

Figure 502
71-00-00
Page 510
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 502
1. Tube Assembly
2. Adapter
3. Pressure Gage
4. Elbow
5. Tube Assembly
6. Locknut
7. Tube Assembly
4 Apply leak checking fluid (PWC05-007) to all connections in the fuel control
pneumatic system.
NOTE: Slow bubbling is permitted at the following joints only, no other

leakage is permitted:
v Between adapter and drive body assembly

v Nuts and main body assembly
v Cover and main body assembly
5 If leaks are detected, examine the components for defects and replace as
necessary.
NOTE: Retorque connections as required and repeat check.
6 Wipe all leak checking fluid from connections.
7 Disconnect air supply.
8 Connect P3 tube coupling to elbow at front fireseal, torque 90 to 100 lb.in.

and lockwire.
(b) Method B (Alternate procedure with P3 leak check adapter (PWC70797)):
1 Remove the P3 filter bowl and filter element from the power section.
2 Install adapter (PWC70797) and tighten with your fingers.
3 Connect a 75 to 85 psig clean and dry air supply to the adapter (PWC70797).
4 Apply leak checking fluid (PWC05-007) to all connections in the fuel

control pneumatic system.
NOTE: No other leakage is permitted, slow bubbling is permitted at the

following joints only:
v Between adapter and drive body assembly

v Nuts and main body assembly
v Cover and main body assembly
71-00-00
Page 511
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5 If leaks are detected, examine the components for damage and replace as
necessary.
NOTE: Retorque connections as required and repeat check.
6 Clean all leak checking fluid from connections.
7 Disconnect air supply.
8 Remove the adapter (PWC70797).
9 Install again the P3 filter bowl and filter element.
F. Tt5 Temperature Compensator Verification
NOTE: The Tt5 temperature compensator may be checked with engine running as
detailed in step (1) following or by using a tester to simulate operating
conditions as detailed in step (2).
(1) Verification with engine running.
(a) Note amount of trim indicated on trim value plates on center fireseal and on
gas generator case in intake plenum area (Ref. Fig. 503).
(b) Start power section (Ref. Para. G.and H.) following.
(c) Run for five minutes at a minimum of 75% Ng (90% optimum) to allow
stabilization of operating parameters.
(d) Disconnect power supply lead from temperature compensator (Ref. Fig. 504)
NOTE: Tt5 indicated should rise by an amount equal to trim. If necessary

remove protective cap from adjuster and adjust as required.
(e) Reconnect power supply lead to compensator.
(f) Repeat check as necessary until correct adjustment is achieved.
(g) Install protective cap on adjuster and lockwire.
(2) Verification using tester (engine not running)
NOTE: This check requires the use of a Barfield Tester 2312G-8 or equivalent.
The tester may be obtained from the following address.
Barfield Inst. Corp.,

4101 N.W. 29th St.
Miami, FL 33142
USA
(a) Note amount of trim indicated on trim value plates on center fireseal and on
gas generator case in intake plenum area (Ref. Fig. 503).
71-00-00
Page 512
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5
1 4
A 3
2
C D
VIEW B
(VIEW ON CENTER FIRESEAL)
REDUCTION GEARBOX
3
VIEW A
B
60 o
84o
VIEW C VIEW D
Pre-SB5509 C3603B
Location of Trim Value Plates
71-00-00
Page 513
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 503
1. Air Inlet Screen

2. Tt5 Trim Value Plate (1 ea)
3. Power Section Data Plate (1 ea)
4. Center Fireseal
5. Gas Generator Case
6. T5 Trim Value Plate
71-00-00
Page 514
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
E
VIEW B
(VIEW ON CENTER FIRESEAL)
REDUCTION GEARBOX
VIEW E
Post-SB5509 C191044
Location of Trim Value Plates
71-00-00
Page 515
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
POWER SUPPLY LEAD
ADJUSTER
PROTECTIVE CAP
INPUT LEAD
C9352
T5 Temperature Compensator Adjustment

Figure 504
71-00-00
Page 516
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) Disconnect Tt5 thermocouple input lead from compensator.
(c) Using suitable connector, connect tester to compensator.
(d) Supply 28 VDC to compensator.
(e) Adjust tester to obtain reading of 750°C on cockpit instrument.
(f) Disconnect power supply lead from temperature compensator.
NOTE: Tt5 indicated should rise by an amount equal to trim. If necessary,

remove protective cap from adjuster and adjust as required.
(g) Reconnect power supply lead to compensator and observe that reading returns
to 750°C.
(h) If necessary, repeat steps (e) and (f).
(i) Disconnect tester and reconnect input lead.
(j) Install protective cap on adjuster and lockwire.
G. Pre-start Checks
(1) Inspect air inlets thoroughly, and ensure that they are clear of loose nuts, bolts,
tools and other objects which might cause damage and subsequent failure.
(2) Inspect area in vicinity of air inlets and exhaust, and remove any loose objects
which might possibly be ingested or blown rearward by exhaust gases.
(3) Check for evidence of oil leaking into air intakes.
(4) Check each power section fuel system for presence of water.
(5) Check engine controls for full travel, freedom of movement and correctness of
direction.
(6) Check oil level in each power section and reduction gearbox oil tank and service as
necessary.
H. Starting
NOTE: 1. Each power section may be started with its fuel system in MANUAL or
AUTOMATIC mode. However it is recommended that the AUTOMATIC mode
be used.
NOTE: 2. Refer to step (3) following for unsatisfactory start conditions.
NOTE: 3. Refer to Tables 505 and 506 for power section/reduction gearbox operating oil
pressures and temperatures.
71-00-00
Page 517
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE 505, Power Section - Operating Oil Pressure and Temperature
Operation below 79% Ng Operation above 79% Ng

40 to 80 psi 80 to 115 psi
0°C to 115°C 0°C to 115°C
NOTE: At oil temperature 82°C to 93°C (180°F to 200°F) and Ng speed of 90.5 % (34500 rpm),
set oil pressure between 90 to 100 psi (nominal) by adding or removing spacers from
main oil pressure regulating valve (Ref. 79-20-05).
TABLE 506, Reduction Gearbox - Operating Oil Pressure and Temperature
Operation below 94% Nf Operation above 94% Nf

40 to 60 psi 60 to 80 psi
0°C to 115°C 0°C to 115°C
NOTE: At oil temperature 82°C to 93°C (180°F to 200°F) and Nf speed of 97% set oil pressure
between 65 to 75 psi by adding or removing spacers from reduction gearbox oil
pressure relief valve (Ref. 72-10-00).
(1) AUTOMATIC mode start procedure.
(a) Power Control Levers - FUEL CUT-OFF.
(b) Power Turbine Governor Setting - Anywhere in operating range.
(c) Master Switch - ON.
(d) Fuel System Shut-off Valves - OPEN.
(e) Fuel Boost Pump Switches - ON (Check power section fuel inlet pressure 5
psig minimum).
(f) Aircraft Bleed Air - OFF.
(g) Electrical Generators - OFF.
(h) Fuel Control Selector Switch - AUTOMATIC.
(i) Starter Switch - ON.
71-00-00
Page 518
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: IF LIGHT UP IS NOT OBTAINED WITHIN 15 SECONDS OF THE

POWER CONTROL LEVER BEING PLACED IN ’’IDLE‘‘ POSITION,
SET POWER CONTROL LEVER TO ’’FUEL CUT OFF‘‘ AND SWITCH
OFF STARTER AND IGNITION. WAIT FOR ROTATION TO STOP
COMPLETELY. AFTER A 30 SECOND FUEL DRAINING PERIOD
CARRY OUT A 15 SECOND DRY MOTORING RUN (REF. PARA. D.
PRECEDING) BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANOTHER START. REPEAT
COMPLETE STARTING SEQUENCE OBSERVING STARTER LIMITS
(REF. AIRCRAFT FLIGHT MANUAL).
(j) Power Control Lever - IDLE after stabilized Ng (gas generator speed) of not
less than 12% is reached.
(k) Observe that gas generator accelerates to Idle rpm (51% minimum), and that
nominal inter-turbine starting temperature is not exceeded (Ref. Table 501) .
(l) When Ng attains Idle rpm:

Starter Switch - OFF
(m) Check oil pressures (Ref. Table 501)
(n) Check clutch engagement.
1 Start second power section.
2 Slowly increase power on second power section until equal power turbine
speed (Nf) on both power sections is obtained.
3 Check that small power increases on one power section produce equal Nf
increases on both power sections, this indicating that both clutches are
engaged.
NOTE: If a clutch fails to engage, carry out the procedures detailed in

(3)(e).
CAUTION: ELECTRICAL GENERATORS MUST NOT BE SWITCHED ON UNTIL

Ng IS AT LEAST 71 %.
(o) After successful start of both power sections:
Electrical Generators - ON (as required)
Bleed Air - ON (as required)
(2) MANUAL mode start procedure.
CAUTION: IN MANUAL MODE, MAJOR ENGINE PARAMETERS, i.e. Ng, Nf AND

TORQUE, ARE NOT LIMITED AUTOMATICALLY. CONSEQUENTLY
IN THIS MODE THE OPERATOR MUST MONITOR ENGINE
INSTRUMENTS, MAKE CHANGES IN POWER SETTINGS GRADUALLY
AND EXERCISE THE ADDITIONAL SKILLS REQUIRED TO
ENSURE THAT OPERATING LIMITS ARE NOT EXCEEDED.
(a) Power Control Lever - FUEL CUT-OFF.
71-00-00
Page 519
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) Power Turbine Governor Setting - Anywhere in operating range.
(c) Master Switch - ON.
(d) Fuel System Shut-off Valves - OPEN.
(e) Fuel Boost Pump Switches - ON (check power section fuel inlet pressure 5
psig minimum).
(f) Aircraft Bleed Air - OFF.
(g) Electrical Generators - OFF.
(h) Fuel Control Selector Switch - MANUAL.
(i) Starter Switch - ON.
CAUTION: IF LIGHT UP IS NOT OBTAINED WITHIN 15 SECONDS OF THE

POWER CONTROL LEVER BEING PLACED IN ’’IDLE‘‘ POSITION,
SET POWER CONTROL LEVER TO ’’FUEL CUT OFF‘‘ AND SWITCH
OFF STARTER AND IGNITION. WAIT FOR ROTATION TO STOP
COMPLETELY. AFTER A 30 SECOND FUEL DRAINING PERIOD
CARRY OUT A 15 SECOND DRY MOTORING RUN (REF. PARA. D.
PRECEDING) BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANOTHER START. REPEAT
COMPLETE STARTING SEQUENCE OBSERVING STARTER LIMITS
(REF. AIRCRAFT FLIGHT MANUAL).
(j) Power Control Lever - IDLE after stabilized Ng (gas generator speed) of not
less than 12% is reached.
(k) Observe that gas generator accelerates to Idle rpm (51% minimum), and that
nominal inter-turbine starting temperature limits are not exceeded (Ref. Table
501) .
(l) When Ng attains Idle rpm:

Ignition Switch - OFF
Starter Switch - OFF
(m) Check oil pressures (Ref. Table 501)
CAUTION: ELECTRICAL GENERATORS MUST NOT BE SWITCHED ON UNTIL

Ng IS AT LEAST 71%. IN MANUAL MODE IT WILL BE NECESSARY
TO ADJUST THE POWER CONTROL LEVER TO MAINTAIN
DESIRED Ng WITH CHANGES IN ELECTRICAL GENERAL LOAD.
(n) Check clutch engagement.
1 Start second power section.
2 Slowly increase power on second power section until equal power turbine
speed (Nf) on both power sections is obtained.
71-00-00
Page 520
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3 Check that small power increases on one power section produce equal Nf
increases on both power sections, this indicating that both clutches are
engaged.
NOTE: If a clutch fails to engage, carry out procedures detailed in

(3)(e)following.
(3) An unsatisfactory start will occur if one or more of the following take place:
CAUTION: IF Tt5 CONTINUES TO RISE, OR IF GREATER THAN NORMAL FUEL

FLOW IS OBSERVED WHEN POWER CONTROL LEVER IS SET TO
’’IDLE‘‘, A HOT START MAY BE ANTICIPATED. THE OPERATOR
MUST BE PREPARED TO ABORT START BEFORE Tt5 STARTING
TEMPERATURE LIMITS ARE EXCEEDED.
CAUTION: FOLLOWING AN UNSATISFACTORY START, OR IN THE EVENT OF
FIRE, THE AFFECTED POWER SECTION MUST BE CLEARED BY
PERFORMING A DRY MOTORING RUN (REF. PARA. D.
PRECEDING).
(a) Hot Start - Interturbine temperature (Tt5) exceeds starting temperature limits.
NOTE: A hot start may also be caused by a False Start or a Hung Start.
(b) False or Hung Start - After light-up has occurred, gas generator speed does
not reach 51% within 30 seconds of Power Control Lever being set to IDLE.
(c) No Start - Power section does not light up within 15 second of Power Control
Lever being set to IDLE.
NOTE: Light-up is indicated by a rise in interturbine temperature. Actual time

to light-up is dependent upon ambient temperature and the amount of
torque supplied by the starter.
(d) Power section oil pressure fails to reach 40 psi minimum.
(e) Sprag clutch of second power section started, fails to engage. In the event of
clutch non-engagement, proceed as follows:
1 Hold power section with the normally engaged clutch at its stabilized speed
- do not decelerate.
CAUTION: IF CLUTCH ENGAGES DURING POWER SECTION RUNDOWN,

THE REDUCTION GEARBOX MUST BE REMOVED AND
INSPECTED BY AN OVERHAUL FACILITY.
2 Shut down power section with the non-engaged clutch and allow rotation to
stop.
3 Shut down remaining power section and allow rotation to stop.
4 Start power section with previously non-engaged clutch and listen carefully
for unusual noises indicating a damaged clutch.
71-00-00
Page 521
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5 If audible indications are noted, the reduction gearbox must be removed

and inspected by an overhaul facility.
6 If engagement is normal, start other power section.
7 Run the power section with the suspect clutch, at Flight Idle for five
minutes.
8 Shut down power section and inspect reduction gearbox output section oil
filter and chip detector.
NOTE: If condition of oil filter and chip detector is satisfactory, the engine
may remain in service.
I. Maximum Ng and Manual-Automatic Interconnect Linkage Adjustment (Ref. Fig. 505)
WARNING: ENSURE THAT THE AIRCRAFT IS PROPERLY TIED DOWN (REF. AIRCRAFT
FLIGHT MANUAL).
NOTE: 1. The maximum gas generator speed adjustment and the manual-automatic
interconnect linkage adjustment affect each other. Hence, the entire
procedure in this check must be carried out whenever either of these
adjustments requires checking.
NOTE: 2. To ensure the capability of setting the gas generator maximum speed stop
under a wide variety of ambient conditions without exceeding engine
operating limits, a slave part power trim stop (P/N 3243781, Table 504)
(Pre-SB5331) or integral part power trim stop (Post-SB5331) is provided. The
part power trim stop, when in use, enables adjustment of the maximum
obtainable Ng at lower power settings.
NOTE: 3. During adjustment of the gas generator maximum speed stop, ensure the
following conditions:
v The internal threads of the index lever are fully engaged.

v The stop screw touches the part power trim stop in the ’’in use‘‘ position or
in the ’’stowed‘‘ position.
v The locking nut and screw are correctly locked and lockwired.
(1) Pre-SB5331: Install slave part power trim stop (P/N 3243781, Table 504).
WARNING: EACH PART POWER TRIM STOP MUST BE PROPERLY STOWED

AFTER COMPLETION OF THE PART POWER TRIM CHECK.
(2) Post-SB5331: Remove pin securing part power trim stop in stowed position.
(3) Rotate stop so that it limits travel of automatic fuel control arm.
(4) Install cotterpin to secure stop and bend ends of pin over.
(5) Start power section and proceed as follows:
71-00-00
Page 522
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MAXIMUM STOP ADJUSTMENT

(AUTOMATIC FUEL CONTROL)
B 1
COTTER PIN
A
2 PART POWER
TRIM STOP 2 PART POWER
‘IN USE’ POSITION TRIM STOP
‘STOWED’ POSITION
PART POWER TRIM STOP
LOCATION ON AUTOMATIC
FUEL CONTROL UNIT
VIEW A
Pg CONNECTION
6 ACCELERATION ADJUSTER
7 IDLE SPEED ADJUSTMENT

DATUMLINE
VIEW B (TYPICAL)
4 MANUAL−AUTOMATIC
INTER−CONNECT LINKAGE
ADJUSTMENT
CLEARANCE CHECK WITH TWISTGRIP

AT MAXIMUM SETTING
MANUAL
MAXIMUM STOP MAXIMUM STOP ADJUSTMENT
5 (MANUAL CONTROL)
3 CLEARANCE MANUAL CONTROL ARM
C241160
Fuel Control Adjustment
Figure 505
71-00-00
Page 523
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(a) Fuel Control Selector Switch - AUTOMATIC.
(b) Set Power Control Lever so that arm contacts stop.
CAUTION: ADJUST COLLECTIVE PITCH RESET SETTING AS NECESSARY TO

ENSURE THAT MAXIMUM OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED IS NOT
EXCEEDED (REF. TABLE 501) .
(c) Gradually increase collective pitch until maximum possible Ng is obtained.
NOTE: Ensure that torque limit is not exceeded (Ref. Airframe Manual).
(d) Check that Ng falls within 35052 rpm (92.0%) to 35280 rpm (92.6%) with slave
(Pre-SB5331) or integral (Post-SB5331) part power trim stop.
(e) If necessary, adjust automatic fuel control arm maximum stop adjuster (1) to
get Ng value of 35166 rpm (92.3%) with slave part power trim stop (2).
NOTE: A half-turn of adjuster is equal to a change of 225 rpm (0.5%) approx.

Turn counterclockwise to increase rpm or clockwise to decrease rpm.
CAUTION: PRE-SB5331: SLAVE PART POWER TRIM STOP MUST NOT BE

REMOVED UNTIL MAXIMUM STOP ADJUSTMENT HAS BEEN
COMPLETED. FAILURE TO OBSERVE THIS PRECAUTION COULD
CAUSE AN Ng OVERSPEED.
CAUTION: POST-SB5331: PART POWER TRIM STOP MUST NOT BE STOWED

UNTIL MAXIMUM STOP ADJUSTMENT HAS BEEN COMPLETED.
FAILURE TO OBSERVE THIS PRECAUTION COULD CAUSE AN Ng
OVERSPEED.
(f) Shut down power section.
(g) On completion of adjustment, lockwire adjuster.
(h) Pre-SB5331: Remove cotterpin and slave part power trim stop.
(i) Post-SB5331: Remove cotterpin and rotate part power trim stop to the stowed
position.
(j) Post-SB5331: Secure stop with a new pin and bend ends of pin over.
(6) Check that pointer on MFCU indicates 95 degrees. If not, adjust manual-automatic
interconnect linkage (4) as follows:
(a) With indicator at zero degrees (minimum stop), retard automatic fuel control
arm to compress spring and to disengage spacer tangs from self-locking nut.
(b) Adjust self-locking nut position as required and recheck indicator against 95
degree position.
NOTE: Ensure that spacer tangs are correctly positioned on nut flats and
between tangs of interconnect lever (Ref. Detail B).
71-00-00
Page 524
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(7) Hold automatic fuel control arm in contact with maximum stop (95 degrees) and
check that clearance (3) between MFCU arm maximum stop adjuster (5) and
maximum stop is 0.015 to 0.020 inch.
NOTE: It is recommended that rigging of the interconnect linkage be accomplished

with the airframe control tube disconnected at the MFCU lever (Ref.
Airframe Maintenance Manual).
(a) If necessary, adjust manual-automatic interconnect linkage (4) to obtain the

required minimum clearance - no other adjustment is permitted.
NOTE: Ensure that torque required to turn adjustment nut is 1-1/2 lb.in.,
minimum. If necessary, replace nut.
(b) Retard Power Control Lever setting until MFCU minimum stop is contacted.
(c) Ensure that pointer is not bent. Straighten if necessary.
(d) If pointer deviates from 0 degrees by more than 1/16 (0.0625) in., MFCU must
be replaced.
(8) Start power section and run at Idle.
(9) Carry out several transfers from Automatic to Manual and vice versa.
(10) Check that successful transfer has taken place in both directions by observing shift
of parameters.
NOTE: 1. Mild surges or pops during transfer may be considered as normal.
NOTE: 2. If operator flies below 5000 ft., ground check as above is acceptable. If
operator flies above 5000 ft., the cross over must be checked as per
Aircraft Maintenance Manual.
(11) Check and adjust AFCU Idle setting.
(a) Start affected power section.
(b) Set Power Control Lever to position pointer on MFCU at 30 to 35 degrees on

quadrant.
(c) Check that Ng is between 20500 (53.8%) and 21000 rpm (55%).
(d) If necessary, adjust idle stop (7) to bring Ng within required range.
NOTE: The difference between Ng idle speeds of both power sections must
not exceed 250 rpm.
(e) On completion of check, torque idle stop locknut 20 to 25 lb.in. and lockwire.
71-00-00
Page 525
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
J. Power Turbine (Nf) Governors
For instructions on setting the Nf governor maximum and minimum stops, refer to the
Aircraft Maintenance Manual.
K. Performance/Power Assurance Check
The purpose of the performance/ power assurance check is to detect any signs of
engine deterioration.
All forms of engine deterioration can cause increased Tt5 and fuel consumption at a
given power output. Compressor deterioration which in most cases, is due to dirt deposits,
causes increase of Ng at given power settings. This can be remedied by Field
Cleaning (Ref. 72-00-00, ENGINE - CLEANING). Hot section deterioration, in addition to
causing Tt5 increases, causes decreases, in Ng at given power settings.
If the observed parameters are outside the limits quoted for the installed engine,
instrument or engine faults are indicated and reference must be made to the applicable
troubleshooting procedures (Ref. 72-00-00, FAULT ISOLATION).
L. Acceleration
(1) Start power section and operate to obtain stabilized temperatures.
(3) Increase power to obtain Ng of 61 ± 1%.
CAUTION: POWER CONTROL LEVER MUST BE RETARDED TO ’’IDLE‘‘ AS SOON

AS 90% Ng IS ATTAINED.
(4) Rapidly (0.5 second max.) advance Power Control Lever to maximum setting and
retard as soon as 90% Ng is reached.
(5) Record time taken to accelerate to 90% Ng. Maximum acceptable time is 4
seconds, with no more than 0.5 seconds between power sections.
NOTE: The maximum acceleration time of 4 seconds may be increased 1.0

second for each 5,000 ft. (1525M) pressure altitude above sea level
and/or 0.5 second for each 30°C outside temperature above 15°C.
(6) If acceleration time exceeds limits, the acceleration adjuster on fuel control unit may
be adjusted, as follows:
71-00-00
Page 526
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: TO AVOID OVER ADJUSTMENT, ALL ADJUSTMENTS MUST BE

LOGGED.
(a) Adjuster must be rotated one click at a time, to a maximum of six clicks
counter-clockwise (to slow acceleration rate) and three or six clicks (see Note)
clockwise (to speed up acceleration rate), repeating steps (3) and (4) after
each adjustment.
NOTE: Three clicks are allowed if the adjuster has a flat, ’’coin‘‘ shaped
lockwire seal. Six clicks are allowed if the adjuster has a small
cylindrical seal.
(b) If acceleration time is not met within these parameters, the AFCU must be
replaced.
M. Deceleration (Pre-SB5398 engines only)
CAUTION: REFER TO AIRCRAFT FLIGHT MANUAL FOR COMPLETE STARTING

AND GROUND RUNNING PROCEDURES.
(1) With the engine running at ground idle, advance (rotate) the throttle of one power
section to full throttle position and allow Ng to stabilize.
(2) Retard throttle as quickly as possible (approximately one second), allowing the
power section to decelerate to idle speed.
(3) Repeat steps (1) and (2) for the second power section.
(4) Replace the fuel surge accumulator if engine flame-out, rumble, or compressor stall
occurs during the rapid deceleration check.
N. Shutdown
WARNING: IF THERE IS ANY EVIDENCE OF FIRE IN A POWER SECTION AFTER

SHUTDOWN, PROCEED IMMEDIATELY WITH A DRY MOTORING RUN
(REF. PARA. D. PRECEDING)
(1) Power Control Lever - IDLE.
(2) Allow both power sections to stabilize for a minimum of one minute at Idle.
(4) Check for any changes in run-down time, which should not be less than 20
seconds from Idle and listen for any unusual noises such as scraping, rubbing or
grinding.
(5) Fuel Boost Pump - OFF.
(7) Check that dump valves and gas generator drain valves operate correctly by
observing overboard drain.
71-00-00
Page 527
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(8) Check engine for fuel and/or oil leaks (Ref. Table 507).
NOTE: If engine is scheduled to remain inactive for an extended period, install

inlet and exhaust covers after a suitable cool-down period.
TABLE 507, Engine Oil and Fuel Permissible Leakage
Overboard Drain Leakage

Fuel (Each Power Section)
Fuel Pump 0.5 cc/minute (30 cc/hour) Maximum
Dump Valve 0.5 cc/minute (30 cc/hour) Maximum
Oil
Starter Generator Seal (each) 3 cc hour Maximum
Output Shaft Seal 0.2 cc/minute (12 cc/hour) Maximum
NOTE: 1. Where a specific seal leakage is not specified, seal leakage must not exceed 3 cc/hr.
NOTE: 2. Oil consumption is 0.3 lb./hr. (150 cc/hr.) for the whole engine or 0.1 lb./hr. (50 cc/hr.)
for each power section and 0.1 lb./hr. (50 cc/hr.) for the gearbox, measured over a 10
hour period.
O. Bleed Valve Closing Point
(1) Perform Bleed valve closing point (Ref. 75-30-00 Adjustment/ Test).
71-00-00
Page 528
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER CHAPTER
LEP 1 Jul 18/2016 117 Jul 18/2016
2 Jul 18/2016 118 Jul 18/2016
3 Jul 18/2016 119 Jul 18/2016
4 Jul 18/2016 120 Jul 18/2016
121 Jul 18/2016
Contents 1 Jul 18/2016 122 Jul 18/2016
2 Jul 18/2016 123 Jul 18/2016
3 Jul 18/2016 124 Jul 18/2016
4 Jul 18/2016 125 Jul 18/2016
5 Jul 18/2016 126 Jul 18/2016
6 Jul 18/2016 127 Jul 18/2016
128 Jul 18/2016
72-00-00 1 Jan 26/2015 129 Jul 18/2016
Description and 2 Jan 26/2015 130 Jul 18/2016
Operation 3 Jan 26/2015 131 Jul 18/2016
4 Jan 26/2015 132 Jul 18/2016
5 Jan 26/2015 133 Jul 18/2016
6 Jan 26/2015 134 Jul 18/2016
7 Jan 26/2015 135 Jul 18/2016
8 Jan 26/2015 136 Jul 18/2016
9 Jan 26/2015 137 Jul 18/2016
10 Jan 26/2015 138 Jul 18/2016
11 Jan 26/2015 139 Jul 18/2016
12 blank Jan 26/2015 140 Jul 18/2016
141 Jul 18/2016
72-00-00 101 Jul 18/2016 142 Jul 18/2016
Fault Isolation 102 Jul 18/2016 143 Jul 18/2016
103 Jul 18/2016 144 Jul 18/2016
104 Jul 18/2016 145 Jul 18/2016
105 Jul 18/2016 146 Jul 18/2016
106 Jul 18/2016 147 Jul 18/2016
107 Jul 18/2016 148 Jul 18/2016
108 Jul 18/2016 149 Jul 18/2016
109 Jul 18/2016 150 Jul 18/2016
110 Jul 18/2016 151 Jul 18/2016
111 Jul 18/2016 152 Jul 18/2016
112 Jul 18/2016 153 Jul 18/2016
113 Jul 18/2016 154 Jul 18/2016
114 Jul 18/2016 155 Jul 18/2016
115 Jul 18/2016 156 Jul 18/2016
116 Jul 18/2016 157 Jul 18/2016

Page 1
72-00 LEP Jul 18/2016
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER CHAPTER
158 Jul 18/2016 336 Jul 28/2014
159 Jul 18/2016 337 Jul 28/2014
160 Jul 18/2016 338 Jul 28/2014
161 Jul 18/2016 339 Jul 28/2014
162 Jul 18/2016 340 Jul 28/2014
341 Jul 28/2014
72-00-00 301 Jul 28/2014 342 Jul 28/2014
Servicing 302 Jul 28/2014 343 Jul 28/2014
303 Jul 28/2014 344 Jul 28/2014
304 Jul 28/2014 345 Jul 28/2014
305 Jul 28/2014 346 Jul 28/2014
306 Jul 28/2014 347 Jul 28/2014
307 Jul 28/2014 348 Jul 28/2014
308 Jul 28/2014 349 Jul 28/2014
309 Jul 28/2014 350 Jul 28/2014
310 Jul 28/2014 351 Jul 28/2014
311 Jul 28/2014 352 Jul 28/2014
312 Jul 28/2014 353 Jul 28/2014
313 Jul 28/2014 354 Jul 28/2014
314 Jul 28/2014 355 Jul 28/2014
315 Jul 28/2014 356 Jul 28/2014
316 Jul 28/2014 357 Jul 28/2014
317 Jul 28/2014 358 Jul 28/2014
318 Jul 28/2014 359 Jul 28/2014
319 Jul 28/2014 360 Jul 28/2014
320 Jul 28/2014 361 Jul 28/2014
321 Jul 28/2014 362 Jul 28/2014
322 Jul 28/2014 363 Jul 28/2014
323 Jul 28/2014 364 Jul 28/2014
324 Jul 28/2014 365 deleted
325 Jul 28/2014 366 deleted
326 Jul 28/2014
327 Jul 28/2014
328 Jul 28/2014
329 Jul 28/2014
330 Jul 28/2014 72-00-00 401 Jul 28/2014
331 Jul 28/2014 Removal/ 402 Jul 28/2014
332 Jul 28/2014 Installation 403 Jul 28/2014
333 Jul 28/2014 404 Jul 28/2014
334 Jul 28/2014 405 Jul 28/2014
335 Jul 28/2014 406 blank Jul 28/2014

Page 2
72-00 LEP Jul 18/2016
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER CHAPTER
72-00-00 601 Jul 18/2016 642 Jul 18/2016
Inspection 602 Jul 18/2016 643 Jul 18/2016
Check 603 Jul 18/2016 644 Jul 18/2016
604 Jul 18/2016 645 Jul 18/2016
605 Jul 18/2016 646 Jul 18/2016
606 Jul 18/2016 647 Jul 18/2016
607 Jul 18/2016 648 Jul 18/2016
608 Jul 18/2016 649 Jul 18/2016
609 Jul 18/2016 650 Jul 18/2016
610 Jul 18/2016 651 Jul 18/2016
611 Jul 18/2016 652 Jul 18/2016
612 Jul 18/2016 653 Jul 18/2016
613 Jul 18/2016 654 Jul 18/2016
614 Jul 18/2016 655 Jul 18/2016
615 Jul 18/2016 656 Jul 18/2016
616 Jul 18/2016 657 Jul 18/2016
617 Jul 18/2016 658 Jul 18/2016
618 Jul 18/2016 659 Jul 18/2016
619 Jul 18/2016 660 Jul 18/2016
620 Jul 18/2016 661 Jul 18/2016
621 Jul 18/2016 662 Jul 18/2016
622 Jul 18/2016 663 Jul 18/2016
623 Jul 18/2016 664 Jul 18/2016
624 Jul 18/2016 665 Jul 18/2016
625 Jul 18/2016 666 Jul 18/2016
626 Jul 18/2016 667 Jul 18/2016
627 Jul 18/2016 668 Jul 18/2016
628 Jul 18/2016 669 Jul 18/2016
629 Jul 18/2016 670 Jul 18/2016
630 Jul 18/2016 671 Jul 18/2016
631 Jul 18/2016 672 Jul 18/2016
632 Jul 18/2016 673 Jul 18/2016
633 Jul 18/2016 674 blank Jul 18/2016
634 Jul 18/2016
635 Jul 18/2016 72-00-00 701 Jul 18/2016
636 Jul 18/2016 Cleaning/ 702 Jul 18/2016
637 Jul 18/2016 Painting 703 Jul 18/2016
638 Jul 18/2016 704 Jul 18/2016
639 Jul 18/2016 705 Jul 18/2016
640 Jul 18/2016 706 Jul 18/2016
641 Jul 18/2016 707 Jul 18/2016

Page 3
72-00 LEP Jul 18/2016
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
SECTION PAGE DATE
708 Jul 18/2016
709 Jul 18/2016
710 Jul 18/2016
711 Jul 18/2016
712 Jul 18/2016
713 Jul 18/2016
714 Jul 18/2016
715 Jul 18/2016
716 Jul 18/2016
717 Jul 18/2016
718 Jul 18/2016
719 Jul 18/2016
720 blank Jul 18/2016
72-00-01 201 Jul 28/2014

Maintenance 202 Jul 28/2014
Practices 203 Jul 28/2014
204 Jul 28/2014
205 Jul 28/2014
206 Jul 28/2014
207 Jul 28/2014
208 Jul 28/2014
209 Jul 28/2014
210 Jul 28/2014
211 Jul 28/2014
212 Jul 28/2014
213 Jul 28/2014
214 Jul 28/2014
215 Jul 28/2014
216 Jul 28/2014

Page 4
72-00 LEP Jul 18/2016
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
ENGINE - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION 72-00-00
1. General 1
A. Major Assemblies and Directional References 1

B. Engine Data 3
C. Transport Canada Approved Service Bulletins 5
D. Leading Particulars - Accessory and Reduction Gearbox Drive 6
E. Fuel and Oil System Specifications 6
2. Engine Sections 6
A. Reduction Gearbox Section 7
B. Gas Generator Section 7
C. Power Turbine and Exhaust Section 7
D. Accessory Gearbox Section 7
3. Engine Operation 7
A. Starting 7
B. Running 9
ENGINE - FAULT ISOLATION 72-00-00
1. General 101
2. Procedure 103
ENGINE - SERVICING 72-00-00

1. General 301
3. Special Tools 301
4. Fixtures, Equipment and Supplier Tools 302
5. Oil System Servicing 302
A. Oil Level Check and Replenishing 302

B. Draining 302

Page 1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
ENGINE - SERVICING (Cont’d) 72-00-00
C. Flushing 304
6. Preparation for Storage or Service 305
A. General 305
B. Shipping Covers, Caps and Plugs - Removal/Installation 307
C. Removal of Engine from Fiberboard Container 307

D. Removal of Engine from Metal Container 311
E. Removal of Power Section from Metal Container 315
F. Removal of Power Section from Fiberboard Container 322
G. Removal of Reduction Gearbox from Metal Container 325
H. Removal of Reduction Gearbox from Fiberboard Container 332

I. Installation of Engine in Fiberboard Container 335
J. Installation of Engine in Metal Container 338
K. Installation of Power Section in Metal Container 344
L. Installation of Power Section in Fiberboard Container 349
M. Installation of Reduction Gearbox in Metal Container 351
N. Installation of Reduction Gearbox in Fiberboard Container 355

O. Depreservation/Preservation 358
P. Reactivation of Desiccant 364
ENGINE - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION 72-00-00
1. General 401

5. Procedure 401
A. Installation in Stand 402

Page 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
ENGINE - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (Cont’d) 72-00-00
B. Removal from Stand 402
ENGINE - INSPECTION/CHECK 72-00-00
1. General 601

5. Procedure 601
6. Inspection Frequency Definition 602
A. 25 hours. 602
B. 50/100/150/300/600/900/1200 and 2500 hours. 602

C. Periodic Inspection - Tolerances 602
7. Periodic Inspections 602
8. Unscheduled Inspections 610
A. Chip Detectors 610
B. Fuel Pump Filter 610
C. Fuel Pump 610

D. Silver Flakes in Oil 611
E. Reduction Gearbox Replacement 611
F. Power Section Replacement 611
9. Specific Inspections 611
A. First-stage Compressor Blades 611

B. Functional Check of T5 Temperature Sensing System 614
10. Special Condition Inspections 615
A. General 615
B. Overtorque 615

Page 3
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
ENGINE - INSPECTION/CHECK (Cont’d) 72-00-00
C. Overtemperature 615
D. Overspeed 615
E. Sudden Stoppage 623
F. Oil Systems - Unusual Conditions 624
G. Immersion in Water 624

H. Dropped Engine or Component 624
I. Hard Landing 624
J. Inlet Blockage 625
K. Lightning Strike 625
L. Contamination by Fire Extinguishing Agents 625

M. Aircraft Flown Through Volcanic Ash or Smoke 625
N. Contamination of the AFCU P3 (Pneumatic) System 626
11. Borescope Equipment and Procedures 627
A. General 627
B. Description 627
C. Procedure 636
12. In-service Borescope Inspection 639
A. Hot Section Components 639
B. Inspection of Combustion Chamber 640
C. Inspection of Compressor Turbine (CT) Vane Ring Assembly 642
D. Inspection of CT Blades 642

E. Inspection of CT Shroud Segments 648
F. Inspection of Power Turbine (PT) Stator 648
G. Inspection of PT Blades 649
13. Hot Section Inspection 649

Page 4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
ENGINE - INSPECTION/CHECK (Cont’d) 72-00-00
A. General 649
B. Preparation 649
C. Gas Generator Case Assembly 650
D. Combustion Chamber Liner 654
E. Combustion Chamber Large Exit Duct 655

F. Compressor Turbine Vane Ring 655
G. Compressor Turbine Shroud Segments 659
H. Compressor Turbine Shroud Housing 659
I. Compressor Turbine Disk Assembly 659
J. Power Turbine Disk Assembly 666

K. Power Turbine Vane Ring 667
L. T5 Temperature Sensing System 667
M. Exhaust Duct 671
N. Fuel Nozzles and Sheaths 671
O. Fuel Manifold Bolt Removal 671
P. Reassembly of Engine 671

ENGINE- CLEANING 72-00-00
1. General 701

5. Procedure 702
6. Engine External Wash 702
7. Compressor Wash 702
A. Preparation of Equipment 702

Page 5
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
ENGINE- CLEANING (Cont’d) 72-00-00
B. Preparation of Cleaning Solutions 704
C. Motoring Wash - Desalination 708
D. Motoring Wash - Performance Recovery 711
E. Compressor Turbine Wash 713
8. Corrosion Inhibitor 715

A. Procedure 715
9. Fuel Nozzle In-situ Cleaning 716
A. Preparation 717
B. Cleaning Cycle 717
C. Post-cleaning Operation 719

POWER SECTION - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES 72-00-01
1. General 201
5. Procedure 202
A. Removal from Engine 202
B. Installation in Maintenance Stand (PWC30835) or (PWC70483) 209
C. Installation in Maintenance Stand (PWC34300) 211
D. Removal from Maintenance Stand (PWC30835) or

(PWC70483) 213
E. Removal from Maintenance Stand (PWC34300) 213
F. Installation on Engine 214

Page 6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ENGINE - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General
The engine comprises two identical free-turbine turboshaft power sections driving a single
output shaft through identical geartrains in a common reduction gearbox.
The terminology used for engine major assemblies, the directional references and the
leading particulars and specifications are as follows:
A. Major Assemblies and Directional References (Ref. Fig. 1)
(1) Each complete engine consists of two power sections and the reduction gearbox
section which are defined as follows:
(a) Power Section
Each power section comprises an accessory gearbox section, a gas generator

section and a power turbine and exhaust section.
(b) Reduction Gearbox Section
This comprises two input sections; one for each power section and an output
section.
(2) Terms such as clockwise, counterclockwise, right and left apply with the engine
viewed from the reduction gearbox end unless otherwise stated.
NOTE: The terms No. 1 and No. 2 power sections are defined as left and right
respectively with the engine viewed from this point.
72-00-00
Page 1
ENGINE - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION Jan 26/2015
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ACCESSORY ACCESSORY
GEARBOX GEARBOX
NO.1 POWER SECTION NO.2 POWER SECTION
FLANGE A REDUCTION FLANGE A

REDUCTION GEARBOX GEARBOX REDUCTION GEARBOX
INPUT SECTION OUTPUT INPUT SECTION
SECTION
REDUCTION GEARBOX
REDUCTION
GEARBOX
C22651
Major Assemblies and Directional References

Figure 1
72-00-00
Page 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Engine Data
(1) Leading Particulars - Engine (Ref. Tables 1, 2 or 3)
TABLE 1, PT6T-3D Engine Leading Particulars
Maximum SFC
Minimum SHP lbs/shp/hr
Rating Speed (Ns) RPM Twin Single Twin Single
2-1/2 Minute 6600 - 1133 - 0.601
Continuous 6600 - 1024 - 0.599
OEI
Take-off 6600 1800 900 0.602 0.603
Maximum 6600 1600 800 0.617 0.622
Continuous
NOTE: 1. Standard day, sea level, static conditions with no installation losses and no air bleed
or airframe accessory power absorption.
NOTE: 2. The leading particulars are provided for reference purposes only. For complete
operating parameters refer to 71-00-00 Table 501, Engine Specific Operating
Instructions and/or Airframe Manufacturers Flight Manual, as applicable.
Type Twin Power Section - Free
Turbine Turboshaft
Type of Combustion Chamber Annular
Engine Dimensions, Basic at
Room Temperature:
- Length 67 inches (1701 mm)
- Width 44 inches (1117 mm)
- Height 33 inches (838 mm)
Output Shaft:
-Rotation Clockwise
-Configuration Externally Splined
-Gear Ratio (to Free Turbine) 1:5
Compressor Pressure Ratio 7:1
Maximum Total Oil Consumption 0.4 lb./hr (182 cc/hr)
(Measured over 10 hours period) or 2 US Quarts in 10 hours
(1.8 Liters in 10 hours)
Specification Weight - Dry 676 lbs. (307 Kg.)
Weight of Additional Equipment - Dry 37.5 lbs. (17.05 Kg.)
Weight of Oil - approx. 37.3 lbs. (16.91 Kg.)
Total Weight - approx. 751 lbs. (341 Kg.)
72-00-00
Page 3
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE 2, PT6T-3DE Engine Leading Particulars
Maximum SFC
2-1/2 Minute 6600 - 1133 - 0.601
Continuous OEI 6600 - 1079 - 0.599
Take-off 6600 1800 900 0.602 0.603
Maximum Continuous 6600 1600 800 0.617 0.622
NOTE: 1. Standard day, sea level, static conditions with no installation losses and no air bleed
or airframe accessory power absorption.
Turbine Turboshaft
Room Temperature:
Output Shaft:
-Rotation Clockwise
Specification Weight - Dry 676 lbs. (307 Kg.)
Weight of Additional Equipment - Dry 37.5 lbs. (17.05 Kg.)
TABLE 3, PT6T-3DF Engine Leading Particulars
Maximum SFC
2-1/2 Minute 6600 - 1133 - 0.601
Continuous 6600 - 1079 - 0.599
OEI
Take-off 6600 1800 900 0.602 0.603
72-00-00
Page 4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE 3, PT6T-3DF Engine Leading Particulars (Cont’d)
Maximum SFC
Maximum 6600 1600 800 0.617 0.622
Continuous
NOTE: 1. Standard day, sea level, static conditions with no installation losses and no air
bleed or airframe accessory power absorption.
Turbine Turboshaft
Room Temperature:
Output Shaft:
-Rotation Clockwise
Weight of Additional Equipment - 37.5 lbs. (17.05 Kg.)
Dry
C. Transport Canada Approved Service Bulletins
(1) The following service bulletins contain data recommended by Pratt & Whitney
Canada and approved by Transport Canada.
(a) Service Bulletin 72-003 (P&WC SB No.5003) Operating Time Between

Overhauls and Hot Section Inspection
(b) Service Bulletin 72-001 (P&WC SB No. 5001) Approved List of (Synthetic)
Lubricating Oils.
(c) Service Bulletin 72-144 (P&WC SB No. 5144) Requirements and Approved
Listing of Engine Fuels and Additives.
72-00-00
Page 5
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Leading Particulars - Accessory and Reduction Gearbox Drive (Ref. Table 4and Fig. 2)
TABLE 4, Accessory and Reduction Gearbox Drives
Rotation Speed Ratio

ACCESSORY GEARBOX DRIVES 100% Ng = 38,100 RPM
Starter-generator CCW 0.2911

Tachometer-generator (Ng) CCW 0.1103
REDUCTION GEARBOX DRIVES MAX. Nf = 33,000 RPM
Tachometer-generator (Nf) CCW 0.1279

Blower Drive CW 0.2435
E. Fuel and Oil System Specifications (Ref. Table 5)
TABLE 5, Fuel and Oil Specifications

ITEM SPECIFICATION/CAPACITY
Fuel CPW46. Refer to Engine Service Bulletin
No. 5144 for approved engine fuels.
Oil Refer to Engine Service Bulletin No. 5001
for approved oils.
Accessory Gearbox Oil Tank 1.60 U.S. Gallons (1.33 Imp. gallons or
6.05 liters)
(Usable quantity) 0.75 U.S. Gallon (0.62 Imp. gallons or 2.83
liters)
Reduction Gearbox Oil Tank 1.25 U.S. Gallons (1.04 Imp. gallons or
4.73 liters)
(Usable quantity) 0.25 U.S. Gallon (0.21 Imp. gallons or 0.95
liter)
2. Engine Sections (Ref. Fig. 3)
NOTE: Only a brief description of each engine section is given here. Full description and
operation of each section is included in the Chapter/Section/Unit applicable to each
subject. References to these Chapter/Section/Units are given in parenthesis after
each subject title.
72-00-00
Page 6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Reduction Gearbox Section (Ref. 72-10-00)
This section comprises the reduction gearbox input and output sections, an integral
torquemeter, two power turbine (Nf) governors and two air (Pg) accumulators. The gearbox
also includes drive pads for the airframe supplied tachometer generator and oil cooler
blower.
NOTE: Refer to Figure 2 for location of accessory drives.
B. Gas Generator Section (Ref. 72-30-00)
This section contains those components associated with intake and compression of air,
the combustion section of the engine and the compressor turbine components.
C. Power Turbine and Exhaust Section (Ref. 72-50-00)
This section comprises the exhaust duct and the power turbine components. The power
turbine stator assembly houses the inter-turbine temperature sensing probes.
D. Accessory Gearbox Section (Ref. 72-60-00)
Engine driven accessories, with the exception of the Nf governor, the Nf tachometer
generator and the oil cooler blower are mounted on the accessory gearbox and driven
from geartrains within the gearbox. The gearbox is driven by the compressor through a
coupling shaft.
NOTE: Refer to Figure 2 for accessory drive locations.
3. Engine Operation
A. Starting
The engine is started by means of an airframe-supplied starter generator which is

mounted on the accessory gearbox. The starter cranks the compressor via the accessory
gearbox internal gears.
Rotation of the compressor causes air to be drawn in through the air inlet in the gas
generator section. This air is compressed by the axial and centrifugal stages of the
compressor at a ratio of 7:1. The air leaves the final (centrifugal) stage of the compressor
and passes through diffuser pipes in the gas generator case to the combustion
chamber. The diffuser pipes raise the static pressure of the air and turn its flow through
90 degrees.
The accessory gearbox driven fuel pump delivers fuel to the nozzles in the combustion
chamber via the fuel control units which are also mounted on the accessory gearbox.
The fuel is sprayed into the combustion chamber where it mixes with the air from the
compressor.
On activation of the aircraft ignition switches, the ignition exciter energizes the spark
igniters in the combustion chamber and the fuel air mixture is ignited.
As soon as light-up is obtained, the starter-generator and the ignition system are
deactivated.
72-00-00
Page 7
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2 2
1
1
3
3
FRONT VIEW
4 4
6 6
5 5
REAR VIEW
C3721A
Engine Accessory Drive Locations

Figure 2
72-00-00
Page 8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 2
1. Starter-Generator
2. Fuel Pump & FCU
3. Ng Tachometer-generator
4. Blower Drive
5. Nf Governor
6. Nf Tachometer-generator
Air in excess of that required for combustion is used to cool the surfaces of the
combustion chamber liner.
B. Running
The gases produced by combustion of the fuel-air mixture expand from the combustion
chamber through the passage between the combustion chamber large and small exit
ducts to the compressor turbine guide vanes.
The turbine guide vanes direct the gas flow onto the compressor turbine blades at the
optimum angle to drive the turbine.
The compressor turbine thus drives the compressor and the accessory gearbox.
Gas flows to and from the combustion chamber in opposite directions. This reversal,
along with the second reversal beyond the combustion chamber, eliminates the need for
a long shaft between the compressor and the compressor turbine. Power section
overall length and weight are thus reduced.
Beyond the compressor turbine the still expanding gases pass through the power
turbine guide vanes which direct the gas flow onto the power turbine blades.
Each power turbine drives its corresponding input section of the reduction gearbox via
the power turbine shaft and the main input drive coupling shaft.
Exhaust gases leave each power section through the single exhaust port in the exhaust
duct and are directed into the airframe exhaust system.
Each reduction gearbox input section drives the common output section drive shaft
through sprag clutches which isolate an inoperative power section in the event of failure.
72-00-00
Page 9
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FLANGES
A REDUCTION GEARBOX TO EXHAUST DUCT
B BEARING HOUSING SUPPORT TO TURBINE SHAFT HOUSING
C EXHAUST DUCT TO GAS GENERATOR CASE
D EXHAUST DUCT TO POWER TURBINE VANE HOUSING
E COMPRESSOR TURBINE SHROUD HOUSING TO INNER EXIT DUCT
F GAS GENERATOR CASE TO COMPRESSOR INLET CASE
G COMPRESSOR INLET CASE TO ACCESSORY GEARBOX
C3003B_1
Engine Cross Section

72-00-00
Page 10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6 5 3 4 1
2.5 2
C3003B_2
Engine Cross Section
Figure 3 (Sheet 2)
72-00-00
Page 11/12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ENGINE - FAULT ISOLATION
1. General
This section outlines the more common problems encountered during engine operation and
highlights their possible causes and solutions. Familiarization with the engine will minimize
operating defects but some may result from inadvertently exceeding operating limits under
adverse conditions. Before working on an engine that has been reported malfunctioning
in flight, it is recommended that flight reports and all available sources of pertinent information
be consulted.
The problems treated here fall into four main groups, Starting, Operating, Performance and
Lubrication. Each problem is allocated to a separate Figure No. which presents the
possible causes and solutions in logic flow form. Where remedial action requires removal
and replacement and/or checks or tests to be carried out, references to the applicable
Chapter/Section/Unit in this manual are given in parentheses after each instruction.
The four main groups of problems and the applicable figures are as follows:
STARTING
No RPM Figure 101
Insufficient RPM Figure 102
Uncontrolled Power Section Figure 103
Acceleration
Delayed Start Figure 104
Failure to Light Up Figure 105
Incorrect Acceleration to Idle Figure 106
Hot Start Figure 107
High Idle Torque Figure 108
Sprag Clutch Non-Engagement Figure 109
OPERATING
Engine Overspeed/ Figure 110
Uncommanded Acceleration
Inability to Switch from Automatic Figure 111
Manual Mode
Fuel Leakage from AFCU Vent Figure 112
Leakage from Fuel Pump Drain Figure 113
Ports
Vibration Figure 114
Uncontrolled Power Section Figure 115
Acceleration
Surge During Acceleration Figure 116
72-00-00
Page 101
ENGINE - FAULT ISOLATION Jul 18/2016
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Off Idle Stall / Idle Stall Figure 117

Engine Rumble Figure 118
Failure to Accelerate Normally Figure 119
Failure to Decelerate Normally Figure 120
Overtorque Figure 121
Power Section Torques Unequal Figure 122
Torque Limiting Incorrect Figure 123
High Torque Reading Figure 124
Flameout Figure 125
Power Section Idle Speeds Figure 126
Incorrect
Low Power Section Output Figure 127
Excessive ‘‘Pop’’ on Transfer Figure 128
Between Automatic and Manual
Modes
Overtemperature Figure 129
Fluctuating Fuel Flow, Torque, Tt5 Figure 130
and Ng
Torque Split/Unusual Fuel Control Figure 131
Operation
PERFORMANCE CHECK
High Tt5 Figure 132
High Ng Figure 133
High Fuel Flow Figure 134
High SFC Figure 135
LUBRICATION
Chip Detector Light Comes On Figure 136
Excessive Oil Consumption Figure 137
Excessive Discharge through Figure 138
Breathers
Transfer Between Power Section Figure 139
and Reduction Gearbox
Oil Leak to Compressor Inlet Figure 140
High Power Section Oil Pressure Figure 141
Low Power Section Oil Pressure Figure 142
High RGB Oil System Pressure Figure 143
72-00-00
Page 102
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Low RGB Oil System Pressure Figure 144

Fluctuating Oil Pressure Figure 145
Oil Leaks at Oil-to-Fuel Heater Figure 146
Oil Discoloration Figure 147
2. Procedure
A. Locate specific problem in list preceding and refer to relevant figure.
B. Investigate each possible cause in the sequence in which it appears in the flow chart
and carry out the corrective action indicated.
72-00-00
Page 103
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C23941
Starting - No RPM
72-00-00
Page 104
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C23942A
Starting - No RPM
72-00-00
Page 105
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C23943
Starting - Insufficient RPM

Figure 102
72-00-00
Page 106
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C23944A
Starting - Uncontrolled Power Section Acceleration
Figure 103
72-00-00
Page 107
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C23945A
Starting - Delayed Start

Figure 104
72-00-00
Page 108
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C23946A
Starting - Failure to Light Up
72-00-00
Page 109
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C24565A

72-00-00
Page 110
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C24566A
72-00-00
Page 111
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AREA SHADED TO SHOW

MOUNTING FACE FOR MFCU
1
7
2 6
5
4 8
METERED
FUEL
FROM
AFCU 9
UNMETERED
3
FUEL TO AFCU
C24567

72-00-00
Page 112
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 105
2. Bolt
3. Fuel Interconnect Tube
5. Pressure Regulating Valve
8. Straight Nipple
9. Bolt
72-00-00
Page 113
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BYPSS RETURN PORT
FUEL INLET PORT
P3 ORIFICE FITTING
C24568

72-00-00
Page 114
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C23947
Starting - Incorrect Acceleration to Idle
Figure 106
72-00-00
Page 115
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HOT START (REF OVERTEMP LIMITS 71 00 00)
CHECK THAT CORRECT START PROCEDURE

IS BEING USED (REF 71−00−00 AND
ROTORCRAFT FLIGHT MANUAL). IF:
CORRECT: CHECK STARTER SPEED. IF LOW, OK: REMOVE FUEL NOZZLES AND
CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND CONNECTIONS. PERFORM FUEL NOZZLE FUNCTIONAL
REPLACE STARTER IF REQUIRED. (REF AF MM). IF: CHECK (REF 73−10−00). IF:
OK: CHECK ITT INDICATING SYSTEM FOR ACCURACY. IF:

OK: CHECK PROPER FUNCTIONING OF THE
FLOW DIVIDER. AT SHUT DOWN, CHECK THAT
FUEL DRAINS FROM THE FLOW DIVIDER. IF:
OK: CHECK GAS GENERATOR DRAIN
VALVES. PERFORM WET MOTORING RUN
AND CHECK FOR PROPER DRAINING. IF:
OK: AFCU SUSPECT. REPACE AFCU
OK: CONFIRM SERVICEABILITY OF IGNITION

SYSTEM COMPONENTS. ENSURE THERE IS
ADEQUATE POWER SUPPLY TO
IGNITION EXCITER. IF:
OK: CHECK FOR CORRECT FUEL CONTROL

INTER−CONNECT LINKAGE AND HELICOPTER
LINKAGE RIGGING: (REF 71−00−00 / ROTORCRAFT
MAINTENANCE MANUAL) IF:
OK: CHECK P3 FILTER FOR OBSTRUCTION. IF:
OK: PRESSURE CHECK FUEL CONTROL

PNEUMATIC LINES FOR LEAKAGE. IF:
C93071
Starting - Hot Start

Figure 107
72-00-00
Page 116
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C23949A
Starting - High Idle Torque
Figure 108
72-00-00
Page 117
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SPRAG CLUTCH
NON−ENGAGEMENT
PERFORM NON−ENGAGEMENT
PROCEDURE (REF. 71−00−00)
C39306
Starting - Sprag Clutch Non-Engagement

Figure 109
72-00-00
Page 118
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ENGINE OVERSPEED /
UNCOMMANDED ACCELERATION
(REF. 71−00−00 FOR LIMITS)
COMPRESSOR (Ng) POWER TURBINE (Nf)
REPLACE AFCU CHECK RIGGING OF

(REF. 73−20−02) IF− AIRFRAME LINKAGE TO
Nf GOVERNOR (REF.
AIRCRAFT MANUAL)
IF−
PROBLEM PERSISTS: CHECK

THAT CORRECT AFCU − MFCU
TRANSFER PROCEDURE IS OK: CHECK FOR ICE IN
BEING USED (REF. AIRCRAFT Pg LINE TO Nf
MANUAL) GOVERNOR IF−
OK: CHECK FOR

CONTAMINATION OF THE
AFCU P3 (PNEUMATIC)
SYSTEM (REF. PAGE BLOCK
601) IF−
OK: REPLACE Nf GOVERNOR

(REF. 73−20−04) IF−
PROBLEM PERSISTS: CHECK

THAT CORRECT AFCU − MFCU
TRANSFER PROCEDURE IS
BEING USED (REF. AIRCRAFT
MANUAL)
C23950B
Operating - Engine Overspeed/Uncommanded Acceleration
Figure 110
72-00-00
Page 119
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C23951B
Operating - Inability to Switch from Automatic to Manual Mode

Figure 111
72-00-00
Page 120
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C23952A
Operating - Fuel Leakage from AFCU Vent
Figure 112
72-00-00
Page 121
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C23953B
Operating - Leakage from Fuel Pump Drain Ports

Figure 113
72-00-00
Page 122
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C23954A
Operating - Vibration
Figure 114
72-00-00
Page 123
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C23955A
Operating - Uncontrolled Power Section Acceleration

Figure 115
72-00-00
Page 124
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C23956A
Operating - Surge During Acceleration
Figure 116
72-00-00
Page 125
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OFF IDLE COMPRESSOR STALL
1. ESTABLISH CLASS OF INSTALLED METERING PLUGS (REF. 75−30−00, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES).
2. DETERMINE SUITABLE CLASS OF PLUG REQUIRED TO CURE PROBLEM BASED ON

300 / 400 RPM PER CLASS.
3. CHANGE PLUG (REF. 75−30−00, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES).
4. IF FAULT PERSISTS REMOVE AND CLEAN P3 ORIFICE IN AFCU (REF. FIG. 105,
SHEET 5).
C23957C
Operating - Off Idle Stall / Idle Stall

72-00-00
Page 126
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
IDLE COMPRESSOR STALL
1. VERIFY BLEED VALVE CLOSING POINT USING BUBBLER ATTACHMENT

(REF. 75−30−00, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES).
2. DETERMINE SUITABLE CLASS OF PLUG REQUIRED TO CURE PROBLEM BASE ON

300 / 400 RPM PER CLASS.
3. CHANGE PLUG (REF. 75−30−00, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES).
4. IF FAULT PERSISTS, REMOVE AND CLEAN P3 ORIFICE IN

AFCU (REF. FIG. 105, SHEET 5).
C66179A
Operating - Off Idle Stall / Idle Stall
72-00-00
Page 127
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ENGINE RUMBLE
CHECK FUEL
SURGE ACCUMULATOR IF−
OK: CHECK FOR NOT OK: REPLACE

COMPRESSOR FOD SURGE ACCUMULATOR
OR EROSION IF−
NOT OK: REMOVE OK: TROUBLESHOOT

POWER SECTION FOR OFF IDLE STALL
(REF. OPERATING − OFF IDLE STALL)
C23958A
Operating - Engine Rumble

Figure 118
72-00-00
Page 128
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C23959
Operating - Failure to Accelerate Normally
Figure 119
72-00-00
Page 129
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C23960A
Operating - Failure to Decelerate Normally

Figure 120
72-00-00
Page 130
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OVERTORQUE
CARRY OUT TORQUE LIMITER CHECK

(REF. 71−00−00) IF−
FAULT PERSISTS: REPLACE

TORQUE LIMITER (REF. 73−20−05)
C23961A
Operating - Overtorque
Figure 121
72-00-00
Page 131
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
POWER SECTION TORQUES UNEQUAL
DURING ACCELERATION
WHEN ENGINE REACHES NORMAL AND/OR STEADY STATE
ONLY DURING ACCELERATION
OPERATING TEMPERATURE CONDITION
YES YES
YES
CHECK OIL−TO−FUEL HEATER

DO AN ACCELERATION (REF. 73−10−01). BRING POWER SECTION ON BOTH POWER SECTIONS:
CHECK ON BOTH AT NORMAL OPERATING TEMPERATURE DO A PRESSURE CHECK OF
POWER SECTIONS AND IMMEDIATELY AFTER SHUTDOWN: ALL THE PNEUMATIC LINES,
(REF. 71−00−00), IS CHECK TEMPERATURE OF HEATER AT Py ACCUMULATOR AND Pg
ACCELERATION HEATER FUEL OUTLET OR FUEL PUMP ACCUMULATOR (REF. 71−00
WITHIN LIMITS? FILTER COVER. IF TEMPERATURE IS −00). CHECK/CLEAN/REPLACE
GREATER THAN 60°C (140°F), REPLACE P3 FILTER HOUSING, P3 FILTER
NO YES /REPAIR OIL−TO−FUEL HEATER. AND P3 FILTER COVER
DRAIN VALVE (REF. 73−10−07).
TIGHTEN LOOSE YES ARE ANY LEAKS FOUND?
ON THE LOW TORQUE/SLOW PNEUMATIC LINES.
POWER SECTION: REPLACE/CLEAN
COMPONENTS AS NO
DO A PRESSURE CHECK OF ALL
THE PNEUMATIC LINES, Py NECESSARY.
ACCUMULATOR AND Pg DO A SINGLE POWER
ACCUMULATOR (REF. 71−00−00). CHECK Nf GOVERNOR RIGGING YES SECTION HOVER CHECK
CHECK/CLEAN/REPLACE P3 (REF. AMM). IF OK. ON EACH POWER SECTION
FILTER HOUSING, P3 FILTER AND (REF. AMM). ARE TORQUES
P3 FILTER COVER DRAIN VALVE YES APPROXIMATELY THE SAME?
(REF. 73−10−07). ARE ANY LEAKS TIGHTEN LOOSE
FOUND? PNEUMATIC LINES. NO
REPLACE/CLEAN
NO COMPONENTS AS
NECESSARY. TORQUES ARE SIGNIFICANTLY
DIFFERENT, CHECK AIRCRAFT
TORQUE INDICATING SYSTEM
CHECK/CLEAN/REPLACE Nf GOVERNORS, AND TORQUE PRESSURE
ADJUST ACCELERATION TORQUE CONTROL UNIT, TORQUE
AS NECESSARY TRANSMITTER CALIBRATION
LIMITER AS NECESSARY (REF. 73−20−04, /ADJUSTMENT (REF. AMM).
(REF. 71−00−00). STILL 73−20−05, 73−20−06 AND AMM).
PROBLEM IS THERE? IS IT OK?
IF NOT OK.
YES NO YES
CHECK/REPLACE AFCU AS ON THE LOW TORQUE

NECESSARY (REF. 73−20−02). POWER SECTION:
ADJUST/CALIBRATE INDICATING TORQUEMETER COMPONENTS
SYSTEM AND/OR TORQUE PRESSURE ARE SUSPECTED. CHECK/
TRANSMITTERS AS NECESSARY CLEAN/REPLACE AS
(REF. AMM). NECESSARY (REF. 72−10−00).
C245740
Operating - Power Section Torques Unequal

Figure 122
72-00-00
Page 132
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C23963
Operating - Torque Limiting Incorrect
Figure 123
72-00-00
Page 133
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C23964A
Operating - High Torque Reading

Figure 124
72-00-00
Page 134
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DURING RAPID
DECELERATION,
REPLACE FUEL
SURGE
ACCUMULATOR
(REF. 73−10−03)
OK: CHECK OIL−TO−FUEL

HEATER WITH ENGINE AT
NORMAL OPERATING
TEMPERATURE, HEATER
SHOULD BE COMFORTABLE
TO TOUCH. IF NOT, REPLACE
HEATER IF−
73−10−04
C23965C
Operating - Flameout
72-00-00
Page 135
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
73−20−01
73−20−02
73−20−02
73−20−01
C24569B
Operating - Flameout
72-00-00
Page 136
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C23966
Operating - Power Section Idle Speeds Incorrect
Figure 126
72-00-00
Page 137
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OK: CHECK OIL−TO−FUEL

HEATER WITH ENGINE AT
NORMAL OPERATING
TEMPERATURE, HEATER
SHOULD BE COMFORTABLE
TO TOUCH. IF NOT, REPLACE
HEATER IF−
73−20−04
73−20−02
C23967B
Operating - Low Power Section Output

72-00-00
Page 138
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C24570
Operating - Low Power Section Output
72-00-00
Page 139
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C23968
Operating - Excessive ‘‘Pop’’ on Transfer Between Automatic and Manual Modes

Figure 128
72-00-00
Page 140
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(REF. 75−30−00)
BLEED VALVE CHECK OK BUT VALVE

REMAINS OPEN (OR NOT FULLY CLOSED)
DURING POWER ASSURANCE CHECK: CHANGE
CLASS OF METERING PLUGS (REF. OPERATING
− OFF IDLE STALL AND 75−30−00)
C23969B
Operating - Overtemperature
72-00-00
Page 141
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C24571A
72-00-00
Page 142
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C24572A
72-00-00
Page 143
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
REFER TO OPERATING−LEAKAGE FROM

FUEL PUMP DRAIN PORTS
NOT OK: REPLACE TORQUE LIMITER

(REF. 72−10−02)
PRIME TORQUE LIMITER

(REF. 72−10−02)
C23970A
Operating - Fluctuating Fuel Flow, Torque, Tt5 and Ng

Figure 130
72-00-00
Page 144
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TORQUE SPLIT OR
UNUSUAL FUEL
CONTROL OPERATION
AFCU AIR ADAPTER

CORROSION OR
CONTAMINATION
REPLACE AFCU IF
CORRODED. CLEAN AIR
ADAPTER IF CONTAMINATED
IN ACCORDANCE WITH
’AFCU’ CMM (REF. IPC
FOR CMM DETAILS).
C73448
Operating - Torque Split/Unusual Fuel Control
Figure 131
72-00-00
Page 145
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HIGH Tt5
(REF. OPERATING − OVERTEMPERATURE )
C23971A
Performance Check Problems - High Tt5

Figure 132
72-00-00
Page 146
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C23972A
Performance Check Problems - High Ng
Figure 133
72-00-00
Page 147
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C23973
Performance Check Problems - High Fuel Flow

Figure 134
72-00-00
Page 148
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
72−50−01
72−50−03
C23974A
Performance Check Problems - High SFC
Figure 135
72-00-00
Page 149
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHIP DETECTOR LIGHT COMES ON
REMOVE APPROPRIATE CHIP DETECTOR (REF. 79−30−01)

CHIP DETECTOR STRAINER AND OIL FILTERS (REF.
79−20−02) EXAMINE METALLIC PICK−UP AND IDENTIFY
LOCATIONS AS REMOVED
IF−
METALLIC DEBRIS IS FOUND AND NOTHING METALLIC PICK−UP CONSISTS

MORE THAN FUZZ OR FINE SLIVERS. OF FLAKES OR OTHER
− CLEAN THE DEBRIS AND REINSTALL THE CHIP PARTICLES NOT IN THE
DETECTOR AND OIL FILTER CATEGORY OF FUZZ OR FINE
− RUN FOR TEN MINUTES WITHOUT EXCEEDING SLIVERS EXCESSIVE WEAR IS
LIMITS (REF. AIRCRAFT MANUAL) INDICATED
− IF NO CHIP LIGHT COMES ON, THE ENGINE IS IF−
ACCEPTABLE. RECORD THE CHIP LIGHT AND
LOCATION IN THE LOG BOOK.
IF−
CHIP DETECTOR LIGHT COMES ON DURING THE TEN MINUTE RUN OR

WITHIN NEXT 10 OPERATING HOURS.
REMOVE APPROPRIATE CHIP DETECTOR AND OIL FILTER.
EXAMINE METALLIC PICK−UP CONSISTS OF NOTHING MORE THAN FUZZ
OR FINE SLIVERS:
− CHANGE OIL (REF. PAGE BLOCK 301)
− RUN FOR TEN MINUTES WITHOUT EXCEEDING LIMITS THEN SHUT DOWN
(REF. AIRCRAFT MANUAL)
− REMOVE APPROPRIATE CHIP DETECTORS AND EXAMINE METALLIC
PICK−UP
− IF NO SIGNIFICANT PICK−UP IS FOUND, ENGINE IS ACCEPTABLE
IF−
C23975B
Lubrication - Chip Detector Light Comes On

72-00-00
Page 150
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SIGNIFICANT OR EXCESSIVE PICK−UP IS FOUND ON:
− RGB THIRD OIL SYSTEM CHIP DETECTOR OR FILTER, REPLACE

RGB (REF. 72−10−00) FLUSH AIRFRAME OIL LINES (SEE NOTE).
− AGB CHIP DETECTOR, REPLACE POWER SECTION AND RGB

(REF. 72−00−01). FLUSH AIRFRAME OIL LINES (SEE NOTE)
− RGB INPUT SECTION CHIP DETECTORS OR INPUT POWER

SECTION OIL FILTERS, REPLACE RGB (REF. 72−10−00) FLUSH
AIRFRAME OIL LINES (SEE NOTE), IN ADDITION:
ROTATE POWER TURBINE ON THE AFFECTED POWER SECTION

TO CHECK FOR SMOOTH RUNNING OF NO. 3 AND 4 BEARINGS. IF
NO ANOMALIES ARE EVIDENT, FLUSH POWER SECTION OIL
SYSTEM (REF. PAGE BLOCK 301) AND RETURN POWER SECTION
TO SERVICE, OR HOLD UNTIL CONFIRMATION OF RGB
UNSERVICEABILITY IS RECEIVED, AS REQUIRED.
NOTE: REFER TO AIRCRAFT MANUAL FOR ACTION TO BE TAKEN

ON OIL COOLER AND OIL LINE FLUSHING PROCEDURES.
C37277
Lubrication - Chip Detector Light Comes On
72-00-00
Page 151
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION
CHECK AIRCRAFT DRAINS FOR EXCESSIVE LEAKAGE.

IF EXCESSIVE, ISOLATE RELEVANT SEAL AND RECTIFY
POWER SECTION REDUCTION GEARBOX
CHECK PRESSURE AND SCAVENGE OIL CHECK AIRFRAME OIL COOLING SYSTEM
TUBES FOR LEAKAGE IF− FOR LEAKAGE (REF. AIRCRAFT MANUAL)
IF−
OK: CHECK INLET AND EXHAUST AREAS

FOR OIL TRACES. IF PRESENT CHECK FAULT PERSISTS: CHECK OUTPUT
BREATHER LINE FOR BLOCKAGE IF− SHAFT CARBON SEAL. REPLACE SEAL
AND RUNNER IF NECESSARY.
(REF. 72−10−00) IF−
OK: CHECK OIL−TO−FUEL HEATER TRANSFER
TUBES FOR LEAKAGE (REF. FIG.146)
RECTIFY OR, IF−
OK: REPLACE REDUCTION GEARBOX

OK: REMOVE AND PRESSURE CHECK (REF. 72−10−00)
OIL−TO−FUEL HEATER AS FOLLOWS:
− CAP FUEL OUTLET WITH PLUG CAPABLE

OF WITHSTANDING 150 psi.
− APPLY FILTERED SHOP AIR TO NITROGEN
(MAX. 100 psi) TO FUEL LINE
− IMMERSE PRESSURIZED UNIT IN
PETROLEUM SOLVENT IF−
LEAKAGE IS INDICATED: REPLACE

OIL−TO−FUEL HEATER IF− NO LEAKAGE: CHECK AIRFRAME OIL
COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKAGE
FAULT PERSISTS: REPLACE POWER OK: CHECK FOR LEAKAGE AT

SECTION (REF. 72−00−01) CENTRIFUGAL BREATHER CARBON SEAL.
REPLACE SEAL IF NECESSARY
(REF. 72−60−00)
C23976B
Lubrication - Excessive Oil Consumption

Figure 137
72-00-00
Page 152
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C23977A
Lubrication - Excessive Discharge Through Breathers
Figure 138
72-00-00
Page 153
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C23978A
Lubrication - Transfer Between Power Section and Reduction Gearbox

Figure 139
72-00-00
Page 154
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OIL LEAK TO COMPRESSOR

INLET
CHECK AIRFRAME BREATHER LINE

CONNECTING AGB BREATHER FOR
BLOCKAGE OR OBSTRUCTION IF:
OK
SUSPECT DEFECTIVE LABYRINTH SEALS.

REPLACE POWER SECITON (REF. 72−00−01)
C23979A
Lubrication - Oil Leak to Compressor Inlet
Figure 140
72-00-00
Page 155
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C23980A
Lubrication - High Power Section Oil Pressure

Figure 141
72-00-00
Page 156
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C23981A
Lubrication - Low Power Section Oil Pressure
Figure 142
72-00-00
Page 157
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE: THE REMOVAL OF SPACERS TO RECTIFY AN INCREASE IN OIL PRESSURE IS NOT RECOMMENDED.
AN INCREASE IN OIL PRESSURE OF AN IN−SERVICE RGB MAY BE DUE TO A RESTRICTION OF
OIL PASSAGES. IF OIL PRESSURE REMAINS HIGH, THE RGB MUST BE REMOVED AND SENT TO AN
OVERHAUL FACILITY FOR REPAIR.
HIGH RGB OIL

SYSTEM PRESSURE
CHECK AIRFRAME INDICATING

SYSTEM (REF. AIRFRAME MANUAL). IF−
OK: EXAMINE RGB OIL PRESSURE TRANSDUCER

PORT FOR OBSTRUCTION. MAKE SURE THAT
THE BLEED HOLE IS NOT OBSTRUCTED
WITH A SAFETY WIRE. IF−
OK: CHECK AIRFRAME FOR OBSTRUCTED

BREATHER SYSTEM. IF−
OK: CHECK OIL PRESSURE REGULATING VALVE (REF. 72−10−00) FOR:

1. EVIDENCE OF DAMAGE THAT COULD AFFECT THE
MOVEMENT OF REGULATOR VALVE WITHIN THE HOUSING.
2. SPRING LENGTH − IF FREE LENGTH IS GREATER THAN
1.577 IN. REPLACE SPRING. IF−
OK: REMOVE RGB AND SEND

TO AN OVERHAUL FACILITY.
C245190
Lubrication - High RGB Oil System Pressure

Figure 143
72-00-00
Page 158
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LOW RGB OIL SYSTEM

PRESSURE
CHECK OIL TANK CONTENTS

(REF. PAGE BLOCK 301)
IF−
CONTENTS OK: CHECK

CONTENTS LOW: REPLENISH TO
AIRFRAME INDICATING SYSTEM
MIDDLE OF GREEN BAND ON
INDICATOR
IF−
OK: CHECK AIRFRAME COOLING SYSTEM

IF−
OK: AJUST OIL PRESSURE REGULATING

VALVE (REF. 72−10−00)
NOTE: IF, DURING NORMAL OPERATION,
LOW OR NO OIL PRESSURE WAS
OBSERVED FOR LESS THAN ONE MINUTE:
DRAIN OIL, CHECK CHIP DETECTORS AND
FILTERS. IF NO METAL FOUND, REFILL
WITH OIL AND CONTINUE NORMAL
OPERATION; CHECKING FILTERS DAILY
FOR THE NEXT 25 FLYING HOURS.
C23983A
Lubrication - Low RGB Oil System Pressure
Figure 144
72-00-00
Page 159
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FLUCTUATING OIL PRESSURE

(POWER SECTION OR REDUCTION GEARBOX)
CHECK OIL TANK LEVEL

REPLENISH AS NECESSARY
(REF. PAGE BLOCK 301)
IF THE LEVEL IS SATISFACTORY:
CHECK THE AIRFRAME INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM

REDUCTION (REF. HELICOPTER MAINTENANCE MANUAL) POWER
GEARBOX SECTION
IF THE INSTRUMENTATION IS SATISFACTORY:
MAKE SURE THE CORRECT 90 DEGREE ELBOW

(WITH INTERNAL METERED ORIFICE)
IS INSTALLED (REF. IPC)
(ELBOW CONNECTED TO THE SENSING LINE
AT THE BOTTOM OF THE PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE)
MAKE SURE THE ORIFICE DIAMETER
IS 0.040 TO 0.042 INCH
AT BOTH ENDS OF THE ELBOW
IF:
INCORRECT: CORRECT:
INSTALL CORRECT ELBOW INSPECT THE OIL TO FUEL HEATER
FOR SIGNS OF CRACKS
REPLACE IF NECESSARY
CHECK THE OIL FILTER FOR SIGNS OF CONTAMINATION

(REF. 79−20−02)
IF THE CONTAMINATION EXCEEDS LIMITS,

REPLACE THE REDUCTION GEARBOX OR
POWER SECTION AS NECESSARY
C93065
Lubrication - Fluctuating Oil Pressure

Figure 145
72-00-00
Page 160
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OIL LEAKS AT OIL−TO−FUEL HEATER
ARE OIL−TO−FUEL HEATER

MOUNTING BOLTS SECURE?
NOT OK OK
TORQUE BOLTS INSPECT OIL−TO−FUEL HEATER BODY

(REF. 73−10−01) AND WELD AREAS FOR CRACKS. DOES
HEATER HAVE ANY CRACKS?
NO
YES
IS THE 90 ELBOW PART NUMBER

(PRESSURE SENSING LINE TO BOTTOM PRV) CORRECT (REF. IPC)?
MAKE SURE THE ORIFICE DIAMETER IS
0.040 TO 0.042 INCH
AT BOTH ENDS OF THE ELBOW
YES NO
NO MAINTENANCE INSTALL CORRECT

REQUIRED ELBOW (REF. IPC)
REPLACE HEATER
(REF. 73−10−01)
DO AN ENGINE RUN AND
CHECK FOR FUEL LEAKS
C76608A
Lubrication - Oil Leaks at Oil-to-Fuel Heater
Figure 146
72-00-00
Page 161
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE:
IT IS NORMAL FOR TURBINE OIL TO ACQUIRE AN AMBER OR LIGHT BROWN COLOR AFTER
50 TO 100 HOURS OF OPERATION. IN SOME INSTANCES THE OIL MAY APPEAR VERY DARK.
THIS ACCELERATED DISCOLORATION OF THE OIL IS NOT ITSELF A CAUSE FOR CONCERN
SINCE THE LUBRICATING PROPERTIES ARE NOT AFFECTED. THE DARKENING IS A RESULT
OF THE CHEMICAL ACTIVATION OF ANTI−OXIDANTS. PROVIDING THE OIL CONTAINS NO
PARTICULATE CARBON MATERIAL NO FURTHER ACTION IS REQUIRED.
REMOVE AND INSPECT OIL FILTER FOR DEBRIS
NO
DEBRIS FOUND?
YES
CARRY OUT PATCH TEST (REF. 79−20−02

MAINTENANCE PRACTICES: PATCH MAKING)
TO IDENTIFY DEBRIS
YES
CARBON PARTICLES FOUND? DRAIN AND REPLACE
ENGINE OIL
NO
CONTACT LOCAL APPROVED LABORATORY OR OIL SUPPLIER

FOR OIL QUALITY TEST.
NOTE: SAMPLE MUST BE TAKEN WITHIN 30 MINUTES OF ENGINE
SHUTDOWN.
VERIFY OIL PROPERTIES MEET REQUIRED. IDENTIFY PARTICLES.
YES
OIL QUALITY CHECK OK?
NO
CONTACT OIL PROVIDER OR PWC SEVICE

ENGINEERING FOR FURTHER MAINTENANCE ACTION.
RETURN ENGINE TO
SEVICE AND NORMAL
PERIODIC INSPECTIION
C98464
Lubrication - Oil Discolouration

Figure 147
72-00-00
Page 162
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ENGINE - SERVICING
1. General
A. Personnel involved in servicing procedures should refer to CHAPTER 70-00-00,

STANDARD PRACTICES to familiarize themselves with general procedures.
B. For additional information regarding Special Tools and Fixtures, Equipment, and
Consumable Materials referred to in this refer to section TOOLS/FIX/EQUIP or
CONSUMABLE MATERIALS respectively.
C. This section contains the servicing procedures applicable to PT6T-3D/-3DE/-3DF engine

which are sub-divided to cover two main topics: Oil System Servicing and Preparation of
Engine for Storage and Service.
D. Oil system servicing involves oil level checks, replenishing, draining, flushing and
refilling.
E. Preparation of the engine for storage and service involves removal or installation of the
engine, power sections and reduction gearboxes from/in their shipping containers and
the associated depreservation or preservation of these components and the engine oil and
fuel systems.
The consumable materials listed below are used in the following procedures.
Item No. Name

PWC05-070 Adhesive Tape
PWC05-089 Lockwire
PWC15-014A Compound
(Ref. SB5001) Engine Oil
3. Special Tools
The special tools listed below are used in the following procedures.
Tool No. Name Application

PWC30759 Sling
PWC30793 Fitting
PWC30804 Sling Engine Obsolete - replaced by
Assembly PWC70079
PWC38147 Fitting
PWC70079 DELETED Replaced by PWC71482
PWC70249 Sling
PWC71482 Sling, Engine Replaces PWC70079
Assembly
72-00-00
Page 301
ENGINE - SERVICING Jul 28/2014
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Fixtures, Equipment and Supplier Tools
Not Applicable
5. Oil System Servicing
CAUTION: DO NOT MIX OILS OF DIFFERENT VISCOSITIES OR SPECIFICATIONS. THE

DIFFERENT CHEMICAL STRUCTURE OF THE OILS MAKES THEM
INCOMPATIBLE.
NOTE: 1. Approved oils for use in PT6T-3 series engines are listed in the latest issue of
SB5001.
NOTE: 2. P&WC experience, over an extended period of time, has indicated that regular oil
changes are no longer necessary. However, operators should be aware of the
danger of oil contamination from extraneous matter such as hydraulic fluid, sand,
etc., which would require the oil system to be drained, flushed and replenished
with new oil of an approved brand.
A. Oil Level Check and Replenishing
NOTE: Check for oil leaks and remedy as detailed in Troubleshooting procedures.
(1) Check oil levels in reduction and accessory gearbox tanks.
NOTE: 1. Aircraft attitude may affect oil level sight glass readings. Avoid overfilling
oil tank.
NOTE: 2. If the engine has been stationary for more than 12 hours, run engine for
two minutes, shut down and check level.
(2) Replenish as required to bring oil level to a half quart below MAX. COLD on
accessory gearbox indicators and to within green band on reduction gearbox
indicator.
NOTE: Overfilling of the oil system may result in an increase in oil mist venting.
Operational experience will determine the appropriate oil level required to
minimize oil venting.
CAUTION: NO ADJUSTMENT IS PERMITTED ON THE PRE-SET NUT SECURING

THE FILLER CAP LOCKING PLATE. PRIOR TO INSTALLING THE
PREFORMED PACKING APPLY A THIN FILM OF ENGINE OIL INTO THE
FILLER CAP GROOVE AND, USING HAND PRESSURE, ENSURE
CORRECT SEATING OF THE PREFORMED PACKING IN THE GROOVE.
(3) Replace oil filler cap.
B. Draining (Ref. Fig. 301)
(1) On Pre-SB5312 and Post-SB5322, Post-SB5354, and Post-SB5411 (Bayonet-type

chip detector) engines:
(a) Place suitable containers under drain points.
72-00-00
Page 302
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OIL LEVEL INDICATOR

FILLER CAP
(SEE VIEW A )
REDUCTION GEARBOX
CHIP DETECTORS
REPLENISH OIL TO ONE

HALF−QUART BELOW
MAX OIL COLD MARK REPLENISH OIL
TO WITHIN
GREEN BAND
GREEN BAND
BOTTOM OF
GREEN BAND
FILLER CAP IS MINIMUM
OIL LEVEL
VIEW A
REDUCTION GEARBOX
OIL LEVEL OIL LEVEL INDICATOR
INDICATOR
(SEE VIEW B )
CHIP DETECTOR
VIEW B
ACCESSORY GEARBOX
OIL LEVEL INDICATOR OIL TANK DRAIN PLUG
C3031C
Oil System Drain Points
Figure 301
72-00-00
Page 303
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) Push chip detector while turning 90 degrees counterclockwise. Remove chip
detector from valve housing.
(c) Insert fitting (PWC38147) into housing and turn 90 degrees clockwise to open
valve and allow oil to drain.
(d) Unlock and remove drain plugs (one in each accessory gearbox).
(e) Allow oil to drain to a slow drip from all drain points.
(f) Discard all preformed packings and install new items.
(g) Remove fitting.
(h) Push chip detector into valve housing and turn 90 degrees clockwise to lock in
position. The detector must move back when fully installed and the scallop on
detector must align with flat on the valve housing.
(2) On Post-SB5312 (Screw-type chip detector) engines:
(a) Place suitable containers under drain points.
(b) Unlock and remove chip detector housings from valve housings (three in
reduction gearbox and one in each accessory gearbox).
(c) Open non-return valve at each detector location by screwing in fitting

(PWC30793).
(d) Unlock and remove drain plugs (one in each accessory gearbox).
(e) Allow oil to drain to a slow drip from all drains points.
(f) Discard all preformed packings and install new items.
(g) Remove fitting (PWC30793).
(h) Install chip detector housings, torque 45 to 55 lb.in. and lockwire. Install drain
plugs, torque 275 to 300 lb.in. and lockwire.
NOTE: The two outboard chip detectors on the reduction gearbox are
lockwired to locking plates or adapters which are bolted to the
housing.
C. Flushing
NOTE: The following procedure is carried out in the event of oil system contamination
and/or if different oil is to be used in the engine.
(1) Drain oil and re-install drain plugs and chip detectors (Ref. Subpara. B.).
(2) Fill accessory gearbox to a half quart below MAX. COLD level and reduction
gearbox oil tank to middle of green band with fresh oil (Ref. SB5001).
72-00-00
Page 304
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) Carry out a dry motoring cycle on each power section and check that oil pressures
are registered.
NOTE: Reduction gearbox output section oil pressure is not expected to register
during motoring run as output shaft may not rotate.
(4) Start both power sections and run at IDLE for five minutes.
(5) Drain oil and re-install chip detector valves and chip detectors (Ref. Subpara. B.).
(6) Remove filter elements from filter housings on reduction gearbox; clean elements.
and re-install.
(7) Fill accessory gearbox tanks to a half quart below MAX. COLD level and reduction
gearbox tank to middle of green band with fresh oil (Ref. SB5001).
(8) Start both power sections and run at IDLE for at least one minute checking systems
for leaks.
(9) Shut down engine and service oil systems as required to bring levels to a half quart
below MAX. COLD in accessory gearboxes and to middle of green band in
reduction gearbox.
6. Preparation for Storage or Service
WARNING: WHEN REMOVING OR INSTALLING AN ENGINE, SPARE POWER SECTION

OR SPARE REDUCTION GEARBOX FROM/IN A SHIPPING CONTAINER
ENSURE THAT HOIST HAS SUFFICIENT CAPACITY AND SAFETY FACTOR
TO HANDLE LOADS AND THAT MINIMUM FREE OVERHEAD SPACE
FOR RELEVANT UNIT IS AVAILABLE AS SHOWN IN TABLE 301.
WARNING: SPECIAL SLINGS FOR LIFTING THE ENGINE, POWER SECTION OR

REDUCTION GEARBOX MUST BE USED WHENEVER SPECIFIED (OTHER
SLINGS FOR HANDLING CONTAINERS MUST BE SELECTED TO SUIT
THE PARTICULAR LOADS AND TYPE OF HOIST).
NOTE: 1. The humidity indicator will return to normal color (blue) after desiccant has been
changed and should only be replaced when damaged.
NOTE: 2. For information on installation of engine, power section and reduction gearbox in
their respective stands prior to installation in shipping containers, refer to
appropriate procedures in 72-00-00, ENGINE - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION,
72-00-01, POWER SECTION - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES and 72-10-00,
REDUCTION GEARBOX - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES.
A. General
Two types of storage containers are in use. One type, of steel construction, is reusable
and is intended for long term storage under indoor or outdoor conditions. It consists
of two sections, which together, form an airtight unit. The other type, of fiberboard
construction on a rigid base, is non-reusable; engine protection is afforded by a plastic
envelope which is evacuated and sealed.
72-00-00
Page 305
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Fiberboard containers are weather resistant only; they should not be exposed to climatic
conditions for more than one week, and must not be used for outdoor storage. They
are intended for domestic shipment in closed conveyances in the North American
continent, or domestic and overseas shipment by air, but are not intended for shipment by
sea.
To maintain internal moisture conditions at a safe level for storage, a specific quantity of
dehydrating agent (desiccant) is stowed in each container. Desiccant is packed in
individual bags, each containing eight units (one unit weighing one ounce). Each container
is provided with a humidity indicator to show the moisture level within the container
without disturbing the container or contents. At a safe moisture level (up to 40% relative
humidity) the indicator color is blue. As internal humidity increases, the color changes
gradually to pink. An all pink color indicates that an unsafe moisture condition has been
reached, and desiccant should be replaced with freshly activated material (Ref.
Subpara.P.).
TABLE 301, Container Loading and Clearance Data
MINIMUM HOIST MINIMUM OVERHEAD

LOAD CATEGORY CAPACITY REQUIRED CLEARANCE REQUIRED *
(LBS) (KG) (FT) (METRE)
Engine 850 386 10 3.05
Engine - In Fiberboard Container 1600 726 10 3.05
Engine - In Metal Container 2200 997 10 3.05
Fiberboard Container (Engine) 750 340 10 3.05
Power Section 300 136 10 3.05
Power Section - In Metal Container 900 408 10 3.05
Metal Container, C/W Cover (Power 615 278 10 3.05
Section)
Metal Container Cover (Engine) 600 273 10 3.05
Metal Container Cover (Power Section) 300 136 10 3.05
Power Section - In Fiberboard Container 650 295 7 2.13
Fiberboard Container (Power Section) 315 143 7 2.13
Reduction Gearbox 275 125 8 2.44
Reduction Gearbox - In Metal Container 700 317 8 2.44
Metal Container, C/W Cover (Reduction 425 195 8 2.44
Gearbox)
Metal Container Cover (Reduction 250 115 8 2.44
Gearbox)
Reduction Gearbox - In Fiberboard 500 230 5 1.53
Container
Fiberboard Container (Reduction Gearbox) 225 105 5 1.53
72-00-00
Page 306
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE 301, Container Loading and Clearance Data (Cont’d)
MINIMUM OVERHEAD
MINIMUM HOIST CLEARANCE REQUIRED
LOAD CATEGORY CAPACITY REQUIRED *
(LBS) (KG) (FT) (METRE)
* This clearance does not include distance between top of container or unit, and hoist hook.
B. Shipping Covers, Caps and Plugs - Removal/Installation (Ref. Fig. 302)
Whenever an engine, power section or reduction gearbox is stored in a shipping

container, all apertures must be blanked off with the covers, caps and plugs supplied for
this purpose. Preparation of the engine, power section or reduction gearbox for
service involves the removal of these items as and where stated in the following
paragraphs.
On removal, the items should be placed in a suitable container along with their
attachment hardware and stowed in the container base for future use.
Locations of shipping covers, caps and plugs are shown on the illustration. For
provisioning purposes, part numbers of these items are included in Parts Catalog P/N
3040594.
C. Removal of Engine from Fiberboard Container
(1) Preparation (Ref. Fig. 303)
(a) Ensure that container is readily accessible on all sides.
(b) Cut and remove steel strapping (9).
(c) Cut adhesive tape (8) at top corners and remove reinforcing corners (2), cover
(1) and sleeve panels (6).
(d) Carefully cut engine envelope (7) across top seam (10) and expose engine.
(2) Remove engine from container (Ref. Fig. 304).
CAUTION: DO NOT TRY TO LIFT THE ENGINE, WHEN THE ENGINE IS

ATTACHED TO THE SKID BASE.
(a) Attach the sling (PWC30804) or (PWC71482) (1) and take up weight of the
engine with the hoist.
(b) Remove pins (3) from mounting brackets (2 and 4).
(c) Steady engine by hand and raise clear of skid base (6).
(d) Remove bolts (5) and mounting brackets (2 and 4) from engine.
(e) Remove envelope from engine.
72-00-00
Page 307
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2 3 4 5 2 3
1 4
9
1 6 12
5 10 11
8
21
6 13
21
7
7
13 14
20 15
13
13
19
6 17
7 12 15
6 7
13
18 15
16 12 7
18
16 17 16 15
C9335
Shipping Covers, Caps and Plugs - Locations

Figure 302
72-00-00
Page 308
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 302
1. Starter Generator Shipping Cover

2. Shipping Plug
3. Shipping Plug
4. Electrical Connector Shipping Cap
5. Protective Cap
6. Tachometer Mount Shipping Cover
7. Shipping Plug
8. Air Inlet Shipping Cover
9. Oil Vent Shipping Cover
10. Cover
11 Cable Strap
12. Shipping Plug
15. Protective Cap
16. Shipping Cap
17. Shipping Cap
18. Protective Cap
19. Exhaust Duct Shipping Cover
20. Protective Cap
21. Shipping Plug
(f) Remove humidity indicator (4, Fig. 303) from envelope and retain for
re-installation. Discard envelope.
(g) Install engine in stand (Ref. 72-00-00, ENGINE - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION).
(h) Remove engine records envelope containing log books, log sheets etc.,
from receptacle in container.
(i) Remove pressure-sensitive tape (22, Fig. 304) and engine documentation box
(21), if supplied.
(j) Attach mounting brackets (2 and 4) to skid base (6) using pins (3).
(k) Remove shipping covers, caps and plugs from engine (Ref. Subpara. B.).
(l) Remove ignition exciter as follows:
1 Release loop clamps (7 and 12) and cable straps (8) securing igniter
cables (9).
2 Remove bolts (11) and nuts and washers (17), securing support plate (18)
and shipping cover (14) to exhaust port.
3 Remove bolts (20) and nuts and washers (10).
72-00-00
Page 309
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
11
2
10
9
C3032F
Engine Fiberboard Container

Figure 303
72-00-00
Page 310
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 303
1. Container Cover
2. Reinforcing Corners
3. Skid Base
4. Humidity Indicator
5. Window
6. Container Sleeve
7. Engine Envelope
8. Adhesive Tape
9. Steel Strapping
10. Envelope Top Seam
11. Plywood Cover
4 Separate support plate (18) from ignition exciter (19).
NOTE: Retain support plate and hardware with container for future use.
5 Remove remaining bolts (13) and nuts and washers (15) securing shipping
cover (14) to exhaust port.
NOTE: Retain cover and hardware with container for future use and retain
ignition exciter with engine until required for airframe installation.
(3) Install container sleeve panels on skid base. Install cover and store container in a
dry area until required for re-use.
(4) Remove all desiccant bags for reactivation and re-use (Ref. Subpara. P.).
D. Removal of Engine from Metal Container
(a) Remove documents from records receptacle (6).
(b) Remove nuts (8) and washers (7) securing service receptacle cover (9) and
remove cover.
(c) Open breather valve (5) by pressing release button.
WARNING: ALLOW AT LEAST TEN MINUTES FOR DISSIPATION OF PRESSURE

BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO REMOVE CONTAINER COVER (2).
(d) Position hoist centrally over container and attach a sling (PWC30759) to lifting
points (1).
(e) Unlock quick-release fasteners (3) by rotating through one quarter of a turn.
(f) Raise container cover (2) clear of engine and remove from immediate work area.
72-00-00
Page 311
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
19 10 9
20 13 1
11 12 14
15
8 16
18
17
7 9
VIEW A
A
3 5
3
2
21
22
6
C9336A
Removal of Engine (Typical) from Fiberboard Container

Figure 304
72-00-00
Page 312
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 304
1. Sling (PWC30804) or (PWC71482)

2. Mounting Brackets
3. Pins
4. Mounting Brackets
5. Bolts
6. Skid Base
7. Loop Clamp
8. Cable Strap
9. Igniter Cables
10. Nut and Washer
11. Bolt
12. Loop Clamp
13. Bolt
14. Shipping Cover
15. Nut and Washer
16. Shipping Cap
17. Nut and Washer
18. Support Plate
19. Ignition Exciter
20. Bolt
21. Engine Documentation Box
22. Pressure-sensitive Tape
(2) Remove engine from container (Ref. Fig. 306).
(a) Attach the sling (PWC30804) or (PWC71482) (1) to engine lifting eyes.
CAUTION: DO NOT ATTEMPT TO LIFT ENGINE WHEN ATTACHED TO MOUNTS

IN CONTAINER.
(b) Take up weight of engine with hoist.
(c) Remove nuts (4), washers (3) and bolts (2) to release yokes (5) from support
brackets (6).
(d) Raise engine and yokes clear of container.
(e) Support yokes and remove six cotterpins from pins securing yokes to engine
mounting brackets (8).
(f) Withdraw pins (11 and 12).
(g) Remove bolts (7), securing mounting brackets to engine mount pads and
remove brackets.
72-00-00
Page 313
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3
9
8
6
4
5
VIEW A
C3733B
Engine Metal Container

Figure 305
72-00-00
Page 314
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 305
1. Cover Lifting Point

2. Container Cover
3. Quick Release Fastener
4. Filler Valve
5. Breather Valve
6. Records Receptacle
7. Washer
8. Nut
9. Service Receptable Cover
(h) Temporarily install mounting brackets, yokes and hardware in their original
locations in container.
(i) Install engine in stand (Ref. 72-00-00, ENGINE - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION).
(j) Remove pressure-sensitive tape (29) and engine documentation box (13),
if supplied.
(k) Remove shipping covers, caps and plugs (Ref. Subpara. B.).
(l) Remove ignition exciter as follows:
1 Release loop clamps (20 and 28) and cable straps (21) securing upper and
lower igniter cables (24 and 27).
2 Remove four bolts (26) and nuts and washers (18) securing support plate
(19) and cover (15) to exhaust port.
3 Remove bolts (22) and nuts and washers (25).
4 Separate support plate (19) from ignition exciter (23).
NOTE: Retain support plate and hardware with container for future use.
5 Remove remaining bolts (14) and nuts and washers (16) and remove cover
(15) from exhaust port.
NOTE: Retain cover and hardware with container for future use and retain
ignition exciter with engine until required for airframe installation.
(m) Install cover on container using hoist and sling (PWC30759) and secure with
quick-release fasteners.
(n) Remove all desiccant bags from engine and retain for reactivation (Ref.
Subpara. P.).
E. Removal of Power Section from Metal Container
72-00-00
Page 315
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
24 25 26 27 28
23 14
22 15
16 1
21 17 A
18
20
19
VIEW A
5
2
8
4 11
6
8 3 7 4
2
3
4 3
7
4 13 29
6
3
2
2
9 5 12
10
C9337A
Removal of Engine from Metal Container

Figure 306
72-00-00
Page 316
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 306
1. Sling (PWC30804) or (PWC71482)

2. Bolt
3. Washer
4. Nut
5. Yoke
6. Support Bracket
7. Bolt
8. Engine Mounting Bracket
9. Desiccant Cage
10. Indicator
11. Pin
12. Pin
14. Bolt
15. Duct Cover
16. Nut and Washer
17. Cap
18. Nut and Washer
19. Support Plate
20. Clamp
21. Strap
22. Bolt
23. Exciter
24. Upper Igniter Cable
25. Nut and Washer
26. Bolt
27. Lower Igniter Cable
28. Clamp
(a) Remove documents from records receptacle (7).
(b) Remove nuts (5) and washers (6) securing service receptacle cover (4) and
remove cover.
(c) Open relief valve (12) to depressurize container.

BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO REMOVE COVER (10).
points (1).
72-00-00
Page 317
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
12 DETAIL A 11
1
10
9
2
3
7
6
A
4
5
C3138A
Power Section Metal Container

Figure 307
72-00-00
Page 318
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 307
1. Lifting Points
2. Quick-release Fasteners
3. Container Base
4. Service Receptacle Cover
5. Nut
6. Washer
8. Inspection Ports
9. Humidity Indicator Receptacle
10. Container Cover
11. Filler Valve
12. Relief Valve
(f) Raise container cover (10) clear of engine and remove from immediate work
area.
NOTE: When raising cover, ensure that extruded packing (7, Fig. 308)
remains with container base and is not damaged.
(2) Remove power section from container (Ref. Fig. 308).
(a) Put moveable cable assemblies onto the central locations of the sling
(PWC30804) or (PWC71482) (1) and attach to power section lifting points.
CAUTION: DO NOT ATTEMPT TO LIFT POWER SECTION WHEN ATTACHED

TO MOUNTS IN CONTAINER.
(b) Take up weight of power section with hoist.
(c) Remove eight bolts (3), washers and nuts, securing mounting yoke (5) and
bracket (11) to mounting bars (10) on container base.
(d) Steady power section by hand and carefully lift, complete with mounting yoke
and bracket, clear of container base.
(e) Remove bolts (12), washers and nuts securing mounting bracket (11) to flange
on power section and remove bracket.
NOTE: Cover (26) and plug (28) are not to be removed until power section
installation on reduction gearbox.
(f) Install power section in stand (Ref. 72-00-01, POWER SECTION -

MAINTENANCE PRACTICES).
(g) Reinstall mounting bracket (11) on mounting bar (10), securing with bolts (3),
washers and nuts.
(h) Withdraw pin (6) and remove mounting yoke (5).
72-00-00
Page 319
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
15 17 18 14
19
20
25 16
21
14 1
24
23
22
13
A
27
VIEW A 26
28
3
2
6 4 5
12 7
11 3
10
C3140C
Removal of Power Section from Metal Container

Figure 308
72-00-00
Page 320
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 308
1. Sling (PWC30804) or (PWC71482)

2. Mounting Bracket
3. Bolt
4. Bolt
5. Mounting Yoke
6. Pin
7. Extruded Packing
8. Desiccant Cage
9. Locating Dowels
10. Mounting Bar
11. Mounting Bracket
12. Bolt
13. Loop Clamp
14. Cable Strap
15. Upper and Lower Igniter Cables
16. Nut and Washer
17. Bolt
18. Loop Clamp
19. T5 Temperature Compensator
20. Support Plate
21. Shipping Cover
22. Nut and Washer
23. Support Plate
25. Bolt
26. Cover
28. Plug
(i) Reinstall yoke on mounting bar securing with bolts (3), washers and nuts.
(j) Remove bolts (4) and mounting bracket (2) from power section.
(k) Reinstall mounting bracket on yoke, securing with pin (6).
(l) Remove shipping covers, caps and plugs (Ref. Subpara. B.).
NOTE: Do not remove cover (26) and plug (28).
(m) Remove ignition exciter and T5 compensator.
1 Release loop clamp (13) and cable strap (14) securing upper igniter cable
(15).
72-00-00
Page 321
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2 Remove bolt (17) and nut and washer (22) to release loop clamp (18).
3 Release cable strap (14) securing lower igniter cable (15).
4 Remove remaining bolts (17) and nuts and washers (22) securing support
plates (20 and 23) and shipping cover (21) to exhaust port.
5 Remove bolts (25) and nuts and washers (16), securing support plates (20
and 23) to ignition exciter (24) and T5 compensator (19).
6 Retain exciter and compensator with power section until required for
airframe installation.
CAUTION: DO NOT LEAVE LOOSE PARTS IN CONTAINER BASE.

CONTINUAL MOVEMENT DURING TRANSPORTATION MAY
CAUSE DETERIORATION OF CONTAINER SHELL AND
FASTENER THREADS.
7 Place all loose hardware in suitable bags and secure to container mounting
brackets.
(n) Remove all desiccant bags from desiccant cage (8) and retain for reactivation
(Ref. Subpara. P.).
(3) Reassemble container (Ref. Fig. 307).
(a) Check that extruded packing is correctly seated on container base (3), install
cover (10) and secure with quick-release fasteners (2).
(b) Check that filling and relief valves (11 and 12) are correctly installed.
(c) Secure service receptacle cover (4) with nuts (5) and washers (6).
(d) Secure cover on records receptacle (7).
(e) Coat exposed hardware on container with compound (PWC15-014A) and store
container until required for re-use.
F. Removal of Power Section from Fiberboard Container
(a) Ensure that container is readily accessible on all sides.
(b) Cut and remove steel strapping (9) and reinforcing corners (2).
(c) Cut adhesive tape (8) at top corners.
(d) Remove cover (3) and container sleeve (6) from skid base.
(e) Cut power section envelope (7) across top seam (1) and expose power
section.
(2) Remove power section from container (Ref. Fig. 310)
72-00-00
Page 322
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(a) Put moveable cable assemblies onto central locations of the sling (PWC30804)
or (PWC71482) (13) and attach to lifting brackets on the accessory gearbox
and Flange C of the exhaust duct.
CAUTION: DO NOT ATTEMPT TO LIFT POWER SECTION WHEN ATTACHED

TO SKID BASE.
(b) Take up weight of power section with hoist.
(c) Remove four bolts (6) and nuts and washers (22) securing bracket (4) to
mounting bars (2) on skid base (1).
(d) Withdraw pin (20) securing mounting bracket (17) to mounting yoke (21).
(e) Steady power section by hand and lift clear of skid base.
(f) Remove bolts (18) and mounting bracket (17) from accessory gearbox.
(g) Secure bracket (17) to yoke (21), using pin (20).
(h) Remove power section envelope (7) and remove humidity indicator (14) from
envelope.
NOTE: Retain humidity indicator for reinstallation and discard envelope.
(i) Remove 23 bolts (5) and washers and nuts (15) securing mounting bracket (4)
to Flange A of power section.
NOTE: Cover (8) and plug (32) are not to be removed until power section
installation on reduction gearbox.
(j) Reinstall mounting bracket (4) on mounting bars (2), securing with bolts (4) and
nuts and washers (22).
(k) Install power section in stand (Ref. 72-00-01, POWER SECTION -

(l) Remove power section records from receptacle glued to skid base.
(m) Remove shipping covers, caps and plugs (Ref. Subpara. B.).
NOTE: Do not remove cover (8) and plug (32).
(n) Remove ignition exciter and T5 compensator.
1 Release loop clamp (23) and cable strap (24) securing upper igniter cable
(25).
2 Remove bolt (27) and nut and washer (29) to release loop clamp (28).
3 Release cable strap (24) securing lower igniter cable (25).
72-00-00
Page 323
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3
2
1
9
8
C3144D
Power Section Fiberboard Container

Figure 309
72-00-00
Page 324
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 309

3. Container Cover
4. Window
6. Container Sleeve
7. Power Section Envelope
8. Adhesive Tape
9. Steel Strapping
4 Remove remaining bolts (27) and nuts and washers (29) securing support
plates (9) and shipping cover (10) to exhaust port.
5 Remove eight bolts (30) and nuts and washers (26) securing support plates
(9) to ignition exciter (11) and T5 compensator (12).
6 Retain exciter and compensator with power section until required for
airframe installation.
CAUTION: DO NOT LEAVE LOOSE PARTS IN CONTAINER BASE.

CONTINUAL MOVEMENT DURING TRANSPORTATION MAY
CAUSE DETERIORATION OF CONTAINER SHELL AND
FASTENER THREADS.
7 Place all loose hardware in suitable bags and secure to brackets on skid
base.
(o) Remove all desiccant bags from power section and retain for reactivation (Ref.
Subpara. P.).
(p) Install container sleeve and cover on skid base and store container in a dry
area until required for re-use.
G. Removal of Reduction Gearbox from Metal Container
(a) Remove reduction gearbox log book, log sheets and other relevant documents
from records receptacle (3).
(b) Remove nuts (7) and washers (6) securing access cover to container base.
(c) Open relief valve (9) to depressurize container.

BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO REMOVE COVER (11).
eyes (2).
72-00-00
Page 325
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
25 27 28 24
12 13
30
9
26
10
24
11 29
9
A
23
14
VIEW A 31
8
32
15 16
5
17
6
20 18
21
4
1 22
C3616B
Removal of Power Section from Fiberboard Container

Figure 310
72-00-00
Page 326
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 310
1. Skid Base
2. Mounting Bars
3. Gasket
4. Mounting Bracket
5. Bolts
6. Bolts
7. Power Section Envelope
8. Cover
9. Support Plates
10. Shipping Cover
13. Sling (PWC30804) or (PWC71482)
15. Self-locking Nuts and Washers
16. Gasket
18. Bolts
19. Deleted
20. Quick-release Pins
21. Mounting Yoke
22. Self-locking Nuts and Washers
23. Loop Clamp
24. Cable Strap
26. Nut and Washer
27. Bolt
28. Loop Clamp
29. Nut and Washer
30. Bolt
32. Plug
72-00-00
Page 327
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
11
5
6
8
9
10
C3137A
Reduction Gearbox Metal Container

Figure 311
72-00-00
Page 328
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 311
1. Inspection Ports
2. Lifting Eye
5. Filler Valve
6. Washer
7. Nut
8. Access Cover
9. Relief Valve
10. Quick Release Fasteners
11. Container Cover
(f) Raise container cover (11) clear of base and remove from immediate work area.
NOTE: Ensure that extruded packing (3, Fig. 312) remains with container
base and is not damaged.
(2) Remove gearbox from container (Ref. Fig. 312).
(a) Remove eight bolts (14), washers (11) and nuts (10) securing mounting plates
(13) to mounting bars (15).
(b) Attach sling (1) (PWC30759) to four lifting eyes (2).
(c) Adjust sling so that gearbox will be level when lifting and sling cables clear
gearbox surfaces.
(d) Steady reduction gearbox by hand and lift from container base (7).
CAUTION: SUITABLY PROTECT OUTPUT SHAFT TO AVOID DAMAGE WHEN

LOWERING GEARBOX.
(e) Lower gearbox complete with mounting plates (13) onto a flat surface.
(f) Remove sling.
(g) Attach sling (16) (PWC70249) to lifting brackets on reduction gearbox.
(h) Raise gearbox carefully, allowing it to rotate through 90 degrees until suspended
clear of surface.
(i) Disconnect P3 and Pg pneumatic lines from their attachment points on

mounting plates.
(j) Remove nuts (5) and washers (4) securing mounting plates to studs on
gearbox and remove plates.
72-00-00
Page 329
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
16
2 3
15 4
10
5
11
13
12
6
11
14
8 7
C3139E
Removal of Reduction Gearbox from Metal Container

Figure 312
72-00-00
Page 330
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 312
1. Sling
2. Lifting Eye
3. Packing
4. Washer
5. Nut
6. Desiccant Cage
7. Container Base
8. Gaskets
9. Locating Dowel
10. Nut
11. Washer
12. Locating Dowel
13. Mounting Plate
14. Bolt
15. Mounting Bars
16. Sling
CAUTION: POLYETHYLENE SHEET AND RETAINERS COVERING

GEARBOX/POWER SECTION MATING FACES MUST NOT BE
REMOVED UNTIL GEARBOX/POWER SECTION ASSEMBLY.
(k) Retain nuts (5) for gearbox/power section assembly.
(l) Install reduction gearbox in appropriate stand (Ref. 72-10-00, REDUCTION

GEARBOX - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES).
(m) Remove box containing hardware (retaining plates, transfer tubes and
preformed packings) from mounting bars (15) in container base. Remove
hardware from box and retain with gearbox for subsequent installation.
(n) Retape box to mounting bars.
(o) Reinstall mounting plates (13) on mounting bars (15) securing with bolts (14),
washers (11) and nuts (10).
(p) Remove shipping covers, caps and plugs (Ref. Subpara. B.).
NOTE: Do not remove polyethylene sheet and retainers from gearbox/power

section mating face.
CAUTION: DO NOT LEAVE LOOSE HARDWARE IN CONTAINER BASE.

CONTINUAL MOVEMENT DURING TRANSPORTATION MAY CAUSE
DETERIORATION OF CONTAINER SHELL AND FASTENER
THREADS.
(q) Place all loose hardware in suitable bags and secure to container mounting
bars.
72-00-00
Page 331
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(r) Remove all desiccant bags from desiccant cage (6) and retain for reactivation
(Ref. Subpara.P.).
(a) Check that extruded packing is correctly installed on container base, install
cover (11) and secure with quick-release fasteners (10).
(b) Check that filling valve (5) and relief valve (9) are correctly installed and secure
cover (8) to container with nuts (7) and washers (6).
(c) Secure cover on records receptacle (3).
(d) Coat all exposed hardware on container with corrosion preventive compound
(PWC15-014A) and store container until required for re-use.
H. Removal of Reduction Gearbox from Fiberboard Container
(a) Cut and remove steel strapping (1).
(b) Cut adhesive tape (8) at top corners and remove cover (3), reinforcing corners
(2) and sleeve panels (6).
(c) Cut reduction gearbox envelope (7) across top seam (9) and expose gearbox.
(2) Remove gearbox from container (Ref. Fig. 314).
(a) Position hoist centrally over gearbox.
(b) Attach sling (PWC30759) (12) to four eyebolts (7) on gearbox mounting plates
(9).
NOTE: Adjust sling so that gearbox will be level when lifting and sling cables
clear gearbox surfaces.
CAUTION: DO NOT ATTEMPT TO LIFT REDUCTION GEARBOX WHEN

ATTACHED TO SKID BASE.
(c) Remove eight bolts (4), washers (2) and nuts (1) securing mounting plates (9)
to mounting bars (11) on skid base (10).
(d) Steady gearbox by hand and lift from skid base.
CAUTION: BEFORE LOWERING GEARBOX ENSURE THAT OUTPUT SHAFT IS

SUITABLY PROTECTED.
(e) Lower gearbox complete with mounting plates onto a flat surface.
(f) Remove sling from eyebolts.
(g) Attach sling (13) (PWC70249) to lifting brackets on gearbox.
72-00-00
Page 332
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(h) Raise gearbox carefully, allowing it to rotate through 90 degrees until

suspended clear of surface.
(i) Remove polyethylene envelope from gearbox, remove humidity indicator from
envelope and retain for reinstallation. Discard envelope.
(j) Disconnect P3 and Pg pneumatic lines from their attachment points on

mounting plates.
(k) Remove nuts (5), washers (6) and mounting plates (9) from studs on gearbox.
CAUTION: POLYETHYLENE SHEET AND RETAINERS COVERING

GEARBOX/POWER SECTION MATING FACE MUST NOT BE
REMOVED UNTIL GEARBOX/POWER SECTION ASSEMBLY.
(l) Retain nuts (5) and washers (6) for gearbox/power section assembly.
(m) Install reduction gearbox in appropriate stand (Ref. 72-10-00, REDUCTION

GEARBOX - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES).
(n) Remove box containing hardware (retaining plates and preformed packings)
from mounting bars on skid base. Remove hardware from box and retain with
gearbox for subsequent installation.
(o) Retape box to mounting bars.
(p) Remove records receptacle from skid base and remove envelope containing
log book, log sheets and other relevant documents.
(q) Remove shipping covers, caps and plugs (Ref. Subpara. B.).
NOTE: Do not remove polyethylene sheet and retainers from gearbox/power

section mating face.
CAUTION: DO NOT LEAVE LOOSE PARTS IN CONTAINER BASE. CONTINUAL

MOVEMENT DURING TRANSPORTATION MAY CAUSE
DETERIORATION OF CONTAINER SHELL AND FASTENER
THREADS.
(r) Place all loose hardware in suitable bags and secure to brackets on skid base.
(s) Reinstall mounting plates (9) on mounting bars (11).
(t) Remove all desiccant bags from reduction gearbox and retain for reactivation
and re-use (Ref. Subpara. P.).
(a) Install container sleeve panels (6) and cover (3) on skid base.
(b) Store container in dry area until required for re-use.
72-00-00
Page 333
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3
1 2
9
8
C3145D
Reduction Gearbox Fiberboard Container

Figure 313
72-00-00
Page 334
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 313
1. Steel Strapping
3. Container Cover
5. Window
6. Container Sleeve
7. Envelope
8. Adhesive Tape
I. Installation of Engine in Fiberboard Container
CAUTION: PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF ENGINE IN CONTAINER, OIL MUST BE

DRAINED AS DETAILED IN PARA. 5.B.
(1) Carry out preservation procedures as per schedule detailed in Subpara. O.
(2) Install shipping covers, caps and plugs (Ref. Subpara. B.).
(3) Install engine in container (Ref. Fig. 304).
(a) Install ignition exciter and shipping cover on exhaust port.
1 Position exciter (19) on support plate (18) and secure with bolts (20), nuts
and washers (10).
2 Torque nuts (10) 20 to 25 lb.in.
CAUTION: IGNITER CABLES MUST NOT BE KINKED OR TWISTED. IF

NECESSARY, DISCONNECT CABLES FROM EXCITER,
INSTALL EXCITER ON COVER, RECONNECT CABLES,
TIGHTEN CONNECTORS FINGERTIGHT, PLUS 5 DEGREES
AND LOCKWIRE.
3 Route upper and lower igniter cables (9) as shown on figure.
4 Secure upper cable with loop clamp (7) and cable strap (8).
5 Secure lower cable with cable strap (8), loop clamp (12), bolt (11) and nut
and washer (17).
6 Position support plate and exciter on shipping cover (14) and secure with
remaining bolts (11 and 13) and nuts and washers (15 and 17).
7 Torque nuts (15 and 17) 32 to 36 lb.in.
(b) Remove engine from stand (Ref. 72-00-00, ENGINE - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION).
72-00-00
Page 335
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
12
13
8
7
6
5
1
9
2
4
10
11
C3615C
Removal of Reduction Gearbox from Fiberboard Container

Figure 314
72-00-00
Page 336
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 314
1. Self-locking Nut
2. Washer
3. Locating Dowel
4. Bolt
5. Nut
6. Washer
7. Eyebolt
8. Gasket
9. Mounting Plate
10. Skid Base
11. Mounting Bar
12. Lifting Sling
13. Sling
(c) With engine suspended from sling, install engine envelope and align mounting
pad gaskets with corresponding mounting pads on engine.
CAUTION: STANDARD COMMERCIAL HARDWARE MUST NOT BE USED TO

ATTACH ENGINE SUPPORT BRACKETS TO ENGINE OR
CONTAINER. USE OF HARDWARE OF LOWER STRENGTH THAN
THAT SPECIFIED COULD CAUSE SERIOUS ENGINE DAMAGE
DURING SHIPPING OR HANDLING.
(d) Attach four mounting brackets (2 and 4) to engine, using bolts (5) and plain
washers.
(e) Torque bolts (5) 275 to 300 lb.in.
(f) Check that skid base (6) is free of loose hardware, dirt, water and oil. Renew
any damaged parts.
(g) Place engine log book, log sheets and other relevant documents in waterproof
envelope and seal with pressure sensitive tape (PWC05-070) or equivalent.
(h) Insert envelope in box and glue box to skid base.
(i) Place engine documentation package, if supplied, in waterproof bag provided

and seal with pressure-sensitive tape (PWC05-070).
(j) Place bag in documentation box (21) and secure box to skid base (6) with
pressure-sensitive tape (22) (PWC05-070).
(k) Install humidity indicator (4 and 7, Fig. 303) in engine envelope.
(l) Carefully lower engine onto skid base (6, Fig. 304), aligning pin holes in
mounting brackets (2 and 4) with holes in mounts on skid base.
(m) Install pins (3), secure with cotterpins and remove sling.
72-00-00
Page 337
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(n) Remove 24 bags of freshly activated desiccant from protective polyethylene

envelopes and tie each bag securely on engine.
NOTE: Distribute desiccant bags evenly over engine.
(4) Heat-seal top seam of engine envelope, using suitable hand sealing iron. Leave
one corner of envelope open, to evacuate air.
(5) Evacuate air from envelope, fold corner and heat-seal.
(6) Close container (Ref. Fig. 303).
(a) Check condition of container sleeve (6) and cover (1). If necessary replace
items.
(b) Install sleeve on skid base.
(c) Align humidity indicator (4) with window (5).
(d) Fold envelope corners and tape down with pressure-sensitive tape
(PWC05-070).
(e) Install container cover (1), fold down flaps and secure with pressure-sensitive
tape (PWC05-070). Install two plywood covers (11).
(f) Secure sleeve and cover with two horizontal bands and five vertical bands of
steel strapping (9) and reinforcing corners (2) at joint of plywood covers.
(g) Stencil engine model and serial number and date of packing on each end of
container.
J. Installation of Engine in Metal Container
CAUTION: PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF ENGINE IN CONTAINER, OIL MUST BE

DRAINED AS DETAILED IN PARA. 5. B.
(3) Install engine in container (Ref. Fig. 315).
(a) Install ignition exciter and shipping cover on exhaust port.
1 Position exciter (23) on support plate (19) and secure with bolts (22) and
2 Torque nuts 20 to 25 lb.in.
72-00-00
Page 338
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

TIGHTEN CONNECTORS FINGERTIGHT PLUS 5 DEGREES
AND LOCKWIRE.
3 Position cover (15) on exhaust port.
4 Position exciter and support plate on cover and insert bolts (26) through
support plate and one bolt (14) through cover.
5 Install nuts and washers (18) on bolts (26) and nut and washer (16) on bolt
(14).
6 Route upper igniter lead (24) as shown and install cable strap (21).
7 Route lower igniter lead (27) as shown and secure with loop clamp (28),
bolt (14) and nut and washer (16) to cover (15).
8 Torque nuts (18 and 16) 65 to 85 lb.in.
(b) Remove container cover using sling (PWC30759) and hoist.
(c) Remove 24 bags of freshly activated desiccant from protective polyethylene

envelopes and install in desiccant cage (9).
(d) Close door of cage and secure with lockwire.
(e) Place engine documentation package, if supplied, in the waterproof bag

provided and seal with pressure-sensitive tape (PWC05-070).
(f) Install bag in documentation box (13) and secure box to container with
pressure-sensitive tape (29) (PWC05-070).
(g) Remove engine from stand (Ref. 72-00-00, ENGINE - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION).

ATTACH MOUNTING BRACKETS TO ENGINE OR CONTAINER.
USE OF HARDWARE OF LOWER STRENGTH THAN THAT
SPECIFIED, COULD CAUSE SERIOUS ENGINE DAMAGE DURING
SHIPPING OR HANDLING.
(h) With engine suspended from sling, install mounting brackets (8) on engine
mounting pads and secure with bolts (7) and plain washers.
(i) Torque bolts (7) 225 to 250 lb.in.
(j) Remove nuts (4), washers (3) and bolts (2) securing yokes (5) to support
brackets (6).
(k) Attach yokes to mounting brackets (8), using two pins (11) and four pins (12).
(l) Carefully lower engine into container, aligning bolt holes in yokes (5) and
support brackets (6).
72-00-00
Page 339
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
24 25 26 27 28
23 14
22 15
16 1
21 17 A
18
20
19
VIEW A
5
2
8
4 11
6
8 3 7 4
2
3
4 3
7
4 13 29
6
3
2
2
9 5 12
10
C9337A
Installation of Engine in Metal Container

Figure 315
72-00-00
Page 340
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 315
1. Sling
2. Bolt
3. Washer
4. Nut
5. Yoke
6. Support Bracket
7. Bolt
8. Engine Mounting Bracket
9. Desiccant Cage
10. Indicator
11. Pin
12. Pin
14. Bolt
15. Duct Cover
16. Nut and Washer
17. Cap
18. Nut and Washer
19. Support Plate
20. Clamp
21. Strap
22. Bolt
23. Exciter
24. Upper Igniter Cable
25. Nut and Washer
26. Bolt
27. Lower Igniter Cable
28. Clamp
(m) Install bolts (2), washers (3) and nuts (4).
(n) Torque nuts (4) 225 to 250 lb.in.
(o) Check condition of humidity indicator (10). Replace with serviceable unit if
necessary.
(4) Close and pressurize container (Ref. Fig. 316)
(a) Check that container is free of loose hardware, dirt, water and oil.
(b) Check that container/cover seal is correctly positioned in container groove.
72-00-00
Page 341
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
VIEW A
B 5
2
1
CONTAINER COVER FLANGE
QUICK RELEASE FASTENER 2ND 3RD
B
CROSS PIN
1ST 4TH
FASTENER LOCKING SEQUENCE

CONTAINER BASE
DETAIL B 8TH 5TH
7TH 6TH
C9308
Installation of Cover on Engine Metal Container

Figure 316
72-00-00
Page 342
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 316
3. Breather Valve
4. Filling Valve
5. Quick Release Fastener
6. Cover Lifting Point
7. Container Cover
(c) Using suitable hoist and sling, position cover (7) on container base so that
locating dowels in base mate with corresponding holes in cover.
(d) Secure first eight quick-release fasteners (5) in sequence shown, to ensure
correct seating of cover on seal.
(e) Secure remainder of fasteners.
(f) Pressurize container to 5 psig through filling valve (4) with clean dry compressed
air or nitrogen.
NOTE: Breather valve (3) reduces pressure to 2-3 psig.
(g) Replace and tighten filling valve cap.
(h) Leak-check seal and relief and filling valves using soap and water solution.
(i) If leakage is detected, depressurize container, rectify cause, re-pressurize and

re-check for leaks.
(j) After satisfactory leakage check, note pressure and ambient temperature and
allow container to remain undisturbed for 24 hours.
(k) Recheck pressure, taking into account any change in ambient temperature.
NOTE: Allow a pressure difference of 0.037 psi for every °F change in

ambient temperature. If container pressure is within 0.50 psi of the
original value, any leakage may be considered insignificant.
(l) Tighten filling valve cap and secure service receptacle cover (2) with nuts and
washers.
(m) Place engine log book, log sheets and other relevant documents in waterproof
envelope and seal with pressure sensitive tape (PWC05-070).
(n) Install envelope in records receptacle (1), close receptacle cover and secure
wing nuts with lockwire.
(o) Coat all exposed hardware on container with corrosion preventive compound.
(p) Stencil engine model, serial number and date of packaging on container.
72-00-00
Page 343
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
K. Installation of Power Section in Metal Container
CAUTION: PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF POWER SECTION IN CONTAINER, ENSURE

THAT OIL HAS BEEN DRAINED.
(3) Install power section in container (Ref. Fig. 317).
(a) Remove power section from stand (Ref. 72-00-01, POWER SECTION -
NOTE: Ensure that cover (26), preformed packing (27) and plug (28) are
installed on power section at Flange A.

ATTACH MOUNTING BRACKETS TO POWER SECTION OR
THAT SPECIFIED, COULD CAUSE SERIOUS DAMAGE DURING
(b) With power section suspended from sling, install mounting bracket (11) on
Flange A and secure with 23 bolts (12) and nuts and washers.
(c) Torque nuts 75 to 85 lb.in.
(d) Install mounting bracket (2) on accessory gearbox and secure with three bolts
(4).
(e) Torque bolts (4) 275 to 300 lb.in. and lockwire.
(f) Install mounting yoke (5) on bracket (2) and secure with pin (6).
(g) Check that container is free of loose hardware, dirt, water and oil and that
extruded packing (7) is intact and correctly positioned in groove on base
mating flange.
(h) Carefully lower power section into container, aligning holes in mounting bracket
(11) and yoke (5) with holes in mounting bars (10).
(i) Install bolts (3) and washers and nuts.
(j) Torque nuts 275 to 300 lb.in.
(k) Install ignition exciter, T5 compensator and shipping cover:
1 Position exciter (24) on support plate (23) and T5 compensator (19) on

support plate (20).
2 Install bolts (25) and nuts and washers (16).
3 Torque bolts (25) 20 to 25 lb.in.
72-00-00
Page 344
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AND LOCKWIRE.
4 Route upper and lower igniter cables (15) as shown.
5 Secure upper cable with loop clamp (13) and cable strap (14).
6 Secure lower cable with cable strap (14), loop clamp (18), bolt (17) and nut
and washer (22).
7 Locate support plates with exciter and compensator on cover (21) and
secure to exhaust port with remaining bolts (17) and nuts and washers
(22).
(l) Remove eight bags of freshly activated desiccant from protective polyethylene
(m) Close cage door and secure with lockwire.
(4) Close and pressurize container (Ref. Fig. 318)
(a) Using a suitable hoist and sling, position cover (10) on container base (11) so
that locating dowels in base mate with corresponding holes in cover.
(b) Secure first six quick-release fasteners (2) in sequence shown to ensure
correct seating of cover on seal then secure remainder of fasteners.
(5) Pressurize container through filling valve (8) with clean dry compressed air or
nitrogen for corresponding ambient temperatures. (Ref. Table 302)
TABLE 302, Container Pressures/Ambient Temperatures
Ambient Temperature Required Container Pressure (psi)

-29°C (-20°F) 2.00
-23°C (-10°F) 2.38
-18°C (0°F) 2.75
- 7°C (20°F) 3.50
4°C (40°F) 4.25
16°C (60°F) 5.00
27°C (80°F) 5.75
38°C (100°F) 6.50
(6) Replace and tighten filling valve cap.
(7) Leak-check seal and relief and filling valves using soap and water solution.
72-00-00
Page 345
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
15 17 18 14
19
20
25 16
21
14 1
24
23
22
13
A
27
VIEW A 26
28
3
2
6 4 5
12 7
11 3
10
C3140C
Installation of Power Section in Metal Container

Figure 317
72-00-00
Page 346
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 317
1. Sling
2. Mounting Bracket
3. Bolt
4. Bolt
5. Mounting Yoke
6. Pin
7. Extruded Packing
8. Desiccant Cage
9. Locating Dowel
10. Mounting Bar
12. Bolt
13. Loop Clamp
14. Cable Strap
16. Nut and Washer
17. Bolt
18. Loop Clamp
20. Support Plate
21. Shipping Cover
22. Nut and Washer
23. Support Plate
25. Bolt
26. Cover
28. Plug
(8) If leakage is detected, depressurize container, rectify cause, re-pressurize and

re-check for leaks.
(9) After satisfactory leakage check, note ambient temperature and allow container to
remain undisturbed for 24 hours.
(10) Recheck pressure, taking into account any change in ambient temperature.
NOTE: Allow a pressure difference of 0.037 psi for every °F change in ambient
temperature. If container pressure is within 0.50 psi of the original value,
any leakage may be considered insignificant.
(11) Install service receptacle cover (3) and secure with nuts and washers.
72-00-00
Page 347
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1
10
9
8 1
7 2
DETAIL A
6
11
A
3
CONTAINER
2ND 3RD COVER FLANGE
3 4 5 6 7 8
QUICK RELEASE
2 9 FASTENER
1ST 1 10 4TH
20 11
SPRING
WASHER
CONTAINER
19
B 12 LOCKING BASE FLANGE
WASHER
18 17 16 15 14 13 SECURING NUT
6TH 5TH DETAIL B
C9309
Installation of Cover on Power Section Metal Container

Figure 318
72-00-00
Page 348
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 318
1. Lifting Points
4. Securing Nut and Washer
6. Inspection Ports
7. Humidity Indicator Receptacle
8. Filling Valve
9. Relief Valve
10. Container Cover
11. Container Base
(12) Place power section log book, log sheets and other relevant documents in
waterproof envelope and seal with pressure sensitive tape (PWC05-070).
(13) Install envelope in records receptacle (5), close receptacle cover and secure wing
nuts and lockwire.
(14) Coat all exposed hardware on container with corrosion preventive compound
(PWC15-014A).
(15) Stencil power section serial number and date of packaging on container.
L. Installation of Power Section in Fiberboard Container
CAUTION: PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF POWER SECTION IN CONTAINER, ENSURE

THAT OIL HAS BEEN DRAINED.
(3) Place power section log book, log sheets and other relevant documents in
(4) Insert sealed envelope into box and glue box to skid base.
(5) Remove power section from stand (Ref. 72-00-01, POWER SECTION -
(6) Install power section in container (Ref. Fig. 310).
NOTE: Ensure that cover (8), preformed packing (31) and plug (32) are installed
on power section at Flange A.
72-00-00
Page 349
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

ATTACH MOUNTING BRACKETS TO POWER SECTION OR
THAT SPECIFIED, COULD CAUSE SERIOUS DAMAGE DURING
(a) With power section suspended from sling, install mounting bracket (4) on
Flange A and secure with bolts (5) and nuts and washers (15).
(b) Torque nuts (15) 75 to 85 lb.in.
(c) Install envelope (7) on power section, aligning gasket (16) in envelope with
mount pad on accessory gearbox.
(d) Install mounting bracket (17) and secure with three bolts (18).
(e) Torque bolts 275 to 300 lb.in. and lockwire.
(f) Check that skid base (1) is free of all loose hardware, dirt, water and oil.
(g) Carefully lower power section onto skid base, aligning holes in mounting bracket
(4), gaskets (3) and mounting bars (2) and hole in mounting bracket (17) with
hole in yoke (21).
(h) Install pin (20) through bracket (17) and yoke (21).
(i) Secure bracket (4) to mounting bars (2) with four bolts (6) and nuts and
washers (22).
(j) Torque nuts (22) 275 to 300 lb.in.
(k) Install ignition exciter and T5 compensator.
1 Position exciter (11) and compensator (12) on their respective support

plates (9) and secure with bolts (30) and nuts and washers (26).

INSTALL EXCITER ON COVER, RECONNECT CABLES.
AND LOCKWIRE.
3 Route upper and lower igniter cables (25) as shown.
4 Secure upper cable with loop clamp (23), and cable strap (24).
5 Secure lower cable with loop clamp (28), cable strap (24), bolt (27) and
nut and washer (29).
6 Secure shipping cover (10) to exhaust port with remaining bolts (27) and
72-00-00
Page 350
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(l) Remove eight bags of freshly activated desiccant from protective polyethylene
envelopes and tie each bag securely to power section.
NOTE: Distribute bags evenly over power section.
(m) Install humidity indicator (14) in envelope (7).
(n) Heat-seal top seam of envelope using suitable hand sealing iron. Leave one
corner of envelope open, to evacuate air.
(o) Evacuate air from envelope, fold corner and heat-seal.
(a) Check condition of container sleeve (6) and cover (3). Replace items if
necessary.
(b) Install sleeve on skid base.
(c) Align humidity indicator (5) with window (4) and if necessary, secure in this
position with pressure sensitive tape (PWC05-070).
(d) Position cover (3) on sleeve (6), fold down flaps and secure corners with
pressure sensitive tape (PWC05-070).
(e) Secure container assembly with two horizontal bands and four vertical bands of
steel strapping (9) and reinforcing corners (2).
(f) Stencil power section serial number and date of packaging on both ends of
container.
M. Installation of Reduction Gearbox in Metal Container
CAUTION: PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF REDUCTION GEARBOX IN CONTAINER

ENSURE THAT OIL HAS BEEN DRAINED.
NOTE: Ensure that T5 compensator has been removed from gearbox and has
been retained with power section.
(3) Remove bolts securing transfer tubes to gearbox/power section mating flange and
remove tubes.
72-00-00
Page 351
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) Remove reduction gearbox from stand (Ref. 72-10-00, REDUCTION GEARBOX -
NOTE: With gearbox suspended vertically from hoist, ensure that polyethylene
sheets and retaining rings (preformed packings) are installed over
gearbox/power section mating flanges.
(5) Install gearbox in container (Ref. Fig. 319).

ATTACH MOUNTING PLATES TO GEARBOX OR CONTAINER. USE
OF HARDWARE OF LOWER STRENGTH THAN THAT SPECIFIED
COULD CAUSE SERIOUS DAMAGE DURING SHIPPING OR
HANDLING.
(a) Position mounting plates (13) and gaskets (8) on gearbox flanges and secure
with 23 nuts (5) and plain washers (4).
NOTE: Mounting plates (13) are handed.
(b) Tighten nuts (5) evenly and progressively and torque 75 to 85 lb.in.
(c) Attach P3 and Pg pneumatic lines to their respective locations on mounting

plates.

LOWERING GEARBOX.
(d) Carefully lower gearbox, mounting plates downwards, onto a flat surface.
(e) Remove sling (16) from gearbox lifting points.
(f) Attach sling (1) (PWC30759) to four lifting rings (2) on mounting plates.
(g) Check that container base (7) is free of loose hardware, dirt, water, oil or other
contaminants and that packing (3) is intact and correctly positioned in groove
on base mating flange.
(h) Lift gearbox with hoist, move over container base and lower carefully into
place on mounting bars (15).
NOTE: Ensure that locating dowels (12) are engaged in mounting plates.
(i) Secure plates to mounting bars with bolts (14), washers (11) and nuts (10).
(j) Torque nuts 250 to 270 lb.in. and remove sling.
(k) Remove four bags of freshly activated desiccant from protective polyethylene
(l) Close cage door and secure with lockwire.
(m) Pack oil transfer tubes, preformed packings and other loose hardware removed
from gearbox, in envelopes and stow in cardboard box.
72-00-00
Page 352
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(n) Tape box securely to mounting bars, using pressure sensitive tape (PWC05-070).
(6) Close and pressurize container (Ref. Fig. 320).
(a) Check condition of humidity indicator (4). Replace if necessary.
(b) Attach sling (PWC30759) to lifting rings (2) on cover, raise cover and position
over container base.
(c) Carefully lower cover onto base aligning locating dowels with holes in cover
and quick-release fasteners with slots.
(d) Secure first four quick-release fasteners in sequence shown to ensure correct
seating of cover on seal then secure remainder of fasteners.
(e) Pressurize container through filling valve (5) with clean dry compressed air or
nitrogen for corresponding ambient temperatures. (Ref. Table 303)
TABLE 303, Container Pressures/Ambient Temperatures
Ambient Temperature Required Container Pressure (psi)

-29°C (-20°F) 2.00
-23°C (-10°F) 2.38
-18°C (0°F) 2.75
- 7°C (20°F) 3.50
4°C (40°F) 4.25
16°C (60°F) 5.00
27°C (80°F) 5.75
38°C (100°F) 6.50
(f) Replace and tighten filling valve cap.
(g) Leak check seal and relief and filling valves using soap and water solution.
(h) If leakage is detected, depressurize container, rectify cause, re-pressurize and

re-check for leaks.
(i) After satisfactory leakage check, note ambient temperature and allow
container to remain undisturbed for 24 hours.
(j) Recheck pressure, taking into account any change in ambient temperature.
NOTE: Allow a pressure difference of 0.037 psi for every °F change in

ambient temperature. If container pressure is within 0.50 psi of the
original value, any leakage may be considered insignificant.
(k) Install service receptacle cover (7) and secure with washers and nuts (6).
(l) Place reduction gearbox logbook, log sheets and other relevant documents in
72-00-00
Page 353
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
16
2 3
15 4
10
5
11
13
12
6
11
14
8 7
C3139E
Installation of Reduction Gearbox in Metal Container

Figure 319
72-00-00
Page 354
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 319
1. Sling
2. Lifting Ring
3. Packing
4. Washer
5. Nut
6. Desiccant Cage
7. Container Base
8. Gaskets
9. Locating Dowel
10. Nut
11. Washer
12. Locating Dowel
13. Mounting Plate
14. Bolt
15. Mounting Bars
16. Sling
(m) Install envelope in records receptacle (3), close receptacle cover and secure
wing nuts.
(n) Coat all exposed hardware on container with corrosion preventive compound
(PWC15-014A).
(o) Stencil engine model and reduction gearbox serial number, along with date of
packaging, on container.
N. Installation of Reduction Gearbox in Fiberboard Container
CAUTION: PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF REDUCTION GEARBOX IN CONTAINER,

ENSURE THAT OIL HAS BEEN DRAINED.
(2) Install shipping covers caps and plugs (Ref. Subpara. B.).
(3) Place reduction gearbox log book, log sheets and other relevant documents in
(4) Insert sealed envelope into box and glue box to skid base.
NOTE: Position box so that it will not interfere with gearbox output shaft when
gearbox is installed in container.
(5) Ensure that T5 compensator has been removed from gearbox and has been
retained with power section.
72-00-00
Page 355
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
10
4
1
A 5
9
7
CONTAINER 8
COVER FLANGE
3 4
1ST 4TH
2 5
QUICK RELEASE 1 6
DETAIL A FASTENER
CONTAINER
BASE FLANGE A
12 7
SPRING
WASHER LOCKING WASHER
11 8
SECURING NUT 3RD 2ND
10 9
C9310
Installation of Cover on Reduction Gearbox Metal Container

Figure 320
72-00-00
Page 356
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 320
1. Inspection Ports
2. Lifting Rings
5. Filling Valve
6. Nut and Washer
8. Relief Valve
10. Container Cover
(6) Remove bolts securing oil transfer tubes to gearbox/power section mating flanges
and remove tubes.
(7) Remove reduction gearbox from stand (Ref. 72-10-00, REDUCTION GEARBOX -
NOTE: With gearbox suspended vertically from hoist, ensure that polyethylene
sheets and retaining rings (preformed packings) are installed over
gearbox/power section mating flanges.
(8) Install gearbox in container (Ref. Fig. 314).

ATTACH MOUNTING PLATES TO GEARBOX OR CONTAINER. USE
OF HARDWARE OF LOWER STRENGTH THAN THAT SPECIFIED
COULD CAUSE SERIOUS DAMAGE DURING SHIPPING OR
HANDLING
(a) Position mounting plates (9) and gaskets (8) on gearbox flanges and secure
with 23 nuts (5) and washers (6).
NOTE: Mounting plates are handed
(b) Attach P3 and Pg pneumatic lines to their respective locations on mounting

plates.

LOWERING GEARBOX.
(c) Carefully lower gearbox, mounting plates downwards, onto a flat surface.
(d) Remove sling (13) from gearbox lifting points.
(e) Attach a sling (12) (PWC30759) to four eyebolts (7) on mounting bolts.
(f) Check that skid base (10) is free of loose hardware, dirt, water, oil or other
contaminants.
72-00-00
Page 357
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(g) Position reduction gearbox envelope on skid base with gaskets located over
four dowels (3) on mounting bars (11).
(h) Lift gearbox with hoist, move over container base and lower carefully onto
mounting bars, aligning holes in mounting plates with dowels (3).
(i) Secure mounting plates to mounting bars with bolts (4) nuts (1) and washers
(2).
(j) Torque nuts 250 to 270 lb.in.
(k) Remove four bags of freshly activated desiccant from protective polyethylene
envelopes and secure to gearbox.
NOTE: Distribute bags evenly over gearbox.
(a) Install humidity indicator (4) in envelope (7).
(b) Heat-seal top seam (9) using suitable hand sealing iron. Leave one corner of
envelope open to evacuate air.
(c) Evacuate air from envelope, fold corner and heat-seal.
(d) Insert oil transfer tubes and other loose hardware removed from gearbox in
envelopes and stow in cardboard box.
(e) Tape box securely to mounting bars, using pressure sensitive tape (PWC05-070).
(f) Install container sleeve (6) on skid base and align humidity indicator (4) with
window (5).
NOTE: If necessary, maintain position of humidity indicator by securing

envelope with pressure sensitive tape.
(g) Install cover (3) on sleeve, fold down flaps and secure with pressure sensitive
tape (PWC05-070).
(h) Secure container assembly with two horizontal bands and two vertical bands of
steel strapping (1) and reinforcing corners (2).
(i) Stencil engine model and reduction gearbox serial number, along with date of
packaging, on each end of container.
O. Depreservation/Preservation
NOTE: The procedure to be followed in the depreservation and preservation of

engines, power sections and reduction gearboxes in service depends on the
period of inactivity and type of preservation used. Therefore, reference should be
made to preservation records (tags) and to relevant unit log book. The period
of inactivity, or anticipated inactivity, should also be established.
72-00-00
Page 358
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(1) Automatic Fuel Control Units (AFCU):
(a) Preservation of a fuel control unit depends on the period of inactivity and
whether or not the AFCU is operated during the inactive period.
1 An AFCU is considered active if an engine is involved in normal flight
operations or if an engine is wet motored or run during preservation periods.
2 An AFCU is not considered active if an engine is not wet motored or run
during aircraft inactive periods.
(b) For fuel control units that remain on inactive engines in long term container
storage (off wing), the time accumulated in the container begins at the time
of packaging.
(c) For units that have been removed from the engine and are in storage three
years or more, refer to 73-20-02, Maintenance Practice, Storage, Three Year
Requirement.
(d) For units that have been removed from the engine and are in storage more
than six years, refer to 73-20-02, Maintenance Practice, Storage, Six Year
Requirement.
(e) For units on engines that are inactive for more than six months and that are
not preserved, refer to 73-20-02, Maintenance Practice, Storage, Unpreserved
Units Installed on the Engine.
(2) Depreservation schedule for engine stored in fiberboard container:
(a) 0 to 7 Days - No depreservation required.
(b) 8 to 28 Days - Desiccant and moisture barriers must be removed. Make sure
all previously sealed engine openings are reopened and are unobstructed.
(c) 29 to 90 Days - Depreserve engine fuel system (Ref. step (4)).
(d) 91 Days and over - Engine must be completely depreserved.
(3) Depreservation schedule for power sections and reduction gearboxes stored in
metal or fiberboard containers:
(a) 0 to 7 Days - No depreservation required.
(b) 8 to 28 Days - (Power Sections Only) - Desiccant and moisture barriers must
be removed. Ensure all previously sealed openings, except reduction
gearbox/power section mating (flange A), are reopened and are unobstructed.
NOTE: Protective cover and drive shaft plug at flange A are to be removed
only prior to actual assembly of power section to reduction gearbox.
(c) 29 to 90 Days (Power Sections Only) - Depreserve fuel system (Ref. step (4),
following).
72-00-00
Page 359
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(d) 8 to 90 Days (Reduction Gearboxes Only) - Desiccant and moisture barriers

must be removed. Ensure all previously sealed openings, except power
section/reduction gearbox mating flange (flange A), are opened and are
unobstructed.
NOTE: Polyethylene sheets at each power section opening are to be

removed only prior to actual assembly of power section to reduction
gearbox.
(e) 91 Days and Over (Power Sections Only) - Depreserve power section
completely (Ref. step (4), following):
NOTE: 1. Depreservation must be carried out as complete engine. Slave units

may be utilized to provide this requirement.
NOTE: 2. Oil system on reduction gearbox requires no servicing until unit is

required for service.
(4) Depreservation of engine stored in fiberboard container:
(a) Fill accessory gearbox oil tank on each power section and reduction gearbox
oil tank with correct quantity of lubricating oil (Ref. Para. 5.).
NOTE: No depreservation is required for the engine oil systems.
CAUTION: UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES MUST PRESERVATIVE OIL BE

ALLOWED TO ENTER POWER SECTION WHERE IT MAY COME
INTO CONTACT WITH THE T5 TEMPERATURE SENSING SYSTEM.
OIL CONTAMINATION OF BUS BAR AND HARNESS MAY CAUSE
COMPLETE FAILURE OF SYSTEM.
(b) Disconnect fuel pressure tube assemblies at flow divider on each power
section. Loosen lines, as necessary, to allow drainage into a suitable container.
CAUTION: DO NOT EXCEED STARTER MOTOR OPERATING LIMITS (REF.

STARTER MANUFACTURER’S MANUAL).
(c) Displace preservative oil from fuel system by switching on aircraft fuel supply
and motoring each power section (with ignition off) in both automatic and
manual modes until clean fuel flows from disconnected pressure tubes at flow
dividers. Move power lever through complete operating range during
motoring procedure.
(d) Reconnect fuel pressure tubes to flow dividers on each power section. Tighten
coupling nuts, torque to 90 to 100 lb.in. and lockwire.
(e) Check all connections for security and safety.
(5) Depreservation of power section stored in metal or fiberboard containers:
(a) Install power section together with other power section on reduction gearbox
to form a complete engine assembly.
72-00-00
Page 360
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) Depreserve power section fuel system (Ref. step (4)).
(6) Depreservation of reduction gearbox stored in metal or fiberboard containers:
(a) Assemble reduction gearbox and two power sections to form a complete
engine assembly.
(b) Fill reduction gearbox oil tank (Ref. Para. 5.).
(7) Preservation schedule for engine:

SPRAYED INTO INLET AND EXHAUST AREAS OF POWER
SECTIONS: DIRT PARTICLES DEPOSITED ON BLADES AND VANES
DURING OPERATION WILL ALTER THEIR AIRFOIL SHAPE AND
ADVERSELY AFFECT COMPRESSOR EFFICIENCY.
(a) 0 to 7 Days- Engines that are to be left inactive up to seven days must be
sheltered, kept in a relatively dry area and not subjected to extreme
temperature changes which would produce condensation. No special action
necessary.
(b) 8 to 28 Days - Engines that are to be left inactive up to 28 days must have all
openings blanked off and sealed. Relative humidity must be maintained at less
than 40 percent. No other special action is required.
NOTE: Relative humidity can be maintained below 40%, when engine is

airframe mounted, by placing desiccant bags in engine intake and
exhaust areas. Desiccant bags must be placed on suitable racks to
prevent contact with rotating parts. Install humidity indicators and
provide windows in relevant closures for observation of indicators.
(c) 29 to 90 Days - Engines that are to be stored longer than 28 days must have
fuel system of each power section preserved (Ref. step (11), following), intake
and exhaust openings for each power section covered, and desiccant and
humidity indicators installed.
(d) 91 Days and over - Engines inactive over 90 days must in addition to 29 to 90
day procedures, have engine oil systems drained and unused accessory drive
splines sprayed with lubricating oil (Ref. step (10), following).
(8) Preservation schedule for power section and reduction gearbox in metal containers:
(a) Check and record pressures and relative humidity of container at least once
every 90 days. According to results noted, carry out the necessary action as
detailed in steps (b) through (e) following.
NOTE: Whenever a container is re-pressurized, check filler valve for leakage

with soap and water solution. If satisfactory, replace and tighten cap.
(b) Container internal conditions, pressure more than one psig above atmospheric
and below 20 percent relative humidity (indicator all blue) - No action required.
72-00-00
Page 361
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) Container internal conditions, pressure less than one psig above atmospheric
and below 20 percent relative humidity - Repressurize container to 5 ( ±1) psig
with clean, dry, compressed air or nitrogen. Check pressure after seven
days, if pressure has dropped, remove unit (power section or reduction gearbox)
from container and reinstall in serviceable container.
(d) Container internal conditions, relative humidity between 20 and 40 percent

(indicator partially pink) - Open container and replace desiccant with freshly
activated desiccant. Reverse or renew humidity indicator and repressurize
container to 5 ( ±1) psig with clean, dry, compressed air or nitrogen and
check for leakage.
(e) Container internal conditions, relative humidity more than 40 percent (indicator
all pink) - Remove unit (power section or reduction gearbox) from container
and inspect for corrosion. If severe corrosion is evident reinstall unit, with covers,
in container. Replace desiccant with freshly activated desiccant. Reverse or
renew humidity indicator as necessary. Repressurize container to 5 (± 1) psig
with clean, dry, compressed air or nitrogen. Return unit to an overhaul
facility as soon as possible for inspection and repair.
(9) Preservation schedule for power section and reduction gearbox in fiberboard
containers:
(a) Check and record relative humidity of container at or before expiration of first
90 days and every 30 days thereafter. According to results noted, carry out
necessary action as detailed in steps (b) through (d) following.
(b) Relative humidity in container less than 20 percent (indicator all blue) - No
action required.
(c) Relative humidity in container between 20 and 40 percent (indicator partially

pink) - Open container, cut open relevant unit protective envelope, remove
envelope and desiccant. Install unit in new envelope and insert freshly activated
desiccant. Reseal envelope and evacuate. Close container.
(d) Relative humidity in container more than 40 percent (indicator all pink) -
Remove unit (power section or reduction gearbox) from container and inspect for
corrosion. If severe corrosion is evident, reinstall covers on unit, enclose in
protective envelope and insert freshly activated desiccant. Evacuate and seal
envelope and install in container. Return unit to an overhaul facility, as soon as
possible for inspection and repair.
(10) Oil system preservation (for engines or spare power sections inactive for periods
exceeding 90 days).
CAUTION: OBSERVE STARTER OPERATING LIMITS (REF. STARTER

MANUFACTURER’S MANUAL).
(a) Close normal fuel supply shutoff valve and rotate power sections with starter
until oil pressure and compressor speed (Ng) are indicated. Disengage starter.
(b) Drain all engine oil from power sections and reduction gearbox (Ref. Para. 5.).
72-00-00
Page 362
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) With drains open, motor each power section in turn, with starter (no ignition) to
permit scavenge pumps to clear each power section, indicated by cessation of
steady stream of oil from drains. To prevent excessive operation with limited
lubrication, limit rotation to shortest possible time to accomplish complete
draining.
(d) Remove oil filters and drain and clean filter elements. Allow oil to drain to a
slow drip (approx. 30 minutes), install oil filters and close drains.

SPRAYED INTO INLET AND EXHAUST AREAS OF POWER
SECTIONS. DIRT PARTICLES DEPOSITED ON BLADES AND VANES
DURING OPERATION WILL ALTER THEIR AIRFOIL SHAPE AND
ADVERSELY AFFECT COMPRESSOR EFFICIENCY.
(e) Remove cover plates from pads of accessory drive not in use and spray
exposed surfaces and gearshafts with clean engine lubricating oil. Replace cover
plates.
(f) Install all plugs, caps, covers or screens over all openings to prevent entry of
foreign material and accumulation of moisture.
(g) Tag oil filler caps with date of preservation.
(11) Fuel system preservation (for engines or power sections inactive for periods
exceeding 28 days).
(a) Close normal fuel supply shutoff valve. Disconnect fuel inlet lines to oil-to-fuel
heater on each power section.
CAUTION: UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES MUST OIL BE ALLOWED TO ENTER

A POWER SECTION WHERE IT MAY COME INTO CONTACT WITH
THE T5 TEMPERATURE SENSING SYSTEM. OIL CONTAMINATION
OF BUS BAR AND HARNESS MAY CAUSE COMPLETE FAILURE OF
SYSTEM.
(b) Disconnect fuel pressure tube from flow divider on each power section and
allow fuel to drain into suitable container.
CAUTION: TO PREVENT FOREIGN MATERIAL FROM ENTERING ENGINE

FUEL SYSTEMS, EQUIPMENT MUST BE PROVIDED WITH
SUITABLE FILTERS OR STRAINERS NO COARSER THAN 10
MICRON RATING.
(c) Install caps on flow divider inlet and dump ports. Using suitable equipment,
supply oil (PWC05-077) at 5 to 25 psig and at a temperature not lower than
16°C (60°F) to fuel inlet ports of oil-to-fuel heaters.
CAUTION: OBSERVE STARTER OPERATING LIMITS (REF. STARTER

MANUFACTURER’S MANUAL).
(d) With ignition system off and power section fuel systems each in automatic
mode, carry out normal 30 second motoring cycle. During motoring cycle
move each power section throttle twist grip through its full range.
72-00-00
Page 363
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(e) Repeat step (d), preceding, but with fuel system for each power section in
manual mode.
(f) Check that oil flows from opened fuel pressure lines at completion of motoring
runs; if not, repeat steps (d) and (e), preceding.
(g) Reconnect fuel pressure lines to each power section fuel divider. Disconnect
preservation oil supply from each power section oil-to-fuel heater.
(h) Install shipping plugs, caps and covers.
P. Reactivation of Desiccant
(1) Place bags of desiccant and a pink humidity indicator in a suitable oven, controlled
at 121°C (250°F), until humidity indicator turns blue.
(2) Allow oven to cool to room temperature (approximately 22°C (72°F)), then remove
bags of desiccant and humidity indicator.
CAUTION: DESICCANT BAGS MUST NOT BE REMOVED FROM PROTECTIVE

POLYETHYLENE ENVELOPES UNTIL REQUIRED FOR INSERTION INTO
SHIPPING CONTAINERS.
(3) As soon as possible after reactivation is complete, insert bags of desiccant into
polyethylene envelopes. Evacuate air from envelopes and seal with suitable
sealing iron.
72-00-00
Page 364
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ENGINE - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. General
A. Personnel involved in maintenance practices should refer to Chapter 70-00-00,

Consumable Materials referred to in this section, refer to section TOOLS/FIX/EQUIP or
Not Applicable
3. Special Tools

PWC30617 Bracket
PWC30618 Bracket
PWC30619 Bracket
PWC30721 Stand Engine Obsolete - replaced by
Assembly PWC70780
PWC30804 Sling Engine Obsolete - replaced by
Assembly PWC70079
PWC70780 Stand Engine Alternate to PWC30721
Assembly
Assembly
Not Applicable
5. Procedure
The following procedures are written with the understanding that the engine has been
removed from the airframe as per the instructions given in the applicable airframe maintenance
manual and is suspended in the P&WC approved sling.
72-00-00
Page 401
ENGINE - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION Jul 28/2014
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Installation in Stand (Ref. Fig. 401)
CAUTION: ENSURE THAT POWER SECTION OIL TANKS ARE DRAINED BEFORE
TIPPING OR ROTATING ENGINE OR POWER SECTION ABOUT THEIR
AXES. THIS WILL PREVENT OIL FROM ENTERING COMPRESSORS.
CAUTION: PRIOR TO REMOVAL OF ANY ENGINE OR COMPONENT ENSURE THAT

ALL AIRFRAME CONNECTIONS HAVE BEEN DISCONNECTED.
CAUTION: WHEN CONNECTING OR DISCONNECTING THE AIRFRAME HOSE FROM

THE REDUCTION GEARBOX BREATHER (IMMEDIATELY ABOVE THE P&WC
CREST), USE A SUITABLE SIZE WRENCH TO SUPPORT NIPPLE AND
PREVENT IT FROM LOOSENING. IF NIPPLE IS LOOSENED, LEAKAGE MAY
RESULT AND NIPPLE CANNOT BE TIGHTENED EXTERNALLY.
(1) With the engine hanged in the sling (PWC30804) or (PWC71482) (1), install the
bracket (PWC30618) (5) onto the RH mounting pad on the reduction gearbox and
attach with four bolts.
(2) Torque bolts 225 to 250 lb.in.
(3) Position bracket (4) (PWC30619) on LH mounting pad on reduction gearbox and
secure with four bolts.
(5) Position brackets (7) (PWC30617) on accessory gearbox mounting pads and
secure with six bolts.
(7) If necessary, remove shipping covers from tachometer generator mount pads on
reduction gearbox.
(8) Lower engine into stand (PWC30721) or (PWC70780) (6) and install lockpins (3)
and (8) through mounting brackets.
(9) Swing support and bracket assemblies (2) upwards to locate on tachometer
generator mount pads and secure each bracket with four screws.
(10) Torque screws 65 to 85 lb.in.
(11) Make sure that the stand position locks are applied and remove the sling (PWC30804)
or (PWC71482) (1).
B. Removal from Stand (Ref. Fig. 401)
(1) Attach the sling (PWC30804) or (PWC71482) (1) to lifting brackets at Flanges C
and accessory gearboxes.
(2) Take up weight of engine with hoist.
(3) Remove eight screws securing support and bracket assemblies (2) to tachometer
generator mount pads on reduction gearbox.
72-00-00
Page 402
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) Swing support and bracket assemblies downwards.
(5) Remove locking pins (3 and 8) from mounting brackets (4, 5 and 7).
(6) Lift engine clear of stand.
(7) Remove mounting brackets (4, 5 and 7) from reduction and accessory gearboxes.
72-00-00
Page 403
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2
DETAIL A
4
7 3
5 3
8 8 7 2
C3034A
Removal/Installation of Engine from/to Stand

Figure 401
72-00-00
Page 404
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 401
1. Sling (PWC30804) or (PWC71482)

2. Support and Bracket Assembly
3. Lockpin
4. Mounting Bracket
5. Mounting Bracket
6. Stand
7. Mounting Bracket
8. Lockpin
72-00-00
Page 405/406
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ENGINE - INSPECTION/CHECK
1. General

C. Hours or Engine Hours means Engine Flight Hours. Engine flight hour is defined as the
engine operating time between aircraft takeoff (weight-off-wheels/skid off) and landing
(weight-on-wheels/skid on).
D. Unless otherwise specified, ‘‘Scheduled/Periodic Inspections’’ based on calendar times

do not apply during long-term storage (29 days or more) of engines/accessories
preserved (on or off aircraft) as per engine maintenance manual instructions.
Item No. Name

PWC09-003 Silicone Sealer
3. Special Tools
Tool No. Name

PWC34910-101 Borescope
PWC34910-200 Guide Tube
PWC34913 Holding Fixture
PWC34941 Wrench
The fixtures, equipment and supplier tools listed below are used in the following procedures.
Name Remarks
Test Set Barfield Model 2312G-8 or equivalent
5. Procedure
The inspections outlined in Paragraphs 6., 7. and 8. following are considered a normal
function of operating organizations and are intended as a guide for minimum inspection and
maintenance requirements. The intervals at which these inspections are performed
depend on the nature and condition of engine operation and are in addition to the routine
72-00-00
Page 601
ENGINE - INSPECTION/CHECK Jul 18/2016
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
daily checks detailed in the applicable aircraft manual. For example, engines operated in
sandy or dusty environments or in smog or salt-laden atmospheres should be subjected to
regular inspection for corrosion and compressor first-stage blade erosion as detailed in Table
601 and Paragraph 9., following.
Specific inspections (Ref. Para. 9.) and special condition inspections (Ref. Para. 10.) are
given for engines that have exceeded normal operating parameters or have been subjected
to abnormal operating conditions.
6. Inspection Frequency Definition (Ref. Table 601)
Maintenance inspection/check requirements detailed in this chapter relate directly to the

engine, for additional information detailing airframe accessibility refer to applicable aircraft
manual.
A. 25 hours.
Periodic inspection requirements detailed at this frequency shall not exceed 25 hours of
flight and may be performed in conjunction with applicable aircraft maintenance
schedule.
B. 50/100/150/300/600/900/1200 and 2500 hours.
Periodic inspection requirements detailed at these frequencies are in addition to the

requirements detailed at 25 hours.
C. Periodic Inspection - Tolerances
NOTE: The following tolerance is established for maintenance scheduling convenience

only and must be approved by the governing civil aviation authority.
Unless otherwise stated, the tolerance for periodic inspections is ten percent (10%), or
up to a maximum of 100 hours operating time, whichever is less. The tolerance for
scheduled inspection is ten percent (10%) or 30 days, whichever is less.
Subsequent intervals will be adjusted to re-establish the original schedule. When an

inspection is done more than 10% early, subsequent inspections will be advanced as
required to not exceed the maximum tolerance. Concurrence and final approval of the
inspection interval tolerance by the governing civil aviation authority is the responsibility
of the owner/operator.
7. Periodic Inspections (Ref. Table 601)
Table 601 details periodic inspection criteria and frequency. Where no inspection limits are
given in the table, or in any other relative chapter within this manual, any item with wear or
damage as described in this table shall be replaced, or returned to an approved overhaul
facility for possible repair, as applicable.
72-00-00
Page 602
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE 601, Engine Periodic Inspections
COMPONENT NATURE OF INSPECTION FREQUENCY

CAUTION: DO NOT MIX DIFFERENT BRANDS OF OIL WHEN CHANGING, OR ADDING OIL
BETWEEN CHANGES. THE CHEMICAL STRUCTURE OF DIFFERENT BRANDS
OF OIL MAY DIFFER SUFFICIENTLY TO MAKE THEM INCOMPATIBLE (REF.
SB5001) FOR APPROVED LISTING).
Oil Contents
Check oil level and replenish if required 25 hours
(Ref. 72-00-00, ENGINE - SERVICING). If
engine has been stationary for more than
12 hours, run affected power section for
two minutes, shut down and check oil level
Exhaust Duct Cracks or distortion 50 hours or 6 months
whichever comes first.
P3 Filter Housing and Inspect for system contamination and flush 100 hours
Tubing (Pre-SB5367) (Ref. Para 10.N.).
P3 Air Filter Element Clean (electrosonic) and visually inspect 100 hours
filter element (Ref. 73-10-07).
NOTE 1: Individual operators may elect to
extend this interval if operating experience
shows less frequent cleaning and
inspection to be adequate.
NOTE 2: Cleaning and visual inspection
applies to both AFCU P3 filter and optional
clutch carbon seal P3 filters (Ref. SB5320).
P3 Air Filter Drain Valve Clean and Inspect (Ref. 73-10-07). 100 hours
NOTE 1: It is recommended that drain
valves on engines operating in dirty or
desert conditions be cleaned and inspected
at 50 hour intervals.
NOTE 2: For operators who perform
frequent compressor recovery washes. It is
recommended to inspect and clean drain
valve at intervals not exceeding 50 hours.
Fuel Surge Accumulator Visually inspect the accumulator for signs 100 hours
(Pre-SB5398) of metal distortion on the sides and ends.
The distortion will show up as bulging of
the sides or doming of the end cap.
If distortion is present, it is possible that
cracking has begun in the weld that joins
the end cap to the body of the accumulator.
Bulging or doming can be verified using a
metal straightedge on the sides and ends
of the accumulator.
72-00-00
Page 603
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE 601, Engine Periodic Inspections (Cont’d)

Replace the accumulator, if any metal
distortion is found.
Perform engine deceleration check (Ref.
71-00-00)
Fuel Surge Accumulator Visually inspect. Replace accumulator if 150 hours
(Post-SB5398) pop-out indicator is extended (Ref.
73-10-03)
Fireseals Cracks and security of brackets. 150 hours
Wiring Check for security of all accessible 150 hours or 6
connections, clamps and brackets and for months
evidence of wear, chafing, cracks and whichever comes
corrosion. first.
Inlet Screen Cleanliness and condition of mesh. 150 hours
Do a visual inspection of the compressor
air inlet screen for broken and or missing
wire mesh segments and signs of
brittleness. If you suspect an area, check
the integrity of the mesh by manipulating
and flexing the screen. Any deviation is a
cause for replacement.
If the inlet screen is removed, do an
inspection of first-stage compressor blades
per Para. 9.A.
Do a general visual inspection (GVI) of
wash-ring assembly and safety wire for
security and obvious damage. If any
deviation is found during GVI, do an
inspection of first-stage compressor blades
per Para. 9.A.
Gas Generator Case Cracks, distortion, corrosion and evidence 150 hours or 6
of overheating. months
whichever comes first.
NOTE: No cracks are allowed.
Output Shaft Seal Check for oil leaks. 150 hours or 12
months
whichever comes
first.
Tubing Check resistance of lead and heating 150 hours or 6
element of heated pneumatic tubes (Ref. months
73-10-08). whichever comes
first.
72-00-00
Page 604
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Check for security of all accessible
connections, clamps and brackets,
evidence of wear, chafing, cracks and
corrosion and evidence of fuel or oil leaks.
Examine insulation on pneumatic tubes for
cuts in outer rubber sheaths.
NOTE: Refer to Overhaul Manual,
72-00-00, ENGINE - REPAIR for tubing
repair instructions.
Surface cuts up to three inches long on
Pre-SB5409 P3 heated tubes and
Post-SB5409 Pg/P3 heated tubes
insulation, can be repaired. If surface
damage exceeds specified limits above, but
depth is superficial, sheathing may be
repaired by replacement of damaged
portion. Examine the metal braid and
electrical lead on heated tubes for cuts. Up
to three broken wires per plait, or six
broken wires per linear foot, are
acceptable. Replace the tube assemblies
where metal braid is chafed or worn
through to the lead conductors.
Oil Filter Element Clean (Electrosonic Method) and inspect 150 hours
(10 micron) filter element (Ref. 79-20-02).
Chip Detectors Accessory Gearbox - 2 detectors 150 hours
Reduction Gearbox - 3 detectors 150 hours
Clean with lint-free cloth and measure the
minimum weight lift capacity. Use a suitable
ohmmeter to check the continuity of the
electrical circuit when the two poles are
shorted together. Reject the component if
there is no continuity. Loose pins and
broken potting compound are also the
cause to reject them.
Pre-SB5354: Inspect colored stripes
painted on connector and housing. If
stripes are displaced, reject chip detector. If
no stripes are apparent, paint three
equispaced colored stripes on connector
and housing using suitable paint Connector
threads must be free of paint.
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 79-30-01 for
further inspection details.
72-00-00
Page 605
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Bleed Air Case Check the orientation of the bleed air case 150 hours
Assembly assembly (Ref. 72-20-00).
(Post-SB5445)
Ignition System Units Security 300 hours
Spark Igniters Cleanliness and condition. Functional 300 hours
check (Ref. 74-00-00)
Compressor Inlet Area At the required frequency and whenever 300 hours or 12
condition of inlet screen warrants its months
removal, check compressor inlet area for whichever comes
corrosion, dirt deposits and erosion and first. (Ref. NOTE)
check first-stage blades as detailed in
Paragraph 9. following.
NOTE: Engines operating in a highly
erosive environment and/or
conditions where there is a high
potential for blade damage require
more frequent inspections (Ref.
Para.9.)
P3 Air Tube Metering Inspect for contaminants and clean. 300 hours
Tees (Located on R.G.B. Output Housing)
MFCU Throttle Shaft With power sections shut down and 300 hours or 12
fuelboost pump ON, check both sides of months
throttle shaft for fuel leakage. If leakage is whichever comes
evident, replace manual fuel control unit first.
(Ref. 73-20-01).
AFCU Check AFCU for bearing wash-out 300 hours and
indicated by blue dye (grease and fuel whenever area is
mixed) at AFCU vent hole (Ref. 72-00-00, accessible.
ENGINE - FAULT ISOLATION).
Drivebody inspection/driveshaft bearing See NOTE.
replacement; Route to qualified shop for
detailed inspection and Driveshaft Bearing
replacement.
72-00-00
Page 606
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

NOTE: This inspection is recommended for
operators that experience
premature AFCU removals due to:
1. Operating in a severe
environment, with respect to
temperature, humidity, sand/dust or
other airborne contaminants. And/or
2. Very low or irregular utilization
over a period of time.
Definition of regular/irregular
utilization
Regular utilization: A unit which
accumulates a minimum of 30
hrs/month.
Irregular utilization: A unit which
stays inactive for extended periods
of time.
3. The interval of 3000 hours
(mid-TBO) is recommended to get
the maximum benefit of this
inspection.
Fuel Pump Check for security and fuel leaks. 300 hours
If fuel pump gear-set and coupling
operating time since new (TSN) is LESS
THAN Engine Basic TBO (Ref. SB5003):
(a) Check fuel pump coupling in-situ for Every 600 hours
fretting and corrosion (Ref. 73-10-02, FUEL
PUMP - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES).
(b) Remove fuel pump and inspect the Every 2000 hours
drive coupling and cover accessory
gearbox side for signs of reddish-brown
(iron oxide) stains. If stains are observed,
return the fuel pump to an approved
overhaul facility (Ref. 73-10-02, FUEL
Use the applicable safety wire to make
sure the oil mist hole at the end of the fuel
pump drive spline (AGB side) is clear of
blockage.
If fuel pump gear-set or coupling operating
time since new (TSN) is MORE THAN
Engine Basic TBO (Ref. SB5003) OR is
UNKNOWN OR fuel pump was overhauled
before 2007:
72-00-00
Page 607
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(a) Remove fuel pump and inspect the 300 hours
drive coupling and cover accessory
gearbox side for signs of reddish-brown
(iron oxide) stains. If stains are observed,
return the fuel pump to an approved
overhaul facility (Ref. 73-10-02, FUEL
Use the applicable safety wire to make
sure the oil mist hole at the end of the fuel
pump drive spline (AGB side) is clear of
blockage.
NOTE: As of January 2010, the fuel pump
gear-set and drive coupling replacement is
required at every pump overhaul.
Fuel Pump Filter Install new fuel pump filter (Ref. 73-10-02). 600 hours
Fuel Pump Filter Inspect filter for contamination and damage 300 hours
(Ref. 73-10-02). Replace as necessary.
With power sections shut down and fuel
boost pump ON, check for leaks.
NOTE: Operators with helicopters equipped
with fuel filter impending bypass
indicating device may elect to waive
this inspection and to perform the
fuel pump filter replacement at 600
hours.
Oil to Fuel Heater Immediately after shutdown: Check 300 hours
temperature of heater at heater fuel outlet
or fuel pump filter housing. If greater than
140°F (60°C) replace oil to fuel heater.
Alternatively, perform either of the following
methods:
(1) Perform touch test at heater fuel outlet
or fuel pump filter housing. If too hot to
touch, replace oil to fuel heater.
NOTE: Temperatures less than 140°F
(60°C) may be considered to be
comfortable to touch.
(2) Immediately after shutdown apply a
temperature recorder to the fuel pump filter
housing and replace oil to fuel heater if the
center of the recorder turns to black.
72-00-00
Page 608
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

NOTE: The temperature limit of 140°F
(60°C) may be verified using the
Temp-Plate Temperature Recorder
(PWC05-329).
Fuel Nozzle Assemblies Functional and Leak Checks (Ref. 600 hours
73-10-05).
NOTE: See removal/installation procedures
(Ref. 73-10-05).
For improved hot-section durability, inspect 600 hours
and clean fuel nozzle assemblies.
At any fuel nozzle assembly removal,
inspect gas generator case for cracks at
boss welds (Ref. Para. 13. C.).
NOTE: As an alternative to the removal for
inspection and functional check, a
300 hour in-situ cleaning procedure
is offered (Ref. 72-00-00, ENGINE -
CLEANING).
If in-situ cleaning is used the fuel nozzles 1200 hours
shall be removed for inspection and
functional check to coincide with airframe
maintenance schedule.
Fuel Nozzle Sheaths Inspect fuel nozzle sheaths for wear. 600 hours
Oil Filter Element Clean (Ultrasonic Method) and inspect filter 900 hours or 24
elements at an overhaul facility, using the months
approved equipment (Ref. Engine Overhaul whichever comes
Manual), prior to further use. Following this first.
cleaning at overhaul level, the filter may be
utilized for a further 900-hour or 24-month
period maintaining the same inspection and
cleaning schedule.
P3 Air Filter Clean (ultrasonic) and visually inspect filter 900 hours
element (Ref. 73-10-07). Do pressure drop
check of elements (Ref. 73-10-07,
ADJUSTMENT/TEST).
Engine Mounts Check engine mounts for security and 900 hours
condition in accordance with aircraft
manufacturer’s instructions.
Oil Scavenge and Remove retaining plate at rear fireseal and 900 hours
Pressure Tubes inspect tubes for fretting wear (Ref.
79-20-06).
72-00-00
Page 609
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Flanges and Joint All external joint faces shall be sealed with 900 hours or 12
Faces silicone grease (PWC09-003) or months
Corrosion-X corrosion inhibitor whichever comes
(PWC15-011) (Ref. 72-00-00, ENGINE first.
-CLEANING) at major inspection. All NOTE: Engines
external bolts, studs and flanges are also operating
treated with a film of silicone grease or in a highly corrosive
Corrosion-X corrosion. Particular attention environment require
should be paid to accessory gearbox more frequent
mount flanges. sealing.
Establish
schedule/frequency
as
required to ensure
proper
corrosion protection.
T5 System Carry out functional check (Ref. Para. 9. B. 1200 hours
following) at major inspection or when
Troubleshooting indicates necessity.
RGB Inspect clutch assemblies (Ref. Overhaul 2500 hours
Manual).
8. Unscheduled Inspections
A. Chip Detectors (Ref. 79-30-01)
(1) If a chip detector warning light illuminates inspect chip detectors for particles. In
addition the oil strainer must be cleaned and checked and the appropriate oil filter
checked.
(2) Inspect chip detectors at each engine oil change (Ref. SB5001).
B. Fuel Pump Filter (Ref. 73-10-02)
(1) On new aircraft, check filter after each day of operation until no contamination is
found.
(2) Whenever any component upstream of the filter has been replaced, check filter
after first engine run.
C. Fuel Pump (Ref. 73-10-02)
(1) If airframe boost pump (either electrically or engine driven) fails or is inadvertently
left off for a cumulative time in excess of 10 hours, the engine driven fuel pump
must be removed and replaced.
(2) The removed fuel pump should be forwarded to an approved overhaul facility for
inspection (Ref. Para. 10. A.).
72-00-00
Page 610
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Silver Flakes in Oil
NOTE: Presence of silver flakes in the oil system is acceptable (Ref. 79-30-01).
(1) If silver flakes are found:
(a) Flush applicable oil system (Ref. 72-00-00, ENGINE CLEANING).
(b) Inspect oil filters (Ref. 79-20-02) after next 5, 10, 25 and 50 flight hours. If after
50 flight hours silver flakes are no longer present, return to scheduled interval
(Ref Table 601). If silver particles are still evident after 50 flight hours,
consult your local P&WC field service representative.
NOTE: Procedures to identify metal particles are found in (Ref. 70-00-00,

STANDARD PRACTICES - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES).
E. Reduction Gearbox Replacement
(1) During ground test, check for air, and oil leaks. Rectify as required.
(2) Following the post installation ground test and after the first 5-10 and 20-25 flight
hours, inspect chip detectors and oil filters for contamination (Ref. 79-30-01).
(a) If silver flakes are found, flush oil system (Ref. Para. 8. D.).
F. Power Section Replacement
(1) During ground test, check for air, oil and fuel leaks. Rectify as required.
(2) Following the post installation ground test and after the first 5-10 and 20-25 flight
hours, inspect chip detectors and oil filters for contamination (Ref. 79-30-01).
(3) If silver flakes are found, flush oil system (Ref. Para. 8. D.).
9. Specific Inspections
A. First-stage Compressor Blades
CAUTION: KEEP COMPRESSOR INLET AREA CLEAR OF ALL FOREIGN OBJECTS

THAT COULD BE INGESTED BY ENGINE AND CAUSE DAMAGE DURING
SUBSEQUENT OPERATION.
(1) General
NOTE: The following inspection should be done whenever the air inlet screen is
removed (Ref. 72-20-00). Due to limited access, the use of a mirror is
recommended.
(a) The limits stated under ’Acceptable Damage Limits’ and ’Acceptable Erosion
Limits’ are considered acceptable without repair. The actual damage must be
documented and additional inspections scheduled to assess the rate of defect
progression.
72-00-00
Page 611
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) Continued operation of a compressor with FOD, either accepted as-is or

blended is dependent on satisfactory engine performance.
NOTE: When assessing damage, it should be understood that continued

operation with a large number of blades damaged or eroded at or
near maximum acceptable limits may result in reduction of compressor
efficiency and engine performance.
(c) The primary considerations of acceptable damage limits are based on

structural integrity. Rotors with damage more than ’Acceptable Damage Limits’
cannot stay in service unless damage can be removed by blending (Ref.
72-30-05, COMPRESSOR ROTOR - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES):
NOTE: Remove the minimum material required to remove the damage.

Document the damage (Ref. 72-30-05, COMPRESSOR ROTOR -
(d) If damaged blade is within acceptable limits and is not reworked, inspect area
at 150 hours or less as established by the operator. Subsequent inspections
are at the discretion of the operator based on the type of operating environment
but must not exceed 300 hours.
NOTE: The operating environment affects the rate of erosion and incidence of
blade damage. Engines operating in a highly erosive and/or conditions
where there is a high potential for blade damage; require inspections
more frequently at an interval established by the operator.
(e) If damage to the blades is acceptable, and/or after blending, engine performance
is within acceptable limits, inspection of the subsequent stages, (rotors, stators
and impeller) is not required. Under these conditions, the engine is considered
acceptable for service.
(f) If damage exceeds limits and cannot be removed by blending or engine

performance is unsatisfactory after repair, the engine or power section must be
removed from service.
(2) Documenting Damage
(a) Defects/damage must be documented in the engine log book (i.e., engine
module TSN/TSO, cycles, component description, location and dimensions,
if obtainable).
(b) If the blade is repaired document the amount of material removed during
blending.
(3) Acceptable Damage Limits (Ref. Fig. 601)
(a) Multiple superficial leading edge nicks 0.030 in. maximum depth on any
number of blades.
NOTE: A nick is considered to be a sharp surface indentation caused by

impact resulting in parent metal loss.
72-00-00
Page 612
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TRAILING
EDGE ANY NUMBER
OF BLADES LEADING
EDGE
0.250 MAX. ACCEPTABLE

ORIGINAL MATERIAL LOSS FROM EROSION
CONTOUR
A A ORIGINAL
CHORD LENGTH
EROSION SECTION A−A
50% 30%
20%
b a
c
TRAILING
EDGE ANY NUMBER
OF BLADES
LEADING
EDGE
B
d
0.050 NO FOREIGN OBJECT DAMAGE
0.100 ALLOWABLE IN ROOT
FILLET RADIUS
DETAIL B
EROSION FOREIGN OBJECT DAMAGE
C78459B
Compressor First-stage Blades Inspection
Figure 601
72-00-00
Page 613
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) Leading or trailing edge dents 0.055 in. deep by 0.080 in. long. Four dents per
blade on either leading or trailing edge on any number of blades.
NOTE: A dent is considered to be an indentation caused by impact in which

the parent metal has been displaced.
(c) Leading or trailing edge tip curl without presence of tearing. Maximum
acceptable deformation is 0.100 in. on one edge; four blades only.
(d) Leading or trailing edge nicks 0.050 in. maximum depth. Four nicks maximum
per leading or trailing edge on any number of blades.
(e) No cracks are permitted.
(f) Blade tip rub is acceptable providing there is no rolled over material and an
engine performance check is acceptable.
(g) Area a and c;
1 Corrosion pitting, nicks and dents 0.005 in. deep are acceptable.
(h) Area b;
1 Corrosion pitting, nicks and dents 0.010 in. deep are acceptable.
(i) Area d;
1 Corrosion pitting 0.002 in. deep is acceptable.
2 No foreign object damage allowable in root fillet radius.
(4) Acceptable Erosion Limits
(a) Erosion at the root is acceptable providing that dimension from leading edge to
apex of eroded area does not exceed 0.250 inch and there is no feathered,
(i.e., sharp) edge(s).
(b) Feathered edges must be removed and original leading edge profile restored
(Ref. 72-30-05, COMPRESSOR ROTOR - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES) or
the engine or power section must be removed from the service.
B. Functional Check of T5 Temperature Sensing System
(1) Remove external leads from terminal block on gas generator case.
NOTE: The system comprises an integral wiring harness which includes eight
thermocouple probes. The following check will reveal circuit malfunctions
such as intermittent short circuits or an open circuit in the harness lead. If
necessary, further checks may be carried out on the system by
disassembling the engine to gain access to probes as detailed in Chapter
77-20-01, Page Blocks 401 and 601.
72-00-00
Page 614
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Using Barfield Test Set Model 2312G-8 or equivalent, check insulation resistance of
harness when measured between either chromel or alumel terminal and ground.
Minimum acceptable resistance is 5000 ohms.
(3) Check continuity and loop resistance measured across chromel and alumel
terminals. Acceptable loop resistance is 1.8 to 2.6 ohms.
NOTE: Several broken or damaged probes would not necessarily result in an

out-of-tolerance loop resistance. However erroneous temperature
indications could occur due to the resultant imbalance in the harness
circuit.
10. Special Condition Inspections
A. General
The inspection data given here apply to engines that have been subjected to abnormal
operating conditions. Whenever the corrective action to be taken requires that the
engine or component be sent to an overhaul facility, precise details of the condition(s)
must be provided to facilitate overhaul inspection. The following paragraphs treat each
special condition separately and prescribe the corrective action to be taken.
B. Overtorque
For action to be taken in the event of overtorque conditions, refer to Figure 602.
C. Overtemperature
(1) For action to be taken in the event of overtemperature conditions during starting,
refer to Figure 603.
(2) For action to be taken in the event of overtemperature conditions other than during
starting, refer to Figure 604.
D. Overspeed
(1) Gas Generator
For action to be taken in the event of overspeed condition refer to Figure 605.
(2) Power Turbine
For Take-off power rating condition: Power turbine speed (Nf) up to 103% with
single engine torque below 65.5% without exceeding 5 minutes, no action required.
For Transient condition: Power turbine speed (Nf) is between 105% to 110% with
single engine torque below 96.7% without exceeding 10 seconds, no action is
required.
For No-Load condition: Power turbine speed (Nf) not exceeding 105% with single
engine torque below 28%, no action is required.
72-00-00
Page 615
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
% (LB−FT)
98.9 1100
96.7 1075
94.5 1050
89.8 1000
OUTPUT TORQUE
85.3 950
SEND REDUCTION GEARBOX TO OVERHAUL
FOR OVERTORQUE INSPECTION
81.0 902
850 RECORD IN ENGINE LOG BOOK
73.2 815
800
NO ACTION REQUIRED
67.4 750
0 10
SECONDS 60
120 180 240 300
TIME ( SECONDS )
( TORQUE LIMIT REFERRED TO OUTPUT SHAFT )
PT6T−3D ONLY
C22135F
Overtorque Limits for Each Power Section

72-00-00
Page 616
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
% (LB−FT)
NOTE:
98.9 1100
1) AREA "A" AND AREA "B" : RECORD
IN ENGINE LOG BOOK
96.7 1075
2) AFTER 12 EXCURSIONS INTO AREA "A"
SEND GEARBOX TO OVERHAUL
94.5 1050
AREA A FOR OVERTORQUE INSPECTION
3) AFTER 3 EXCURSIONS INTO AREA "B"
SEND GEARBOX TO OVERHAUL
FOR OVERTORQUE INSPECTION
89.8 1000
OUTPUT TORQUE
85.3 950
SEND REDUCTION GEARBOX TO OVERHAUL FOR OVERTORQUE
INSPECTION
81.0 902
AREA B
859
AREA A
73.2 815
800
NO ACTION REQUIRED
67.4 750
10
SECONDS 1 2 3 4 5 30
TIME ( MINUTES )
( TORQUE LIMIT REFERRED TO OUTPUT SHAFT )
PT6T−3DE AND PT6T−3DF ONLY
C26954D
Overtorque Limits for Each Power Section
72-00-00
Page 617
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AREA A VISUAL INSPECTION THROUGH EXHAUST

DUCT AND RECORD IN ENGINE LOG BOOK
AREA B PERFORM HOT SECTION INSPECTION
1100
AREA C REMOVE POWER SECTION AND SEND TO OVERHAUL
FOR OVERTEMPERATURE INSPECTION
1080
1060
1040
INTER TURBINE TEMPERATURE C
° 1020
1000
980 AREA C
960
AREA B
940
AREA A
920
900
NO ACTION REQUIRED
880
860
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
TIME − SECONDS
C3088D
Overtemperature Limits - Starting Conditions Only

Figure 603
72-00-00
Page 618
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE 1 : AREA A RECORD IN POWER SECTION LOG BOOK

AREA B PERFORM HOT SECTION INSPECTION
AREA C PERFORM POWER SECTION OVERTEMPERATURE
INSPECTION ( REF. LIGHT OVERHAUL )
990
NOTE 2 : ........... AFTER 12 EXCURSIONS OF MORE THAN 30 SECONDS
980 IN AREA A PERFORM A HOT SECTION INSPECTION
970
AREA B
960
950
940
930
920
C
910 AREA C
°
900
INTER TURBINE GAS TEMPERATURE
890
880 AREA A
870
860
850
840
830
820
810
800
790
NO ACTION REQUIRED
780
770
760
750
0 5 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
SECONDS MINUTES
TIME ( SECONDS / MINUTES )
PT6T−3D ONLY
C33411C
Overtemperature Limits - All Conditions Except Starting
72-00-00
Page 619
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE:
AREA "A" : RECORD IN POWER SECTION LOG BOOK
AREA "B" : PERFORM HOT SECTION INSPECTION
AREA "C" : PERFORM POWER SECTION OVERTEMPERATURE
1000
AREA B
INTER TURBINE GAS TEMPERATURE ( C )
AREA C
950
900
885
AREA A
850
800
NO ACTION REQUIRED
750
15
0 5 SECONDS 1 2 3 4 5 6 30
TIME ( MINUTES )
PT6T−3DE ONLY
C26714A

72-00-00
Page 620
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE:
1) AREA "A" : RECORD IN POWER SECTION LOG BOOK
AREA "B" : PERFORM HOT SECTION INSPECTION
AREA "C" : PERFORM POWER SECTION OVERTEMPERATURE
2) AFTER 12 EXCURSIONS MORE THAN 30 SEC. IN
AREA "A", PERFORM A HOT SECTION INSPECTION
1000
AREA B
INTER TURBINE GAS TEMPERATURE ( C )
AREA C
950
900
885
AREA A
850
800
NO ACTION REQUIRED
750
15
0 5 SECONDS 1 2 3 4 5 6 30
TIME ( MINUTES )
PT6T−3DF ONLY
C28605
72-00-00
Page 621
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AREA A 1 : DETERMINE AND CORRECT CAUSE OF OVERSPEED.

2 : RECORD IN POWER SECTION LOG BOOK
AREA B SEND POWER SECTION AND AFCU TO OVERHAUL

FOR OVERSPEED INSPECTION.
(114.12%) 43,500
(114.0%)
(113.86%) 43,400
(113.59%) 43,300 AREA B
(111.76%) 42,600
(111.58%) 42,500 (111.5%)
(111.32%) 42,400
GAS GENERATOR SPEED ( RPM )
(111.06%) 42,300 AREA B
(110.80%) 42,200
(110.54%) 42,100 (110.5%)
(110.28%) 42,000
(110.02%) 41,900 AREA A AREA B
(109.76%) 41,800
(109.50%) 41,700 (109.5%)
(109.23%) 41,600 NO ACTION REQUIRED

(109.2%)
(108.97%) 41,500
0 5 10 15 20 30 40
TIME ( SECONDS )
(103.19%) 39,300 NOTE : 38100 RPM = 100 %
C33413D
Overspeed Limits - Gas Generator

Figure 605
72-00-00
Page 622
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
If observed power turbine speed (Nf) exceeds 110%, with or without load send
affected power section to an overhaul facility for light overhaul (Engine Overspeed).
NOTE: 1. For No Load and Transient Limitations, refer to 71-00-00,

ADJUSTMENT/TEST.
NOTE: 2. A power turbine overspeed that does not involve damage to No.3 and 4
bearings is not cause for rejection of reduction gearbox.
E. Sudden Stoppage
(1) If helicopter main rotor blades have suffered dynamic major collision damage
resulting in replacement of one or more main rotor blades, the complete twin
pac engine must be removed and sent to an overhaul facility for light overhaul
(Sudden Stoppage).
NOTE: Damage to the tail rotor, or seizure of any part of the tail rotor transmission
system shall not be considered to have caused engine sudden stoppage
unless indications exist that internal damage exists in the main gearbox.
(2) If damage to main rotor blade(s) does not warrant replacement or if any part of the
transmission system between reduction gearbox output shaft and main rotor has
seized while the engine is operating, inspect as follows:
(a) Inspect engine mounts and vibration insulators for distortion or damage.
(b) Inspect exhaust duct for buckling or rippling.
(c) Inspect oil filters and chip detectors for metal particles.
(d) If any of the above conditions exist, engine must be shipped to overhaul facility.
(e) If none of the above conditions exist, remove reduction gearbox and both
power turbine and exhaust assemblies (Ref. 72-10-00 and 72-50-00
respectively) and proceed as follows in step (f).
(f) Inspect power turbine shroud for evidence of rub. If rub has occurred the
engine must be sent to an overhaul facility for light overhaul (Sudden Stoppage).
If there is no evidence of rub and no adverse conditions in reduction gearbox
the engine may remain in service subject to a satisfactory ground test (Ref.
applicable Aircraft Manual) and an oil filter inspection every 25 hours for the
next 100 hours of operation.
(3) If damage to main rotor blades is not severe enough to cause an engine anomaly
(generally occurs when one blade only is damaged), inspect as detailed in steps (2)
(a) through (d).
(4) If a non-engaged clutch engages during shutdown, remove reduction gearbox and
send to an overhaul facility for light overhaul (Sudden Stoppage).
72-00-00
Page 623
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
F. Oil Systems - Unusual Conditions
(1) If power section or RGB oil temperature is in between 115 to 130 °C (239-266 °F)
for more than five minutes or 130 to 140 °C (266-284 °F) for more than one minute,
inspect as follows:
(a) Inspect oil filters and chip detectors for metal particles.
(b) Change oil (Ref. 72-00-00, ENGINE - SERVICING).
(c) Carry out a 20 minute engine ground run at moderate power (Ref. applicable
Aircraft Manual).
(d) Re-check oil filters and chip detectors.
(e) If no metal particles are found, engine may remain in service. If metal particles
are found, reduction gearbox and/or power section affected must be sent to an
overhaul facility for light overhaul (Oil System Unusual Conditions).
(2) If oil temperature exceeds the above conditions, send power section and/or RGB to
an overhaul facility for light overhaul (Oil System Unusual Conditions).
(3) If engine has been subject to reduced oil level, excessive oil pressure fluctuations,
low oil pressure, significant metal particles in filter elements or oil contamination
beyond allowable limits, send power section and/or reduction gearbox to an overhaul
facility for light overhaul (Oil System Unusual Conditions).
NOTE: 1. If significant metal particles were found, state location of affected filter
elements and whether oil was contaminated.
NOTE: 2. If during normal operation, low or no oil pressure was observed for less
than one minute; drain oil, check chip detectors and filters. If no metal is
found; refill with oil and continue in service, checking filters on a daily
basis for the next 25 flying hours.
G. Immersion in Water
Send engine to an overhaul facility for light overhaul (Immersion in Water). State if
engine was stationary and cold, stationary and hot, or rotating at time of immersion.
H. Dropped Engine or Component
Send engine or component to an overhaul facility for light overhaul (Dropped Engine or
Hard Landing).
I. Hard Landing
(1) Inspect all mounting pads for cracks or misalignment.
(2) Inspect gas generator case for warping or buckling.
(3) Inspect all attachment hardware at engine flanges for shearing or other obvious
damage.
72-00-00
Page 624
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) Inspect fireseals for warping or buckling.
(5) Inspect all external tubes for damage.
(6) Inspect exhaust area for cracks, warping or distortion.
(7) If any of the above conditions are found, engine must be sent to an overhaul facility
for light overhaul (Dropped Engine or Hard Landing). If none of the above
conditions are found, engine may remain in service subject to a satisfactory ground
test (Ref. applicable Aircraft Manual).
J. Inlet Blockage
(1) Power sections developing surging conditions or sudden increase in T5 temperature,

inspect as follows:
(a) Remove and inspect inlet screen.
(b) Inspect first-stage compressor blades for damage.
(c) Determine if observed T5 temperature exceeds limits (Ref. Special Condition

Inspection, Overtemperature).
K. Lightning Strike
Inspect oil filters and chip detectors daily for the next 25 hours.
L. Contamination by Fire Extinguishing Agents
(1) In the event of engine contamination by fire extinguishing agents perform cleaning
procedures as follows:
(a) Perform dry motoring run to remove any residual deposits (Ref. Chapter
71-00-00, Test).
(b) Wash engine externally using fresh water only (Ref. 72-00-00, ENGINE -
CLEANING).
(c) Perform engine motoring performance recovery wash omitting dry motoring
run(Ref. 72-00-00, ENGINE - CLEANING).
M. Aircraft Flown Through Volcanic Ash or Smoke
(1) Do the external engine wash (Ref. ENGINE- CLEANING).
(2) Wash compressor and turbine (Ref. 72-00-00, ENGINE - CLEANING).
(3) Drain and refill oil system with new oil (Ref. 72-00-00, ENGINE - SERVICING).
(4) Clean or change oil filters (3 places) (Ref. 79-20-02, OIL FILTERS - MAINTENANCE
PRACTICES).
72-00-00
Page 625
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) Examine the compressor blade for damage or indication of erosion (Ref. ENGINE -
INSPECTION/CHECK).
(6) Do a borescope inspection of the compressor turbine blades and shrouds (Ref.
ENGINE - INSPECTION/CHECK).
(7) Do a borescope inspection of the power turbine blades (Ref. ENGINE -

INSPECTION/CHECK).
(8) Do a power assurance check (Ref. Applicable Rotorcraft Manual).
(9) Return engine to service if no damages are found.
(10) Drain and refill oil system with new oil (Ref. 72-00-00, ENGINE - SERVICING) 50 ±
10 flight hours after original oil change.
N. Contamination of the AFCU P3 (Pneumatic) System (Ref. Fig. 606)
(1) Inspect and flush the P3 (Pneumatic) system for possible contamination as follows:
(a) Remove the P3 air filter housing cover and filter element (Ref. 73-10-07).
(b) Using a high intensity light, inspect for debris at the inner area of the filter housing
assembly. Check center tube for security. Replace filter housing assembly if
center tube is loose (Ref. SB5367).
(c) Remove the filter element (6) from the cover (9) and inspect inside cover for
debris. Clean if required.
(d) Place suitable container under the P3 filter housing assembly (3) to contain
fluid during flushing procedure.
(e) Disconnect the P3 tube assemblies (1 and 2) at the AFCU.
NOTE: Clamps and associated parts (10 thru 17) may be loosened or
removed as required to gain access to the fitting and prevent
damage to the P3 line.
(f) Using a high intensity light and a mirror if required, inspect the P3 air inlet ports
on the AFCU (Ref. Fig. 607). Replace AFCU if internal debris is evident.
(g) Inject flushing fluid through the P3 tube(s), allowing the fluid to flow freely
through the P3 filter housing. Tube assembly (2) may have to be removed
to be flushed adequately. Inspect contained fluid for presence of debris
(particles). Repeat flushing process until fluid is clean.
NOTE: The compressor wash cart and solutions may be used to flush the P3
tube(s) (Ref. 72-00-00, ENGINE - CLEANING) Ensure that the outlet
pressure is regulated to 10 psi. As an alternate method, manual
injection (pouring) of petroleum solvent (PWC11-027) in the tube(s) is
acceptable.
(h) Replace AFCU if debris was found during flushing.
72-00-00
Page 626
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(i) Dry the interior of the P3 tubes using clean dry shop air or equivalent.
(j) Install P3 tube assemblies to the AFCU. Torque tube fittings 90 to 100 lb.in.
and lockwire.
(k) If clamps securing tube assembly (1) have been removed or loosened, proceed
as follows:
1 Install grommets (15) and loop clamp (14) and secure tube assemblies with
bolt (12), bracket (13) and nut (10).
2 Install spacer (17) between bracket (13) and loop clamps (11) and secure
with bolt (12) and nut (10).
3 Secure loop clamps (11) to bracket (16) with bolt (12) and nut (10).
4 Torque nuts (10) 32 to 36 lb. in.
(l) Install P3 filter element and cover assembly (Ref. 73-10-07, P3 AIR FILTER,
11. Borescope Equipment and Procedures
A. General
CAUTION: HEAT CAN DAMAGE THE BORESCOPE. ENGINE TEMPERATURE MUST BE

LESS THAN 66°C (150°F) BEFORE YOU DO AN INSPECTION. THE
SATISFACTORY COOLING PERIOD FOR STANDARD AMBIENT CONDITIONS
IS 40 MINUTES (COLD SECTION) OR TWO HOURS (HOT SECTION)
AFTER ENGINE SHUTDOWN, BUT CAN CHANGE WITH AMBIENT
CONDITIONS. IF REQUIRED, DO DRY MOTORING RUNS TO ACCELERATE
COOLING (REF. 71-00-00, POWER PLANT - ADJUSTMENT/TEST).
The borescope is an optical device which enables an operator to perform visual specific
inspection of hot section areas of the engine as required to detect sulfidation due to
local environmental conditions, wear or damage, etc. Access is through ports or openings
created by removal of engine components. Personnel performing borescope inspection
must be qualified to do checks and analyse results.
B. Description
(1) The borescope assembly comprises a pattern-controlled rigid guide tube, direct
viewing flexible 5 mm fiberscope, light source, side viewing adapter and other
accessories. If required, a 35 mm camera may be used to photograph engine areas
being inspected.
(2) Using the borescope (PWC34910-101), an operator can perform periodic inspection
of the following:
(a) Compressor turbine (CT) blades and shroud segments.
(b) Leading and trailing edges of CT vane ring.
72-00-00
Page 627
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 2
AUTO 11 10
FCU 17 11
13
12 12
3 12
FRONT 15 16
FIRESEAL 4 CENTER
MOUNT RING FIRESEAL 10 13
5 MOUNT RING
6 AUTO 14
FCU
7 10
FRONT
FIRESEAL
DETAIL A
C39222
AFCU P3 (Pneumatic) System - Inspection

Figure 606
72-00-00
Page 628
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 606
1. Compressor Delivery (P3) Tube Assembly

2. Compressor Delivery (P3) Tube Assembly
3. P3 Air Filter Housing Assembly
4. Spring
6. Element
9. Filter Cover
10. Nut
11. Loop Clamp
12. Bolt
13. Bracket
14. Loop Clamp
15. Loop Clamp Grommet
16. Bracket
17. Spacer
(c) Inner and outer vane rings of the CT vane ring.
(d) Cooling rings and dome section of the combustion chamber liner.
NOTE: 1. Before using the borescope, study the following procedures, the
borescope assembly and accessories (Ref. Fig. 608).
NOTE: 2. The borescope is a delicate device; it is considered vulnerable to

severe shocks, twisting and pinching. Care and attention must
therefore be exercised when handling it to prolong service life.
(3) Basic Installation
(a) Remove one fuel manifold adapter. The maximum suggested working
temperature is 66°C (150°F).
(b) Insert guide tube (PWC34910-200) through open manifold adapter port.
(c) Clamp holding fixture (PWC34913) to the engine, Flange C.
(d) Insert borescope (PWC34910-101) into the guide tube.
(e) Connect borescope to light source.
(f) Connect light source to power supply.
(g) Remove starter-generator from accessory gearbox and attach wrench

(PWC34941) to splined shaft to be able to turn the compressor.
72-00-00
Page 629
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P3 INLET TO
AIR REGULATOR
P3 AIR INLET
C38124
AFCU P3 Inlet Ports - Inspection

Figure 607
72-00-00
Page 630
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAMERA AND LENS
CAMERA ADAPTER
FIBERSCOPE
GUIDE TUBE
HOLDING
FIXTURE FIBERSCOPE
GUIDE TUBE
EYEPIECE
LIGHT SOURCE
C21647A
Borescope and Accessories Installed (Typical)
Figure 608
72-00-00
Page 631
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(h) Install camera if needed (Ref. Fig. 608) to record inspection of hot section
areas.
(4) A side-viewing adapter (SL-4TP) is used to inspect components located at a

nominal 90 degree angle to fiberscope distal tip. The use of side-viewing adapter will
introduce a reduction in the field of view as compared to the direct viewing field.
A ring is installed to protect distal end when side-viewing adapter is not fitted.
(a) Installation (Ref. Fig. 609)
1 Hold fiberscope as close as possible to distal end and remove protective

ring.
CAUTION: INSTALL SIDE-VIEWING ADAPTER CAREFULLY. IF NOT

INSTALLED AND TIGHTENED CORRECTLY, ADAPTER COULD
FALL INTO THE ENGINE. OVERTIGHTENING ADAPTER
COULD DAMAGE DISTAL END.
2 Hold fiberscope as close as possible to distal end. Install adapter, ensuring
indexing slot and lug are aligned. Tighten adapter fingertight.
(b) Removal (Ref. Fig. 609)
1 Hold fiberscope as close as possible to distal end and remove side-viewing

adapter.
CAUTION: INSTALL PROTECTIVE RING CAREFULLY. IF NOT INSTALLED

AND TIGHTENED CORRECTLY, RING COULD FALL INTO THE
ENGINE. OVERTIGHTENING RING COULD DAMAGE
DISTAL END.
2 Hold fiberscope as close as possible to distal end and install protective

ring. Tighten ring fingertight.
(5) Light Source
NOTE: Specify power requirements when purchasing borescope.
(a) A halogen lamp is used to provide lighting from either 110V, 60-Hz or 220V, 50
Hz power supply.
(b) Remove top cover from light source to replace lamp.
(c) Set intensity knob at maximum for best results.
(d) Before installing light source, refer to manufacturer’s instructions.
(6) A camera may be used with borescope to photograph internal engine components.
It must be equipped with a 50 mm F1.8 lens. Refer to camera handbook for
guidance.
(a) Installation
72-00-00
Page 632
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BORESCOPE DISTAL END
PROTECTIVE RING
DIRECTION OF ROTATION
FOR RING REMOVAL
RING REMOVAL
PRISM BODY
INDEXING LUG
INDEXING SLOT
BORESCOPE DISTAL END
SIDE VIEWING ADAPTER
THREADED RING
DIRECTION OF ROTATION
FOR RING REMOVAL
ADAPTER INSTALLATION
C12191
Side-viewing Adapter - Removal/Installation
Figure 609
72-00-00
Page 633
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: DO NOT USE COMPRESSED AIR TO CLEAN CAMERA,

BORESCOPE OR ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT.
1 Clean camera viewfinder, reflex mirror, focusing screen and 50 mm lens
with lens cleaning tissue and cleaner.
2 Install endoscopic focusing screen in camera.
3 Install the 50 mm lens.
4 Install camera adapter (CAII) on lens.
5 Load camera with film (Ref. camera handbook).
6 Set camera film speed to suit film and exposure compensation to -2 (Ref.
camera handbook).
7 Align bayonet slots of adapter and push-install camera on borescope

eyepiece pins.
NOTE: Ensure distal end is not moved when taking photographs.
(b) Removal
1 Turn outer ring of camera adapter to disengage locking mechanism and

remove camera from eyepiece.
2 Remove camera adapter from lens.
3 Remove film from camera and, using suitable label, add following data:
v Engine serial number.

v Date and area of component photographed.
v Engine operating time or cycles since last overhaul.
v Reason for borescope inspection (suspected foreign object damage, low
power, etc.)
(7) Guide Tube
(a) Installation (Ref. Fig. 610)
1 Remove appropriate fuel manifold adapter(s) (Ref. 73-10-05).
NOTE: The rigid, pattern-controlled guide tube must be inserted freely, no

force must be used.
2 Ease guide tube (PWC34910-200) through fuel manifold adapter port into
combustion chamber and exit duct zone turning guide tube
counterclockwise to achieve a three-quarter turn.
72-00-00
Page 634
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL MANIFOLD ADAPTER PORT

FLANGE C
RIGID GUIDE TUBE
POINT OF ENTRY (REF.)
FIBERSCOPE TIP
125 °
VANE RING
DISTAL TIP
RELATION BETWEEN POINT OF ENTRY AND DISTAL TIP
VIEW TOWARD AIR INLET CASE
C41525
Guide Tube Orientation
Figure 610
72-00-00
Page 635
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3 Installed, guide tube end locates between vanes of compressor turbine

stator, while supporting flange rests on adapter boss. Secure flange to
boss.
(b) Removal (Ref. Fig. 610)
1 Loosen knurled screw to release guide tube supporting flange.
2 Withdraw guide tube, turning clockwise.
3 Reinstall fuel manifold adapter(s) (Ref. 73-10-05).
(8) Troubleshooting
(a) The possible sources of, and solutions for, problems encountered when using
borescope are shown in Table 602.
C. Procedure
(1) Examine compressor turbine blades as follows:
(a) Install guide tube (Ref. Subpara. B.(7)).
(b) Clamp holding fixture (PWC34913) (Ref. Fig. 608) to Flange C.
(c) Fasten borescope (PWC34910-101) to holding fixture.
(d) Connect borescope to light source (Ref. Subpara. B.(5)).
TABLE 602, Borescope Troubleshooting
PROBLEM POSSIBLE SOURCE SOLUTION

Poor illumination Oil or dirt on distal tip or Clean using lens cleaner
side-viewing adapter prism and lens tissue.
Light source intensity switch set Set switch at high
at low
Defective lamp in light source Replace lamp
Damaged borescope light tube Return to manufacturer for repair
Defective transformer Return to manufacturer for repair
Poor definition Diopter ring not adjusted correctly Adjust to suit eyes
Damaged fibers in fiberscope Return to manufacturer for repair
(seen as black dots through viewer)
Poor illumination See previous problem
Fiberscope distal end Damaged control wires Return to manufacturer for repair
does not move when
control knob is turned
NOTE: Repairs should be carried out only by the manufacturer.
72-00-00
Page 636
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: ENSURE ENGINE TEMPERATURE IS BELOW 60°C (140°F).

(e) Slowly insert fiberscope into guide tube while looking through eyepiece. Stop
inserting fiberscope immediately distal tip reaches end of guide tube.
NOTE: Ensure distal tip actuating lever is in neutral position when installing or
removing fiberscope.
(f) Remove starter-generator from engine accessory gearbox (Ref. Aircraft

Maintenance Manual).
(g) Attach wrench (PWC34941) to splined gearshaft.
(h) Loosen knurled knob on holding fixture.
(i) Examine CT blade tip, root and air foil section (Ref. Views A and B, Fig. 611
and Para. 13. I.).
CAUTION: ENSURE DISTAL TIP OF BORESCOPE IS NOT LOCATED BETWEEN

COMPRESSOR TURBINE BLADES BEFORE TURNING
COMPRESSOR.
(j) Continue examination of CT blades while a second operator, using wrench,

rotates the compressor.
(k) Retract fiberscope into guide tube.
(l) Remove wrench from splined gearshaft and reinstall starter-generator (Ref.
Aircraft Maintenance Manual).
(m) Withdraw fiberscope from guide tube.
(n) Remove borescope and holding fixture.
(o) Remove guide tube (Ref. Subpara.B. (7)).
(2) Examine CT stator assembly as follows:
(a) Install guide tube (Ref. Subpara. B. (7)).
(b) Clamp holding fixture (PWC34913) (Ref. Fig. 608) to Flange C.
(c) Fasten borescope (PWC34910-101) to holding fixture and connect light source.
(d) Insert fiberscope into guide tube.
NOTE: The use of side viewing adapter may add to inspection capability (Ref.
Subpara. B. (4)).
72-00-00
Page 637
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
COMPRESSOR TURBINE BLADE ROOT COMPRESSOR TURBINE BLADE TIP

VIEW A VIEW B
VANE LEADING EDGE VANE TRAILING EDGE

VIEW C VIEW D
COMBUSTION CHAMBER LINER COOLING RING

VIEW E
C27489
Borescope Views (Simulated)

Figure 611
72-00-00
Page 638
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(e) Examine vane leading and trailing edges, inner and outer rings of vane ring
assembly (Ref. Views C and D, Fig. 611 and 13. F.).
NOTE: To photograph area, refer to Subparagraph B. (6).
(f) Remove borescope and holding fixture.
(g) Remove guide tube (Ref. Subpara. B.(7)).
(3) Examine combustion chamber liner assembly as follows:
(a) Remove fuel manifold adapters as necessary (Ref. 73-10-05).
(b) Clamp holding fixture (PWC34913) to Flange C.
(c) Insert fiberscope into a fuel manifold adapter port, fasten eyepiece to holding
fixture and connect light source.
(d) Inspect combustion chamber liner (Ref. View E, Fig. 611 and Para. 13.D.).
(e) Remove fiberscope, light source and holding fixture.
(f) Install fuel manifold adapters (Ref. 73-10-05).
12. In-service Borescope Inspection
A. Hot Section Components
In-service inspection is used to determine performance deterioration. Parts can be

inspected using a borescope (Ref. Para. 11.) or by removing the power section (Ref.
Para. 13.) following. Refer to FAULT ISOLATION for areas to be inspected.
Using a borescope is more practical for this inspection. Removal and installation of the
power section, components/assemblies may result in damage to parts and/or
distortion of sealing surfaces causing gas leaks and performance loss.
Acceptable damage must be documented and progression monitored. Record engine

TSN/TSO, fuel nozzle ports used, if found by borescope, component, description, location
and dimensions of defect.
If rotating components are found with unacceptable damage during inspection, an HSI
must be done before next flight. If damaged non-rotating components are found, except
when holes are burnt through the combustion chamber or the CT vane airfoil trailing
edge defects are beyond limits (Ref. Inspection), the HSI may be delayed, providing an
engine performance/ground power check is done.
An additional engine performance/ground power check and inspection of the affected

area must be done after 50 hours. Subsequent inspections and engine
performance/ground power check intervals will depend on the progression and level of
deterioration. Keeping an engine in service after components have deteriorated may
substantially increase the cost of future repairs/refurbishments.
72-00-00
Page 639
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Gas path components downstream of components having material missing must be

inspected for secondary damage. Pay special attention to rotating components. CT vanes
burned through at trailing edge (pressure and suction sides) may mean replacement
of the complete set of CT blades, depending on the area of the surface burned through.
The ability of an engine to produce the power required by the flight manual power
assurance check is the only engine airworthiness requirement. If, at an anticipated high
ambient temperature and/or altitude, T5 and Ng will approach or exceed the maximum
limits, an HSI is recommended before the actual conditions occur. When T5 and Ng
approach, or are anticipated to approach or exceed the maximum limits, troubleshoot
the engine/installation before doing an HSI.
Carbon accumulation inside fuel nozzle passages is the principle cause of spray pattern
degradation resulting in non-uniform combustion and local high temperature peaks.
Exposure to these peaks contributes to premature hot section deterioration. Carbon
accumulation is progressive and can affect all nozzles. Therefore, inspect all nozzles (Ref.
73-10-05, Inspection/Check), to minimize premature deterioration occurring at other
locations.
If component deterioration exceeds limits, either replace the individual component or do

an HSI, depending on the general condition of the hot section and engine performance.
The inspections are recommended concurrent with scheduled engine maintenance checks
applicable to individual aircraft installations.
B. Inspection of Combustion Chamber
NOTE: Combustion chamber includes small exit duct, inner and outer combustion
chamber liner assemblies.
(1) Combustion chamber liner cracks may be repairable, and an HSI is recommended
before component replacement is required. Converging cracks in the inner and
outer combustion chamber liner walls which do not meet are acceptable. Inspect
affected area at 100 hours. Subsequent inspections must not exceed 400 hours.
(2) Plasma top coating (ceramic) loss revealing undercoat (diffused aluminide) on outer
and inner liners is acceptable, providing base metal is not burnt or eroded.
(3) Small areas (approximately 1 sq.in.) bulging and/or hot spots on inner or outer liner
walls may be repairable and an HSI is recommended. Bulging and/or burning in the
dome area, associated or not with axial cracks, are acceptable provided the axial
cracks (circumferential cracks are unacceptable) do not exceed 1.0 inch in length or
0.030 inch in width. Engine may remain in service, providing the associated fuel
nozzle(s) is/are inspected (Ref. 73-10-05, Inspection/Check) and replaced if not within
limits. Subsequent inspections are at operators discretion, but must not exceed
400 hours.
(4) Holes in the inner and outer liner walls are unacceptable. An HSI must be done to
replace or repair the affected component, and the associated fuel nozzle(s)
inspected (Ref. 73-10-05, Inspection/Check) and replaced if not within limits.
72-00-00
Page 640
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) Cracked or distorted cooling rings on liners may be repairable. An HSI is

recommended before cooling rings are burned through and pieces enter the gas
stream. Engine may remain in service if it is understood that cooling air flow is
changed, and the rate at which the combustion chamber deteriorates may
increase. Therefore, if an HSI is not done, combustion chamber liner with distorted
cooling rings or converging cracks must have the associated fuel nozzle(s)
inspected (Ref. 73-10-05, Inspection/Check) and replaced if not within limits. Inspect
damage at 100 hours. Subsequent inspections are at operators discretion, but
must not exceed 400 hours.
(6) Excessive carbon deposits inside combustion chamber could be result of poor fuel
atomization by the fuel nozzles (indicated by deposits around fuel nozzle bosses).
Distortion of combustion chamber liner cooling rings may produce carbon
deposits in the dome area downstream of the affected cooling ring. If excessive
carbon deposits are found, flow check fuel nozzles (Ref. 73-10-05, Inspection/Check).
If CT blades are eroded, refer to Inspection of CT Blades.
(a) If the nozzles are serviceable, the combustion chamber liner is the probable
cause of the deposits. Inspect the CT blades, as erosion by carbon particles
(some carbon particles remain in the gas stream and are not deposited in the
combustion area) may damage and cause CT blade replacement.
(b) If CT blades are not eroded, engine may remain in service and the CT blades
and combustion chamber liners inspected within 100 hours. Subsequent
inspections are at operators discretion, but must not exceed 400 hours.
(7) As the structural integrity of the small exit duct is not affected, cracks and open
radial cracks extending from the inner to the outer diameter are acceptable
(length not limited), and an unlimited amount of coating loss is acceptable.
(a) Holes less than 0.500 in. in diameter in the outer wall are acceptable.
(b) If holes or open cracks are found, an HSI is recommended.
NOTE: The engine may remain in service, and HSI delayed, providing it is
understood that the CT stator cooling air flow is affected, increasing
the rate of deterioration.
(c) When damage is found, inspect the CT vane ring (Ref. 72-50-01,
Inspection/Check) and associated fuel nozzle (Ref. 73-10-05, Inspection/Check).
(d) Inspect damage at 100 hours. Subsequent inspections are at the discretion of
the operator, but must not exceed 400 hours. If deterioration exceeds the
above limits, an HSI is recommended.
(8) Cracks along, or across, the dome to outer liner seam weld are acceptable
provided the cracks do not intersect the fuel manifold support bracket. Inspect
damage at 100 hours. Subsequent inspections are at the operators discretion
but must not exceed 400 hours.
72-00-00
Page 641
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Inspection of Compressor Turbine (CT) Vane Ring Assembly
CAUTION: IF ANY CT STATOR VANE HAS TRAILING EDGE BURN THROUGH

EXCEEDING THE FOLLOWING LIMITS; THE CT BLADES MUST BE
DISCARDED.
(1) Measure trailing edge burn through (Ref. Fig. 612).
NOTE: Burned areas on vanes increase flow area which accelerates downstream
component deterioration, decreases Ng and increases T5.
(2) Cracks (Ref. Fig. 613) are repairable. Keep the engine in service and monitor
deterioration progression. Do an HSI before defects progress to such an extent
that the CT stator becomes unrepairable. This will increase the cost of the subsequent
HSI. Inspect CT stator having the defects shown within 100 hours. Subsequent
inspections must not exceed 400 hours.
(3) If defects have progressed beyond repair limits shown, engine may remain in
service, providing an engine ground power check (Ref. Aircraft Maintenance
Manual) is done, and the airfoil trailing edge damage does not exceed limits shown
(Ref. Fig. 612). An HSI is recommended if the vane trailing edge defects are
beyond the limits shown or downstream components are affected by the CT vane
distress or engine performance is unacceptable.
NOTE: Refer to Subpara. A. for additional recommendations.
D. Inspection of CT Blades (Ref. Figs. 614, 615 and 616)
(1) While performing compressor turbine blade inspection, operators might notice
surface anomalies that could be mistaken for sulfidation. In fact, these surface
anomalies are a result of the blade manufacturing process and do not affect turbine
performance. The following points of inspection will help operators determine if
the blades are serviceable:
v No loss of coating.
v No change in color.
v No evidence of sulfidation on adjacent blades.
v Geometrical deviations do not exceed 0.005 inches deep or 0.005 inches high.
There is no width limitation (Ref. Fig. 616).
(2) The condition of blades and tips is critical to obtain rated power. Most significant
blade tip defects (rubs and oxidation) increase interturbine temperature (T5). Even
if T5 is below maximum, an HSI may be recommended if damage is beyond
the limits shown (Ref. Fig. 615).
NOTE: Refer to Subpara. A. for additional HSI recommendations.
(a) Defects shown are acceptable, providing their condition is monitored by further
inspections and engine performance checks.
72-00-00
Page 642
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
0.230
LEADING EDGE
OPEN CRACK
0.230
TRAILING EDGE SURFACE
0.920 MISSING (BURNT MATERIAL)
APPROX.
CRACKS IN THE OUTER RING

EXTENDING INTO THE FILLET BURNT AREA ON
RADIUS OR ON THE AIRFOIL INNER/OUTER RING
NOTE
TRAILING EDGE DEFECTS EXCEEDING THE ABOVE LIMITS
ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE. DIMENSIONS CANNOT BE
ACCURATELY MEASURED WHEN USING A BORESCOPE
THEREFORE THE EXTENT OF THE DAMAGE MAY BE
ESTIMATED AS A PERCENTAGE OF AIRFOIL LEADING
EDGE HEIGHT. (0.920 APPROX.)
C23015
CT Stator Damage - HSI Recommended
Figure 612
72-00-00
Page 643
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TRAILING EDGE
PARALLEL CRACKS
LEADING EDGE
CRACK
AIRFOIL CRACKS ON
PRESSURE AND SUCTION
SIDES
INNER/OUTER RING
CRACKS NOT EXTENDING
INTO FILLET RADIUS
NOTE
THE ABOVE DEFECTS ARE ACCEPTABLE FOR FURTHER
SERVICE. THE EXTENT OF THE DEFECTS(S) MUST BE
RECORDED AND MONITORED BY ADDITIONAL INSPECTIONS.
THE ASSOCIATED FUEL NOZZLE MUST BE INSPECTED AND
REPLACED IF NOT WITHIN SPECIFIED LIMITS.
C23016
CT Stator - Acceptable/Repairable Damage

Figure 613
72-00-00
Page 644
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BLADE TIP OPEN CRACK

EROSION
ORIGINAL CONTOUR VIEW ON ARROW A
BURNT OR MISSING
MATERIAL
EROSION TRAILING EDGE

BURNT MATERIAL A
OR FOREIGN OBJECT
DAMAGE (FOD)
SULFIDATION
(COATING BLISTERING
WITH SOME BLISTERS
BURST)
LEADING EDGE
C23065
CT Blade Damage - Unacceptable Damage
Figure 614
72-00-00
Page 645
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HEAVY RUBBING AND BURNT MATERIAL

IS ACCEPTABLE PROVIDING ENGINE
PERFORMANCE IS WITH LIMITS
EROSION
CRACK
0.050
TYPICAL
0.050
TYPICAL
COATING
LOSS
TRAILING
EDGE
LEADING
EDGE
0.990
(REF.)
COATING LOSS
(CHANGE IN
COLOUR)
NOTE
THE ABOVE DEFECTS ARE ACCEPTABLE FOR FURTHER
SERVICE. THE EXTENT OF THE DEFECT(S) MUST BE
RECORDED AND MONITORED BY ADDITIONAL INSPECTIONS.
C23007A
CT Blade Damage - Acceptable Damage

Figure 615
72-00-00
Page 646
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
0.005 IN
0.005 IN
C77352
CT Blade - Manufacturing Anomalies
Figure 616
72-00-00
Page 647
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) Subsequent inspections are at the discretion of the operator, but must not
exceed 400 hours.
(c) Blades with cracks 0.050 in. long in the upper 1/3 of the trailing edge may
remain in service for 100 hours.
(d) If defects are beyond those shown (Ref. Fig. 614), an HSI is recommended.
(3) Check blades for axial shift. Normally, with components within assembly tolerances,
the blade platforms are approximately in line. When a blade shifts, the blade moves
axially and can be seen as having moved in relation to the adjacent platform.
NOTE: 1. Checking each CT blade TE platform alignment with a borescope is quite

difficult. The recommended method is to look at the leading edge (LE)
mismatch while rotating the CT disk. When a mismatch is observed (one
of the airfoil LE is shifted), check blade trailing edge platform. Maximum
shift is 0.020 inch.
NOTE: 2. The amount of blade shift may be estimated by using a 0.020 in. thick
wire wrapped tightly around the tip of borescope and held by tape. The
free end should be positioned within the field of view of the borescope.
When estimating the amount of shift, position the free end of the wire
adjacent to the platform being checked.
(4) If blade shift in excess of the limit is observed, an HSI is recommended.
E. Inspection of CT Shroud Segments
(1) Heavy rubbing and oxidation are acceptable, providing T5 is within limits. Operating
the engine with the shroud segments burned may cause damage to the CT shroud
housing (cracking and burning of the attachment rim), and an HSI is
recommended. A damaged shroud housing must be replaced at the next HSI or
refurbishment.
NOTE: Refer to Subpara. A. for additional HSI recommendation.
F. Inspection of Power Turbine (PT) Stator
NOTE: Inspection of the PT stator is recommended when upstream component

damage does not explain performance loss or when secondary damage is
suspected.
(1) Damage on the vanes may produce an increase in flow area which will increase Ng
and T5.
(2) Cracks on the inner and outer rings and vanes are repairable. Keeping the engine
in service, the defects will progress until the stator becomes unrepairable. This will
increase the cost of the subsequent HSI. Inspect the damaged area within 100
hours. Subsequent inspections must not exceed 400 hours.
(3) An HSI is recommended when the defects are still repairable.
72-00-00
Page 648
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) If the defects are not repairable, replace PT stator at the next power section repair.
Providing Ng and T5 are within limits, there is no need for power section repair and
PT stator change, regardless of the amount of damage, unless structural integrity
of the vanes are affected (e.g. wide open cracks, excessive foreign object damage
(FOD) and missing or burnt material are unacceptable).
G. Inspection of PT Blades
(1) Increased tip clearance of PT blades increases T5. If T5 is within limits, there is no
need to change the PT assembly, regardless of the amount of damage, providing
structural integrity of the components is not affected.
(a) Cracks, missing material, excessive FOD, heavy sulfidation or blade distortion
are unacceptable.
13. Hot Section Inspection
A. General
The inspection procedures given in the following paragraphs cover the entire scope of
the engine hot section inspection. The complete inspection procedure is performed
whenever power sections have been subjected to overtemperature conditions, or on
a periodic basis (Ref. SB5003) .
Basically, the procedure involves partial disassembly of the engine to gain access to the
hot section components, inspection of the components and repair or replacement as
applicable, followed by re-assembly.
Subparagraph B. lists the referenced procedures for disassembly to gain access. Table
603 lists the hot section components to be inspected. The table also indicates if
repair or replacement procedures are given in this manual and the Chapter/Section/Units
in which these procedures are to be found.
Paragraphs C. through P. give the component inspections and associated acceptance,

repair and replacement criteria.
B. Preparation
(1) Remove power section (Ref. 72-00-01).
(2) Remove power turbine and exhaust section 72-50-00.
(3) With assembly loaded to produce smallest gap, measure and record compressor
turbine blade tip clearance at the center and ends of each shroud segment using a
wire or tapered feeler gage. Average clearance must be between 0.018
and 0.020 in.
NOTE: With used segments the tip clearance at any one location should not
exceed 0.021 in. or be less than 0.018 in.
(4) Remove compressor turbine disk (Ref. 72-50-02).
(5) Remove fuel nozzles (Ref. 73-10-04).
72-00-00
Page 649
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(6) Remove igniter plugs (Ref. 74-20-00).
(7) Remove compressor turbine vane ring, shroud and exit duct support flange (Ref.
72-50-01, COMPRESSOR TURBINE VANE RING - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION).
(8) Remove combustion chamber liner (Ref. 72-40-01).
(9) Remove combustion chamber large exit duct (Ref. 72-40-01, COMBUSTION
CHAMBER LINER ASSEMBLY - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES).
C. Gas Generator Case Assembly
(1) Inspect case for cracks (Ref. Step (2)), distortion, overheating or heavy corrosion.
Repair of case is not authorized at maintenance level. If condition of case warrants
repair, power section must be shipped to an overhaul facility for inspection/repair
in accordance with the Overhaul Manual.
(2) Using a high intensity light, 10X magnifying glass and mirror if necessary, visually
inspect gas generator case for cracks. Inspect weldments at bosses and spot
welds(Areas a) on surface of case for cracks (Ref. Fig. 617).
CAUTION: VOIDS OR SURFACE SCRATCHES MAY SHOW AS CRACKS AND

THEREFORE SHOULD NOT BE MISCONSTRUED AS CRACKS.
(a) If a crack is confirmed, power section must be removed and sent to overhaul
facility for inspection/repair in accordance with the Overhaul Manual.
(3) Inspect case for protective coating loss. If more than 25% of surface area is
affected, return case to overhaul facility for strip and re-coat. If less than 25% of
surface area is affected, touch-up (Ref. 72-30-04).
72-00-00
Page 650
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SPOTWELDS
(TYPICAL)
a
a
a a
VIEW A
C60859
Gas Generator Case Inspection (Typical)
Figure 617
72-00-00
Page 651
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE 603, Hot Section Inspection - Component Repair/Replacement
Chap/
Sec/
Component HSI Para. Repair Replacement Unit
Gas Generator Case Assy 13. C. X N/A 72-30-04
Combustion Chamber Liner 13. D. X X 72-40-01
Combustion Chamber Large Exit 13. E. N/A X 72-40-01
Duct
Compressor Turbine Vane Ring 13. F. X X 72-50-01
Compressor Turbine Shroud 13. G. X X 72-50-01
Segments
Compressor Turbine Shroud 13. H. X X 72-50-01
Housing
Compressor Turbine Disk Assy 13. I. N/A X 72-50-02
Power Turbine Disk Assy 13. J. N/A N/A 72-50-04
Power Turbine Vane Ring 13. K. X X 72-50-03
T5 Temperature Sensing System 13. L. X X 77-20-01
Exhaust Duct 13. M. N/A N/A -
Fuel Nozzles and Sheaths 13. N. N/A 73-10-05
(4) Inspect diffuser pipes in gas generator case (Ref. Fig. 618).
(a) Cracks of any length on inner surface of any number of diffuser pipes are
acceptable provided that they will not converge and cause loss of metal
(Ref. Details A, B and C) and that they are stop-drilled.
(b) Cracks terminating in fishtail seam weld are acceptable and require no repair.
(c) Loss of material is acceptable on a maximum of four diffuser pipes provided

that detached material is removed from engine and dimensions of hole after
blending are within limits (Ref. Details A and B).
(d) Cracks in fishtail outer face are acceptable after stop-drilling.
(e) Fretting wear on outer face and edge adjacent to next fishtail is acceptable
after blend repair.
(f) Cracks in fretted areas are acceptable if stop-drilled.
(5) Inspect threaded holes and shanknuts in center bore area for damage (Ref.
72-30-04).
72-00-00
Page 652
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DAMAGE ON OUTER SURFACE DAMAGE ON INNER SURFACE
E
IBL
ISS
PE AX.
RM
M
00
0.5
0.300 MAX. PERMISSIBLE
0.8
00
M
PE AX.
RM
ISS
IBLE
A B
DAMAGE ON INNER SURFACE DAMAGE ON OUTER SURFACE
FRETTED AREA
C D
C9493
Diffuser Pipe Inspection (Typical)
Figure 618
72-00-00
Page 653
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Combustion Chamber Liner
NOTE: Cracks in the liner surfaces are usually of a stress-relieving nature, and as
such are not serious in that the rate of growth decreases as the crack
lengthens. Thermal stresses, in effect, relieve original stress conditions. It is
considered normal to observe a given type of deterioration repeated from liner
to liner. Typical liner distress consists of buckling and cracking of cooling
rings and buckling at the inner wall adjacent to the dome.
(1) The following conditions are acceptable without repair (Ref. Fig. 619).
(a) Localized buckling and/or burning of all cooling rings (except louvered type)
accompanied by cracking, provided cracks do not extend into seam weld.
(b) Cracks in louvered cooling rings; provided that circumferential cracks in seam
weld do not exceed 0.300 in. in length and are stop-drilled.
(c) Straight-line cracks between two adjacent cooling holes.
(d) A maximum of seven cracks (each crack not exceeding one inch in length) in
inner liner adjacent to dome end.
CAUTION: CRACKS CONVERGING TOWARDS A COMMON POINT ARE NOT

ACCEPTABLE UNLESS THEY ARE SEPARATED BY AT LEAST
THREE INCHES OF SOUND MATERIAL AND ARE STOP-DRILLED.
(e) Localized areas that have been heated to an extent to buckle the liner,
provided buckling is shallow and is not associated with burning effecting a
reduction in wall thickness causing structural weakening.
(2) Acceptable conditions requiring repair are as follows:
(a) Buckled cooling rings, in which the gap has been eliminated, must be
reworked. Use suitable bar to restore uniform gap.
(b) Cracks not exceeding two inches in length must be welded.
(c) Circumferential cracks adjacent to seam welds must be repaired by welding.
NOTE: Cracks open in excess of 0.030 in. are not repairable.
(d) Cracks progressing from a free edge so that their meeting is imminent and
could allow a piece of metal to break loose must be repaired by welding.
(3) If any of the following conditions exist, the liner must be replaced.
(a) Severe buckling causing ‘‘kinked’’ metal.
(b) Multiple cracks (several small cracks propagating from one main crack).
(c) Cracks exceeding two inches in length.
72-00-00
Page 654
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(d) Circumferential cracks adjacent to seam welds which are opened in excess of
0.030 in.
E. Combustion Chamber Large Exit Duct
Inspect large (outer) exit duct for cracks, burning, distortion or fretting wear on the inner
diameter which contacts the combustion chamber liner. Any amount of coating loss in
contact area is acceptable. Coating loss in other areas acceptable provided parent metal
erosion (if present) is not in excess of 0.010 in. deep. No repairs authorized at
maintenance level.
F. Compressor Turbine Vane Ring (Ref. Fig. 620)
(1) Inspect vane ring for cracks, coating loss, erosion of parent metal or impact
damage. The following acceptance limits apply. No repairs are permitted.
(a) Vanes
1 Multiple open cracks not exceeding 0.005 in. wide and up to 1.0 inch long
in the aerofoil is acceptable, provided there is no evidence of burning.
2 If two or more cracks converge to liberate a piece of metal, then the

component should be rejected.
(b) Outer Platform (Ring)
1 Multiple open cracks not exceeding 0.020 inch wide and up to 1.0 inch in
length are acceptable in the outer platform downstream of its mounting
flange. No two or more cracks may converge in such a manner that would
allow a piece of metal to become detached.
2 Outer ring open cracks which extend into the aerofoil are acceptable up to
1.0 inch in length, provided no two or more cracks converge in such a
manner that would allow a piece of metal to become detached.
(c) Inner Platform (Ring)
1 Multiple open cracks through the wall of the inner ring less than 0.020 inch
wide and up to 1.0 inch in length are acceptable provided that 20% of the
axial length of the inner ring is intact.
2 Inner ring open cracks which extend into the aerofoil are acceptable up to
1.0 inch in length, provided no two or more cracks converge in such a
manner that would allow a piece of metal to become detached.
(2) Coating Loss and Erosion
(a) Up to 0.250 square inch on any vane airfoil surface is acceptable provided that
erosion (if any) does not exceed 0.010 in. deep.
(b) Any amount of coating loss from both inner and outer rings is acceptable
provided erosion (if any) does not exceed 0.020 in. deep.
72-00-00
Page 655
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
0.070
0.050
0.080
0.060
0.070
0.050 0.080
0.060
0.085
0.065
C22198
Combustion Chamber Liner Cooling Ring - Inspection

72-00-00
Page 656
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ACCEPTABLE PROVIDING ANY CRACK IN

COOLING RING SEAM WELD DOES
NOT EXCEED 0.300 INCH IN LENGTH AND
IS STOP−DRILLED USING 1/16 DRILL
MULTIPLE CRACKS THROUGH COOLING

RING ARE ACCEPTABLE PROVIDING SEAM
WELD CRACKS ARE WITHIN LIMITS
LOUVERED COOLING RING
LOUVERED COOLING RING SEAM WELD
CRACKS / BUCKLING IN COOLING RINGS

(EXCEPT LOUVERED)
CRACKS OF THIS NATURE ARE ACCEPTABLE

PROVIDING THEY DO NOT EXCEED 0.300 INCH IN CRACK MUST NOT
LENGTH AND ARE STOP DRILLED USING 1/16 DRILL EXTEND INTO SEAM WELD
C42286
Combustion Chamber Liner Cooling Ring - Inspection
72-00-00
Page 657
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
VANE LEADING EDGE AND AIRFOIL

INSPECT FOR LOSS OF COATING CRACKS OF THIS NATURE
AND EROSION ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE
OUTER RING (REF.) OUTER RING (REF.)
INNER RING (REF.)
INSPECT VANE TRAILING EDGE FOR

COATING LOSS AND EROSION
NOTE: REFER TO TEXT FOR INSPECTION LIMITS, AND TO

ILLUSTRATED PARTS LIST FOR APPLICABLE PART NUMBERS
C27490
Compressor Turbine Vane Ring - Inspection

Figure 620
72-00-00
Page 658
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) Oxidation: up to 0.250 square inch by 0.005 in. deep on any vane LE .
Maximum of seven affected vanes is acceptable.
(3) Burning
(a) Any number of vanes which exhibit burn through on the trailing edge of 0.125
square inch or greater (area of approx. 0.350 inch x 0.350 inch) and the void
may be seen when viewed from the leading edge in direction parallel to engine
longitudinal axis, requires the replacement of both the vane ring and the
complete set of compressor turbine blades.
G. Compressor Turbine Shroud Segments
(1) Inspect shroud segments for cracks, distortion, erosion or metal build up.
(a) Cracks are not acceptable. Replace segments.
(b) If blade-to-shroud clearances are less than 0.018 in. due to a shroud high-spot
or if tip rub has occurred, the segment may be ground locally over a length not
exceeding one inch per segment. (Ref. Fig. 621).
H. Compressor Turbine Shroud Housing
(1) Inspect compressor turbine shroud housing for cracks (Ref. Fig. 622). Cracks are
not acceptable. Replace housing.
(2) Inspect interstage sealing ring for scoring wear on outer face and sides. Ring wear
is acceptable to the following limits:
Width: 0.225 in. min.
Thickness: 0.084 in.
Gap: 0.175 in. min.
I. Compressor Turbine Disk Assembly
(1) Inspect blades for tip rub, erosion, corrosion, impact damage, coating loss, cracks
or shift. Inspect condition of blade retaining rivets.
(a) Damage limits for blades are as follows (Ref. Fig. 623 and 624):
NOTE: If any of the following limits are exceeded or any cracks are found in
blades, disk assembly must be replaced. Send removed disk
assembly for overhaul inspection (Ref. Para. 10. A.).
1 Limits for erosion of leading edge tip are as shown on figure.
2 Inspect blade airfoil surfaces, particularly concave surfaces, for corrosion

and loss of coating using 10X power magnification. A loss of up to 25% of
coating is permissible. Assess stage of deterioration and accept or
reject bladed disk as follows:
72-00-00
Page 659
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HEAVY RUB − WHERE FUSION OF METAL

FROM COMPRESSOR TURBINE BLADE
SQUEALER TIPS HAS OCCURRED. GRIND
SEGMENT LOCALLY UNTIL FLUSH WITH
CONTOUR
LIGHT TIP RUB OF

THIS NATURE IS
ACCEPTABLE
C22128
Compressor Turbine Shroud Segments - Inspection

Figure 621
72-00-00
Page 660
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
A
AREA A
SECTION A−A
C22124
Compressor Turbine Shroud Housing - Inspection
Figure 622
72-00-00
Page 661
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
0.100 0.100 0.200
❉
TRAILING LEADING
EDGE EDGE
LEADING
EDGE
A
0.100 PROVIDED ENGINE

❉
PERFORMANCE IS
SATISFACTORY
FILLET
AREA B TIP RADIUS
EROSION LIMITS
BLADES HAVING THINNED OR FEATHERED LEADING EDGES DUE TO EROSION

ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE
C3112E
Compressor Turbine Blades - Inspection

Figure 623
72-00-00
Page 662
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STAGE 1 STAGE 2
STAGE 3 STAGE 4
C60623
Stages of Corrosion
Figure 624
72-00-00
Page 663
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
a Stage 1 - Initial Coating Deterioration (Sulfidation): Indicated by light

color change of the part of coating area. Can be rust colored or dark
gray. Coating has deteriorated but is possibly not damaged. Blades
are acceptable for service again.
b Stage 2 - Initial Corrosion: Indicated by apparent rise of sulfidated

coating above the adjacent surface, with small, scattered blisters
seen in the coating. Corrosion of the base material has started. Accept
or reject the blades, as per the decision of the operator, based on
previous experience. If blades stay in service, increase the frequency
of the compressor turbine washes (Ref. 72-00-00, ENGINE -
CLEANING) and do borescope inspection of the blades every 200
hours (Ref. Para. 11.).
c Stage 3 - Advanced Corrosion: Evidenced by clusters of ruptured

blisters exposing bare material. Craters so formed deepen
progressively, and crater surfaces darken with glazed appearance.
Send disk assembly to an approved overhaul facility for blade
replacement in accordance with the Overhaul Manual.
CAUTION: THIS CONDITION MAY RESULT IN IMBALANCE OF THE

COMPRESSOR TURBINE ASSEMBLY AND SUBSEQUENT
DAMAGE.
d Stage 4 - Severe Corrosion: Deep penetration with large ruptured

blisters exposing large areas of bare material. Send power section
to an approved overhaul facility for disk repair and inspection of No. 2
bearing area in accordance with the Overhaul Manual.
NOTE: Corrosion may be identified as metal loss or pitting, but more

usually it appears as local swelling or build-up due to greater
volume occupied by the nickel oxides. These corrosion
products vary in color from green to black and in the advanced
state there will be associated flaking. Care should be taken
to distinguish between corrosion build-up and possible light
brown or rust colored deposits which are essentially
harmless combustion byproducts. The latter are more
widespread over hot section components and while possibly
affecting performance, will not directly affect blade integrity.
3 Impact damage in Area A: Three nicks, dents or pits no more than 0.005 in.
deep per blade.
4 Impact damage in Area B: One nick, dent or pit no more than 0.005 in.
deep per blade.
5 Impact damage on leading or trailing edges: One nick, dent or pit no more
than 0.020 in. deep per blade.
(b) Blade Shift (Ref. Fig. 625)
1 Blade protrusion beyond disk rim must be within 0.010 in. either side of
disk.
72-00-00
Page 664
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
POWER TURBINE COMPRESSOR TURBINE
1. BLADE PLATFORM END

2. TURBINE DISK
NOTE: PROTRUSION OF BLADE MAY

BE MEASURED FROM EITHER
SIDE OF DISK
1
1
2
2
BLADE PROTRUSION (TYP.)
BLADE PROTRUSION MUST NOT

EXCEED 0.005 FROM DISK FACE
C22120
Turbine Blade Protrusion
Figure 625
72-00-00
Page 665
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) Circumferential Movement
1 Blade circumferential movement must not exceed 0.030 in. at tip.
(d) Axial Movement
1 No blade axial movement is permitted.
J. Power Turbine Disk Assembly
(1) Inspect blades for corrosion, impact damage, coating loss, cracks or shift.
(a) Damage limits for blades are as follows (Ref. Fig. 626):
NOTE: If any of the following limits are exceeded or any cracks are found in
blades, disk assembly must be replaced. As replacement of disk
involves balancing procedures, the complete power turbine and exhaust
section must be sent to an overhaul facility.
1 Examine blade airfoil surfaces for signs of corrosion and pitting as follows:
a Slight corrosion and/or closely grouped pits on the airfoil surface up to

0.002 inch deep maximum is acceptable provided:
- the total affected area is not more than 25% of the airfoil surface.
- the corrosion appears as minor roughening of the air foil surface.
b Mild corrosion and/or closely grouped pits up to 0.005 inch deep

maximum is acceptable provided:
- the total affected area is not more than 10% of the airfoil surface.
- the corrosion appears as moderate roughening of the airfoil surface.
NOTE: Severe corrosion more than 0.005 inch deep is not

acceptable: severe corrosion appears as significant
roughening of the airfoil surface.
2 Impact damage in Area A: Three nicks no more than 0.015 in. long by
0.005 in. deep. Three dents or pits no more than 0.010 in. deep per blade.
3 Impact damage in Area B: One nick, dent or pit no more than 0.020 in. deep
per blade.
4 Impact damage on leading or trailing edges: One nick, dent or pit no more
than 0.020 in. deep per blade.
(b) Blade Shift (Ref. Fig. 625)
1 Blade protrusion beyond disk rim must be within 0.005 in. either side of
disk.
(c) Blade-to-Shroud Rubbing
72-00-00
Page 666
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 PT disk assembly must rotate freely without rubbing the PT shroud. If

assembly does not rotate freely, send complete power section to overhaul
facility to inspect any deformation of the PT shroud in accordance with
the Overhaul Manual.
(d) Circumferential Movement
1 Blade circumferential movement must not exceed 0.030 in. at tip.
(e) Axial Movement
1 No blade axial movement is permitted.
K. Power Turbine Vane Ring (Ref. Fig. 627)
(1) Inspect vane ring for cracks, coating loss, erosion of parent metal or impact
damage. The following acceptance limits apply. No repairs are permitted.
NOTE: Power turbine vane rings are classified. If replacement is required, install
like class.
(a) Cracks
1 Cracks up to 0.400 in. long are acceptable in leading or trailing edges on

any number of vanes.
2 Cracks up to 0.600 in. long are acceptable in outer ring.
3 Cracks up to 0.400 in. long are acceptable in inner ring.
(b) Erosion or pitting on airfoil surfaces.
1 Up to 0.250 in. square by 0.010 in. deep on any one vane for any number
of vanes is acceptable.
NOTE: Vane rings deemed unacceptable for continued service may be

shipped to an approved overhaul facility for possible repair in
accordance with overhaul manual instructions.
L. T5 Temperature Sensing System
(1) Check harness and connections for security.
(2) Carry out resistance and probe heat response checks (Ref. 77-20-01).
72-00-00
Page 667
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FILLET AREA
(SEE NOTE)
0.125 B
0.0625
LEADING EDGE
0.125
A 0.125
TRAILING EDGE
0.050 B 0.125
NOTES:
1. RIPPLING OF TRAILING EDGE
FILLET AREA (SEE NOTE) IS NOT ACCEPTABLE
2. NO DAMAGE PERMITTED
IN FILLET AREAS
C3113A
Power Turbine Blades - Inspection

72-00-00
Page 668
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SLIGHT MODERATE SEVERE

CORROSION CORROSION CORROSION
C67126
Power Turbine Blades - Inspection
72-00-00
Page 669
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OUTER RING
TRAILING EDGE
INNER RING
CRACKS SHOWN ARE TYPICAL FOR

LEADING EDGE AND TRAILING EDGE
C3117
Power Turbine Vane Ring - Inspection

Figure 627
72-00-00
Page 670
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
M. Exhaust Duct
(1) Inspect exhaust duct for cracks or distortion. A maximum of three cracks in exhaust
port flange, emanating from bolt holes, are acceptable provided cracks are not
across the flange-to-case butt weld or circumferentially around flange or weld (Ref.
Fig. 628). Cracks may be stop drilled using 1/16 (0.0625) inch diameter drill.
NOTE: No other repair or replacement of exhaust duct is authorized at maintenance

level. If repair or replacement is required, the complete power turbine and
exhaust section must be shipped to an overhaul facility.
N. Fuel Nozzles and Sheaths
NOTE: See removal/installation procedures (Ref. 73-10-05).
(1) Inspect nozzles for dissimilarity of carbon build up. Clean or replace as necessary
and perform functional check as detailed in Chapter 73-10-05.
(2) Inspect sheaths for fretting wear, erosion and carbon build up.
NOTE: Fretting wear up to 0.010 in. deep is acceptable.
O. Fuel Manifold Bolt Removal
(1) Inspect manifold attachments for broken bolts.
(2) Remove and replace broken bolts (Ref. 72-30-04).
P. Reassembly of Engine
(1) Install combustion chamber liner (Ref. 72-40-01).
(2) Install igniter plugs (Ref. 74-20-00).
(3) Install fuel nozzles (Ref. 73-10-05).
(4) Install compressor turbine disk (Ref. 72-50-02).
(5) Install power turbine and exhaust section (Ref. 72-50-00).
(6) Install power section (Ref. 72-00-01).
72-00-00
Page 671
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2
3
1
C11786
Exhaust Duct - Crack Inspection (Typical)

Figure 628
72-00-00
Page 672
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 628
1. Exhaust Flange
2. Butt Weld
3. Typical Crack
72-00-00
Page 673/674
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ENGINE- CLEANING
1. General

Item No. Name Remarks

PWC05-005 Emulsifier Witconate P10-59B
PWC05-037 Epoxy Primer
PWC09-003 Silicone Grease
PWC11-001 Alkaline Cleaner CLIX
PWC11-001A Alkaline Cleaner Almon AL-333
PWC11-001B Alkaline Cleaner Magnus 1214
PWC11-001C Alkaline Cleaner B&B 3100
PWC11-001D Cleaner, Alkaline R-MC Premix
PWC11-001F Alkaline Cleaner Turco 4217
PWC11-001G Alkaline Cleaner Turco 5884
PWC11-001H Alkaline Cleaner Ardrox 624
PWC11-001I Cleaner, Alkaline Carbitrol
PWC11-001J Cleaner, Alkaline Triethanolamine
PWC11-003 Detergent Cleaner
(Biodegradable) Ardrox 6345
PWC11-003B Detergent Cleaner Ardrox 6367
(Biodegradable) (Turboclean 2)
PWC11-003C Detergent Cleaner Ardox 6368
(Biodegradable) (Turboclean 2 RTU)
PWC11-003D Detergent Cleaner
(Biodegradable) Zok 27
PWC11-010 Alcohol, Methyl
PWC11-014 Alcohol, Isopropyl
PWC11-040 Cleaner, W.C.T.
Emulsifier
PWC13-001 Exoxy Primer
PWC15-011 Corrosion Inhibitor Corrosion-X
72-00-00
Page 701
ENGINE- CLEANING Jul 18/2016
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Special Tools
Tool No. Name

PWC32271 Wash Tube
PWC32677-300 Wash Cart
Not Applicable
5. Procedure
Engine cleaning is basically confined to compressor desalination and performance recovery

washes. However an external wash is recommended whenever the engine is contaminated
with salt (Ref. Para. 6.).
To perform a compressor turbine wash, the engine is motored using the starter and washing
fluids are sprayed into the engine intake through a high flow (2 to 3 gal/min) (7.57 to
11.36 liters/min) spray ring/wash tube (Ref. Fig. 703) respectively.
Motoring washes are carried out at an Ng of 14 to 25% and the water or cleaning mixture,
which is pressurized at 30 to 50 psi (207 to 345 KPa) is sprayed into the compressor inlet
through the high-flow spray ring. Washing while motoring the engine ensures that the
cleaning mixture remains in liquid form.
Depending on the operating environment, it is recommended that the frequency of compressor

washing follows the directives contained in Table 701.
6. Engine External Wash
An external wash with fresh water is recommended when the engine is contaminated with
salt. Demineralized water is not necessary. The engine must never be left for an extended
period, such as overnight, in a contaminated condition.
NOTE: Before performing an external wash, the engine must be allowed to cool for a
minimum of 40 minutes after shutdown.
7. Compressor Wash
A. Preparation of Equipment (Ref. Fig. 701)
(1) Set up compressor wash system as shown on schematic.
NOTE: Tubing for interconnection of components is to be 5/16 in. (8 mm) ID

minimum.
72-00-00
Page 702
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MECHANICAL
AGITATOR
CLEANING SOLUTIONS / STEEL

TANK 5 U.S. GALS (19 LITERS)
CAPACITY WORKING PR.
50 P.S.I. (345 kPa)
PRESSURE AIR SUPPLY VALVE SHUT−OFF−VALVE
GAGE
VALVE VALVE
RELIEF VALVE
TO SPRAY RING
OR WASH TUBE
AIR / NITROGEN CONNECTION
PRESSURE SOURCE RECIRCULATION
REGULATED UP TO PUMP
50 P.S.I. (345 kPa)
AIR SUPPLY VALVE RINSE SOLUTION TANK SHUT−OFF−VALVE

5 U.S. GALS (19 LITERS)
CAPACITY WORKING PR. 50
P.S.I. (345 kPa) S / STEEL
C22126
Compressor Wash System - Schematic
Figure 701
72-00-00
Page 703
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE 701, Wash Schedule Recommendations
Environment Wash Frequency Method Remarks

Continuously salt Desalination Daily Motoring Strongly
laden recommended after
last flight of day.
Occasionally salt Desalination Weekly Motoring Strongly
laden recommended after
the last flight of
applicable day. Adjust
washing frequency to
suit engine condition.
All Performance 50 hours or Motoring Strongly
Recovery weekly recommended.
Adjust washing
frequency to suit
engine operating
conditions as
indicated by engine
condition.
A motoring wash for
light soil or multiple
motoring washes for
heavy soil
contamination is
recommended.
NOTE: Multiple motoring wash should be performed to the extent permitted by starter operating
limitations. Observe starter cooling period (Ref. Starter Manufacturer’s Manual).
B. Preparation of Cleaning Solutions
(1) Obtain a supply of demineralized water complying with the following criteria:
(a) Appearance: Free of suspended solids.
(b) Total solids: 10 ppm (mg/l) maximum.
(c) Specific conductance: 11 micro-mho/cm maximum.
(d) Silica content: 3 ppm (mg/l) maximum.
(e) Ph: 5.0 to 7.5 inclusive.
NOTE: Intake filter must not be coarser than 10-microns.
(2) Obtain a supply of drinking quality water complying with the following criteria.
(a) Appearance: free of suspended solids.
(b) Total solids: 175 ppm (mg/l) maximum.
72-00-00
Page 704
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) Ph: 6.0 to 8.0 inclusive.
(d) Chlorides: 15 ppm (mg/l) maximum.
(e) Sulphates: 10 ppm (mg/l) maximum.

PRODUCTS.
(3) Prepare cleaning solution as per the following Tables 702, 703, 704 and 705 using
one of the following cleaning agents:
NOTE: 1. Wear proper protection when using chemicals. Refer to Material Safety
Data Sheets.
NOTE: 2. Do not mix different types of cleaning solution, they may be chemically
incompatible.
NOTE: 3. For additional information regarding Consumable Materials referred to in

this section refer to CONSUMABLE MATERIALS.
(a) Mix items 1 and 2 in function of ambient temperature (Ref. Table 702).
1 Turco 4217 (concentrate) (PWC11-001F).
2 Ardrox 624 (concentrate) (PWC11-001H).
TABLE 702, Cleaning Solution Formula - Turco 4217/Ardrox 624

Ambient Above +36°F -12°F to +36°F
Temperature (+2°C) (-25°C to +2°C) Below -12°F (-25°C)
Solution (ml) 200 200 200
Kerosene (ml) 2000 2000 2000
Methanol (ml) - 1000 1800
Water (ml) 2800 1800 1000
Add 150 ml of Witco P10-59B emulsifying agent (PWC05-005) and shake mixture thoroughly
before use.
(b) Mix items 1, 2 and 3 in function of ambient temperature (Ref. Table 703).
1 Zok 27 (PWC11-003D).
2 Ardrox 6367 (Turboclean 2) (PWC11-003B)
3 Ardrox 6345 (PWC11-003).
72-00-00
Page 705
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE 703, Cleaning Solution Formula - Zok 27, Turboclean 2/Ardrox 6345
Ambient Above +41°F +23°F to 41°F +23°F to -5.8°F Below -5.8°F

Temperature (+5°C) (-5°C to +5°C) (-5°C to -21°C) (-21°C)
Solution (ml) 1000 1000 1000 1000
Methanol (ml) 0 1000 1500 2000
Water (ml) 4000 3000 2500 2000
Total (ml) 5000 5000 5000 5000
(c) The following cleaning agents do not require any pre-mixing; proceed (Ref.
Table 704).
1 Magnus 1214 (PWC11-001B).
2 B&B 3100 (PWC11-001C).
3 W.C.T. as follows: Mix 2 parts Witco emulsifier P10-59B (PWC05-005) with

4 parts Carbitrol (PWC11-001I) and 1 part Triethanolamine (PWC11-001J).
4 B&B TC 100 (PWC11-003E).
5 Almon AL-333 (PWC11-001A).
6 R-MC Premix (PWC11-001D) or

Ardrox 6368 (Turboclean 2 RTU) (PWC11-003C) (Ready-to-Use).
NOTE: 1. For ambient temperatures of +2°C (+36°F) and above, use

undiluted as received.
NOTE: 2. For ambient temperatures below +2°C (+36°F) dilute as per

Table 704.
7 CLIX (PWC11-001).
8 Turco 5884 (PWC11-001G).
TABLE 704, Preparation of Cleaning Solution
Cleaning
Agent Aviation Methanol Water
Ambient See Note 1 Kerosene (PWC11-010) See Note 2
Temperature % by Vol. % by Vol. % by Vol. % by Vol.
+36°F (+2°C) Up 25 Nil Nil 75
-12°F to +36°F (-25 to +2°C) 25 15 20 40
Below -12°F (-25°C) 25 15 40 20
NOTE: 1. Solution strength must be as per manufacturer’s/supplier’s instructions. Where no
specific instructions are given proportion of cleaning agent is as indicated.
NOTE: 2. Use of drinking quality water is permissible when performing motoring washes.
72-00-00
Page 706
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE 704, Preparation of Cleaning Solution (Cont’d)
Cleaning
Agent Aviation Methanol Water
Ambient See Note 1 Kerosene (PWC11-010) See Note 2
Temperature % by Vol. % by Vol. % by Vol. % by Vol.
NOTE: 3. If Kerosene is used, add required quantity of Witco P10-59B emulsifying agent
(PWC05-005) and shake mixture thoroughly before use (150 ml Witco P10-59B per
2000 ml Kerosene).
(4) Prepare 1.33 U.S. gallons (5.0 liters) as a cleaning solution for a motoring wash.
NOTE: A typical example of proportions to be used is shown below:

Quantity: 1.33 U.S. gals (5 liters) of solution required.
Amb. Temp: Between -12 °F to +36°F (-25°C and +2°C)
Cleaning Agent: B&B 3100
B&B 3100 25% by vol = 1250 ml in 5 liters.

Kerosene 15% by vol = 750 ml.
Methanol 20% by vol = 1000 ml.
Water 40% by vol = 2000 ml.
Total 100% = 5000 ml or 5 liters.
(a) Add 57 ml of Witco P10-59B emulsifying agent (PWC05-005) and shake

mixture thoroughly before use (based on 150 ml Witco P10-59B per 2000 ml
Kerosene ratio).
(5) Prepare 2.66 U.S. gallons (10 liters) of rinse solution for a motoring wash.
NOTE: Refer to Table 705 for water/isopropyl alcohol proportions to be used

depending on ambient temperature.
TABLE 705, Preparation of Rinse Solution
AMBIENT
AIR WATER % by ISOPROPYL ALCOHOL (PWC11-014) %
TEMPERATURE VOL. See NOTE 1 by VOL.
40° F (4.4 °C)
And Above 100 0
39 °F (3.9 °C) 95 5
36 °F (2.7 °C) 91 9
33 °F (0.6 °C) 86 14
31 °F (-0.6°C) 83 17
28 °F (-2.2 °C) 80 20
26 °F (-3.3 °C) 78 22
72-00-00
Page 707
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE 705, Preparation of Rinse Solution (Cont’d)
AMBIENT
AIR WATER % by ISOPROPYL ALCOHOL (PWC11-014) %
TEMPERATURE VOL. See NOTE 1 by VOL.
25 °F (-3.9 °C) 77 23
20 °F (-6.7 °C) 73 27
15 °F (-9.4 °C) 68 32
10 °F (-12.2 °C) 64 36
5 °F (-15 °C) 61 39
0 °F (-17.8 °C) 57 43
NOTE: 1. Use of drinking quality water is permitted when performing a rinse following a
motoring wash.
C. Motoring Wash - Desalination (Ref. Fig. 702)
CAUTION: USE OF THE CORRECT MIXTURE AS SPECIFIED IN SUBPARA. B.,

PRECEDING, IS VERY IMPORTANT, NOT ONLY WHEN THE TEMPERATURE
IS BELOW FREEZING AT THE TIME OF WASHING, BUT ALSO IF THE
TEMPERATURE IS EXPECTED TO BE LOW BETWEEN THE TIME OF
WASHING AND THE NEXT START.
(1) For Pre-SB5423 engines; disconnect P3 line (6) at gas generator case to prevent
ingress of fluid into RGB.
(2) For Post-SB5423 engines; remove cap (18) at tee fitting (13) on gas generator
case.
(3) Connect engine wash ring to supply from wash rig. Alternatively connect via
suitable hose to drinking quality water supply for ambient temperatures above +4°C
(+39°F).
(4) Fill wash tank with prepared rinse solution (Ref. Table 705).
(5) Pressurize tank at 30 to 50 psi (207 to 345 KPa) with air or nitrogen supply.
NOTE: 1. If drinking water tap is being used and pressure is less than 30 psi (207
KPa), connect through a centrifugal pump.
NOTE: 2. To prevent precipitation of deposits through the use of hard water, engine
must be allowed to cool to below 65°C (150°F). Minimum cooling period
of 40 minutes must be allowed since the engine was last operated.
72-00-00
Page 708
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: DO NOT MOTOR ENGINE FOR MORE THAN 30 SECONDS. OBSERVE

STARTER COOLING PERIOD (REF. STARTER MANUFACTURER’S
MANUAL).
(6) Ensure that ignition circuit breaker is pulled and aircraft bleed air system is OFF.
NOTE: For additional procedures for fuel shut-off valve and fuel boost pump,
refer to Aircraft Flight Manual.
(7) Disconnect flow divider/dump valve hose at each power section prior to injecting
water and water mixture. Place detached end of flow divider/dump valve hose into
suitable container for collection of water mixture.
(8) Fuel Boost Pump Switch - ON. Check fuel pressure (Ref. to the Airframe Maintenance
Manual).
(9) Motor engine and when Ng reaches 5%, inject wash mixture (or water) into engine.
(10) Stop motoring after 30 seconds.
(11) Close tank valve as soon as Ng falls to 5%.
(12) Observe starter cooling period.
(13) Disconnect engine wash ring from wash rig.
(14) Perform two consecutive dry motoring runs. Observe starter limitations (Ref. Starter
Manufacturer’s Manual).
(15) For Pre-SB5423 engines; reconnect P3 line (6) to elbow (13) and torque coupling
nut 135 to 150 lb.in. and lockwire.
(16) For Post-SB5423 engines; install cap (18) on tee fitting (13) and torque 100 to
110 lb.in. and lockwire.
(17) After starter cooling period, start engine (Ref. 71-00-00).
(18) Run the engine at flight idle to fully dry the engine.
NOTE: 1. This step is not necessary if the engine is run in the next 15 minutes.
NOTE: 2. Run the engine at idle for a minimum of five minutes with the MOT above
50°C (122 °F).
(19) Reconnect flow divider/dump valve hose at each power section after drying cycle
(Ref. Aircraft Maintenance Manual).
72-00-00
Page 709
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
17 1
16
15
2
3
4
5
14
6
12 10
11 9
13 8
7
A
REF.
PRE−SB5423
POST−SB5423
18
DETAIL A
C71372
P3 System - Wash
Figure 702
72-00-00
Page 710
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 702
1. Bolt
2. Nut
3. Bracket
4. Nut
5. Loop Clamp
6. Tube Assembly
7. Locknut
8. Reducer
9. Tube Connection
10. Loop Clamp
11. Copper Gasket
12. Locknut
13. Elbow (Pre-SB5423); Tee Fitting (Post-SB5423)
14. Tube Connection
15. Bolt
16. Clamp
17. Nut
18. Cap
D. Motoring Wash - Performance Recovery

(1) For Pre-SB5423 engines; disconnect P3 line at gas generator case to prevent
ingress of fluid into RGB.
(2) For Post-SB5423 engines; remove cap at tee fitting on gas generator case.
(3) Fill wash tanks with appropriate cleaning and rinse solutions (Ref. Subpara. B.).
Connect engine wash ring to wash rig.
(4) Pressurize tanks at 30 to 50 psi (207 to 345 KPa) with air or nitrogen supply.
NOTE: To prevent precipitation of deposits through the use of hard water, engine
must be allowed to cool to below 65°C (150°F). Minimum cooling period of
40 minutes must be allowed since the engine was last operated.
CAUTION: DO NOT MOTOR ENGINE FOR MORE THAN 30 SECONDS. OBSERVE

STARTER COOLING PERIOD (REF. STARTER MANUFACTURER’S
MANUAL).
(5) Ensure that ignition circuit breaker is pulled and aircraft bleed air system is OFF.
72-00-00
Page 711
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
suitable container for collection of water mixture.
(8) Motor engine and when Ng reaches 5%, inject cleaning solution into engine.
(10) Close tank valve as soon as Ng falls to 5%.
(11) Allow cleaning solution to soak for 15 to 30 minutes.
(12) Motor engine and when Ng reaches 5%, inject rinse solution into engine.
(14) Observe starter cooling period.
(15) Repeat steps (12) and (13).
(16) Disconnect engine wash ring from wash rig.
(18) For Pre-SB5423 engines; reconnect P3 line to elbow and torque coupling nut 135
to 150 lb.in. and lockwire.
(19) For Post-SB5423 engines; install cap on tee fitting and torque 100 to 110 lb.in. and
lockwire.
(20) After starter cooling period, start engine (Ref. 71-00-00, POWER PLANT -
ADJUSTMENT/TEST).
(21) Run the engine at flight idle to fully dry the engine.
50°C (122 °F).
72-00-00
Page 712
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
E. Compressor Turbine Wash

NOTE: 1. The proven method to decrease the possibility of sulfidation is the turbine
desalination wash with plain water. This procedure does not replace the
compressor wash and is a method to wash the compressor turbine blades.
The frequency is based on the choice of the customer and previous sulfidation
experience.
NOTE: 2. A minimum cool-down period of 40 minutes should be observed.
(1) Depending on ambient temperatures, fill wash tank with appropriate rinse solution
(Ref. Table 705).
(2) Connect compressed air supply regulated 30 to 50 psig (207 to 345 kPa) to wash
tank.
a suitable container for collection of water mixture.
(4) Remove either spark igniter from gas generator case.
(5) Install wash tube (PWC32271). Ensure arrow on wash tube tab is parallel to engine
center line and pointing to RGB (Ref. Fig. 703).
CAUTION: SUPPORT DELIVERY HOSE TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO WASH TUBE.

(6) Connect wash rig hose to wash tube.
(7) Ensure ignition and aircraft bleed air is OFF.
CAUTION: DO NOT MOTOR FOR MORE THAN 30 SECONDS, OBSERVE STARTER

COOLING PERIOD (REF. STARTER MANUFACTURER’S MANUAL).
(8) Carry out 30 second motoring run. Introduce solution at approximately 5% Ng.
CAUTION: WHEN USING WATER/METHANOL SOLUTION PERFORM ADDITIONAL

DRY MOTORING RUN TO PURGE ENGINE OF VOLATILE FUMES.
ENSURE STARTER LIMITS ARE OBSERVED.
(9) Repeat motoring run, as applicable, to remove contaminants.
(10) Disconnect wash rig, and remove wash tube from gas generator case.
(11) Fit new gaskets on spark igniter and torque 300 lb.in., loosen to zero, and retorque
300 to 360 lb.in.
72-00-00
Page 713
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2
1
3 A
RGB
VIEW A
C22196
Compressor Turbine Wash Tube Installation

Figure 703
72-00-00
Page 714
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 703
1. Spark Igniter
2. Gasket
3. Tube Spray
(13) Start engine (Ref. 71-00-00, POWER PLANT - ADJUSTMENT/TEST) and run at
idle to fully dry the engine.
50°C (122 °F).
8. Corrosion Inhibitor
A. Procedure
NOTE: To obtain full benefit of the corrosion inhibitor, remove traces of corrosion and
touch-up with epoxy enamel paint prior to applying the corrosion inhibitor.
(1) Do an external engine wash in accordance with the Engine Maintenance Manual,
Section 72-00-00, Engine-Cleaning.
(2) Do a desalination wash in accordance with the Engine Maintenance Manual,

Section 72-00-00, Engine-Cleaning.
(3) If required, do a touch-up coating as follows:
(a) Clean the surface with isopropyl alcohol (PWC11-014) or equivalent.
(b) Apply one coat of epoxy primer (PWC13-001).
(c) After 1 hour, when the epoxy primer is dry, apply one coat of epoxy enamel
(PWC05-037).
(d) You can use a heat gun to heat the surface, 140 to 160 °F (60-82 °C) for one
hour to bake the enamel coating or wait 24 hours at room temperature.
72-00-00
Page 715
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WARNING: REFER TO MANUFACTURER’S MATERIAL SAFETY DATA

SHEETS FOR INFORMATION SUCH AS; HAZARDOUS
INGREDIENTS, PHYSICAL/CHEMICAL CHARACTERISTICS,
FIRE, EXPLOSION, REACTIVITY, HEALTH HAZARD DATA,
PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFE HANDLING, USE AND CONTROL
MEASURES.
CAUTION: ALLOW ENGINE TO COOL BEFORE APPLYING THE

CORROSION INHIBITOR. IF SPRAYED ON A HOT SURFACE,
THE CARRIER SOLVENT WILL EVAPORATE RAPIDLY (FLASH
OFF) AND CAN EASILY IGNITE IF AN IGNITION SOURCE IS
PRESENT.
CAUTION: DO NOT APPLY CORROSION INHIBITOR ON CONNECTORS,

WIRING HARNESS, PROBES, RUBBER MATERIAL,
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OR HOT SECTION OF ENGINE.
1 Spray or brush on the corrosion inhibitor (PWC15-011) per the

manufacturer’s instructions on the following visible external areas:
a On the accessory gearbox housing and rear diaphragm.
b On the inlet case mating flange to the accessory gearbox rear

diaphragm.
2 Once every operational/flying day or as required, check the engine to verify

if it is still covered with the corrosion inhibitor (oily surface).
NOTE: 1. During this period, as the corrosion inhibitor starts to evaporate

or is washed away, re-apply the corrosion inhibitor as required
and determine the optimum period between applications.
NOTE: 2. Discontinue use of silicone grease (PWC09-003) when using

corrosion inhibitor (PWC15-011).
9. Fuel Nozzle In-situ Cleaning
For in-situ cleaning of nozzles, cleaning rig (PWC32677-300) is required. Prior to the wash
cycle, the cleaning rig must be prepared and operated in accordance with the Cleaning Rig
Manual.
NOTE: 1. It is recommended that this method of cleaning should only be initiated on new or
newly cleaned nozzles as the procedure will not clear previous blockages.
NOTE: 2. Introduction of contaminants may cause blockage of the fuel nozzles, power
degradation and hot section damage. Ensure that the wash and rinse solutions
are free of contaminates and that the fluid filter is routinely checked in accordance
with the Cleaning Rig Manual.
72-00-00
Page 716
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Preparation
CAUTION: TURCO 5884 (PWC11-001G) IS AN ALKALINE THAT CAN CAUSE IRRITATION

TO BARE SKIN. AVOID SKIN CONTACT.
NOTE: Alternative cleaning solutions Zok 27 (PWC11-003D) and Ardox Turboclean 2
(PWC11-003B) may also be used. Refer to Para. 7. B.(3)(b) for mixing
methods.
(1) Mixture ratios to be as follows:
(a) At ambient temperatures of 2°C (35.5°F) and above, mix by volume: 1 part
Turco 5884 (PWC11-001G) to 4 parts demineralized water.
(b) At ambient temperatures below 2°C (35.5°F), mix a 50% solution of methanol
and demineralized water, then mix 4 parts of water/methanol (by volume) to 1
part Turco 5884 (PWC11-001G).
CAUTION: BEFORE PROCEEDING FURTHER, ENSURE THAT AIR HAS BEEN

RELEASED FROM RESERVOIRS.
(2) Fill solution reservoir with appropriate volume of Turco 5884 (PWC11-001G) (Ref.
step (1)).
(3) Fill rinse reservoir with appropriate volume of demineralized water or demineralized
water/methanol mixture according to ambient temperature (Ref. step (1)).
(4) Disconnect and remove engine fuel delivery line from flow divider inlet fitting
located at 6 o’clock position on engine gas generator case (Ref. 73-10-05). Install and
torque blanking cap assembly at fuel inlet to flow divider/dump valve.
(5) Disconnect airframe drain line from flow divider/dump valve outlet fitting (elbow or
nipple) (Ref. 73-10-05).
(6) Install and connect rig fluid delivery hose to flow divider/dump valve outlet fitting
using proper adapter (0.4375-20 UNJF) (Ref. Fig. 704).
(7) Connect rig fluid delivery hose to rig quick disconnect (Location: ‘‘FUEL NOZZLE’’).
(8) Connect compressed air supply to rig.
CAUTION: DO NOT EXCEED 120 PSIG.
(9) Set wash rig reservoir pressures to 60 psig using reservoir regulator.
(10) Set pulse pressure to 70 psig using pulse regulator.
B. Cleaning Cycle
(1) Perform the in-situ nozzle wash as follows :
NOTE: The engine should be permitted to cool for a minimum of 40 minutes

following an engine shutdown before performing a fuel nozzle wash.
72-00-00
Page 717
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL FLOW DIVIDER

AND DUMP VALVE
0.4375−20 UNF (REF.)
FUEL NOZZLE CLEANING HOSE
C11071A
Typical Wash Rig Connection to Engine (Nozzle Cleaning)

Figure 704
72-00-00
Page 718
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE 706, Wash Cart Operating Schedule
VALVE POSITION
OPERATION A B C
(1) Agitate detergent solution for two minutes Agitate Agitate OFF
(2) Detergent wash for three minutes Wash Wash ON
(3) Soak for 10 minutes OFF OFF OFF
(4) Detergent wash for three minutes Wash Wash ON
(5) Soak for 10 minutes OFF OFF OFF
(6) Rinse for six minutes Rinse Rinse ON
(7) Air dry for five minutes OFF OFF Air
Dry
(8) Reduce both reservoir and pulse pressure to zero OFF OFF OFF
C. Post-cleaning Operation
(1) Upon completion of the Cleaning Cycle (Ref. Subpara.B., preceding), perform the
following steps:
(a) Disconnect and remove compressed air supply from wash rig.
(b) Disconnect and remove wash rig fluid delivery hose from flow divider/dump
valve elbow or nipple.
(c) Remove blanking cap assembly at fuel inlet to flow divider/dump valve.
(d) Reconnect fuel delivery line to flow divider/dump valve fitting (Ref. 73-10-05).
(e) Perform two consecutive dry motoring runs, if the ambient temperature is below
2°C (35.5°F) and the water/methanol solution has been utilized. Observe
starter limitations (Ref. Starter Maintenance Manual).
(f) Perform an engine ground run (Ref. applicable Aircraft Manual) and check for
leaks.
(g) Clean wash rig, stow fluid delivery hoses and bleed air pressure from
reservoirs.
72-00-00
Page 719/720
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
POWER SECTION - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General

Not Applicable
3. Special Tools

PWC30114-10 Wrench
PWC30617 Bracket
PWC30712 Adapter
PWC30713 Mount Ring Obsolete - Replaced by
PWC51139
PWC30804 Sling, Engine Obsolete - Replaced by
Assembly PWC70079
PWC30832 Sleeve
PWC30835 Stand Obsolete - Replaced by
PWC70483
PWC30836 Bracket Obsolete - No replacement
PWC32396-200 Jacking Screws
PWC34300 Stand
PWC51139 Split Ring Obsoleted - Replaced by
PWC71942
PWC70483 Stand Parking Replaces PWC30835
Support
Assembly
PWC71942 Split Ring Alternate to PWC51139
Not Applicable
72-00-01
Page 201
POWER SECTION - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES Jul 28/2014
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5. Procedure
The following procedures are written with the understanding that they are to be carried out
on an engine that has been removed from the airframe and is installed in its stand as detailed
in Chapter 72-00-00, Page Block 401.
A. Removal from Engine
NOTE: Prior to removal of power section, oil system must be completely drained.
(1) Disconnect T5 compensator lead at terminal block (Ref. Fig. 201).
(a) Remove nuts (4 and 5), disconnect and remove T5 compensator leads (16).
(b) Replace nuts (4 and 5) to retain jumper leads (2 and 3) on terminal studs.
(2) Remove T5 compensator leads and disconnect P3 tube
(a) Remove nuts and bolts securing clamps (11 and 13) to P3 tube (8).
(b) Pre-SB5516: Remove clamps and grommets (18) from lead (12). Remove nut
(25), bolt (22) and clamp (24). Remove bolts (20), nuts (23), bracket (26),
sealing plates (19) and grommet halves (21).
(c) Post-SB5516: Remove clamps and grommets (18) from lead (12). Remove nut
(25), bolt (22) and clamp (24). Remove bolts (20), nuts (23), bracket (26),
sealing plates (19) and grommet (27).
(d) Disconnect lead from compensator (6) and withdraw lead through fireseal
mount ring (10).
(e) Disconnect P3 tube (8) at coupling (9).
(3) Remove power section (Ref. Fig. 202).
(a) Disconnect Pg tube (17) at fireseal mount ring.
(b) Attach the sling (PWC30804) or (PWC71482) (1) to lifting brackets (2) on the
accessory gearbox (3) and Flange C (4).
(c) Take up weight of power section with hoist.
(d) Remove lockpin (7) from mounting bracket (19) and link (9).
(e) Using wrench (PWC30114-10), remove 23 nuts (5) securing power section to
studs (16) on reduction gearbox.
(f) Install three jacking screws (6) (PWC32396-200) at Flange A and turn in equal
increments until coupling shaft (11) and reduction gearbox input shaft splines
are separated.
(g) Remove jacking screws from Flange A.
72-00-01
Page 202
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 2 3 5
4
16
13
17 6
15 14 13
12
11 7
10
POST−SB5443 POST−SB5449
C22098A
Removal/Installation of T5 Compensator Lead
72-00-01
Page 203
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 201
1. Nut (Chromel)
2. Jumper Lead (Chromel)
3. Jumper Lead (Alumel)
4. Nut (Alumel)
5. Nut (Chromel)
6. T5 Compensator
7. Clamp
8. P3 Tube
9. P3 Tube Coupling
10. Fireseal Mount Ring
11. Loop Clamp
12. T5 Compensator Lead
13. Loop Clamp
14. Nut (Alumel)
15. Nut
16. T5 Compensator Lead
17. T5 Terminal Block
18. Clamps and Grommets
19. Sealing Plate
20. Bolt
21. Grommet Halves (Pre-SB5516)
22. Bolt
23. Nut
24. Loop Clamp
25. Nut
26. Bracket
27. Grommet (Post-SB5516)
72-00-01
Page 204
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CLAMPING CONFIGURATION
A A
18 18
24 25 25
24
26 26
19 19
23 23
12
12
22 22
27
10
20 20
21
19 19
DETAIL A DETAIL A
(PRE−SB5516) (POST−SB5516)
C212326
Removal/Installation of T5 Compensator Lead
72-00-01
Page 205
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
19 DETAIL B
18
B
1
15
16 14 2
3
12 2 4
13
21 20
DETAIL A
11 5
10 6
A
7
17
C3052A
Removal/Installation of Power Section from/to Engine

72-00-01
Page 206
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 202
1. Sling (PWC30804) or (PWC71482)

2. Lifting Adapter (PWC70386)
3. Accessory Gearbox
4. Flange C
5. Nuts
6. Jacking Screws
7. Lockpin
8. Stand
9. Link
10. Fireseal Mount Ring
11. Coupling Shaft
12. Transfer Tubes
13. Preformed Packings
14. Input Shaft Splines
16. Studs
17. Pg Tube
18. Bolts
20. Transfer Tube
22. Bolt
23. Nut
24. Clamp and Bracket
25. Nut
72-00-01
Page 207
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CENTER
FIRESEAL
FRONT
REAR C FIRESEAL
FIRESEAL
22
23
25 24
DETAIL C
C71198
Removal/Installation of Power Section from/to Engine

72-00-01
Page 208
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(h) Lift power section clear of stand (8).
(i) Remove bolt and flat washer securing transfer tube (20) to No. 3 and 4 bearing
housing support.
(j) Remove transfer tube and place tube washer and bolt in a polyethylene
envelope. Seal envelope and retain with power section.
(k) Install protective cover and input drive shaft plug on power section at Flange A.
(l) Install polyethylene sheet over reduction gearbox at Flange A and secure
with retaining ring (preformed packing (15)).
(m) Cap all open lines on reduction gearbox and power section.
(n) Remove mounting bracket (19) from accessory gearbox mounting pad.
(4) If a replacement power section is to be installed or original power section is to be

installed on a replacement reduction gearbox, proceed as follows:
(a) Remove four nuts and bolts securing T5 compensator to reduction gearbox.
(b) Remove compensator, tag for identification and retain with power section.
(c) Remove Engine Control Number Plates from center fireseal mounting bracket
locations and retain for installation of replacement power section.
(5) Install power section in maintenance stand (Ref. Subpara. B. or C.following).
B. Installation in Maintenance Stand (PWC30835) or (PWC70483) (Ref. Fig. 203)
NOTE: Protective sheet at Flange A and plug in input drive shaft must not be removed.
(1) With the power section hanged in the sling (PWC30804) or (PWC71482) (1),
install the bracket (PWC30836) (3) and attach with three bolts (4).
(2) Tighten bolts securely.
(3) Lower power section into stand (5) (PWC30835) or (PWC70483) and enter input
drive shaft (11) into center of cushioned boss (13) on mounting plate (12).
(4) Align bracket (3) with bracket (6) on stand and insert pin (7).
(5) Secure power section at Flange A to mounting plate (12) with 16 bolts (14).
NOTE: Install one washer under head of each bolt.
(6) Install washers and nuts (9) and tighten securely.
(7) Remove the sling (PWC30804) or (PWC71482) (1).
72-00-01
Page 209
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2
A 3
4
10
A
9
3 5
12 11
6
7
14
B
12
8
13
B
C3054
Installation of Power Section in Stand (PWC30835) or (PWC70483)

Figure 203
72-00-01
Page 210
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 203
1. Sling (PWC30804) or (PWC71482)

2. Mount Pad
3. Bracket
4. Bolt
5. Stand
6. Bracket
7. Pin
8. Hoist Ring
9. Nuts and Washers
10. Flange A
11. Input Drive Shaft
12. Mounting Plate
13. Cushioned Boss
14. Bolts
C. Installation in Maintenance Stand (PWC34300) (Ref. Fig. 204)
(1) Install adapter (16) (PWC30712) on stand (13) (PWC34300) and secure with six
bolts (14), nuts and washers (15).
NOTE: Ensure that both faces of adapters lie in the same vertical plane.
(2) Install mount ring (1) (PWC30713) or (PWC51139) or (PWC71942) on power

section.
(a) Remove bolts (17), cover (18) and gasket (19) from P3 boss (20) on gas
generator case.
(b) Position mount ring upper half and secure bolt assembly (5) to P3 boss (20)
with two bolts (4).
(c) Secure lower half of mount ring to upper half with lockplates (3), bolts (9) and
(d) Adjust support assemblies (6) so that all pads contact gas generator case and
mount ring is positioned symmetrically around case.
(e) Tighten locknuts (7).
(3) Lower power section into stand, aligning holes in mount ring with holes in adapters.
(4) Secure mount ring to adapters with screws and washers (11).
(5) Check that all fasteners are tight and that both indexing pins are correctly installed
at pivot. Remove sling.
72-00-01
Page 211
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2
2
4
10
5
A
7
8
1
2
9 16
B
15
14
11
A
12 17
18
19
20
VIEW B
13
C3053B
Installation of Power Section in Maintenance Stand (PWC34300)

Figure 204
72-00-01
Page 212
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 204
1. Mount Ring
2. Locating Pin
3. Lockplate
4. Bolt
5. Bolt Assembly
6. Support Assembly
7. Locknuts
8. Nut and Washer
9. Bolt
10. Sling (PWC30804) or (PWC71482)
11. Screw and Washer
12. Flange
13. Stand
14. Bolt
15. Nut and Washer
16. Adapter
17. Bolt
18. Cover
19. Gasket
20. P3 Bleed Boss
D. Removal from Maintenance Stand (PWC30835) or (PWC70483) (Ref. Fig. 203)
(1) Attach the sling (PWC30804) or (PWC71482) (1) to lifting brackets on Flange C and
the accessory gearbox and take up weight of the power section with the hoist.
(2) Remove 16 nuts and washers (9) and withdraw bolts (14) and washers.
(3) Remove pin (7) and ease stand (5) away until input drive shaft (11) clears cushioned
boss (13).
NOTE: Protective sheet at Flange A and plug in input drive shaft must not be
removed.
(4) Lift power section clear of stand.
(5) Remove bolts (4) and bracket (3) from accessory gearbox.
E. Removal from Maintenance Stand (PWC34300) (Ref. Fig. 204)
(1) Attach the sling (PWC30804) or (PWC71482) (10) to lifting brackets on Flange C
and the accessory gearbox and take up weight of the power section with the hoist.
(2) Remove screws and washers (11) securing mount ring (1) to adapters (16).
(3) Lift power section clear of stand (13).
72-00-01
Page 213
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) Slacken locknuts (7) and back off support assemblies (6) until clear of gas
generator case.
(5) Remove nuts and washers (8) and bolts (9) and separate lower half of mount ring
from upper half.
(6) Remove bolts (4) securing bolt assembly (5) to P3 boss and remove upper half of
mount ring.
(7) Install gasket (19) and cover (18) on P3 boss (20) and secure with bolts (17).
NOTE: Install stainless steel gasket (19) with ridge against P3 bleed boss.
(8) Apply initial torque of 35 to 40 lb.in., then without slackening bolts, torque 75 to
85 lb.in.
F. Installation on Engine
(1) Install power section (Ref. Fig. 202)
(a) With the power section hanged in the sling (PWC30804) or (PWC71482) (1),
remove all caps from oil and pneumatic tubes at Flange A of the power section
and the reduction gearbox.
(b) Install new preformed packings (13) on two oil transfer tubes (12) on reduction
gearbox.
(c) Install bracket (19) (PWC30617) on accessory gearbox mounting pad and
secure with bolts (18).
(d) Torque bolts (18) 225 to 250 lb.in.
(e) Loosen adjustable brackets (24) on oil pressure and scavenge tubes.
(f) Remove retaining ring and polyethylene sheets from Flange A of reduction
gearbox and power section.
(g) Remove plug from input drive shaft (11).
(h) Install new preformed packing (15) in groove in Flange A of reduction gearbox.
(i) Remove transfer tube (20), washer and bolt from envelope attached to
power section.
(j) Install preformed packings (21) on transfer tube.
(k) Install transfer tube in boss at 10 o’clock position on No. 3 and 4 bearing
housing support and secure with bolt and washer.
(l) Torque bolt 36 to 40 lb.in.
72-00-01
Page 214
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(m) Inspect spiral retaining ring installed in groove at end of each main input drive
shaft for condition and replace if distorted beyond normal outside diameter
dimensions.
(n) Apply engine oil (PWC03-001) to retaining ring and inner diameter of power
section output shaft.
(o) Check that one spiral retaining ring is installed in groove at end of each main
input drive shaft. If not, proceed as follows:
1 Push retaining ring over tapered portion of sleeve (PWC30832) to

maximum diameter end.
2 Place sleeve over splined end of drive shaft.
3 Push retaining ring into shaft groove.
(p) Lower power section and engage studs (16) on gearbox with holes in power
section flange.
CAUTION: IF RESISTANCE IS ENCOUNTERED DURING ASSEMBLY, REMOVE

POWER SECTION AND INSPECT SPIRAL RETAINING RING (REF.
STEP (1)(m))
CAUTION: TO AVOID DAMAGING COUPLING AND INPUT SHAFT SPLINES,

POWER TURBINE MUST BE ROTATED BY HAND UNTIL POWER
SECTION AND GEARBOX FLANGES ARE COMPLETELY MATED.
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES ARE NUTS ON STUDS TO BE
USED TO DRAW POWER SECTION INTO POSITION.
(q) Rotate power turbine by hand (through exhaust duct) until input shaft splines
(14) and drive shaft splines engage and power section and reduction gearbox
flanges mate.
NOTE: Ensure that the three oil transfer tubes engage correctly in their
respective bosses.
(r) Install 23 nuts (5) on studs (16).
(s) Torque nuts in a diametrically opposed sequence 75 to 85 lb.in., using wrench

(PWC30114-10).
(t) Install lockpin (7) through bracket (19) and link (9).
(u) Remove the sling (PWC30804) or (PWC71482) (1).
(v) Connect Pg pressure tube (17), torque coupling nut 90 to 100 lb.in. and
lockwire.
(w) Torque bolts (22) and nuts (25) on bracket (24) 36 to 40 lb. in.
72-00-01
Page 215
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Connect P3 tube and install T5 compensator lead (Ref. Fig 201).
NOTE: If a replacement power section is being installed or original power section

is being installed on a replacement reduction gearbox, install T5
compensator.
(a) Connect P3 tube at coupling (9).
(b) Torque coupling nut 90 to 100 lb.in. and lockwire.
(c) Insert T5 compensator lead (12) through aperture in fireseal mount ring (10)
from reduction gearbox side.
(d) Connect lead to T5 compensator (6).
(e) Tighten connector fingertight and lockwire.
(f) Pre-SB5516: Install grommet halves (21), sealing plates (19), bracket (26), bolt
(20) and nuts (23). Torque 7 to 8 lb.in.
(g) Post-SB5516: Install grommet (27), sealing plates (19), bracket (26), bolt (20)
and nuts (23). Torque 7 to 8 lb.in.
(h) Install clamp (24) on lead (12) and secure with bolt (22) and nut (25). Torque
32 to 36 lb.in.
(3) Installation of T5 compensator leads at terminal block (Ref. Fig. 201).
CAUTION: ENSURE THAT LEAD TERMINALS DO NOT CONTACT ANY PORTION

OF THE TERMINAL BLOCK SHIELD OR GAS GENERATOR CASE
AFTER TIGHTENING.
(a) Remove nuts (5 and 4). Ensure jumper leads (2 and 3) remain on terminal
studs.
(b) Install T5 compensator leads (16), secure with nuts (4 and 5). Torque nut (5)
20 to 22 lb.in. and nut (4) 32 to 36 lb.in.
(4) Install T5 compensator lead (12) and P3 tube.
(a) Install clamps (11 and 13) on lead and tube, secure with nuts and bolts. Torque
nuts 32 to 36 lb.in.
NOTE: If a replacement power section has been installed, secure Engine

Control Number Plates to center fireseal upper mounting brackets.
72-00-01
Page 216
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER CHAPTER
LEP 1 Nov 23/2015 229 Nov 23/2015
2 blank Nov 23/2015 230 Nov 23/2015
231 Nov 23/2015
Contents 1 Nov 23/2015 232 Nov 23/2015
2 Nov 23/2015 233 Nov 23/2015
234 Nov 23/2015
72-10-00 1 Mar 22/2002 235 Nov 23/2015
Description and 2 Mar 22/2002 236 Nov 23/2015
Operation 3 Mar 22/2002 237 Nov 23/2015
4 Mar 22/2002 238 Nov 23/2015
5 Mar 22/2002 239 Nov 23/2015
6 blank Mar 22/2002 240 Nov 23/2015
72-10-00 201 Nov 23/2015

Maintenance 202 Nov 23/2015
Practices 203 Nov 23/2015
204 Nov 23/2015
205 Nov 23/2015
206 Nov 23/2015
207 Nov 23/2015
208 Nov 23/2015
209 Nov 23/2015
210 Nov 23/2015
211 Nov 23/2015
212 Nov 23/2015
213 Nov 23/2015
214 Nov 23/2015
215 Nov 23/2015
216 Nov 23/2015
217 Nov 23/2015
218 Nov 23/2015
219 Nov 23/2015
220 Nov 23/2015
221 Nov 23/2015
222 Nov 23/2015
223 Nov 23/2015
224 Nov 23/2015
225 Nov 23/2015
226 Nov 23/2015
227 Nov 23/2015
228 Nov 23/2015

Page 1/2
72-10 LEP Nov 23/2015
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
REDUCTION GEARBOX - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION 72-10-00
1. General 1
2. Description 1
A. Housing and Covers 1
B. Input Section Geartrain and Bearings 1
C. Output Section 3
3. Operation 3
A. Sprag Clutch 3
B. Torquemeter 3
REDUCTION GEARBOX - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES 72-10-00
1. General 201

5. Removal/Installation 202
A. RGB - Removal 202
B. RGB - Installation 203
C. Torquemeter - Removal 205
D. Torquemeter - Installation 213

E. No. 8 Bearing Keywasher - Removal 221
F. No. 8 Bearing Keywasher - Installation 221
G. Blower Drive Seal - Removal 221
H. Blower Drive Seal - Installation 223
I. Output Shaft Face-type Seal - Removal 223
J. Output Shaft Face-type Seal - Installation 223

K. Output Shaft Seal Runner - Removal 225

Page 1
72-10 CONTENTS Nov 23/2015
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
REDUCTION GEARBOX - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES (Cont’d) 72-10-00
L. Output Shaft Seal Runner - Installation 225
M. Reduction Gearbox Oil Pressure Relief Valve - Removal 227
N. Reduction Gearbox Oil Pressure Relief Valve - Installation 229
O. P3 Air Metering Tees- Removal 229
P. P3 Air Metering Tees - Installation 231

Q. Nf Governor Drive Shaft Oil Seal - Removal 231
R. Nf Governor Drive Shaft Oil Seal - Installation 233
6. Inspection/Check 233
A. Output Shaft Face-type Seal 233
B. P3 Air Metering Tees 235

7. ‘‘Keensert’’ Insert Replacement Procedure 235
A. Removal 235
B. Installation 237

Page 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
REDUCTION GEARBOX - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General
The reduction gearbox basically comprises input section, containing a three-stage reduction
geartrain and an output section which contains the engine output shaft. In operation,
rotation of each power turbine shaft is transmitted, through the input section geartrains, to
the output section shaft at a reduction ratio of 5:1.
2. Description (Ref. Fig. 1)
A. Housing and Covers
The gearbox casings comprise five castings; an output housing, a diaphragm, an input
housing and two covers. The output housing is secured to each power section at Flange A.
Input and output housings are secured together by means of studs with the diaphragm
installed between them. The covers are secured to the input housing to provide accessory
mounting pads and protect reduction gearshaft bearings.
B. Input Section Geartrain and Bearings
Each input section reduction geartrain consists of three gearshafts driving a common
output shaft. Accessory drives for Nf governor, tachometer-generator and blower are taken
from the second-stage of each reduction geartrain. The input shaft carries a single
spur gear and is supported by No.5 and No.6 bearings. No.5 bearing is a duplex ball
bearing mounted on the diaphragm. No.6 bearing is a roller bearing mounted on the input
housing. The first stage spur gear on the input shaft meshes with the larger of two
spur gears on the second-stage shaft which is supported by No.7 and No.8 bearings.
No.7 bearing is a roller bearing mounted on the diaphragm. No. 8 bearing is a duplex ball
bearing mounted on the input housing. The larger spur gear on the second-stage
shaft transmits drive to an independently mounted clutch gear on the third-stage shaft.
The second-stage spur gear transmits drive to a blower shaft via an idler gear. This
second-stage gear also drives the power turbine governor shaft via the gear on the
tachmometer generator shaft. The idler gear and blower shaft are mounted in roller
bearings. The tachometer-generator and governor shafts are supported in journal
bearings.
The clutch gear is supported by No.10 1/2 and 12 1/2 roller bearings which are mounted
on the input housing and diaphragm respectively. A sprag clutch, housed in the clutch
gear, transmits drive from this gear to the clutch drive shaft. The clutch drive shaft is
supported in the clutch gear by No.11 and No.12 ball bearings. An intermediate drive
shaft, splined within the clutch drive shaft is secured against a shoulder of the shaft by a
nut and keywasher at the torquemeter end.
A helical gear supported by No.13 and No.14 roller bearings, which are mounted on the
diaphragm and output housing respectively, is splined onto the intermediate drive
shaft and secured by spiral retaining rings in slots within the gear.
72-10-00
Page 1
REDUCTION GEARBOX - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION Mar 22/2002
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DIAPHRAGM
OUTPUT
HOUSING
RGB OIL SYSTEM
OIL PUMP
OUTPUT
15 SHAFT
CLUTCH GEAR
SPRAG CLUTCH 16 17
_1
10
TORQUEMETER 2
10 _1
PISTON COVER 12 3RD STAGE
2 HELICAL GEAR
TORQUEMETER 14
VALVE
11 12 13 RETAINING RINGS
BLOWER
DRIVE PAD
INTERMEDIATE
DRIVE SHAFT
TORQUEMETER CLUTCH DRIVE

VALVE SLEEVE SHAFT
IDLER GEAR
8 7
TACHO−GENERATOR 5
6
CLUTCH GEAR
2ND STAGE GEAR
1ST STAGE GEAR

OUTPUT SHAFT INPUT SHAFT
3RD STAGE HELICAL GEAR

CLUTCH GEAR SHAFT
2ND STAGE GEAR BEARING NUMBERS
BLOWER 1ST STAGE GEAR
SHAFT INPUT SHAFT
IDLER GEAR TACHO−GENERATOR
GOVERNOR SHAFT SHAFT
C22082
Reduction Gearbox - Component Location

Figure 1
72-10-00
Page 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Output Section
The output shaft is supported by No.15 roller bearing which is mounted in the diaphragm
and No.16 roller bearing and No.17 ball bearing which are mounted in the ouput
housing. The shaft has a single helically-toothed spur gear which meshes with the
third-stage gear in the input section. An insert in the ouput shaft extends into the input
housing to drive the reduction gearbox oil system pump.
NOTE: Reduction gearbox oil system component description and operation is covered
in Chapter 79-00-00.
3. Operation
A. Sprag Clutch (Ref. Fig. 2)
Under normal operating conditions, i.e., when the clutch gear (outer race) is driven by
the engine, the clutch sprags are engaged. The center of gravity of each sprag is arranged
in relation to the centers of curvature so that under rotational movement the sprags tilt
towards the upright position and engage the inner race (shaft) and outer race (clutch gear).
In the event of failure of one power section the clutch drive shaft of that section
assumes a driving instead of driven mode. This action allows the sprags to tilt in the
opposite direction leaving the clutch and the clutch gear (outer race) free.
B. Torquemeter (Ref. Fig. 3)
As the helical gear on the clutch gear shaft is in direct contact with the output shaft
gear, changes in engine torque are translated into axial movement of the helical gear,
the intermediate drive shaft, the clutch drive shaft and the torquemeter piston. A
torquemeter valve on the piston cover moves within a sleeve to produce a change in the
oil presusresignal to the torque control unit and the airframe instruments.
NOTE: Torquemeter operation in the engine torque indicating system is detailed in

Chapter 77-00-00.
72-10-00
Page 3
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SPRAG CLUTCH
ASSEMBLY CLUTCH GEAR
CLUTCH GEAR
CLUTCH GEAR (FREE)
PAWLS (DRIVING
SPRING
CLUTCH SHAFT (DRIVEN) CLUTCH SHAFT (OVERRUNNING)
CLUTCH ENGAGED CLUTCH DISENGAGED

A A
C3013B
Sprag Clutch Operation

Figure 2
72-10-00 Page 4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CLUTCH DRIVE SHAFT
TORQUEMETER PISTON
TORQUEMETER VALVE
TORQUEMETER VALVE
SLEEVE
3RD STAGE HELICAL GEAR

SPRAG CLUTCH CLUTCH GEAR
CONSTANT POWER
POWER INCREASED
C3014
Torquemeter Operation
Figure 3
72-10-00 Page 5/6

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
REDUCTION GEARBOX - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General
A. Personnel involved in maintenance practices should refer to 70-00-00, STANDARD

PRACTICES to familiarize themselves with general procedures.
Item No. Name

PWC03-001 Engine Oil
3. Special Tools

PWC30046-57 Knocker Puller, Seal
PWC30046-70 Puller, Seal Carrier Alternate to PWC51063
PWC30075 Drift, Oil Seal Carrier
PWC30618 Mounting Bracket
PWC30619 Mounting Bracket
PWC30631 Puller
PWC30633 Socket,
PWC30646 Puller, Carrier Obsolete - Replaced by
PWC51261
PWC30721 Stand, Engine Obsolete - Replaced by
Assembly PWC70780
PWC30810 Rev. E Pusher/Puller
PWC30832 Sleeve
PWC30840 Ring
PWC30871 Puller
PWC30875 Pusher
PWC32820 Drift
PWC32828 Wrench
PWC32859 Socket
PWC37088-1 Drift, Seal
PWC50024 Gage, Seal Runner
PWC50054 Socket Nut
PWC50055 Adapter Nut
72-10-00
Page 201
REDUCTION GEARBOX - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES Nov 23/2015
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PWC50495 Crimper
PWC50496 Unstaking Tool, Obsolete - Replaced by
Cupwasher PWC51891
PWC50497 Staking Tool, Obsolete - Replaced by
Cupwasher PWC51895
PWC50777 Retainer
PWC50778 Drift
PWC50779 Puller
PWC51063 Puller, Piston Obsolete - Replaced by
PWC30046-70
PWC51261 Puller, Cover Alternate to PWC30646
Assembly
PWC51891 Unstaking Tool, Alternate to PWC50496
Cupwasher
PWC51895 Staking Tool, Alternate to PWC50497
Cupwasher
PWC70249 Sling
PWC70780 Stand, Engine Alternate to PWC30721
Assembly
Name Remarks
TD1032L Locking Tool (Keensert)
5. Removal/Installation
A. RGB - Removal (Ref. Fig. 201)
NOTE: The following procedure is written with the understanding that it is to be carried
out on an engine that has been removed from the airframe and is installed in
its stand as detailed in 72-00-00, ENGINE - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.
(1) Remove both power sections (Ref. 72-00-01, POWER SECTION - MAINTENANCE
PRACTICES).
(2) Attach sling (PWC70249) to lifting bracket (2) and take up weight of gearbox.
(3) Remove nuts (9) from tachometer mounting studs (10).
(4) Swing support and bracket assembly (5) downwards.
(5) Remove ball-lockpins (4) from mounting brackets (3 and 8).
(6) Lift gearbox clear of stand and lower onto a suitable flat surface.
72-10-00
Page 202
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(7) Remove bolts (7) and brackets (3 and 8).
(8) Remove sling.
B. RGB - Installation
NOTE: The following procedure is written with the understanding that it is to be carried
out on an engine that has been removed from the airframe and is installed in
its stand as detailed in 72-00-00, Page Block 401.
(1) Position mounting brackets (3 and 8) (PWC30619 and PWC30618) on gearbox and
secure each bracket with bolts (7).
(2) Torque bolts (7) 225 to 300 lb.in.
(3) Connect sling (PWC70249) to lifting brackets (2).
(4) Raise gearbox and position above stand (PWC30721) or (PWC70780).
(5) Lower gearbox into stand, aligning brackets (3 and 8) with brackets on stand.
(6) Install ball-lockpins (4) through brackets.
(7) Swing support and bracket assemblies (5) upwards to engage on tachometer
mounting studs (10).
(8) Secure support and bracket assemblies to mounting stud with nuts (9).
(9) Torque nuts (9) 65 to 75 lb.in.
(10) Remove sling.
(11) Remove polyethylene sheets and retaining rings from power section mounting faces
on gearbox.
(12) Check that one spiral retaining ring is installed in groove at end of each main input
drive shaft. If not, proceed as follows:
(a) Push retaining ring over tapered portion of sleeve (PWC30832) to maximum
diameter end.
(b) Place sleeve over splined end of drive shaft.
(c) Push retaining ring into shaft groove.
(13) Install power sections (Ref. 72-00-01).
72-10-00
Page 203
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9
10 A
5
DETAIL A
8
3
4
4
5
7 7
PWC
C3055A
Reduction Gearbox - Removal/Installation

Figure 201
72-10-00
Page 204
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 201
1. Sling
2. Lifting Brackets
3. Bracket
4. Ball-lockpin
5. Support and Bracket Assembly
6. Stand
7. Bolts
8. Bracket
9. Nuts
10. Tachometer Mounting Studs
C. Torquemeter - Removal
CAUTION: SINCE REDUCTION GEARBOX COMPONENTS ARE INVOLVED IN

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION PROCEDURES, CARE MUST BE EXERCISED
TO PREVENT ANY CONTAMINATION OF THESE VERY SENSITIVE AND
DELICATE PARTS. THE REDUCTION GEARBOX SHALL BE OPENED IN A
CONTROLLED AREA. CLEAN LINT-FREE GLOVES SHALL BE WORN TO
PREVENT SCRATCHING OF COMPONENTS DURING HANDLING. ANY
DIRT OR METAL CONTAMINATION WILL CAUSE A PROBLEM. BEARING
SKIDDING, WEAR AND CORROSION ARE IN MANY INSTANCES
ATTRIBUTED TO CONTAMINATION.
NOTE: If torquemeter disassembly is necessary in order to determine the cause of

torquemeter system malfunction, proceed as detailed in the following paragraphs.
If at any stage of disassembly the cause of the malfunction is evident, further
disassembly beyond that point will not be required.
(1) Prepare for Removal of Covers (Ref. Fig. 202)
(a) Disconnect oil cooler return lines (7 and 11), catch oil drainage and cap both
lines.
(b) Disconnect torquemeter transmitter lines at torquemeter pressure port (9) and
cap.
(c) Disconnect and remove Pg tubes (1 and 6) from Nf governor and cross
coupling. Blank off connections and tag tubes.
(d) Disconnect torque control tubes (3 and 4) and blank off connections.
(e) Remove Pg accumulator clamps (2 and 5) from covers.
(f) Disconnect Nf tachometer cannon plugs (8 and 10) and cap connectors.
(2) Remove Cover Assembly (Ref. Fig. 203)
(a) Remove nuts (1) and washers (2) securing mounting bracket (7), anti-rotation
bracket (10), brackets (11 and 12) and cover assembly (3) to input housing.
72-10-00
Page 205
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 2 3 4 5 6
9 8
11 10 7
C74827
Reduction Gearbox - Access for Cover Removal

Figure 202
72-10-00
Page 206
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 202
1. Pg Tube
2. Pg Sealing Cap
3. Torque Control Tube
4. Torque Control Tube
5. Pg Sealing Cap
6. Pg Tube
7. Oil Cooler Return
8. Nf Tachometer Plug
9. Torquemeter Transmitters
10. Nf Tachometer Plug
11. Oil Cooler Return
(b) Withdraw brackets from cover assembly.
(c) Carefully withdraw cover assembly from input housing studs and place on
workbench, suitably supported.
(d) Remove and discard preformed packings (8 and 9).
(e) Remove transfer tube (6). Discard preformed packings (5).
(3) Remove Torquemeter Valve Sleeve (Ref. Fig. 204)
(a) Unlock keywasher (1) and remove bolt (2) and keywasher.
(b) Fill valve sleeve (3) bore to approximately one-third level with clean oil.
(c) Install drift (PWC32820) in valve sleeve and lightly tap drift with soft hammer.
Valve sleeve will be pushed out by oil pressure.
(d) Remove preformed packings (4) from sleeve.
(e) Remove spacer (7).
(4) Remove Torquemeter Assembly
(a) Remove piston cover (Ref. Fig. 205.)
1 Remove retaining ring (2).
2 Remove the piston cover (3) and the torquemeter valve (1) using one of
the following methods:
a By hand: Withdraw piston cover (3), pulling rearward using torquemeter

valve (1). Remove torquemeter valve (1) from piston cover (3).
Remove and discard preformed packing (4).
72-10-00
Page 207
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
11
9
8
10
11 A
2
12 1 7
12
VIEW A
C75788
Cover Assembly - Removal/Installation

72-10-00
Page 208
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 203
1. Locknut
2. Washer
3. Cover Assembly
4. Input Housing
5. Diaphragm
6. Output Housing
7. Mounting Bracket
10. Breather Nipple Anti-rotation Bracket
11. Bracket
12. Bracket
72-10-00
Page 209
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9 8 10
5
11
12
B
11
1
7 2 3
12
VIEW B
C75789
Cover Assembly - Removal/Installation

72-10-00
Page 210
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
b Using a puller: Remove torquemeter valve (1) from piston cover (3).
Remove and discard preformed packing (4). Withdraw piston cover (3)
using puller (PWC51063) or (PWC30046-70).
(b) Remove No. 10 bearing retaining nut (Ref. Fig. 206).
1 Install adapter nut (PWC50055) (4) on output shaft spline (6).
NOTE: For installed RGB, use airframe tool to hold driveshaft coupling
(Ref. Airframe Maintenance Manual)
2 Unlock keywasher (18, Fig. 210). Remove nut (17) and keywasher (18).
Discard keywasher.
3 Tighten nut on unstaking tool (PWC50496) or (PWC51891) to expand and

unlock keywasher (3, Fig. 206).
4 Prevent clutch shaft rotation by holding adapter nut (4), remove retaining
nut (2) using socket (PWC30633) (1) and remove keywasher (3).
NOTE: Retain old keywasher to use as slave washer during installation

procedure.
(c) Remove grooved half bearing inner race (Ref. Fig. 207).
1 Using puller (PWC30631) (1) withdraw grooved half inner race (2) from
clutch driveshaft (4).
2 Install bearing retainer (PWC50777) into No. 10 bearing and cage (8, Fig.
210).
NOTE: Retainer (PWC50777) will ensure balls remain in bearing outer

race (10).
(d) Remove and disassemble torquemeter assembly (Ref. Fig. 205).
1 Remove torquemeter cylinder (9) complete with piston (12) and bearing
outer race and cage.
2 Remove torquemeter cylinder.
3 Remove and discard preformed packings (8 and 10).
4 Remove retainer (PWC50777) and No. 10 bearing and cage assembly.
5 Using ring (PWC30840) as a support for prying action, remove retaining ring
(14).
6 Withdraw piston (12), complete with bearing outer race, from cylinder (9).
7 Remove and discard piston ring (11) and preformed packings (13) (‘‘Vee’’
seals).
72-10-00
Page 211
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4
7
3
1
2
5
C6247B
Torquemeter Valve Sleeve Removal

Figure 204
72-10-00
Page 212
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 204
1. Keywasher
2. Bolt
3. Valve Sleeve
6. Transfer Tube
7. Spacer
D. Torquemeter - Installation
(1) Install Torquemeter Assembly.
(a) Assemble torquemeter cylinder and piston (Ref. Fig. 208).
1 Install two new preformed packings (5) opposed as shown (Ref. View A),
and piston ring (4) on torquemeter piston (3).
2 Insert piston assembly, complete with outer race (2), into cylinder (1) and
install retaining ring (6).
3 Place cylinder flanged end down on bench and position piston at top of
cylinder.
4 Apply a 3.5 lb. load on piston (3) and check piston movement by tapping
bench and noting that piston moves downward, full travel. If piston sticks,
replace preformed packings (5) or piston ring (4) or both.
NOTE: Figure 209 illustrates load check.
(b) Install bearing cage and balls assembly and preformed packing (Ref. Fig.
210).
1 Install preformed packings (9 and 12) in outer grooves of torquemeter

cylinder.
2 Insert No. 10 bearing and cage (8) in outer race (10), ensuring serial
numbers match and are both visible on the same side.
3 Install bearing retainer (PWC50777) into No. 10 bearing and cage (8, Fig.
210).
(c) Install torquemeter assembly (Ref. Fig. 210).
1 Install torquemeter assembly (13) over clutch shaft (14) and ease into
position with cylinder locating hole engaging dowel (15) on input housing. If
required seat housing using soft faced hammer.
2 Remove bearing retainer (PWC50777).
72-10-00
Page 213
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
10
7
8 11 9
2
3
1
16
15
5
6
12 13
14
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
15
14
13
12
11
10
8 9
C3227
Torquemeter Disassembly
Figure 205
72-10-00
Page 214
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 205
1. Torquemeter Valve
2. Spiral Retaining Ring
3. Torquemeter Piston Cover
5. Bearing Retaining Nut
6. Keywasher
7. No. 10 Ball Bearing
8. Preformed Packing - Small
9. Torquemeter Cylinder
10. Preformed Packing - Large
11. Piston Ring
12. Torquemeter Piston
14. Spiral Retaining Ring Piston
15. Clutch Drive Shaft
16. Bearing Grooved Half Inner Race
(d) Install No. 10 grooved half inner race (Ref. Fig. 210).
NOTE: Once drift (PWC50778) is placed on No. 10 bearing inner race, the
‘‘x’’ mark is no longer visible. It is recommended that a witness mark
is scribed on drift and that this mark is aligned with ‘‘x’’ mark on No. 10
bearing inner race.
1 Install No. 10 bearing grooved inner race (7) on drift (PWC50778) and
place in oil tank at 121 °C (250°F).
2 Check that washer (19) is located on key of shaft.
3 Disassemble Pusher (PWC30875).
NOTE: Pusher (PWC30875) has 4 items: screw, sleeve, washer and nut.
4 Install screw (only) of pusher (PWC30875) onto threaded end of intermediate

drive shaft (20).
5 Remove inner race (7) and drift (PWC50778) from oil and install grooved
half of No. 10 bearing inner race (7) and align X-marks to within 5
degrees. Remove drift (PWC50778).
6 Re-assemble Pusher (PWC30875).
7 Place sleeve over screw already installed on shaft (20) and attach washer
and nut. Tighten nut until resistance is felt. Remove pusher (PWC30875).
8 Apply oil to keywasher and nut mating surfaces and install slave keywasher
(6) and retaining nut (5).
72-10-00
Page 215
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 2
5 4
A
3
2 6
1
VIEW B
VIEW A 4
C3228
No. 10 Bearing Retaining Nut - Removal

Figure 206
72-10-00
Page 216
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 206
1. Socket
2. No. 10 Bearing Retaining Nut
3. Retaining Nut Keywasher
4. Adapter Nut
5. Output Shaft
6. Output Shaft Spline
9 Clamp output shaft (5, Fig. 206) with adapter nut (4) (PWC50055).
NOTE: If RGB is installed use airframe tool to hold driveshaft coupling (Ref.
Airframe Maintenance Manual).
10 Using socket (PWC30633) seat inner race (7, Fig. 210) by tightening
retaining nut (5) and torque 640 to 855 lb.in., slacken to zero lb.in. Remove
nut (5) and slave keywasher (6). Install new keywasher (6), nut (5) and
torque 385 to 515 lb.in.
11 Lock keywasher (6) with crimper (PWC50497) or (PWC51895).
12 Install new keywasher (18) and nut (17). Torque nut (17) 275 to 300 lb.in.
using conventional socket while holding output shaft with adapter nut
(PWC50055) (4, Fig. 206).
13 Crimp keywasher (18, Fig. 210) onto nut (17) using crimper (PWC50495).
(e) Install Piston Cover Assembly (Ref. Fig. 210)
1 Install preformed packing (4) on piston cover (3) and install cover in
torquemeter assembly (13). Secure with retaining ring (2).
NOTE: Output shaft maybe rotated to align cylinder and piston slots.
2 Install torquemeter valve (1) in cover slot.
(2) Install torqemeter valve sleeve (Ref. Fig. 204)
(a) Install new preformed packings (4) on torquemeter sleeve (3).
(b) Install spacer (7).
(c) Install sleeve assembly in cover.
(d) Secure sleeve with keywasher (1) and bolt (2).
(e) Torque bolt 36 to 40 lb.in. and lock keywasher.
(3) Install Cover Assembly
(a) Install oil transfer tube (Ref. Fig. 204).
72-10-00
Page 217
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C3229
Bearing Inner Race - Removal

Figure 207
72-10-00
Page 218
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 207
1. Puller (PWC30631)
2. Grooved Half Inner Race
4. Clutch Driveshaft
1 Install new preformed packings (5) on tube (6).
2 Carefully insert tube assembly into input housing boss.
(b) Install cover assembly (Ref. Fig. 203)
NOTE: While installing cover, ensure gears are fully meshed by slowly
rotating output shaft during installation. If resistance is felt remove
cover, inspect and re-install.
1 Install new preformed packings (8 and 9).
2 Install cover assembly (3) on input housing studs.
3 Install mounting bracket (7), anti-rotation bracket (10) and brackets (11
and 12).
4 Secure cover to input housing with nuts (1) and washers (2). Install Pg cap
clamps (2 and 5) on brackets and secure with bolt and nut.
5 Torque nuts 32 to 36 lb.in.
(4) Install Externals (Ref. Fig. 202)
(a) Remove caps and connect Nf tachometer cannon plugs (8 and 10).
(b) Remove blanking caps and install torque control oil tubes (3 and 4). Torque
fittings 90 to 100 lb.in.
(c) Remove blanking plugs and install Pg tubes (1) between Nf governors and
cross-couplings. Torque fittings 90 to 100 lb.in.
(d) Remove blanking caps and connect lines to torque transmitter (9). Tighten
(Ref. Aircraft Manual).
(e) Remove blanking caps and connect oil cooler return lines (7) and (11) to
gearbox. Torque connections (Ref. Aircraft Manual).
(f) Wirelock all connections as required.
72-10-00
Page 219
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 3 4
A 3
5 6
VIEW A
C3354C
Torquemeter Assembly
Figure 208
72-10-00
Page 220
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 208
2. No. 10 Ball Bearing Outer Race
3. Torquemeter Piston
4. Piston Ring
6. Spiral Retaining Ring
E. No. 8 Bearing Keywasher - Removal (Ref. Fig. 211)
NOTE: In the event of No.8 bearing keywasher failure, replacement may be

accomplished at Maintenance level provided that pieces of the keywasher
have not fallen through any of the reduction gears. If gear contamination and/or
damage is evident, the gearbox must be shipped to an approved overhaul
facility.
(1) Remove reduction gearbox cover (Ref. Para. 5.A.).
(2) Remove retaining ring (1).
(3) Withdraw keywasher (2).
(4) Remove retaining nut (3) using wrench (PWC32828) over nut in conjunction with
socket (PWC32859) over idler gearshaft (4).
F. No. 8 Bearing Keywasher - Installation (Ref. Fig. 211)
(1) Install plain nut (3) on idler drive gearshaft (4).
(2) Install socket (PWC32859) to prevent gearshaft rotation when tightening.
(3) Using wrench (PWC32828), torque retaining nut (3) 1750 to 2000 lb.in., slacken to
zero and retorque 1500 to 1750 lb.in.
(4) Install keywasher (2) into nut, ensuring that washer tang fits into one of four slots
provided in the gearshaft.
(5) Install retaining ring (1).
(6) Install reduction gearbox cover (Ref. Para. 5.B.).
(7) Flush oil system to remove any possible contamination.
G. Blower Drive Seal - Removal (Ref. Fig. 212)
(1) Remove oil cooler blower.
(3) Remove seal carrier (2) using puller (PWC30646) or (PWC51261).
72-10-00
Page 221
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3.5 LBS. 1
LOAD
C3355B
Torquemeter Piston Loading

Figure 209
72-10-00
Page 222
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 209
1. Load (3.5 lbs)

2. Piston
3. Cylinder
(4) Remove preformed packing (3) and seal (4) from carrier.
H. Blower Drive Seal - Installation (Ref. Fig. 212)
NOTE: Prior to installation, seal (4) must be lubricated with engine oil (PWC03-001).
(1) Gently press seal (4) into carrier (2).
(2) Install new preformed packing (3) on carrier.
(3) Install carrier.
(5) Install oil cooler blower.
I. Output Shaft Face-type Seal - Removal (Ref. Fig. 213)
(1) Remove bolts and washers (1) and withdraw drain cover (2) and gasket (3).
(2) Remove seal carrier (4).
(3) Separate seal (6) from carrier using pusher/puller (PWC30810) Rev. E or subsequent.
NOTE: To obtain tool Rev. E, refer to TSB PT-331.
(4) If necessary, inspect seal as detailed in Paragraph following.
J. Output Shaft Face-type Seal - Installation (Ref. Fig. 213)
NOTE: Prior to installation of replacement seal, check that seal runner (8) is square
within 0.0004 in. using a dial indicator or seal runner gage (PWC50024). If out
of limits, replace seal runner (Ref. Para. 5.K. and L.).
(1) Lubricate seal (6) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and ensure that carbon seal moves
in and out freely against spring.
(2) Install seal in carrier (4) using pusher/puller (PWC30810) Rev. E or subsequent.
NOTE: To obtain tool Rev. E, refer to TSB PT-331.
(3) Install new preformed packing (5) on carrier.
(4) Position carrier over output shaft (7) and press into gearbox housing.
(5) Install gasket (3) and drain cover (2).
72-10-00
Page 223
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
MATING NUMBER
X MARKS TO ALIGN WITHIN 5°
15
16
14
13 12 19
18
17
11
10
9
20
C6248B
Torquemeter Installation
Figure 210
72-10-00
Page 224
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 210
1. Torquemeter Valve
2. Cover Retaining Ring
3. Torquemeter Piston Cover
5. Bearing Retaining Nut
6. Keywasher
7. No. 10 Bearing Grooved Half Inner Race
8. No. 10 Bearing and Cage
10. No. 10 Bearing Outer Race
13. Torquemeter Assembly
14. Clutch Shaft
15. Dowel
16. No. 10 Plain Bearing Inner Race
17. Nut
18. Keywasher
19. Washer
20. Intermediate Drive Shaft
(6) Install bolts and washers (1), torque 32 to 36 lb.in. and lockwire in pairs.
K. Output Shaft Seal Runner - Removal (Ref. Fig. 214)
(1) Remove output shaft face-type seal.
(2) Using suitable punch, unlock keywasher (6).
(3) Position wrench assembly on output shaft, align dogs (8) on socket nut (PWC50054)
(2) with slots (9) in plain nut (5) and tighten screw (4).
NOTE: Ensure that dogs engage in slots.
(4) Hold adapter nut (PWC50055) (3) steady and apply torque to socket assembly (2)
in direction shown.
(5) When plain nut (5) is loose, remove wrench assembly.
(6) Remove nut (5), keywasher (6), seal runner (7) and preformed packing (10).
L. Output Shaft Seal Runner - Installation (Ref. Fig. 214)
(1) Install new preformed packing (10), seal runner (7), new keywasher (6) and plain
nut (5) on output shaft.
72-10-00
Page 225
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NO.8 BEARING
NO.8 BEARING
REDUCTION GEARBOX CASING
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
REDUCTION GEARBOX
WITH COVERS REMOVED
C22117A
No. 8 Bearing Keywasher - Removal/Installation

Figure 211
72-10-00
Page 226
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 211
1. Retaining Ring
2. Keywasher
3. Nut
4. Idler Gearshaft
(2) Tighten nut (5) fingertight.
(3) Position wrench assembly on output shaft, align dogs (8) on socket nut (PWC50054)
(2) with slots (9) in nut (5) and tighten screw (4).
NOTE: Ensure that dogs engage in slots.
(4) Hold adapter nut (PWC50055) (3) steady and torque nut (5) 1225 to 1540 lb.in.
(5) Slacken nut (5) to zero and final torque 1200 to 1300 lb.in.
(6) Using dial indicator or seal runner gage (PWC50024), check that seal runner is
square within 0.0004 in.
NOTE: If runner is not square within the above limit, slacken nut (5), rotate runner
through 90 degrees, tighten nut and repeat check. Repeat procedure as
necessary. If squareness within limit cannot be achieved, seal runner must
be replaced.
(7) When seal runner squareness is within limit, lock keywasher (6), using suitable
punch.
(8) Install output shaft face-type seal.
M. Reduction Gearbox Oil Pressure Relief Valve - Removal (Ref. Fig. 215)
(1) Drain oil from reduction gearbox output section.
(2) Remove nuts (2) and washers (3).
(3) Remove oil filler adapter (1) and preformed packing (4).
CAUTION: CARE MUST BE EXERCISED DURING DISASSEMBLY OF VALVE TO

PREVENT COMPONENTS FROM FALLING INTO REDUCTION GEARBOX.
(5) Using puller (PWC30871), remove housing (6), preformed packing (11), spacers
(7), spring (8) and valve (9).
NOTE: Retain spacer (10) in body of inlet housing.
72-10-00
Page 227
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A A
1 2 3 4 5
DETAIL A
C9315
Blower Drive Seal - Removal/Installation

Figure 212
72-10-00
Page 228
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 212
1. Retaining Ring
2. Seal Carrier
4. Seal
5. Blower Drive Pad (Ref)
N. Reduction Gearbox Oil Pressure Relief Valve - Installation (Ref. Fig. 215)
CAUTION: REDUCTION GEARBOX OIL PRESSURE MAY BE ALTERED BY CHANGING

QUANTITY OF SPACERS (7) IN VALVE ASSEMBLY. EACH SPACER
CORRESPONDS TO A PRESSURE DIFFERENCE OF BETWEEN 2 AND 3
PSI.
CAUTION: THE REMOVAL OF SPACERS TO RECTIFY AN INCREASE IN OIL PRESSURE

IS NOT RECOMMENDED. AN INCREASE IN OIL PRESSURE OF AN IN
SERVICE RGB MAY BE DUE TO RESTRICTION OF OIL PASSAGES. IF OIL
PRESSURE REMAINS HIGH AFTER FAULT ISOLATION THE RGB MUST
BE REMOVED AND SENT TO AN OVERHAUL FACILITY FOR REPAIR.
(1) Lubricate new preformed packing (11) with clean engine oil and install on housing
(6).
(2) Install required number of spacers (7) in housing.
NOTE: Maximum number of spacers is four.
(3) Install spring (8) and valve (9) in housing.
(4) Insert valve assembly in inlet housing and secure with new retaining ring (5).
(5) Lubricate new preformed packing (4) with clean engine oil and install on oil filler
adapter (1).
(6) Position adapter on reduction gearbox studs and install washers (3) and nuts (2).
(8) Fill reduction gearbox with clean engine oil.
O. P3 Air Metering Tees- Removal (Ref. Fig. 216)
NOTE: 1. Following procedure can be used for both sides.
NOTE: 2. Make sure the area on the RGB surrounding the metering tee is cleaned prior
to removal of the metering tee.
(1) Disconnect and cap the pneumatic tubes (1) and (2) at metering Tee assembly (3).
(2) Loosen the lock nut (4).
72-10-00
Page 229
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2 3 4 6
7
5 8
6
5
4
3
2
C22076
Output Shaft Face-type Seal - Removal/Installation

Figure 213
72-10-00
Page 230
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 213
1. Bolt and Washer

2. Drain Cover
3. Gasket
4. Carrier
6. Seal
7. Output Shaft
8. Seal Runner
(3) Remove Tee assembly (3) and cap the opening in the RGB housing to prevent
contamination.
(4) Remove and discard packing (5) and backup ring (6).
P. P3 Air Metering Tees - Installation (Ref. Fig. 216)
NOTE: Following procedure can be used for both sides.
(1) Install lock nut (4) and backup ring (6) on Tee assembly (3).
(2) Lubricate new packing (5) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install on Tee assembly
(3).
(3) Remove cap previously installed on RGB housing and install Tee assembly (3) on
RGB.
(4) Position Tee assembly (3) correctly to line up with pneumatic tubes (1) and (2).
(5) Retain the Tee in position and torque locknut 40 to 65 lb. in.
(6) Remove the cap previously placed on tubes (1) and (2) and connect tube nuts (4)
to Tee assembly (3).
(7) Torque tube nuts 90 to 100 lb. in. and safety wire.
Q. Nf Governor Drive Shaft Oil Seal - Removal (Ref. Fig. 217)
NOTE: This procedure can be used for both sides.
(1) Remove the Nf governor (Ref. 73-20-04, PT (Nf) GOVERNOR - MAINTENANCE

PRACTICES).
(2) Remove the seal carrier (3) with the puller (PWC30046-57).
(3) Remove and discard the preformed packing (2). Remove the seal (1) from the seal
carrier (3) with finger pressure.
72-10-00
Page 231
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8
2
10
6
3
C3076
Output Shaft Seal Runner - Removal/Installation

Figure 214
72-10-00
Page 232
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 214
1. Wrench Assembly
2. Socket Nut
3. Adapter Nut
4. Screw
5. Plain Nut
6. Keywasher
7. Seal Runner
8. Dogs
9. Slots
R. Nf Governor Drive Shaft Oil Seal - Installation (Ref. Fig. 217)
NOTE: This procedure can be used for both sides.
WARNING: PUT ON PROTECTIVE GLOVES WHEN YOU HANDLE HOT PARTS TO

PREVENT PERSONAL INJURY.
(1) Put the oil seal carrier (3) in an oven at 141°C (285°F) for 15 minutes minimum.
WARNING: PUT ON PROTECTIVE GLOVES WHEN YOU HANDLE HOT PARTS TO

PREVENT PERSONAL INJURY.
(2) Remove the carrier (3) from the oven.
(3) Use drift (PWC37088-1) to install the seal (1) in the carrier (3) with the flat face of
the seal at the bottom of the carrier.
(4) Lubricate the new preformed packing (2) with the engine oil (PWC03-001) and
install it on the carrier (3).
(5) Install the carrier assembly in cover with the drift (PWC30075).
6. Inspection/Check
A. Output Shaft Face-type Seal
NOTE: Cracks in any portion of seal are cause for rejection.
(1) Inspect sealing face for chips, nicks and scratches. Seal is acceptable provided
that:
(a) 50% of seal face width in damage area remains undamaged.
(b) A circular strip no less than 45% of original face width makes sealing contact.
(c) Scratches extending across sealing face are less than 0.005 in. deep
and 0.010 in. wide.
72-10-00
Page 233
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
10
9
2 4
3
11
C5469
Reduction Gearbox Oil Pressure Relief Valve - Removal /Installation

Figure 215
72-10-00
Page 234
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 215
1. Oil Filler Adapter

2. Nut
3. Washer
5. Retaining Ring
6. Housing
7. Spacers
8. Spring
9. Valve
10. Spacer
(2) Inspect condition of remaining areas of seal. Seal is acceptable provided that:
(a) There is no evidence of carbon deterioration.
(b) At least 70% of normal seal cross-section is still available.
(c) Scratches are less than 0.005 in. deep and 0.010 in. wide.
B. P3 Air Metering Tees
(1) Flush inside of Tee with petroleum solvent (PWC11-027) and dry with clean shop
air.
(2) Visually inspect the metered orifice within Tee assembly for presence of
contamination with a strong light.
(3) Soak the Tee assembly in Carbon Compound (PWC11-021/21A/21B) for a period of
two hours if accumulation of contamination is found.
(4) Flush with petroleum solvent (PWC11-027) and dry with clean shop air.
7. ‘‘Keensert’’ Insert Replacement Procedure (Ref. Fig. 218)
NOTE: The following procedure applies only to specific sized inserts used in the RGB
output housing to airframe mounting pad. Refer to Illustrated Parts Catalog for
approved location and particular part number of insert.
A. Removal
(1) Drill out insert material between keys to depth shown using 13/32 inch diameter drill
(Ref. Detail A).
(2) Using small pin punch, bend keys inward and break them off (Ref. Detail B).
(3) Remove insert with a standard ‘‘E-Z-Out’’ type tool (Ref. Detail C).
72-10-00
Page 235
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1
3
2
DETAIL A
C111163
P3 Air Metering Tees - Removal/Installation

Figure 216
72-10-00
Page 236
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 216
1. Pneumatic Tube
2. Pneumatic Tube
3. Tee Assembly
4. Lock Nut
5. Packing
6. Backup Ring
B. Installation
(1) Screw in new insert, using fingers, to a depth of 0.010 to 0.030 in. below surface of
parent component (Ref. Detail D).
(2) Using a ‘‘Kee’’ driving-tool (item 11) and a hammer, drive down keys with several
light taps (Ref. Detail E).
72-10-00
Page 237
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1
1
2
3 2
REDUCTION GEARBOX CASING
3
C233622
Nf Governor Drive Shaft Oil Seal - Removal/Installation

Figure 217
72-10-00
Page 238
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 217
1. Seal
3. Oil Seal Carrier
72-10-00
Page 239
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
13
32 IN. DRILL
LOCKING KEYS
0.200 INCH
KEENSERT DETAIL B DETAIL C

DETAIL A
0.030 − 0.010 INCH
DETAIL D KEE DRIVING TOOL
DETAIL E
C3559
Replacement of ‘‘Keensert’’ Inserts - Output housing

Figure 218
72-10-00
Page 240
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
SECTION PAGE DATE
LEP 1 Mar 09/2001
2 blank Mar 09/2001
Contents 1 Mar 09/2001

2 blank Mar 09/2001
72-20- 1 Aug 12/96

Description and 2 blank Aug 12/96
Operation
72-20-00 201 Mar 09/2001

Maintenance 202 Mar 09/2001
Practices 203 Mar 09/2001
204 Mar 09/2001
205 Mar 09/2001
206 Mar 09/2001
207 Mar 09/2001
208 blank Mar 09/2001
Page 1/2
72-20 LEP Mar 09/2001
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
AIR INLET SECTION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION 72-20-00
1. General 1
AIR INLET SECTION - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES 72-20-00

1. General 201
A. Removal of Bleed Air Case (Pre-SB5306) 201
B. Installation of Bleed Air Case(Pre-SB5306) 201
C. Removal of Air Inlet Screen 205
D. Installation of Air Inlet Screen 205
6. Cleaning 205
Page 1/2
72-20 CONTENTS Mar 09/2001
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AIR INLET SECTION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General
Description and operation of the components associated with the intake of air is covered in
72-00-00 and 72-30-00.
72-20-00 Page 1/2

AIR INLET SECTION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION Aug 12/96
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AIR INLET SECTION - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General

Consumable Materials referred to in this section refer to section TOOLS/FIX/EQUIP or
Item No. Name

PWC06-002 Petrolatum Grease
PWC11-027 Petroleum Solvent
3. Special Tools
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
A. Removal of Bleed Air Case (Pre-SB5306) (Ref. Fig. 201)
(1) Note position of air outlet flange on bleed air case.
NOTE: Position will depend upon airframe configuration.
(2) Remove nuts (2) and slacken nuts (4).
(3) Remove bleed air case.
B. Installation of Bleed Air Case(Pre-SB5306) (Ref. Fig. 201)
(1) Position bleed air case with one side located on air inlet screen rubber molding and
the other side on center fireseal mounting flange.
(2) Pre-SB5445: Position air outlet flange as required.
CAUTION: INCORRECT ALIGNMENT OF THE BLEED AIR CASE ASSEMBLY CAN

RESULT IN ENGINE SURGE.
(3) Post-SB5445: Align indication mark (arrow) on bleed air case assembly with joint
between upper and lower front fireseal.
72-20-00 Page 201

AIR INLET SECTION - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES Mar 09/2001
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C22111
Bleed Air Case - Removal/Installation

72-20-00 Page 202

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 201
1. Bolt
2. Nut
3. Bolt
4. Nut
72-20-00 Page 203

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STARBOAR
PORT D
ENGINE
ENGINE
FRONT FIRESEALS
ALIGN THIS ARROW ALIGN THIS ARROW
WITH THIS JOINT (VIEWED TOWARD AGB) WITH THIS JOINT
BETWEEN THE UPPER BETWEEN THE UPPER
AND LOWER FIRESEALS AND LOWER FIRESEALS
PORT ENGINE STARBOARD ENGINE
D
AR
BO
AR
ST
IN E
ENG
STARBOARD ENGINE
(TYPICAL)
POST-SB5445 C76029
Bleed Air Case - Removal/Installation

72-20-00 Page 204

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) Install bolts (1) and nuts (2).
(5) Install bolts (3) and nuts (4).
(6) Manually constrain case with flanges aligned and circumferentially seated.
CAUTION: EXTREME CARE MUST BE EXERCISED WHEN APPLYING TORQUE.

EXCESSIVE TORQUE CAN CAUSE LOCAL DAMAGE TO CASE.
(7) Torque nuts (2) to 15 lb.in., ensuring that bolt retaining bands are locked together.
(8) Apply run-down torque to seat each nut (4) and record torque applied.
(9) When both nuts are seated, apply 10 lb.in., additional torque to each nut (4).
C. Removal of Air Inlet Screen (Ref. Fig. 202)
(1) Remove bleed air case (5) (Ref. Para. A.).
(2) Remove nuts (2), washers (3) and bolts (1) from 6 o’clock position on screen (4).
(3) Remove screen.
D. Installation of Air Inlet Screen (Ref. Fig. 202)
(1) Apply Petrolatum VV-P-236 (PWC06-002) sparingly to circumferential mating

surface of screen (4).
(2) Position screen (4) around inlet case with split joint at 6 o’clock position.
(3) Install bolts (1), washers (3) and nuts (2).
CAUTION: DO NOT CONTINUE TO TIGHTEN NUTS (2) TO CLOSE GAP BETWEEN

SCREEN SPLIT JOINT TO LESS THAN 0.150 INCHES AS OVERSTRESS
OF SCREEN WILL RESULT.
(5) Install bleed air case (5) (Ref. Para. B.).
6. Cleaning
Remove screen as detailed in Paragraph 5 preceding and clean with petroleum solvent
(PWC11-027).Thoroughly dry with compressed air prior to reinstallation.
72-20-00 Page 205

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1
2 VIEW A
C3751
Air Inlet Screen

Figure 202
72-20-00 Page 206

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 202
1. Bolt
2. Nut
3. Washer
4. Air Inlet Screen
5. Bleed Air Case
72-20-00 Page 207/208

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
SECTION PAGE DATE
LEP 1 Dec 02/2013
2 blank Dec 02/2013

2 Dec 02/2013
72-30-00 1 Feb 28/97

Description and 2 Feb 28/97
Operation 3 Feb 28/97
4 Feb 28/97
5 Feb 28/97
6 Feb 28/97
7 Feb 28/97
8 Feb 28/97
9 Feb 28/97
10 Feb 28/97
11 Feb 28/97
12 blank Feb 28/97
72-30-04 201 Dec 02/2013

Maintenance 202 Dec 02/2013
Practices 203 Dec 02/2013
204 Dec 02/2013
205 Dec 02/2013
206 Dec 02/2013
207 Dec 02/2013
208 blank Dec 02/2013
72-30-05 201 Nov 16/2012

204 Nov 16/2012
205 Nov 16/2012
206 blank Nov 16/2012

Page 1/2
72-30 LEP Dec 02/2013
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
COMPRESSOR SECTION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION 72-30-00
1. General 1
2. Component Description 1
A. Air Inlet Screen and Bleed Air Case 2) 1
B. Compressor Inlet Case 1) 1
C. Compressor Assembly 3) 1
D. Combustion Chamber Liner 4) 6
E. Compressor Turbine Vane Ring and Shroud and Combustion

Chamber Exit Ducts 5) 6
F. Compressor Turbine 6) 6
G. Gas Generator Case 7) 10
GAS GENERATOR CASE - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES 72-30-04
1. General 201
A. Diffuser Pipe Crack Repairs 202

B. Replacement of Shanknuts in Case Centerbore 202
C. Repair of Threaded Holes using ‘‘Keensert’’ Inserts 202
D. Replacement of ‘‘Keensert’’ Inserts 205
E. Cleaning and Touchup of Protective Coating 205
F. Touch-up Protective Coating 205

G. Fuel Manifold Bolt Removal 207

Page 1
72-30 CONTENTS Dec 02/2013
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
COMPRESSOR ROTOR - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES 72-30-05
1. General 201
5. Approved Repairs - (First-stage Compressor Rotor) 201

A. General 201
B. Repair of Leading Edge 202
C. Repair of First-stage Blade Trailing Edge 203

Page 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
COMPRESSOR SECTION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General
The compressor (gas generator) section is located between the accessory gearbox and the
power turbine and exhaust sections of the engine. The section contains the compressor
inlet, the compressor, the combustor and the compressor turbine components and the gas
generator case (Ref. Fig. 1). The compressor inlet components comprise an air inlet screen,
a bleed air case and a compressor inlet case. The compressor comprises three axial
stages and one centrifugal stage and is supported by No.1 and No.2 bearings. The combustor
components comprise a combustion chamber liner and an exit duct. The turbine components
comprise a bladed disk, which is secured to the compressor stubshaft, and a vane ring
and shroud assembly. The gas generator houses the compressor, combustor and compressor
turbine components. The compressor inlet case, which supports the air inlet screen and
the bleed air case is secured to the gas generator case at Flange F. The case also provides
mountings for the front and center fireseals. A compressor wash ring is installed on the
front fireseal mounting ring adjacent to the air inlet screen.
2. Component Description
A. Air Inlet Screen and Bleed Air Case (Ref. Fig. 2)
The air inlet screen is a circular large area, wire-mesh screen located between the air
inlet fairing and the front fireseal. The function of the screen is to preclude the ingestion of
foreign objects by the compressor.
The bleed air case is a two-piece sheet metal band which is installed in the compressor
inlet area between the inlet screen and the center fireseal. The case encloses the
compressor bleed valve and includes an aperture to which the airframe overboard
discharge duct is connected. Compressor bleed air from the bleed valve enters the
chamber formed by the case and is thus ducted overboard.
B. Compressor Inlet Case (Ref. Fig. 1)
The compressor inlet case is a circular casting which forms a plenum chamber for
passage of compressor inlet air. Studs at Flange G secure the case to the accessory
gearbox and at Flange F, to the gas generator case. The case centerbore houses No.1
bearing components. Breather holes in the centerbore flange operate in conjunction
with the labyrinth air seal and interstage pressure air to prevent No.1 bearing lubricating
oil from entering the compressor, the oil being scavenged through an outlet port
located at the 6 o’clock position in the centerbore.
C. Compressor Assembly (Ref. Fig. 3)
The compressor basically comprises three axial rotor stages, three interstage spacers,
three stator assemblies and a single-stage centrifugal impeller and housing. The complete
assembly is housed within the gas generator case and is supported by No.1 bearing
assembly in the compressor inlet case and No.2 bearing assembly in the gas generator
case centerbore. When running at maximum continuous rating, the compressor
supplies air to the engine combustion section at a compression ratio of 7:1.
72-30-00 Page 1
COMPRESSOR SECTION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION Feb 28/97
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ACCESSORY GEARBOX (REF.)
FRONT FIRESEAL
GAS GENERATOR CASE COMPRESSOR AIR INLET SCREEN

COMBUSTION CHAMBER COMPRESSOR
COMBUSTION EXIT DUCTS INLET CASE
CHAMBER LINER
COMPRESSOR TURBINE BLADES
COMPRESSOR TURBINE DISK
COMPRESSOR TURBINE
VANE RING AND SHROUD
NO.2 BEARING CENTER FIRESEAL NO.1 BEARING

FLANGE C FLANGE E FLANGE F FLANGE G
C22127
Gas Generator Section - Major Components, Bearings, and Flanges

Figure 1
72-30-00 Page 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GAS GENERATOR
CASE (REF.)
COMPRESSOR BLEED AIR CASE
COMPRESSOR AIR INLET SCREEN
FRONT FIRESEAL
CENTER FIRESEAL
C9360
Air Inlet Screen and Compressor Bleed Air Case - Component Location
Figure 2
72-30-00 Page 3
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
VANE AND SHROUD

ASSEMBLY
LONG SPACER
COMPRESSOR DISK COMPRESSOR
INLET CASE
PIN
COMPRESSOR
TIE−ROD BLADE
PRESSURE
OIL NOZZLE
STUB SHAFT
NO.2 BEARING
NO.1 BEARING
CENTRIFUGAL
IMPELLER
SCAVENGE COMPRESSOR HUB

OIL PIPE
SHORT SPACER
IMPELLER
HOUSING COMPRESSOR
BLEED VALVE
C3006A
Compressor Assembly - Component Location

Figure 3
72-30-00 Page 4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
No.2 bearing, the compressor stubshaft, the centrifugal impeller and the impeller
housing are positioned in that order, followed, sequentially by the third and second-stage
rotor and stator assemblies and their associated interstage spacers, the first-stage
stator assembly, and the first-stage rotor assembly of which the compressor hub is an
integral part. The hub is supported by No.1 bearing. The rotor components are stacked
and secured together by six tie rods.
No.2 roller bearing supports the compressor stubshaft and its attached turbine. The
bearing inner race is located between labyrinth rotor air seals which butt against shoulders
on the compressor stubshaft and the compressor turbine stubshaft.
The compressor stubshaft is a hollow steel forging machined externally to accommodate

No.2 bearing and rotor air seal.
The impeller housing is secured in the gas generator case by a retaining ring. Rotation
of the housing in the gas generator case is prevented by a stainless steel locating
pin in the case which mates with a slot in the housing.
Each rotor stage consists of rotor blades which fit into dovetail grooves in the rims of
rotor disks. First-stage rotor blades are made from titanium and second and third-stage
blades from cadmium plated stainless steel. The airfoil cross-sections of first-stage
blades differ from that of second and third-stage blades and blade length decreases
progressively from first-stage to third. The limited clearance between the blade root and
the disk groove produces the characteristic clicking sound heard during compressor
rundown. The interstage spacers installed between the rotor disks limit blade axial
movement during operation.
Each set of compressor stator assembly vanes is held in position by a circular ring
through which vane ends protrude and to which they are brazed. The first-stage
compressor stator assembly provides a shroud for the first and second-stage rotor blades,
and the third-stage vane and shroud assembly provides a shroud for the third-stage
blades. First and third-stage assemblies are bolted together, and the third-stage vane and
shroud assembly is secured to the impeller housing. The second-stage compressor
stator assembly is housed between first and third-stage assemblies and located by a
single staked pin. Interstage pressure air (P2.5) is vented to the compressor bleed valve
chamber in the gas generator case through slots in the third-stage vane and shroud
assembly.
The compressor hub is a hollow steel forging, machined externally to accommodate

No.1 ball-type bearing, a labyrinth rotor air seal and a spacer. The bearing outer race is
held in position against a shoulder in the bearing support inner housing, and secured
by a ring nut and rivet. The bearing labyrinth rotor air seal, a spacer, and bearing split inner
race are secured in that order against a shoulder on the compressor hub assembly by
a cup washer and spanner nut. A groove on the outer circumference of the split inner race
facilitates removal by means of a puller. A short, hollow, steel coupling, externally
splined at its protruding end, is secured within the hub by a transverse pin through hub
and coupling.
The rows of vanes in each stator stage diffuse compressor air, raise its static pressure
and direct it to the next rotor stage. The air finally leaves the compressor at the centrifugal
impeller and is directed into the diffuser tubes in the gas generator case.
72-30-00 Page 5
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Combustion Chamber Liner (Ref. Fig. 4)
The combustion chamber liner is an annular heat-resistant steel liner open at one end
and domed at the other. The domed end of the liner is supported inside the gas generator
case by fourteen fuel nozzle sheaths and located by the two spark igniters in the case
which protrude into the liner at the 4 o’clock and 11 o’clock positions. Rings of plain,
plunged and shielded perforations, located around the inner and outer circumferences
and in the domed area of the liner, allow air to enter to provide optimum fuel/air ratios for
starting and sustained combustion. Cooling rings control airflow within the liner and
along with the perforations, ensure an even temperature distribution at the compressor
turbine inlet. Open end inner and outer circumferences are located by sliding joints in small
and large exit duct respectively.
E. Compressor Turbine Vane Ring and Shroud and Combustion Chamber Exit Ducts (Ref.
Fig. 5)
The vane ring comprises 14 integrally cast, cooled vanes between inner and outer
securing rings. The ring is secured between the combustion chamber large exit duct and
the flange of No.2 bearing cover at the gas generator case centerbore. Lugs on the
outer ring mate with slots in the shroud housing and lugs on the inner ring mate with slots
in No.2 bearing cover flange.
The shroud comprises nine segments secured in a cylindrical housing by a retaining

ring. The shroud housing extends towards the power turbine and is grooved to receive
one interstage sealing ring. The ring provides a point of mechanical separation and seal
between the gas generator section and the power turbine in the power section.
The combustion chamber liner and large exit duct together form an envelope, which
provides an outlet from the combustion area to the vane ring. The large exit duct outer
circumference mates with the sliding joints of the liner inner skin. The exit duct support
flange is bolted to the shroud housing slotted outer flange with the vane ring outer
lugs located in the slots. This assembly is secured by bolts and a vane ring lockplate
along with the large exit duct and No. 2 bearing cover, to a flange on the gas generator
case centerbore.
Cooling air from around the inner combustion liner wall enters the vane ring lugs. Air
then passes through internal passages in each vane to be vented axially from the vane
trailing edge root at the inner ring.
F. Compressor Turbine (Ref. Fig. 6)
The compressor turbine is a two-plane balanced disk assembly incorporating an

externally splined hub which extends rearwards to mate with the compressor stubshaft.
The disk is secured to the stubshaft by a mounting bolt and a keywasher. A master
spline on the hub ensures that the disk is always installed in the same position on the
stubshaft thus maintaining original balance. The disk includes a circumferential groove to
enable disk growth to be checked and incorporates a flange on either side for the
addition of classified weights and balance rivets. The outer rim of the disk incorporates
machined fir-tree serrations in which the turbine blades are mounted. The blades,
which are machined castings, are secured in the fir-tree serrations by individual tubular
rivets. The triple tapered airfoil configuration of the blades increases engine operating
temperature margin.
72-30-00 Page 6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
COMBUSTION CHAMBER LINER

FUEL NOZZLE GAS GENERATOR CASE
COMBUSTION CHAMBER LARGE EXIT DUCT
EXHAUST DUCT EXIT DUCT SUPPORT FLANGE

POWER TURBINE STATOR
COMPRESSOR TURBINE
FUEL NOZZLE SUSPENSION BRACKET COOLING RINGS
PERFORATIONS
C22139
Combustion Chamber Liner - Component Location
Figure 4
72-30-00 Page 7
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
COMBUSTION CHAMBER LINER GAS GENERATOR CASE (REF.)
COMBUSTION CHAMBER
LARGE EXIT DUCT
POWER TURBINE STATOR (REF.) COMBUSTION CHAMBER

SMALL EXIT DUCT
NO.2 BEARING COVER FLANGE
NO.2 BEARING COVER
BAFFLE
COMPRESSOR TURBINE
SHROUD ASSEMBLY
VANE RING LOCKPLATE
COMPRESSOR TURBINE
VANE RING
INTERSTAGE SEALING RING
C22084
Compressor Turbine Vane Ring and Shroud and Combustion Chamber Exit Ducts - Component
Location
Figure 5
72-30-00 Page 8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BLADE
DISK
POWER TURBINE (REF.) BALANCING FLANGE
SPLINE
MOUNTING BOLT
KEYWASHER
INTERSTAGE BAFFLE ASSEMBLY
COMPRESSOR TURBINE
POWER TURBINE STATOR COMPRESSOR TURBINE

VANE RING
C22121
Compressor Turbine - Component Location
Figure 6
72-30-00 Page 9
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
The compressor turbine receives the gas flow from the combustion chamber via the
vane ring assembly and drives the compressor in a clockwise direction. A cooling air flow
is directed across the trailing face of the disk by an interstage baffle assembly
installed between the compressor and power turbines. This baffle also acts as a seal
between the two turbine stages. Cooling air is directed over the leading face of the disk
by the air baffle mounted on No.2 bearing cover (Ref. Fig. 5).
G. Gas Generator Case (Ref. Fig. 7)
The case consists of two stainless steel sections fabricated into a single structure and
houses the turbine, compressor and combustion sections of the engine. The case extends
between Flange C, where it is secured to the exhaust duct, and Flange F, where it is
secured to the inlet case. The diffuser pipes and straightening vanes are brazed to the
case center section. The outer section of the case contains various bosses and
apertures for fourteen nozzles, two spark igniters, two drain valves and a P3 air bleed
port. The compressor bleed valve is secured by four bolts to a port at the 5 o’clock position
on the case. The case centerbore houses the No.2 bearing components which are
lubricated and scavenged by oil tubes within the case. The No.2 bearing components
comprise two labyrinth air seals and the bearing itself, the outer race of which is bolted to
the centerbore. The single labyrinth air seal is bolted to the centerbore and the double
labyrinth air seal is secured by a retaining ring.
P3 air for the fuel control pneumatic system is bled from an outlet at the 7 o’clock
position on the case. A second boss at the 7 o’clock position opens directly into the
pressurized area of the case and provides P3 air to pressurize internal carbon seals in
the reduction gearbox. Pressurized air for compressor bleed valve operation is taken
through an internal pressure tube from the space behind the diffuser pipes. P3 air for
aircraft use is made available by the air bleed port at the 11 o’clock position on the case.
Pressure oil for No.2 bearing lubrication is taken from an inlet port at the 7 o’clock
position through an internal pressure tube to a passage in the case centerbore and then
to a duplex nozzle assembly at the 10 o’clock position. Scavenge oil is taken through
an internal tube at the 6 o’clock position to an outlet at the 5 o’clock position.
72-30-00 Page 10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FLANGE C P3 BLEED PORT PRESSURE OIL TUBE
PRESSURE OIL TUBE
SCAVENGE OIL TUBE DIFFUSER PIPE STRAIGHTENING VANE FLANGE F SCAVENGE OIL TUBE
C3007C
Gas Generator Case - Component Location
Figure 7
72-30-00 Page 11/12

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GAS GENERATOR CASE - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General

Item No. Name

PWC05-207 Abrasive Cloth
PWC07-023 Coating
PWC07-024 Catalyst
PWC07-034 Touch-up Coating
PWC11-022 Methyl-ethyl-ketone
3. Special Tools

PWC30271-100 Flaring Tool Obsolete - Replaced by
PWC31771-100
PWC31771-100 Flaring Tool Alternate to PWC30271-100
PWC50064 Drill Jig Kit
Name Remarks
Keensert Insert KN1032 (NAS1394C-3)
Locking Tool TD1032L
5. Inspection/Check
Inspection procedures and damage limits applicable to the gas generator case are covered
in engine hot-section inspection procedures as detailed in 72-00-00, INSPECTION/CHECK,
Hot Section Inspection.
72-30-04
Page 201
GAS GENERATOR CASE - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES Dec 02/2013
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6. Approved Repairs
A. Diffuser Pipe Crack Repairs (Ref. Fig. 201)
NOTE: Cracks in outer wall of pipes may be reached by drilling access holes in inner
walls using 1/4 (0.250) in. drill (Ref. Detail D). These access holes are
acceptable without repair.
(1) Stop-drill cracks using 1/16 (0.0625) in. drill.
(2) Blend out areas where material has become detached (Ref. Details A and B).
(3) Blend out cracks on edge of fishtail which may join and cause sections to become
detached (Ref. Detail C).
B. Replacement of Shanknuts in Case Centerbore (Ref. Fig. 202)
CAUTION: ON COMPLETION OF REPAIR, INSPECT ALL AREAS THOROUGHLY

FOR METAL CHIPS. CLEAN AS NECESSARY.
(1) Drill through flared end of shanknut to partially weaken flare. Do not drill through to
flange.
(2) Remove shanknut using parallel pin punch at weakened end.
(3) Lightly lubricate tapered portion of flaring tool (PWC30271-100) or (PWC31771-100)

with oil.
(4) Position shanknut on flange and flare nut end using tool as shown.
C. Repair of Threaded Holes using ‘‘Keensert’’ Inserts
NOTE: This repair applies to damaged fuel nozzle pad threaded holes and bleed valve
attaching bolt holes.
(1) Mask gas generator case to prevent ingress of swarf.
(2) Drill out damaged hole using letter I (0.271 inch) or (6.9 mm) drill.
(3) Countersink hole 90 degrees to 0.323 to 0.333 inch diameter.
(4) Tap hole using 5/16 - 18 tap, class 2B.
(5) Screw in ‘‘Keensert’’ insert, Part No. KN1032 (NAS1394C-3) using fingers, to depth
of 0.010 to 0.015 inch below surface of parent component.
(6) Using ‘‘Kee’’ driving tool, (TD1032L) and hammer, drive down keys with several
light taps.
(7) Remove all masking and masking adhesive.
NOTE: ‘‘Keensert’’ Inserts are available from:
72-30-04
Page 202
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STOP−DRILL AND SMOOTH OUT HOLE STOP−DRILL AND SMOOTH OUT HOLE
A B
STOP−DRILL, REMOVE METAL AND BLEND OUT HOLE STOP−DRILL THROUGH WINDOW
0.800 ON INNER WALL
MAX.
0.400 MAX.
0.500 MAX.
0.250 MAX.
0.800 MAX.
C D
C348C
Diffuser Pipe Crack Repairs
Figure 201
72-30-04
Page 203
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3
2
NUT AFTER FLARING
2
NUT BEFORE FLARING
C6097
Gas Generator Case - Replacement of Shanknuts

Figure 202
72-30-04
Page 204
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 202

2. Shanknuts
3. Flaring Tool
Interfast Inc.
21 Constellation Court
Rexdale, Ontario
Canada M9W 1K4
D. Replacement of ‘‘Keensert’’ Inserts (Ref. Fig. 203)
(1) Drill out insert material between keys and internal thread to a maximum depth of
5/32 (0.156) inch, using a 7/32 (0.219) inch drill (Ref. Detail A).
(3) Remove insert with a standard ’’E-Z Out‘‘ type tool (Ref. Detail C).
(4) Screw in new ’’Keensert‘‘ insert, Part No. KN1032 (NAS1394C-3), using fingers, to
a depth of 0.010 to 0.015 inch below surface of parent component (Ref. Detail D).
(5) Using ’’Kee‘‘ driving-tool (TD1032L) and hammer, drive down keys with several light
taps (Ref. Detail E).
NOTE: Refer to Subparagraph C. for ’’Keensert‘‘ Insert and ’’Kee‘‘ Driving Tool
suppliers.
E. Cleaning and Touchup of Protective Coating
(1) Wash salt and smog deposits from gas generator case with clean water. Dry with
clean, dry compressed air.
F. Touch-up Protective Coating
WARNING: METHYL-ETHYL-KETONE IS HIGHLY INFLAMMABLE, OBSERVE PROPER

PRECAUTIONS IN HANDLING. AVOID PROLONGED INHALATION OF
FUMES FROM THIS SOLVENT.
(1) Clean grease and oil from touch-up areas with methyl-ethyl-ketone.
(2) Mask all exposed holes in fuel or igniter pad.
(3) Sand area(s) to bare metal with 180 grit alumimum-oxide abrasive cloth. Clean with
dry, oil free shop air and wipe with a clean, dry cloth. Do not apply solvent to
sanded surface and do not touch area with bare hands.
(4) Option 1: Apply SermeTel 249 (PWC07-023) and air dry 15-30 minutes or until dry
to touch. Spray, brush or swab the coated surface with SermeTel 273 (PWC07-024)
catalyst. Allow to stand one hour. Wash with water and dry with shop air.
72-30-04
Page 205
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
_7
32 INCH DRILL
LOCKING KEYS
KEENSERT
DETAIL A DETAIL B DETAIL C
0.015
0.010 INCH
KEE DRIVING TOOL
DETAIL D
DETAIL E
C11787A
Replacement of ‘‘Keensert’ Inserts

Figure 203
72-30-04
Page 206
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) Option 2: Apply SermeTel 196 (PWC07-034) touch-up coating in two applications
with either spray or brush. Air dry 30-60 minutes between coats. Air dry second
coat 6-8 hours.
G. Fuel Manifold Bolt Removal
(1) Remove fuel manifold adapter assembly as necessary to expose broken bolt (Ref.
73-10-05).
CAUTION: MASK ENGINE AS NECESSARY TO PREVENT POSSIBLE INGESTION

OF METAL PARTICLES.
(2) Install drill jig (PWC50064), attach with jig screw, on fuel nozzle pad.
NOTE: DELETED.
(3) Drill pilot hole with center drill using jig guide.
(4) Install bushing in jig, and secure with lockscrew.
(5) Drill bolt for appropriate extractor.
(6) Remove bolt. Examine threads for damage, and repair if necessary.
72-30-04
Page 207/208
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
COMPRESSOR ROTOR - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General
A. Maintenance personnel should make reference to the INTRODUCTION section and

Chapter 70-00-00 STANDARD PRACTICES of this manual to familiarize themselves
with general procedures.
B. Maintenance of the compressor rotor is restricted to repair of the first-stage rotor.
C. Install suitable protective caps/covers over all disconnected tubes/lines and component
openings.
Not Applicable
3. Special Tools
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
5. Approved Repairs - (First-stage Compressor Rotor)
CAUTION: BLENDING OF THE FIRST-STAGE COMPRESSOR ROTOR BLADES

PRIMARILY AFFECTS ENGINE PERFORMANCE. AFTER BLENDING VERIFY
ENGINE PERFORMANCE ON THE GROUND AND IN FLIGHT.
ACCELERATION CHECK IS ALSO RECOMMENDED.
A. General
(1) Blend repair limits are provided to possibly prevent unnecessary engine removal
due to FOD. Should the damage be extensive, an evaluation should be made to
proceed with the repair or remove the engine and send to a facility capable of
performing the repair.
(2) Any blend repair performed should be documented (Ref. 72-00-00, Inspection)
(3) Blend repair limits provide the maximum permissible amount of material that can be
removed from any one blade.
(4) Blending to maximum permissible depth may result in compressor unbalance. If the
amount of material removed exceeds 50% of the recommended limit, the diametrally
opposite blade should be blended to the same dimension.
(5) Unless otherwise noted an unlimited number of blades can be blended to the
specified limits, provided the engine performance remains satisfactory. However
the affected components may have to be replaced at the next overhaul.
(6) Maintain leading edge profile and fillet radius as close as possible to original .
72-30-05
Page 201
COMPRESSOR ROTOR - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES Nov 16/2012
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Repair of Leading Edge (Ref. Fig. 201)
CAUTION: KEEP THE COMPRESSOR INLET AREA CLEAR OF ALL FOREIGN MATERIAL
AND OBJECTS WHICH COULD BE INGESTED BY THE ENGINE AND
CAUSE SERIOUS DAMAGE DURING OPERATION.
CAUTION: THE USE OF ROTARY TOOLS IS STRICTLY LIMITED TO P&WC SERVICE

CENTER APPROVED PERSONNEL.
(1) Repair the first-stage blade leading edge within the following limits using fine hand
files and stones.
WARNING: AN ACCUMULATION OF TITANIUM DUST IS A FIRE HAZARD. CLEAN

UP TITANIUM DUST ON COMPLETION OF REPAIR AND DO NOT
ALLOW DUST TO ACCUMULATE ON CLOTHING.
(2) Suitably mask the entire first-stage compressor area to prevent contamination of
the compressor with filing residue.
(3) In case of multiple leading edge defects situated closer than 0.200 in., the entire
leading edge of an unlimited number of blades may be cut back 0.025 in.
maximum (Detail A). If blade has been previously cut back, reduce repair limit by
previous cut back. Maintain the leading edge profile and fillet radius as close as
possible to the original.
NOTE: If cutting back the leading edge by 0.025 in. does not eliminate or make
defects acceptable, the blade cutbacks may be extended to 0.050 in.
maximum, providing engine performance is within limits. This is acceptable
to permit the engine to remain in service; however, the affected
components may have to be replaced at the next overhaul.
(4) Nicks and tears may be smoothed to 0.300 inch wide maximum by 0.165 inch deep
maximum, provided repaired area is 0.220 in. minimum from blade tip (Detail C).
NOTE: 1. If repairing within the above limits does not eliminate the defects or make
them acceptable, individual defects may be smoothed to 0.500 inch wide
maximum and 0.250 inch deep maximum, provided repair area is
0.350 inch minimum from blade tip, and engine performance is within
limits. However, the affected components may have to be replaced at next
overhaul.
NOTE: 2. If any blade is smoothed to the maximum limit, the blade 180 degrees
opposite must be smoothed to the same shape to prevent compressor
rotor imbalance.
(5) Bent or torn leading edge tips may be repaired to 0.375 inch wide maximum by
0.280 inch deep maximum (Detail D).
NOTE: If any blade is smoothed to the maximum limits, the blade 180 degrees
opposite must be smoothed to the same shape to prevent compressor
rotor imbalance.
72-30-05
Page 202
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(6) Smooth sharp edge at the blade leading edge root eroded area to restore as near
as possible the original radius and smoothness (Detail E). After repair, make sure
the original airfoil chord at the repair area was not reduced by more than 0.250 inch.
CAUTION: KEEP COMPRESSOR AIR INLET AREA CLEAR OF ALL FOREIGN

MATERIAL AND OBJECTS WHICH COULD BE INGESTED BY THE
ENGINE AND CAUSE SERIOUS DAMAGE DURING ENGINE OPERATION.
(7) Clean entire compressor inlet area thoroughly with a suitable suction cleaner.
Remove masking material and repeat cleaning.
C. Repair of First-stage Blade Trailing Edge
(1) Dents and nicks up to 0.050 in. deep and wide, not less than 0.200 in. apart and
not within 0.250 in. of blade tip, are acceptable (maximum 4 per blade), providing
there are no tears or cracks.
(2) Sharp corners must be smoothed to an approximate radius of 0.050 in. and a
maximum of 0.050 in. deep and wide. Tip corner radius must not exceed 0.100 in.
CAUTION: KEEP COMPRESSOR INLET AREA CLEAR OF ALL FOREIGN OBJECTS

WHICHCOULD BE INGESTED BY ENGINE AND CAUSE DAMAGE
DURING ENGINE OPERATION.
(3) Using suitable suction cleaner, thoroughly clean entire compressor inlet area.
Remove all masking material and repeat cleaning. Make sure all filing residue
is removed from inlet area and first-stage compressor blades.
72-30-05
Page 203
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
0.165 DEEP
MAX
0.050 MAX
CUT BACK AREA
0.220
MIN
0.300
MAX
MAINTAIN LEADING EDGE RADIUS
AVOID SHARP EDGES OR FLAT AREAS
ENLARGED VIEW B
DETAIL C
B
0.280 DEEP
MAX
0.050
MAX
0.375
MAX
DETAIL A DETAIL D
NOTE: THE MAXIMUM PERMITTED MATERIAL REMOVAL IS SHOWN.

ONLY REMOVE THE MINIMUM MATERIAL NECESSARY TO
BLEND OUT DAMAGE.
C22550F
Compressor First-stage Repair Limits

72-30-05
Page 204
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ORIGINAL CHORD LENGTH

0.250 MAX.
BLENDING
MAINTAIN LEADING EDGE RADIUS,

AVOID SHARP EDGES OR FLAT AREAS
ENLARGED SECTION F−F
NOTE: THE MAXIMUM PERMITTED MATERIAL REMOVAL IS SHOWN.

ONLY REMOVE THE MINIMUM MATERIAL NECESSARY TO
BLEND OUT DAMAGE.
F F
DETAIL E
C61332
Compressor First-stage Repair Limits
72-30-05
Page 205/206
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
SECTION PAGE DATE
LEP 1 Nov 16/2012
2 blank Nov 16/2012
Contents 1 Nov 16/2012

2 blank Nov 16/2012
72-40-00 1 Nov 16/2012

Description and 2 blank Nov 16/2012
Operation
72-40-01 1 Mar 09/2001

Description and 2 Mar 09/2001
Operation
72-40-01 201 Nov 16/2012

204 Nov 16/2012
205 Nov 16/2012
206 blank Nov 16/2012

Page 1/2
72-40 LEP Nov 16/2012
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
COMBUSTION SECTION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION 72-40-00
1. Description and Operation 1
COMBUSTION CHAMBER LINER ASSEMBLY - DESCRIPTION AND

OPERATION 72-40-01
1. Combustion Chamber Liner 1
COMBUSTION CHAMBER LINER ASSEMBLY - MAINTENANCE

PRACTICES 72-40-01
1. General 201
A. Removal 201
B. Installation 203
A. Combustion Chamber Liner - Crack Repair 205

Page 1/2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
COMBUSTION SECTION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. Description and Operation
The combustion section of the engine is contained in the front part of the gas generator
case, and consists of the combustion chamber liner and the large and small exit ducts.
Compressor delivery air from the diffuser section discharges into the combustion section. The
air enters the liner through straight and plunged holes, mixes with the fuel from the
manifold, and is ignited. The expanding gases flow to the rear and into the exit duct zone,
where the gas flow is turned 180 degrees inward to flow forward through the compressor
turbine stator to the compressor turbine.
72-40-00
Page 1/2
COMBUSTION SECTION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION Nov 16/2012
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
COMBUSTION CHAMBER LINER ASSEMBLY - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. Combustion Chamber Liner (Ref. Fig. 1)
The combustion chamber liner is an annular heat-resistant steel liner open at one end and
domed at the other. The domed end of the liner is supported inside the gas generator case by
fourteen fuel nozzle sheaths and located by the two spark igniters in the case which
protrude into the liner at the 4 o’clock and 11 o’clock positions. Rings of plain, plunged and
shielded perforations, located around the inner and outer circumferences and in the domed
area of the liner, allow air to enter to provide optimum fuel/air ratios for starting and
sustained combustion. Cooling rings control airflow within the liner and along with the
perforations, ensure an even temperature distribution at the compressor turbine inlet. Open
end inner and outer circumferences are located by sliding joints in small and large exit
duct respectively.
72-40-01
Page 1
COMBUSTION CHAMBER LINER ASSEMBLY - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION Mar 09/2001
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

FUEL NOZZLE GAS GENERATOR CASE
COMBUSTION CHAMBER LARGE EXIT DUCT
EXHAUST DUCT EXIT DUCT SUPPORT FLANGE

POWER TURBINE STATOR
COMPRESSOR TURBINE
FUEL NOZZLE SUSPENSION BRACKET COOLING RINGS
PERFORATIONS
C22139
Combustion Chamber Liner - Component Location

Figure 1
72-40-01
Page 2
COMBUSTION CHAMBER LINER ASSEMBLY - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION Mar 09/2001
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
COMBUSTION CHAMBER LINER ASSEMBLY - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General

Item No. Name

PWC05-180 Welding Wire
PWC07-023 Coating
PWC11-002 DELETED
PWC11-009 Ethyl Alcohol
3. Special Tools
Tool No. Name

PWC32823 Puller
PWC50084 Locator
Not Applicable
5. Removal/Installation (Ref. Fig. 201 and 202)
A. Removal
(2) Remove power turbine and exhaust section (Ref. 72-50-00).
(3) Remove fuel manifold adapter assemblies (Ref. 73-10-05).
(4) Remove spark igniters (Ref. 74-20-00).
(6) Remove vane ring, shroud exit duct support flange (Ref. 72-50-01).
72-40-01
Page 201
COMBUSTION CHAMBER LINER ASSEMBLY - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES Nov 16/2012
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 2
C22650
Combustion Chamber Liner - Removal/Installation

Figure 201
72-40-01
Page 202
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 201
1. Combustion Chamber Liner

3. Spark Igniter Boss
4. Spark Igniter Locating Hole
(7) Withdraw combustion chamber liner (1, Fig. 201) from gas generator case (2).
NOTE: Do not attempt to pry liner loose as damage may result. If difficulty is
experienced, strike inside of liner sharply with palm of hand.
(8) Remove large exit duct (Ref. Fig. 202) as follows:
(a) Remove No.2 bearing housing cover flange (1) using puller (PWC32823) or by
using four 190-32 UNF bolts as jacking screws.
(b) Withdraw large exit duct.
B. Installation (Ref. Fig. 202)
(1) Install exit duct as follows:
(a) Position exit duct in gas generator case and align offset holes in duct flange
and gas generator case centerbore.
(b) Clean the area of No. 2 bearing housing cover flange with abrasive cloth
(PWC05-101) and then clean with isopropyl alcohol (PWC11-014) or as per
SPOP 209.
(c) Apply thin layer of coating (PWC07-023) to area a and let dry 5 to 10 minutes.
(d) Apply second layer of coating (PWC07-023) to area a to obtain 0.002 to

0.003 thickness. Let dry 5 to 10 minutes.
NOTE: Assembly of parts must be completed within 15 minutes of final

application of coating.
(e) Position No. 2 bearing housing cover flange (1) with offset holes in flange and
exit duct aligned.
(2) Insert combustion chamber liner (1) into gas generator case (2).
(3) Carefully rotate liner to align spark igniter locating holes (4) with bosses (3) and
secure using locator (PWC50084).
(4) Install vane ring, shroud and exit duct support flange (Ref. 72-50-01).
(6) Install spark igniters (Ref. 74-20-00).
72-40-01
Page 203
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTERNAL PORTION OF GAS

GENERATOR CASE
A
3
a
1
SECTION A−A
C22103
Large Exit Duct - Removal/Installation

Figure 202
72-40-01
Page 204
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 202
1. No. 2 Bearing Housing Cover Flange

2. Large Exit Duct
3. Stator Air Seal and Gasket
(7) Install fuel manifold adapter assemblies (Ref. 73-10-05).
6. Inspection/Check
Inspection procedures and damage limits applicable to the large exit duct and combustion
chamber liner are covered in the engine hot-section inspection procedures (Ref. 72-00-00,
ENGINE - INSPECTION/CHECK).
7. Approved Repairs
A. Combustion Chamber Liner - Crack Repair
(1) Stop-drill both ends of crack using 1/16 in. (0.0625 in.) drill.
(2) Thoroughly wire brush area and swab with ethyl alcohol (PWC11-009).
(3) Weld crack using inert gas fusion method and welding wire (PWC05-180).
NOTE: 1. It is recommended that a copper backup plate be used to reduce distortion

and argon gas backup if available.
NOTE: 2. Stress relief after welding and dressing of weld are not required.
72-40-01
Page 205/206
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER CHAPTER
LEP 1 Dec 02/2013 72-50-01 601 Mar 09/2001
2 Dec 02/2013 Inspection 602 blank Mar 09/2001
Check
2 Dec 02/2013 72-50-01 801 Dec 02/2013
3 Dec 02/2013 Approved 802 Dec 02/2013
4 Dec 02/2013 Repairs 803 Dec 02/2013
804 Dec 02/2013
72-50-00 1 Nov 16/2012 805 Dec 02/2013
Description and 2 Nov 16/2012 806 Dec 02/2013
Operation 3 Nov 16/2012 807 Dec 02/2013
4 Nov 16/2012 808 Dec 02/2013
5 Nov 16/2012 809 Dec 02/2013
6 Nov 16/2012 810 blank Dec 02/2013
7 Nov 16/2012
8 Nov 16/2012 72-50-02 201 Nov 16/2012
9 Nov 16/2012 Maintenance 202 Nov 16/2012
10 blank Nov 16/2012 Practices 203 Nov 16/2012
204 Nov 16/2012
72-50-00 201 Dec 02/2013 205 Nov 16/2012
Maintenance 202 Dec 02/2013 206 Nov 16/2012
Practices 203 Dec 02/2013 207 Nov 16/2012
204 Dec 02/2013 208 Nov 16/2012
205 Dec 02/2013 209 Nov 16/2012
206 Dec 02/2013 210 blank Nov 16/2012
207 Dec 02/2013
208 Dec 02/2013 72-50-03 401 Nov 16/2012
209 Dec 02/2013 Removal/ 402 Nov 16/2012
210 Dec 02/2013 Installation 403 Nov 16/2012
211 Dec 02/2013 404 Nov 16/2012
212 Dec 02/2013 405 Nov 16/2012
406 Nov 16/2012
72-50-01 401 Dec 02/2013
Removal/ 402 Dec 02/2013 72-50-03 601 Mar 09/2001
Installation 403 Dec 02/2013 Inspection 602 blank Mar 09/2001
404 Dec 02/2013 Check
405 Dec 02/2013
406 Dec 02/2013 72-50-03 801 Mar 09/2001
407 Dec 02/2013 Approved 802 Mar 09/2001
408 blank Dec 02/2013 Repairs

Page 1
72-50 LEP Dec 02/2013
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
SECTION PAGE DATE
72-50-04 201 Dec 02/2013
Maintenance 202 Dec 02/2013
Practices 203 Dec 02/2013
204 Dec 02/2013
205 Dec 02/2013
206 Dec 02/2013
207 Dec 02/2013
208 Dec 02/2013
209 Dec 02/2013
210 blank Dec 02/2013

Page 2
72-50 LEP Dec 02/2013
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
TURBINE SECTION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION 72-50-00
1. General 1
2. Component Description 1
A. Compressor Turbine Vane Ring and Shroud and Combustion
Chamber Exit Ducts 1
B. Compressor Turbine 4
C. Power Turbine Stator Assembly 4
D. Power Turbine Disk Assembly 4

E. Power Turbine Shaft and Housing Assembly 8
F. No.3 and 4 Bearing Housing Support 8
G. Exhaust Duct 8
TURBINE SECTION - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES 72-50-00
1. General 201
A. Removal 201
B. Installation 207
COMPRESSOR TURBINE VANE RING - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION 72-50-01
1. General 401

5. Procedure 401
A. Preparation 401

Page 1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
COMPRESSOR TURBINE VANE RING -

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (Cont’d) 72-50-01
B. Removal 401
C. Installation 404
D. Reassembly of Engine 407
COMPRESSOR TURBINE VANE RING - INSPECTION/CHECK 72-50-01
1. General 601
COMPRESSOR TURBINE VANE RING - APPROVED REPAIRS 72-50-01
1. General 801
5. Lapping of Mating Faces 801

A. General 801
B. Procedure 802
6. Grinding of Compressor Turbine Shroud 802
A. General 802
B. Preparation 802
C. Calculation of Grinding Requirements 806
D. Grinding Procedure 806
COMPRESSOR TURBINE DISK ASSEMBLY - MAINTENANCE

PRACTICES 72-50-02
1. General 201

Page 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
COMPRESSOR TURBINE DISK ASSEMBLY - MAINTENANCE

PRACTICES (Cont’d) 72-50-02
A. Removal 201
B. Installation 205
POWER TURBINE STATOR ASSEMBLY - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION 72-50-03
1. General 401
5. Procedure 401
A. General 401
B. Removal 405
C. Installation 405
POWER TURBINE STATOR ASSEMBLY - INSPECTION/CHECK 72-50-03
1. General 601
POWER TURBINE STATOR ASSEMBLY - APPROVED REPAIRS 72-50-03
1. General 801
5. Procedure 801
A. Lapping of Power Turbine Stator Assembly 801
POWER TURBINE DISK ASSEMBLY - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES 72-50-04

1. General 201

Page 3
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
POWER TURBINE DISK ASSEMBLY - MAINTENANCE

A. Removal 201
B. Installation 203

Page 4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TURBINE SECTION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General
There are two turbines incorporated in the engine, a compressor turbine in the gas generator
section coupled to the compressor rotor and a ‘‘free’’ power turbine in the power turbine
and exhaust section mounted on the power turbine shaft driving the reduction gearbox. The
term ‘‘free’’ is used to indicate that the power turbine is not mechanically linked to the
compressor turbine.
The power turbine and exhaust section (Ref. Fig. 1) is located between the gas generator
and reduction gearbox sections of the engine. The section contains the power turbine stator
assembly, the power turbine, the power turbine shaft and shaft housing, No.3 and 4
bearing housing support and the exhaust duct.
The compressor turbine is driven by the gas flow from the combustion section being
deflected onto the turbine blades by a stator assembly. The compressor turbine comprises a
bladed disk assembly running in a shroud housing assembly.
The power turbine is rotated by the remaining energy in the gas flow from the compressor
turbine being deflected on to the power turbine disk by the stator assembly.
2. Component Description
A. Compressor Turbine Vane Ring and Shroud and Combustion Chamber Exit Ducts (Ref.
Fig. 2)
The vane ring comprises 14 integrally cast, cooled vanes between inner and outer
securing rings. The ring is secured between the combustion chamber large exit duct and
the flange of No.2 bearing cover at the gas generator case centerbore. Lugs on the
outer ring mate with slots in the shroud housing and lugs on the inner ring mate with slots
in No.2 bearing cover flange.
The shroud comprises nine segments secured in a cylindrical housing by a retaining

ring. The shroud housing extends towards the power turbine and is grooved to receive
one interstage sealing ring. The ring provides a point of mechanical separation and seal
between the gas generator section and the power turbine in the power section.
The combustion chamber liner and large exit duct together form an envelope, which
provides an outlet from the combustion area to the vane ring. The large exit duct outer
circumference mates with the sliding joints of the liner inner skin. The exit duct support
flange is bolted to the shroud housing slotted outer flange with the vane ring outer
lugs located in the slots. This assembly is secured by bolts and a vane ring lockplate
along with the large exit duct and No. 2 bearing cover, to a flange on the gas generator
case centerbore.
Cooling air from around the inner combustion liner wall enters the vane ring lugs. Air
then passes through internal passages in each vane to be vented axially from the vane
trailing edge root at the inner ring.
72-50-00
Page 1
TURBINE SECTION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION Nov 16/2012
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
REDUCTION GEARBOX (REF.) GAS GENERATOR CASE (REF.)
EXHAUST DUCT
POWER TURBINE
SHAFT HOUSING
THERMOCOUPLE
PROBE
MAIN INPUT DRIVE
COUPLING SHAFT
POWER TURBINE
NO.3 BEARING STATOR ASSEMBLY
NO.4 BEARING
POWER TURBINE DISK
POWER TURBINE
POWER TURBINE BLADES
SHAFT
NO.3 & 4 BEARING

HOUSING SUPPORT
REAR FIRESEAL
FLANGE A FLANGE B FLANGE C FLANGE D
C9330
Power Turbine and Exhaust Section - Major Components, Bearings and Flanges (Typical)
Figure 1
72-50-00
Page 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
COMBUSTION CHAMBER LINER GAS GENERATOR CASE (REF.)
COMBUSTION CHAMBER
LARGE EXIT DUCT
POWER TURBINE STATOR (REF.) COMBUSTION CHAMBER

SMALL EXIT DUCT
NO.2 BEARING COVER FLANGE
NO.2 BEARING COVER
BAFFLE
COMPRESSOR TURBINE
SHROUD ASSEMBLY
VANE RING LOCKPLATE
COMPRESSOR TURBINE
VANE RING
INTERSTAGE SEALING RING
C22084
C/T Vane Ring and Shroud and Combustion Chamber Exit Ducts - Component Location
Figure 2
72-50-00
Page 3
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Compressor Turbine (Ref. Fig. 3)
The compressor turbine is a two-plane balanced disk assembly incorporating an

externally splined hub which extends rearwards to mate with the compressor stubshaft.
The disk is secured to the stubshaft by a mounting bolt and a keywasher. A master
spline on the hub ensures that the disk is always installed in the same position on the
stubshaft thus maintaining original balance. The disk includes a circumferential groove to
enable disk growth to be checked and incorporates a flange on either side for the
addition of classified weights and balance rivets. The outer rim of the disk incorporates
machined fir-tree serrations in which the turbine blades are mounted. The blades,
which are machined castings, are secured in the fir-tree serrations by individual tubular
rivets. The triple tapered airfoil configuration of the blades increases engine operating
temperature margin.
The compressor turbine receives the gas flow from the combustion chamber via the
vane ring assembly and drives the compressor in a clockwise direction. A cooling air flow
is directed across the trailing face of the disk by an interstage baffle assembly
installed between the compressor and power turbines. This baffle also acts as a seal
between the two turbine stages. Cooling air is directed over the leading face of the disk
by the air baffle mounted on No.2 bearing cover (Ref. Fig. 2).
C. Power Turbine Stator Assembly (Ref. Fig. 4)
The power turbine stator assembly comprises a stator housing, a stator and a shroud.
The assembly is bolted at Flange D to the exhaust duct. The stator housing is a flanged
cylinder containing the vane ring and interstage baffle assembly which make up the
power turbine stator. The PT6T-3DF stator housing is reinforced in line with the power
turbine and is attached through the exhaust duct flange by shorter bolts into blind holes in
the stator housing. The housing incorporates threaded bosses which receive the
inter-turbine temperature (T5) sensing probes and clips for attachment of the associated
wiring harness. The vane ring which comprises inner and outer rings and integrally
cast vanes is located by a flange on its outer ring which is retained between the power
turbine shroud and the stator housing. The interstage baffle assembly, a riveted
assembly of baffle and sealing plate, is located within the vane inner ring and secured
against rotation by lugs. Slots are incorporated in the vane outer ring to provide clearance
for the T5 probes. The double knife edge shroud operates in conjunction with the
power turbine notched blades to optimize turbine efficiency. The gas flow from the
compressor turbine passes through the vane ring and is directed by the vanes, onto the
power turbine blades, at the optimum angle for turbine drive. The interstage baffle
assembly directs cooling air up the leading face of the power turbine disk.
D. Power Turbine Disk Assembly (Ref. Fig. 5)
The power turbine disk assembly comprises a disk, blades and classified weights. The
disk incorporates an externally splined stubshaft which extends forwards to mate with the
internal splines in the power turbine shaft. The disk is secured to the shaft by a
stubshaft bolt and a keywasher. A master spline on the stubshaft ensures that the disk is
always installed in the same position on the power turbine shaft, thus maintaining
original balance. The disk includes a circumferential groove to enable growth to be
checked and a single flange on its leading face for the addition of classified weights and
72-50-00
Page 4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BLADE
DISK
POWER TURBINE (REF.) BALANCING FLANGE
SPLINE
MOUNTING BOLT
KEYWASHER
COMPRESSOR TURBINE
POWER TURBINE STATOR COMPRESSOR TURBINE

VANE RING
C22121
Compressor Turbine - Component Location
Figure 3
72-50-00
Page 5
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STATOR HOUSING
EXHAUST DUCT
SHROUD T5 PROBE
POWER TURBINE
COMPRESSOR TURBINE
POWER TURBINE VANE RING
PT6T−3DF
ONLY
C22130A
Power Turbine Stator Assembly - Component Location

Figure 4
72-50-00
Page 6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MAIN INPUT DRIVE

COUPLING SHAFT
COUPLING
PRESURE OIL TUBE
ROTOR AND STATOR

NO.3 BEARING AIR SEALS
REDUCTION GEARBOX
INPUT SHAFT (REF.) STUBSHAFT BOLT
NO.4 BEARING
POWER TURBINE DISK
POWER TURBINE
POWER TURBINE SHAFT STATOR ASSEMBLY
POWER TURBINE BLADES
SCAVENGE
FLANGE B OIL TUBE
SHROUD
NO.3 AND 4 BEARING HOUSING SUPPORT
C9332
Power Turbine, Shaft and Shaft Housing - Component Location (Typical)
Figure 5
72-50-00
Page 7
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
balance rivets. The outer rim of the disk incorporates machined fir-tree serrations in
which the blades are mounted. Power turbine blades differ from compressor turbine blades
in that they are cast with notched and shrouded tips. The blades are secured in the
fir-tree serrations by individual tubular rivets.
E. Power Turbine Shaft and Housing Assembly (Ref. Fig. 5)
The assembly comprises a shaft housing containing No.3 and 4 bearing components, a
stator air seal, the power turbine shaft and pressure and scavenge oil tubes associated
with lubrication of the bearings.
The shaft housing is a fabricated steel cylinder which is secured at Flange B to studs on
the No.3 and 4 bearing housing support. No.3 roller bearing and No.4 ball bearing
assemblies, which are bolted to the housing, support the power turbine shaft. The shaft
is internally splined at the No.3 bearing journal end for attachment of the turbine disk
assembly and externally splined at the other end to mate with a coupling which connects
the shaft to the main input drive coupling shaft.
No.3 bearing is positioned between a shoulder on the shaft and a rotor air seal. No.4
bearing includes a split inner race and is secured between a shoulder on the shaft and the
coupling by a cup washer and a spanner nut. The No.3 bearing cover is an integral
part of the exhaust duct.
F. No.3 and 4 Bearing Housing Support
The housing support is a conical casting which is secured by studs at Flange A, to the
reduction gearbox and at Flange B to the power turbine shaft housing. Passages in the
housing support carry pressure oil from the reduction gearbox output housing at the
11 o’clock position, for lubrication of No.3 and 4 bearings. Various bores within the support
contain oil transfer tubes, a check valve and a jet pump. The jet pump, which scavenges
No.3 and 4 bearing oil, is only efficient at oil system normal operating pressures.
For this reason the check valve is included in the system to prevent flooding of No.3
and 4 bearing compartments during run-up and run-down. During normal operation the
check valve is fully open and the oil is withdrawn from the bearing area by the jet pump
and sprayed into a sump area formed by the lower portions of the housing support
and reduction gearbox housing.
G. Exhaust Duct (Ref. Fig. 6)
The exhaust duct, which is located between the gas generator section of the power
section and the reduction gearbox, is a divergent heat-resistant steel duct, incorporating
a single outlet port. The duct is secured at Flange A to the reduction gearbox, Flange
C to the gas generator case and Flange D to the power turbine stator assembly. The power
turbine shaft and shaft housing assembly and No.3 and 4 bearing housing support are
housed within the exhaust duct. An insulation blanket is interposed between these
components and the duct to reduce heat transmission from the exhaust gases.
A drain hole at the 6 o’clock position, allows fuel accumulated during engine shutdown,
to drain into the gas generator case and out through the drain valves. The duct
receives the gas flow from the power turbine, and directs it to the airframe exhaust via
the outlet port.
72-50-00
Page 8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OUTLET PORT
FLANGE D
FLANGE A
FLANGE C
C3011A
Exhaust Duct
Figure 6
72-50-00
Page 9/10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TURBINE SECTION - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General

Item No. Name

PWC05-089 Lockwire
PWC07-023 Coating
PWC08-014 Adhesive
PWC09-005A Compound, Universal Joining
PWC11-027 Solvent, Petroleum
3. Special Tools

PWC30269 Mount Ring
PWC30712 Adapter
PWC30801 Sling, Exhaust Obsolete - Replaced by
Assembly PWC70102
PWC34300 Stand
PWC70102 Sling, Exhaust Duct Alternate to PWC30801
Not Applicable
A. Removal
NOTE: Discard all removed preformed packings, packing retainers and plastic
rings.
72-50-00
Page 201
TURBINE SECTION - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES Dec 02/2013
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Remove external oil and air tubes (Ref. Fig. 201).
(a) Remove nut and bolt securing clamp (1) to bracket on Flange C, disconnect
coupling nuts of Pg tube (2) at rear and center fireseals and remove tube.
(b) Remove nuts and bolts securing brackets (6) to positioning plate (7).
(c) Remove nuts and bolts securing clamps on oil tubes (5) to brackets (6) and
rotate parts around tubes to clear positioning plate (7).
(d) Remove nuts and bolts securing retaining plate (8) to rear fireseal and remove
plate and plastic rings (9).
(e) Withdraw oil tubes (5) from center and rear fireseals and remove preformed
packings (3) and packing retainers (4).
(f) Disconnect jumper leads (11 and 12) from T5 terminal block.
NOTE: Jumper leads can remain connected to and be removed with bracket
(13) (Ref. step (3) (c) following).
(g) Remove nuts and bolts securing clamps (23 and 24) to ignition harness (10)
and Flange C respectively, loosen coupling nuts of P3 pressure tube (14) at
gas generator case elbow connection and rear fireseal and remove tube.
(h) Remove nuts and bolts securing retaining plate (19), split insulation plates (17)
and seal plate (18) to rear fireseal. Retain parts as set.
(i) Remove nut and bolt securing clamp (21) to bracket on Flange C.
(j) Remove bolts securing tube stop (25) to tee assembly. Ease tube assembly
(20) out of tee assembly and withdraw from rear fireseal. Remove retainers
(16 and 26), and preformed packings (15 and 22) from tube assembly (20).
(k) Cap exposed ends of all fittings and tubes.
(l) Place all loose parts in suitable containers and retain with engine.
(3) Remove power turbine and exhaust section (Ref. Fig. 202).
(a) Remove bolts (1) securing terminal block (2) and shield (6) to gas generator
case and push terminal block through case.
(b) Attach sling (PWC30801) or (PWC70102) to flange of exhaust port and

connect hoist to sling lifting eye.
(c) Support weight of assembly and remove nuts (4) and bolts (5) from Flange C.
Remove brackets as bolts are withdrawn from flanges.
(d) Carefully withdraw assembly from gas generator case ensuring that terminal
block (2) is clear. Remove gasket (3) from terminal block and discard.
(e) Post-SB5341 and PT6T-3DF Engines: Remove and discard sealing ring (7).
72-50-00
Page 202
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2 1
4
5
7
9 6
8
C22104
Power Turbine and Exhaust Section - Removal/Installation of Air and Oil Tubes
72-50-00
Page 203
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 201
1. Clamp
2. Pg Tube
4. Packing Retainer
5. Oil Tube
6. Bracket
7. Positioning Plate
8. Retaining Plate
9. Plastic Ring
10. Ignition Harness
11. Jumper Lead
12. Jumper Lead
13. Bracket Terminal Support
14. P3 Pressure Tube
16. Packing Retainer
17. Split Insulation Plate
18. Split Seal Plate
19. Retaining Plate
20. Tube Assembly
21. Clamp
23. Clamp
24. Clamp
25. Tube Stop
26. Packing Retainer
72-50-00
Page 204
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
10
11
12
13
24
FLANGE C
23
17
15
14
18
19
16
20
21
22
26
25
C22138
Power Turbine and Exhaust Section - Removal/Installation of Air and Oil Tubes
72-50-00
Page 205
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
FLANGE C
6
B
❉
1
2
3 4
❉ PUSH ITEM 2 INWARDS PRIOR TO

FLANGE C SEPARATION
8
3
1 9
SECTION AT A
WITH FLANGE C MATED
POST−SB5341 AND PT6T−3DF ONLY
10
2
(POST−SB5377) DETAIL B
C28658A
Power Turbine and Exhaust Section - Removal from Gas Generator Case
Figure 202
72-50-00
Page 206
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 202
1. Bolt
2. Terminal Block
3. Gasket
4. Nut
5. Bolt
6. Thermocouple Shield
7. Sealing Ring (Post-SB5341 and PT6T-3DF only)
8. Nut (Chromel Terminal) (Post-SB5377)
9. Nut (Alumel Terminal) (Post-SB5377)
10. Shield (Post-SB5377)
(4) Install assembly in stand (Ref. Fig. 203).
(a) Install adapters (PWC30712) on stand (PWC34300).
(b) Position mount ring (PWC30269) on Flange C of exhaust duct and secure with
bolts (9) and nuts (10).
(c) Position assembly in stand and align holes in mount ring (8) with holes in
adapters (13).
(d) Secure assembly to adapters with bolts (7) and washers (6).
B. Installation
(1) Remove assembly from stand (Ref. Fig. 203).
(a) Attach sling (PWC30801) or (PWC70102) to exhaust port flange with bolts (3),
nuts (1) and washers (2).
(b) Attach hoist (5) to sling and take up weight of assembly.
(c) Remove bolts (7) and washers (6) and remove assembly from stand.
(d) Remove nuts (10) and bolts (9) and remove mount ring (8) from Flange C.
NOTE: On Post-SB5341 and PT6T-3DF engines, ensure that a new

turbine exhaust duct sealing ring has been fitted in the exhaust
section of Flange C.
(2) Pre-SB5341 : Prepare Flange C interfaces:
(a) Clean mating surface of flange C on gas generator case with abrasive cloth
(PWC05-101) and then clean with isopropoyl alcohol (PWC11-014) or as per
SPOP 209.
(b) Apply thin layer of coating (PWC07-023) to mating surface and let dry 5 to 10
minutes.
72-50-00
Page 207
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5 6 7
4
3
1
2 8
9
13
10
15 POST−SB5364
11
13 12
14
2
1
C6017B
Power Turbine and Exhaust Section - Installation and Removal from Stand
Figure 203
72-50-00
Page 208
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 203
1. Nut
2. Washer
3. Bolt
4. Sling
5. Hoist
6. Washer
7. Bolt
8. Mount Ring
9. Bolt
10. Nut
11. Flange C
12. Stand
13. Adapter
14. Shipping Cover
15. Sealing Ring (Post-SB5341)
(c) Apply second layer of coating (PWC07-023) to mating surface to obtain 0.002
to 0.003 thickness. Let dry 5 to 10 minutes.
NOTE: Assembly of power turbine and exhaust section to gas generator must
be completed within 15 minutes of final application of coating.
(3) Alternate method (Hylomar), Pre-SB5341 engines, Prepare Flange C interfaces:
(a) Clean mating surface of Flange C on gas generator case with abrasive cloth
(PWC05-101) and wipe clean with solvent (PWC11-027).
NOTE: When necessary, remove old sealant by carefully scraping off all
sealing surfaces with a scraper before applying new sealant.
(b) Apply a thin even layer of coating (PWC09-005A) to mating surface. Remove
any excess sealant and ensure flange holes and inside flange are clean and
free of solvent.
(4) Post-SB5341: Apply adhesive (PWC08-014) at four equally spaced locations on the
new sealing ring (15).
(5) Post-SB5341: Install new sealing ring (15) on the exhaust duct at Flange C (11)
with the adhesive facing the groove in the exhaust duct.
(6) Install assembly into gas generator case (Ref. Fig. 202).
72-50-00
Page 209
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: DO NOT USE FORCE TO MATE EXHAUST DUCT FLANGE WITH

GAS GENERATOR FLANGE. RESISTANCE INDICATES THAT
EITHER THE INTERTURBINE BAFFLE IS NOT CORRECTLY
LOCATED AROUND COMPRESSOR TURBINE DISK FLANGE OR
THAT THE INTERSTAGE SEALING RING ON COMPRESSOR
TURBINE SHROUD HOUSING IS NOT ENTERING POWER TURBINE
HOUSING. IF DIFFICULTY IS ENCOUNTERED, SEPARATE
ASSEMBLY AND INVESTIGATE.
(a) Carefully insert assembly into gas generator case, ensuring that terminal block
(2) is clear and enters freely until mating flanges are approximately six inches
apart.
(b) Install new gasket (3) on terminal block (2), insert terminal block into mounting
boss of gas generator case. Install shield (6) over terminal block.
(c) Secure terminal block with bolts (1). Torque 32 to 36 lb.in. and lockwire.
(d) Proceed with installation of assembly into gas generator case until respective
flanges are mated and ensure that bolt holes are aligned.
(e) Temporarily secure with four bolts (5) and nuts (4).
(f) Position brackets at locations shown on Figure 204 and secure components at
Flange C with bolts (5, Fig. 202) and nuts (4). Torque nuts (4) 44 to 48 lb.in.
(7) Install external oil and air tubes (Ref. Fig. 201).
(a) Remove blanking caps from tubes and fittings.
(b) Install new preformed packing (22) and packing retainer (26) on flanged end of
pressure oil tube (20), followed by preformed packing (15) and packing retainer
(16), on opposite end of oil tube (20).
(c) Slide retaining plate (19), followed by seal plate (18), over pressure oil tube
(20). Insert end of tube through aperture in rear fireseal and opposite end
into transfer tee at center fireseal.
(d) Position stop (25) at flanged end of pressure oil tube (20) and secure to
transfer tee with bolts. Torque bolts 32 to 36 lb.in. and lockwire.
(e) Align clamp (21) of pressure oil tube (20) or (28) with bracket on Flange C and
secure with bolt and nut. Torque nut 36 to 40 lb.in.
(f) Insert split insulation plates (17) on each side of seal plate (18), align parts with
bolts holes in rear fireseal and secure with bolts and nuts. Tighten nut until firm
contact, plus 180 degrees.
(g) Install P3 pressure tube (14) between elbow on gas generator case and
reducer at rear fireseal. Align clamp (24) on tube with bracket on Flange C and
secure with bolt and nut. Torque nut 36 to 40 lb.in.
(h) Torque tube (14) coupling nuts 90 to 100 lb.in. and lockwire.
72-50-00
Page 210
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTES:
1. BRACKET LOCATIONS IDENTICAL FOR BOTH POWER
SECTIONS EXCEPT WHERE SPECIFIED
2. BOLT HOLES ARE COUNTED CLOCK−WISE FROM FIRST HOLE
TO RIGHT OF ENGINE CENTERLINE WHEN VIEWED IN
DIRECTION OF ARROW A
FLANGE C
IGNITION LIFTING BRACKET

HARNESS
60 1
55
T5 HARNESS
53
52
50
FLANGE C
45 16
Pg PRESSURE TUBE
P3 TUBE
36 25
33
SURGE
ACCUMULATOR
PRESSURE OIL TUBE OIL TRANSFER TUBES

VIEW ON ARROW A
C22129
Bracket Locations at Flange C
Figure 204
72-50-00
Page 211
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(i) Secure clamp (23) to tube (14) with bolt and nut and torque 36 to 40 lb.in.
(j) Connect jumper leads (11 and 12) to T5 terminal block on gas generator case.
Torque smaller nut 8 to 12 lb.in. and larger nut 10 to 15 lb.in.
(k) Install power section (Ref. 72-00-01).
(l) Install clamps (23) on P3 pressure tube (14) and harness (10) and secure with
bolts and nuts. Torque nuts 36 to 40 lb.in.
(m) Loosely assemble plastic rings (9) and retaining plate (8) on rear fireseal with
bolts and nuts.
(n) Assemble packing retainers (4) and preformed packings (3) on oil tubes (5).
Insert ends of oil tubes into retaining plate and plastic rings at rear fireseal
and into coupling at center fireseal.
(o) Rotate brackets (6) and associated clamps on oil tubes (5) to align with
positioning plate (7). Secure brackets to plate with bolts and nuts. Torque nuts
36 to 40 lb.in.
(p) Install Pg tube (2) between couplings at center and rear fireseals and align
clamp (1) on Pg tube with bracket on Flange C. Secure clamp to bracket
with bolt and nut. Torque 36 to 40 lb. in. Torque tube coupling nuts 90 to 100 lb.
in., and lockwire.
72-50-00
Page 212
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
COMPRESSOR TURBINE VANE RING - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. General
NOTE: Contents of 72-50-01 (T5 Temperature Sensing System) can be found in 77-20-01.

Item No. Name Remarks

PWC05-018 Pencil, Silver
or
PWC05-018A
PWC05-089 Lockwire
3. Special Tools

PWC32823 Puller
PWC71559 Puller, Cover Replaces PWC32822
Not Applicable
5. Procedure
A. Preparation
B. Removal (Ref. Fig. 401)
(1) Unlock keywashers (2) and remove bolts (1).
(2) Remove baffle (3).
72-50-01
Page 401
COMPRESSOR TURBINE VANE RING - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION Dec 02/2013
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
0.250 MIN. ON INSTALLATION, GAP BETWEEN SEGMENTS

MUST BE LOCATED AS SHOWN FROM ANY ADJACENT HOLE
8
7
VIEW ON B 4 10
3
2
1
3
❉
6 A POST−SB5314
16 5 INSTALLATION
❉
9
10
11 UNLOADED SIDE OF LUGS
12
13 LOADED SIDE OF LUGS
14 8
15 19 10
14
17
DETAIL C C
POST−SB5314 ❉ INDEX MARKS: REFER TO 18
PRE−SB5321
TEXT FOR DETAILS
VIEW ON ARROW A
C22088B
Vane Ring, Shroud and Exit Duct Support Flange - Removal/Installation

Figure 401
72-50-01
Page 402
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 401
1. Bolt
2. Keywasher
3. Baffle
4. No.2 Bearing Housing Cover
5. Bolt
6. Keywasher
7. Vane ring Lockplate
8. Vane Ring, Shroud and Exit Duct Assembly
9. Exit Duct Support Flange
10. Vane Ring
11. Shroud Segments
12. Shroud Housing Slots
13. Plug Bolt
14. Shroud Housing
15. Interstage Sealing Ring
16. Bolt
17. Vane Ring Outer Lugs
18. No. 2 Bearing Cover Flange
19. Vane Ring Inner Lugs
CAUTION: WHEN REMOVING NO. 2 BEARING HOUSING COVER, MAKE SURE

THAT THE STATOR AIR SEAL AND GASKET IN THE GAS GENERATOR
CASE CENTERBORE IS NOT DISTURBED.
(3) Remove No. 2 bearing housing cover (4) with puller (PWC71559).
(4) Unlock keywashers (6) and remove bolts (5) from vane ring lockplate (7).
(5) Withdraw assembly (8) and remove lockplate.
(6) Remove combustion chamber liner (Ref. 72-40-01).
(7) Separate vane ring, shroud and exit duct support flange as follows:
NOTE: Prior to disassembly, ensure that parts are index marked as illustrated. If
necessary, make temporary marks with an approved marker and
vibropeen after disassembly.
(a) Remove bolts (16) and four plug bolts (13).
(b) Separate shroud housing from exit duct support flange by using bolts (16)
through plug bolt holes.
72-50-01
Page 403
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) Remove vane ring from shroud housing.
NOTE: Unless damaged or for specific disassembly purposes, it is not

necessary to remove sealing ring (15).
(8) If shroud segments are to be replaced, remove existing segments as follows:
(a) Place shroud housing, flange side down, on a workbench and carefully drift
out shroud segments (11).
(b) Remove all traces of locking compound (if present) from segment grooves in
shroud housing using a plastic scraper and/or fine emery cloth.
C. Installation (Ref. Fig. 401)
(1) If new shroud segments are to be installed, proceed as follows:
NOTE: Shroud segments are obtainable in classified sets. These segments are
designed to provide a shroud I.D. compatible with the O.D. of the
compressor turbine disk assembly being used. After installation, localized
grinding may be necessary to remove high spots and/or any slight
eccentricity of shroud to obtain required blade-to-shroud clearance. For
details of shroud segment classes, grinding procedures and applicable
blade-to-shroud clearance (Ref. 72-50-01, COMPRESSOR TURBINE
VANE RING - APPROVED REPAIRS).
(a) Select shroud segment class to give required compressor turbine

blade-to-shroud clearance.
(b) Install segments (12) in grooves in shroud housing (15) and position so that
inter-segment gaps are located 0.250 in. minimum from center of any
adjacent cooling hole (Ref. View on B).
(2) Assemble vane ring, shroud and exit duct support flange.
NOTE: To avoid the possibility of air leakage during engine operation, the mating
faces of shroud, vane ring, exit duct and vane ring lockplate must be
lapped as detailed in 72-50-01, COMPRESSOR TURBINE VANE RING -
APPROVED REPAIRS.
(a) Place shroud housing (14), slotted flange uppermost, on a workbench and
install compressor turbine vane ring (10) in shroud housing (14), aligning
index marks.
NOTE: If new part is to be fitted, no index marking will be found. Index

(rotate) new part until best fit is obtained and index mark accordingly.
72-50-01
Page 404
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) Position vane ring (10) so that loaded side (Ref. NOTE following) of outer lugs
(17) are touching one side of shroud housing slots.
NOTE: The term ‘‘loaded side’’ is used to define which side of vane ring lugs
are in contact with wall of mating slots. Compressor air flowing
through the vane ring tends to turn or ‘‘load’’ vane ring in a clockwise
direction until restricted by wall of mating slots.
(c) Check clearance at both loaded and unloaded side of all 14 lugs using feeler
gages. Clearance of each lug at loaded side should be 0.000 to 0.002 inch
and at unloaded side 0.001 to 0.007 inch. Rotational motion (play) at outer lugs
should not exceed 0.004 inch.
(d) If lug-to-slot fit is not within limits, rotate vane ring (10) into another position
and repeat steps (b) and (c) until suitable fit is obtained.
(e) It is permissible to remove part and stone lugs and/or slots to obtain required
fit. After stoning, width of outer lugs must be 0.395 inch minimum and width of
housing slots must be 0.402 inch maximum.
NOTE: If lug-to-slot limits are exceeded (Ref. steps (c) and (e)), ship parts to
an approved overhaul facility for rework.
(f) Remove previous index markings from repositioned part and index mark in
correct position using an approved temporary marker (PWC05-018) or
(PWC05-018A).
(g) Remove vane ring (10) from shroud housing (14).
(h) Place compressor turbine vane ring (10), inner lugs uppermost, on a workbench
and install No. 2 bearing cover flange (18) on vane ring (10), aligning index
marks.
(i) Position No. 2 bearing cover flange (18) so that loaded sides (Ref. NOTE, step
(b)) of vane ring inner lugs (19) are touching side of No. 2 bearing cover flange
slots.
(j) Check clearance at both loaded and unloaded side of all 8 lugs using feeler
gages. Clearance of each lug at loaded side should be 0.000 to 0.002 inch
and at unloaded side 0.001 to 0.005 inch. No rotational motion (play) is permitted.
(k) Post-SB5314: If lug-to-slot fit is not within limits, rotate No. 2 bearing cover flange
(18) into another position and repeat steps (i) and (j) until suitable fit is
obtained.
NOTE: Pre-SB5314 and Post-SB5321 No. 2 bearing cover flanges are not
indexable.
72-50-01
Page 405
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(l) It is permissible to remove part and stone lugs and/or slots to obtain required
fit. After stoning, width of inner lugs must be 0.249 inch minimum and width of
flange slots must be 0.255 inch maximum.
NOTE: If lug-to-slot limits are exceeded (Ref. steps (j) and (l)), ship parts to
an approved overhaul facility for rework.
(m) Remove previous index marking from repositioned part and index-mark in
correct position using an approved temporary marker (PWC05-018) or
(PWC05-018A).
(n) Remove No. 2 bearing cover flange (18) from vane ring (10).
(o) Align index marks and position vane ring (10) in shroud housing (14).
(p) Align index marks and install assembly into exit duct support flange (9).
(q) Install 28 bolts (16), torque 15 to 20 lb. in. and lockwire (PWC05-089) in pairs.
(r) Install four plug bolts (13), torque 32 to 36 lb.in. and lockwire (PWC05-089)
to adjacent bolts (16).
NOTE: Bolts (13 and 16) are silver plated and do not require lubrication.
CAUTION: BEFORE INSTALLING NEW SEALING RING, LOCATE THE WORD

‘‘PRESS’’ ETCHED ON ONE SIDE. RING MUST BE INSTALLED WITH
THIS SIDE FACING TOWARDS ACCESSORY GEARBOX TO ENSURE
CORRECT SEALING.
(3) Install sealing ring (15) in shroud housing groove.
(4) Install combustion chamber liner (Ref. 72-40-01).
(5) Position vane ring lockplate (7) on vane ring inner lugs with chamfer on lockplate
inner diameter towards lugs.
(6) Position assembly (8) and lockplate in gas generator case, aligning vane ring inner
lugs with slots in No. 2 bearing housing cover flange, as index marked (Pre-SB5314
and Post-SB5321), and offset holes in lockplate and flange.
(7) Install bolts (5) with new keywashers (6). Torque 32 to 36 lb.in. (Pre-SB5358) or 24
to 36 lb. in. (Post-SB5358) and lock keywashers.
(8) Position No. 2 bearing housing cover (4) on flange in centerbore and press fully
home over flange lip.
(9) Position baffle (3) on cover and install bolts (1) with new keywashers (2).
(10) Post-SB5314: Centralize baffle (3) in vane ring (10) to maintain a radial gap of
0.005 to 0.011 inch.
(11) Torque bolts (1) 44 to 48 lb.in., slacken to zero, retorque 32 to 36 lb.in. and lock
keywashers.
72-50-01
Page 406
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Reassembly of Engine
NOTE: At this stage, blade-to-shroud clearance must be checked and if necessary

shroud segments ground to obtain required clearance (Ref. 72-50-01,
COMPRESSOR TURBINE VANE RING - APPROVED REPAIRS).
72-50-01
Page 407/408
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
COMPRESSOR TURBINE VANE RING - INSPECTION/CHECK
1. General
Personnel involved in inspection procedures should refer to Chapter 70-00-00,STANDARD

As the compressor turbine vane ring and shroud and the combustion exit ducts are
inspected during the performance of an engine hot-section inspection, all inspection
information and data pertaining to these components are detailed in 72-00-00,
INSPECTION/CHECK, Hot Section Inspection.
72-50-01 Page 601/602

COMPRESSOR TURBINE VANE RING - INSPECTION/CHECK Mar 09/2001
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
COMPRESSOR TURBINE VANE RING - APPROVED REPAIRS
1. General

Item No. Name

PWC05-145 Lapping Compound
3. Special Tools

PWC32209 Adapter
PWC32380 Radius Gage Obsolete - Replaced by
PWC71568
PWC34128 Grinding Wheel
PWC37917 Dresser, Diamond
PWC37918 Grinder
PWC71568 Radius Gage, Shroud Alternate to PWC32380
Segment
Not Applicable
5. Lapping of Mating Faces
A. General
To avoid the possibility of air leakage during engine operation, prior to assembly, mating
faces of vane ring, shroud housing, exit duct support flange and vane ring lockplate
must be lapped to obtain the required surface contact.
72-50-01
Page 801
COMPRESSOR TURBINE VANE RING - APPROVED REPAIRS Dec 02/2013
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Procedure (Ref. Fig. 801)
NOTE: Prior to lapping compressor turbine vane ring, check for interference when
installing lockplate. If necessary, grind off weld bead high spots on any two
opposing lugs and if interference is still present, remove one air exit lug by
grinding flush with inner ring using suitable tooling.
(1) Lap faces A through E using suitable lapping tools and lapping compound
(PWC05-145) to obtain the required surface contact.
(2) Thoroughly clean all parts to remove all traces of lapping compound as follows:
(a) Spray all surfaces with petroleum solvent (PWC11-027).
NOTE: Temperature of solvent must not exceed 52°C (125°F).
(b) If necessary, scrub parts to remove contamination.
(c) Allow solvent to drain from part and blow off residue with compressed air.
6. Grinding of Compressor Turbine Shroud
A. General
Localized grinding of shroud segments may be necessary during the performance of a

hot-section inspection to remove local high spots and obtain the required average
blade-to-shroud clearance (Ref. 72-00-00). If after localized grinding, the blade-to-shroud
clearance exceeds the specified limit, shroud segments of a suitable class must be
installed and if necessary ground as detailed in the following procedures.
B. Preparation (Ref. Fig. 802)
(1) Using an 8 to 9 in. micrometer, measure the O.D. of compressor turbine disk
assembly.
NOTE: Take measurement at several locations and record largest diameter.
(2) From Table 801 following, select shroud segment class required and install as
detailed in Page Block 401.
72-50-01
Page 802
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
0.227 MINIMUM FACE A LAP TO OBTAIN

AFTER LAPPING 100% CONTACT 0.000 − 0.004 T
IF POSSIBLE
1
0.001L − 0.003T
COMPRESSOR
TURBINE VANE 3
LUG THICKNESS RING
GAGE POINT
9.370 DIA. REF. 9.370 DIA.
MAXIMUM
2
FACE C LAP TO
OBTAIN 100%
AIR EXIT LUG CONTACT SECTIONAL VIEW OF LAPPED ASSEMBLY
6.480 DIA.
MINIMUM
0.101 MINIMUM
AFTER LAPPING EXIT DUCT
SUPPORT
FLANGE
FACE D LAP TO OBTAIN
90 − 100% CONTACT
COMPRESSOR TURBINE
SHROUD HOUSING 0.190 MAXIMUM
AFTER LAPPING
FACE B LAP TO OBTAIN

90 − 100% CONTACT
0.227 MINIMUM
AFTER LAPPING
0.156 MINIMUM
AFTER LAPPING
FACE E LAP TO
OBTAIN 100%
CONTACT
COMPRESSOR TURBINE
VANE RING LOCKPLATE
C22097A
Compressor Turbine Vane Ring, Shroud Housing and Exit Duct Support Flange - Lapping
Requirements
Figure 801
72-50-01
Page 803
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8
1
10
C41426
Compressor Turbine Shroud Measurement

Figure 802
72-50-01
Page 804
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 802
1. Hand Crank
2. Tip
3. Contact Point
4. Shroud Segment
5. Bolt
6. Adapter
7. Bolt
8. Gage
9. Gage Body
10. Dial Indicator
TABLE 801, Shroud Segment Classification
BLADED DISK TYPICAL DIA. RANGE

(INCHES) SEGMENT CLASS
8.548 - 8.556 4
8.539 - 8.547 6
8.530 - 8.538 8
8.521 - 8.529 10
8.515 - 8.520 12
8.506 - 8.514 14
8.496 - 8.505 16
(3) Install adapter (PWC32209) on compressor stubshaft and secure with bolt (5).
(4) Use radius gage (PWC32380) or (PWC71568) position gage body (9) on master
(8). Rotate hand crank (1) clockwise to ensure dial indicator (10) is at lowest
position.
(5) Set dial indicator (10) to zero.
(6) Ensuring that dial setting is not disturbed, remove indicator from master and install
on adapter (6) with indicator plunger on inner diameter of shroud segments (4).
(7) Secure gage body to adapter with bolts (7). Torque bolt 20 to 30 lb.in.
(8) By rotating gage body and adapter on compressor stubshaft, obtain and record the
average dial indicator reading from all shroud segments. Note whether indicator
reading is on plus or minus side of gage zero as shown in examples given in Para.
C. following.
(9) Remove gage body from adapter.
72-50-01
Page 805
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Calculation of Grinding Requirements
The data obtained in Paragraph B. preceding are identified and defined as follows and
grinding requirements calculated in the example using the following definitions:
v Dimension A = True radius as stamped on gage master

v Dimension B = Radius of compressor turbine disk assembly (1/2 OD as measured
with micrometer)
v Dimension C = Dial indicator reading on shroud segments.
v Dimension D = Radius of shroud segments
v Dimension E = Existing blade tip clearance before grinding
EXAMPLE:
A = 4.2820 inches
B = 4.2660 inches
C = 0.0130 inches, reading CW on minus side of gage zero
D = A minus C = 4.2820 minus 0.0130 in. = 4.2690 in.
E = D minus B = 4.2690 minus 4.2660 in. = 0.0030 in.
In this example, 0.016 in. must be ground from shroud segments to provide a blade tip
clearance of 0.019 in.
D. Grinding Procedure (Ref. Fig. 803)
(1) Install flexible blanking material (3 and 10) around exit duct and vane ring and
blank vane ring by fitting a cardboard disk of suitable diameter over adapter
(PWC32209) on compressor stubshaft.
(2) Install grinder (7) on adapter as follows:
(a) Install grinding wheel (PWC34128) on grinder (7) and install grinder on adapter.
Secure with bolts and torque 20 to 30 lb.in. Check 0.001 in. shim stock will not
fit between grinder and adapter to ensure correct mounting.
NOTE: Dressing of wheel may be done before or after installation of grinder

on adapter, or during grinding operation.
(b) Position wheel (1) in line with and slightly overlapping segments, using
handcrank (6). Allow wheel to touch vane ring. Back off handcrank (6) one turn
and lock using screw (8).
(c) Rotate grinder around segments adjusting radial adjuster (9) until wheel (1)
contacts high spots. Back off adjuster one turn.
(d) Connect grinder air line (4) to shop air of 90 psig with flow rate of 36 SCFM.
NOTE: Where pronounced high spots exist, rotate shroud grinder, back and
forth, through an arc of 40 to 50 degrees to reduce high spots before
carrying out normal 360 degree grinding.
72-50-01
Page 806
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: ROTATE GRINDER SLOWLY AND AVOID REMOVING AN EXCESSIVE

AMOUNT OF MATERIAL IN ONE PASS.
(e) Operate grinder. Adjust wheel (1) with radial adjuster (9) until wheel contacts,
and grind upper segments ID to required dimension.
NOTE: When grinding upper segments do not load grinder to compensate for
any compressor rotor bearing play. Support grinder when grinding
lower segments to prevent taper grinding.
(f) Back off radial adjuster until grinding wheel contacts high spots on lower
segments and continue grinding using complete revolutions until required
dimensions are met.
(g) Disconnect air hose (4) and remove grinder from adapter.
(h) Install radius gage and recheck shroud segment diameter (Ref. Para. B.,
preceding). Check segment taper by running contact point across width of
segments.
(i) Remove radius gage and return to master. Remove adapter.
(j) Using suitable suction cleaner, remove all grinding residue from gas generator
case.
(k) Remove all blanking material and repeat step (j).
(l) Remove all adhesive masking residue using solvent (PWC11-027).
(m) If grinding has produced a lip with sharp edge on inner edge of segment, or is
proud of the ground surface by more than 0.005 in., remove by local grinding
with hand held rotary tool, grinding wheel attachment and flexible drive, or similar
equipment.
72-50-01
Page 807
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3
1
13
12
11
4
6 5
9 8 7
10
C22989
Grinding of Compressor Turbine Shroud

Figure 803
72-50-01
Page 808
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 803
1. Grinding Wheel
2. Bolt (Shroud Housing)
3. Blanking Material (Exit Duct)
4. Air Hose
6. Handcrank
7. Grinder
8. Axial Adjuster Lockscrew
9. Radial Adjuster
10. Blanking Material (Stator Assembly)
11. Blanking Disk
12. Bolt
13. Diamond Wheel Dresser
72-50-01
Page 809/810
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
COMPRESSOR TURBINE DISK ASSEMBLY - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General
NOTE: Contents of 72-50-02 (Power Turbine Stator Assembly) can be found in 72-50-03.

Item No. Name

PWC01-001 Engine Fuel
PWC03-001 Engine Lubricating Oil
PWC06-004 Anti-seize Compound
3. Special Tools
Tool No. Name

PWC30331 Wrench
PWC30335 Spreader
PWC30336 Protector Sleeve
PWC30403 Puller
PWC30458 Locking Tool
PWC50057 Drill Kit
PWC50060 Injector, Oil
Not Applicable
A. Removal
(2) Remove power turbine and exhaust assembly (Ref. 72-50-00).
(3) Remove compressor turbine stubshaft bolt (Ref. Fig. 201).
72-50-02
Page 201
COMPRESSOR TURBINE DISK ASSEMBLY - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES Nov 16/2012
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2 4 3
5
GAS GENERATOR CASE
C22143
Unlocking of Turbine Stubshaft Bolt Keywasher (Typical)

Figure 201
72-50-02
Page 202
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 201
1 Wrench
2. Flange C
3. Protector Sleeve
4. Spreader
5. Keywasher
6. Turbine Stubshaft Bolt
(a) Install wrench (PWC30331) in gas generator case so that pins in arm
extensions locate in two bolt holes in flange C (2). Ensure that wrench is fully
engaged with compressor turbine disk.
(b) Insert protector sleeve (PWC30336) and spreader (PWC30335) into disk center
bore and screw spreader center bolt into internal thread in head of stubshaft
bolt (6) until keywasher (5) is unlocked. Remove spreader.
(c) If bolt is seized (Ref. Fig. 202):
1 Install drill bit, part of kit (PWC50057) in a suitable hand drill.
2 Install stop on drill bit 4.270 in. from tip.
3 Install bushing into CT bolt hole fingertight.
4 Set drill at slow speed and drill through bolt until drill stop contacts bolt
head. Use cutting oil, and remove debris at regular intervals.
5 Remove bushing from CT bolt and clean surrounding area.
6 Fill oil injector (PWC50060): turn knob cw until plunger bottoms. Place
injector tip in penetrating oil (50 % kerosene, 50 % engine oil is suitable),
and turn knob ccw to draw in oil.
7 Install injector in CT bolt. Make sure packing seals between injector and
bolt head.
8 Turn injector knob cw fingertight to empty injector and flood stubshaft

cavity. Maintain pressure in cavity by tightening knob at regular intervals for
5 minutes minimum.
9 Remove injector, and loosen bolt.
10 If bolt does not move, repeat steps 6 through 9 until bolt is removed.
CAUTION: TO AVOID DAMAGE TO THREADS, ENSURE REMOVAL TORQUE

DOES NOT EXCEED 150 LB.FT.
(d) Remove stubshaft bolt (6) and keywasher (5) using conventional socket and
wrench. If difficulty is encountered during removal of stubshaft bolt, proceed
as follows:
72-50-02
Page 203
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4.270
DRILL STOP
DRILL BIT
C T BOLT
BUSHING
OIL INJECTOR
PREFORMED PACKING
C T BOLT
C25663
Removal of CT Bolt
Figure 202
72-50-02
Page 204
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 Install oil injector (PWC50060) into compressor turbine stubshaft bolt.
2 Using oil injector, inject liberal quantity of approved penetrating oil (50%
fuel PWC01-001, 50% engine oil PWC03-001) through center hole in
bolt to flood cavity in stubshaft. Rotate turbine several times to allow oil to
transfer along slots in bolt threads. Allow to stand for 20 minutes.
Remove oil injector.
3 Commence to untorque bolt, which should loosen between 50 to 100 lb.ft.

If bolt does not loosen, repeat steps 1 and 2.
4 If bolt still does not loosen, apply sufficient torque to just move bolt, do not
exceed 150 lb.ft. Reverse the torque and work back and forth until bolt is
free and can be unscrewed normally.
(e) Remove wrench (PWC30331) and protector sleeve (PWC30336).
(4) Remove disk assembly (Ref. Fig. 203).
(a) Insert puller (PWC30403) in disk center bore and engage lugs (2) with slots (3)
(Ref. View A).
(b) Ease body (4) downwards until lug (2) is below slot (3) (Ref.View B).
(c) Rotate body and lug to contact underside of disk (Ref. View C).
CAUTION: DO NOT CONTINUE PULLER OPERATION AFTER SNAP FIT IS

RELEASED. BLADE EDGES MAY BE DAMAGED IF CONTACT IS
MADE WITH SHROUD OR SHROUD HOUSING.
(d) Position lock (5) in disk slot and turn nut (6) until turbine disk snap fit is broken
(evidenced by freedom of puller operation).
(e) Remove puller.
(f) Remove wrench (PWC30331) from Flange C.
(g) Lift turbine disk clear of shaft splines.
(1) Apply light coat of compound (PWC06-004) to splines of compressor stubshaft.
(2) Align master splines and press turbine disk (1) onto stubshaft.
(3) Ensure that new keywasher (3) is dry and free from burrs.
(4) Apply light coat of compound (PWC06-004) to bore surfaces of keywasher and to
shoulder and threads of turbine stubshaft bolt (4).
(5) Insert keywasher and mounting bolt into disk center bore.
72-50-02
Page 205
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5 4 6
1
B
7
2 5
C3423
Compressor Turbine Disk Assembly - Removal

Figure 203
72-50-02
Page 206
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 203
1. Puller
2. Lug
3. Turbine Disk Slot
4. Body
5. Lock
6. Nut
7. Turbine Disk
(6) Install protector sleeve (PWC30336) in disk center bore and wrench (PWC30331)
on Flange C (9).
(7) Using conventional socket wrench, torque turbine stubshaft bolt (4) 600 to 650 lb.in.
Slacken to zero and retorque 500 to 550 lb.in.
(8) Remove socket wrench and protector sleeve.
(9) Unscrew nut (6) of locking tool (PWC30458) to top of threads (8) and install in disk
center bore.
(10) Engage screw (7) in threads of turbine stubshaft bolt (4) and tighten until resistance
is felt.
NOTE: Do not use excessive force when tightening screw.
(11) Turn nut (6) clockwise until keywasher (3) is crimped.
(12) Slacken nut (6) and turn screw (7) counterclockwise until released from turbine
stubshaft bolt threads.
(13) Remove locking tool and protector from center bore.
(14) Remove wrench (PWC30331) from Flange C.
(15) Inspect center bore for presence of metal swarf. If necessary, remove with a clean
lint-free cloth.
(16) Check blade tip clearance using wire or tapered feeler gage. Clearance as detailed
in 72-50-01, Page Block 801 .
6. Inspection/Check
Inspection procedures and damage limits applicable to the compressor turbine disk are
covered in the engine hot-section inspection procedures (Ref. 72-00-00, INSPECTION/CHECK).
72-50-02
Page 207
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2
1
5
1
7 8 6 5 3
C3819
Compressor Turbine Disk Assembly - Installation (Typical)

Figure 204
72-50-02
Page 208
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 204
1. Turbine Disk
2. Wrench
3. Keywasher
4. Turbine Stubshaft Bolt
5. Locking Tool
6. Nut
7. Screw
8. Thread
9. Flange C
72-50-02
Page 209/210
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
POWER TURBINE STATOR ASSEMBLY - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. General
NOTE: Contents of 72-50-03 (Power Turbine Disk Assembly) can be found in 72-50-04.

Item No. Name

PWC05-089 Lockwire
PWC07-023 Coating
PWC11-002 DELETED
3. Special Tools
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
5. Procedure (Ref. Fig. 401)
A. General
Removal/Installation of the stator assembly for replacement of the vane ring may be
necessary for the following reasons.
(a) Damage/wear limits are exceeded (Ref. 72-00-00, INSPECTION/CHECK, Hot
Section Inspection).
NOTE: In this case it is advisable to replace the vane ring with one having a
class within + 0.2 to - 0.1 of class of removed vane ring.
(b) After replacement of compressor turbine vane ring, engine fails to meet
performance check limits (Ref. 72-00-00, FAULT ISOLATION, Performance
Check Problems).
72-50-03
Page 401
POWER TURBINE STATOR ASSEMBLY - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION Nov 16/2012
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5
FACE A D E
3
1
5 COMPRESSOR TURBINE
SHROUD HOUSING (REF.) 11
SECTION A−A
7
FACE B
INSTALLATION DETAIL
( PT6T−3D/−3DE ONLY )
8 A
2
A
9
1
11
4
5
10
6
7
3
( PT6T−3D/−3DE ONLY )
C22112B
Power Turbine Stator Assembly - Removal/Installation

72-50-03
Page 402
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 401
1. Exhaust Duct
2. T5 Harness
3. Nut
4. Bolt
5. Stator Housing Assembly
6. Stator Assembly
7. Power Turbine Shroud
8. T5 Probes
9. Probe and Harness Assembly
10. Dowels
11. Interstage Sealing Ring
12. Bolt
72-50-03
Page 403
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5
FACE A D E
12
1
5 COMPRESSOR TURBINE
SHROUD HOUSING (REF.) 11
SECTION A−A
7
FACE B
INSTALLATION DETAIL
( PT6T−3DF ONLY )
8 A
2
A
9
1
11
5
10
6
7
( PT6T−3DF ONLY )
12
C28702
Power Turbine Stator Assembly - Removal/Installation

72-50-03
Page 404
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Removal
NOTE: The stator assembly comprises a vane ring and an interstage baffle assembly
which is riveted within the vane ring. This baffle assembly must not be
removed.
(3) Cut and remove lockwire and release T5 harness from clip on exhaust duct (1).
(4) For PT6T-3D/-3DE engines, remove nuts (3) and bolts (4).
(5) For PT6T-3DF engines, remove bolts (12).
(6) Remove complete assembly of shroud, stator and stator housing from exhaust duct.
NOTE: Care must be exercised when withdrawing stator assembly (6) from stator
housing assembly (5). Stator assembly must be withdrawn straight so that
sides of slots do not contact T5 probes.
(7) Separate power turbine shroud (7), stator assembly (6) and stator housing
assembly (5).
C. Installation
NOTE: To avoid the possibility of air leakage during engine operation the mating faces
of stator assembly (6) and power turbine shroud (7) must be lapped as detailed
in Approved Repairs, Page Block 801.
(1) Insert stator assembly (6) in stator housing (5), ensuring that sides of slots in stator
do not contact probes (8).
(2) Check for adequate sealing at Faces D and E as follows:
(a) Install selected interstage sealing ring (8) in stator housing contacting area on
Face D.
(b) Hold suitable light source behind ring around contact area, ensuring that gap
between ring and contact area does not exceed 0.001 inch over an arc of 30°
maximum length. Rotate sealing ring, if necessary, to achieve maximum
contact. Index ring gap at new position.
(3) Clean faces A and B of exhaust duct and power turbine stator housing with
abrasive cloth (PWC05-101) and then clean with isopropyl alcohol (PWC11-014).
(4) Apply thin layer of coating (PWC07-023) to faces A and B and let dry 5 to 10 minutes.
72-50-03
Page 405
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) Apply second layer of coating (PWC07-023) to faces A and B to obtain 0.002 to
0.003 thickness. Let dry 5 to 10 minutes.
NOTE: Assembly of parts must be completed within 15 minutes of final application

of coating.
(6) Position power turbine shroud (7) in stator housing assembly (5), engaging lugs
with slots in stator assembly and dowels (10) in holes in shroud housing.
(7) Position assembly on exhaust duct (1) and align offset holes.
(8) For PT6T-3D/-3DE engines, install bolts (4) and nuts (3). Torque 32 to 36 lb.in. and
lockwire.
(9) For PT6T-3DF engines, install bolts (12) and torque 32 to 36 lb.in. and lockwire.
(10) Ensure that power turbine blades do not rub on shroud.
(11) Secure T5 harness in clip on exhaust duct with lockwire lacing.
(12) Verify T5 system integrity by carrying out checks detailed in 77-20-01,

INSPECTION/CHECK.
72-50-03
Page 406
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
POWER TURBINE STATOR ASSEMBLY - INSPECTION/CHECK
1. General
Inspection procedures and damage limits applicable to the power turbine stator assembly are
covered in engine hot-section inspection procedures, as detailed in 72-00-00,
INSPECTION/CHECK, Hot Section Inspection.
72-50-03 Page 601/602

POWER TURBINE STATOR ASSEMBLY - INSPECTION/CHECK Mar 09/2001
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
POWER TURBINE STATOR ASSEMBLY - APPROVED REPAIRS
1. General
A. Personnel involved in repairs should refer to Chapter 70-00-00, STANDARD PRACTICES

to familiarize themselves with general procedures.
Item No. Name

PWC05-145 Lapping Compound
3. Special Tools
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
5. Procedure
Repair of stator assembly is restricted to lapping of mating face of vane ring to obtain
optimum surface contact with shroud and thus minimize the possibility of air leakage during
engine operation.
A. Lapping of Power Turbine Stator Assembly (Ref. Fig. 801)
(1) Lap face A using suitable lapping tools and lapping compound (PWC05-145) to
obtain the specified surface contact.
(2) Thoroughly clean to remove all traces of lapping compound, as follows:
(a) Spray all surfaces with petroleum solvent (PWC11-027).
NOTE: Temperature of solvent must not exceed 52°C (125°F).
(b) If necessary, scrub surfaces to remove all contamination.
(c) Allow solvent to drain and blow off residue with compressed air.
72-50-03 Page 801

POWER TURBINE STATOR ASSEMBLY - APPROVED REPAIRS Mar 09/2001
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FACE A LAP TO OBTAIN 100% CONTACT
0.100 MINIMUM
POWER TURBINE
STATOR ASSEMBLY
0.300 MIN.
1.285 MINIMUM A MAXIMUM GAP OF 0.001

IS PERMISSIBLE OVER
3.000 MAXIMUM TOTAL
POWER TURBINE CIRCUMFERENTIAL LENGTH
SHROUD
POWER TURBINE
STATOR ASSEMBLY
SECTIONAL VIEW OF LAPPED ASSEMBLY
C9323
Power Turbine Stator Assembly - Lapping Requirements

Figure 801
72-50-03 Page 802

POWER TURBINE STATOR ASSEMBLY - APPROVED REPAIRS Mar 09/2001
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
POWER TURBINE DISK ASSEMBLY - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General

Item No. Name

PWC06-004A Anti-seize Compound
3. Special Tools

PWC30269 Mount Ring
PWC30335 Spreader
PWC30336 Protector Sleeve
PWC30403 Puller
PWC30458 Locking Tool
PWC30811 Wrench, Power Obsolete - Replaced by
Turbine Disk PWC51409
PWC50060 Injector, Oil
PWC51409 Wrench, Disk Alternate to PWC30811
Not Applicable
Power turbine disk assembly may only be removed for inspection purposes at maintenance
level. Disk replacement involves balancing procedures that may only be carried out at an
overhaul facility.
A. Removal
(3) Remove power turbine stator assembly (Ref. 72-50-03).
72-50-04
Page 201
POWER TURBINE DISK ASSEMBLY - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES Dec 02/2013
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) Remove turbine stubshaft bolt (Ref. Fig. 201).
(a) Install wrench (PWC30811) or (PWC51409) so that pins in arm extensions

locate in two bolt holes in exhaust duct flange, make sure that three dogs
within power turbine disk balancing ring engage with wrench.
(b) Insert protector sleeve (PWC30336), and spreader (PWC30335) into disk
centerbore and screw spreader center bolt into internal thread in head of
stubshaft bolt (5) until keywasher (4) is unlocked.
CAUTION: TO AVOID DAMAGE TO THREADS, ENSURE REMOVAL TORQUE

DOES NOT EXCEED 150 LB.FT.
(c) Remove stubshaft bolt and keywasher using a conventional socket. If difficulty
is encountered during removal of stubshaft bolt proceed as follows:
1 Install oil injector (PWC50060) into power turbine stubshaft bolt.
2 Using oil injector, inject liberal quantity of approved penetrating oil (50%
kerosene, 50% engine oil) through center hole in bolt to flood cavity in
stubshaft. Rotate turbine several times to allow oil to transfer along slots in
bolt threads. Allow to stand for 20 minutes. Remove oil injector.
3 Commence to untorque bolt which should loosen between 50 to 100 lb.ft. If

bolt does not loosen repeat step (2).
4 If bolt still does not loosen, apply sufficient torque to just move bolt, do not
exceed 150 lb.ft. Reverse the torque and work back and forth until bolt is
free and can be unscrewed normally.
(d) Remove wrench (PWC30811) or (PWC51409) and protector sleeve (PWC30336)

from centerbore.
(5) Remove disk assembly (Ref. Fig. 202).
(a) Insert puller (PWC30403) into disk centerbore and engage lugs (2) with slots
(3) (Ref. View A).
(b) Ease body (4) downwards until lug (2) is below slot (3) (Ref. View B).
(c) Rotate body and lug to contact underside of disk (Ref. View C).
CAUTION: DO NOT CONTINUE PULLER OPERATION AFTER SNAP FIT IS

RELEASED.
(d) Position lock (5) in disk slot and turn nut (6) until turbine disk snap fit is
released (evidenced by freedom of puller operation).
(e) Remove puller.
(f) Remove wrench (PWC30811) or (PWC51409) from exhaust duct.
(g) Withdraw turbine disk assembly.
72-50-04
Page 202
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE: Ensure power turbine rotor air seal is installed prior to power turbine installation.
(1) Apply light coat of compound (PWC06-004A) to splines of disk hub.
(2) Align master splines and press turbine disk onto shaft.
(3) Ensure that new keywasher (7) is dry and free from burrs.
(4) Apply light coat of compound (PWC06-004A) to bore surfaces of keywasher and to
shoulder and threads of stubshaft bolt (8).
(5) Insert keywasher and bolt into disk centerbore.
(6) Install wrench (PWC30811) or (PWC51409) on exhaust duct and insert protector
sleeve (PWC30336) into centerbore of wrench and disk.
(7) Using a conventional socket wrench, torque stubshaft bolt 600 to 650 lb.in. Slacken
to zero and re-torque 500 to 550 lb.in.
(8) Remove socket wrench and protector sleeve.
(9) Unscrew nut (5) to top of threads (4) and install locking tool (PWC30458) in disk
centerbore.
(10) Engage screw (3) in thread of stubshaft bolt and tighten until resistance is felt.
NOTE: Do not use excessive force when tightening screw.
(11) Turn nut (5) clockwise until keywasher is crimped.
(12) Slacken nut (5) and turn screw (3) until it is released from stubshaft bolt threads.
(13) Remove locking tool (6) from centerbore
(14) Remove wrench (2) from exhaust duct.
(15) Inspect centerbore for presence of metal swarf and if necessary, remove with clean
lint-free cloth.
(16) Install power turbine stator assembly (Ref. 72-50-03).
6. Inspection/Check
Inspection procedures and damage limits applicable to the power turbine disk are covered in
the engine hot section inspection procedures (Ref. 72-00-00, INSPECTION/CHECK, Hot
Section Inspection).
72-50-04
Page 203
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE: POSITION TOOL ON

3 DOGS LOCATED
1 WITHIN BALANCING RING
3
4
5
C3101A
Removal of Power Turbine Disk Stubshaft Bolt

Figure 201
72-50-04
Page 204
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 201
1. Wrench
2. Protector Sleeve
3. Spreader
4. Keywasher
5. Stubshaft Bolt
6. Mount Ring (PWC30269) (Ref.)
72-50-04
Page 205
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6
5
2
4
1
VIEW A
3 7
VIEW B
2
VIEW C 4
C3102
Removal of Power Turbine Disk Assembly

Figure 202
72-50-04
Page 206
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 202
1. Puller
2. Lug
3. Disk Slot
4. Body
5. Lock
6. Nut
7. Turbine Disk
72-50-04
Page 207
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3
4 NOTE: POSITION TOOL ON
3 DOGS LOCATED
5 WITHIN BALANCING RING
2
1
6
7
8
10
9
11
CAUTION: ENSURE LEGS (10) OF KEY−WASHER SEAT IN SLOTS (9)
C3103A
Installation of Power Turbine Disk Assembly

Figure 203
72-50-04
Page 208
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 203
1. Power Turbine Disk

2. Wrench
3. Screw
4. Thread
5. Nut
6. Locking Tool
7. Keywasher
8. Stubshaft Bolt
9. Slots
10. Keywasher Legs
11. Mount Ring (PWC30269) (Ref.)
72-50-04
Page 209/210
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
SECTION PAGE DATE
LEP 1 Nov 23/2015
2 blank Nov 23/2015

2 blank Nov 23/2015
72-60-00 1 Aug 12/96

Description and 2 Aug 12/96
Operation
72-60-00 201 Nov 23/2015

204 Nov 23/2015
205 Nov 23/2015
206 Nov 23/2015
207 Nov 23/2015
208 Nov 23/2015
209 Nov 23/2015
210 Nov 23/2015

Page 1/2
72-60 LEP Nov 23/2015
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
ACCESSORY GEARBOX - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION 72-60-00
1. Description and Operation 1) 1
ACCESSORY GEARBOX - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES 72-60-00

1. General 201
A. Removal of Accessory Drive Seals 202
B. Installation of Accessory Drive Seals 202
C. Removal of Centrifugal Breather Carbon Seal 202
D. Installation of Centrifugal Breather Carbon Seal 202
E. Removal of Oil Filler Neck and Oil Level Indicator 203
F. Installation of Oil Filler Neck and Oil Level Indicator 203

A. Centrifugal Breather Carbon Seal 203
A. ‘‘Keensert’’ Insert Replacement Procedure 205

Page 1/2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ACCESSORY GEARBOX - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. Description and Operation (Ref. Fig. 1)
The accessory gearbox comprises a cast magnesium alloy cover and a housing containing
the various gears, shafts and mounting pads associated with the engine fuel and oil system
pumps, the tachometer generator, the starter generator and the centrifugal breather. The
cover is secured to the housing by studs and the complete assembly is secured to the
compressor inlet case by studs at Flange G. The gearbox is driven by the compressor through
a coupling shaft which is supported by a ball-type bearing in the cover. The remainder of
the gearshafts are supported by roller-type bearings in the cover and the housing. The upper
part of the gearbox contains the tachometer generator drive gear, the fuel pump and fuel
control unit (FCU) gear and the centrifugal breather and starter-generator gears. These gears
are driven from the coupling shaft via two idler gears. The lower part of the gearbox
contains three oil scavenge and one main pressure pump, which are driven from the lower
idler gear and are mounted on a common shaft. The housing also contains an integral oil tank.
Oil filler tubes and apertures for visual contents gages are provided on both sides of the
gearbox and those not in use when the gearbox is installed on the engine (i.e. the inner ones)
are blanked off.
Internal cored passages and pressure tubes take pressure oil to No.1 bearing in the inlet
case, oil being returned by gravity to the accessory gearbox sump. Pressure oil to power
section and reduction gearbox input section bearings and scavenge oil from them, is
conveyed through external pipes. A centrifugal breather impeller mounted on the
starter-generator drive gearshaft separates oil from breather air in the gearbox housing, the
air being vented from a cored passage in the top of the housing.
A carbon face seal on the gearbox housing end of the gearshaft prevents oil leakage through
the bearing assembly. An external line takes pressure oil from the check and regulating
valve on the lower part of the gearbox to a boss on the gearbox cover, which is connected to
the oil-to-fuel heater by an internal passage. An oil pressure adjustment valve assembly is
installed at the top of the gearbox and a boss on the lower part of the gearbox houses a
magnetic chip detector assembly.
72-60-00 Page 1
ACCESSORY GEARBOX - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION Aug 12/96
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PRESSURE
ADJUSTMENT FUEL PUMP
VALVE BOSS AND FCU DRIVE
CENTRIFUGAL
STARTER BREATHER
TACHOMETER
GENERATOR GENERATOR
MOUNTING DRIVE
PAD CARBON SEAL
STARTER
OIL GENERATOR
FILLER OIL−TO−FUEL HEATER
LINE BOSS DRIVE
IDLER GEARS
COVER
MAGNETIC CHIP
DETECTOR
COUPLING SHAFT
FUEL PUMP AND CENTRIFUGAL
FCU GEARS BREATHER AND
STARTER
GENERATOR
GEARS
CONTENTS
GAGE
SCAVENGE
PUMPS
HOUSING
TACHO−GENERATOR PRESSURE
GEAR PUMP
CHECK AND REGULATING

VALVE ASSEMBLY IDLER IDLER
GEARS GEAR
COUPLING SHAFT
LUBRICATING
OIL PUMPS
C9358
Accessory Gearbox - Component Location

Figure 1
72-60-00 Page 2
ACCESSORY GEARBOX - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION Aug 12/96
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ACCESSORY GEARBOX - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General

Item No. Name

PWC05-089 Lockwire
3. Special Tools

PWC30046-52 Puller (Starter)
PWC30046-54 Puller (Fuel Pump)
PWC30046-57 Puller (Ng Alternate to PWC30052
Tacho-generator)
PWC30052 Puller
PWC30075 Drift
PWC30675 Drift,
PWC32810 Puller
PWC37088-1 Drift, Seal
PWC37088-002 Drift
PWC37088-003 Drift
Name Remarks
Locking Tool TD1032L
Removal and disassembly of the accessory gearbox assembly is not required at maintenance
(Ref. Overhaul Manual).
72-60-00
Page 201
ACCESSORY GEARBOX - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES Nov 23/2015
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Removal of Accessory Drive Seals (Ref. Fig. 201)
(1) Remove accessory from mounting pad.
(2) If applicable, remove retaining ring (1).
(3) Remove unserviceable oil seal (3) and seal carrier (2) from gearbox housing with
starter puller (PWC30046-52) or fuel pump puller (PWC30046-54) or Ng
Tacho-generator puller (PWC30046-57) or puller (PWC30052).
(4) Remove seal (3) and preformed packing (4) from oil seal carrier with base and drift
(PWC37088-1), (PWC37088-002) or (PWC37088-003). Discard seal (3) and
preformed packing (4).
B. Installation of Accessory Drive Seals (Ref. Fig. 201)
(1) Lubricate new seal (3) with engine oil (PWC03-001).
(2) Use drift (PWC37088-1), (PWC37088-002) or (PWC37088-003) to gently hand-press

seal into oil seal carrier from pressure side.
(3) Lubricate and install new preformed packing (4) on OD of oil seal carrier.
(4) Install assembled oil seal (3) and seal carrier (2) in boss of gearbox housing. Press
into position with drift (PWC30075).
(5) Where applicable, install retaining ring (1).
(6) Install accessory unit or cover, as applicable.
C. Removal of Centrifugal Breather Carbon Seal (Ref. Fig. 202)
(2) Withdraw seal carrier (2) and carbon seal assembly (3) from housing, using puller
(PWC30046-52).
(3) Insert fingers of puller (PWC32810) fully home in bore of seal retainer and withdraw
carbon seal assembly from seal carrier by turning extractor screw clockwise using
suitable Allen key.
(4) Inspect carbon seal as detailed in Paragraph 6. A. following:
D. Installation of Centrifugal Breather Carbon Seal (Ref. Fig. 202)
(1) Immerse seal carrier (2) in clean oil heated to 121°C (250°F) for 10 to 15 minutes.
(2) Lubricate carbon seal assembly and ensure that carbon seal (5) moves freely in
and out against spring (6).
(3) Remove seal carrier (2) from oil, allow excess oil to drain and install carbon seal
assembly (3) in carrier, using drift (PWC30675).
72-60-00
Page 202
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) Install new preformed packings (4) on carrier.
(5) Install assembly in housing using drift (PWC30075).
E. Removal of Oil Filler Neck and Oil Level Indicator (Ref. Fig. 203)
(1) Remove oil filler cap (11).
(2) Remove and discard preformed packing (12) from the oil filler cap (11).
(3) Remove bolts (18), washers (19) and oil filler neck (13) from housing.
(4) Pre-SB5459: Remove strainer (16), retaining ring (17) and preformed packings (14
and 15). Discard preformed packings (14 and 15).
(5) Post-SB5459: Remove oil filler tube (21), ball (22), retaining ring (23), retaining ring
(17) and preformed packings (14 and 15). Discard preformed packings (14 and 15).
(6) Remove bolts (9), washers (10), blanking plate (5) and gasket (6) at inboard side of
housing.
(7) Remove bolts (7), washers (8), oil level indicator (1), gasket (2), reflector (3) and
gasket (4) at outboard side of housing.
F. Installation of Oil Filler Neck and Oil Level Indicator (Ref. Fig. 203)
(1) Install gasket (4), reflector (3), gasket (2) and oil level indicator (1) at outboard side
of housing with washers (8) and bolts (7). Torque bolts 24 - 36 lb.in. and lockwire.
(2) Install gasket (6) and blanking plate (5) at inboard side of housing with washers
(10) and bolts (9). Torque bolts 24 - 36 lb.in. and lockwire.
(3) Pre-SB5459: Assemble retaining ring (17), strainer (16), preformed packings (14
and 15) and oil filler neck (13) together and install the part with bolts (18) and
washers (19). Torque bolts 24 - 36 lb.in. and lockwire.
(4) Post-SB5459: Assemble retaining ring (17), oil filler tube (21) , ball (22), retaining
ring (23), preformed packings (14 and 15) and oil filler neck (13) together and
install the part with bolts (18) and washers (19). Torque bolts 24 - 36 lb.in. and
lockwire.
(5) Install preformed packing (12) and filler cap (11).
6. Inspection/Check
A. Centrifugal Breather Carbon Seal
NOTE: Cracks in any portion of seal are cause for rejection.
(1) Inspect sealing face for chips, nicks and scratches. Seal is acceptable provided
that:
72-60-00
Page 203
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
C3077A
Removal/Installation of Accessory Drive Seals

Figure 201
72-60-00
Page 204
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 201
1. Retaining Ring
2. Seal Carrier
3. Seal
(a) 50% of seal face width in damage area remains undamaged.
(b) A circular strip not less than 45% of original face width makes sealing contact.
(c) Scratches extending across sealing face are less than 0.005 in. deep
and 0.010 in. wide.
(2) Inspect condition of remaining areas of seal. Seal is acceptable provided that:
(a) There is no evidence of carbon deterioration.
(b) At least 70% of normal seal cross-section is still available.
(c) Scratches are less than 0.005 in. deep and 0.010 in. wide.
7. Approved Repairs
NOTE: The following procedure applies only to specific sized inserts used in the accessory
gearbox to airframe mounting pad. Refer to Illustrated Parts Catalog for approved
location and particular part number of insert.
A. ‘‘Keensert’’ Insert Replacement Procedure (Ref. Fig. 204)
(1) Drill out insert material between keys to depth shown using 13/32 inch diameter drill
(Ref. Detail A).
(3) Remove insert with a standard ‘‘E-Z Out’’ type tool (Ref. Detail C).
(4) Screw in new insert, using fingers, to a depth of 0.010 to 0.030 in. below surface of
parent component (Ref. Detail D).
(5) Using a ‘‘Kee’’ driving-tool (TD1032L) and a hammer, drive down keys with several
light taps (Ref. Detail E).
72-60-00
Page 205
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4
4
5
1
C3073A
Removal/Installation of Centrifugal Breather Carbon Seal

Figure 202
72-60-00
Page 206
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 202
1. Retaining Ring
2. Seal Carrier
3. Carbon Seal Assembly
5. Carbon Seal
6. Carbon Seal Spring
72-60-00
Page 207
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
20
18
19
14
INBOARD SIDE
11
PRE−SB5459
12
13 15
16 9
10
7 8 17
OUTBOARD SIDE
6 5
21
22 1 4
2 3
23
POST−SB5459
C165004
Removal or Installation of Oil Filler Neck and Sight Glass

Figure 203
72-60-00
Page 208
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 203
1. Oil level indicator

2. Gasket
3. Reflector
4. Gasket
5. Blanking Plate
6. Gasket
7. Bolt
8. Washer
9. Bolt
10. Washer
11. Filler Cap
13. Filler Neck
16. Strainer (Pre-SB5459)
17. Retaining Ring
18. Bolt
19. Washer
20. Housing (Ref.)
21. Oil Filler Tube (Post-SB5459)
22. Ball (Post-SB5459)
23. Retaining Ring (Post-SB5459)
72-60-00
Page 209
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
13
32 IN. DRILL
LOCKING KEYS
0.200 INCH
KEENSERT DETAIL B DETAIL C

DETAIL A
0.030 − 0.010 INCH
DETAIL D KEE DRIVING TOOL
DETAIL E
C3559
Replacement of ‘‘Keensert’’ Inserts - Accessory Gearbox

Figure 204
72-60-00
Page 210
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
SECTION PAGE DATE
LEP 1 Mar 09/2001
2 blank Mar 09/2001

2 blank Mar 09/2001
73-00-00 1 Mar 09/2001

Description and 2 blank Mar 09/2001
Operation 3 Mar 09/2001
4 blank Mar 09/2001
5 Mar 09/2001
6 Mar 09/2001
7 Mar 09/2001
8 Mar 09/2001
9 Mar 09/2001
10 Mar 09/2001
11 Mar 09/2001
12 Mar 09/2001
13 Mar 09/2001
14 Mar 09/2001
15 Mar 09/2001
16 Mar 09/2001
17 Mar 09/2001
18 blank Mar 09/2001
Page 1/2
73-00 LEP Mar 09/2001
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION 73-00-00
1. Engine Fuel System 1
A. System Components 1
B. System Operation 15
Page 1/2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. Engine Fuel System
The engine fuel system comprises two separate identical power section fuel control systems
with their associated fuel pumps and a common torque limiter. Each system has two
operating modes, automatic (normal flight) or manual (emergency) which may be selected by
the pilot at his discretion for individual power sections.
The power section control system comprises a fuel pump, a manual fuel control unit
(MFCU), an automatic fuel control unit (AFCU), a flow divider and dump valve, a power
turbine (Nf) governor, an oil-to-fuel heater, a dual fuel manifold and 14 duplex nozzles.
System fuel pumps are engine driven and are designed to operate at altitude without cavitating.
Manual and automatic fuel control units on each power section are mechanically
interconnected and are linked to pilot-operated airframe controls.
At start the levers are moved from their minimum stops, which correspond to no-flow, to a
no-load position through 50 degrees approximately. In flight, the levers are set to their
fully-open position. If manual control is selected, the levers are moved within the 50
degree to fully open range until shutdown. Servo-pressure is always available for transfer to
manual control.
During transfer from automatic to manual modes, a surge accumulator located between the
MFCU and the flow divider and dump valve, ensures that delivery pressure is maintained
constant by absorbing any surges.
After shutdown, residual fuel is drained by two drain valves installed at the bottom of the gas
generator case.
A. System Components (Ref. Fig. 1)
(1) Fuel Pump
The positive displacement gear type pump, which incorporates spring and fuel
pressure loaded bushings, is mounted on the accessory gearbox. A splined coupling
is used to transmit the geartrain drive to the pump gears; the coupling splines are
lubricated by oil mist from the gearbox through a hole in the gearshaft.
Fuel enters the pump through a 10 micron strainer element and passes to the
pump gear chamber. Fuel pressure upstream and downstream from the strainer is
monitored by two pressure taps.
In the event of strainer blockage causing a pressure build-up, a spring loaded

piston-type bypass valve provides an alternative route for unfiltered fuel.
Bypass fuel from the fuel controls is returned to the pump inlet through an injector
pump downstream from the strainer. This non-mechanical injector pump takes
the excess flow from the fuel control and transmits the energy contained in the higher
pressure bypass fuel to the pump inlet.
73-00-00 Page 1/2

ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION Mar 09/2001
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C22131
Fuel Control System Schematic
Figure 1
73-00-00 Page 3/4

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Manual Fuel Control Unit (MFCU)
The MFCU, which is mounted on the accessory gearbox, comprises a transfer

valve, a solenoid valve, a metering and cut-off valve, a pressurizing valve and a
bypass valve. In automatic mode it directs fuel from the pump to the automatic fuel
control unit (AFCU) and from the AFCU to the manifold and nozzles. In manual
mode it passes fuel from the pump directly to the manifold and nozzles.
(a) Transfer and Solenoid Valves
The transfer valve consists of a spring-loaded piston moving in a ported

cylinder. Depending on the position of the piston, fuel is passed from an inlet
port to an outlet port to the AFCU, or from the inlet port to a manually controlled
metering valve. Pressures across the transfer valve piston are equalized by a
piston centerbore which allows fuel to fill the space above the piston. A
spring-loaded pressure relief valve, in parallel with the transfer valve, allows
fuel to be bypassed back to the fuel pump if inlet pressure increases.
The solenoid valve is spring-loaded to a closed position and seals the space
above the transfer valve piston while de-energized. When electrical power is
applied to the solenoid valve, it opens against spring pressure to allow fuel
from the transfer valve into the bypass line. The resultant drop in pressure above
the transfer valve piston causes it to move against spring pressure and block
the fuel outlet port to the AFCU. At the same time, it opens a port to the metering
valve.
(b) Metering and Cut-off Valve
This combined valve is controlled by the manual throttle lever which is

mechanically linked to a piston within the valve. The piston controls fuel flow in
the metering valve cylinder from inlet to outlet port. The space below the
piston is filled with fuel from the transfer valve and the pressure of this fuel
prevents piston drift from any set position. A bypass restrictor across the metering
valve inlet and outlet ports becomes effective when the valve approaches its
minimum position and ensures a suitable minimum flow.
The manual throttle lever also controls a piston in a ported cylinder. In the
‘‘OFF’’ position fuel flow to the manifold is cut-off by the piston and is directed
to a bypass line. The two inlet lines to the cylinder, one from the AFCU, the
other from the metering valve, each contain a check valve. Depending on which
mode is being used, back pressure on the check valve in the inoperative line
closes the valve, thus sealing off the system not in use.
(c) Pressurizing Valve
The pressurizing valve in the line between the cut-off valve and the manifold
ensures that no fuel flows to the manifold until a pre-set minimum pressure has
been attained.
73-00-00
Page 5
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(d) Bypass Valve
The diaphragm-type bypass valve controls bypass fuel flow to maintain a

constant differential between the pump delivery pressure being applied to the
entrance to the metering valve and the metered fuel pressure immediately after
the metering valve.
(3) Automatic Fuel Control Unit (AFCU) (Ref. Fig. 2)
The AFCU, which is mounted on the fuel pump, basically comprises three sections;
a fuel section, a power input, speed governor and bias section and a bellows
section.
The unit is driven at a speed proportional to gas generator speed (Ng) and
establishes a proper fuel schedule, in response to power requirements, by controlling
Ng through regulation of fuel flow.
(a) Fuel Section
The AFCU is supplied with fuel from the pump through the transfer valve in the
MFCU.
Flow is established by a metering valve and bypass valve system, fuel at pump
(P1) pressure being applied to the entrance of the metering valve. Fuel
pressure immediately after the valve, metered fuel (P2) pressure, is compared
with P1 pressure by the bypass valve, and a constant differential (P1 - P2)
is maintained. The orifice area of the metering valve changes to meet specific
power section requirements, and fuel pump output in excess of those
requirements is returned to the pump inlet. Returned fuel is referred to as Po.
The bypass valve consists of a sliding valve in a ported sleeve, actuated
by a diaphragm and spring. In operation, spring force is balanced by P1 - P2
pressure differential working on the diaphragm.
The metering valve consists of a contoured needle working in a sleeve, so that

needle movement changes the valve orifice area. The bypass valve maintains
an essentially constant differential fuel pressure across the orifice, regardless of
variations in fuel inlet and discharge pressures. Fuel flow is thus a function of
orifice area, and consequently is controlled solely by metering valve position.
Compensation for variations in specific gravity of the fuel, caused by fuel

temperature changes, is provided by a bi-metallic disk under the bypass valve
spring. An external adjustment above the bypass valve is provided to adjust
acceleration rate of either power section to within predetermined limits.
(b) Power Input, Speed Governor and Enrichment Section (Ref. Fig. 3)
The speed bias lever provides a mechanical link between the governor spool
and governor lever.
73-00-00
Page 6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL OUTLET (P2)
SPRING
METERING VALVE
DIAPHRAGM
GOVERNOR BELLOWS
BYPASS VALVE
BYPASS
EVACUATED BELLOWS
RETURN (P0)
REGULATOR VALVE BODY
RESET REGULATOR TORQUE TUBE ASSY

DIAPHRAGM
Px Py FUEL INLET (P1)

AIR INLET
Pr GOVERNOR LEVER
Pg OUTLET
GOVERNOR SPRING
TO Nf GOVERNOR
SPEED BIAS LEVER
THROTTLE SHAFT AND LEVER ASSY
AIR INLET
GOVERNOR SPEED SCHEDULING CAM
GOVERNOR CAM FOLLOWER LEVER DRIVE BODY
GOVERNOR WEIGHTS A
BEARING ASSY Py GOVERNOR RESTRICTOR
DRIVE SHAFT Px PLUG
C22133
Automatic Fuel Control Unit
Figure 2
73-00-00
Page 7
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Pa
Px
Py
GOVERNOR LEVER SPEED BIAS LEVER
GOVERNOR VALVE
CLOSED
SMALL SPRING
DRIVE SHAFT
GOVERNOR SPRING
NOTE LOCATION OF GAP
POWER
INPUT SHAFT
SPEED SCHEDULING CAM
VIEW A GOVERNOR LEVER VIEW B SPEED BIAS LEVER
GOVERNOR VALVE GOVERNOR VALVE

CLOSED OPEN
NOTE LOCATION OF GAP
VIEW C GOVERNOR WEIGHT VIEW D GOVERNOR WEIGHT

FORCE OVERCOMES FORCE FORCE OVERCOMES FORCE
OF SMALL SPRING OF LARGE SPRING
C5649
Power Input Speed Governor and Bias Levers

Figure 3
73-00-00
Page 8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
The power input shaft incorporates a speed scheduling cam which depresses
the governor cam lever when power is increased. A spring connects the cam
lever to the governor lever which is pivoted at one end and operates against
an air flow restrictor to form the governor valve.
The speed bias lever, pivoted at the same point as the governor lever, has two
extensions which straddle a portion of the governor lever so that, after a
slight movement, a gap closes and both levers move together. A small spring
connects the speed bias and governor levers. A roller on the arm of the speed
bias lever contacts the end of the governor spool.
The speed scheduling cam applies tension to the governor spring through the
cam lever; this applies a force to close the governor valve.
The drive shaft is driven at a speed proportional to gas generator speed (Ng).
As the shaft turns it rotates a table on which the governor weights are
mounted. Small levers on the inner race of the weights contact the base of the
governor spool. As Ng increases, centrifugal force causes the weights to
move outwards and apply an increasing force against the spool. This force
moves the spool forward on the drive shaft against the roller at the end of the
speed bias arm. If Ng continues to increase, the speed bias lever will move
until it contacts the governor lever; further increase in Ng will allow the bias lever
to overcome the governor spring and both levers will move to open the
governor valve, bleeding off modified compressor discharge pressure (Py).
Movement of the governor lever is also controlled by an air pressure regulator

and governor reset section. The air pressure regulator is a spring-loaded
diaphragm-operated valve.
Compressor discharge pressure (P3) is applied to the entrance to this valve.

Spring tension and ambient air pressure are applied to one side of the regulator
diaphragm, this tending to open the valve. Regulated air pressure (Pr) is
applied to the other side of the diaphragm, this tending to close the valve. Thus
as Pr rises, the valve closes, and vice-versa.
Pr is also applied to one side of the governor reset diaphragm and passed
through the reset bleed to the other side of the diaphragm where it is designated
Pg. The reset section Pg outlet is connected to the power turbine governor
by an external line.
Opening of the governor reset valve causes a flow through the reset bleed with
pressure drop of Pr - Pg. and Pg will be reduced. Movement of the reset
diaphragm will then cause the reset rod to apply a force to the governor lever
which overcomes governor spring tension and increases bleed-off of Py.
Modified compressor discharge pressures Px and Py will be vented to

atmosphere via a vent in the governor body when the governor valve is open.
73-00-00
Page 9
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) Bellows Section (Ref. Fig. 4)
The bellows section comprises a governor bellows and an evacuated

acceleration bellows. The two being connected by a common rod. The bellows
assembly is housed in a cast body.
The acceleration bellows, one end of which is attached to the body, provides
an absolute pressure reference. The governor bellows, which is secured within
the body, functions in a similar manner to a diaphragm and is represented
as such in the figure.
Py is applied to the outside of the governor bellows and Px to the inside. Px is

also applied to the acceleration bellows.
The force produced by Px acting on the acceleration bellows is cancelled by

the application of the same pressure on an equal area of the governor bellows
as these are acting in opposite directions. Thus all pressures may be
resolved into pressures acting on the governor bellows only, these being; Py
acting on the entire surface of one side; the internal pressure of the acceleration
bellows acting within the area of pressure cancellation; and Px acting on the
remainder of the diaphragm surface. Any change in Py is therefore more effective
than an equal change in Px due to the difference in total surface area
affected.
Px and Py variations are a function of power section operational and

environmental conditions. When both increase as during acceleration, the
bellows open the metering valve. When Py decreases, as desired Ng is
approached, the bellows tend to close the metering valve. When both decrease,
as during deceleration, the bellows close the metering valve to its minimum
flow stop.
In operation, movement of the bellows is transmitted to the metering valve by a

cross shaft and associated levers. The shaft moves within a torque tube
which is attached to the shaft near the bellows operating lever. The tube is
secured to the body by an adjustment screw.
Cross shaft rotation results in an increase or decrease in force on the torque

tube which forms a seal between the air and fuel sections of the AFCU. During
assembly the tube is positioned in such a way that it tends to close the
metering valve and the bellows assembly opposes this with a tendence to open
the valve.
(4) Pressure Regulating Valve (Ref. Fig. 5)
The valve receives pressurized fuel (P1) from the MFCU transfer valve. P1
pressure is applied to one side of the valve through the P1 inlet. Valve spring
tension and fuel bypass pressure (P0) is applied to the other side of the valve. When
pressure differential P1 - P0 reaches 100 to 120 psi., the valve opens and allows
fuel to flow through holes in the sleeve and passages in the body to the P0 outlet. This
ensures that P0 upstream of the valve is at least 100 psi above P0.
73-00-00 Page 10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AREA OF Px PRESSURE
CANCELLATION
Px
Py
Px
EVACUATED (ACCELERATION)
DIAPHRAGM REPRESENTING BELLOWS
GOVERNOR BELLOWS
C3029
Bellows Operation - Schematic
Figure 4
73-00-00 Page 11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P INLET
1
P 0 PORT
SHIMS
VALVE SPRING
VALVE
SLEEVE
P OUTLET
1 VALVE BODY
C3143A
Pressure Regulating Valve

Figure 5
73-00-00 Page 12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) Surge Accumulator
The surge accumulator is connected to the fuel delivery line between the MFCU
and the flow divider and dump valve.
Fluctuations in fuel pressure are prevented from reaching the flow divider by the
accumulator which absorbs these changes.
(6) Flow Divider and Dump Valve, Manifold Adapters and Nozzles (Ref. Fig. 6)
The flow divider and dump valve, which is installed between the fuel control units
and the manifold, receives metered fuel from the MFCU and delivers it to the primary
and secondary manifolds. Initially, fuel enters the unit and exerts sufficient
pressure on the divider cylinder piston to allow fuel to flow to the primary manifold.
When pressure has built up sufficiently, the inner piston is pushed back against
spring tension to allow fuel to flow to the secondary manifold.
When fuel flow to the unit is cut off, the piston moves under spring tension to block
the inlet. Fuel in the primary and secondary manifolds thus drains out through
the dump outlet.
(7) Power Turbine (Nf) Governor
The power turbine governor of each power section fuel control system is mounted
on the appropriate side of the reduction gearbox and is driven at a speed
proportional to the power turbine. The governor supplies a signal to the AFCU to
change compressor speed whenever it senses a power turbine load change, and
employs a drive body similar to that of the AFCU. A difference is the elimination
of the enrichment mechanism. Normally, the Nf governor lever positions the governor
so as to fully close the governor valve. Any tendency of the power turbine to
change load or speed results in the governor valve bleeding off more or less Pg. If
Nf overspeeds, the valve bleeds off more Pg, and the Pr - Pg differential increases
causing the governor reset rod to increase its force on the AFCU governor lever to
lower Py and reduce fuel flow. The reverse sequence would occur if Nf were
caused to underspeed.
Application of load requires increasing the pitch of the helicopter rotor blades. A
load application will tend to cause a decrease in Nf. The power turbine governor will
sense this decrease in Nf and remove reset force from the main fuel control and
cause Ng to increase. As load is increased by movement of the pilot’s collective pitch
control, the power turbine governor throttle lever is advanced to compensate for
the ‘‘droop’’ characteristic of the system.
If the load is decreased, Nf will tend to overspeed and the power turbine governor
will again reset the main fuel control to lower Ng.
Various power turbine speeds (Nf) may be selected by repositioning the throttle
lever on the power turbine governor through manipulation of a ‘‘beeper’’ switch.
73-00-00 Page 13
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL NOZZLE
TO PRIMARY MANIFOLDS TO SECONDARY MANIFOLDS
FUEL FROM MFCU DUMP FUEL
FLOW DIVIDER
DUMP POSITION
PRIMARY FLOW POSITION
PRIMARY AND SECONDARY FLOW POSITION
C22101
Fuel Flow Divider and Dump Valve

Figure 6
73-00-00 Page 14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(8) Oil-to-fuel Heater (Ref. Fig. 7)
The oil-to-fuel heater assembly is basically a plate and fin constructed heat
exchanger which utilizes heat from the power section oil to maintain fuel temperatures
within a specified range. The assembly consists of collectors, heat exchanger
core, and a valve body, which are integral with the heat exchanger. A thermal element,
guide, valve sleeve, and spring are contained in the valve body by a retaining
cap which is secured by lockwire.
Fuel flow through the oil-to-fuel heater passes from inlet to outlet connections via a
thermal element. The element consists of a highly expansive material sealed in
a metallic chamber, the expansion force being transmitted through a diaphragm and
rod to the heater valve sleeve. Since the element exerts an expansive force only,
it is counter-balanced by a spring which provides a force to return the sleeve when the
fuel temperature decreases. When fuel temperature decreases below 21.1°C
(70°F), all oil entering the heater is circulated through the core to increase fuel
temperature. The element senses outlet fuel temperature and as temperature rises
above 21.1°C (70°F), the valve moves to reduce flow through the core and at
the same time, opens a bypass port between the oil inlet and outlet connections. At
fuel outlet temperatures above 32.2°C (90°F), the core exit is fully closed forcing
the entire oil flow to bypass the core.
(9) Torque Limiter
The common torque limiter is mounted on the reduction gearbox. The unit receives
torquemeter oil pressure signals proportional to the torque outputs of the two
power sections. The combined power section torque is limited, when the sum of
torque output overcomes servo lever spring force and equal amounts of Pg air bleed
off.
B. System Operation (Ref. Fig. 1)
(1) Manual Mode
In manual mode, fuel from the airframe booster pump passes through the strainer
to the fuel pump. The pump delivers fuel to the transfer valve in the MFCU. In this
mode the solenoid valve is energized and the transfer valve directs fuel to the
metering and cut-off valve. The metering section of the valve and the bypass restrictor
establish a suitable minimum flow through the MFCU as a function of manual
throttle lever position. The metered flow then passes through the cut-off section of
the valve to the pressurizing valve which, as soon as a pre-set minimum pressure
is attained, opens, allowing fuel to pass via the delivery line to the flow divider and
on to the fuel manifold.
In this mode flow control is an MFCU function upon which torque limiter and Nf
governor functions have no effect.
(2) Automatic Mode
Selection of automatic mode de-energizes the MFCU solenoid valve and the
transfer valve directs fuel flow through the pressure regulating valve to the AFCU.
73-00-00 Page 15
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL INLET
NORMAL CONDITION
FUEL OUTLET
THERMAL ELEMENT SLEEVE VALVE
PUSH ROD
OIL INLET OIL OUTLET
BYPASS CONDITION
OIL INLET OIL OUTLET
C3023A
Oil-to-fuel Heater
Figure 7
73-00-00 Page 16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
The metering valve in the AFCU, is controlled by pneumatic signals supplied by the
power input and speed governor section, the bellows section, the Nf governor
and the torque limiter.
Metered fuel from the AFCU is directed via the check valve in the MFCU to the
pressurizing valve which opens when the pre-set minimum pressure is attained and
directs fuel into the delivery line to the flow divider and fuel manifold.
73-00-00 Page 17/18

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER CHAPTER
LEP 1 Jul 18/2016 73-10-05 201 Jul 18/2016
2 Jul 18/2016 Maintenance 202 Jul 18/2016
Contents 1 Jul 18/2016 204 Jul 18/2016
2 Jul 18/2016 205 Jul 18/2016
3 Jul 18/2016 206 Jul 18/2016
4 Jul 18/2016 207 Jul 18/2016
208 Jul 18/2016
73-10-01 201 Jul 18/2016 209 Jul 18/2016
Maintenance 202 Jul 18/2016 210 Jul 18/2016
Practices 203 Jul 18/2016 211 Jul 18/2016
204 Jul 18/2016 212 Jul 18/2016
205 Jul 18/2016 213 Jul 18/2016
206 Jul 18/2016 214 Jul 18/2016
207 deleted 215 Jul 18/2016
208 deleted 216 Jul 18/2016
209 deleted 217 Jul 18/2016
210 deleted 218 Jul 18/2016
211 deleted 219 Jul 18/2016
212 deleted 220 Jul 18/2016
221 Jul 18/2016
73-10-02 201 Dec 02/2013 222 Jul 18/2016
Maintenance 202 Dec 02/2013 223 Jul 18/2016
Practices 203 Dec 02/2013 224 Jul 18/2016
204 Dec 02/2013 225 Jul 18/2016
205 Dec 02/2013 226 Jul 18/2016
206 Dec 02/2013 227 Jul 18/2016
207 Dec 02/2013 228 blank Jul 18/2016
208 Dec 02/2013
73-10-06 201 Mar 09/2001
73-10-03 201 Mar 09/2001 Maintenance 202 Mar 09/2001
Maintenance 202 Mar 09/2001 Practices 203 Mar 09/2001
Practices 203 Mar 09/2001 204 blank Mar 09/2001
204 blank Mar 09/2001
73-10-07 201 Jul 18/2016
73-10-04 201 Mar 09/2001 Maintenance 202 Jul 18/2016
Maintenance 202 Mar 09/2001 Practices 203 Jul 18/2016
Practices 203 Mar 09/2001 204 Jul 18/2016
204 Mar 09/2001 205 Jul 18/2016

Page 1
73-10 LEP Jul 18/2016
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
SECTION PAGE DATE
206 Jul 18/2016
207 Jul 18/2016
208 blank Jul 18/2016
73-10-08 201 Jul 18/2016

204 blank Jul 18/2016

Page 2
73-10 LEP Jul 18/2016
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
OIL-TO-FUEL HEATER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES 73-10-01
1. General 201

A. Removal 201
B. Installation 201
6. Repair 203
A. Repair of the Fuel Heater Thermal Element 203
B. Completion Tasks 203
FUEL PUMP - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES 73-10-02
1. General 201

A. Removal of Fuel Pump Assembly 201
B. Removal of Filter 203

C. Installation of Filter 203
D. Installation of Fuel Pump Assembly 205
A. Fuel Pump Coupling In-situ Inspection 206
B. In-situ Inspection of Fuel Pump Assembly for Leakage 208
C. Fuel Pump Drive Spline Inspection 208

Page 1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
FUEL SURGE ACCUMULATOR - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES 73-10-03
1. General 201
A. Removal 201
B. Installation 201
A. Procedure 203
B. Check 203
FLOW DIVIDER AND DUMP VALVE - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES 73-10-04
1. General 201
A. Removal 201
B. Installation 203
FUEL MANIFOLD ADAPTERS - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES 73-10-05
1. General 201

A. Removal 202

Page 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
FUEL MANIFOLD ADAPTERS - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES (Cont’d) 73-10-05
B. Installation 209
6. Adjustment/Test 213
A. Preparation 213
B. Leakage Test 213
C. Inspect Sheaths 219

D. Nozzle Functional Check 220
7. Cleaning 225
A. Fuel Manifold Adapter Assemblies 225
B. Fuel Nozzles (Removed from Fuel Manifold Adapters) 225
FUEL DRAIN VALVES - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES 73-10-06

1. General 201
A. Removal 201
B. Installation 201
P3 AIR FILTER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES 73-10-07
1. General 201

A. Removal of Filter Element 201
B. Removal of Drain Valve 203

Page 3
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
P3 AIR FILTER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES (Cont’d) 73-10-07
C. Installation of Drain Valve 203
D. Installation of Filter Element 203
6. Cleaning 204
A. P3 Filter Element, Electrosonic Cleaning 204
B. P3 Filter Element, Ultrasonic Cleaning 204

C. Drain Valve 205
A. P3 Filter Pressure Drop Check 205
P3 / PG - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES 73-10-08
1. General 201
5. Adjustment/Test Pg Pneumatic Tubes 201
A. For Pre-SB5409 engines: Pg air Tube 201
B. For Post-SB5409 engines: Pg and P3 tubes (Engine mounted

on the aircraft) 201
C. For Post-SB5409 engines: Pg and P3 tubes (Engine not

mounted on the aircraft) 201
D. For Post-SB5458 engines: Pg tube (Engine mounted or not

mounted on the aircraft) 201

Page 4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OIL-TO-FUEL HEATER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General

Item No. Name

PWC05-089 Lockwire
3. Special Tools
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
5. Removal/Installation (Ref. Fig. 201)
A. Removal
(1) Disconnect fuel inlet tube from inlet connection (1). Cap tube end and connection.
(2) Remove bolts (4) securing elbow connection (3) to fuel pump. Remove elbow
(3) and transfer tube (9).
(3) Remove bolts (11) securing oil-to-fuel heater (10) to accessory gearbox.
(4) Withdraw oil-to-fuel heater (10) and transfer tubes (13) from mounting face on
accessory gearbox.
B. Installation
(1) Lubricate new preformed packings (2) and install on transfer tubes (13).
(2) Insert oil transfer tubes (13) in ports on oil-to-fuel heater mounting face of accessory
gearbox.
(3) Install oil-to-fuel heater (10) over transfer tubes (13) aligning the bolt holes,
exercising care to prevent damage to preformed packings (2).
(4) Secure oil-to-fuel heater (10) to accessory gearbox with bolts (11) and washers
(12). Tighten bolts, torque 32 to 36 lb.in., and lockwire.
73-10-01
Page 201
OIL-TO-FUEL HEATER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES Jul 18/2016
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
12
11 2 3
10 13
2
4
5
6
8
9
8
C9295
Oil-to-Fuel Heater
Figure 201
73-10-01
Page 202
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 201
1. Fuel Inlet Connection

3. Elbow
4. Bolt
5. Washer
7. Inlet Port Face Groove
9. Transfer Tube
10. Oil-to-Fuel Heater
11. Bolt
12. Washer
13. Transfer Tubes
(5) Lubricate new preformed packings (8) and install on fuel transfer tube (9). Insert
transfer tube (9) into fuel outlet port on oil-to-fuel heater; exercise care to prevent
damage to preformed packings (8).
(6) Lubricate new preformed packing (6) and install in groove on inlet port face (7) of
fuel pump. Install elbow connector (3) over fuel transfer tube (9) exercising care to
prevent damage to packing. Secure elbow (3) to fuel pump with two washers
(5) and bolts (4). Torque bolts 36 to 40 lb.in. and lockwire.
(7) Connect fuel inlet tube to oil-to-fuel heater connection (1).
(8) If new or overhauled oil-to-fuel heater has been installed, perform depreservation
procedure.
6. Repair
A. Repair of the Fuel Heater Thermal Element (Ref. Figs. 202 and 203)
(1) DELETED.
B. Completion Tasks (Ref. Fig. 204)
(1) DELETED.
73-10-01
Page 203
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DELETED
C00000
Removal of Fuel Heater Thermal Element

Figure 202
73-10-01
Page 204
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DELETED
C00000
Installation of Fuel Heater Thermal Element
Figure 203
73-10-01
Page 205
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DELETED
C00000
Temperature Plate
Figure 204
73-10-01
Page 206
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL PUMP - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General

CONSUMABLE MATERIALS respectively
Item No. Name

PWC05-089 Lockwire
3. Special Tools
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
A. Removal of Fuel Pump Assembly (Ref. Fig. 201)
(1) Remove complete assembly of AFCU, MFCU, and fuel pump from accessory
gearbox (Ref. 73-20-01).
(2) Disconnect seal drain tube connector (11).
(5) Separate fuel pump (6) from AFCU and MFCU.
(6) Remove preformed packings (4, 5 and 12) from recesses in fuel pump.
(7) Remove and inspect coupling (3) for wear. Replace if splines are worn.
(8) If replacement fuel pump is to be installed, slacken locknut (9) and remove elbow
(10), packing retainer (8) and preformed packing (7).
73-10-02
Page 201
FUEL PUMP - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES Dec 02/2013
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3
AFCU
5
5
2
1 7
12 8
9
10
11
13
14
MFCU
C22087A
Fuel Pump Assembly - Removal/Installation

Figure 201
73-10-02
Page 202
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 201
1. Nut
2. Washer
3. Coupling
6. Fuel Pump
8. Packing Retainer
9. Locknut
10. Elbow
11. Seal Drain Tube Connector
13. Washer
14. Nut
B. Removal of Filter (Ref. Fig. 202)
(1) Remove drain plug (9) from filter cover (11). Drain any residual fuel into suitable
container.
(2) Remove bolts (8) and washers (7) securing cover (11) to fuel pump.
(3) Withdraw filter cover complete with filter element (3) from fuel pump.
(4) Withdraw filter element from cover and remove preformed packings (2, 4, 5 and 6).
C. Installation of Filter (Ref. Fig. 202)
CAUTION: LUBRICATE PREFORMED PACKINGS WITH ENGINE OIL AND ENSURE

CORRECT SEATING AT ASSEMBLY.
CAUTION: THE BOSS INSIDE THE FUEL FILTER COVER HAS 2 DIFFERENT GROOVES
FOR THE 2 PACKINGS. MAKE SURE THE 2 PACKINGS ARE CORRECTLY
INSTALLED IN THEIR RESPECTIVE GROOVE.
(1) Install new preformed packings (5 and 6) on boss inside fuel filter cover (11). Install
filter element (3) into cover (11).
(2) Install new preformed packing (2) on filter seating location in pump body.
(3) Install new preformed packing (4) on cover (11) and install assembled element and
cover on fuel pump (1).
(4) Secure with washers (7) and bolts (8). Torque 100 to 115 lb.in. and lockwire.
(5) Install new preformed packing (10) on drain plug (9) and insert in filter cover (11).
Torque plug 40 to 65 lb.in. and lockwire.
73-10-02
Page 203
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 8
11
10
C9340A
Fuel Pump Filter - Removal/Installation

Figure 202
73-10-02
Page 204
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 202
1. Fuel Pump
3. Filter Element
7. Washer
8. Bolt
9. Plug
11. Filter Cover
D. Installation of Fuel Pump Assembly (Ref. Fig. 201)
NOTE: If recesses in fuel pump contain preformed packing which were not discarded
at removal or which were installed under the shipping plate on a new pump,
these preformed packings must be replaced with new items of correct part
number.
(1) If a replacement fuel pump is being installed, install new preformed packing (7),
new packing retainer (8) and locknut and elbow (9) and (10). Do not torque
locknut at this stage.
(2) Ensure coupling (3) is installed in fuel pump.
CAUTION: PUMP DRIVE SPLINES ON NEW AND OVERHAULED UNITS MAY BE

COATED WITH PRESERVATIVE COMPOUND. PRIOR TO INSTALLATION
CLEAN THOROUGHLY AND APPLY A LIGHT FILM OF ENGINE OIL.
(3) Mate fuel pump with MFCU and AFCU mounting faces, ensuring that coupling
engages correctly in AFCU and that preformed packings (4, 5 and 12) remain in
place.
(4) Install nuts (1) and washers (2). Torque 75 to 85 lb.in.
(5) Install nuts (14) and washers (13). Torque 75 to 85 lb.in.
(6) Connect seal drain tube connector (11). Torque 90 to 100 lb.in. and lockwire.
Torque locknut (9) 38 to 42 lb.in. and lockwire.
73-10-02
Page 205
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: ALIGN GEARS AND DO NOT APPLY FORCE TO ENGAGE PUMP

COUPLING WITH ENGINE GEARSHAFT.
CAUTION: ENSURE SHAFT AND COUPLING SPLINES ARE FREE FROM GREASE.
CAUTION: ENSURE LUBRICATION HOLE IN AGB DRIVE SHAFT RESTRICTOR
IS FREE FROM OBSTRUCTION. THIS HOLE MAY BE CLEANED USING
A LENGTH OF MS9226-03 LOCKWIRE OR EQUIVALENT.
(7) Install complete assembly of AFCU, MFCU and fuel pump on accessory gearbox
(Ref. 73-20-01, MANUAL FUEL CONTROL UNIT (MFCU) - MAINTENANCE
PRACTICES).
(8) If a new or overhauled pump has been installed, carry out depreservation
procedure (Ref. 72-00-00, SERVICING).
6. Inspection/Check
A. Fuel Pump Coupling In-situ Inspection (Ref. Fig. 203)
(1) Remove drain line fitting or plug from pump drain port, to gain access to sump
area.
CAUTION: ENSURE NO MATERIAL FROM COTTON SWAB REMAINS IN FUEL

PUMP DRAIN PORT OR SUMP AREA.
(2) Insert suitable cotton swab or equivalent through the drain port into the sump area,
positioning tip of swab against pump housing.
(3) Remove swab and inspect for the presence of residue.
NOTE: 1. Reddish brown or green residue indicates possible fretting or corrosion

appearing as iron oxide.
NOTE: 2. Blue or black residue indicates possible AFCU bearing washout (Ref.
73-20-02).
(4) If no residue is present the pump may continue in service.
NOTE: In-situ inspection should be performed at regular intervals (Ref. 72-00-00,

Table 601).
(5) If a reddish-brown (iron oxide) stain is evident:
(a) Remove the fuel pump (Ref. Para. 5.).
(b) Examine the input coupling shaft area of the pump face for residue from
fretting corrosion (iron oxide deposit). If none is present, the pump may remain in
service.
(c) Evidence of corrosion residue indicates possible spline wear. Return the fuel
pump to an approved overhaul facility.
(d) Install a replacement fuel pump (Ref. Para. 5.).
73-10-02
Page 206
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DRIVE COUPLING
AREA TO BE EXAMINED
FOR IN−SITU INSPECTION
INSPECT AT THIS PORT
C203868
Fuel Pump (Typical)
Figure 203
73-10-02
Page 207
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. In-situ Inspection of Fuel Pump Assembly for Leakage
(1) Check for oil leakage from fuel pump drain port, maximum allowed (3 cc/hour). If
limit exceeded replace the accessory drive seal (Ref. 72-60-00).
(2) Check for fuel leakage from fuel pump drain ports, maximum allowed (30 cc/hour).
(a) If limit exceeded through fuel pump drain port (AGB side), send fuel pump for
repair/overhaul.
(b) If limit exceeded through fuel pump drain port (AFCU side), inspect AFCU drive
shaft bearing for fuel contamination (Ref. 73-20-02, Inspection/Check).
C. Fuel Pump Drive Spline Inspection
(1) Remove the fuel pump from the accessory gearbox (Ref. 73-10-02).
(2) Examine the input coupling shaft area of the pump face and drive spline for residue
from fretting corrosion (iron oxide deposit). If none is present, the pump may remain
in service.
(3) Evidence of corrosion residue indicates possible spline wear. Return the fuel pump
to an approved overhaul facility.
73-10-02
Page 208
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL SURGE ACCUMULATOR - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General

Item No. Name

PWC05-089 Lockwire
3. Special Tools
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
A. Removal (Ref. Fig. 201)
(1) Disconnect coupling nut (1).
CAUTION: FUEL SURGE ACCUMULATOR MUST NOT BE DISASSEMBLED.
(2) Pre-SB5398: Remove nut and bolt (2) and accumulator (6), complete with clamp
(5). Remove clamp.
(3) Post-SB5398: Remove nut and bolt (9) securing accumulator (6) to bracket support
assembly (10).
(1) Check for leakage (Ref. Para. 6.).
(2) Pre-SB5398:
(a) Install clamp (5) on accumulator (6).
(b) Secure assembly to bracket (4) with bolt and nut (2). Torque nut 36 to 40 lb.in.
(3) Post-SB5398: Secure bracket support assembly (10) to accumulator (6) with nut and
bolt (9). Torque nut 36 to 40 lb.in.
73-10-03 Page 201

FUEL SURGE ACCUMULATOR - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES Mar 09/2001
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6
1
POST−SB5341 3
4
4
7 1 6
2
5
8
5 6
PRE−SB5398 8
3 10
6
7 1 9
8
POST−SB5398
C22184D
Fuel Surge Accumulator

Figure 201
73-10-03 Page 202

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 201
1. Coupling Nut
2. Nut and Bolt (Pre-SB5398)
3. Flange C
4. Bracket (Pre-SB5398)
5. Clamp (Pre-SB5398)
6. Surge Accumulator
7. Tee
8. Fuel Tube
9. Nut and Bolt (Post-SB5398)
10. Bracket Support Assembly (Post-SB5398)
(4) Connect coupling nut (1) to fuel delivery pipe and torque 90 to 100 lb.in. Lockwire
coupling nut.
6. Inspection/Check
A. Procedure
(1) Pre-SB5398: Visually inspect the accumulator for signs of metal distortion on the
sides and ends. The distortion will show up as bulging of the sides or doming of
the end cap. Replace the accumulator, if any metal distortion is found.
NOTE: Bulging or doming can be verified using a metal straightedge on the sides
and ends of the accumulator.
(2) Post-SB5398: Visually inspect the accumulator. If the pop-out indicator is extended
replace the accumulator.
B. Check
(1) Apply clean, dry compressed air at 100 psig to the surge accumulator and check
for leakage.
(2) No leakage permitted.
73-10-03 Page 203/204

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FLOW DIVIDER AND DUMP VALVE - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General

Item No. Name

3. Special Tools
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
A. Removal
WARNING: RESIDUAL VOLTAGE IN IGNITION SYSTEM CAN BE LETHAL. REFER TO

IGNITION SYSTEM CHAPTER (REF. 74-10-00) BEFORE REMOVAL.
NOTE: For ease of access, ignition cables may be disconnected at spark igniters (Ref.
74-10-00).
(1) Remove flow divider
73-10-04 Page 201

FLOW DIVIDER AND DUMP VALVE - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES Mar 09/2001
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
C74408
Flow Divider - Removal/Installation

Figure 201
73-10-04 Page 202

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 201
1. Elbow
2. Jam Nut
3. Back-up Ring
5. Fuel Manifold Adapter
7. Flow Divider and Dump Valve
9. Bolt
CAUTION: WHEN REMOVAL OR INSTALLATION OF AN INDIVIDUAL ITEM IS

REQUIRED, IT IS ESSENTIAL THAT TUBES ARE NOT SUBJECTED
TO BENDING STRESSES. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES BEND
OR FORCE TUBES IN OR OUT OF POSITION. WHEN REMOVING
ANY ONE TUBE, THE ADJACENT TUBE, COUPLING OR ELBOW,
TOGETHER WITH SEAL RETAINING PLATES (IF APPLICABLE),
MUST FIRST BE REMOVED, AND THE PROCEDURE
REVERSED AT REINSTALLATION.
(a) If flow divider (7) is being removed with engine installed, disconnect dump or
purge line as applicable from elbow (1). Suitably cap line connection and
elbow.
NOTE: To avoid contamination of work area, use a container to catch fluid

when disconnecting fuel lines, and during removal of flow divider and
purge valve.
(b) Disconnect fuel inlet line from elbow (1) and suitably cap line connection and
elbow.
(c) Support flow divider (7), remove bolts (9) fastening valve to fuel manifold inlet
adapter (5).
(d) Remove and discard preformed packings (6) from recesses in mounting face of
valve.
(e) If flow divider (7) is being replaced, proceed as follows:
1 Note angular position of elbow (1) for assembly on replacement valve.
2 Loosen nut (2) and remove elbow (1). Discard back-up ring (3) and
preformed packing (4). Install blanking plugs in dump/drain and/or inlet
ports.
B. Installation
(1) Install ignition cables (Ref. 74-10-00), as applicable.
(2) Install flow divider and dump valve.
73-10-04 Page 203

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(a) When a replacement flow divider (7) is being installed, depreserve, and install
elbows or elbow and nipple as follows:
NOTE: Depreservation is not required when original flow divider is being

installed.
1 Remove shipping plugs from inlet and dump ports and drain as much
preservation oil as possible.
2 Flush out valve from dump/drain port or air inlet end with fuel (PWC01-001),
to remove all residual preservation oil. Continue flushing until clear fuel
flows from manifold ports. Temporarily reinstall plug in dump or air inlet port.
3 Install back-up ring (3) and preformed packing (4) on elbow (1).
4 Remove plugs from inlet ports, install elbow (1), and position at angle
noted during removal. Tighten jam nuts (2) 38 to 42 lb.in., and lockwire.
5 To prevent ingress of foreign material, cap elbow and nipple until valve is
ready for installation.
(b) Press preformed packings (6) into recesses at manifold ports in mounting face
of valve.
(c) Position valve on base of fuel manifold inlet adapter (5), align attachment holes
and install bolts (9). Tighten bolts 32 to 36 lb.in., and lockwire bolts in pairs.
(d) Remove blanking caps from fuel inlet tube and elbow (1) and connect tube to
elbow. Tighten coupling nuts 90 to 100 lb.in., and lockwire.
(e) If installation of flow divider has been carried out with engine installed, proceed
as follows:
1 Remove blanking caps from dump/drain line and elbow (1), and connect
appropriate line.
2 Tighten coupling nut 90 to 100 lb.in., and lockwire.
73-10-04 Page 204

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL MANIFOLD ADAPTERS - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General

Item No. Name

PWC03-001 Engine Oil
PWC03-002 Calibrating Fluid
PWC05-089 Lockwire
PWC05-090 Lockwire
PWC09-003 Compound
PWC11-013 Compound, Carbon Removing
PWC11-049 Remover, Rust
PWC11-054 Cleaner, Aqueous
3. Special Tools

PWC30128-14 Puller
PWC30405 Test Fixture
PWC30416 Puller
PWC30506 Test Rig, Fuel Nozzle Obsolete - Replaced by
PWC90086
PWC30530 Blanking Plug (2)
PWC32366 Pusher Alternate to PWC50074
PWC32811 Fixture
PWC50074 Pusher Obsolete - Replaced by
PWC32366
PWC90086 Spray Chamber Alternate to PWC30506
73-10-05
Page 201
FUEL MANIFOLD ADAPTERS - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES Jul 18/2016
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Name Remarks
ANS929 Blanking Cap (2)
Flushing Fixture
Stainless Steel Container, Perforated
Ultrasonic Cleaner
A. Removal
WARNING: RESIDUAL VOLTAGE IN IGNITION SYSTEM CAN BE LETHAL. REFER TO

IGNITION SYSTEM CHAPTER (REF. 74-10-00) BEFORE REMOVAL.
NOTE: For ease of access, ignition cables may be disconnected at spark igniters
(REF. 74-10-00).
CAUTION: IF FUEL NOZZLES AND ADAPTERS ARE NOT TO BE REINSTALLED

IMMEDIATELY, THEY, AND THEIR TRANSFER TUBES (1) SHOULD BE
PLACED IN A CLEAN, COVERED CONTAINER TO PREVENT EXPOSURE
TO DIRT AND DUST. SHOULD THERE BE CARBON BUILD-UP ON
NOZZLE TIPS, REFER TO PARAGRAPH 7. FOR CORRECT CLEANING
PROCEDURE.
(1) Remove fuel manifold adapter assemblies.
NOTE: 1. Do not move the aircraft during this procedure.
NOTE: 2. Keep the igniters installed.
NOTE: 3. Remove four fuel manifold adapter assemblies and temporarily install
four fuel nozzle sheaths (bolts tightened) equi-distanced around the gas
generator case at the 2, 4, 8 and 10 o’clock positions. This will maintain
combustion chamber liner alignment while the other fuel manifold adapter
assemblies are removed.
(a) Number fuel manifold adapters for ease of identification and correct re-location.
(b) Remove bolts (5, Fig. 201) and locking plate (6) from inlet manifold adapter
and both adjacent manifold adapters.
(c) Remove fuel manifold transfer tubes (1) from both sides of inlet manifold with
pusher (PWC32366) or (PWC50074) in direction of arrow.
(d) Remove and discard preformed packings (2).
(e) Remove fuel manifold inlet adapter.
73-10-05
Page 202
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(f) Remove bolts (5) and locking plates (6) from remaining fuel manifold adapters
as required, and withdraw tubes and adapter assemblies.
(g) If required, remove strainer elements (4) using puller (PWC30128-14). Remove
and discard preformed packings (3).
NOTE: Do not remove strainer elements before testing fuel nozzle assemblies
(Ref. 73-10-05, Adjustment/Test).
(2) Remove fuel nozzle sheaths (10, Fig. 201) from inlet adapter and all other manifold
adapter assemblies using puller (PWC30416) (Ref. Fig. 205).
(a) For PT6T-3D/-3DE/-3DF Engines with tapered fuel manifold adapters (Ref. Fig.
201), proceed to Para. 5.A.(3).
(b) For PT6T-3D/-3DE/-3DF Engines with cylindrical fuel manifold adapters (Ref.
Fig. 201):
1 Assemble sheaths on fuel nozzle manifold adapters.
2 Visually inspect fuel nozzle tips for concentricity with fuel exit hole of
sheath (Ref. Fig. 203).
NOTE: Fuel nozzle tip should be centered with fuel exit hole of sheath.
3 If concentricity is acceptable, remove sheath (10, Fig. 201) from inlet adapter
and all other manifold adapter assemblies using puller (PWC30416) (Ref.
Fig. 205) and proceed to Para. 5.A.(3).
4 If concentricity is not acceptable, replace fuel nozzle adapter with a

serviceable cylindrical neck fuel manifold adapter assembly with a new or
serviceable fuel nozzle with tapered neck fuel manifold adapter assembly:
Fuel Nozzle Assembly P/N 3039638 Rev B or equivalent interchangeable
part.
Fuel Nozzle Assembly - Inlet P/N 3039637 Rev B or equivalent
interchangeable part.
CAUTION: USE EXTREME CARE WHEN HANDLING FUEL NOZZLE ASSEMBLIES

SINCE EVEN FINGERPRINTS ON THE ORIFICE MAY PRODUCE POOR
SPRAY PATTERN. CLEAN, LINT FREE GLOVES SHOULD BE WORN
AT ALL TIMES WHEN HANDLING PARTS.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE WRENCH IS CORRECTLY ENGAGED ON NOZZLE

DURING REMOVAL. FUEL NOZZLE ORIFICE MAY BE DAMAGED IF
WRENCH SLIPS.
(3) Test nozzle assemblies (Ref. 73-10-05, Adjustment/Test).
(4) If test is unsatisfactory:
73-10-05
Page 203
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 2
3 4
6
4
3
12
11 2
1
10
9
8 A
7
15
MANIFOLD ADAPTER
ASSEMBLY (TYPICAL)
14
13
CAUTION: REMOVE TRANSFER TUBES IN DETAIL A

DIRECTION OF ARROW, AWAY
FROM STRAINER ELEMENTS.
C232723
Fuel Manifold Adapter - Removal/Installation

Figure 201
73-10-05
Page 204
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 201
1. Transfer Tube
4. Strainer Element
5. Bolt
6. Lockplate
7. Keywasher
8. Gasket
9. Gasket
10. Sheath
11. Locating Pin
12. Manifold Adapter
13. Cone
14. Distributor
15. Nozzle Body
(a) Unlock the keywasher (7) and remove the nozzle tip assembly (comprised of
items 13, 14 and 15) and the gasket (8) from the the adapter (12). Discard the
keywasher and the gasket.
NOTE: If nozzle tip assembly is removed, it must be replaced by new or

overhauled tip assembly.
(b) Remove strainer element (4). Remove and discard preformed packing (3).
(c) Clean fuel manifold adapter and strainer element thoroughly (Ref. 73-10-05,
Cleaning).
(5) To prevent exposure to dust and dirt, place manifold components in clean, covered
containers or polyethylene bags until required for use.
(6) Send rejected nozzle assemblies for repair or overhaul in original packaging to
prevent parts contacting each other during shipment.
73-10-05
Page 205
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TAPERED NECK CYLINDRICAL NECK
C81294A
Fuel Manifold Adapter Assemblies

Figure 202
73-10-05
Page 206
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL FUEL
NOZZLE NOZZLE
SHEATH SHEATH
CENTERED
ORIFICE OFF−CENTER
ORIFICE
FUEL FUEL
NOZZLE NOZZLE
TIP TIP
ACCEPTABLE NOT ACCEPTABLE
C81717A
Inspection of Fuel Nozzle Tip Concentricity
Figure 203
73-10-05
Page 207
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PRIMARY SECONDARY
FLOW FLOW
SECONDARY
FLOW
GASKET
PRIMARY
FLOW
C67070
Fuel Nozzle Gasket Installation

Figure 204
73-10-05
Page 208
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Installation
CAUTION: EXTREME CARE MUST BE EXERCISED WHEN HANDLING SINCE EVEN

FINGERPRINTS ON THE NOZZLE ORIFICE MAY PRODUCE A POOR SPRAY
PATTERN. CLEAN, LINT-FREE COTTON GLOVES OR SURGICAL GLOVES
SHOULD BE WORN AT ALL TIMES WHEN HANDLING COMPONENTS.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE WRENCH IS CORRECTLY ENGAGED ON NOZZLE DURING

INSTALLATION. FUEL NOZZLE ORIFICE MAY BE DAMAGED IF WRENCH
SLIPS.
CAUTION: A MISSING OR IMPROPERLY INSTALLED GASKET MAY RESULT IN

PRIMARY FUEL FLOW LEAKING INTO SECONDARY FUEL FLOW CIRCUIT
DURING ENGINE START. THIS SITUATION MAY DELAY OR PREVENT
ENGINE STARTING AND CAUSE EXCESSIVE STARTING TEMPERATURE.
CAUTION: TO PREVENT STEM FROM BENDING, HOLD STEM WHEN YOU TIGHTEN
AND DO NOT TORQUE MORE THAN THE LIMIT.
CAUTION: USE OF ENGINE OIL (PWC03-001) IS ONLY ACCEPTABLE AS A LUBRICANT

FOR INSTALLATION OF THE FUEL NOZZLE TIP ASSEMBLIES. DO NOT
USE CALIBRATION FLUID OR OTHER LUBRICANTS.
CAUTION: USE ONLY APPROVED OIL TO LUBRICATE THE PACKINGS. USAGE OF

ASSEMBLY FLUID, VASELINE, GREASE OR ANY OTHER UNAPPROVED
SUBSTANCE MAY CAUSE BLOCKAGE OF THE FUEL NOZZLES THAT CAN
RESULT IN POSSIBLE SEVERE HOT SECTION DAMAGE.
(1) Install the new nozzle tip assemblies in the manifold adapters (12, Fig. 201) with
the new gasket (9) and the new keywashers (7) at each location. Use engine oil
(PWC03-001) as a lubricant and torque the nozzle assemblies 55 to 65 lbf.in. (6.3 -
7.3 Nm). Do not lock the keywashers until leakage test is completed.
NOTE: When you install the new nozzle tip assembly, make sure that the cone
(13) and the distributor (14) are installed in the nozzle body.
(2) If strainer elements (4) were removed, install new preformed packings (3) on
strainer elements (new or cleaned) (4) and insert into manifold adapters.
(3) Function and leak test each nozzle and adapter assembly (Ref. 73-10-05,
Adjustment/Test).
(4) Install inlet manifold adapter as follows:
(a) Install sheath (10) on inlet adapter, ensuring that locating pin (11) engages hole
in sheath.
(b) Using feeler gage check gap between fuel nozzle adapter and sheath, all
around maximum gap should be 0.003 inches (Ref. Fig. 206). Larger gap
suggests one or both parts are distorted. Replace part(s) as necessary.
(c) Carefully check gap between fuel nozzle tip and side of hole in sheath,
clearance of 0.020 inch is required. If clearance is less at any point suggests one
or both parts are distorted. Replace part(s) as necessary.
73-10-05
Page 209
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 2 3
5 4
C859A
Fuel Manifold Adapter Sheath - Removal

Figure 205
73-10-05
Page 210
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 205
1. Puller
2. Sheath
3. Pin
4. Manifold Adapter Assembly
5. Hexagon Bolt
CAUTION: ONLY USE APPROVED OIL TO LUBRICATE THE PACKINGS.

USAGE OF ASSEMBLY FLUID, VASELINE, GREASE OR ANY
OTHER UNAPPROVED SUBSTANCE MAY CAUSE BLOCKAGE OF
THE FUEL NOZZLES THAT CAN RESULT IN POSSIBLE SEVERE
HOT SECTION DAMAGE.
(d) Lubricate new preformed packings (2) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install
on four fuel transfer tubes (1 , Fig. 201), and insert tubes into ports of inlet
manifold adapter. With pusher (PWC32366) or (PWC50074), push tubes into full
depth of bore in adapter ports in direction of arrow.
CAUTION: TO AVOID POSSIBLE FAILURE OF STAINLESS STEEL GASKET, IT

IS ADVISABLE TO SLIDE GASKET OVER THE SHEATH, CAREFULLY
ALIGN THE HOLES AND INSERT BOTH BOLTS. THE WHOLE
ASSEMBLY CAN THEN BE MATED WITH THE PAD ON THE GAS
GENERATOR CASE, THUS AVOIDING ANY ATTEMPT TO LEVER THE
GASKET INTO ALIGNMENT WITH THE BOLTS.
(e) Position gasket (9) over sheath (10) on inlet manifold adapter and align bolt
holes. Sheath flange must be flat.
NOTE: 1. Do not force fuel nozzle sheath into the gas generator case.
Investigate any cause of resistance.
NOTE: 2. Make sure raised circumferential section of gasket is adjacent to gas

generator case boss.
(f) Insert sheath on inlet manifold adapter into boss at 6 o’clock position on gas
generator case, align bolt holes, and secure adapter to case with two bolts.
Do not torque bolts at this stage.
(5) Install remaining fuel manifold adapter assemblies as follows:
(a) Install sheaths (10) on manifold adapters (12) ensuring that locating pins (11)
engage with respective holes in sheaths.
73-10-05
Page 211
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: TO AVOID POSSIBLE FAILURE OR STAINLESS STEEL GASKETS,

IT IS ADVISABLE TO SLIDE GASKET OVER SHEATH, CAREFULLY
ALIGN HOLES AND INSERT BOTH BOLTS. THE WHOLE
ASSEMBLY CAN THEN BE MATED WITH PADS ON THE GAS
GENERATOR CASE, THUS AVOIDING ANY ATTEMPT TO LEVER
GASKETS INTO ALIGNMENT WITH BOLTS.
(b) Position gaskets (9) over sheaths (10) on manifold adapters (12) and align bolt
holes.
NOTE: 1. Do not force fuel nozzle sheath into the gas generator case.
Investigate any cause of resistance.
NOTE: 2. Make sure raised circumferential section of gasket is adjacent to gas

generator case boss.
CAUTION: ONLY USE APPROVED OIL TO LUBRICATE THE PACKINGS.

USAGE OF ASSEMBLY FLUID, VASELINE, GREASE OR ANY
OTHER UNAPPROVED SUBSTANCE MAY CAUSE BLOCKAGE OF
THE FUEL NOZZLES THAT CAN RESULT IN POSSIBLE SEVERE
HOT SECTION DAMAGE.
(c) Lubricate new preformed packings (2) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install
on remaining fuel transfer tubes (1).
CAUTION: A DEFECTIVE PLATE CAN CAUSE FRETTING OF THE TRANSFER

TUBE OR THE LOSS OF THE TRANSFER TUBE RETENTION,
WHICH MAY RESULT IN A FUEL LEAK. INSPECT THE LOCKING
PLATE FOR DAMAGE (I.E. BENT, DISTORTION AND/OR
INSTALLATION IRREGULARITIES). IF THERE IS ANY DAMAGE,
REPLACE WITH A NEW PLATE AND/OR THE TRANSFER TUBE.
(d) Install fuel manifold adapter assemblies (12) and sheaths (10) on gas
generator case, progressively, starting on each side of inlet manifold adapter
(12). As each adapter assembly is positioned, with pusher (PWC32366) or
(PWC50074), insert fuel transfer tubes (1) to interconnect with adjacent
adapter, install locking plate (6), and secure adapter and plate to gas generator
case with two bolts (5) at each location. Do not torque bolts at this stage.
NOTE: 1. Make sure that the locking plate is correctly positioned (Ref. Fig. 207).
The plate must be installed between the flange of the transfer tube
and the fuel nozzle adaptor. P&WC recommends to use a mirror to
make sure the installation is correct on the inboard side of the
engine.
NOTE: 2. Position of each manifold adapter assembly was marked prior to

removal from gas generator case and, where possible, adapters
should be reinstalled at original locations. When a replacement part
is required, it should be installed at location from which
unserviceable item was removed.
(e) When all fuel manifold adapter assemblies (12) are positioned, remove bolts
from inlet manifold adapter, install locking plate (6), and reinstall bolts (5).
73-10-05
Page 212
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(6) Tighten all adapter mounting bolts as follows:
CAUTION: DO NOT LOOSEN BOLTS TO ZERO TORQUE AFTER APPLYING

INITIAL TORQUE.
CAUTION: GAP BETWEEN ADAPTER AND SHEATH FLANGES NOT TO
EXCEED 0.001 INCH MAXIMUM BEFORE LOCKWIRING.
(a) Torque all bolts 15 to 20 lb.in., in sequence, then continue torquing in sequence
32 to 36 lb.in., and lockwire using single strand method with 0.032 inch
lockwire (PWC05-090).
NOTE: ‘‘Single’’ strand type lockwiring is acceptable (Ref. Fig. 208) for fuel
manifold adapters, providing that 0.032 inch lockwire is used.
(7) Install ignition cables (Ref. 74-20-00), as applicable.
6. Adjustment/Test
A. Preparation (Ref. Figs. 201 and 209)
CAUTION: EXTREME CARE MUST BE EXERCISED WHEN HANDLING FUEL

NOZZLES SINCE EVEN FINGERPRINTS ON THE ORIFICE MAY
PRODUCE A POOR SPRAY PATTERN. CLEAN, LINT-FREE COTTON
GLOVES OR SURGICAL GLOVES MUST BE WORN AT ALL TIMES WHEN
HANDLING COMPONENTS.
(1) Install blanking caps (10) on adapter and elbow. Torque caps 40 to 45 lb.in.
NOTE: If adapter and elbow are removed from flow divider install blanking plug
(PWC30530) (11) in lieu of caps (10).
B. Leakage Test (Ref. Fig. 209)
(1) Back off torque screw (6) and set screw (4) on test fixture (PWC30405). Loosen
pivot screw (8) and rotate pivot block (7) to provide adequate space for installation
of fuel manifold adapter between pivot block and end block.
(2) Position fuel manifold adapter assembly (3) between pivot and blocks of fixture (2),
with nozzle orifice towards plastic pad (5).
(3) Insert plugs of pivot block (7) into manifold adapter ports and, by rotating block,
insert two plugs of fixture end block into opposite ports of adapter. Make sure that
preformed packings are not dislodged from grooves in fixture plugs during this
operation.
(4) With plugs fully inserted in manifold adapter ports, hold parts firmly in position and
tighten pivot screw (8).
(5) Turn set screw (4) inward until it seats on rear of adapter, behind nozzle.
(6) Turn torque screw (6) until plastic pad (5) seats on nozzle orifice face.
73-10-05
Page 213
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ADAPTER
MAX. ALLOWABLE
GAP 0.003 INCH
AT ANY POSITION
SHEATH
# 76 SIZE DRILL (0.020" DIA.)
SECTION THROUGH FUEL MANIFOLD ADAPTER AND SHEATH HAND HELD
ADAPTER
MAX. ALLOWABLE
GAP 0.001 INCH
AT ANY POSITION
METAL GASKET
GAS GENERATOR CASE

SHEATH
SECTION THROUGH FUEL MANIFOLD ADAPTER AND SHEATH

INSTALLED ON GAS GENERATOR CASE
C41914
Clearance Checks - Fuel Nozzle Adapter and Sheath

Figure 206
73-10-05
Page 214
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ADAPTER
LOCKING
PLATE
FLANGE
CORRECT INSTALLATION
INCORRECT INSTALLATION
INCORRECT INSTALLATION
C111468
Locking Plate Positioning
Figure 207
73-10-05
Page 215
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PARTIAL SECTION TO
SHOW LOCKWIRE ROUTE
LOCKWIRE
NOT TWISTED
C23094A
Alternate Lockwiring Method - Fuel Manifold Adapters

Figure 208
73-10-05
Page 216
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(7) Tighten screws (4 and 6), simultaneously, to ensure that pad closes nozzle orifice
without distorting adapter. Tighten set screw locknut.
(8) External Leak Test: Check for leaks (external) between fuel nozzle and adapter with
one of the following methods:
(a) Method A:
1 Connect hose assembly (1) to a supply of clean, dry compressed air or

nitrogen and apply 200 psig to test fixture (2). Check for leaks with fluid
(PWC03-002) or put fuel nozzle and adapter assembly fully into solvent
(PWC11-027) or cleaner (PWC11-054). Leakage is not permitted.
(b) Method B:
1 Connect hose assembly (1) to a pressure tester fitted with a 0 to 600 psig
gage and filled with fuel (PWC01-001). Apply compressed air or nitrogen at
500 psig to fixture (2) and check for leaks. Leakage is not permitted.
(c) If the leak check is successful, lock the keywasher on the nozzle adapter
assembly and do the test again.
(d) Reduce pressure to zero as indicated on gage (6, Fig. 210), by adjusting
pressure regulator (3). Disconnect hose assembly (1) from test fixture (2).
(e) Disconnect air supply line (2) from pressure regulator (3) on test rig (1).
(f) Remove fuel manifold and adapter assembly (13) from test fixture (2).
(9) Internal Leak Test
(a) Check for leaks (Internal) between primary and secondary passages as follows:
1 Partially fill fuel container (4, Fig. 210) of test rig (1) with clean fuel
(PWC01-001).
2 Insert one blanking tube assembly (13) and connecting tube (9) of fuel
nozzle fixture (12) into fuel manifold adapter (11) as shown. The two
remaining blanking tubes (13) are not required.
3 Place manifold adapter (11) in fuel nozzle fixture (12) and put collars of
blanking tubes (13) inside of fixture flanges with tubes in appropriate
slots. Fasten adapter to fixture with screws and nuts.
4 Connect tube (9) to fitting (19) and ball valve (8) on hose assembly (7) and
tighten coupling nuts to prevent leakage.
5 Connect air supply line (2) with 100 psig maximum to pressure regulating
valve (3) on test rig (1).
6 Adjust pressure regulating valve (3) to increase pressure to 100 psig as

indicated on pressure gage (6).
73-10-05
Page 217
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1
1
2 2
3 11
11
9
10
10 9
8 1
6 5 4
C9339
Fuel Nozzle Leakage Test (External only)

Figure 209
73-10-05
Page 218
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 209
1. Hose Assembly
2. Test Fixture
3. Fuel Manifold Adapter Assembly
4. Set Screw
5. Plastic Pad
6. Torque Screw
7. Pivot Block
8. Pivot Screw
9. Flow Divider
10. Blanking Cap
11. Blanking Plug
7 Check for leaks at secondary port using pressure air to dry the manifold
passage which is open to atmosphere and visually inspect for any fuel
leaks. No leakage permitted.
8 Reduce pressure to zero as indicated on gage (6, Fig. 210), by adjusting

pressure regulating valve (3). When fuel flow from nozzle stops, disconnect
and blank off hose assembly (7) from connecting tube (9).
9 Disconnect air supply line (2) from pressure regulating valve (3) on test rig
(1).
10 Remove fuel manifold adapter (11) and fuel nozzle (10) from fuel nozzle
fixture (12) and withdraw connecting tube (9) and blanking tube (13) from
ports in adapter.
(10) Remove plugs (12) or blanking caps (11) from flow divider.
C. Inspect Sheaths
(1) Remove sheaths (Ref. Para. 5. A).
(2) Inspect sheaths for fretting wear to a maximum depth of 0.010 inch. If worn beyond
0.010 inch. also inspect igniters for fretting wear (Ref. 74-20-00).
(3) If igniters are also worn beyond limits, remove power section and inspect combustion
liner components for cracking and/or evidence of distortion. Replace liner as
required. If condition of liner is acceptable, send power section to an overhaul facility
for investigation of gas generator.
73-10-05
Page 219
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Nozzle Functional Check (Ref. Fig. 210)
CAUTION: EXTREME CARE MUST BE EXERCISED WHEN HANDLING, SINCE EVEN

FINGERPRINTS ON NOZZLE ORIFICES MAY PRODUCE POOR SPRAY
PATTERNS. CLEAN LINT-FREE COTTON GLOVES OR SURGICAL GLOVES
SHOULD BE WORN AT ALL TIMES WHEN HANDLING COMPONENTS.
ASSEMBLIES WHICH ARE NOT TO BE IMMEDIATELY REINSTALLED
SHOULD BE PLACED IN A COVERED CONTAINER TO PREVENT EXPOSURE
TO DIRT AND DUST.
NOTE: 1. Perform borescope inspection of hot section, if one or more unacceptable

nozzle(s) are found during functional check.
NOTE: 2. Nozzles should be examined for carbon buildup on the tips and, if necessary,
cleaned (Ref. Para. 7., following).
(1) Definitions of terms used in text to describe specified test conditions for nozzles are
as follows:
(a) ‘‘Onion’’ describes a spray condition which sometimes occurs at low flow rates
when spray exhibits a distinct ‘‘onion’’ bulb shape.
(b) Streakiness is defined as variation in spray quantity between different parts of

spray cone and appearing as darker streaks in spray. It is specified as a
percentage variation from nominal.
(c) Spitting is a condition which exists when large drops of unatomized fuel occur
intermittently and usually on outside of spray cone.
(d) Drooling is a condition which occurs when large drops of unatomized fuel form
on nozzle face.
(2) Set pressure regulating valve (3) of test rig (1) (PWC30506) or (PWC90086), or
equivalent, to zero pressure position and wait until gage (6) shows zero pressure;
open ball valve (8) to confirm, then close ball valve.
WARNING: TO ELIMINATE DANGER OF ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE CONNECT

CABLE (18) TO SUITABLE GROUND POINT.
(3) Remove filler plug (17) and fill fuel container (4) with 48 fluid ounces of clean fuel
(PWC01-001).
(4) Inspect filler plug preformed packing seal for condition and screw filler plug into fuel
container (4).
(5) Carefully insert blanking tube (13) and connecting tube (9) in fuel manifold adapter
(11) assembly and connect fitting (19) to connecting tube (9). Tighten coupling nut
securely.
73-10-05
Page 220
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5
4
17 6
2
19
MAXIMUM INLET
AIR PRESSURE 11 7
100 PSIG
8
13
9
12
18 14
10
16
14
15
C3084C
Fuel Nozzle Functional Check
73-10-05
Page 221
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 210
1. Test Rig
2. Air Supply Line
3. Pressure Regulating Valve
4. Fuel Container
5. Filter
6. Pressure Gage
7. Hose Assembly
8. Ball Valve
9. Connecting Tube
10. Fuel Nozzle
11. Fuel Manifold Adapter
12. Fuel Nozzle Fixture
13. Blanking Tube
14. Blanking Caps AN929
15. Fuel Inlet Adapter
16. Flow Divider
17. Filler Plug with Relief Valve
18. Ground Cable
19. Fitting
73-10-05
Page 222
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ACCEPTABLE
GOOD UNIFORM LIGHT STREAKS

SPRAY QUALITY (10%) MAX.
NOT ACCEPTABLE
ONE OR MORE DROOLING SPITTING

HEAVY STREAKS
25%
A
10%
FUEL NOZZLE A
THE ADDITION OF THE STREAKS MUST NOT
BE MORE THAN 10% OF THE TOTAL FUEL SPRAY. FUEL SPRAY UNDER VIEW
VIEW A
C241173
Fuel Nozzle Functional Check
73-10-05
Page 223
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(6) Place the assembly of adapter (11) and nozzle (10) in fixture (12) (PWC32811) and
secure. Position drip tray underneath.
NOTE: The fuel inlet adapter (15) and flow divider (16) assembly is functionally
checked in the same manner as for the fuel manifold adapter (11), except
that the flow divider connections are blanked with blanking caps (14).
Alternatively, if these connections are removed, the flow divider ports may
be blanked with suitable blanking plugs.
(7) Adjust pressure regulator (3) gradually until 20.0 psig is indicated on pressure gage
(6). A full conical spray, free from spitting or drooling, must appear from nozzle at
20.0 psig and a distinct onion shape may or may not form before the open spray. If
spitting or drooling occurs at 20.0 psig, reject nozzle.
(8) Adjust pressure regulator (3) to increase pressure to 60 psig as indicated on gage
(6). Volume of spray must increase and be spread evenly about the center axis of
nozzle orifice. If the addition of the streak more than a total of 10% of total fuel
spray then reject the nozzle.
NOTE: Spitting, drooling and streakiness can be caused by external carbon

deposits around nozzle orifice. Remove deposits by lightly brushing nozzle
face with cotton swab or non-metallic bristle brush while fuel is flowing
through orifice.
(9) Close ball valve (8) and uncouple connecting tube (9) from fitting (19).
(10) Disconnect air supply line (2) from pressure regulator (3) on test rig (1).
(11) Remove adapter (12) and nozzle assembly (13) from flow fixture (11) and withdraw
connecting tube assembly (10) and blanking tube assembly (18) from ports in
adapter.
(12) Function test secondary passage of adapter (12) and nozzle assembly (13) (Ref.
Steps (5) thru (11)). Note that connecting tube assembly (10) and blanking tube
assembly (18) are inserted into ports on opposite side of adapter (12).
(13) Remove external carbon by lightly brushing orifice face with a brush having either
bronze or non-metallic bristles, while fuel flows through orifice.
(14) Close ball valve (8) and uncouple connecting tube (9) from fitting (19).
(15) Remove the assembly of fuel adapter (11) and nozzle (10) from fixture (12), and
withdraw blanking tube (13) and connecting tube (9) from adapter (11).
(16) Place adapter and nozzle assembly in a clean, dust-proof container until required
for installation on engine.
(17) Replacement fuel manifold adapter assemblies must be leakage checked as

described in Subparagraph B., preceding.
73-10-05
Page 224
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7. Cleaning
A. Fuel Manifold Adapter Assemblies
CAUTION: EXTREME CARE MUST BE EXERCISED WHEN HANDLING SINCE EVEN

FINGERPRINTS ON THE NOZZLE ORIFICE MAY PRODUCE A POOR SPRAY
PATTERN. CLEAN, LINT-FREE, COTTON GLOVES OR SURGICAL GLOVES
SHOULD BE WORN AT ALL TIMES WHEN HANDLING COMPONENTS TO BE
INSTALLED. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO CLEAN BY BRUSHING WITHOUT AIR
SUPPLY SINCE PARTICLES MAY BLOCK THE ORIFICE.
(1) Clean by introducing dry, clean compressed air into the nozzle adapter fuel inlet
and brushing the orifice lightly with a soft bristled nylon or bronze brush.
NOTE: In-situ cleaning is offered as an alternative method (Ref. 72-00-00,

ENGINE- CLEANING).
B. Fuel Nozzles (Removed from Fuel Manifold Adapters)
CAUTION: EXTREME CARE MUST BE USED WHEN THE FUEL NOZZLE ASSEMBLIES
ARE HANDLED SINCE EVEN FINGERPRINTS ON THE ORIFICE MAY
PRODUCE POOR SPRAY PATTERN. CLEAN, LINT-FREE COTTON GLOVES
OR SURGICAL GLOVES SHOULD BE WORN AT ALL TIMES WHEN
THESE PARTS ARE HANDLED.
(1) Place fuel nozzles in perforated steel container.
NOTE: Wires may be used to suspend parts in cleaning solution to prevent

contact during cleaning.
(2) Prepare caustic solution by diluting 2 to 3 pounds of carbon removing compound

(PWC11-013) or (PWC11-049) in one (1) U.S. gallon of water (3.8 liters) and heat
to approximately 90°C (200°F). Pour caustic solution/cleaner into the tank of
ultrasonic cleaner.
NOTE: 2 to 3 lb. carbon removing compound (PWC11-013) or (PWC11-049) per

(US) gallon produces 24 to 36 % solution.
(3) Suspend the perforated stainless steel container containing nozzle assemblies in
the cleaner tank solution. Make sure that all nozzles are completely immersed.
(4) Cover tank and activate ultrasonic cleaner for approximately one hour.
(5) After cleaning, immediately wash assemblies thoroughly in very hot water.
CAUTION: FLUSHING MUST BE DONE IMMEDIATELY AFTER THE CLEANING

PROCESS TO AVOID DAMAGE TO THE NOZZLES BY RESIDUAL
CARBON REMOVER SOLUTION.
(6) Install nozzles in flushing fixture (Ref. Fig. 211) .
NOTE: 1. Fuel nozzle flushing fixture may be locally manufactured (Ref. Fig. 211).
NOTE: 2. Use suitable blanking plugs if all 14 positions are not filled.
73-10-05
Page 225
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(7) Connect the hot water supply to the flushing fixture and flow clean, very hot water
through the nozzles for one minute at normal tap water pressure up to 30 psig.
(8) Disconnect the flushing fixture from the hot water supply, connect to a supply of
clean filtered compressed air or nitrogen and dry thoroughly. Disconnect the
flushing fixture from the air supply.
(9) Connect the flushing fixture to the fuel manifold adapter assembly test rig and flow
fuel through the nozzles for one minute at 30 psig.
(10) Remove the nozzles from the flushing fixture and store in a clean container until
required for reinstallation and test in the adapter assemblies.
73-10-05
Page 226
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL INLET FITTING SIZE

0.50 IN. TO 0.625 IN. DIA. TO SUIT EXISTING EQUIPMENT
(TO SUIT FITTING) (STAINLESS STEEL)
7 INCHES
TAP TO SUIT
DRILL AND TAP FITTING
DRILL 6.75 IN. DEEP
0.3125 IN. X 32 UNJEF
1.50 IN. X 1.50 IN. BAR STOCK, OR 14 PLACES
1.50 IN. DIA. STOCK STAINLESS STEEL
C72872
Fuel Nozzle Flushing Fixture
Figure 211
73-10-05
Page 227/228
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL DRAIN VALVES - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General

Not Applicable
3. Special Tools
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
A. Removal
(1) Remove adapter (6) from boss (1) in gas generator case.
(2) Remove gasket (2).
(3) Remove retaining ring (3), drain valve (4) and spring (5) from adapter.
B. Installation
(1) Install spring (5), drain valve (4) and retaining ring (3) in adapter (6).
(2) Install new gasket (2) on adapter.
(3) Install drain valve assembly in boss (1) in gas generator case. Torque 450 to
550 lb.in.
NOTE: Assembly is retorqued and lockwired after engine ground check.
73-10-06 Page 201

FUEL DRAIN VALVES - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES Mar 09/2001
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A A
C22113
Gas Generator Drain Valves - Removal/Installation

Figure 201
73-10-06 Page 202

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 201
1. Drain Valve Boss

2. Gasket
3. Retaining Ring
4. Drain Valve
5. Spring
6. Adapter
73-10-06 Page 203/204

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P3 AIR FILTER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General

Item No. Name

PWC05-089 Lockwire
PWC09-003 Compound, Sealing
PWC11-013 Compound, Methyl
PWC11-046 Rust Remover, Alkaline
PWC11-047 Rust Remover, Alkaline
3. Special Tools
Not Applicable
Name Remarks
Cleaning Tank, Electrosonic Model KS5518 or Equivalent
A. Removal of Filter Element
NOTE: During removal of filter element inspect drain valve for proper operation.
(1) Remove lockwire and, using a suitable wrench, unscrew cover (6).
(2) Remove preformed packing (7).
(3) Remove element (9) and preformed packings (8 and 10).
(4) Remove spring (11).
73-10-07
Page 201
P3 AIR FILTER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES Jul 18/2016
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
12
11
10
8
7
5
4
3
2
DETAIL A
C33786
P3 Filter Element and Drain Valve - Removal/Installation

Figure 201
73-10-07
Page 202
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 201
1. Drain Valve Adapter

3. Valve Spring
4. Drain Valve
5. Retaining Ring
6. Cover
9. Filter Element
11. Spring
12. Filter Housing Assembly
B. Removal of Drain Valve
CAUTION: THE P3 FILTER COVER IS MADE FROM ALUMINUM ALLOY. TAKE CARE
NOT TO DAMAGE THE COVER WHEN LOCKWIRING THE DRAIN VALVE
ASSEMBLY ON POST-SB5367 P3 FILTER COVER ASSEMBLIES. BEFORE
LOCKWIRING THE DRAIN VALVE ASSEMBLY, EXAMINE THE LOCKWIRE
ATTACHMENT HOLES ON THE COVER ASSEMBLY FOR EVIDENCE OF
TEARING. IF TEARING IS EVIDENT, SECURE LOCKWIRE TO AN
ALTERNATIVE SERVICEABLE LOCATION (REF. 70-00-00, STANDARD
PRACTICES - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION).
(1) Hold cover (6) with suitable wrench and unscrew drain valve adapter (1). Discard
preformed packing (2).
(2) Remove retaining ring (5), drain valve (4) and valve spring (3).
C. Installation of Drain Valve
(1) Install valve spring (3) and drain valve (4) into drain valve adapter (1). Secure with
retaining ring (5).
(2) Install preformed packing onto drain valve adapter (1) and screw adapter into cover
(6), torque 225 to 250 lb.in. and lockwire (PWC05-089).
D. Installation of Filter Element
CAUTION: BEFORE THE NEW PREFORMED PACKINGS ARE INSTALLED, MAKE SURE
THAT THE AREA INSIDE THE FILTER HOUSING ASSEMBLY, COVER AND
FILTER IS CLEAN AND FREE FROM DEBRIS.
(1) Install spring (11) into filter housing assembly (12).
(2) Install new preformed packing (10) inside element (9).
73-10-07
Page 203
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) Install new preformed packing (8) onto boss of element (9).
NOTE: Ensure preformed packing (8) is installed on first groove (furthest from
face of element).
(4) Position element over spigot inside filter housing assembly (12).
(5) Lubricate new preformed packing (7) with silicone compound (PWC09-003) and
install on cover (6).
(6) Apply engine oil on threads and install cover in housing, torque 60 to 70 lb.in. and
lockwire.
6. Cleaning
A. P3 Filter Element, Electrosonic Cleaning (Ref. Fig. 202)
(1) Put the filter element vertically in an electrosonic cleaning tank (Model KS5518) or
equivalent with open end at the bottom.
NOTE: Make sure that there is no plug installed at the open end of the element.
(2) Pour sufficient quantity of isopropyl alcohol (PWC11-014) into tank.
NOTE: To avoid spillage during operation, level must be kept at 1/4 in. below top
of tank.
(3) Operate cleaner for ten minutes.
(4) Turn element so that open end is at the top.
(5) Operate cleaner for five minutes.
(6) Turn element so that open end is at the bottom.
(7) Operate cleaner for five minutes.
NOTE: Cleaning duration should be adjusted to suit condition of filter element. For
best results, cleaning solvent should be changed every 20 minutes.
(8) Remove element from tank, using clean lint-free gloves and dry with clean low
pressure compressed air.
(9) Store cleaned element in polyethylene bag until required for installation.
B. P3 Filter Element, Ultrasonic Cleaning (Ref. Adjustment/Test)
NOTE: This cleaning can also be done at a PWC approved overhaul facility.
(1) Immerse P3 filter element in cleaning solution, (PWC11-013), (PWC11-046), or

(PWC11-047) at 71° to 82°C (160° to 180°F) for 15 minutes.
(2) Dip rinse in hot water at 66° to 93°C (150° to 200°F).
73-10-07
Page 204
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) Dry with compressed air.
(4) Ultrasonically clean and simultaneously backflush in isopropyl alcohol (PWC11-014)

or as per SPOP 209 for 5 to 10 minutes.
C. Drain Valve (Ref. Fig. 202)
NOTE: Cleaning of drain valve components is required at 100 hour intervals, however,
it is recommended that drain valves on engines operating in dirty or desert
conditions be cleaned and inspected at 50 hour intervals .
(1) Clean drain valve components and cover (6) using isopropyl alcohol (PWC11-014).
(2) Dry with clean low pressure compressed air.
7. Adjustment/Test
A. P3 Filter Pressure Drop Check (Ref. Fig. 203)
NOTE: The P3 Filter Pressure Drop check is performed at the 900 hour level.
Ultrasonically clean the P3 Filter prior to performing this check.
(1) Install filter cover on housing and tighten fingertight.
(2) Connect P3 filter housing or fixture to the test set up as shown in figure.
(3) Pressurize the filter housing or the fixture to an indicated pressure of 150 psig
(approx. air flow 0.15 lb/min) and record the pressure drop across the housing
or fixture.
(4) Install the cleaned P3 filter element in the housing or fixture and record pressure
drop across the housing or fixture again when pressurized to 80 psig.
(5) The pressure drop differential (delta P) between the readings in steps (3) and (4)
shall not be more than 0.5 in. Hg. In the event delta P exceeds 0.5 in. Hg, the P3
element must be recleaned and tested.
(6) Wrap cleaned element to preclude contamination prior to installation.
73-10-07
Page 205
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P3 AIR FILTER
ELEMENT
CLEANING SOLVENT
LOW FREQUENCY
CLEANER
THROUGH HOLE
DO NOT PLUG
C7153A
P3 Filter Element - Cleaning

Figure 202
73-10-07
Page 206
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SUPPLY PRESSURE
GAGE
TO AMBIENT 0 − 100 PSIG
AIR FLOWMETER
0.10 − 2.40 LB/MIN
OR A CALIBRATED ORIFICE REGULATOR
OUT IN
AIR SUPPLY
P3 FILTER LINE FILTER

HOUSING 1 MICRON
OR ABSOLUTE
FIXTURE
P
MANOMETER
0 − 30 INCH Hg
C8369
P3 Filter Check
Figure 203
73-10-07
Page 207/208
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P3 / PG - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General

Not Applicable
3. Special Tools
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
5. Adjustment/Test Pg Pneumatic Tubes
A. For Pre-SB5409 engines: Pg air Tube (Ref. Fig. 201)
(1) Use a suitable ohmmeter or resistance bridge, measure resistance of element and
lead assembly across Pins A and B. Resistance must be 20±1.4 ohms.
B. For Post-SB5409 engines: Pg and P3 tubes (Engine mounted on the aircraft) (Ref. Fig.
201)
(1) With the tubes installed and connected together, use a suitable ohmmeter or
resistance bridge, measure resistance of the tubes and lead assembly across Pins A
and B of the Pg tube connector. Resistance must be 10±0.7 ohms.
C. For Post-SB5409 engines: Pg and P3 tubes (Engine not mounted on the aircraft) (Ref.
Fig. 201)
(1) Use a suitable ohmmeter or resistance bridge, measure resistance of the individual
tube elements and leads assembly across Pins A and B. Resistance must be
20±1.4 ohms for each tube.
D. For Post-SB5458 engines: Pg tube (Engine mounted or not mounted on the aircraft)
(Ref. Fig. 202)
(1) Use an applicable ohmmeter or resistance bridge, measure the resistance of

element and lead assembly across Pins A and B. Resistance must be 20 ± 1.4 ohms.
73-10-08
Page 201
P3 / Pg - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES Jul 18/2016
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B B A
D VIEW D
A
VIEW C
HEATED P3 TUBE (POST−SB5409)

C
HEATED Pg TUBE (PRE−SB5409) F
A B
B A
VIEW E VIEW F
HEATED Pg TUBE (POST−SB5409)
C139047
Checking Resistance of P3 (Post-SB5409) and/or Pg Heated Pneumatic Tubes

Figure 201
73-10-08
Page 202
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B A
G
VIEW G
HEATED Pg TUBE (POST−SB5458)
C242273
Checking Resistance of Pg Heated Tube (Post-SB5458)
Figure 202
73-10-08
Page 203/204
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER CHAPTER
LEP 1 Jul 18/2016 204 blank Mar 09/2001
2 blank Jul 18/2016
73-20-04 201 Jun 05/2009
Contents 1 Jul 18/2016 Maintenance 202 Jun 05/2009
2 Jul 18/2016 Practices 203 Jun 05/2009
3 Jul 18/2016 204 blank Jun 05/2009
4 blank Jul 18/2016
73-20-06 201 Mar 09/2001
73-20-01 201 Dec 02/2013 Maintenance 202 Mar 09/2001
Maintenance 202 Dec 02/2013 Practices 203 Mar 09/2001
Practices 203 Dec 02/2013 204 Mar 09/2001
204 Dec 02/2013 205 Mar 09/2001
205 Dec 02/2013 206 Mar 09/2001
206 Dec 02/2013
207 Dec 02/2013 73-20-07 201 Dec 02/2013
208 Dec 02/2013 Maintenance 202 Dec 02/2013
209 Dec 02/2013 Practices 203 Dec 02/2013
210 Dec 02/2013 204 blank Dec 02/2013
211 Dec 02/2013
212 Dec 02/2013
213 Dec 02/2013
214 Dec 02/2013
215 Dec 02/2013
216 blank Dec 02/2013
73-20-02 201 Jul 18/2016

204 Jul 18/2016
205 Jul 18/2016
206 Jul 18/2016
207 Jul 18/2016
208 Jul 18/2016
209 Jul 18/2016
210 Jul 18/2016
211 Jul 18/2016
212 blank Jul 18/2016
73-20-03 201 Mar 09/2001


Page 1/2
73-20 LEP Jul 18/2016
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
MANUAL FUEL CONTROL UNIT (MFCU) - MAINTENANCE

PRACTICES 73-20-01
1. General 201
A. Removal of Complete Assembly 201

B. Disconnection of MFCU/AFCU Interconnect Linkage 203
C. Removal of MFCU from Fuel Pump 204
D. Installation of MFCU on Fuel Pump 204
E. Installation of Complete Assembly 207
6. Fits and Clearances 209

A. Pressure Regulating Valve Replacement 210
B. Solenoid Valve Replacement 210
AUTOMATIC FUEL CONTROL UNIT (AFCU) - MAINTENANCE

PRACTICES 73-20-02
1. General 201
A. Removal of AFCU 201

B. Installation of AFCU 204
A. Procedure 205

Page 1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
AUTOMATIC FUEL CONTROL UNIT (AFCU) - MAINTENANCE

7. Storage 207
A. Preservation of AFCU 207
B. Depreservation of AFCU - Reconditioning after Storage 208
C. Packaging and Shipping of AFCU 209
PG ACCUMULATOR/SEALING CAP - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES 73-20-03

1. General 201
A. Removal 201
B. Installation 201
PT (NF) GOVERNOR - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES 73-20-04
1. General 201

A. Removal 201
B. Installation 201
TORQUE LIMITER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES 73-20-06
1. General 201

Page 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
TORQUE LIMITER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES (Cont’d) 73-20-06
A. Removal 201
B. Installation 203
6. Re-priming 204
A. Procedure 204
PY ACCUMULATOR - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES 73-20-07
1. General 201

A. Removal 201
B. Installation 201

Page 3/4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MANUAL FUEL CONTROL UNIT (MFCU) - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General

Item No. Name

PWC05-089 Lockwire
3. Special Tools
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
NOTE: It is advisable to remove the complete assembly of fuel control units, fuel pump,
and oil-to-fuel heater as detailed in Subpara.A., following, before attempting to
remove the MFCU, AFCU or fuel pump.
A. Removal of Complete Assembly (Ref. Fig. 201)
(1) Disconnect pneumatic tube connectors (1, 2, 15 and 16).
(2) Disconnect linkage from MFCU throttle shaft (13).
(3) Disconnect fuel delivery tube connector (12).
(4) Disconnect electrical connector (11) from solenoid valve.
(5) Disconnect seal drain tube connector (14).
(6) Remove oil-to-fuel heater (Ref. Chap. 73-10-01).
(7) Remove bolts (6) and washers (7) and withdraw fuel inlet elbow (8). Remove
transfer tube (4) and preformed packings (3 and 5).
(8) Remove nuts and washers (9) and withdraw complete assembly from accessory
gearbox studs.
73-20-01
Page 201
MANUAL FUEL CONTROL UNIT (MFCU) - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES Dec 02/2013
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OIL−TO−FUEL ACCESSORY
HEATER (REF.) 6 GEARBOX (REF.)
3
10
7
1
5 8
9
4
AFCU 3
A 2
C
COUPLING
17
MFCU
FUEL PUMP
11
16
B
SOLENOID VALVE
25
12
13
PVR
CHAMFER 0.020 TO 0.040 14

× 45 ° ± 5 ° 4 PLACES
DETAIL D
19
18
20
15 D 26 27
AFCU
25
22
24
21
VIEW A 23 DETAIL C
NOTE: MFCU NOTE:
AFCU, MFCU AND FUEL PUMP ITEMS 20 AND 21
SHOWN SEPARATED FOR CLARITY DETAIL B MUST NOT BE REMOVED
C22085B
Removal/Installation of Complete Fuel Control Assembly

Figure 201
73-20-01
Page 202
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 201
1. Pg Tube Connector
2. P3 Tube Connector
4. Transfer Tube
6. Bolt
7. Washer
8. Fuel Inlet Elbow
9. Nut and Washer
10. Gasket
11. Electrical Connector
12. Fuel Delivery Tube Connector
13. MFCU Throttle Shaft
15. Py Tube Connector
16. P3 Tube Connector
18. Pin
19. Cotterpin
20. AFCU Lever Arm
21. Nut and Cotterpin
22. Interconnect Linkage
23. MFCU Lever Arm
24. Nut
25. Spacer
26. Straight Pin
27. Sleeve Spacer
(9) Remove gasket (10).
B. Disconnection of MFCU/AFCU Interconnect Linkage (Ref. Fig. 201)
(1) Move throttle shaft (13) until indicator shows zero degrees.
(2) Move AFCU lever arm (20) to compress spring on linkage (22). Remove nut (24)
and spacer (25).
(3) Move AFCU lever arm so that linkage (22) is withdrawn from straight pin (26) and
remove straight pin from MFCU lever arm.
(4) Reinstall straight pin (26), spacer (25) and nut (24) on linkage (22) until replacement
MFCU is installed and linkage is to be reconnected.
73-20-01
Page 203
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Removal of MFCU from Fuel Pump (Ref. Fig. 202)
(1) Disconnect bypass tube (12) at connector (20) on MFCU and connector (11) on
PRV (14). Remove tube.
NOTE: Due to difficulty in gaining access to bolts (24), fuel outlet tube is
disconnected from AFCU after removal of MFCU from pump.
(2) Remove PRV (14) as follows:
(a) Disconnect fuel outlet tube connector (17) from straight nipple (15) on PRV.
(b) Remove bolts (13).
(c) Remove PRV and preformed packing (18).
(3) Remove fuel inlet tube as follows:
(a) Remove bolts (16 and 26). Remove retaining plate (27) and withdraw inlet tube
from AFCU and MFCU.
(b) Remove preformed packings (19 and 28).
(4) Disconnect seal drain tube (6) at fuel pump and connector (10).
(5) Cap all open ports and tube ends.
(6) If interconnect linkage has not been disconnected, proceed as detailed in Subpara.
B. preceding.
(7) Remove nuts and washers (1) and withdraw MFCU from fuel pump studs (3)
Remove preformed packings (2).
(8) Remove bolts (24), withdraw inlet tube and remove preformed packing (25).
NOTE: Exercise care when withdrawing outlet tube (Ref. Detail A). Seat (29) and
screen assembly (30) are under spring pressure. Ensure that seat and
screen assembly remain with AFCU.
(9) If a replacement MFCU is to be installed, proceed as follows:
(a) Remove straight nipple (5) and preformed packing (4).
(b) Remove elbow and locknut (21), back-up ring (22) and preformed packing (23).
(c) Remove bolt (9), connector (7) and gaskets (8).
D. Installation of MFCU on Fuel Pump (Ref. Fig. 202)
NOTE: Prior to installation, check MFCU lockwiring and locking seals for integrity. If
any are broken, send unit to an overhaul facility for serviceability check.
(1) If a replacement MFCU is being installed, proceed as follows:
73-20-01
Page 204
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(a) Install connector (7), two new gaskets (8) and bolt (9) in MFCU seal drain port.
Do not torque at this stage.
(b) Install elbow and locknut (21), new preformed packing (23) and back up ring
(22) in fuel bypass port. Do not torque locknut at this stage.
(c) Install straight nipple (5) and new preformed packing (4) in MFCU fuel delivery
port. Torque 65 to 75 lb.in.
(2) Install new preformed packing (25) on fuel outlet tube. Ensure that screen assembly
(30) and seat (29) are installed and insert tube in AFCU port. Secure with bolts (24)
and torque 32 to 36 lb.in. and lockwire.
(3) Install new preformed packings (2) in recesses in MFCU/fuel pump mating face.
NOTE: If recesses in pump contain preformed packings which were not discarded
at MFCU removal or which were installed under the shipping plate on a
new pump, these preformed packings, must be replaced with new items of
the correct part number.
(4) Position MFCU on studs (3) and secure with nuts and washers (1). Torque 75 to
85 lb.in.
(5) Install PRV (14) as follows:
(a) Install new preformed packing (18) in groove in PRV.
(b) Position PRV on MFCU and secure with bolts (13). Torque 32 to 36 lb.in. and
lockwire.
(c) Connect fuel tubes to PRV at connectors (11 and 17). Torque 90 to 100 lb.in.
and lockwire.
(6) Install new preformed packing (28) on fuel inlet tube.
(7) Install the fuel inlet into boss of the AFCU. Install retaining plate (27) on the fuel
inlet tube with slot facing downwards and attach with bolts (26). Torque the bolts
32 to 36 lbf.in. and lockwire.
(8) Connect tube connector (20) to elbow (21). Torque connector (20) 90 to 100 lb.in.
Torque locknut on elbow (21) 38 to 42 lb.in. Lockwire connector and locknut.
(9) Install new preformed packing (19) and secure fuel inlet tube to MFCU with bolts
(16). Torque 32 to 36 lb.in. and lockwire.
(10) Connect seal drain tube (6) to fuel pump drain and at connector (10), to connector
(7) on MFCU. Torque connector (10) 90 to 100 lb.in. and connector bolt (9) 65 to
75 lb.in. Lockwire connectors.
(11) Connect linkage and install complete assembly of pump, AFCU and MFCU on
accessory gearbox (Ref. Subpara. E., following).
73-20-01
Page 205
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
30
29
28 DETAIL A
A
FUEL PUMP
25 FUEL OUTLET 1
27 TUBE
26
2 3
FUEL INLET TUBE 24
23
6
22
21
20 19
18
8
17
15 7
12 8
16 9
14
10
11
6
13
12
C203298
Removal/Installation of MFCU
Figure 202
73-20-01
Page 206
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 202
1. Nut and Washer

2. Preformed Packings
3. Fuel Pump Studs
5. Straight Nipple
6. Seal Drain Tube
7. Connector
8. Gaskets
9. Bolt
11. Fuel Tube Connector
12. Bypass Fuel Tube
13. Bolt
14. Pressure Regulating Valve (PRV)
15. Straight Nipple
16. Bolt
21. Elbow and Locknut
22. Back Up Ring
24. Bolt
26. Bolt
27. Retaining Plate
29. Seat
30. Screen Assembly
E. Installation of Complete Assembly (Ref. Fig. 201)
(1) Fits and Clearance Check
(a) Before connection of linkage, fits and clearances must be checked (Ref. Table
201).
(2) Connect MFCU/AFCU interconnect linkage as follows:
(a) Remove nut (24), spacer (25) and straight pin (26) from linkage (22).
(b) Position straight pin (26) in MFCU lever arm (23).
73-20-01
Page 207
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) Insert end of linkage (22) through straight pin and install spacer (25).
NOTE: If there is interference between spacer (25) and lever arm (23), chamfer
corners of spacer (Ref. Detail D).
(d) Install nut (24).
(e) With AFCU lever arm (20) held against maximum stop, tighten nut (24) until
indicator on throttle shaft registers 95 degrees.
NOTE: 1. Each time adjustment of nut (24) is required, AFCU lever arm must
be moved to compress spring and free nut from tangs of spacer
(25). When 95-degree reading is achieved, ensure that nut flats
engage correctly in spacer tangs.
NOTE: 2. Final adjustment of interconnect lever is carried out during test (Ref.
71-00-00, POWER PLANT - ADJUSTMENT/TEST).
(3) Install new gasket (10) on accessory gearbox studs.
CAUTION: ALIGN GEARS AND DO NOT APPLY FORCE TO ENGAGE PUMP

COUPLING WITH ENGINE GEARSHAFT.
(4) Position assembly on studs and install nuts and washers (9). Torque 75 to 85 lb.in.
(5) Install new preformed packings (3) on transfer tube (4).
(6) Install new preformed packing (5) on inlet port face of fuel pump.
(7) Install oil-to-fuel heater (Ref. Chap. 73-10-01).
(8) Insert one end of transfer tube into oil-to-fuel heater boss and the other end into
elbow (8).
(9) Position elbow (8) on fuel pump and install bolts (6) and washers (7). Torque 36 to
(10) Connect fuel delivery tube connector (12) to straight nipple on MFCU. Torque 90 to
(11) Connect pneumatic tube connectors (16, 15, 2 and 1). Torque 90 to 100 lb.in. and
lockwire.
(12) Connect electrical connector (11) to solenoid valve. Tighten connector fingertight
plus five degrees and lockwire.
(13) Connect linkage to MFCU throttle shaft (13).
(14) Connect seal drain connector (14). Torque 90 to 100 lb.in. and lockwire.
(15) If new or overhauled MFCU has been installed, carry out depreservation procedure.
73-20-01
Page 208
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6. Fits and Clearances
TABLE 201, Fits and Clearances (Ref. Fig. 201)
Dim. for Ref. (inches) Limits (inches)

REF.
NO. Name Min. Max. Min. Max. Replace
Item Pin 0.245 0.247
18/20 0.001 0.005
Lever arm (AFCU) 0.248 0.250
18/22 Pin 0.245 0.247

0.005 0.009
Link (AFCU end) 0.252 0.254
22/26 Link (MFCU end) 0.107 0.112

0.006 0.018
Pin (I.D.) 0.118 0.125
26/23 Pin (O.D.) 0.245 0.247

0.001 0.005
Lever arm (MFCU) 0.248 0.250
TABLE 202, Torque and Stretch
Limits
REF.
NO. Name Min. Max.
Not Applicable
TABLE 203, Spring Pressure
Limits
REF.
NO. Name Min. Max.
Not Applicable
73-20-01
Page 209
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE 204, Special Assembly
Limits
REF.
NO. Name Min. Max.
Not Applicable
7. Approved Repairs
A. Pressure Regulating Valve Replacement (Ref. Fig. 203)
(1) Disconnect fuel inlet tube connector (1) from straight nipple (2).
(2) Disconnect fuel bypass tube connector (5) from nipple on PRV (3).
(3) Remove bolts (4).
(4) Withdraw PRV and preformed packing (6) from MFCU.
(5) If replacement PRV is to be installed, remove straight nipple (2) and preformed
packing from PRV.
(6) Install new preformed packing and straight nipple (2). Torque 65 to 75 lb.in.
(7) Install new preformed packing (6) in groove in PRV.
(8) Position PRV on MFCU and secure with bolts (4). Torque 32 to 36 lb.in. and
lockwire.
(9) Connect fuel bypass tube connector (5) to nipple on PRV. Torque 90 to 100 lb.in.
and lockwire.
(10) Connect fuel delivery tube connector (1) to straight nipple (2). Torque 90 to
(11) If new or overhauled PRV has been installed, carry out depreservation procedure.
B. Solenoid Valve Replacement (Ref. Fig. 204)
NOTE: The solenoid can be removed with MFCU installed on the engine to facilitate
line maintenance requirements.
(1) Disconnect electrical connection (1) from solenoid valve (2).
(2) Remove screws (3) and washers (4) securing solenoid valve (2) to MFCU. Remove
valve and discard preformed packings (5).
(3) Lubricate new preformed packings (5) with engine oil and install in ports on
solenoid valve block.
73-20-01
Page 210
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) Install solenoid valve assembly on MFCU and secure with two screws (3) and plain
washers (4). Tighten screws, torque 20 to 25 lb.in. and lockwire.
(5) Connect solenoid electrical connection (1) tighten fingertight plus 5 degrees and
lockwire.
73-20-01
Page 211
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MFCU
C9348
Removal/Installation of Pressure Regulating Valve

Figure 203
73-20-01
Page 212
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 203
1. Fuel Inlet Tube Connector

2. Straight Nipple
3. Pressure Regulating Valve (PRV)
4. Bolt.
5. Fuel Bypass Tube Connector
73-20-01
Page 213
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5 3
C9341B
Removal/Installation of Solenoid Valve

Figure 204
73-20-01
Page 214
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 204
1. Electrical Connection
2. Solenoid Valve
3. Screw
4. Washer
73-20-01
Page 215/216
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AUTOMATIC FUEL CONTROL UNIT (AFCU) - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General

Consumable Materials referred to in this sectionrefer to section TOOLS/FIX/EQUIP or
Item No. Name

PWC05-089 Lockwire
3. Special Tools
Not Applicable
Name Remarks
FCU Shipping Stand P/N 2529654
A. Removal of AFCU (Ref. Fig. 201)
NOTE: If the AFCU is to be stored off the engine, prepare the AFCU for short or long
term storage (Ref. Storage) after removal is complete.
(1) Remove complete assembly of AFCU, MFCU and fuel pump from accessory
gearbox.
(2) Remove bolts (10 and 12) and retaining plate (13).
(3) Withdraw fuel tube (9) and remove preformed packings (11 and 14).
(4) Disconnect fuel tube connector (7) from nipple (8) on PRV.
NOTE: Due to difficulty in gaining access to bolts (17), fuel tube (16) is disconnected
from AFCU after removal from pump.
(5) Disconnect AFCU/MFCU interconnect linkage as follows (Ref. Detail C):
73-20-02
Page 201
AUTOMATIC FUEL CONTROL UNIT (AFCU) - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES Jul 18/2016
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
23
21
22
20 24
AFCU
DETAIL A 4
3
2 INTERCONNECT
1 LINKAGE 25
DETAIL C
6 FUEL PUMP
AFCU
5
NOTE:
C AFCU, MFCU AND FUEL PUMP
19 SHOWN SEPARATED FOR CLARITY
14 18
15
17
13
A
12 MFCU
16
9 16
11 8
B PRV
10
9
VIEW ON B
C165926
Removal/Installation of AFCU
Figure 201
73-20-02
Page 202
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 201
2. Packing Retainer
3. Locknut
4. Elbow
6. Coupling
8. Straight Nipple
9. Fuel Tube
10. Bolt
12. Bolt
13. Retaining Plate
16. Fuel Tube
17. Bolt
18. Nut
19. Washer
20. Seat
21. Screen
22. Pin
23. Cotterpin
24. AFCU Lever Arm
25. Cotterpin and Nut
CAUTION: UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES MUST COTTERPIN AND NUT (25)

AND AFCU LEVER ARM (24) BE REMOVED FROM AFCU (REF.
SUBPARA. B.).
(a) Remove cotterpin (23) and pin (22).
(b) Withdraw interconnect linkage from AFCU lever arm (24).
(6) Remove nuts (18) and washers (19) and withdraw AFCU, complete with fuel tube
(16), from fuel pump studs.
(7) Remove preformed packing (5).
(8) Remove coupling (6) and inspect for wear. Replace if splines are worn.
73-20-02
Page 203
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE: Exercise care when withdrawing tube (16) from AFCU (Ref. Detail A). Seat
(20) and screen (21) are under pressure of spring. Make sure that seat
and screen remain with AFCU.
(10) Withdraw tube (16) and remove preformed packing (15).
(11) If a replacement AFCU is to be installed, slacken locknut (3) on elbow (4). Remove
elbow (4), packing retainer (2) and preformed packing (1).
(12) If original AFCU is to be reinstalled and AFCU lever arm (24) has been inadvertently
removed, lever must be reinstalled as detailed in Subparagraph B. following.
B. Installation of AFCU (Ref. Fig. 201)
NOTE: 1. Prior to installation, check AFCU lockwiring and locking seals for integrity. If
any are broken, send unit to an overhaul facility for serviceability check.
NOTE: 2. When a replacement FCU is being installed, check the length of storage and
do reconditioning after storage (Ref. Storage).
(1) If a replacement AFCU is being installed, install elbow (4) and locknut (3) with new
packing retainer (2) and new preformed packing (1). Do not torque locknut (3) at
this stage.
(2) Install new preformed packing (15) on tube (16).
(3) Make sure that screen (21) and seat (20) are installed in AFCU.
(4) Make sure coupling (6) is installed in fuel pump.
(5) Insert tube into AFCU boss and retain with bolts (17). Torque 32 to 36 lb.in. and
lockwire.
(6) Install new preformed packing (5) in recess in fuel pump.
NOTE: If recess in fuel pump contains a preformed packing which was not
discarded at AFCU removal, or which was installed under the shipping
plate on a new pump, this preformed packing must be replaced with a new
item of the correct part number.
(7) Position AFCU on fuel pump studs, aligning coupling shaft with drive in AFCU.
NOTE: Make sure that preformed packing (5) remains in place.
(8) Install four nuts (18) and washers (19). Torque 75 to 85 lb.in.
(9) Connect tube connector (7) to nipple (8) on PRV. Torque 90 to 100 lb.in. and
lockwire.
(10) Install new preformed packings (11 and 14) on fuel tube (9).
73-20-02
Page 204
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(11) Install the fuel inlet tube into boss of the AFCU. Install retaining plate (13) on the
fuel inlet tube with slot facing downwards and attach with bolts (12). Torque the
bolts 32 to 36 lbf.in. and lockwire.
(12) Secure tube (9) to MFCU with bolts (10). Torque 32 to 36 lb.in. and lockwire.
(13) If original AFCU is being reinstalled and lever arm (24) has been inadvertently
removed, reinstall lever arm as follows:
NOTE: Whenever possible, refer to a correctly assembled AFCU for comparison

of angular position and torque resistance on lever arm. Torque resistance
must be felt for approximately the last 35 degrees of travel towards
maximum stop.
(a) Insert dowel pin in throttle shaft and install lever arm on shaft, aligning slots in
lever arm with tangs of cam and dowel pin.
(b) Rotate lever arm towards the maximum stop. If torque resistance is felt as per
NOTE preceding and lever is pointing upwards, install nut (24), torque 65 to
85 lb.in. and secure with cotterpin.
(c) If no torque resistance is felt, disengage lever arm from tangs and rotate tangs
from 180 degrees towards maximum stop. Reinstall lever arm and repeat step
(b) preceding.
(14) Position interconnect linkage in lever arm (24).
(15) Install pin (22) and secure with new cotterpin (23).
CAUTION: ALIGN GEARS AND DO NOT FORCE TO ENGAGE PUMP COUPLING

WITH ENGINE GEARSHAFT.
(16) Install complete assembly of AFCU, MFCU and fuel pump on accessory gearbox.
(17) Torque locknut (3) on elbow (4) 38 to 42 lb.in. and lockwire.
(18) If new or overhauled AFCU has been installed perform depreservation procedure.
6. Inspection/Check
A. Procedure
(1) Check for fuel leakage between AFCU and fuel pump flanges or interconnect line.
No leakage is permitted.
(2) Check for fuel leakage or blue stain at AFCU vent hole (Ref. Fig. 202). No leakage
is permitted.
(3) If leakage or stain evident, proceed as follows:
(a) Separate AFCU from fuel pump. Check for leakage at bypass port preformed
packing (5, Fig. 201). Replace preformed packing.
73-20-02
Page 205
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BLUE GREASE ON
RETAINER PLATE IS
ACCEPTABLE
BLUE STAIN OR
FUEL AROUND VENT
HOLE − NOT ACCEPTABLE
C41931
Automatic Fuel Control Unit (AFCU) - Inspection/Check

Figure 202
73-20-02
Page 206
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) Inspect drive shaft bearing for blue grease. If grease has been washed away
by leaking fuel, send AFCU for repair/overhaul.
NOTE: Blue stain will be evident around the vent hole at the bottom of AFCU
7. Storage
A. Preservation of AFCU
(1) Short term storage - 28 days or less:
CAUTION: DO NOT PERMIT FUEL OR OIL TO ENTER THE DRIVE BODY

CAVITY OR ANY AIR PRESSURE PORTS.
(a) Fill the fuel section of the AFCU with calibrating fluid (PWC03-002) filtered
through a 10 micron filter.
(b) Install caps and plugs in all ports of the fuel section of the AFCU.
(c) Check the security of all caps and plugs in all ports of the air section of the
AFCU to prevent the entrance of dirt or other contaminates.
(d) Put a tag on the unit indicating date of storage.
(e) Refer to Para. C., Packaging and Shipping, for protection from dirt and other
contaminants.
(f) Every ten days, check the fluid level in the fuel section of the unit and refill as
necessary.
(2) Long term storage - more than 28 days:
CAUTION: DO NOT PERMIT FUEL OR OIL TO ENTER THE DRIVE BODY

CAVITY OR ANY AIR PRESSURE PORTS.
(a) Drain all remaining fluid from the AFCU.
(b) Fill the fuel section of the AFCU with preservative oil (PWC05-077) filtered
through a 10 micron filter.
NOTE: Tip the AFCU as necessary to make sure that a complete film of oil
goes into all ports and passages of the fuel section of the unit.
(c) Drain the excess oil as required and install caps and plugs in all ports of the
fuel section of the unit.
(d) Check the security of all caps and plugs in all openings of the air section of the
AFCU to prevent the entrance of dirt or other contaminates.
(e) Put a tag on the unit indicating date of storage.
(f) Refer to Para. C., Packaging and Shipping, for protection from dirt and other
contaminants.
73-20-02
Page 207
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Depreservation of AFCU - Reconditioning after Storage
CAUTION: DO NOT PERMIT FUEL OR OIL TO ENTER THE DRIVE BODY CAVITY OR
ANY AIR PRESSURE PORTS.
CAUTION: DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REPLACE ANY LOCKWIRE SEAL UNTIL THE AFCU
HAS BEEN CHECKED TO BE CERTAIN THAT CALIBRATION OR OPERATION
HAS NOT BEEN EFFECTED.
(1) Inspect all lockwire and lockwire seals. Replace broken lockwire after checking the
torque value of nuts, plugs, caps or screws that were lockwired.
(2) Return the unit for recalibration if any lockwire seal indicates tampering or if the
lockwire is broken.
(3) For units in storage three years or less, remove the plugs and drain preservation
fluid prior to the return to service. No further action is required.
(4) Three year requirement:
(a) For units in storage three years or more but less than six years, ship the unit to
an approved overhaul facility (Ref. Step (7)) for the following:
NOTE: The following requirements are provided for information reference

only. The complete workscope should reflect the requirement of the
applicable CMM or other relevant publications.
1 Replacement of the drive shaft bearings in accordance with the applicable

Component Maintenance Manual (CMM).
2 Inspection of all remaining drive body assembly bearings.
3 A functional test of the AFCU in accordance with the applicable Component

Maintenance Manual (CMM).
(5) Six year requirement:
(a) For units in storage more than six years, ship the unit to an approved overhaul
facility for reconditioning (Ref. step (7)) for the following:

1 Replacement of all material or synthetic rubber components.
2 Replacement of all bearings.
3 Pressure flushing of all passages.
4 Lubrication of unit.
73-20-02
Page 208
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5 Functional check of AFCU in accordance with applicable Component

Maintenance Manual.
(6) Unpreserved units installed on the engine:
(a) For units installed on the engine and not used for up to 28 days, no specific
action is required.
(b) For units installed on the engine and not used for more than 29 days, remove
the AFCU from the engine and ship the unit to an approved overhaul facility for
reconditioning (Ref. step (7)) for the following:

1 Disassembly of the unit and evaluation of the components.
2 Functional check of AFCU in accordance with applicable Component

Maintenance Manual.
(7) DELETED.
C. Packaging and Shipping of AFCU (Ref. Fig. 203)
(1) When the AFCU is to be shipped or stored near salt water, prepare the unit as
follows:
(a) Make sure that all shipping plugs and caps are secure.
(b) Place the AFCU (2) on the shipping base (5) and secure with bolts (4).
CAUTION: THE POWER LEVER MUST BE SECURED DURING STORAGE OR

SHIPPING OR ELSE DAMAGE TO THE DRIVE SHAFT OR POWER
LEVER CAN RESULT.
(c) Put the power lever (6) in position and secure with lockwire (3) as shown to
prevent movement during storage or shipping.
(d) Put the AFCU and stand into a moisture and vapor proof container or plastic
bag and seal the opening. Attach a tag to the unit indicating the date of
storage.
(e) Store the unit in an approved shipping carton or case.
(2) The shipping base P/N 2529654 can be purchased from:
Air Parts and Supply Company

12840 SW 84th. Avenue Rd.,
Miami, FL 33156
USA
TEL: (305) 235-5401
FAX: (305) 235-8185
73-20-02
Page 209
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL
1
OUT
9
2
FUEL
OUT
FUEL
IN 3
7
4
6 5
C88316
Automatic Fuel Control Unit (Typical) - Storage

Figure 203
73-20-02
Page 210
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 203
1. Fuel Bypass Connector and Shipping Cap/Plug

2. Automatic Fuel Control Unit
3. Lockwire
4. Bolt
5. Shipping Stand (P/N 2529654)
6. Power Lever
7. P3 Air Port and Shipping Cap/Plug
8. Fuel Inlet Connector and Shipping Cap/Plug
9. Fuel Pressure Connector and Shipping Cap/Plug
73-20-02
Page 211/212
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PG ACCUMULATOR/SEALING CAP - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General

Item No. Name

PWC05-089 Lockwire
3. Special Tools
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
A. Removal
(1) Disconnect tubes (1) from tube cross (3). Cap open tubes and tube cross.
(2) Remove nut(s) (2) and withdraw accumulator (4) and clamps (5), or sealing cap (7)
and clamps (8), as applicable.
B. Installation
(1) Position accumulator (4) and clamps (5) or sealing cap (7) and clamps (8), as
applicable.
(2) Install nuts (2) and tighten fingertight.
(3) Remove all caps from tubes (1) and tube cross (3).
(4) Connect tubes to tube cross and tighten coupling nuts (6) fingertight.
(5) Torque nuts (2) 32 to 36 lb. in.
(6) Torque coupling nuts (6) 90 to 100 lb. in. and lockwire.
73-20-03 Page 201

Pg ACCUMULATOR/SEALING CAP - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES Mar 09/2001
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8
4
1
2 3
6 6
7
1
C22105A
Pg Accumulator - Removal/Installation
Figure 201
73-20-03 Page 202

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 201
1. Tube
2. Nut
3. Tube Cross
4. Pg Accumulator
5. Clamps
6. Coupling Nuts
7. Sealing Cap
8. Loop Clamp
73-20-03 Page 203/204

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PT (NF) GOVERNOR - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General

Item No. Name

PWC05-089 Lockwire
3. Special Tools
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
A. Removal
(1) Disconnect linkage from lever control arm (6).
(2) Disconnect Pg tube (1) from elbow (2).
(3) Remove nuts (5) and washers.
(4) Withdraw governor from studs (9). Remove gasket (8).
(5) Remove coupling (13) and tag for identification.
(6) If a replacement governor is to be installed, remove elbow (2), locknut (12),

back-up ring (11), preformed packing (10), nut (7) and arm (6).
B. Installation
(1) If replacement governor is being installed, install new preformed packing (10),
back-up ring (11), locknut (12) and elbow (2). For installation of lever, refer to
the airframe maintenance manual.
NOTE: To prevent Nf governor cotter pin being damage (fractured), other end of
shaft should be held during torquing process.

73-20-04 Page 201
PT (Nf) GOVERNOR - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES Jun 05/2009
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 2
13
12
11
10
9
14
8
3
7
4
6
5
C3063A
Power Turbine (Nf) Governor - Removal/Installation

Figure 201

73-20-04 Page 202
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 201
1. Pg Tube
2. Elbow Connection
3. Minimum Stop
4. Maximum Stop
5. Self-locking Nut
6. Lever Control Arm (airframe part)
7. Nut (airframe part)
8. Gasket
9. Mounting Studs
11. Backup Ring
12. Locknut
13. Coupling
14. Cotter Pin (airframe part)
(2) Install coupling (13) in accessory drive splines in reduction gearbox.
(3) Position new gasket (8) over studs (9).
(4) Position governor on studs and install nuts (5) and washers. Torque 75 to 85 lb.in.
(5) Connect Pg tube (1) to elbow (2). Torque connector 90 to 100 lb.in. and lockwire.
Torque locknut (12) 38 to 42 lb.in. and lockwire.
(6) If replacement governor has been installed, set minimum and maximum stops (3
and 4) as per applicable aircraft manual.

73-20-04 Page 203/204
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TORQUE LIMITER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General

Item No. Name

PWC05-089 Lockwire
3. Special Tools
Not Applicable
Name Remarks
Hypodermic Syringe 20cc capacity with No. 18 needle
Plastic Tubing 20 to 24 in. length of 1/4 in. I.D. capable of
withstanding 75 psi.
Adapter 7/16 - 20 UNF-3A
A. Removal (Ref. Fig. 201)
(1) Disconnect Pg tube assemblies (10) from adapters (12).
(2) Cap tube ends.
(3) Disconnect oil tube assemblies (15) from tees (2 and 6).
(4) Disconnect oil tube assemblies (1) from tees (2 and 6).
(5) Cap ends of tube assemblies (1 and 15).
(6) Slacken locknuts (7 and 14) and remove tees (2 and 6), back-up rings (8) and
preformed packings (9).
73-20-06 Page 201

TORQUE LIMITER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES Mar 09/2001
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6
2 15
1
15 5
7
4
8
14 9
5
TP2 PORT
4
TP1 PORT
3
10
13
13
11
12
13
10
C22100
Torque Limiter - Removal/Installation

Figure 201
73-20-06 Page 202

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 201
1. Oil Tube Assembly

2. Tee
3. Nut and Washer
4. Preformed Packing (MS 9387-04)
5. Plug (N814-4D or -4DL)
6. Tee
7. Locknut
8. Back-up Ring
10. Pg Tube Assembly
12. Adapter
13. Reduction Gearbox Studs
14. Locknut
15. Oil Tube Assemblies
(7) Install plugs (5) and preformed packings (4) in TP1 and TP2 ports.
(8) Remove three nuts and washers (3) from studs (13).
(9) Remove unit from reduction gearbox.
(10) Remove adapters (12) and preformed packings (11) and install blanking plugs in
open ports.
NOTE: Torque limiters are primed at manufacture and overhaul and do not require
re-priming at installation. However, if torque problems are encountered and
re-priming is necessary (Ref. 72-00-00, FAULT ISOLATION), prior to installation
carry out procedures detailed in Paragraph 6. following.
(1) Position unit over reduction gearbox studs (13).
(2) Install washers and nuts (3) and torque 32 to 36 lb.in.
(3) Remove plugs (5) and preformed packings (4) from TP1 and TP2 ports.
(4) Top up with approved turbine engine oil to the first thread from top of ports.
(5) Install tees (2 and 6) complete with new preformed packings (9), back-up rings (8)
and locknuts (7 and 14) in TP1 and TP2 ports. Tighten fingertight.
(6) Remove blanking caps from oil tube assemblies (15) and connect to tees (2 and 6).
(7) Remove blanking caps from oil tube assemblies (1) and connect to tees (2
and 6).
73-20-06 Page 203

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(8) Torque locknuts (7 and 14) 38 to 42 lb.in.
(9) Torque connections on tube assemblies (1 and 15) 90 to 100 lb.in. and lockwire to
locknuts (7 and 14).
(10) Install adapters (12) and new preformed packings (11). Torque 65 to 75 lb.in. and
lockwire.
(11) Connect two Pg tube assemblies (10) to adapters (12), torque connections 90 to
(12) Perform torque limiting check (Ref. 71-00-00).
6. Re-priming
Re-priming of torque limiter is carried out only when required following fault isolation (Ref.
72-00-00, FAULT ISOLATION) with unit removed from engine as detailed in Para. 5. A..
A. Procedure (Ref. Fig. 202)
(1) Remove blanking plug from TP2 port.
(2) Set up air supply as shown on figure and connect transparent tube to TP2 port.
(3) Fill tube with approved turbine engine oil and tap tube to release any trapped air.
(4) With TP2 port uppermost and tube vertical, slowly increase air pressure to 47 ± 2 psi.
(5) Maintain this position for 10 seconds and tap unit and tube to free entrapped air
from bellows.
(6) Turn unit so that Pg1 port is uppermost and repeat step (5).
(7) Maintain Pg1 port uppermost and slowly release air pressure (approximately 30
seconds).
(8) Turn unit so that TP2 port is uppermost and repeat step (5).
(9) Repeat steps (3) through (5) until bellows are completely filled with oil.
NOTE: Bellows are full when air bubbles are no longer seen in oil in transparent
tube.
(10) Disconnect air supply and remove tube.
(11) Check that oil level is between bottom and third thread in TP2 port. Adjust as
necessary.
(12) Re-install blanking plug in TP2 port.
(13) Remove blanking plug from TP1 port.
73-20-06 Page 204

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PRESSURE GAGE
(0 TO 75 PSIG)
AIR PRESSURE SUPPLY

(0 TO 50 PSIG)
REGULATOR
TUBE TRANSPARENT
(22 2 INCH INCH I.D.)
TP2 PORT
ADAPTER 7/16−20 UNF−3A THD
TP1 PORT
PG1 PORT
PG2 PORT
C22134
Torque Limiter Priming
Figure 202
73-20-06 Page 205

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(14) Repeat above procedure to prime TP1 bellows substituting TP1 for TP2 and Pg2
for Pg1.
(15) Reinstall blanking plug in TP1 port.
73-20-06 Page 206

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PY ACCUMULATOR - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General

Item No. Name

PWC05-089 Lockwire
3. Special Tools
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
A. Removal
(1) Disconnect coupling nut (1) at elbow (2) and protect elbow and coupling nut with
blanking caps.
(2) Remove nut (3), and remove accumulator (4).
B. Installation
(1) Install accumulator (4) and temporarily secure with nut (3).
(2) Remove blanking caps from elbow and coupling nut.
(3) Connect coupling nut (1) to elbow (2). Tighten nut, torque 90 to 100 lb.in., and
lockwire.
(4) Tighten nut (3) and torque 32 to 36 lb.in.
73-20-07
Page 201
PY ACCUMULATOR - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES Dec 02/2013
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3
2
C3066A
Py Accumulator - Removal/Installation
Figure 201
73-20-07
Page 202
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 201
1. Coupling
2. Elbow
3. Nut
4. Accumulator
73-20-07
Page 203/204
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
SECTION PAGE DATE
LEP 1 Jan 26/2015
2 blank Jan 26/2015
Contents 1 Jan 26/2015

2 blank Jan 26/2015
74-00-00 1 Mar 09/2001

Operation
74-00-00 201 Jan 26/2015

Maintenance 202 Jan 26/2015
Practices

Page 1/2
74-00 LEP Jan 26/2015
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
IGNITION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION 74-00-00
1. Engine Ignition System 1
IGNITION - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES 74-00-00
1. General 201

A. General 201
B. Operational Check 201
6. Fault Isolation 202

Page 1/2
74-00 CONTENTS Jan 26/2015
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
IGNITION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. Engine Ignition System
The ignition system has been developed and adapted to provide quick light-ups over a wide
temperature range.
The system consists of two spark igniter systems; one for each power section.
Each spark igniter system comprises an exciter, two ignition leads and two spark igniters and
will operate from a 9 to 30 VDC supply.
(1) Ignition Exciter
The remote-mounted exciter unit converts DC input to high-voltage DC through

solid-state circuitry, a transformer and rectifiers.
(2) Spark Igniters
The two spark igniters are mounted in floating housings at the 4 o’clock
and 11 o’clock positions on the gas generator case and protrude into the domed
end of the combustion chamber liner. The igniters are connected to the ignition exciter
by the two ignition leads.
B. System Operation
When the energy in a storage capacitor in the exciter reaches a level equivalent to four
joules, an arc is produced across a gap. This allows the stored energy to be discharged
to the igniters through a dividing and step-up transformer network. The network is such
that if one igniter is open or short circuited the remaining igniter will continue to
function.
74-00-00 Page 1
IGNITION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION Mar 09/2001
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TYPICAL CONNECTION
A
IGNITION LEAD
GAS GENERATOR
CASE
SPARK
COMBUSTION IGNITER
CHAMBER LINER
DETAIL A
COMBUSTION
CHAMBER LINER
GAS GENERATOR
CASE
IGNITION LEADS
SPARK
IGNITER
EXCITER UNIT
C3025
Ignition System
Figure 1
74-00-00 Page 2
IGNITION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION Mar 09/2001
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
IGNITION - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General

Not Applicable
3. Special Tools
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
5. Adjustment/Test
A. General
The ignition system may be tested for correct operation while the engine is installed in
the airframe or with the engine installed in the maintenance stand.
B. Operational Check
WARNING: RESIDUAL VOLTAGE IN IGNITION EXCITER MAY BE DANGEROUSLY

HIGH. ENSURE IGNITION IS SWITCHED OFF AND SYSTEM HAS BEEN
INOPERATIVE FOR AT LEAST SIX MINUTES BEFORE REMOVING ANY
IGNITION COMPONENTS. ALWAYS DISCONNECT COUPLING NUTS AT
IGNITION EXCITER END FIRST. ALWAYS USE INSULATED TOOLS TO
REMOVE CABLE COUPLING NUTS. DO NOT TOUCH OUTPUT
CONNECTORS OR COUPLING NUTS WITH BARE HANDS.
CAUTION: WHEN LOOSENING/TIGHTENING COUPLING NUTS DO NOT LET

IGNITION CABLE BRAIDING OR FERRULES TURN AT THE SAME TIME.
(1) Disconnect coupling nut of one ignition cable from output connector on ignition
exciter.
CAUTION: BEFORE SWITCHING ON IGNITION TO FUNCTIONAL CHECK IGNITION

SYSTEM, CARRY OUT A DRY MOTORING RUN TO ENSURE NO FUEL
REMAINS IN GAS GENERATOR CASE.
(2) Switch ignition system on and listen at gas generator case for ‘‘snapping’’ sound
with frequency of approximately one ‘‘snap’’ per second. Switch ignition off.
74-00-00
Page 201
IGNITION - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES Jan 26/2015
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) Reconnect coupling nut of ignition cable to ignition exciter and remove other cable
coupling nut. Repeat step (2), preceding.
(4) If ‘‘snapping’’ sound is not heard on either check, replace ignition exciter and repeat
steps (1) through (3) preceding.
(5) If ‘‘snapping’’ sound is not heard on one check only, replace associated spark
igniter and repeat check. If spark igniter still fails, replace ignition exciter.
WARNING: PUT ON EYE PROTECTION WHEN YOU CUT THE LOCKWIRE. PIECES
CAN BREAK OFF AND CAUSE INJURY.
(6) Tighten the coupling nuts with your fingers, plus 45 degrees. Lockwire the coupling
nuts.
6. Fault Isolation
For detailed fault isolation of ignition system, refer to Chapter 72-00-00, FAULT ISOLATION.
74-00-00
Page 202
IGNITION - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES Jan 26/2015
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
SECTION PAGE DATE
LEP 1 Jan 26/2015
2 blank Jan 26/2015

2 blank Jan 26/2015
74-10-00 201 Jan 26/2015

Practices 203 Jan 26/2015
204 Jan 26/2015

Page 1/2
74-10 LEP Jan 26/2015
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
IGNITION EXCITER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES 74-10-00
1. General 201

A. Removal of Ignition Exciter 201
B. Installation of Ignition Exciter 203

6. Cleaning/Painting 203
A. Cleaning of Ignition Exciter 203
A. Inspection of Ignition exciter 204

Page 1/2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
IGNITION EXCITER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General

Item No. Name

PWC06-005 Lubricant, Fluorocarbon Release Agent
PWC11-023 Solvent, Cleaning
PWC11-025 Solvent, Cleaning
3. Special Tools
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
WARNING: RESIDUAL VOLTAGE IN IGNITION EXCITER CAN BE HIGHLY DANGEROUS.

MAKE SURE THAT THE IGNITION IS SWITCHED OFF AND SYSTEM HAS
NOT BEEN OPERATED FOR AT LEAST SIX MINUTES BEFORE REMOVING
ANY IGNITION COMPONENTS. ALWAYS DISCONNECT COUPLING
NUTS AT IGNITION EXCITER END FIRST. ALWAYS USE INSULATED TOOLS
TO REMOVE CABLE COUPLING NUTS. DO NOT TOUCH OUTPUT
A. Removal of Ignition Exciter
(1) Isolate power from ignition system.
(2) Remove supply cable (1 , Fig. 201) from input connector (2) on ignition exciter (3).
CAUTION: WHEN LOOSENING/TIGHTENING COUPLING NUTS DO NOT LET

IGNITION CABLE BRAIDING OR FERRULES TURN AT SAME TIME.
(3) Remove ignition cable couplings (6) from output connectors (5) on ignition exciter.
(4) Remove bolts, washers (4) and ignition exciter from the airframe.
74-10-00
Page 201
IGNITION EXCITER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES Jan 26/2015
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1
2
WARNING
4
VOLTAGE HIGH AMPERAGE
OUTPUT
DISCONNECT INPUT CURRENT
BEFORE SERVICING.
BEFORE OPERATING
CONNECT OUTPUT LEADS
AND IGNITER PLUGS.
C61A
Removal/Installation of Ignition Exciter

Figure 201
74-10-00
Page 202
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 201
1. Supply Cable
2. Input Connector
3. Ignition Exciter
4. Bolt, Washer and Nut (Airframe-supplied)
5. Ignition Output Connectors
6. Ignition Cable Couplings
B. Installation of Ignition Exciter
NOTE: For installation of units refer to relevant airframe manufacturer’s manual.
(1) Install ignition exciter.
CAUTION: DO NOT LET LUBRICANT CONTACT CENTRAL CONDUCTOR OF

EXCITER CONNECTORS. CONTACT MAY RESULT IN A HIGH
RESISTANCE PATH WHICH COULD GENERATE HEAT AND OXIDATION.
(2) Lightly coat threads of ignition exciter connectors with lubricant (PWC06-005).
CAUTION: WHEN YOU LOOSEN/TIGHTEN THE COUPLING NUTS, DO NOT LET

THE IGNITION CABLE BRAIDING OR FERRULES TURN AT THE SAME
TIME.
(3) Connect the coupling nuts of supply cable (1, Fig. 201) and two high tension
ignition cable couplings (6) to the respective connectors (2 and 5) on the ignition
exciter (3). Tighten the coupling nuts with your fingers, plus 45 degrees. Lockwire the
coupling nuts.
(4) DELETED.
6. Cleaning/Painting
A. Cleaning of Ignition Exciter
(1) Remove all corrosion residue using a stainless steel wire brush.
(2) Clean affected surfaces thoroughly using a clean lint free cloth moistened with
solvent (PWC11-023) or (PWC11-025).
CAUTION: DO NOT ALLOW LUBRICANT TO CONTAMINATE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL

CONTACT AREA OF IGNITION EXCITER CONNECTIONS.
CONTAMINATION CAN CREATE HIGH ELECTRICAL RESISTANCE,
LEADING TO OVERHEATING AND OXIDATION.
(3) Spray a light film of lubricant (PWC06-005) to cleaned areas.
74-10-00
Page 203
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7. Inspection/Check
A. Inspection of Ignition exciter
(1) Examine ignition exciter for damage and general condition.
(2) Inspect ignition exciter input and output connectors for signs of corrosion. If
corrosion is evident clean and reprotect as detailed in Paragraph 6. A..
74-10-00
Page 204
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
SECTION PAGE DATE
LEP 1 Jan 26/2015
2 blank Jan 26/2015

2 blank Jan 26/2015
74-20-00 201 Jan 26/2015

204 Jan 26/2015
205 Jan 26/2015
206 Jan 26/2015
207 Jan 26/2015
208 Jan 26/2015
209 Jan 26/2015
210 blank Jan 26/2015

Page 1/2
74-20 LEP Jan 26/2015
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
IGNITERS AND IGNITION CABLES - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES 74-20-00
1. General 201

A. Removal 202
B. Installation 202
A. Inspection 203
7. Cleaning 203
A. Igniters 203
A. Cable Braiding Minor Damage 205

B. Cable Braiding Major Damage 207
A. Ignition Cables 207

Page 1/2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
IGNITERS AND IGNITION CABLES - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General

Item No. Name

PWC05-013 Cloth, Abrasive No. 400 Grit
PWC05-029 Flux, Acid
PWC05-058 Solder, 50/50
PWC05-070 Tape, Pressure Sensitive Adhesive
PWC05-089 Lockwire
PWC06-005 Fluorocarbon Release Agent
PWC11-005+ Envirosolv 655
PWC11-012 Acetone
PWC11-023+ Ardrox Leeder 1064K
PWC11-025+ Desoclean 45
3. Special Tools
Not Applicable
Name Remarks
Ohmmeter Model 260
74-20-00
Page 201
IGNITERS AND IGNITION CABLES - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES Jan 26/2015
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Removal
WARNING: RESIDUAL VOLTAGE IN IGNITION EXCITER CAN BE HIGHLY DANGEROUS.

MAKE SURE THAT THE IGNITION IS SWITCHED OFF AND SYSTEM HAS
NOT BEEN OPERATED FOR AT LEAST SIX MINUTES BEFORE REMOVING
ANY IGNITION COMPONENTS. ALWAYS DISCONNECT COUPLING
NUTS AT IGNITION EXCITER END FIRST. ALWAYS USE INSULATED TOOLS
TO REMOVE CABLE COUPLING NUTS. DO NOT TOUCH OUTPUT
(1) Disconnect coupling nuts (4) of each cable (1) at ignition exciter (2), then at each
spark igniter (3).
(2) Remove self-locking nuts and bolts securing clamps (6) to gas generator case (5).
Remove cables.
(3) Remove spark igniters (3) from bosses on gas generator case (5). Remove
gaskets.
B. Installation
(1) Fit new gaskets on spark igniters (3) and install in bosses on gas generator case
(5). Torque igniters 300 lb.in., loosen to 0 lb.in. and retorque 300 to 360 lb.in.
NOTE: Igniters are fitted with trapped gaskets.
CAUTION: LUBRICANTS CONTAINING SILICONE OR GREASE WILL DAMAGE

INSULATED SLEEVING. USE ONLY RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS. DO
NOT ALLOW LUBRICANTS TO CONTAMINATE INTERNAL
ELECTRICAL CONTACT AREAS OF CABLE, IGNITER PLUGS OR
IGNITION EXCITER CONNECTIONS. CONTAMINATION CAN CREATE
HIGH ELECTRICAL RESISTANCE LEADING TO OVERHEATING AND
OXIDATION.
(2) Lightly spray threaded portions of igniter plugs (3) and exciter unit (2) connections
with lubricant (PWC06-005).
CAUTION: DO NOT LUBRICATE CABLE ENDS IF TEFLON INSULATION SLEEVES

ARE FITTED TO CABLE. ENSURE THAT CABLES ARE NOT PERMITTED
TO TWIST WHEN COUPLING UNITS ARE TIGHTENED.
(3) On cables fitted with rubber insulation sleeves, spray sleeves with lubricant
(PWC06-005). Install coupling nuts (4) of cables (1) on output connectors of ignition
exciter (2). Tighten coupling nuts and torque fingertight, plus 45 degrees.
(4) Install the coupling nuts (4) at the other end of the cables (1) on the respective
spark igniter (3). Tighten the coupling nuts (4) with your fingers, plus 45 degrees.
Lockwire the coupling nuts (4).
74-20-00
Page 202
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) Locate clamps (6) on gas generator case and secure with bolts and self-locking
nuts. Tighten nuts and torque 36 to 40 lb.in.
6. Inspection/Check
A. Inspection
(1) Inspect igniter plugs as follows:
CAUTION: SHOULD AN IGNITER PLUG BE DROPPED, INTERNAL DAMAGE

NOT DETECTABLE BY FUNCTIONAL TEST CAN OCCUR. REPLACE
IGNITER PLUG.
(a) Examine plugs for condition. Clean, if necessary, as detailed in Paragraph 7.

following.
(b) Check for erosion in accordance with Table 201. Failure to meet the stated limit
will be cause for rejection.
TABLE 201, Spark Igniter Erosion Limits (Ref. Fig. 202)
DIMENSION A‘‘ (INCHES)

PART NO. (REF. FIG. 202)
3035102 0.300
3031213 0.3000
(c) Inspect exterior of cylindrical area of firing end of igniter shell for chafing wear.
Wear is acceptable to a depth of 0.015 inch. If worn beyond 0.015 inch. also
inspect fuel nozzles sheaths for fretting wear (Ref. 73-10-05).
(d) If fuel nozzle sheaths are also worn beyond limits, remove power section and
inspect combustion liner components for cracking and/or evidence of distortion.
Replace liner as required. If condition of liner is acceptable, send power
section to an overhaul facility for investigation of gas generator.
(e) Carry out functional check (Ref. 74-00-00).
7. Cleaning
A. Igniters
CAUTION: REPLACE IGNITER IF ACCIDENTALLY DROPPED AS DAMAGE NOT

DETECTABLE BY TEST CAN OCCUR.
(1) Insert rubber stopper in cable terminal end of igniter to prevent entry of foreign
material during cleaning.
74-20-00
Page 203
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5 3 6
1 6
C3056B
Spark Igniter, Cable and Exciter

Figure 201
74-20-00
Page 204
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 201
1. Ignition Cables
2. Ignition Exciter (Airframe Mounted)
3. Spark Igniter
4. Coupling Nut
6. Loop Clamps
CAUTION: DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REMOVE ANY HARD CARBON DEPOSIT FROM

CENTER ELECTRODE AS SUCH DEPOSITS AID FUNCTIONING OF
IGNITER. ANY ABRASIVE ACTION IN GAP AREA MAY IMPAIR
FUNCTIONING BY REMOVING SEMICONDUCTOR MATERIAL.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE WIRE BRUSH TO CLEAN IGNITER THREADS.
(2) Clean igniter barrel with soft wire brush, and igniter threads with soft bristle brush.
(3) Remove rubber stopper from terminal end of igniter and clean igniter with clean
lint-free cloth moistened with envirosolv 655 (PWC11-005+) or acetone
(PWC11-012) or isopropyl alcohol (PWC11-014) or ardrox leeder 1064K
(PWC11-023+) or desoclean 45 (PWC11-025+) or as per SPOP 209.
(4) Dry igniter with clean lint-free cloth and dry, filtered, compressed air.
8. Approved Repairs
A. Cable Braiding Minor Damage
(1) Examine damaged area to make sure damage is not more than 0.375 in. in length,
edge of damage is at least 0.500 in. from nearest connector or flange and there is
no damage to underlying insulation.
WARNING: CLEAN CABLE ASSEMBLY IN A WELL-VENTILATED AREA. WEAR

PROTECTIVE (RUBBER) GLOVES AND WASH HANDS AFTER
EXPOSURE TO CLEANER.
WARNING: WHEN COMPRESSED AIR IS IN USE, WEAR PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

FOR EYES AND FACE. AIR PRESSURE MUST NOT BE MORE THAN 30
PSI MAXIMUM.
(2) Use clean cloth dampened with envirosolv 655 (PWC11-005+) or acetone
(PWC11-012) or isopropyl alcohol (PWC11-014) or ardrox leeder 1064K
(PWC11-023+) or desoclean 45 (PWC11-025+) or equivalent or as per SPOP 209
and clean damaged area of braid, to remove all contaminants from ignition cable
assembly.
CAUTION: SOLDERING IRON MUST NOT BE MORE THAN 250 WATTS. APPLY
ONLY ENOUGH HEAT TO FLOW SOLDER.
(3) Use solder (PWC05-058) with flux (PWC05-029) to solder damaged area. Overlap
damaged area by approximately 0.125 in.
74-20-00
Page 205
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DIM. A
A A
NEW IGNITER WORN OUT

SECTION A−A
CAUTION
SHOULD A SPARK IGNITER BE DROPPED, INTERNAL DAMAGE
POSSIBLY NOT DETECTABLE BY TEST CAN OCCUR.
RECOMMENDATION IS TO REPLACE THE SPARK IGNITER
C6312A
Spark Igniter Erosion Limits

Figure 202
74-20-00
Page 206
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WARNING: WHEN COMPRESSED AIR IS IN USE, WEAR PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

FOR EYES AND FACE. AIR PRESSURE MUST NOT BE MORE THAN 30
PSI MAXIMUM.
(4) Clean braiding with clean cloth dampened with envirosolv 655 (PWC11-005+) or
acetone (PWC11-012) or isopropyl alcohol (PWC11-014) or ardrox leeder 1064K
(PWC11-023+) or desoclean 45 (PWC11-025+) or equivalent or as per SPOP 209
and then dry repaired area with filtered, compressed air not to be more than 30
psi.
(5) Smooth repaired area with abrasive cloth (PWC05-013) to blend with braided
surface. Repeat step (4), as required.
(6) Check cable assembly for continuity and insulation resistance prior to installation
(Ref. Para. 9.).
B. Cable Braiding Major Damage (Ref. Fig. 203)
(1) Examine damaged area to make sure that damage that is more than 0.375 in. (Ref.
Subpara. A.) is not more than 1.000 in. in length and is at least 0.500 in. from
nearest connector, flange or existing repair. Replace ignition cable assembly if
damage is more than these limits.
(2) Cut the loose strands of braiding around damaged area.
(3) Wrap fiberglass insulating tape (PWC05-070) around cable braiding, covering all of
damaged area as shown.
(4) Wrap repaired area with stainless steel wire as shown. Hold wrapping wire snugly
along length of cable braid beginning from the left. Starting at opposite end, wrap
wire tightly and uniformly over cable braiding and repaired area.
NOTE: Make sure wire overlaps tape and contacts cable braiding at each end of
repair.
(5) When approximately two-thirds of wrapping is completed, allow short end of loop to
remain exposed. Continue wrapping wire to complete remaining distance, shown as
’’1/3X‘‘.
(6) After final turn of wrapping, insert wire ’’A‘‘ through loop as shown. Cut off surplus
end ’’B‘‘ of wire so that length is approximately one-third of repair length. Pull loop
end ’’C‘‘ until wire at ’’A‘‘ is snug and end ’’B‘‘ of wire disappears immediately
below the final turn of wrapping. Cut wire end ’’C‘‘ flush.
(7) Test cable assembly for continuity and insulation resistance prior to usage (Ref.
Para. 9., Adjustment/Test).
9. Adjustment/Test
A. Ignition Cables
(1) Check for continuity with an ohmmeter Model 260, or other low voltage continuity
device. Resistance from terminal to terminal must be 0.5 Ω max.
74-20-00
Page 207
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INSULATING TAPE
B X
1/3 X
C
C4960C
Repair of Ignition Cable - Major Damage

Figure 203
74-20-00
Page 208
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Insulation resistance between metal braiding and inner cable must be 100 KΩ min.
NOTE: Return defective cables to an approved repair shop for inner cable
replacement.
74-20-00
Page 209/210
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
SECTION PAGE DATE
LEP 1 Mar 09/2001
2 blank Mar 09/2001

2 blank Mar 09/2001
75-00-00 1 Mar 09/2001

Operation 3 Mar 09/2001
4 Mar 09/2001
5 Mar 09/2001
6 Mar 09/2001
Page 1/2
75-00 LEP Mar 09/2001
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
AIR - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION 75-00-00
1. General 1
2. Description and Operation 1

A. System Description and Operation 1
3. Fault Isolation 6
Page 1/2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AIR - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General
Three separate air systems are provided for the engine; one system for bearing compartment
sealing, a second for cooling air, and the third for compressor bleed valve and airframe
services.
2. Description and Operation
The main airflow through the engine is shown on Figure 1.
Besides providing air for combustion and turbine drive, the airflow through the gas generator
section of the engine has various other functions in the peripheral systems associated
with engine operation.
Compressor interstage air (P2.5) is used to seal No. 1 bearing and, with compressor
discharge air (P3), is used to operate a compressor bleed valve which provides optimum
anti-stall characteristics at low compressor rotor speeds.
P3 air is also used to seal No. 2 and 3 bearing compartments, to cool compressor and
power turbine disks and the compressor turbine vane ring, to operate the pneumatic section
of the fuel control system and to pressurize the carbon seals in the reduction gearbox.
A P3 cabin air bleed port is provided by a boss at the 11 o’clock position on the gas generator
case. This boss may be blanked off if not required.
A. System Description and Operation (Ref. Fig. 2)
(1) Compressor Air Bleed
This system consists of a bleed valve which is bolted over a port at the 5 o’clock
position on the gas generator case inner section.
At low compressor speeds the valve opens to vent P2.8 air to atmosphere. At
higher speeds the valve remains closed.
The valve is a piston-type in a ported housing. The piston is supported by a rolling

diaphragm which permits full travel in either direction, while effectively sealing
the compartment below the piston.
Compressor interstage air is supplied directly to the valve from slots in the impeller
housing, and compressor delivery air (P3) is supplied from gas generator case
diffuser pipes through an internal pressure tube.
Compressor interstage air (P2.8) pressurizes the top side of the piston; P3 air is
taken through a primary orifice to a convergent-divergent orifice, which vents to
atmosphere. The control pressure (Px) arrived at between primary and
convergent-divergent orifice is used to pressurize the underside of the piston. When
P3 reaches a pre-selected value, the convergent-divergent orifice becomes
choked and pressure below the piston increases to close the valve. Below the
pressure at which the orifice becomes choked, interstage pressure moves the piston
75-00-00 Page 1
AIR - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION Mar 09/2001
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
POWER TURBINE &

EXHAUST SECTION
REDUCTION GEARBOX POWER SECTION MAJOR ASSEMBLIES
C3002A_1
Engine Main Airflow

75-00-00 Page 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GAS GENERATOR SECTION SUB−ASSEMBLIES ACCESSORY

GEARBOX
POWER SECTION MAJOR ASSEMBLIES
C3002A_2
Engine Main Airflow
Figure 1 (Sheet 2)
75-00-00 Page 3
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
COMPRESSOR
DISCHARGE AIR
P2.8 INTERSTAGE AIR GAS GENERATOR CASE
P2.8 INTERSTAGE AIR
P3 P3
ROLLING
DIAPHRAGM DISCHARGE TO
ATMOSPHERE
PRIMARY COVER
ORIFICE Px
Pa Pa
CLOSED COMPRESSOR BLEED VALVE OPEN

CONTROL PRESSURE CONVERGENT−
DIVERGENT
DETAIL A ORIFICE
P2.8
TURBINE DISK COOLING P3 P2.5
NO.3 BEARING
NO.2 BEARING NO.1 BEARING
C22142A
Engine Air - Sealing, Cooling and Compressor Bleed (Typical)

Figure 2
75-00-00 Page 4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
down sufficiently to allow venting to atmosphere. Compressor operation is

dependent on ambient inlet pressure, and the use of a choked orifice allows
automatic altitude compensation. The ratio between ambient and P3 pressure
necessary to choke the convergent-divergent orifice is constant, and consequently,
the valve will close at a slightly lower P3 pressure at altitude than at ground
level.
(2) Bearing Compartment Seals and Turbine Cooling
Pressurized air is used to seal No.1, 2 and 3 bearing compartments, and to cool
compressor and power turbines and compressor turbine guide vanes. Labyrinth
airseals protect bearing compartments, and consist of plain rotating surfaces
within stationary circular seals with deep annular grooves machined inside the bore.
When parts are matched, and the clearance between rotating and stationary
parts kept as small as possible, the air pressure drop across the seal prevents
passage of oil when the power section is running.
Compressor interstage air is used to provide a pressure drop across the No.1
labyrinth air seal. The air is taken, through holes in the third-stage compressor spacer
disk through the center of the compressor disks to outlet holes in the compressor
hub. The compressor hub and sleeve have slots which allow air to the center of the
double stator seal assembly, and air passes outward across both halves of the
seal. Air across one half of the seal is returned to the main airflow before the
compressor first-stage rotor. Air across the other half seal passes through holes in the
air seal stator, and matched holes in the compressor inlet case centerbore flange,
to the accessory gearbox housing.
No.2 bearing compartment is sealed by a double labyrinth air seal, and a single
labyrinth air seal. P3 air from around the combustion chamber outer exit duct pases
through holes in the gas generator case centerbore outer flange, and pressurizes
the double labyrinth air seal via hollow struts in the bearing compartment support
housing. Air passes from the seal central groove outward through half the seal to
rejoin the main air stream at the centrifugal impeller exit, and inward through half of
the seal, to be scavenged with oil.
The P3 air stream which pressurizes the seal, also passes down the leading face of
the compressor turbine to cool it. Pressure differential across No.2 bearing seal is
provided by part of this air stream flowing into the bearing compartment. The main
airflow is through holes in the compressor stub shaft to the centerbore of both
turbine disks. Air passes outward between the disks to cool their surfaces, and
through holes in the power turbine stub shaft to pressurize No.3 bearing labyrinth
seal.
No.3 bearing compartment is sealed from the power turbine by a double labyrinth
seal. Air passes outward through half the stator to join the main air stream through the
power section, and inward to seal the bearing compartment.
(3) Fuel System and Reduction Gearbox Seal Pressurization
Compressor discharge air for the fuel control system is taken from a diffuser pipe to
a boss at the 7 o’clock position on the gasgenerator case to an air manifold
adapter and the reset regulator of the AFCU. Metered air from the regulator is
75-00-00 Page 5
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
taken to the power turbine governor and torque control unit on the reduction
gearbox. Compressor discharge air for pressurization of clutch carbon seals in the
reduction gearbox is taken from a second boss at the 7 o’clock position on the
gas generator case, directly to the reduction gearbox.
3. Fault Isolation
For detailed fault isolation of the air system, refer to Chapter 72-00-00, FAULT ISOLATION.
75-00-00 Page 6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
SECTION PAGE DATE
LEP 1 Jun 05/2009
2 blank Jun 05/2009
Contents 1 Jun 05/2009

2 blank Jun 05/2009
75-30-00 201 Jun 05/2009

Maintenance 202 Jun 05/2009
Practices 203 Jun 05/2009
204 Jun 05/2009
205 Jun 05/2009
206 Jun 05/2009
207 Jun 05/2009
208 Jun 05/2009
209 Jun 05/2009
210 Jun 05/2009
211 Jun 05/2009
212 Jun 05/2009
213 Jun 05/2009
214 Jun 05/2009
215 Jun 05/2009
216 Jun 05/2009
217 Jun 05/2009
218 Jun 05/2009
219 Jun 05/2009
220 Jun 05/2009
221 Jun 05/2009
222 Jun 05/2009

Page 1/2
75-30 LEP Jun 05/2009
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
COMPRESSOR BLEED VALVE - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES 75-30-00
1. General 201

A. Removal 201
B. Installation 203
6. Adjustment/Test (Pre-SB5444) 203
A. Metering Plug Replacement (Pre-SB5380) 203
B. Metering Plug Replacement (Post-SB5380) 205
C. Test 205
D. Check 206
7. Adjustment/Test (Post-SB5444). 207

A. Initial Setting 207
B. Leak Test 207
C. In-situ Closing Point Check 209
A. Diaphragm Replacement (Pre-SB5330 only) 215

B. Diaphragm Replacement (Post-SB5330) 217

Page 1/2
75-30 CONTENTS Jun 05/2009
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
COMPRESSOR BLEED VALVE - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General

Item No. Name

PWC05-089 Lockwire
PWC09-003 Compound
PWC09-002A Locking and Retaining Compound
3. Special Tools
Tool No. Name

PWC50041 Bracket Assembly
Not Applicable
A. Removal
(1) Pre-SB5306: Remove or temporarily reposition bleed air case.
(2) Remove bolts (2) and washers (3) securing bleed valve (1) to gas generator case.
(3) Withdraw bleed valve assembly together with spring pin (5).
(4) Pre-SB5318/Post-SB5339: Remove spring pin (5) and discard preformed packing
(4).
(5) Post-SB5318: Remove spring pin (5) and discard gasket (7).

75-30-00 Page 201
COMPRESSOR BLEED VALVE - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES Jun 05/2009
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1
5
2 1
PRE−SB5318
POST−SB5339 3
POST−SB5318
2
C3830D
Compressor Bleed Valve - Removal/Installation (Typical)

Figure 201

75-30-00 Page 202
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 201
1. Compressor Bleed Valve

2. Bolt
3. Washer
4. Preformed Packing (Pre-SB5318)
5. Spring Pin
6. Valve Piston
7. Gasket (Post-SB5318)
B. Installation
CAUTION: DO NOT INSTALL PRE-SB5330 COMPRESSOR BLEED VALVE ON

POST-SB5351 ENGINE.
(1) Pre-SB5318/Post-SB5339: Install spring pin (5) with new preformed packing (4) in
bleed valve (1).
(2) Post-SB5318: Install spring pin (5) in bleed valve (1). Install gasket (7) on bleed
valve (1).
(3) Ensure piston is free to travel. Install bleed valve assembly on gas generator case
and secure with bolts (2) and washers (3). Torque bolts (2) 16 to 20 lb.in.
(4) Lockwire bolts in pairs.
(5) Pre-SB5306:Install bleed air case (Ref. 72-20-00).
6. Adjustment/Test (Pre-SB5444)
NOTE: 1. Pre-SB5380: The classified sets are introduced to control the valve closing point
to suit individual power sections. The lower the class number the later the valve
closes.
NOTE: 2. Post-SB5380: The compressor bleed valve assembly is provided with a secondary
metering orifice plug which controls the closing point on individual engines and
prevents engine surge. The lower the part number suffix (smaller orifice size), the
earlier the bleed valve closes.
A. Metering Plug Replacement (Pre-SB5380) (Ref. Fig. 202)
CAUTION: PLUG SETS MUST NOT BE CHANGED EXCEPT AS SPECIFIED IN

FAULT ISOLATION. PLUGS MUST BE USED IN COMPLETE SETS.
(1) Obtain plug set required to solve problem (Ref. 72-00-00, ENGINE - FAULT
ISOLATION).
NOTE: On valves not provided with classified metering plugs sets, replacement
metering plugs must be the same size as original.

75-30-00 Page 203
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5 2
4
C7739A
Compressor Bleed Valve Metering Plugs

Figure 202

75-30-00 Page 204
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 202
1. Cover
2. Plug
3. Primary Metering Plug
4. Final Metering Plug
6. P3 Air Inlet
(a) Cut lockwire, remove final metering plug (4), blanking plug (2) and preformed
packings (5).
(b) Using screwdriver, remove primary metering plug (3).
(c) Clean replacement metering plugs in solvent (PWC11-027). If necessary, use a

wooden dowel to clean orifices.
(d) Install new preformed packings (5) on plugs (2 and 4).
(e) Install primary metering plug (3), torque 10 to 15 lb.in.
(f) Install blanking plug (2). Torque 15 to 20 lb.in.
(g) Install final metering plug (4). Torque 35 to 40 lb.in.
(h) Lockwire plugs (2 and 4).
B. Metering Plug Replacement (Post-SB5380) (Ref. Fig. 202)
CAUTION: PLUG MUST NOT BE CHANGED EXCEPT AS SPECIFIED IN FAULT

ISOLATION.
(1) Obtain plug required to solve problem (Ref. 72-00-00, ENGINE - FAULT ISOLATION).
(a) Cut lockwire, remove final metering plug (4) and preformed packing (5).
(b) Clean replacement metering plug in solvent (PWC11-027). If necessary, use a

wooden dowel to clean orifice.
(c) Install new preformed packing (5) on plug ( 4).
(d) Install final metering plug (4). Torque 35 to 40 lb.in.
(e) Lockwire plug (4).
C. Test (Ref. Fig. 202)
(1) Remove bleed valve and check that piston moves freely through its full travel in
housing bore.
(2) Blank off P3 air inlet (6) in valve housing and remove final metering plug (4).

75-30-00 Page 205
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) Inspect plug (4) for contamination. If necessary, clean with solvent (PWC11-027)
using a small artist-type brush.
(4) Remove blanking plug (2) and primary metering plug (3) (Ref. Subpara. A.,
preceding).
(5) Clean metering plug (3) with solvent (PWC11-027) using a wooden dowel to clean
orifice.
(6) Install primary metering plug (3), torque 10 to 15 lb.in.
(7) Install blanking plug (2), torque 15 to 20 lb.in.
(8) Install test adapter, complete with preformed packing (5), in final metering plug port.
Pressurize unit to 40 ± 5 psig with clean, filtered shop air or nitrogen. Seal off valve
at this pressure.
(9) Maximum leakage allowed after 5 minutes is 5 psig.
(10) Remove test adapter and reinstall final metering plug (4), complete with new
preformed packing (5). Torque plug 35 to 40 lb.in. and lockwire.
(11) If pressure test is unsatisfactory, replace diaphragm (Ref. Para.8.).
D. Check
NOTE: Check is performed with bleed valve in-situ.
(1) Preparation for Check (Ref. Fig. 203).
CAUTION: USE CARE TO PREVENT ENTRY OF FOREIGN OBJECTS INTO

ENGINE.
(a) Secure compressor bleed valve (3) and bracket assembly (1) (PWC50041) with
four bolts (2) and washers. Torque bolts 16 to 20 lb.in.
(b) Attach flexible tube to bracket assembly (1).
(c) Re-install bleed air case (Ref. 72-20-00).
(d) Insert other end of tube into clear container of water.
(2) Compressor Bleed Valve Closing Point Check
(a) Start engine (Ref. 71-00-00) and allow gas generator speed to stabilize at
ground-idle.
(b) Note and record outside air temperature.
(c) Slowly accelerate engine until bubbles cease to flow through water in container.

75-30-00 Page 206
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(d) Plot closing point of bleed valve on graph (Ref. Fig. 204). Closing point shall
be within the gas generator speed band for indicated air temperature.
NOTE: If closing point exceeded, slowly decelerate gas generator speed until
bubbles are observed and repeat steps (c) and (d).
(e) Shutdown engine (Ref. 71-00-00).
NOTE: The compressor bleed valve assembly is provided with classified

orifice(s) which control the closing point on individual engines and
prevents engine surge. On Pre-SB5380 engines, the lower the
classification the later the bleed valve closes and for Post-SB5380
engines, the lower the part number suffix the earlier the bleed valve
closes. One class or part number suffix change has an effect of
approximately one percent on Ng.
7. Adjustment/Test (Post-SB5444).
A. Initial Setting
CAUTION: DO AN INITIAL BLEED VALVE ADJUSTMENT SCREW SETTING ON NEW OR

OVERHAULED BLEED VALVES.
(1) Turn the adjustment screw 11⁄2 turns or 9 flats of the screw clockwise to change the
manufacturer’s original factory setting.
NOTE: The manufacturer’s original factory setting is preset for general engine
applications. The adjustment screw requires a different setting to obtain
satisfactory closing point check.
B. Leak Test (Ref. Figs. 205 and 206)
CAUTION: OVERPRESSURIZATION OF THE BLEED VALVE BEYOND RECOMMENDED

PRESSURE MAY DAMAGE THE BLEED VALVE AND CAUSE INJURIES.
NOTE: Refer to Figure 207, for details for manufacturing test fixture.
(1) Install new preformed packing (4, Fig. 201) on spring pin.
(2) Secure bleed valve to the test fixture (Ref. Fig. 207) with bolts and torque 16 to
20 lb.in.
(3) Remove final metering plug (1, Fig. 206) and preformed packing (7) from bleed
valve cover.
(4) Install a suitable blanking plug with preformed packing and torque plug 15 to 20 lb.
in.
NOTE: Plug thread size is 0.250-28 inch.
(5) Set the pressure regulator to zero.
(6) Connect a clean dry compressed air supply to fixture.

75-30-00 Page 207
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1.5 IN.
(38.10 mm)
4 MAX. DEPTH
OF TUBE
IMMERSION.
5
1 WATER
3 2
DETAIL A (TYPICAL)
PRE-SB5444 C24665A
Bracket Assembly for Compressor Bleed Valve Closing Point Check

Figure 203

75-30-00 Page 208
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 203
1. Bracket Assembly (PWC50041)

2. Bolt
3. Bleed Valve
4. Rubber Tube
5. Container
(7) Open the shut-off valve. Increase the pressure regulator setting until the pressure
gage indication is 35 to 45 psig.
(8) Apply leak-test fluid (PWC05-007) to all air line connections, blanking plugs and
bleed valve cover flange. Check for leakage. Rectify as required.
(9) With the gage reading 35 to 45 psig, note the reading and close the shut-off valve.
A pressure drop over a period of five minutes must not exceed 10 psig.
(a) If the leakage rate is exceeded, send complete compressor bleed valve to an
authorized accessory repair facility.
(10) Disconnect the air supply from regulator. Set pressure regulator to zero to release
pressure from bleed valve.
(11) Remove bleed valve from fixture. Remove blanking plug. Install new preformed
packing (7) on metering plug (1) and install metering plug in valve cover. Torque
plug 15 to 20 lb. in. and secure with lockwire (PWC05-089).
C. In-situ Closing Point Check
CAUTION: DO AN INITIAL BOV ADJUSTMENT SCREW SETTING ON A NEW OR

OVERHAULED VALVE ONLY.
NOTE: Bleed valve closing point check is recommended when troubleshooting engine
performance/surge problems (Ref. 72-00-00, Fault Isolation).
(1) Do an initial BOV adjustment screw setting as follows:
(a) Turn the adjustment screw 1.5 turns or nine flats of the screw, clockwise to
change the manufacturer’s adjustment screw setting.
(2) Preparation for check (Ref. Fig. 208)
NOTE: PWC70513 is a complete bubbler test kit, consisting of a bracket, tube

and water container. PWC70076 consists of a bracket and tube assembly
only.
(a) Position bubbler assembly (1) (PWC70513) or (PWC70076) on compressor

bleed valve assembly (3).
(b) Insert a piece of 0.001 inch shim stock between the bracket assembly tube end
and the compressor bleed valve flange and adjust bracket assembly accordingly
by loosening the hexagonal cap screws (2).

75-30-00 Page 209
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
98
97
96
95
94
PERCENTAGE OF GAS GENERATOR SPEED (% Ng)
93
AREA ’B’ − REJECT
92
91
E
90 ABL
PT
CCE
89
’ −A
’A
88 ND
BA
87
86
85
84 AREA ’B’ − REJECT
83
82
81
−40 −30 −20 −10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 ( °F)
−40 −30 −20 −10 0 10 20 30 35 ( °C)
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE (OAT)
PT6T-3D (POST-SB5330) C25701
Compressor Bleed Valve Closing Point


75-30-00 Page 210
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
96%
95%
94%
93%
TOLERANCE = −0.0%
+2.1%
92%
PERCENTAGE OF GAS GENERATOR SPEED (%Ng)
91%
90%
89%
88%
87%
86%
Alt = 0Kft
85% Alt = 5Kft
Alt = 10Kft
84%
Alt = 15Kft
83% Alt = 20Kft
82%
81%
80%
79%
−50 −40 −30 −20 −10 0 10 20 30 40 50 ( °C )
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE (OAT)
(POST-SB5444) C75363F
Compressor Bleed Valve Closing Point

75-30-00 Page 211
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Px DIAGNOSTIC
PORT
DIFFUSER
FIXED
SECONDARY
VENTURI 0−40 PSI
THIS GAGE IS REQUIRED
FOR CALIBRATION
ADJUSTABLE TEST ONLY.
PRIMARY REMOVE FOR LEAK TEST.
ORIFICE
TEST FIXTURE
0−75 PSI
SHUT−OFF
VALVE
REGULATOR
FILTER
SHOP AIR
C71848
Compressor Bleed Valve Test (Typical)

Figure 205

75-30-00 Page 212
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) Ensure the tube end secures the shim to the compressor bleed valve flange
and the flared end of the tube of the bracket assembly is in the groove made
by the compressor bleed valve and the seat. Re-torque the hexagonal cap
screws (2) using 16 to 20 lb.in.
(d) Secure the compressor bleed valve and bracket assembly with the four bolts
and washers. Torque bolts 16 to 20 lb.in.
(e) Attach flexible tube (4) to bracket assembly (1).
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THERE IS NO INTERFERENCE BETWEEN THE

COMPRESSOR BLEED VALVE PISTON TRAVEL AND THE TUBE OF
THE BRACKET ASSEMBLY.
(f) Insert other end of tube into clear container of water (5) where maximum depth
of tube immersion shall not exceed 1.5 inches. Ensure the container is vented.
(g) Set the cabin pressure switch to OFF.
(h) Start engine (Ref. 71-00-00) and allow gas generator speed to stabilize at
ground idle.
(i) Note and record outside air temperature.
(j) Slowly accelerate engine until bubbles cease to flow through the water in
container. Do not exceed 97% (37,000 rpm). If bubbles continue at 37,000
rpm, adjust compressor bleed valve by 3 flats counterclockwise and repeat.
NOTE: Ng and OAT.
(k) Plot closing point of bleed valve on graph (Ref. Fig. 204).
1 Closing point shall be within the gas generator speed range for indicated
air temperature.
NOTE: A BOV set to close too soon or too late may contribute to
compressor stalls.
(l) Remove and adjust bleed valve closing point as required. Repeat Steps C.(f)
through C.(k) in order that Ng at the bleed valve closing point falls within limits
(Ref. Fig. 204):
NOTE: If closing point exceeded, slowly decelerate gas generator speed until
bubbles are observed and repeat steps above.
1 Loosen lock screw (2, Fig. 206).
2 Turn the adjustment stem (3) until Ng falls within limits.
NOTE: Clockwise rotation (one flat, 60 degree) rotation of the adjustment

stem (3) will increase Ng closing point of approximately 2%.
3 Tighten double hex lock screw (2) 17 to 20 lb.in.

75-30-00 Page 213
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ADJUSTMENT
STEM
7 NOTCH
LOCK
6 BOLT
2
5
3
C73673A
Compressor Bleed Valve Assembly

Figure 206

75-30-00 Page 214
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 206
1. Final Metering Plug

2. Self-locking Screw
3. Adjustment Stem
4. Piston
5. Valve Housing
6. Blanking Plug
(m) Remove bracket assembly (1) from compressor bleed valve (3) and secure
bleed valve (Ref. 5.B.(3)).
8. Approved Repairs
A. Diaphragm Replacement (Pre-SB5330 only) (Ref. Fig. 209)
(2) Remove cover (3) from housing (10).
(4) Remove retaining plate (5) and diaphragm (6) from piston. Discard diaphragm.
(5) Using cotton swab moistened with petroleum solvent (PWC11-027) lightly wipe bore
of spacer sleeve (7).
NOTE: All dark traces cannot be removed as sleeve is graphite impregnated.
(6) Using cloth moistened with solvent (PWC11-027) wipe inside of cover (3).
(7) Lightly smear piston top and mating flange of housing with compound (PWC09-003),
particularly the area around metering plug (8). Ensure metering plug remains dry
and orifice is unobstructed. Remove any excess compound inadvertently applied to
other surfaces.
(8) Install new diaphragm (6) with fabric side towards piston. Align bolt holes.
(9) Install retaining plate (5) on diaphragm and secure with bolts (4). Torque bolts 11 to
(10) Locate diaphragm skirt over studs on housing flange.
(11) Lightly smear cover mating flange with compound (PWC09-003). Locate cover on
valve housing, move piston up and down to ensure that diaphragm rolls correctly
between piston and housing. Secure cover with four self-locking nuts (1) and washers
(2). Check run-on torque and add 24 to 28 lb.in.
(12) Carry out functional check (Ref. Para. 6.C.).

75-30-00 Page 215
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2.750 DIA.
4.100 DIA.
BOLT HOLE
0.190−32 UNJF
22 ° 30’
3.250
DIA. 22 ° 30’
PIN HOLE
13/64 DIA. (0.203)
DRILL HOLE DRILL AND TAP 4 PLCS

13/64 DIA. (0.203) 0.190−32 UNJF× 0.750
0.750 0.750
1.500
DRILL AND TAP TO
ACCOMODATE AIR
SUPPLY EQUIPMENT
4.100 DIA.
MATERIAL: ALUMINUM
LOCAL MANUFACTURE C71849
Compressor Bleed Valve Test Fixture

Figure 207

75-30-00 Page 216
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Diaphragm Replacement (Post-SB5330) (Ref. Fig. 209, Sheet 2)
(2) Remove cover (3) from housing (10).
(4) Remove retaining plate (5) and diaphragm (6) from piston. Discard diaphragm.
(5) Remove two screws (12) and compressor bleed valve seat (11).
(6) Locate the three piston dampers on piston (insitu). Using an approved marker,
identify each one by writing a number on the piston surface next to each damper.
(7) Remove damper components and store in separate plastic bags identified with
corresponding location number (on piston surface) as follows:
(a) Index mark the retainer and position to each other.
(b) Remove damper retainer (13) from piston. Record the number of turns and
fraction of a turn from index mark (on piston) until retainer is fully released
from the piston.
(c) Place retainer in respective plastic bag. Remove spring (14) and bushing (15)
from piston and place in bag with retainer.
(8) Repeat step (7) for the remaining two dampers.
(9) Using cotton swab moistened with petroleum solvent (PWC11-027) lightly wipe bore
of spacer sleeve (7).
NOTE: All dark traces cannot be removed as sleeve is graphite impregnated.
(10) Using cloth moistened with solvent (PWC11-027) wipe inside of cover (3).
(11) Lightly smear piston top and mating flange of housing with compound (PWC09-003),
particularly the area around metering plug (8). Ensure metering plug remains dry
and orifice is unobstructed. Remove any excess compound inadvertently applied to
other surfaces.
(12) Install new diaphragm (6) with fabric side towards piston. Align bolt holes.
(13) Install retaining plate (5) on diaphragm and secure with bolts (4). Torque bolts 11 to
(14) Lightly smear cover mating flange with compound (PWC09-003). Locate cover on
valve housing, move piston up and down to ensure that diaphragm rolls correctly
between piston and housing. Secure cover with four self-locking nuts (1) and washers
(2). Check run-on torque and add 24 to 28 lb.in.
(15) Assemble and install dampers in piston as follows:

75-30-00 Page 217
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4 1.5 IN. (38.10 mm)

MAX. DEPTH
OF TUBE IMMERSION.
WATER
5
3 2
1
DETAIL A (TYPICAL)
(POST-SB5444) C76914A
Bracket Assembly for Compressor Bleed Valve Closing Point Check

Figure 208

75-30-00 Page 218
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 208
1. Bubbler Assembly (PWC70513 or PWC70076)

2. Bolt
3. Bleed Valve
4. Rubber Tube
5. Container
(a) Withdraw piston towards seat end of housing until damper orifices are
exposed.
CAUTION: TO ENSURE BUSHINGS AND SPRINGS REMAIN IN POSITION

DURING ASSEMBLY, INSERT EACH DAMPER ASSEMBLY FACING
UPWARDS, AND SCREW IN FOR APPROXIMATELY 75% OF
THE REQUIRED NUMBER OF TURNS.
(b) Install three damper bushings (15) and springs (14) in respective retainers.
Apply sealing compound (PWC09-002A) to threads.
(c) Adjust retainers equally. Turn each retainer the same number of turns that were
necessary to remove them.
NOTE: When installed, retainers must be 0.020 to 0.100 in. below surface of
piston.
(d) Before sealant has time to cure, adjust helical compression spring retainers
until a force of 1.0 to 2.0 lb. is required to move the compressor bleed valve
piston.
(e) Allow sealant to cure at room temperature for 24 hours. As an alternative, one
of the following methods can be used to reduce the time required to cure the
sealant:
1 Allow to stand at room temperature for one hour, then bake at 212 °F (100
°C) for 15 minutes.
2 Allow to stand at room temperature for one hour, then bake at 300 °F (149
°C) for 10 minutes.
3 Allow to stand at room temperature for one hour, with the compressor
bleed valve installed in the engine, run the engine at idle for five minutes.
(f) Push compressor bleed valve piston into compressor bleed valve housing
assembly. Install compressor bleed valve seat (11) and two screws (12).
Torque screws 6 to 7 lb. in.
(16) Carry out functional check (Ref. Para. 6.C.).

75-30-00 Page 219
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8
7
A
10
NOTE: SURFACE A IS
OVERALL FABRIC
WITH IDENTIFICATION
INK STAMP
Pre-SB5330 C3930A
Compressor Bleed Valve Diaphragm Replacement


75-30-00 Page 220
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 209
1. Self-locking Nut
2. Washer
3. Cover
4. Bolt
5. Retaining Plate
6. Diaphragm
7. Spacer Sleeve
8. Primary Metering Plug
9. Piston
10. Housing
11. Compressor Bleed Valve Seat
12. Screw
13. Damper Retainer (Post-SB5330)
14. Spring (Post-SB5330)
15. Bushing (Post-SB5330)

75-30-00 Page 221
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
10
7 15
14
9 13
11
12
Post-SB5330 C71179
Compressor Bleed Valve Diaphragm Replacement


75-30-00 Page 222
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
SECTION PAGE DATE
LEP 1 Nov 16/2012
2 blank Nov 16/2012

2 blank Nov 16/2012
77-00-00 1 Nov 16/2012

Description and 2 Nov 16/2012
Operation

Page 1/2
77-00 LEP Nov 16/2012
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
ENGINE INDICATING SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION 77-00-00
1. General 1
2. Engine Monitoring 1
A. Gas Generator (Ng) and Power Turbine (Nf) Speed 1
B. Power Section Output Torque 1
C. Oil Pressure and Temperature 1
D. Interturbine Temperature (Tt5) 2

Page 1/2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ENGINE INDICATING SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General
The engine is equipped with the following monitoring devices to monitor engine performance
in flight, to ascertain engine mechanical condition and to ground check power output.
2. Engine Monitoring
A. Gas Generator (Ng) and Power Turbine (Nf) Speed
Four airframe supplied tachometer-generators generate electric signals proportional to

power section gas generator and power turbine rpm. A tachometer-generator can be
mounted next to each manual fuel control unit on accessory gearboxes, and next to
each power turbine governor on the reduction gearbox. The electrical signal from each
tachometer-generator is applied to a tachometer to produce an rpm readout in percent.
B. Power Section Output Torque
A torque-indicating system, consisting of a torquemeter and an airframe supplied

calibrated torque pressure transmitter, provides indication of each power section output
torque. The torquemeter develops an oil pressure dependent on its power section
output torque. This pressure and the reduction gearbox internal pressure are applied to
the transmitter to provide a read-out of differential pressure on an airframe gage.
Both torquemeters in the reduction gearbox are individually calibrated at engine test and
an associated index number is established for each and stamped on the reduction
gearbox plate. When each airframe supplied calibrated torque pressure transmitter is
installed on the reduction gearbox it must be adjusted to the associated torquemeter index
number.
Transmission of drive from third-stage to output shaft through helical gears results in
axial movement of the clutch drive shaft in response to torque changes (Ref. 72-10-00).
Axial movement is transmitted through No.10 ball bearing to the torquemeter piston
and piston cover, and then to the torquemeter valve. An increase in torque moves the
torquemeter valve inward in its sleeve and increases the coincidence of ports in (inlet)
sleeve and valve. Oil flow into the torquemeter chamber is thus increased and
pressure raised to a corresponding higher value. Conversely, when torque decreases
the ports become less coincident and oil flow decreases. A constant bleed of oil from the
torquemeter chamber ensures that no hydraulic lock occurs.
C. Oil Pressure and Temperature
Airframe supplied oil pressure and temperature transducers are installed on the engine
to monitor power section and reduction gearbox oil systems. Power section oil
pressure and temperature are sensed by a transducer in the pressure oil return line in
the accessory gearbox. Reduction gearbox output section oil pressure is sensed by a
transducer above the output shaft in the pressure oil annulus surrounding the shaft.
Oil temperatures are sensed by airframe supplied thermocouple probes in accessory and
reduction gearboxes.
77-00-00
Page 1
ENGINE INDICATING SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION Nov 16/2012
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Interturbine Temperature (Tt5)
Interturbine temperature-sensing systems are designed to provide continuous indications

of average operating temperatures of the gas path between compressor turbine and
power turbine.
Each system consists of an integral wiring harness incorporating eight chromel-alumel

thermocouple probes connected in parallel and a terminal block. The harness is encased
in a steel tube and is connected directly to each probe and the terminal block. Each
probe protrudes through a threaded boss on the power turbine stator housing, into an area
adjacent to the power turbine vane leading edge. The probe is secured to the boss by
means of a floating, threaded fitting which is part of the sensing system assembly. The
terminal block is bolted to the gas generator case. Alumel and chromel terminals are
marked A/L and C/R, respectively. To ensure correct connection, the chromel terminal
block connection nut is of smaller diameter than the alumel.
To standardize readouts, a Tt5 temperature compensator unit is connected to the

terminal block, in parallel with the Tt5 harness. Its function is to compensate for variations
in power sections, in the relationship between measured and calculated Tt5, and its
setting is determined at engine test (Ref. 71-00-00).
77-00-00
Page 2
ENGINE INDICATING SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION Nov 16/2012
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
SECTION PAGE DATE
LEP 1 Jan 07/2005
2 blank Jan 07/2005

2 blank Jan 07/2005
77-20-01 201 Jan 07/2005

204 Jan 07/2005
205 Jan 07/2005
206 Jan 07/2005
207 Jan 07/2005
208 blank Jan 07/2005
Page 1/2
77-20 LEP Jan 07/2005
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
T5 TEMPERATURE SENSING SYSTEM - MAINTENANCE

PRACTICES 77-20-01
1. General 201
A. Removal of T5 Wiring Harness 201

B. Installation of T5 Wiring Harness 203
C. Removal of T5 Temperature Compensator 203
D. Installation of T5 Temperature Compensator 205
6. Inspection 205
A. Inspection/Check 205
B. Functional Check 206
7. Repair 206
A. Repair of Insulation on Terminal Block and Probes 207
Page 1/2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
T5 TEMPERATURE SENSING SYSTEM - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General

Item No. Name

PWC05-089 Lockwire
PWC08-009 Synthetic Ceramic Cement
3. Special Tools
Tool No. Name

PWC30114-08 Wrench
Name
Turbine Temperature Indicating System Test Set (Barfield 2312G-8)
A. Removal of T5 Wiring Harness (Ref. Fig. 201)
(3) Cut and remove lockwire lacing from clips (1) on power turbine stator housing and
exhaust duct.
(4) Unscrew probe retaining nuts (4) using wrench (PWC30114-08).
(6) Remove complete assembly (5).
77-20-01 Page 201

T5 TEMPERATURE SENSING SYSTEM - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES Jan 07/2005
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2
6
1
3
7
A
LOCKWIRE
DETAIL A 8
C12233
T5 Temperature Sensing System - Removal/Installation

Figure 201
77-20-01 Page 202

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 201
1. Clips
2. Power Turbine Stator Housing
3. T5 Thermocouple Installation
4. Probe Retaining Nut and Washer
5. T5 Thermocouple Wiring Harness Assembly
6. T5 Terminal Block
7. Terminal Posts
8. Bolt
9. Junction Box
B. Installation of T5 Wiring Harness (Ref. Fig. 201)
CAUTION: HARNESS MUST BE HANDLED CAREFULLY TO AVOID KINKS IN

LEADS. CARE MUST BE EXERCISED WHEN INSERTING PROBES IN
BOSSES AS HOLES IN INNER SURFACE OF STATOR HOUSING ARE
SMALLER THAN EXTERNAL ENTRANCE HOLES.
(1) Position harness on power turbine stator housing with junction box at 6 o’clock
position.
(2) Install new washers on probes and partially insert probes at 8 o’clock and 4 o’clock
positions into bosses.
(3) Partially insert the next two probes into bosses simultaneously bending harness
around stator housing.
(4) Insert the remaining probes in the same manner until all probes are seated in
bosses.
(5) Tighten all retaining nuts (4) fingertight.
(6) Secure junction box (9) with two bolts (8).
(7) Torque nuts (4) and bolts (8) 40 to 50 lb.in. and lockwire.
(8) Secure harness in clips (1) with lockwire lacing (Ref. Detail A).
(9) Carry out continuity, insulation and probe heat response checks as detailed in
Inspection/Check (Ref. Para. 6.).
(12) Carry out T5 system functional check (Ref. Para. 6.).
C. Removal of T5 Temperature Compensator (Ref. Fig. 202)
(1) Disconnect cables (1, 2 and 3) from compensator (5).
77-20-01 Page 203

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1
6
C3062A
T5 Temperature Compensator - Removal/Installation

Figure 202
77-20-01 Page 204

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 202
1. Power Input Cable

2. Thermocouple Input Cable
3. Thermocouple Output Cable
4. Bolt and Self-locking Nut
5. Compensator
6. Mounting Bracket
(2) Remove bolts and self-locking nuts (4) securing compensator to mounting
brackets (6).
(3) Remove compensator.
D. Installation of T5 Temperature Compensator (Ref. Fig. 202)
(1) Position compensator (5) on mounting bracket (6).
(2) Install bolts and self-locking nuts (4). Torque 36 to 40 lb.in.
(3) Connect cables (1, 2 and 3) to compensator.
(4) Tighten cable connectors fingertight and lockwire to bolts (4).
(5) Carry out trim check and adjustment.
6. Inspection
A. Inspection/Check
(1) Inspect the installed probe and harness installation for security and signs of
damage.
NOTE: Repairs are limited to replacement of insulation on terminal block (Ref.

Repairs, Para. 7.).
(2) Check security of the two harness retaining clips on stator housing. One loose clip
is acceptable but must be removed. Rebrazing of a loose clip is not allowed.
(3) Verify probe signal polarity as follows:
CAUTION: ALL PROBE OUTPUT SIGNALS MUST BE OF THE SAME POLARITY.

ANY PROBE GENERATING SIGNALS OF REVERSED POLARITY
MUST BE REPLACED.
(a) Connect Barfield Test Set to posts on terminal block on harness.
77-20-01 Page 205

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) Apply heat to each probe tip in turn and check for a positive temperature
indication.
NOTE: A heat source such as a 100 watt soldering iron capable of heating
individual probes to 94°C (200°F) but not exceeding 540°C (1000°F)
may be used.
(c) Before proceeding to next probe, allow previously heated probe to cool to room
temperature.
NOTE: A defective probe requires replacement harness.
(4) Check insulation by connecting one lead of test set to one of the terminal posts on
terminal block and the other lead to stator housing.
NOTE: 1. Minimum acceptable resistance is 5000 ohms.
NOTE: 2. If insulation resistance test is unsatisfactory, but does not indicate a

direct short to ground, bake probe at 94°C (200°F) for one hour to dry
out all traces of moisture. Repeat test. If still unsatisfactory, reject probe on
the basis that a residual contaminant, other than moisture, is present.
B. Functional Check
NOTE: Perform with engine in its assembled state.
(1) Remove external leads from terminal block on gas generator case.
(2) Using Barfield Test Set Model 2312G-8 or equivalent, check insulation resistance of
harness when measured between either chromel or alumel terminal and ground.
Minimum acceptable resistance is 5000 ohms.
(3) Check continuity and loop resistance measured across chromel and alumel
terminals. Acceptable loop resistance is 1.8 to 2.6 ohms.
NOTE: Several broken or damaged probes would not necessarily result in an

out-of-tolerance loop resistance. However erroneous temperature
indications could occur due to the resultant inbalance in the harness
circuit.
7. Repair
NOTE: Repair of integral harness and probe assembly is limited to replacement of

insulation on terminal block as detailed in Paragraph A., following.
77-20-01 Page 206

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Repair of Insulation on Terminal Block and Probes
WARNING: CARE MUST BE EXERCISED WHEN MIXING SYNTHETIC CERAMIC

CEMENT TO AVOID CONTACT WITH EYES. IN THE EVENT OF EYE
CONTACT, WASH WITH WATER IMMEDIATELY AND CONSULT A
DOCTOR.
(1) Mix cement (PWC08-009) to desired consistency as per manufacturer’s instructions.
NOTE: The cement used for repair is supplied in two parts; a filler in powder form
and a binder in liquid form.
(2) Clean repair areas to ensure that all surfaces are free of grease and other
contaminants.
NOTE: The presence of any contaminant will adversely affect the physical and
electrical insulating properties of the cement mixture.
(3) Apply cement mixture to replace missing insulation.
(4) If terminals on probe or terminal block are loose, apply a few drops of liquid binder
(PWC08-009) at junction of loose terminal.
(5) Allow cement mixture or binder to set for 30 minutes.
NOTE: Do not handle or disturb during this time.
(6) Cure for 24 hours at ambient temperature or heat in oven as applicable below.
v Cement mixture: 65°C (150°F) for 3 hours.

v Binder: 65° to 93°C (150° to 200°F) for 30 minutes.
(7) On completion of repairs, check security of terminals in terminal block or probe. If

necessary repeat steps (4) through (6) preceding.
77-20-01 Page 207/208

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
SECTION PAGE DATE
LEP 1 Sep 19/2008
2 blank Sep 19/2008
Contents 1 Sep 19/2008

2 blank Sep 19/2008
79-00-00 1 Sep 19/2008

Description and 2 Sep 19/2008
Operation 3 Sep 19/2008
4 Sep 19/2008
5 Sep 19/2008
6 Sep 19/2008
7 Sep 19/2008
8 Sep 19/2008
9 Sep 19/2008
10 Sep 19/2008
11 Sep 19/2008
12 blank Sep 19/2008

Page 1/2
79-00 LEP Sep 19/2008
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
OIL SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION 79-00-00
1. Engine Oil Systems 1

Page 1/2
79-00 CONTENTS Sep 19/2008
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OIL SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. Engine Oil Systems
The engine has three separate lubrication systems. Identical systems lubricate each power
section and the associated input section of the reduction gearbox. A third system lubricates the
reduction gearbox output section and additional lubrication for No.10-1/2 bearing.
Calibrated oil nozzles are used on main engine bearings to maintain optimum oil flow.
Each system is supplied by its main pressure pump. Oil is retrieved from power section
bearings by scavenge pumps. Each engine includes five detectors; three in the reduction
gearbox and one in each accessory gearbox. The chip detectors incorporate self-closing valves
which eliminate the need to drain oil when removing detectors for inspection.
Each system includes an oil filter. All three filters are mounted on the reduction gearbox.
(1) Power Section Lubrication System
The power section lubrication system pressure pump and three scavenge pumps
are mounted in the accessory gearbox which also houses an integral oil tank. The
filter assembly is mounted on a cover of the reduction gearbox.
The combined check and regulating and pressure relief valve assembly, the
oil-to-fuel heater and the centrifugal breather are all accessory gearbox mounted.
(a) Main Pressure Pump and Scavenge Oil Pumps
Pressure oil is circulated from each integral oil tank through its respective
power section lubricating system by a self-contained pressure pump mounted
on a boss on the rear face of the accessory gearbox housing casting. A screened
oil pump inlet is supplied with oil from the lowest part of the tank. An outlet
supplies pressure oil to a cored internal passage on the housing which connects
with the main check and pressure regulating valve mounted underneath the
housing.
The scavenge oil system for each power section includes three scavenge
pumps. One pump scavenges oil from No.3 and No.4 bearings and the reduction
gearbox input section, a second scavenges oil from No.2 bearing, and the
third scavenges oil from accessory gearbox sump to main oil tank. One scavenge
pump is mounted externally on the accessory gearbox cover, the other two
are mounted inside the gearbox.
The main pressure pump and the three scavenge pumps are gear-type and are
all mounted on a common shaft.

79-00-00 Page 1
OIL SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION Sep 19/2008
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PRESSURE OIL FROM REDUCTION GEARBOX
PRESSURE LINE TO
OIL FUEL HEATER
PRESSURE SENSE
LINE FOR RELIEF
VALVE OPERATION
PRESSURE OIL
CASTING PASSAGE TAKING SCAVENGE OIL TO COOLER
OIL TO ACCESSORY FROM NO.2 BEARING SCAVENGE FROM NO.3 & 4
GEARBOX BEARING BEARINGS AND REDUCTION
GEARBOX
UNDERSIDE VIEW
CHIP DETECTOR FILLER CAP
FILLER CAP FOR OIL TANK

REDUCTION GEARBOX
PRESSURE LINE TO
NO.1 BEARING AND
SCAVENGE OIL ACCESSORY GEARBOX
FROM NO.2 BEARING
BEARING
MAIN SYSTEM FILTER
PRESSURE MAIN SYSTEM FILTER
OIL
SCAVENGE FROM PRESSURE LINE

NO.3 & 4 TO OIL FUEL
BEARINGS AND HEATER
REDUCTION GEARBOX COOLER
RETURN OIL
CHIP CHIP CHIP
PRESSURE SENSE LINE FOR DETECTOR DETECTOR DETECTOR
RELIEF VALVE OPERATION COOLER
RETURN OIL POWER SECTION
FRONT VIEW REDUCTION GEARBOX OIL TO COOLER
POWER SECTION SYSTEM FILTER
OIL TO COOLER COOLER RETURN OIL REDUCTION GEARBOX OIL
REDUCTION GEARBOX SYSTEM OIL TO COOLER
REAR VIEW
C3730B
Engine Oil Systems - Component Location


79-00-00
Page 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
POWER SECTION OIL SYSTEM EXTERNALLY ADJUSTABLE PRESSURE OIL

REGULATING VALVE TO OIL−TO−FUEL
HEATER
PRESSURE OIL FROM
OIL−TO−FUEL HEATER
PRESSURE OIL TO
GEARBOX SUMP AREA
LUBRICATION FOR 2ND SCAVENGE OIL TO
STAGE / CLUTCH GEAR MESH GEARBOX SUMP AREA PRESSURE PUMP
LUBRICATION FOR CHECK VALVE
INPUT GEAR MESH
TORQUEMETER SCAVENGE
PUMPS
CHECK VALVE
PRESSURE
REGULATING
VALVE
SCAVENGE OIL FROM
NO.2 BEARING
BYPASS VALVE
SCAVENGE OIL FROM
NO.3 & 4 BEARINGS
POWER SECTION
OIL FROM COOLER FILTER
EJECTOR TYPE
TO COOLER SCAVENGE PUMP
SCAVENGE OIL
SUMP AREA LUBRICATION FOR
OUTPUT GEAR MESH
LUBRICATION FOR
12 1_2 BEARING
PUMP LUBRICATION FOR
CLUTCH GEAR
BEARINGS
PRESSURE OIL
SCAVENGE OIL BYPASS VALVE

LUBRICATION FOR
OIL TANKS 10 1_2 BEARING
PRESSURE
RELIEF VALVE
FILTER
FROM
COOLER TO
COOLER
OUT PUT SECTION REDUCTION GEAR BOX OIL SYSTEM
C5645A
Engine Oil Systems - Component Location
Figure 1 (Sheet 2)

79-00-00
Page 3
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) Oil Tank
The oil tank is an integral part of the accessory gearbox assembly, its faces
being formed by the compressor inlet case and the accessory gearbox housing
casting (lower half). The tank has a total capacity of 1.6 U.S. gallons of
which 0.75 U.S. gallon is usable oil. An expansion space of 0.5 U.S. gallon is
provided.
The tank is provided with two filler necks and visual oil level indicators located
on either side of the gearbox. The inboard neck and indicator is blanked off.
A snap-type filler cap and strainer element is installed in the neck in use. A drain
plug in the bottom of the tank facilitates oil drainage.
(c) Oil Filter (Ref. Fig. 2)
The oil filter assembly consists of a cartridge-type filter element mounted in a

cover assembly secured to the reduction gearbox cover by studs. Pressure oil
flows inward through internal cored passages to the space between filter and
cover, through the filter, and out through the open filter end to internal casting
passages and an external pressure tube to the power section bearings and
accessory gearbox. Should the filter restrict the flow, a spring-loaded bypass
valve, normally closed, will open with increasing pressure against the valve
spring to allow oil to bypass the filter from inlet to outlet passages. A small
screened orifice on the inlet side of the filter allows controlled leakage of oil and
venting of oil vapor into reduction gearbox internal cavities.
(d) Check and Regulating Valve (Ref. Fig. 3)
Oil pressure is controlled by a pressure regulating valve housed in the

combined check and regulating valve assembly mounted on the bottom of the
accessory gearbox.
Pressure oil from the pump normally holds open a check valve to allow oil
through an outlet port and two external pressure lines, one via the cooler to the
system filter and the other to the oil/fuel heater.
When return line pressure from oil system filter exceeds pre-set value, the
regulating valve is moved against spring pressure to open a port and allow
pressure oil to flow through a cored passage in the gearbox housing back to the
main oil tank. Oil flow to cooler is, therefore, limited by demand rather than
pump capacity.
(e) Oil Pressure Adjuster
To provide a more accessible, though limited, pressure adjustment, a valve is

mounted at the top of the accessory gearbox. The valve consists of a variable
orifice which bleeds pressure oil from the oil-to-fuel heater line into the
accessory gearbox.

79-00-00 Page 4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TO OIL PRESSURE CONTROLLED LEAKAGE OIL FROM COOLER

PUMP RELIEF VALVE ORIFICE
(3RD OIL SYSTEM ONLY)
FILTER HOUSING
FILTER BYPASS
VALVE
FILTER ELEMENT
TRANSFER TUBE
REDUCTION GEARBOX
INPUT HOUSING
REDUCTION GEARBOX
OUTPUT HOUSING
C3019A
Oil Filter and Bypass Valve - Schematic
Figure 2

79-00-00 Page 5
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BYPASS LINE TO TANK
PRESSURE REGULATING VALVE

SCAVENGE LINE TO PUMP
SCAVENGE LINE TO PUMP
MAIN CHECK VALVE PRESSURE SENSING LINE
PRESSURE OIL FROM PUMP
SCAVENGE OIL FROM BEARINGS 3 & 4

AND REDUCTION GEARBOX
SCAVENGE OIL FROM BEARING 2
PRESSURE LINE TO COOLER
C3020A
Check and Regulating Valve - Schematic

Figure 3

79-00-00Page 6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(f) Centrifugal Breather
Breather air from power section bearing compartments and gearboxes is

vented through a centrifugal breather located in the accessory gearbox. Air
from the main oil tank enters the gearbox through breather passages in the
housing casting, and air from No.1 bearing compartment enters with scavenge oil
through the cored scavenge passage from the compressor inlet case.
The centrifugal breather consists of a shrouded aluminum alloy impeller located

by three pins to the face of the starter-generator gear, and secured on the
shaft by a retaining ring. Oil vapor in the gearbox is picked up by vanes on the
rotating impeller face and thrown outward by centrifugal force. The oil drains
to the bottom of the gearbox and air vents overboard, through a vent shaft in the
accessory gearbox housing casting, to atmosphere.
(2) Reduction Gearbox Output Section Lubricating System
(a) Main Pressure Pump (Ref. Fig. 4)
A single gear-type pressure pump driven from the output shaft supplies
lubricating oil to output shaft bearings and two gearbox composite third-stage
shaft bearings.
(b) Pressure Relief Valve
A spring loaded pressure relief valve, installed within the pump inlet housing,
regulates system pressure by allowing oil into the pump inlet when pressure
becomes excessive. This feature prevents cavitation and reduces the risk of
bearing erosion.
(c) Oil Tank, Cooler and Filter
Oil is drawn through an inlet screen from an oil tank formed between input and
output housings and delivered to an oil cooler. Return oil from the cooler is
passed through a filter identical to those in power section oil systems, and
delivered to bearings.
B. System Operation (Ref. Fig. 1)
(1) Power Section Lubrication System
(a) Lubrication
Lubricating oil for power section bearings, other than No.3 and 4 bearings, is
supplied from the oil filter through an external transfer tube that runs the length
of the power section. Oil for accessory bearings in the accessory gearbox
and No.1 bearing is taken through internal passages in gearbox castings to two
oil jets. One jet sprays bearings in the upper part of the gearbox, and the
other sprays bearings in the lower part, and No.1 bearing. No.1 bearing oil is
sprayed through a fine strainer and nozzle assembly directly on the bearing
races, and on to the compressor hub assembly coupling shaft to run in
grooves to the split inner race.

79-00-00 Page 7
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OUTPUT SHAFT COUPLING
PUMP PRESSURE HOUSING
PUMP GEARS
INPUT HOUSING
TRANSFER TUBES
OIL FILLER CAP
OUTPUT HOUSING
CHIP DETECTOR
CHECK VALVE
OIL FILLER SCREEN
OUTLET TO COOLER
CHIP DETECTOR
PUMP INLET HOUSING
C22125
Main Pressure Pump

Figure 4

79-00-00
Page 8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
No.2 bearing lubricating oil is taken from a tee-piece in the external transfer
tube through a boss on the gas generator case at the 7 o’clock position. It is
taken internally through a cored passage in the gas generator case
centerbore to an oil gallery with two nozzles to lubricate both faces of the
bearing.
Oil for No.3 and 4 bearings is taken through internal cored passages in
reduction gearbox castings through a minimum pressure valve to an oil gallery
at the 12 o’clock position in the bearing housing. Nozzles direct oil to both
faces of No.3 bearing and one face of No.4 bearing.
Pressure oil for reduction gearbox input section bearings is taken from a
collection point through four separate casting passages. One passage sprays
oil inside the reduction gearbox input shaft to lubricate No.4 and No.5 bearings
centrifugally, and an offshoot from this passage lubricates No.6 bearing.
Another passage takes oil to cool the meshing teeth of input and second-stage
gears. The third passage takes oil to cool the meshing teeth of second-stage
and clutch gears and lubricate bearings No.7 and No.8. A fourth passage takes
oil to pressurize the torquemeter chamber and lubricate accessory gearshaft
bearings.
(2) Scavenge
Oil from No.1 bearing is returned by gravity to the bottom of the compressor inlet
case, and from there through an internal cored passage to the accessory gearbox
sump. Oil from No.2 bearing is returned via an internal scavenge tube to the
bottom of the gas generator case, and from there via an external scavenge line, the
check and regulating valve block on the accessory gearbox, and a further
external scavenge line to the externally mounted scavenge pump. Oil from No.3
and 4 bearings is returned from the reduction gearbox output housing sump area via
external scavenge line, check and regulating valve block, and external and
internal passages to the large internally mounted scavenge pump.
A ball valve in the externally-mounted scavenge pump allows excess oil vapor from
No.2 bearing to bypass the pump. The pump delivers oil to the accessory
gearbox sump, to be scavenged together with oil from No.1 bearing and the
accessory gearbox bearings by the smaller of the two internal pumps, and returned
through an internal passage to the main oil tank. The larger pump also delivers
oil through the same internal passage directly to the main oil tank.
In addition to the three main scavenge pumps, an ejector pump boosts scavenge
oil from No.3 and 4 bearings. A schematic diagram of ejector pump operation is
shown on Figure 5.
The pump operates on the venturi principle and utilizes pressure oil from the supply
line to No.3 and 4 bearings. The pressure oil, flowing at high velocity through a
restrictor nozzle in the pump housing causes sufficient reduction in pressure at the
throat area to suck the scavenge oil along the scavenge tube from the bearing
area. Scavenge and pressure oil from the ejector pump are sprayed into the sump
area at the bottom of the reduction gearbox input section, and scavenged from
there by the pump in the accessory gearbox. A high velocity flow of pressure oil is

79-00-00 Page 9
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PRESSURE OIL
OUTLET VENTURI PUMP HOUSING
RESTRICTOR NOZZLE
SCAVENGE OIL FROM
NO.3 & 4 BEARINGS
DECREASED PRESSURE AREA
TO SUMP
C3022
Ejector Pump Operation

Figure 5

79-00-00 Page 10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
necessary for efficient operation of the ejector pump and a spring loaded check
valve is therefore provided to prevent oil flow which might otherwise flood the bearing
compartment during run-up and run-down.
(3) Reduction Gearbox Output Section Lubrication System
Casting passages take pressure oil from the filter to an annulus in the output
housing, and an offshoot from these passages supplies cooling oil to the mesh of
two reduction gearbox third-stage gears and output shaft gear. Two passages from
the annulus take oil to nozzles spraying inside the two No.10 bearings under
centrifugal flow, and to collect in integral reservoirs of each sprag clutch. From clutch
reservoirs, oil flows outward to lubricate bearings No. 10-1/2, 11, 12 and 12-1/2.
Additional lubrication for each 10-1/2 bearing is provided by pressure oil tapped from
the reduction gearbox system and conducted by a series of transfer tubes and
internal lines to pockets machined in the input housing near each clutch gear bearing.
Drilled holes in the pockets, direct a jet of oil onto each No. 10-1/2 bearing.
No. 15, 16 and 17 bearings are lubricated from the annulus.
The system relies on gravity to scavenge lubricating oil from bearings, oil returning
directly to the reduction gearbox oil tank. Carbon seals mounted on the clutch
gear, and pressurized by P3 air, prevent oil entering either reduction gearbox input
section. Seals are pressurized by P3 air from whichever power section has the
higher operating pressure. A breather tube in the output housing vents to atmosphere.

79-00-00 Page 11/12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
SECTION PAGE DATE
LEP 1 Jul 18/2016
2 blank Jul 18/2016

2 Jul 18/2016
79-20-02 201 Jul 18/2016

204 Jul 18/2016
205 Jul 18/2016
206 Jul 18/2016
207 Jul 18/2016
208 blank Jul 18/2016
79-20-03 201 Mar 09/2001

204 blank Mar 09/2001
79-20-04 201 Mar 09/2001

204 blank Mar 09/2001
79-20-05 201 Mar 09/2001

204 blank Mar 09/2001
79-20-06 201 Nov 23/2015

204 Nov 23/2015
205 Nov 23/2015
206 blank Nov 23/2015

Page 1/2
79-20 LEP Jul 18/2016
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
OIL FILTERS - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES 79-20-02
1. General 201

A. Removal 201
B. Installation 203
A. Inspection of Filter Elements 204
B. Patch Making 204
7. Cleaning 205
A. Cleaning of Filter Elements 205
OIL FILTER BYPASS VALVE - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES 79-20-03

1. General 201
A. Removal 201
B. Installation 201
CHECK AND REGULATING VALVE - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES 79-20-04
1. General 201


Page 1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
CHECK AND REGULATING VALVE - MAINTENANCE

A. Removal 201
B. Installation 201
OIL PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT VALVE - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES 79-20-05
1. General 201
A. Removal 201
B. Installation 201
OIL SCAVENGE AND PRESSURE TUBES- MAINTENANCE
PRACTICES 79-20-06
1. General 201

A. Removal of Oil Scavenge and Pressure Tubes from Reduction

Gearbox 201
B. Installation of Oil Scavenge and Pressure Tubes from

Reduction Gearbox 201
A. Inspect Rings 203
B. Inspect Pressure Tube 204
C. Inspect Scavenge Tube 204

Page 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OIL FILTERS - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General

Item No. Name

PWC11-032 Solvent, Degreaser
PWC11-074 Solvent, Non-Aqueous
(Bulk or Aerosol)
3. Special Tools
Not Applicable
Name Remarks
Cleaning Tank, Electrosonic Model KS5518 or Equivalent
NOTE: Removal/Installation procedures for the three oil filters on the reduction gearbox are
identical.
A. Removal
(1) Place suitable container under oil filter cover (1).
(3) Withdraw cover (1) complete with element (4).
79-20-02
Page 201
OIL FILTERS - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES Jul 18/2016
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2
1
C3071A
Oil Filters - Removal/Installation

Figure 201
79-20-02
Page 202
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 201
1. Cover
2. Nut
4. Filter Element
5. Retaining Ring
7. Mounting Studs
8. Spacer (Post-SB5350)
9. Washer
(4) Remove retaining ring (5) and withdraw element from cover.
NOTE: 1. Withdraw element carefully to avoid disturbing contaminants. If

necessary, inspect and identify contaminants 70-00-00, STANDARD
PRACTICES - MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES.
NOTE: 2. For the presence of silver flakes in the oil only: Certain engine bearing
cages are silver plated to enhance lubrication. After a period of operation
some of this plating may separate from the bearing cages and introduce
silver flakes into the oil. The reverse side of the silver flakes may carry
traces of copper flash, and the copper flash may be present in the oil
filter element. The separation of this silver plating and traces of copper
flash is acceptable and does not affect bearing performance or the
engine oil system. Refer to Chapter 72-00-00, ENGINE -
INSPECTION/CHECK, Unscheduled Inspections for maintenance
recommendations.
(5) Remove preformed packings (3 and 6).
(6) Post-SB5350: Remove spacer (8) from oil filter cover (1).
B. Installation
(1) Post-SB5350: Install spacer (8) in oil filter cover (1).
(2) Install new preformed packing (6) in groove in internal bore of filter element (4).
(3) Insert element into cover (1) with lugs facing outwards.
(5) Install new preformed packing (3) and position filter assembly on mounting studs
(7).
(6) Install washers (9) and nuts (2). Torque 32 to 36 lb.in.
79-20-02
Page 203
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6. Inspection/Check
A. Inspection of Filter Elements
(1) Remove element (Ref. Para. 5.).
(2) Clean element (Ref. Para. 7.).
(3) Using a 10-power (minimum) magnifying glass, inspect element for clogged
passages and broken wires.
NOTE: 1. If dents and/or broken wires are found, element must be replaced.
NOTE: 2. If more than five percent of visible passages are found to be clogged,
filter element must be shipped to the nearest authorized P&WC overhaul
facility for ultrasonic cleaning and bubble point testing.
B. Patch Making
NOTE: Operators may send the contaminated filter or debris to a qualified laboratory
for filter patch check and/or analysis (Ref. 70-00-00, MAINTENANCE
PRACTICES).
(1) Remove filter element (Ref. Para. 5.).
(2) Using suitable tapered rubber plugs, seal inner cavity of filter element.
(3) Place filter in cylindrical container.
(4) Fill container with solvent (PWC11-027) or cleaner (PWC11-054) to cover filter
element and keep some space for liquid movement when shaking. Install cover.
(5) Shake container for about three minutes manually or 30 seconds in a vibrator.
Remove cover.
NOTE: Make sure there are no deposits left on filter. If yes, install container cover
and continue shaking.
(6) Turn vacuum pump ON and pour liquid contents of container into the filter (patch)
holder.
NOTE: Make sure filter holder has new filter paper.
(7) Fill the container with solvent (PWC11-027) or cleaner (PWC11-054). Shake the
container and empty the container into filter holder to flush out all the remaining
loose particles. Remove filter element from container.
(8) Remove filter paper from filter (patch) holder and place in receptacle. Identify
sample with type of filter, engine number and TSN.
(9) Send sample to a qualified laboratory for material spectrographic analysis (Ref.
70-00-00, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES).
79-20-02
Page 204
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7. Cleaning (Ref. Fig. 202)
A. Cleaning of Filter Elements
WARNING: REFER TO THE MANUFACTURER’S MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS

FOR CONSUMABLE MATERIALS INFORMATION SUCH AS: HAZARDOUS
INGREDIENTS, PHYSICAL/CHEMICAL CHARACTERISTICS, FIRE,
EXPLOSION, REACTIVITY, HEALTH HAZARD DATA, PRECAUTIONS FOR
SAFE HANDLING, USE AND CONTROL MEASURES.
(1) Remove element (Ref. Para. 5.).
(2) Install suitable rubber or plastic plug (2) in element center tube.
(3) Place element (1) in cleaner tank (3).
(4) Fill the tank to approximately 1/4 inch below edge with cleaner (PWC11-054) or
solvent (PWC11-032) or solvent (PWC11-074) or petroleum solvent (PWC11-027)
or isopropyl alcohol (PWC11-014).
(5) Operate cleaner for 15 minutes.
(6) Rotate element 180 degrees and operate cleaner for another 15 minutes.
NOTE: Adjust cleaning duration to suit condition of element and for optimum results,
replace solvent every 20 minutes of cleaner operation.
(7) Using clean lint-free gloves, remove element from tank and remove plug (2).
(8) Visually inspect element (Ref. Para. 6.). If necessary, repeat above cleaning
procedure.
WARNING: WHEN USING COMPRESSED AIR FOR DRYING, REGULATE

PRESSURE TO 29 psig (200 kPa) OR LESS. WEAR GOGGLES OR
FACE SHIELD TO PROTECT EYES.
(9) Dry element with clean filtered air at 29 psig (200 kPa) maximum, or allow to stand
in a clean environment until dry.
(10) Store in clean polyethylene bag until required for installation.
79-20-02
Page 205
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 3
C6386A
Oil Filter Element - Electrosonic Cleaning

Figure 202
79-20-02
Page 206
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 202
1. Filter Element
2. Plug
3. Cleaner Tank
4. Cleaning Solution
79-20-02
Page 207/208
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OIL FILTER BYPASS VALVE - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General

Not Applicable
3. Special Tools
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
A. Removal
CAUTION: TWO IDENTICAL FILTER BYPASS VALVES ARE LOCATED ONE IN EACH
REDUCTION GEARBOX COVER (NO.1 AND NO.2). A THIRD FILTER
BYPASS VALVE IS LOCATED IN THE LOWER PART OF THE INPUT HOUSING
AND, ALTHOUGH VERY SIMILAR IN APPEARANCE, IS NOT
INTERCHANGEABLE WITH THE OTHER TWO VALVES. THE LOCATION OF
EACH VALVE MUST BE TAGGED AS IT IS REMOVED.
(1) Remove plug (3) from gearbox cover (2).
(2) Withdraw spring (5) and valve (6).
(3) Remove plug (7) from input housing (1).
(4) Withdraw spring (9) and valve (10).
B. Installation
(1) Insert valve (6) and spring (5) into gearbox cover (2).
(2) Install new preformed packing (4) on plug (3).
(3) Install plug, torque 375 to 425 lb.in. and lockwire.
(4) Insert valve (10) and spring (9) into input housing (1).
79-20-03 Page 201

OIL FILTER BYPASS VALVE - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES Mar 09/2001
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6 5 4
3
6
10 5 4
3
C3072A
Oil Filter Bypass Valves - Removal/Installation

Figure 201
79-20-03 Page 202

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 201
1. Input Housing
2. Gearbox Covers
3. Plug
5. Spring
6. Valve
7. Plug
9. Spring
10. Valve
(5) Install new preformed packing (8) on plug (7).
(6) Install plug, torque 200 to 225 lb.in. and lockwire.
79-20-03 Page 203/204

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHECK AND REGULATING VALVE - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General

Not Applicable
3. Special Tools
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
A. Removal
(1) Place suitable container under housing (7) to catch residual oil.
(2) Restrain cover (12) to prevent loss of springs (5 and 10) and remove bolts (1) and
washers (2).
(3) Carefully remove cover (12), valve housing (4), spring (5), check valve (6), spring
(10), spacers (9) and regulating valve (8).
(4) Blank off all exposed openings and store removed parts in a clean container until
required for installation.
B. Installation
(1) Install new preformed packings (3) in grooves in valve housing (4).
(2) Install spring (5) on housing (4) so that spring abuts shoulder on housing.
(3) Insert check valve (6) through spring (5) into valve housing (4).
NOTE: Ensure that check valve moves freely in valve housing.
(4) Insert assembly into port in housing (7).
79-20-04 Page 201

CHECK AND REGULATING VALVE - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES Mar 09/2001
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LOCATION
VIEW 7
6
5
3
2
1 8
10
11
12
10 3
4
12
3
8
11
1
6
7 2
C22102
Check and Regulating Valve - Removal/Installation

Figure 201
79-20-04 Page 202

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 201
1. Bolt
2. Washer
4. Valve Housing
5. Spring
6. Check Valve
7. Housing
8. Regulating Valve
9. Spacers
10. Spring
12. Housing Cover
(5) Install required number of spacers (9) into body of regulating valve (8).
NOTE: The addition of one spacer raises oil pressure 3 to 4 psi. Removal of one
spacer lowers oil pressure by 3 to 4 psi. Maximum number of spacers is
12 but total thickness of all spacers must not exceed 0.400 inch.
(6) Install spring (10) in valve (8).
(7) Insert assembly into port in housing (7).
(8) Install new preformed packing (11) on face of housing cover (12).
(9) Position housing cover on housing (7), install four bolts (1) and washers (2). Torque
bolts 32 to 36 lb. in. and lockwire.
79-20-04 Page 203/204

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OIL PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT VALVE - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General

Not Applicable
3. Special Tools
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
NOTE: Prior to removal, note position of adjusting washers (2) in relation to collar on valve
(3) (i.e. number of washers above and below collar as seen through cutout in cover
(1)).
A. Removal
(1) Remove cover (1).
(2) Remove valve (3), washers (2) and preformed packing (4).
(3) Remove valve housing (5) and preformed packings (6 and 7) from accessory
gearbox.
B. Installation
(1) Install new preformed packings (6 and 7) on valve housing (5).
(2) Install housing in boss in gearbox. Torque 90 to 100 lb.in.
(3) Install washers (2) on valve (3) in locations noted prior to removal or if oil pressure
adjustment is required, transfer washers to achieve required increase or decrease.
NOTE: Maximum oil pressure is obtained with all four washers above collar.
Each washer transferred below collar will reduce oil pressure between 2
and 3 psi.
(4) Install new preformed packing (4) on valve (3).
79-20-05 Page 201

OIL PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT VALVE - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES Mar 09/2001
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5
C3750A
Oil Pressure Adjustment Valve - Removal/Installation

Figure 201
79-20-05 Page 202

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 201
1. Cover
2. Washers
3. Valve
5. Valve Housing
(5) Install valve in housing (5).
(6) Install cover (1). Torque 65 to 75 lb.in. and lockwire.
79-20-05 Page 203/204

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OIL SCAVENGE AND PRESSURE TUBES- MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General

Not Applicable
3. Special Tools
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
A. Removal of Oil Scavenge and Pressure Tubes from Reduction Gearbox (Ref. Fig. 201)
(1) Remove nuts (18) and bolts (14) securing retaining plate (15) to rear fireseal.
(2) Remove nuts (8 and 11) and bolts (1, 2 and 3) securing brackets (9 and 10) and
clamps. Remove brackets and clamps.
(3) Ease transfer tubes (12 and 13) away from RGB.
(4) Remove retaining plate (15) and plastic rings (16 and 17).
(5) Remove preformed packings (5 and 6) and retainers (4 and 7) from transfer tubes.
Discard preformed packings.
B. Installation of Oil Scavenge and Pressure Tubes from Reduction Gearbox (Ref. Fig. 201)
CAUTION: WHEN THE ENGINE IS NOT INSTALLED ONTO THE AIRFRAME, THE
FIRE WALL SEALS ARE NOT ATTACHED AND WILL FLEX/BEND WHEN TOO
MUCH AXIAL MOVEMENT IS APPLIED TO THE OIL SCAVENGE AND
PRESSURE TUBES. THIS CAN EXPOSE AND PINCH BOTH THE OIL TUBES
PREFORMED PACKING AT THE PRESSURE REGULATING VALVE
HOUSING (AGB SIDE) AND CAN RESULT IN LOSS OF OIL DURING ENGINE
OPERATION.
(1) Install retainers (4 and 7) and new preformed packings (5 and 6) on scavenge tube
assemblies (12 and 13).
79-20-06
Page 201
OIL SCAVENGE AND PRESSURE TUBES- MAINTENANCE PRACTICES Nov 23/2015
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CENTER FIRESEAL
MOUNT RING
REAR FIRESEAL
MOUNT RING
CENTER FIRESEAL
MOUNT RING
5
2 4
1 3
REAR FIRESEAL
MOUNT RING
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
C22760A
Removal/Installation of Oil Scavenge and Pressure Tubes

Figure 201
79-20-06
Page 202
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 201
1. Bolt
2. Bolt
3. Bolt
4. Retainer
7. Retainer
8. Nut
9. Bracket
10. Bracket
11. Nut
12. Transfer Tube (Pressure)
13. Transfer Tube (Scavenge)
14. Bolt
15. Retaining Plate
16. Ring (Pressure)
17. Ring (Scavenge)
18. Nut
(2) Install plastic rings (16 and 17) in retaining plate (15) and install plate assembly
over tube assemblies (12 and 13).
(3) Insert tube assemblies (12 and 13) through rear fireseal mount ring and carefully
ease forward to engage with previously installed tubes at center fireseal.
(4) Secure brackets and clamps (9 and 10) to positioning bracket at flange C with nuts
(8 and 11) and bolts (1, 2 and 3). Torque nuts 36 to 40 lb.in.
(5) Secure retaining plate (15) to rear fireseal with nuts (18) and bolts (14). Torque nuts
36 to 40 lb.in.
(6) Inspect the condition of oil pressure and scavenge tubes at pressure regulating
valve housing (AGB side). Make sure that the preformed packings are not
exposed or pinched.
6. Inspection/Check
A. Inspect Rings
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the tubes to proceed with this inspection.
Removing nuts (18) and bolts (14) will allow retaining plate (15) to slide over
tubes (12 and 13) giving access to plastic rings (16 and 17).
79-20-06
Page 203
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(1) Measure plastic rings (16 and 17, Fig. 201) both inside and outside diameters (Ref.
Table 201).
NOTE: 1. If dimensions are out of tolerance, the plastic ring must be replaced.
NOTE: 2. Out of tolerance plastic rings can cause fretting in the area where tubes
are situated in the retaining plate.
TABLE 201, Plastic Ring Dimensions
Parts Inner Diameter Outer Diameter

Plastic Ring (Pressure) 0.753 - 0.755 inch 0.976 - 0.980 inch
Plastic Ring (Scavenge) 1.020 - 1.022 inch 1.216 - 1.220 inch
B. Inspect Pressure Tube (Ref. Fig. 202)
(1) Inspect smaller diameter tube (12, Fig. 201) for fretting in the area where the
retaining plate was originally positioned.
(2) If fretting is present, measure the depth of the wear (Ref. Detail A).
NOTE: The maximum wear allowed must not be more than 0.020 inches from the
original surface.
(3) If measured or calculated wear is out of tolerance, replace the tube.
C. Inspect Scavenge Tube (Ref. Fig. 202)
(1) Inspect large diameter tube (13, Fig. 201) for fretting in the area where the
retaining plate was originally positioned.
(2) If fretting is present, measure the depth of the wear (Ref. Detail B).
NOTE: The maximum wear allowed must not be more than 0.024 inches from the
original surface.
(3) If measured or calculated wear is out of tolerance, replace the tube.
79-20-06
Page 204
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PRESSURE TUBE AT REAR FIRESEAL

A MOUNT RING LOCATION
0.000
0.020
NOTE: MAXIMUM PREMISSIBLE

WEAR 0.000 − 0.020 IN.
DETAIL A
SCAVENGE TUBE AT REAR FIRESEAL

B MOUNT RING LOCATION
0.000
0.024
NOTE: MAXIMUM PREMISSIBLE
WEAR 0.000 − 0.024 IN.
DETAIL B
C86852A
Scavenge and Pressure Tube Wear
Figure 202
79-20-06
Page 205/206
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
SECTION PAGE DATE
LEP 1 Nov 23/2015
2 blank Nov 23/2015

2 blank Nov 23/2015
79-30-01 201 Nov 23/2015

204 Nov 23/2015
205 Nov 23/2015
206 Nov 23/2015
207 Nov 23/2015
208 Nov 23/2015
209 Nov 23/2015
210 blank Nov 23/2015

Page 1/2
79-30 LEP Nov 23/2015
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
MAGNETIC CHIP DETECTORS - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES 79-30-01
1. General 201

A. RGB Chip Detectors - Removal (Pre-SB5312 or Post-SB5354) 201
B. RGB Chip Detectors - Removal (Post-SB5312) 203

C. RGB Chip Detectors - Installation (Pre-SB5312 or
Post-SB5354) 204
D. RGB Chip Detectors - Installation (Post-SB5312 and

Pre-SB5354) 204
E. AGB Chip Detector - Removal (Pre-SB5312) 205

F. AGB Chip Detector - Removal (Post-SB5312) 205
G. AGB Chip Detector - Installation (Pre-SB5312) 207
H. AGB Chip Detector - Installation (Post-SB5312 and

Pre-SB5354) 207
6. Cleaning 208
A. Chip Detector 208
B. Strainer 208
A. Magnetic Chip Detectors 208
B. Chip Detector Debris Transfer 209

Page 1/2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MAGNETIC CHIP DETECTORS - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General

Item No. Name

PWC07-015 Paint, Epoxy Enamel
PWC12-003 Remover, Paint
3. Special Tools
Tool No. Name

PWC30793 Fitting
PWC38147 Fitting
Not Applicable
A. RGB Chip Detectors - Removal (Pre-SB5312 or Post-SB5354) (Ref. Fig. 201)
NOTE: Removal of chip detector automatically causes detector valve to close,

preventing loss of oil.
(1) Push chip detector (1) while turning 90 degrees counterclockwise. Remove chip
detector from valve housing (3).
(2) Remove preformed packings (2) from chip detector (1).
(3) Examine chip detector (1) for metal. Identify metal if found (Ref. 72-00-00).
(4) If metallic pick-up is found on chip detector, proceed as follows:
(a) Place suitable container under valve housing (3).
79-30-01
Page 201
MAGNETIC CHIP DETECTORS - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES Nov 23/2015
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
13
10
B
11 A A
12
2 8
7
1
DETAIL B
13
10 9
4
11
12
3 5
INCORRECT
SEATING
2 ENSURE STRAINER IS
1 LOCATED ON FLANGES
DETAIL A
(TYPICAL) CORRECT
SEATING
C22136B
Magnetic Chip Detectors - Removal/Installation

Figure 201
79-30-01
Page 202
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 201
1. Chip Detector (Pre-SB5312 or

Post-SB5354)
2. Preformed Packing (Pre-SB5312 or
Post-SB5354)
3. Valve Housing (Pre-SB5312 or
Post-SB5354)
5. Bolt
6. Washer
7. Adapter
9. Strainer
10. Valve Housing (Post-SB5312)
11. Preformed Packing (Post-SB5312)
12. Chip Detector (Post-SB5312)
13. Chip Detector Assembly (Post-SB5312)
(b) Insert fitting (PWC38147) into housing and turn 90 degrees clockwise to open
valve and allow oil to drain.
(c) Remove fitting from housing.
(d) Remove valve housing (3) and preformed packing (4).
(e) Remove bolt (5), washer (6), adapter (7) and preformed packing (8).
(f) Remove strainers (9) from the No. 1 and the No. 2 power section chip detectors.
NOTE: Prior to cleaning components identify category of metallic pick-up on

detector and strainer as detailed in 72-00-00 FAULT ISOLATION (Ref.
CHIP DETECTOR LIGHT COMES ON).
(g) Clean detector and strainer (Ref. Para. 6. following).
B. RGB Chip Detectors - Removal (Post-SB5312) (Ref. Fig. 201)
NOTE: Removal of detector housing automatically causes detector valve to close,

preventing loss of oil.
(1) Cut lockwire and remove chip detector (12) from valve housing (10). Discard
preformed packings (11).
(2) If metallic pick-up is found on chip detector, proceed as follows:
(a) Place suitable container under valve housing (10).
(b) Screw fitting (PWC30793) into housing to open valve and allow oil to drain.
79-30-01
Page 203
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(d) Remove housing (10) and preform packing (4).
(3) Disconnect the torque control tube. Remove four bolts (5), washers (6), adapter
assembly (7), preformed packing (8) and strainers (9). Remove the strainers (9)
from the No. 1 and the No. 2 power section chip detectors.
NOTE: Prior to cleaning components, identify category of metallic pick-up on

detector and strainer as detailed in 72-00-00, FAULT ISOLATION (Ref.
CHIP DETECTOR LIGHT COMES ON).
(4) Clean detector and strainer (Ref. Para. 6., following).
C. RGB Chip Detectors - Installation (Pre-SB5312 or Post-SB5354) (Ref. Fig. 201)
(1) If strainer (9) has been removed install strainer in reduction gearbox with rim outward.
NOTE: Ensure strainer is correctly seated as shown in figure.
(2) Install preformed packing (8), adapter (7) and secure with bolt(s) (5) and washer
(6). Torque bolts 36 to 40 lb.in. and lockwire.
(3) Install preformed packing (4) on valve housing (3).
(4) Install valve housing (3) into adapter (7) or reduction gearbox, as applicable. Torque
housing 175 to 225 lb.in. and lockwire.
(5) Install preformed packing (2) on chip detector (1).
(6) Push chip detector into valve housing (3) and turn 90 degrees clockwise to lock in
position. The chip detector must move back when fully installed, and the scallop on
detector must align with flat on the valve housing.
(7) If oil was drained during removal procedures replenish as necessary.
D. RGB Chip Detectors - Installation (Post-SB5312 and Pre-SB5354) (Ref. Fig. 201)
(1) If strainer (9) has been removed, install strainer in reduction gearbox with rim
outward.
NOTE: Ensure strainer is correctly seated as shown in figure.
(2) Install new preformed packing (8) on adapter (7). Install adapter on reduction
gearbox. Secure with two bolts (5) and washers (6). Connect torque control oil
tube to adapter (7). Torque oil tube connection 65 to 75 lb.in. and bolts (5) 32 to
36 lb.in. Lockwire bolts and connection.
(3) Install new preformed packing (4) on valve housing (3).
(4) Install valve housing into adapter (7) or reduction gearbox, as applicable. Torque
housing 175 to 225 lb.in. and lockwire.
79-30-01
Page 204
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) Install new preformed packings (11) on chip detector (12).
(6) Install chip detector (12) in valve housing (10). Torque 45 to 55 lb.in. and lockwire.
(7) Do a visual inspection of three colored identification stripes painted on the

connector and the housing. If the stripes are not in the correct position, do the steps
that follow:
(a) From the housing, remove the incorrect identification painted stripes with paint
remover (PWC12-003).
(b) Align with the stripes on the connector and paint three equally spaced colored
identification stripes on housing with epoxy enamel paint (PWC07-015) or
suitable red paint.
NOTE: Make sure that the threads of connector have no paint.
(8) If oil was drained during removal procedures replenish as necessary.
E. AGB Chip Detector - Removal (Pre-SB5312) (Ref. Fig. 202)
(1) Push and turn chip detector (1) 90 degrees counterclockwise to remove from valve
housing (3).
NOTE: Removal of chip detector causes detector valve to close preventing loss of
oil.
(2) Remove preformed packings (2).
(3) If complete assembly of detector (1) and valve housing (3) is to be replaced,
proceed as follows:
(a) Place suitable container under valve housing.
(b) Insert fitting (PWC38147) into housing and turn 90 degrees clockwise to open
valve. Allow oil to drain.
(d) Remove housing and preformed packing (4) from boss.
(4) If detector shows evidence of metallic pick-up, identify as detailed in 72-00-00

FAULT ISOLATION (Ref. CHIP DETECTOR LIGHT COMES ON).
F. AGB Chip Detector - Removal (Post-SB5312) (Ref. Fig. 202)
(1) Remove lockwire and chip detector (5) from valve housing (8).
(3) If complete assembly of detector (5) and valve housing (8) is to be replaced
proceed as follows:
79-30-01
Page 205
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A A
8
7
6
5
2
1
DETAIL A
C22137A
Accessory Gearbox Magnetic Chip Detector - Removal/Installation

Figure 202
79-30-01
Page 206
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 202
1. Chip Detector
3. Valve Housing
5. Chip Detector (Post-SB5312)
8. Valve Housing (Post-SB5312)
(a) Place suitable container under valve housing.
(b) Screw fitting (PWC30793) into housing to open valve. Allow oil to drain.
(d) Remove housing and preformed packing (4) from boss.
(4) If detector shows evidence of metallic pick-up, identify as detailed in 72-00-00

FAULT ISOLATION (Ref. CHIP DETECTOR LIGHT COMES ON).
G. AGB Chip Detector - Installation (Pre-SB5312) (Ref. Fig. 202)
(1) If necessary install valve housing as follows:
(a) Install new preformed packing (4) on valve housing (3).
(b) Install valve housing in boss. Torque 175 to 225 lb.in. and lockwire.
(2) Install new preformed packing (2) on chip detector (1).
(3) Push chip detector into valve housing and turn 90 degrees clockwise to lock in
position. The plug must move back when fully installed, and the scallops on plug
must align with flat on valve housing.
(4) If oil was drained during removal procedures, replenish as necessary.
H. AGB Chip Detector - Installation (Post-SB5312 and Pre-SB5354) (Ref. Fig. 202)
(1) If necessary install valve housing as follows:
(a) Install new preformed packing (4) on valve housing (8).
(b) Install valve housing (8) in boss. Torque 175 to 225 lb.in. and lockwire.
(2) Install new preformed packing (6) on chip detector (5).
(3) Install detector in valve housing. Torque 45 to 55 lb.in. and lockwire.
79-30-01
Page 207
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) Do a visual inspection of three colored identification stripes painted on the

connector and the housing. If the stripes are not in the correct position, do the steps
that follow:
(a) From the housing, remove the incorrect identification painted stripes with paint
remover (PWC12-003).
(b) Align with the stripes on the connector and paint three equally spaced colored
identification strips on housing with epoxy enamel paint (PWC07-015) or
suitable red paint.
NOTE: Make sure that the threads of connector have no paint.
(5) If oil was drained during removal procedures, replenish as necessary.
6. Cleaning
A. Chip Detector
(1) Wipe detector using clean lint-free cloth.
B. Strainer
(1) Agitate strainer in clean unused petroleum solvent (PWC11-027) and clean with
soft-bristled brush.
(2) Rinse thoroughly in solvent.
(3) Dry with clean, dry, filtered compressed air or allow to stand in a clean environment
until dry.
(4) Repeat above procedure as necessary using clean unused solvent each time.
7. Inspection/Check
A. Magnetic Chip Detectors
(1) Using suitable ohmmeter, check for electrical circuit continuity when the two poles
are shorted together. Reject component if no continuity.
(2) Check condition of pins and potting compound. Loose pins and/or broken potting
compound are cause for rejection.
(3) Do a check for minimum weight lift capacity of the magnet. The magnet must lift a
steel weight of 6 oz minimum. If the magnet does not lift the minimum weight,
replace the chip detector.
NOTE: Use a steel weight that allows a maximum surface contact of the chip
detector magnet (i.e. flat steel bar or circular weight with holes that
engage the detector magnet).
79-30-01
Page 208
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Chip Detector Debris Transfer
(1) Remove chip detector (Ref. Para. 5.).
(2) Put magnet end in solvent (PWC11-027) or cleaner (PWC11-054) to remove oil.
(3) Transfer debris at magnet end to clear adhesive tape and identify with engine S/N,
and TSN or TSO.
(a) Send debris to qualified laboratory for analysis (Ref. 70-00-00, MAINTENANCE
PRACTICES).
(4) Install chip detector (Ref. Para. 5.).
79-30-01
Page 209/210

3040592MM 2.0-1 Manual de Motor

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

3040592MM 2.0-1 Manual de Motor

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

MAINTENANCE MANUAL

TWINNED TURBOSHAFT ENGINE

Manual Part No. 3040592

WARNING - PROPRIETARY RIGHTS & EXPORT CONTROLS NOTICE

PRATT & WHITNEY CANADA

Export Control Classification

July 19, 2016

REVISION TRANSMITTAL SHEET

SUBJECT: Revision No. 31, dated Jul 18/2016

Please add Revision No. 31 to the Record of Revisions.

Pratt & Whitney Canada Corp.

Attention: Manager, Technical Publications (05MS1)

PT6T-3D/-3DE/-3DF MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PT6T-3D/-3DE/-3DF MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PT6T-3D/-3DE/-3DF MAINTENANCE MANUAL

REV ISSUE DATE REV ISSUE DATE

P&WC Proprietary Information. Subject to the restriction on the title page.

RECORD OF REVISIONS Jun 01/93

RECORD OF TEMPORARY REVISIONS

TR. PAGE ISSUE INSERTED DATE REMOVED

RECORD OF TRs Jun 01/93

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

Record of Revisions Jun 01/93

Record of Temporary Jun 01/93

LEP 1 Jul 18/2016

List of Chapter/ 1 Nov 16/2012

Temporary 1 Jan 26/2015

Service Bulletin 1 Jul 18/2016

P&WC Proprietary Information. Subject to the restriction on the title page.

70-00-00 Standard Practices

71-00 Power Plant

71-00-00 Power Plant

72-10 Reduction Gearbox

72-10-00 Reduction Gearbox

72-20 Air Inlet Section

72-30 Compressor Section

72-30-00 Compressor Section

72-40-00 Combustion Section

72-50 Turbine Section

72-50-00 Turbine Section

P&WC Proprietary Information. Subject to the restriction on the title page.

72-60 Accessory Gearbox

72-60-00 Accessory Gearbox

73-00-00 Engine Fuel and Control

73-10 Engine Fuel and Control

73-10-01 Oil-to-Fuel Heater

73-10-02 Fuel Pump

73-10-03 Fuel Surge Accumulator

73-10-04 Flow Divider and Dump Valve

73-10-05 Fuel Manifold Adapters

73-10-06 Fuel Drain Valves

73-10-07 P3 Air Filter

73-10-08 P3/Pg Pneumatic Tubes

73-20 Fuel Distribution

73-20-02 Automatic Fuel Control Unit (AFCU)

73-20-03 Pg Accumulator/Sealing Cap

73-20-04 Power Turbine (Nf) Governor

73-20-06 Torque Limiter

74-10-00 Ignition Exciter

74-20 Ignition Distribution

P&WC Proprietary Information. Subject to the restriction on the title page.

75-00-00 Air System

77-00 Engine Indicating